1 . $Cambridge: exim/doc/doc-docbook/spec.xfpt,v 1.1 2006/02/01 11:01:02 ph10 Exp $
3 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4 . This is the primary source of the Exim Manual. It is an xfpt document that is
5 . converted into DocBook XML for subsequent conversion into printing and online
6 . formats. The markup used herein is "standard" xfpt markup, with some extras.
7 . The markup is summarized in a file called Markup.txt.
8 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16 . These definitions set some parameters and save some typing. Remember that
17 . the <bookinfo> element must also be updated for each new edition.
18 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20 .set ACL "access control lists (ACLs)"
21 .set previousversion "4.50"
25 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26 . Additional xfpt markup used by this document, over and above the default
27 . provided in the xfpt library.
28 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30 . --- Override the &$ flag to automatically insert a $ with the variable name
32 .flag &$ $& "<varname>$" "</varname>"
34 . --- Short flags for daggers in option headings. They will always be inside
35 . --- an italic string, but we want the daggers to be roman.
37 .flag &!! "</emphasis>†<emphasis>"
38 .flag &!? "</emphasis>‡<emphasis>"
40 . --- A macro for an Exim option definition heading, generating a one-line
41 . --- table with four columns.
45 .itable all 0 0 4 8* left 5* center 5* center 6* right
46 .row "&%$1%&" "Use: &'$2'&" "Type: &'$3'&" "Default: &'$4'&"
50 . --- A macro for the common 2-column tables. The width of the first column
51 . --- is suitable for the many tables at the start of the main options chapter;
52 . --- the small number of other 2-column tables override it.
54 .macro table2 190pt 300pt
55 .itable none 0 0 2 $1 left $2 left
58 . --- Macros for the concept and option index entries
61 &<indexterm role="concept">&
62 &<primary>&$1&</primary>&
64 &<secondary>&$2&</secondary>&
70 &<indexterm role="option">&
71 &<primary>&$1&</primary>&
73 &<secondary>&$2&</secondary>&
79 .echo "** Don't use .index; use .cindex or .oindex"
81 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
84 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
85 . The <bookinfo> element is removed from the XML before processing for Ascii
87 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
91 <title>Specification of the Exim Mail Transfer Agent</title>
92 <titleabbrev>The Exim MTA</titleabbrev>
93 <date>05 January 2006</date>
94 <author><firstname>Philip</firstname><surname>Hazel</surname></author>
95 <authorinitials>PH</authorinitials>
96 <affiliation><orgname>University of Cambridge Computing Service</orgname></affiliation>
97 <address>New Museums Site, Pembroke Street, Cambridge CB2 3QH, England</address>
98 <revhistory><revision>
99 <revnumber>4.60-1</revnumber>
100 <date>30 January 2006</date>
101 <authorinitials>PH</authorinitials>
102 </revision></revhistory>
103 <copyright><year>2006</year><holder>University of Cambridge</holder></copyright>
108 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
109 . This chunk of literal XML implements index entries of the form "x, see y" and
110 . "x, see also y". However, the DocBook DTD doesn't allow <indexterm> entries
111 . at the top level, so we have to put the .chapter directive first.
112 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
114 .chapter "Introduction"
117 <indexterm role="concept">
118 <primary>$1, $2, etc.</primary>
119 <see><emphasis>numerical variables</emphasis></see>
121 <indexterm role="concept">
122 <primary>address</primary>
123 <secondary>rewriting</secondary>
124 <see><emphasis>rewriting</emphasis></see>
126 <indexterm role="concept">
127 <primary>Bounce Address Tag Validation</primary>
128 <see><emphasis>BATV</emphasis></see>
130 <indexterm role="concept">
131 <primary>Client SMTP Authorization</primary>
132 <see><emphasis>CSA</emphasis></see>
134 <indexterm role="concept">
135 <primary>CR character</primary>
136 <see><emphasis>carriage return</emphasis></see>
138 <indexterm role="concept">
139 <primary>CRL</primary>
140 <see><emphasis>certificate revocation list</emphasis></see>
142 <indexterm role="concept">
143 <primary>delivery</primary>
144 <secondary>failure report</secondary>
145 <see><emphasis>bounce message</emphasis></see>
147 <indexterm role="concept">
148 <primary>dialup</primary>
149 <see><emphasis>intermittently connected hosts</emphasis></see>
151 <indexterm role="concept">
152 <primary>exiscan</primary>
153 <see><emphasis>content scanning</emphasis></see>
155 <indexterm role="concept">
156 <primary>failover</primary>
157 <see><emphasis>fallback</emphasis></see>
159 <indexterm role="concept">
160 <primary>fallover</primary>
161 <see><emphasis>fallback</emphasis></see>
163 <indexterm role="concept">
164 <primary>filter</primary>
165 <secondary>Sieve</secondary>
166 <see><emphasis>Sieve filter</emphasis></see>
168 <indexterm role="concept">
169 <primary>ident</primary>
170 <see><emphasis>RFC 1413</emphasis></see>
172 <indexterm role="concept">
173 <primary>LF character</primary>
174 <see><emphasis>linefeed</emphasis></see>
176 <indexterm role="concept">
177 <primary>maximum</primary>
178 <see><emphasis>limit</emphasis></see>
180 <indexterm role="concept">
181 <primary>monitor</primary>
182 <see><emphasis>Exim monitor</emphasis></see>
184 <indexterm role="concept">
185 <primary>no_<emphasis>xxx</emphasis></primary>
186 <see>entry for xxx</see>
188 <indexterm role="concept">
189 <primary>NUL</primary>
190 <see><emphasis>binary zero</emphasis></see>
192 <indexterm role="concept">
193 <primary>passwd file</primary>
194 <see><emphasis>/etc/passwd</emphasis></see>
196 <indexterm role="concept">
197 <primary>process id</primary>
198 <see><emphasis>pid</emphasis></see>
200 <indexterm role="concept">
201 <primary>RBL</primary>
202 <see><emphasis>DNS list</emphasis></see>
204 <indexterm role="concept">
205 <primary>redirection</primary>
206 <see><emphasis>address redirection</emphasis></see>
208 <indexterm role="concept">
209 <primary>return path</primary>
210 <seealso><emphasis>envelope sender</emphasis></seealso>
212 <indexterm role="concept">
213 <primary>scanning</primary>
214 <see><emphasis>content scanning</emphasis></see>
216 <indexterm role="concept">
217 <primary>SSL</primary>
218 <see><emphasis>TLS</emphasis></see>
220 <indexterm role="concept">
221 <primary>string</primary>
222 <secondary>expansion</secondary>
223 <see><emphasis>expansion</emphasis></see>
225 <indexterm role="concept">
226 <primary>top bit</primary>
227 <see><emphasis>8-bit characters</emphasis></see>
229 <indexterm role="concept">
230 <primary>variables</primary>
231 <see><emphasis>expansion, variables</emphasis></see>
233 <indexterm role="concept">
234 <primary>zero, binary</primary>
235 <see><emphasis>binary zero</emphasis></see>
241 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
242 . This is the real start of the first chapter. See the comment above as to why
243 . we can't have the .chapter line here.
244 . chapter "Introduction"
245 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
247 Exim is a mail transfer agent (MTA) for hosts that are running Unix or
248 Unix-like operating systems. It was designed on the assumption that it would be
249 run on hosts that are permanently connected to the Internet. However, it can be
250 used on intermittently connected hosts with suitable configuration adjustments.
252 Configuration files currently exist for the following operating systems: AIX,
253 BSD/OS (aka BSDI), Darwin (Mac OS X), DGUX, Dragonfly, FreeBSD, GNU/Hurd,
254 GNU/Linux, HI-OSF (Hitachi), HI-UX, HP-UX, IRIX, MIPS RISCOS, NetBSD, OpenBSD,
255 OpenUNIX, QNX, SCO, SCO SVR4.2 (aka UNIX-SV), Solaris (aka SunOS5), SunOS4,
256 Tru64-Unix (formerly Digital UNIX, formerly DEC-OSF1), Ultrix, and Unixware.
257 Some of these operating systems are no longer current and cannot easily be
258 tested, so the configuration files may no longer work in practice.
260 There are also configuration files for compiling Exim in the Cygwin environment
261 that can be installed on systems running Windows. However, this document does
262 not contain any information about running Exim in the Cygwin environment.
264 The terms and conditions for the use and distribution of Exim are contained in
265 the file &_NOTICE_&. Exim is distributed under the terms of the GNU General
266 Public Licence, a copy of which may be found in the file &_LICENCE_&.
268 The use, supply or promotion of Exim for the purpose of sending bulk,
269 unsolicited electronic mail is incompatible with the basic aims of the program,
270 which revolve around the free provision of a service that enhances the quality
271 of personal communications. The author of Exim regards indiscriminate
272 mass-mailing as an antisocial, irresponsible abuse of the Internet.
274 Exim owes a great deal to Smail 3 and its author, Ron Karr. Without the
275 experience of running and working on the Smail 3 code, I could never have
276 contemplated starting to write a new MTA. Many of the ideas and user interfaces
277 were originally taken from Smail 3, though the actual code of Exim is entirely
278 new, and has developed far beyond the initial concept.
280 Many people, both in Cambridge and around the world, have contributed to the
281 development and the testing of Exim, and to porting it to various operating
282 systems. I am grateful to them all. The distribution now contains a file called
283 &_ACKNOWLEDGMENTS_&, in which I have started recording the names of
287 .section "Exim documentation"
289 .cindex "documentation"
290 This edition of the Exim specification applies to version &version; of Exim.
291 Substantive changes from the &previousversion; edition are marked in some
292 renditions of the document; this paragraph is so marked if the rendition is
293 capable of showing a change indicator.
296 This document is very much a reference manual; it is not a tutorial. The reader
297 is expected to have some familiarity with the SMTP mail transfer protocol and
298 with general Unix system administration. Although there are some discussions
299 and examples in places, the information is mostly organized in a way that makes
300 it easy to look up, rather than in a natural order for sequential reading.
301 Furthermore, the manual aims to cover every aspect of Exim in detail, including
302 a number of rarely-used, special-purpose features that are unlikely to be of
305 .cindex "books about Exim"
306 An &"easier"& discussion of Exim which provides more in-depth explanatory,
307 introductory, and tutorial material can be found in a book entitled &'The Exim
308 SMTP Mail Server'&, published by UIT Cambridge
309 (&url(http://www.uit.co.uk/exim-book/)).
311 This book also contains a chapter that gives a general introduction to SMTP and
312 Internet mail. Inevitably, however, the book is unlikely to be fully up-to-date
313 with the latest release of Exim. (Note that the earlier book about Exim,
314 published by O'Reilly, covers Exim 3, and many things have changed in Exim 4.)
317 .cindex "Debian" "information sources"
318 If you are using a Debian distribution of Exim, you will find information about
319 Debian-specific features in the file
321 &_/usr/share/doc/exim4-base/README.Debian_&
323 The command &(man update-exim.conf)& is another source of Debian-specific
327 .cindex "&_doc/NewStuff_&"
328 .cindex "&_doc/ChangeLog_&"
330 As the program develops, there may be features in newer versions that have not
331 yet made it into this document, which is updated only when the most significant
332 digit of the fractional part of the version number changes. Specifications of
333 new features that are not yet in this manual are placed in the file
334 &_doc/NewStuff_& in the Exim distribution.
336 Some features may be classified as &"experimental"&. These may change
337 incompatibly while they are developing, or even be withdrawn. For this reason,
338 they are not documented in this manual. Information about experimental features
339 can be found in the file &_doc/experimental.txt_&.
341 All changes to the program (whether new features, bug fixes, or other kinds of
342 change) are noted briefly in the file called &_doc/ChangeLog_&.
344 .cindex "&_doc/spec.txt_&"
345 This specification itself is available as an ASCII file in &_doc/spec.txt_& so
346 that it can easily be searched with a text editor. Other files in the &_doc_&
350 .row &_OptionLists.txt_& "list of all options in alphabetical order"
351 .row &_dbm.discuss.txt_& "discussion about DBM libraries"
352 .row &_exim.8_& "a man page of Exim's command line options"
353 .row &_experimental.txt_& "documentation of experimental features"
354 .row &_filter.txt_& "specification of the filter language"
355 .row &_pcrepattern.txt_& "specification of PCRE regular expressions"
356 .row &_pcretest.txt_& "specification of the PCRE testing program"
357 .row &_Exim3.upgrade_& "upgrade notes from release 2 to release 3"
358 .row &_Exim4.upgrade_& "upgrade notes from release 3 to release 4"
361 The main specification and the specification of the filtering language are also
362 available in other formats (HTML, PostScript, PDF, and Texinfo). Section
363 &<<SECTavail>>& below tells you how to get hold of these.
367 .section "FTP and web sites"
370 The primary site for Exim source distributions is currently the University of
371 Cambridge's FTP site, whose contents are described in &'Where to find the Exim
372 distribution'& below. In addition, there is a web site and an FTP site at
373 &%exim.org%&. These are now also hosted at the University of Cambridge. The
374 &%exim.org%& site was previously hosted for a number of years by Energis
375 Squared, formerly Planet Online Ltd, whose support I gratefully acknowledge.
379 As well as Exim distribution tar files, the Exim web site contains a number of
380 differently formatted versions of the documentation, including the FAQ in both
381 text and HTML formats. The HTML version comes with a keyword-in-context index.
382 A recent addition to the online information is the Exim wiki
383 (&url(http://www.exim.org/eximwiki/)). We hope that this will make it easier
384 for Exim users to contribute examples, tips, and know-how for the benefit of
389 .section "Mailing lists"
390 .cindex "mailing lists" "for Exim users"
391 The following are the three main Exim mailing lists:
394 .row &'exim-users@exim.org'& "general discussion list"
395 .row &'exim-dev@exim.org'& "discussion of bugs, enhancements, etc."
396 .row &'exim-announce@exim.org'& "moderated, low volume announcements list"
399 You can subscribe to these lists, change your existing subscriptions, and view
400 or search the archives via the mailing lists link on the Exim home page.
401 .cindex "Debian" "mailing list for"
402 &new("If you are using a Debian distribution of Exim, you may wish to subscribe
403 to the Debian-specific mailing list
404 &'pkg-exim4-users@lists.alioth.debian.org'&.")
407 .section "Exim training"
408 .cindex "training courses"
409 From time to time (approximately annually at the time of writing), training
410 courses are run by the author of Exim in Cambridge, UK. Details of any
411 forthcoming courses can be found on the web site
412 &url(http://www-tus.csx.cam.ac.uk/courses/exim/).
415 .section "Bug reports"
416 .cindex "bug reports"
417 .cindex "reporting bugs"
418 Reports of obvious bugs should be emailed to &'bugs@exim.org'&. However, if you
419 are unsure whether some behaviour is a bug or not, the best thing to do is to
420 post a message to the &'exim-dev'& mailing list and have it discussed.
424 .section "Where to find the Exim distribution" "SECTavail"
426 .cindex "distribution" "ftp site"
427 The master ftp site for the Exim distribution is
429 &*ftp://ftp.csx.cam.ac.uk/pub/software/email/exim*&
433 &*ftp://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim*&
435 The file references that follow are relative to the &_exim_& directories at
436 these sites. There are now quite a number of independent mirror sites around
437 the world. Those that I know about are listed in the file called &_Mirrors_&.
439 Within the &_exim_& directory there are subdirectories called &_exim3_& (for
440 previous Exim 3 distributions), &_exim4_& (for the latest Exim 4
441 distributions), and &_Testing_& for testing versions. In the &_exim4_&
442 subdirectory, the current release can always be found in files called
445 &_exim-n.nn.tar.bz2_&
447 where &'n.nn'& is the highest such version number in the directory. The two
448 files contain identical data; the only difference is the type of compression.
449 The &_.bz2_& file is usually a lot smaller than the &_.gz_& file.
451 .cindex "distribution" "signing details"
452 .cindex "distribution" "public key"
453 .cindex "public key for signed distribution"
454 The distributions are currently signed with Philip Hazel's GPG key. The
455 corresponding public key is available from a number of keyservers, and there is
456 also a copy in the file &_Public-Key_&. The signatures for the tar bundles are
459 &_exim-n.nn.tar.gz.sig_&
460 &_exim-n.nn.tar.bz2.sig_&
462 For each released version, the log of changes is made separately available in a
463 separate file in the directory &_ChangeLogs_& so that it is possible to
464 find out what has changed without having to download the entire distribution.
466 .cindex "documentation" "available formats"
467 The main distribution contains ASCII versions of this specification and other
468 documentation; other formats of the documents are available in separate files
469 inside the &_exim4_& directory of the FTP site:
471 &_exim-html-n.nn.tar.gz_&
472 &_exim-pdf-n.nn.tar.gz_&
473 &_exim-postscript-n.nn.tar.gz_&
474 &_exim-texinfo-n.nn.tar.gz_&
476 These tar files contain only the &_doc_& directory, not the complete
477 distribution, and are also available in &_.bz2_& as well as &_.gz_& forms.
479 The FAQ is available for downloading in two different formats in these files:
482 &_exim4/FAQ.html.tar.gz_&
484 The first of these is a single ASCII file that can be searched with a text
485 editor. The second is a directory of HTML files, normally accessed by starting
486 at &_index.html_&. The HTML version of the FAQ (which is also included in the
487 HTML documentation tarbundle) includes a keyword-in-context index, which is
488 often the most convenient way of finding your way around.
493 A wish list is maintained, containing ideas for new features that have been
494 submitted. From time to time the file is exported to the ftp site into the file
495 &_exim4/WishList_&. Items are removed from the list if they get implemented.
499 .section "Contributed material"
500 .cindex "contributed material"
501 At the ftp site, there is a directory called &_Contrib_& that contains
502 miscellaneous files contributed to the Exim community by Exim users. There is
503 also a collection of contributed configuration examples in
504 &_exim4/config.samples.tar.gz_&. These samples are referenced from the FAQ.
508 .section "Limitations"
510 .cindex "limitations of Exim"
511 .cindex "bang paths" "not handled by Exim"
512 Exim is designed for use as an Internet MTA, and therefore handles addresses in
513 RFC 2822 domain format only. It cannot handle UUCP &"bang paths"&, though
514 simple two-component bang paths can be converted by a straightforward rewriting
515 configuration. This restriction does not prevent Exim from being interfaced to
516 UUCP as a transport mechanism, provided that domain addresses are used.
518 .cindex "domainless addresses"
519 .cindex "address" "without domain"
520 Exim insists that every address it handles has a domain attached. For incoming
521 local messages, domainless addresses are automatically qualified with a
522 configured domain value. Configuration options specify from which remote
523 systems unqualified addresses are acceptable. These are then qualified on
526 .cindex "transport" "external"
527 .cindex "external transports"
528 The only external transport mechanisms that are currently implemented are SMTP
529 and LMTP over a TCP/IP network (including support for IPv6). However, a pipe
530 transport is available, and there are facilities for writing messages to files
531 and pipes, optionally in &'batched SMTP'& format; these facilities can be used
532 to send messages to other transport mechanisms such as UUCP, provided they can
533 handle domain-style addresses. Batched SMTP input is also catered for.
535 Exim is not designed for storing mail for dial-in hosts. When the volumes of
536 such mail are large, it is better to get the messages &"delivered"& into files
537 (that is, off Exim's queue) and subsequently passed on to the dial-in hosts by
540 Although Exim does have basic facilities for scanning incoming messages, these
541 are not comprehensive enough to do full virus or spam scanning. Such operations
542 are best carried out using additional specialized software packages. If you
543 compile Exim with the content-scanning extension, straightforward interfaces to
544 a number of common scanners are provided.
548 .section "Run time configuration"
549 Exim's run time configuration is held in a single text file that is divided
550 into a number of sections. The entries in this file consist of keywords and
551 values, in the style of Smail 3 configuration files. A default configuration
552 file which is suitable for simple online installations is provided in the
553 distribution, and is described in chapter &<<CHAPdefconfil>>& below.
556 .section "Calling interface"
557 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "command line interface"
558 Like many MTAs, Exim has adopted the Sendmail command line interface so that it
559 can be a straight replacement for &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& or
560 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& when sending mail, but you do not need to know anything
561 about Sendmail in order to run Exim. For actions other than sending messages,
562 Sendmail-compatible options also exist, but those that produce output (for
563 example, &%-bp%&, which lists the messages on the queue) do so in Exim's own
564 format. There are also some additional options that are compatible with Smail
565 3, and some further options that are new to Exim. Chapter &<<CHAPcommandline>>&
566 documents all Exim's command line options. This information is automatically
567 made into the man page that forms part of the Exim distribution.
569 Control of messages on the queue can be done via certain privileged command
570 line options. There is also an optional monitor program called &'eximon'&,
571 which displays current information in an X window, and which contains a menu
572 interface to Exim's command line administration options.
576 .section "Terminology"
577 .cindex "terminology definitions"
578 .cindex "body of message" "definition of"
579 The &'body'& of a message is the actual data that the sender wants to transmit.
580 It is the last part of a message, and is separated from the &'header'& (see
581 below) by a blank line.
583 .cindex "bounce message" "definition of"
584 When a message cannot be delivered, it is normally returned to the sender in a
585 delivery failure message or a &"non-delivery report"& (NDR). The term
586 &'bounce'& is commonly used for this action, and the error reports are often
587 called &'bounce messages'&. This is a convenient shorthand for &"delivery
588 failure error report"&. Such messages have an empty sender address in the
589 message's &'envelope'& (see below) to ensure that they cannot themselves give
590 rise to further bounce messages.
592 The term &'default'& appears frequently in this manual. It is used to qualify a
593 value which is used in the absence of any setting in the configuration. It may
594 also qualify an action which is taken unless a configuration setting specifies
597 The term &'defer'& is used when the delivery of a message to a specific
598 destination cannot immediately take place for some reason (a remote host may be
599 down, or a user's local mailbox may be full). Such deliveries are &'deferred'&
602 The word &'domain'& is sometimes used to mean all but the first component of a
603 host's name. It is &'not'& used in that sense here, where it normally refers to
604 the part of an email address following the @ sign.
606 .cindex "envelope" "definition of"
607 .cindex "sender" "definition of"
608 A message in transit has an associated &'envelope'&, as well as a header and a
609 body. The envelope contains a sender address (to which bounce messages should
610 be delivered), and any number of recipient addresses. References to the
611 sender or the recipients of a message usually mean the addresses in the
612 envelope. An MTA uses these addresses for delivery, and for returning bounce
613 messages, not the addresses that appear in the header lines.
615 .cindex "message header" "definition of"
616 .cindex "header section" "definition of"
617 The &'header'& of a message is the first part of a message's text, consisting
618 of a number of lines, each of which has a name such as &'From:'&, &'To:'&,
619 &'Subject:'&, etc. Long header lines can be split over several text lines by
620 indenting the continuations. The header is separated from the body by a blank
623 .cindex "local part" "definition of"
624 .cindex "domain" "definition of"
625 The term &'local part'&, which is taken from RFC 2822, is used to refer to that
626 part of an email address that precedes the @ sign. The part that follows the
627 @ sign is called the &'domain'& or &'mail domain'&.
629 .cindex "local delivery" "definition of"
630 .cindex "remote delivery" "definition of"
631 The terms &'local delivery'& and &'remote delivery'& are used to distinguish
632 delivery to a file or a pipe on the local host from delivery by SMTP over
633 TCP/IP to another host. As far as Exim is concerned, all hosts other than the
634 host it is running on are &'remote'&.
636 .cindex "return path" "definition of"
637 &'Return path'& is another name that is used for the sender address in a
640 .cindex "queue" "definition of"
641 The term &'queue'& is used to refer to the set of messages awaiting delivery,
642 because this term is in widespread use in the context of MTAs. However, in
643 Exim's case the reality is more like a pool than a queue, because there is
644 normally no ordering of waiting messages.
646 .cindex "queue runner" "definition of"
647 The term &'queue runner'& is used to describe a process that scans the queue
648 and attempts to deliver those messages whose retry times have come. This term
649 is used by other MTAs, and also relates to the command &%runq%&, but in Exim
650 the waiting messages are normally processed in an unpredictable order.
652 .cindex "spool directory" "definition of"
653 The term &'spool directory'& is used for a directory in which Exim keeps the
654 messages on its queue &-- that is, those that it is in the process of
655 delivering. This should not be confused with the directory in which local
656 mailboxes are stored, which is called a &"spool directory"& by some people. In
657 the Exim documentation, &"spool"& is always used in the first sense.
664 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
665 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
667 .chapter "Incorporated code"
668 .cindex "incorporated code"
669 .cindex "regular expressions" "library"
671 A number of pieces of external code are included in the Exim distribution.
674 Regular expressions are supported in the main Exim program and in the Exim
675 monitor using the freely-distributable PCRE library, copyright ©
676 University of Cambridge. The source is distributed in the directory
677 &_src/pcre_&. However, this is a cut-down version of PCRE. If you want to use
678 the PCRE library in other programs, you should obtain and install the full
679 version from &*ftp://ftp.csx.cam.ac.uk/pub/software/programming/pcre*&.
681 .cindex "cdb" "acknowledgement"
682 Support for the cdb (Constant DataBase) lookup method is provided by code
683 contributed by Nigel Metheringham of (at the time he contributed it) Planet
684 Online Ltd. The implementation is completely contained within the code of Exim.
685 It does not link against an external cdb library. The code contains the
686 following statements:
689 Copyright © 1998 Nigel Metheringham, Planet Online Ltd
691 This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
692 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
693 Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
696 This code implements Dan Bernstein's Constant DataBase (cdb) spec. Information,
697 the spec and sample code for cdb can be obtained from
698 &url(http://www.pobox.com/~djb/cdb.html). This implementation borrows some
699 code from Dan Bernstein's implementation (which has no license restrictions
703 .cindex "SPA authentication"
704 .cindex "Samba project"
705 .cindex "Microsoft Secure Password Authentication"
706 Client support for Microsoft's &'Secure Password Authentication'& is provided
707 by code contributed by Marc Prud'hommeaux. Server support was contributed by
708 Tom Kistner. This includes code taken from the Samba project, which is released
712 .cindex "&'pwcheck'& daemon"
713 .cindex "&'pwauthd'& daemon"
714 Support for calling the Cyrus &'pwcheck'& and &'saslauthd'& daemons is provided
715 by code taken from the Cyrus-SASL library and adapted by Alexander S.
716 Sabourenkov. The permission notice appears below, in accordance with the
717 conditions expressed therein.
720 Copyright © 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
722 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
723 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
727 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
728 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
730 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
731 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
732 the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
735 The name &"Carnegie Mellon University"& must not be used to
736 endorse or promote products derived from this software without
737 prior written permission. For permission or any other legal
738 details, please contact
740 Office of Technology Transfer
741 Carnegie Mellon University
743 Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890
744 (412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
745 tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu
748 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
751 &"This product includes software developed by Computing Services
752 at Carnegie Mellon University (&url(http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."&
754 CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO
755 THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
756 AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE
757 FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
758 WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN
759 AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
760 OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
765 .cindex "Exim monitor" "acknowledgement"
768 The Exim Monitor program, which is an X-Window application, includes
769 modified versions of the Athena StripChart and TextPop widgets.
770 This code is copyright by DEC and MIT, and their permission notice appears
771 below, in accordance with the conditions expressed therein.
774 Copyright 1987, 1988 by Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts,
775 and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
779 Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
780 documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
781 provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
782 both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
783 supporting documentation, and that the names of Digital or MIT not be
784 used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
785 software without specific, written prior permission.
787 DIGITAL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
788 ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
789 DIGITAL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
790 ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
791 WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
792 ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
797 Many people have contributed code fragments, some large, some small, that were
798 not covered by any specific licence requirements. It is assumed that the
799 contributors are happy to see their code incoporated into Exim under the GPL.
806 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
807 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
809 .chapter "How Exim receives and delivers mail" "" &&&
810 "Receiving and delivering mail"
813 .section "Overall philosophy"
814 .cindex "design philosophy"
815 Exim is designed to work efficiently on systems that are permanently connected
816 to the Internet and are handling a general mix of mail. In such circumstances,
817 most messages can be delivered immediately. Consequently, Exim does not
818 maintain independent queues of messages for specific domains or hosts, though
819 it does try to send several messages in a single SMTP connection after a host
820 has been down, and it also maintains per-host retry information.
823 .section "Policy control"
824 .cindex "policy control" "overview"
825 Policy controls are now an important feature of MTAs that are connected to the
826 Internet. Perhaps their most important job is to stop MTAs being abused as
827 &"open relays"& by misguided individuals who send out vast amounts of
828 unsolicited junk, and want to disguise its source. Exim provides flexible
829 facilities for specifying policy controls on incoming mail:
832 .cindex "&ACL;" "introduction"
833 Exim 4 (unlike previous versions of Exim) implements policy controls on
834 incoming mail by means of &'Access Control Lists'& (ACLs). Each list is a
835 series of statements that may either grant or deny access. ACLs can be used at
836 several places in the SMTP dialogue while receiving a message from a remote
837 host. However, the most common places are after each RCPT command, and at the
838 very end of the message. The sysadmin can specify conditions for accepting or
839 rejecting individual recipients or the entire message, respectively, at these
840 two points (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&). Denial of access results in an SMTP
843 An ACL is also available for locally generated, non-SMTP messages. In this
844 case, the only available actions are to accept or deny the entire message.
846 When Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension, facilities are
847 provided in the ACL mechanism for passing the message to external virus and/or
848 spam scanning software. The result of such a scan is passed back to the ACL,
849 which can then use it to decide what to do with the message.
851 When a message has been received, either from a remote host or from the local
852 host, but before the final acknowledgement has been sent, a locally supplied C
853 function called &[local_scan()]& can be run to inspect the message and decide
854 whether to accept it or not (see chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&). If the message
855 is accepted, the list of recipients can be modified by the function.
857 Using the &[local_scan()]& mechanism is another way of calling external scanner
858 software. The &%SA-Exim%& add-on package works this way. It does not require
859 Exim to be compiled with the content-scanning extension.
861 After a message has been accepted, a further checking mechanism is available in
862 the form of the &'system filter'& (see chapter &<<CHAPsystemfilter>>&). This
863 runs at the start of every delivery process.
868 .section "User filters"
869 .cindex "filter" "introduction"
870 .cindex "Sieve filter"
871 In a conventional Exim configuration, users are able to run private filters by
872 setting up appropriate &_.forward_& files in their home directories. See
873 chapter &<<CHAPredirect>>& (about the &(redirect)& router) for the
874 configuration needed to support this, and the separate document entitled
875 &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'& for user details. Two different kinds
876 of filtering are available:
879 Sieve filters are written in the standard filtering language that is defined
882 Exim filters are written in a syntax that is unique to Exim, but which is more
883 powerful than Sieve, which it pre-dates.
886 User filters are run as part of the routing process, described below.
890 .section "Message identification" "SECTmessiden"
891 .cindex "message ids" "details of format"
892 .cindex "format" "of message id"
893 .cindex "id of message"
898 Every message handled by Exim is given a &'message id'& which is sixteen
899 characters long. It is divided into three parts, separated by hyphens, for
900 example &`16VDhn-0001bo-D3`&. Each part is a sequence of letters and digits,
901 normally encoding numbers in base 62. However, in the Darwin operating
902 system (Mac OS X) and when Exim is compiled to run under Cygwin, base 36
903 (avoiding the use of lower case letters) is used instead, because the message
904 id is used to construct file names, and the names of files in those systems are
905 not always case-sensitive.
907 .cindex "pid (process id)" "re-use of"
908 The detail of the contents of the message id have changed as Exim has evolved.
909 Earlier versions relied on the operating system not re-using a process id (pid)
910 within one second. On modern operating systems, this assumption can no longer
911 be made, so the algorithm had to be changed. To retain backward compatibility,
912 the format of the message id was retained, which is why the following rules are
916 The first six characters of the message id are the time at which the message
917 started to be received, to a granularity of one second. That is, this field
918 contains the number of seconds since the start of the epoch (the normal Unix
919 way of representing the date and time of day).
921 After the first hyphen, the next six characters are the id of the process that
922 received the message.
924 There are two different possibilities for the final two characters:
926 .cindex "&%localhost_number%&"
927 If &%localhost_number%& is not set, this value is the fractional part of the
928 time of reception, normally in units of 1/2000 of a second, but for systems
929 that must use base 36 instead of base 62 (because of case-insensitive file
930 systems), the units are 1/1000 of a second.
932 If &%localhost_number%& is set, it is multiplied by 200 (100) and added to
933 the fractional part of the time, which in this case is in units of 1/200
938 After a message has been received, Exim waits for the clock to tick at the
939 appropriate resolution before proceeding, so that if another message is
940 received by the same process, or by another process with the same (re-used)
941 pid, it is guaranteed that the time will be different. In most cases, the clock
942 will already have ticked while the message was being received.
945 .section "Receiving mail"
946 .cindex "receiving mail"
947 .cindex "message" "reception"
948 The only way Exim can receive mail from another host is using SMTP over
949 TCP/IP, in which case the sender and recipient addresses are transferred using
950 SMTP commands. However, from a locally running process (such as a user's MUA),
951 there are several possibilities:
954 If the process runs Exim with the &%-bm%& option, the message is read
955 non-interactively (usually via a pipe), with the recipients taken from the
956 command line, or from the body of the message if &%-t%& is also used.
958 If the process runs Exim with the &%-bS%& option, the message is also read
959 non-interactively, but in this case the recipients are listed at the start of
960 the message in a series of SMTP RCPT commands, terminated by a DATA
961 command. This is so-called &"batch SMTP"& format,
962 but it isn't really SMTP. The SMTP commands are just another way of passing
963 envelope addresses in a non-interactive submission.
965 If the process runs Exim with the &%-bs%& option, the message is read
966 interactively, using the SMTP protocol. A two-way pipe is normally used for
967 passing data between the local process and the Exim process.
968 This is &"real"& SMTP and is handled in the same way as SMTP over TCP/IP. For
969 example, the ACLs for SMTP commands are used for this form of submission.
971 A local process may also make a TCP/IP call to the host's loopback address
972 (127.0.0.1) or any other of its IP addresses. When receiving messages, Exim
973 does not treat the loopback address specially. It treats all such connections
974 in the same way as connections from other hosts.
978 .cindex "message sender" "constructed by Exim"
979 .cindex "sender" "constructed by Exim"
980 In the three cases that do not involve TCP/IP, the sender address is
981 constructed from the login name of the user that called Exim and a default
982 qualification domain (which can be set by the &%qualify_domain%& configuration
983 option). For local or batch SMTP, a sender address that is passed using the
984 SMTP MAIL command is ignored. However, the system administrator may allow
985 certain users (&"trusted users"&) to specify a different sender address
986 unconditionally, or all users to specify certain forms of different sender
987 address. The &%-f%& option or the SMTP MAIL command is used to specify these
988 different addresses. See section &<<SECTtrustedadmin>>& for details of trusted
989 users, and the &%untrusted_set_sender%& option for a way of allowing untrusted
990 users to change sender addresses.
992 Messages received by either of the non-interactive mechanisms are subject to
993 checking by the non-SMTP ACL, if one is defined. Messages received using SMTP
994 (either over TCP/IP, or interacting with a local process) can be checked by a
995 number of ACLs that operate at different times during the SMTP session. Either
996 individual recipients, or the entire message, can be rejected if local policy
997 requirements are not met. The &[local_scan()]& function (see chapter
998 &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&) is run for all incoming messages.
1000 Exim can be configured not to start a delivery process when a message is
1001 received; this can be unconditional, or depend on the number of incoming SMTP
1002 connections or the system load. In these situations, new messages wait on the
1003 queue until a queue runner process picks them up. However, in standard
1004 configurations under normal conditions, delivery is started as soon as a
1005 message is received.
1011 .section "Handling an incoming message"
1012 .cindex "spool directory" "files that hold a message"
1013 .cindex "file" "how a message is held"
1014 When Exim accepts a message, it writes two files in its spool directory. The
1015 first contains the envelope information, the current status of the message, and
1016 the header lines, and the second contains the body of the message. The names of
1017 the two spool files consist of the message id, followed by &`-H`& for the
1018 file containing the envelope and header, and &`-D`& for the data file.
1020 .cindex "spool directory" "&_input_& sub-directory"
1021 By default all these message files are held in a single directory called
1022 &_input_& inside the general Exim spool directory. Some operating systems do
1023 not perform very well if the number of files in a directory gets very large; to
1024 improve performance in such cases, the &%split_spool_directory%& option can be
1025 used. This causes Exim to split up the input files into 62 sub-directories
1026 whose names are single letters or digits.
1028 The envelope information consists of the address of the message's sender and
1029 the addresses of the recipients. This information is entirely separate from
1030 any addresses contained in the header lines. The status of the message includes
1031 a list of recipients who have already received the message. The format of the
1032 first spool file is described in chapter &<<CHAPspool>>&.
1034 .cindex "rewriting" "addresses"
1035 Address rewriting that is specified in the rewrite section of the configuration
1036 (see chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&) is done once and for all on incoming addresses,
1037 both in the header lines and the envelope, at the time the message is accepted.
1038 If during the course of delivery additional addresses are generated (for
1039 example, via aliasing), these new addresses are rewritten as soon as they are
1040 generated. At the time a message is actually delivered (transported) further
1041 rewriting can take place; because this is a transport option, it can be
1042 different for different forms of delivery. It is also possible to specify the
1043 addition or removal of certain header lines at the time the message is
1044 delivered (see chapters &<<CHAProutergeneric>>& and
1045 &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&).
1049 .section "Life of a message"
1050 .cindex "message" "life of"
1051 .cindex "message" "frozen"
1052 A message remains in the spool directory until it is completely delivered to
1053 its recipients or to an error address, or until it is deleted by an
1054 administrator or by the user who originally created it. In cases when delivery
1055 cannot proceed &-- for example, when a message can neither be delivered to its
1056 recipients nor returned to its sender, the message is marked &"frozen"& on the
1057 spool, and no more deliveries are attempted.
1059 .cindex "frozen messages" "thawing"
1060 .cindex "message" "thawing frozen"
1061 An administrator can &"thaw"& such messages when the problem has been
1062 corrected, and can also freeze individual messages by hand if necessary. In
1063 addition, an administrator can force a delivery error, causing a bounce message
1067 .cindex "&%timeout_frozen_after%&"
1068 .cindex "&%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&"
1069 There are options called &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%& and
1070 &%timeout_frozen_after%&, which discard frozen messages after a certain time.
1071 The first applies only to frozen bounces, the second to any frozen messages.
1074 .cindex "message" "log file for"
1075 .cindex "log" "file for each message"
1076 While Exim is working on a message, it writes information about each delivery
1077 attempt to its main log file. This includes successful, unsuccessful, and
1078 delayed deliveries for each recipient (see chapter &<<CHAPlog>>&). The log
1079 lines are also written to a separate &'message log'& file for each message.
1080 These logs are solely for the benefit of the administrator, and are normally
1081 deleted along with the spool files when processing of a message is complete.
1082 The use of individual message logs can be disabled by setting
1083 &%no_message_logs%&; this might give an improvement in performance on very busy
1086 .cindex "journal file"
1087 .cindex "file" "journal"
1088 All the information Exim itself needs to set up a delivery is kept in the first
1089 spool file, along with the header lines. When a successful delivery occurs, the
1090 address is immediately written at the end of a journal file, whose name is the
1091 message id followed by &`-J`&. At the end of a delivery run, if there are some
1092 addresses left to be tried again later, the first spool file (the &`-H`& file)
1093 is updated to indicate which these are, and the journal file is then deleted.
1094 Updating the spool file is done by writing a new file and renaming it, to
1095 minimize the possibility of data loss.
1097 Should the system or the program crash after a successful delivery but before
1098 the spool file has been updated, the journal is left lying around. The next
1099 time Exim attempts to deliver the message, it reads the journal file and
1100 updates the spool file before proceeding. This minimizes the chances of double
1101 deliveries caused by crashes.
1105 .section "Processing an address for delivery" "SECTprocaddress"
1106 .cindex "drivers" "definition of"
1107 .cindex "router" "definition of"
1108 .cindex "transport" "definition of"
1109 The main delivery processing elements of Exim are called &'routers'& and
1110 &'transports'&, and collectively these are known as &'drivers'&. Code for a
1111 number of them is provided in the source distribution, and compile-time options
1112 specify which ones are included in the binary. Run time options specify which
1113 ones are actually used for delivering messages.
1115 .cindex "drivers" "instance definition"
1116 Each driver that is specified in the run time configuration is an &'instance'&
1117 of that particular driver type. Multiple instances are allowed; for example,
1118 you can set up several different &(smtp)& transports, each with different
1119 option values that might specify different ports or different timeouts. Each
1120 instance has its own identifying name. In what follows we will normally use the
1121 instance name when discussing one particular instance (that is, one specific
1122 configuration of the driver), and the generic driver name when discussing
1123 the driver's features in general.
1125 A &'router'& is a driver that operates on an address, either determining how
1126 its delivery should happen, by assigning it to a specific transport, or
1127 converting the address into one or more new addresses (for example, via an
1128 alias file). A router may also explicitly choose to fail an address, causing it
1131 A &'transport'& is a driver that transmits a copy of the message from Exim's
1132 spool to some destination. There are two kinds of transport: for a &'local'&
1133 transport, the destination is a file or a pipe on the local host, whereas for a
1134 &'remote'& transport the destination is some other host. A message is passed
1135 to a specific transport as a result of successful routing. If a message has
1136 several recipients, it may be passed to a number of different transports.
1138 .cindex "preconditions" "definition of"
1139 An address is processed by passing it to each configured router instance in
1140 turn, subject to certain preconditions, until a router accepts the address or
1141 specifies that it should be bounced. We will describe this process in more
1142 detail shortly. First, as a simple example, we consider how each recipient
1143 address in a message is processed in a small configuration of three routers.
1145 To make this a more concrete example, it is described in terms of some actual
1146 routers, but remember, this is only an example. You can configure Exim's
1147 routers in many different ways, and there may be any number of routers in a
1150 The first router that is specified in a configuration is often one that handles
1151 addresses in domains that are not recognized specially by the local host. These
1152 are typically addresses for arbitrary domains on the Internet. A precondition
1153 is set up which looks for the special domains known to the host (for example,
1154 its own domain name), and the router is run for addresses that do &'not'&
1155 match. Typically, this is a router that looks up domains in the DNS in order to
1156 find the hosts to which this address routes. If it succeeds, the address is
1157 assigned to a suitable SMTP transport; if it does not succeed, the router is
1158 configured to fail the address.
1160 The second router is reached only when the domain is recognized as one that
1161 &"belongs"& to the local host. This router does redirection &-- also known as
1162 aliasing and forwarding. When it generates one or more new addresses from the
1163 original, each of them is routed independently from the start. Otherwise, the
1164 router may cause an address to fail, or it may simply decline to handle the
1165 address, in which case the address is passed to the next router.
1167 The final router in many configurations is one that checks to see if the
1168 address belongs to a local mailbox. The precondition may involve a check to
1169 see if the local part is the name of a login account, or it may look up the
1170 local part in a file or a database. If its preconditions are not met, or if
1171 the router declines, we have reached the end of the routers. When this happens,
1172 the address is bounced.
1176 .section "Processing an address for verification"
1177 .cindex "router" "for verification"
1178 .cindex "verifying address" "overview"
1179 As well as being used to decide how to deliver to an address, Exim's routers
1180 are also used for &'address verification'&. Verification can be requested as
1181 one of the checks to be performed in an ACL for incoming messages, on both
1182 sender and recipient addresses, and it can be tested using the &%-bv%& and
1183 &%-bvs%& command line options.
1185 When an address is being verified, the routers are run in &"verify mode"&. This
1186 does not affect the way the routers work, but it is a state that can be
1187 detected. By this means, a router can be skipped or made to behave differently
1188 when verifying. A common example is a configuration in which the first router
1189 sends all messages to a message-scanning program, unless they have been
1190 previously scanned. Thus, the first router accepts all addresses without any
1191 checking, making it useless for verifying. Normally, the &%no_verify%& option
1192 would be set for such a router, causing it to be skipped in verify mode.
1197 .section "Running an individual router" "SECTrunindrou"
1198 .cindex "router" "running details"
1199 .cindex "preconditions" "checking"
1200 .cindex "router" "result of running"
1201 As explained in the example above, a number of preconditions are checked before
1202 running a router. If any are not met, the router is skipped, and the address is
1203 passed to the next router. When all the preconditions on a router &'are'& met,
1204 the router is run. What happens next depends on the outcome, which is one of
1208 &'accept'&: The router accepts the address, and either assigns it to a
1209 transport, or generates one or more &"child"& addresses. Processing the
1210 original address ceases,
1211 .cindex "&%unseen%& option"
1212 unless the &%unseen%& option is set on the router. This option
1213 can be used to set up multiple deliveries with different routing (for example,
1214 for keeping archive copies of messages). When &%unseen%& is set, the address is
1215 passed to the next router. Normally, however, an &'accept'& return marks the
1218 Any child addresses generated by the router are processed independently,
1219 starting with the first router by default. It is possible to change this by
1220 setting the &%redirect_router%& option to specify which router to start at for
1221 child addresses. Unlike &%pass_router%& (see below) the router specified by
1222 &%redirect_router%& may be anywhere in the router configuration.
1224 &'pass'&: The router recognizes the address, but cannot handle it itself. It
1225 requests that the address be passed to another router. By default the address
1226 is passed to the next router, but this can be changed by setting the
1227 &%pass_router%& option. However, (unlike &%redirect_router%&) the named router
1228 must be below the current router (to avoid loops).
1230 &'decline'&: The router declines to accept the address because it does not
1231 recognize it at all. By default, the address is passed to the next router, but
1232 this can be prevented by setting the &%no_more%& option. When &%no_more%& is
1233 set, all the remaining routers are skipped. In effect, &%no_more%& converts
1234 &'decline'& into &'fail'&.
1236 &'fail'&: The router determines that the address should fail, and queues it for
1237 the generation of a bounce message. There is no further processing of the
1238 original address unless &%unseen%& is set on the router.
1240 &'defer'&: The router cannot handle the address at the present time. (A
1241 database may be offline, or a DNS lookup may have timed out.) No further
1242 processing of the address happens in this delivery attempt. It is tried again
1243 next time the message is considered for delivery.
1245 &'error'&: There is some error in the router (for example, a syntax error in
1246 its configuration). The action is as for defer.
1249 If an address reaches the end of the routers without having been accepted by
1250 any of them, it is bounced as unrouteable. The default error message in this
1251 situation is &"unrouteable address"&, but you can set your own message by
1252 making use of the &%cannot_route_message%& option. This can be set for any
1253 router; the value from the last router that &"saw"& the address is used.
1255 Sometimes while routing you want to fail a delivery when some conditions are
1256 met but others are not, instead of passing the address on for further routing.
1257 You can do this by having a second router that explicitly fails the delivery
1258 when the relevant conditions are met. The &(redirect)& router has a &"fail"&
1259 facility for this purpose.
1262 .section "Duplicate addresses"
1264 .cindex "case of local parts"
1265 .cindex "address duplicate" "discarding"
1266 Once routing is complete, Exim scans the addresses that are assigned to local
1267 and remote transports, and discards any duplicates that it finds. During this
1268 check, local parts are treated as case-sensitive.
1272 .section "Router preconditions" "SECTrouprecon"
1273 .cindex "router preconditions" "order of processing"
1274 .cindex "preconditions" "order of processing"
1275 The preconditions that are tested for each router are listed below, in the
1276 order in which they are tested. The individual configuration options are
1277 described in more detail in chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&.
1280 The &%local_part_prefix%& and &%local_part_suffix%& options can specify that
1281 the local parts handled by the router may or must have certain prefixes and/or
1282 suffixes. If a mandatory affix (prefix or suffix) is not present, the router is
1283 skipped. These conditions are tested first. When an affix is present, it is
1284 removed from the local part before further processing, including the evaluation
1285 of any other conditions.
1287 Routers can be designated for use only when not verifying an address, that is,
1288 only when routing it for delivery (or testing its delivery routing). If the
1289 &%verify%& option is set false, the router is skipped when Exim is verifying an
1291 Setting the &%verify%& option actually sets two options, &%verify_sender%& and
1292 &%verify_recipient%&, which independently control the use of the router for
1293 sender and recipient verification. You can set these options directly if
1294 you want a router to be used for only one type of verification.
1296 If the &%address_test%& option is set false, the router is skipped when Exim is
1297 run with the &%-bt%& option to test an address routing. This can be helpful
1298 when the first router sends all new messages to a scanner of some sort; it
1299 makes it possible to use &%-bt%& to test subsequent delivery routing without
1300 having to simulate the effect of the scanner.
1302 Routers can be designated for use only when verifying an address, as
1303 opposed to routing it for delivery. The &%verify_only%& option controls this.
1305 Individual routers can be explicitly skipped when running the routers to
1306 check an address given in the SMTP EXPN command (see the &%expn%& option).
1308 If the &%domains%& option is set, the domain of the address must be in the set
1309 of domains that it defines.
1311 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
1312 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
1313 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
1314 If the &%local_parts%& option is set, the local part of the address must be in
1315 the set of local parts that it defines. If &%local_part_prefix%& or
1316 &%local_part_suffix%& is in use, the prefix or suffix is removed from the local
1317 part before this check. If you want to do precondition tests on local parts
1318 that include affixes, you can do so by using a &%condition%& option (see below)
1319 that uses the variables &$local_part$&, &$local_part_prefix$&, and
1320 &$local_part_suffix$& as necessary.
1322 .cindex "&$local_user_uid$&"
1323 .cindex "&$local_user_gid$&"
1325 If the &%check_local_user%& option is set, the local part must be the name of
1326 an account on the local host. If this check succeeds, the uid and gid of the
1327 local user are placed in &$local_user_uid$& and &$local_user_gid$& and the
1328 user's home directory is placed in &$home$&; these values can be used in the
1329 remaining preconditions.
1331 If the &%router_home_directory%& option is set, it is expanded at this point,
1332 because it overrides the value of &$home$&. If this expansion were left till
1333 later, the value of &$home$& as set by &%check_local_user%& would be used in
1334 subsequent tests. Having two different values of &$home$& in the same router
1335 could lead to confusion.
1337 If the &%senders%& option is set, the envelope sender address must be in the
1338 set of addresses that it defines.
1340 If the &%require_files%& option is set, the existence or non-existence of
1341 specified files is tested.
1343 .cindex "customizing" "precondition"
1344 If the &%condition%& option is set, it is evaluated and tested. This option
1345 uses an expanded string to allow you to set up your own custom preconditions.
1346 Expanded strings are described in chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&.
1350 Note that &%require_files%& comes near the end of the list, so you cannot use
1351 it to check for the existence of a file in which to lookup up a domain, local
1352 part, or sender. However, as these options are all expanded, you can use the
1353 &%exists%& expansion condition to make such tests within each condition. The
1354 &%require_files%& option is intended for checking files that the router may be
1355 going to use internally, or which are needed by a specific transport (for
1356 example, &_.procmailrc_&).
1360 .section "Delivery in detail"
1361 .cindex "delivery" "in detail"
1362 When a message is to be delivered, the sequence of events is as follows:
1365 If a system-wide filter file is specified, the message is passed to it. The
1366 filter may add recipients to the message, replace the recipients, discard the
1367 message, cause a new message to be generated, or cause the message delivery to
1368 fail. The format of the system filter file is the same as for Exim user filter
1369 files, described in the separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail
1371 .cindex "Sieve filter" "not available for system filter"
1372 (&*Note*&: Sieve cannot be used for system filter files.)
1374 Some additional features are available in system filters &-- see chapter
1375 &<<CHAPsystemfilter>>& for details. Note that a message is passed to the system
1376 filter only once per delivery attempt, however many recipients it has. However,
1377 if there are several delivery attempts because one or more addresses could not
1378 be immediately delivered, the system filter is run each time. The filter
1379 condition &%first_delivery%& can be used to detect the first run of the system
1382 Each recipient address is offered to each configured router in turn, subject to
1383 its preconditions, until one is able to handle it. If no router can handle the
1384 address, that is, if they all decline, the address is failed. Because routers
1385 can be targeted at particular domains, several locally handled domains can be
1386 processed entirely independently of each other.
1388 .cindex "routing" "loops in"
1389 .cindex "loop" "while routing"
1390 A router that accepts an address may assign it to a local or a remote
1391 transport. However, the transport is not run at this time. Instead, the address
1392 is placed on a list for the particular transport, which will be run later.
1393 Alternatively, the router may generate one or more new addresses (typically
1394 from alias, forward, or filter files). New addresses are fed back into this
1395 process from the top, but in order to avoid loops, a router ignores any address
1396 which has an identically-named ancestor that was processed by itself.
1398 When all the routing has been done, addresses that have been successfully
1399 handled are passed to their assigned transports. When local transports are
1400 doing real local deliveries, they handle only one address at a time, but if a
1401 local transport is being used as a pseudo-remote transport (for example, to
1402 collect batched SMTP messages for transmission by some other means) multiple
1403 addresses can be handled. Remote transports can always handle more than one
1404 address at a time, but can be configured not to do so, or to restrict multiple
1405 addresses to the same domain.
1407 Each local delivery to a file or a pipe runs in a separate process under a
1408 non-privileged uid, and these deliveries are run one at a time. Remote
1409 deliveries also run in separate processes, normally under a uid that is private
1410 to Exim (&"the Exim user"&), but in this case, several remote deliveries can be
1411 run in parallel. The maximum number of simultaneous remote deliveries for any
1412 one message is set by the &%remote_max_parallel%& option.
1413 The order in which deliveries are done is not defined, except that all local
1414 deliveries happen before any remote deliveries.
1416 .cindex "queue runner"
1417 When it encounters a local delivery during a queue run, Exim checks its retry
1418 database to see if there has been a previous temporary delivery failure for the
1419 address before running the local transport. If there was a previous failure,
1420 Exim does not attempt a new delivery until the retry time for the address is
1421 reached. However, this happens only for delivery attempts that are part of a
1422 queue run. Local deliveries are always attempted when delivery immediately
1423 follows message reception, even if retry times are set for them. This makes for
1424 better behaviour if one particular message is causing problems (for example,
1425 causing quota overflow, or provoking an error in a filter file).
1427 .cindex "delivery" "retry in remote transports"
1428 Remote transports do their own retry handling, since an address may be
1429 deliverable to one of a number of hosts, each of which may have a different
1430 retry time. If there have been previous temporary failures and no host has
1431 reached its retry time, no delivery is attempted, whether in a queue run or
1432 not. See chapter &<<CHAPretry>>& for details of retry strategies.
1434 If there were any permanent errors, a bounce message is returned to an
1435 appropriate address (the sender in the common case), with details of the error
1436 for each failing address. Exim can be configured to send copies of bounce
1437 messages to other addresses.
1439 .cindex "delivery" "deferral"
1440 If one or more addresses suffered a temporary failure, the message is left on
1441 the queue, to be tried again later. Delivery of these addresses is said to be
1444 When all the recipient addresses have either been delivered or bounced,
1445 handling of the message is complete. The spool files and message log are
1446 deleted, though the message log can optionally be preserved if required.
1452 .section "Retry mechanism"
1453 .cindex "delivery" "retry mechanism"
1454 .cindex "retry" "description of mechanism"
1455 .cindex "queue runner"
1456 Exim's mechanism for retrying messages that fail to get delivered at the first
1457 attempt is the queue runner process. You must either run an Exim daemon that
1458 uses the &%-q%& option with a time interval to start queue runners at regular
1459 intervals, or use some other means (such as &'cron'&) to start them. If you do
1460 not arrange for queue runners to be run, messages that fail temporarily at the
1461 first attempt will remain on your queue for ever. A queue runner process works
1462 its way through the queue, one message at a time, trying each delivery that has
1463 passed its retry time.
1464 You can run several queue runners at once.
1466 Exim uses a set of configured rules to determine when next to retry the failing
1467 address (see chapter &<<CHAPretry>>&). These rules also specify when Exim
1468 should give up trying to deliver to the address, at which point it generates a
1469 bounce message. If no retry rules are set for a particular host, address, and
1470 error combination, no retries are attempted, and temporary errors are treated
1475 .section "Temporary delivery failure"
1476 .cindex "delivery" "temporary failure"
1477 There are many reasons why a message may not be immediately deliverable to a
1478 particular address. Failure to connect to a remote machine (because it, or the
1479 connection to it, is down) is one of the most common. Temporary failures may be
1480 detected during routing as well as during the transport stage of delivery.
1481 Local deliveries may be delayed if NFS files are unavailable, or if a mailbox
1482 is on a file system where the user is over quota. Exim can be configured to
1483 impose its own quotas on local mailboxes; where system quotas are set they will
1486 If a host is unreachable for a period of time, a number of messages may be
1487 waiting for it by the time it recovers, and sending them in a single SMTP
1488 connection is clearly beneficial. Whenever a delivery to a remote host is
1491 .cindex "hints database"
1492 Exim makes a note in its hints database, and whenever a successful
1493 SMTP delivery has happened, it looks to see if any other messages are waiting
1494 for the same host. If any are found, they are sent over the same SMTP
1495 connection, subject to a configuration limit as to the maximum number in any
1501 .section "Permanent delivery failure"
1502 .cindex "delivery" "permanent failure"
1503 .cindex "bounce message" "when generated"
1504 When a message cannot be delivered to some or all of its intended recipients, a
1505 bounce message is generated. Temporary delivery failures turn into permanent
1506 errors when their timeout expires. All the addresses that fail in a given
1507 delivery attempt are listed in a single message. If the original message has
1508 many recipients, it is possible for some addresses to fail in one delivery
1509 attempt and others to fail subsequently, giving rise to more than one bounce
1510 message. The wording of bounce messages can be customized by the administrator.
1511 See chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>& for details.
1513 .cindex "&'X-Failed-Recipients:'& header line"
1514 Bounce messages contain an &'X-Failed-Recipients:'& header line that lists the
1515 failed addresses, for the benefit of programs that try to analyse such messages
1518 .cindex "bounce message" "recipient of"
1519 A bounce message is normally sent to the sender of the original message, as
1520 obtained from the message's envelope. For incoming SMTP messages, this is the
1521 address given in the MAIL command. However, when an address is expanded via a
1522 forward or alias file, an alternative address can be specified for delivery
1523 failures of the generated addresses. For a mailing list expansion (see section
1524 &<<SECTmailinglists>>&) it is common to direct bounce messages to the manager
1529 .section "Failures to deliver bounce messages"
1530 .cindex "bounce message" "failure to deliver"
1531 If a bounce message (either locally generated or received from a remote host)
1532 itself suffers a permanent delivery failure, the message is left on the queue,
1533 but it is frozen, awaiting the attention of an administrator. There are options
1534 that can be used to make Exim discard such failed messages, or to keep them
1535 for only a short time (see &%timeout_frozen_after%& and
1536 &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&).
1542 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
1543 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
1545 .chapter "Building and installing Exim"
1546 .cindex "building Exim"
1548 .section "Unpacking"
1549 Exim is distributed as a gzipped or bzipped tar file which, when upacked,
1550 creates a directory with the name of the current release (for example,
1551 &_exim-&version;_&) into which the following files are placed:
1554 .row &_ACKNOWLEDGMENTS_& "contains some acknowledgments"
1555 .row &_CHANGES_& "contains a reference to where changes are documented"
1556 .row &_LICENCE_& "the GNU General Public Licence"
1557 .row &_Makefile_& "top-level make file"
1558 .row &_NOTICE_& "conditions for the use of Exim"
1559 .row &_README_& "list of files, directories and simple build &&&
1563 Other files whose names begin with &_README_& may also be present. The
1564 following subdirectories are created:
1567 .row &_Local_& "an empty directory for local configuration files"
1568 .row &_OS_& "OS-specific files"
1569 .row &_doc_& "documentation files"
1570 .row &_exim_monitor_& "source files for the Exim monitor"
1571 .row &_scripts_& "scripts used in the build process"
1572 .row &_src_& "remaining source files"
1573 .row &_util_& "independent utilities"
1576 The main utility programs are contained in the &_src_& directory, and are built
1577 with the Exim binary. The &_util_& directory contains a few optional scripts
1578 that may be useful to some sites.
1581 .section "Multiple machine architectures and operating systems"
1582 .cindex "building Exim" "multiple OS/architectures"
1583 The building process for Exim is arranged to make it easy to build binaries for
1584 a number of different architectures and operating systems from the same set of
1585 source files. Compilation does not take place in the &_src_& directory.
1586 Instead, a &'build directory'& is created for each architecture and operating
1588 .cindex "symbolic link" "to build directory"
1589 Symbolic links to the sources are installed in this directory, which is where
1590 the actual building takes place. In most cases, Exim can discover the machine
1591 architecture and operating system for itself, but the defaults can be
1592 overridden if necessary.
1595 .section "DBM libraries" "SECTdb"
1596 .cindex "DBM libraries" "discussion of"
1597 .cindex "hints database" "DBM files used for"
1598 Even if you do not use any DBM files in your configuration, Exim still needs a
1599 DBM library in order to operate, because it uses indexed files for its hints
1600 databases. Unfortunately, there are a number of DBM libraries in existence, and
1601 different operating systems often have different ones installed.
1603 .cindex "Solaris" "DBM library for"
1604 .cindex "IRIX" "DBM library for"
1605 .cindex "BSD" "DBM library for"
1606 .cindex "Linux" "DBM library for"
1607 If you are using Solaris, IRIX, one of the modern BSD systems, or a modern
1608 Linux distribution, the DBM configuration should happen automatically, and you
1609 may be able to ignore this section. Otherwise, you may have to learn more than
1610 you would like about DBM libraries from what follows.
1612 .cindex "&'ndbm'& DBM library"
1613 Licensed versions of Unix normally contain a library of DBM functions operating
1614 via the &'ndbm'& interface, and this is what Exim expects by default. Free
1615 versions of Unix seem to vary in what they contain as standard. In particular,
1616 some early versions of Linux have no default DBM library, and different
1617 distributors have chosen to bundle different libraries with their packaged
1618 versions. However, the more recent releases seem to have standardised on the
1619 Berkeley DB library.
1621 Different DBM libraries have different conventions for naming the files they
1622 use. When a program opens a file called &_dbmfile_&, there are several
1626 A traditional &'ndbm'& implementation, such as that supplied as part of
1627 Solaris, operates on two files called &_dbmfile.dir_& and &_dbmfile.pag_&.
1629 .cindex "&'gdbm'& DBM library"
1630 The GNU library, &'gdbm'&, operates on a single file. If used via its &'ndbm'&
1631 compatibility interface it makes two different hard links to it with names
1632 &_dbmfile.dir_& and &_dbmfile.pag_&, but if used via its native interface, the
1633 file name is used unmodified.
1635 .cindex "Berkeley DB library"
1636 The Berkeley DB package, if called via its &'ndbm'& compatibility interface,
1637 operates on a single file called &_dbmfile.db_&, but otherwise looks to the
1638 programmer exactly the same as the traditional &'ndbm'& implementation.
1640 If the Berkeley package is used in its native mode, it operates on a single
1641 file called &_dbmfile_&; the programmer's interface is somewhat different to
1642 the traditional &'ndbm'& interface.
1644 To complicate things further, there are several very different versions of the
1645 Berkeley DB package. Version 1.85 was stable for a very long time, releases
1646 2.&'x'& and 3.&'x'& were current for a while, but the latest versions are now
1647 numbered 4.&'x'&. Maintenance of some of the earlier releases has ceased. All
1648 versions of Berkeley DB can be obtained from
1649 &url(http://www.sleepycat.com/).
1651 .cindex "&'tdb'& DBM library"
1652 Yet another DBM library, called &'tdb'&, is available from
1653 &url(http://download.sourceforge.net/tdb). It has its own interface, and also
1654 operates on a single file.
1658 .cindex "DBM libraries" "configuration for building"
1659 Exim and its utilities can be compiled to use any of these interfaces. In order
1660 to use any version of the Berkeley DB package in native mode, you must set
1661 USE_DB in an appropriate configuration file (typically
1662 &_Local/Makefile_&). For example:
1666 Similarly, for gdbm you set USE_GDBM, and for tdb you set USE_TDB. An
1667 error is diagnosed if you set more than one of these.
1669 At the lowest level, the build-time configuration sets none of these options,
1670 thereby assuming an interface of type (1). However, some operating system
1671 configuration files (for example, those for the BSD operating systems and
1672 Linux) assume type (4) by setting USE_DB as their default, and the
1673 configuration files for Cygwin set USE_GDBM. Anything you set in
1674 &_Local/Makefile_&, however, overrides these system defaults.
1676 As well as setting USE_DB, USE_GDBM, or USE_TDB, it may also be
1677 necessary to set DBMLIB, to cause inclusion of the appropriate library, as
1678 in one of these lines:
1683 Settings like that will work if the DBM library is installed in the standard
1684 place. Sometimes it is not, and the library's header file may also not be in
1685 the default path. You may need to set INCLUDE to specify where the header
1686 file is, and to specify the path to the library more fully in DBMLIB, as in
1689 INCLUDE=-I/usr/local/include/db-4.1
1690 DBMLIB=/usr/local/lib/db-4.1/libdb.a
1692 There is further detailed discussion about the various DBM libraries in the
1693 file &_doc/dbm.discuss.txt_& in the Exim distribution.
1697 .section "Pre-building configuration"
1698 .cindex "building Exim" "pre-building configuration"
1699 .cindex "configuration for building Exim"
1700 .cindex "&_Local/Makefile_&"
1701 .cindex "&_src/EDITME_&"
1702 Before building Exim, a local configuration file that specifies options
1703 independent of any operating system has to be created with the name
1704 &_Local/Makefile_&. A template for this file is supplied as the file
1705 &_src/EDITME_&, and it contains full descriptions of all the option settings
1706 therein. These descriptions are therefore not repeated here. If you are
1707 building Exim for the first time, the simplest thing to do is to copy
1708 &_src/EDITME_& to &_Local/Makefile_&, then read it and edit it appropriately.
1710 There are three settings that you must supply, because Exim will not build
1711 without them. They are the location of the run time configuration file
1712 (CONFIGURE_FILE), the directory in which Exim binaries will be installed
1713 (BIN_DIRECTORY), and the identity of the Exim user (EXIM_USER and
1714 maybe EXIM_GROUP as well). The value of CONFIGURE_FILE can in fact be
1715 a colon-separated list of file names; Exim uses the first of them that exists.
1717 There are a few other parameters that can be specified either at build time or
1718 at run time, to enable the same binary to be used on a number of different
1719 machines. However, if the locations of Exim's spool directory and log file
1720 directory (if not within the spool directory) are fixed, it is recommended that
1721 you specify them in &_Local/Makefile_& instead of at run time, so that errors
1722 detected early in Exim's execution (such as a malformed configuration file) can
1725 .cindex "content scanning" "specifying at build time"
1726 Exim's interfaces for calling virus and spam scanning software directly from
1727 access control lists are not compiled by default. If you want to include these
1728 facilities, you need to set
1730 WITH_CONTENT_SCAN=yes
1732 in your &_Local/Makefile_&. For details of the facilities themselves, see
1733 chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
1736 .cindex "&_Local/eximon.conf_&"
1737 .cindex "_exim_monitor/EDITME_"
1738 If you are going to build the Exim monitor, a similar configuration process is
1739 required. The file &_exim_monitor/EDITME_& must be edited appropriately for
1740 your installation and saved under the name &_Local/eximon.conf_&. If you are
1741 happy with the default settings described in &_exim_monitor/EDITME_&,
1742 &_Local/eximon.conf_& can be empty, but it must exist.
1744 This is all the configuration that is needed in straightforward cases for known
1745 operating systems. However, the building process is set up so that it is easy
1746 to override options that are set by default or by operating-system-specific
1747 configuration files, for example to change the name of the C compiler, which
1748 defaults to &%gcc%&. See section &<<SECToverride>>& below for details of how to
1753 .section "Support for iconv()"
1754 .cindex "&[iconv()]& support"
1756 The contents of header lines in messages may be encoded according to the rules
1757 described RFC 2047. This makes it possible to transmit characters that are not
1758 in the ASCII character set, and to label them as being in a particular
1759 character set. When Exim is inspecting header lines by means of the &%$h_%&
1760 mechanism, it decodes them, and translates them into a specified character set
1761 (default ISO-8859-1). The translation is possible only if the operating system
1762 supports the &[iconv()]& function.
1764 However, some of the operating systems that supply &[iconv()]& do not support
1765 very many conversions. The GNU &%libiconv%& library (available from
1766 &url(http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/)) can be installed on such
1767 systems to remedy this deficiency, as well as on systems that do not supply
1768 &[iconv()]& at all. After installing &%libiconv%&, you should add
1772 to your &_Local/Makefile_& and rebuild Exim.
1776 .section "Including TLS/SSL encryption support" "SECTinctlsssl"
1777 .cindex "TLS" "including support for TLS"
1778 .cindex "encryption" "including support for"
1779 .cindex "SUPPORT_TLS"
1780 .cindex "OpenSSL" "building Exim with"
1781 .cindex "GnuTLS" "building Exim with"
1782 Exim can be built to support encrypted SMTP connections, using the STARTTLS
1783 command as per RFC 2487. It can also support legacy clients that expect to
1784 start a TLS session immediately on connection to a non-standard port (see the
1785 &%tls_on_connect_ports%& runtime option and the &%-tls-on-connect%& command
1788 If you want to build Exim with TLS support, you must first install either the
1789 OpenSSL or GnuTLS library. There is no cryptographic code in Exim itself for
1792 If OpenSSL is installed, you should set
1795 TLS_LIBS=-lssl -lcrypto
1797 in &_Local/Makefile_&. You may also need to specify the locations of the
1798 OpenSSL library and include files. For example:
1801 TLS_LIBS=-L/usr/local/openssl/lib -lssl -lcrypto
1802 TLS_INCLUDE=-I/usr/local/openssl/include/
1804 .cindex "USE_GNUTLS"
1805 If GnuTLS is installed, you should set
1809 TLS_LIBS=-lgnutls -ltasn1 -lgcrypt
1811 in &_Local/Makefile_&, and again you may need to specify the locations of the
1812 library and include files. For example:
1816 TLS_LIBS=-L/usr/gnu/lib -lgnutls -ltasn1 -lgcrypt
1817 TLS_INCLUDE=-I/usr/gnu/include
1819 You do not need to set TLS_INCLUDE if the relevant directory is already
1820 specified in INCLUDE. Details of how to configure Exim to make use of TLS are
1821 given in chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>&.
1826 .section "Use of tcpwrappers"
1827 .cindex "tcpwrappers" "building Exim to support"
1828 .cindex "USE_TCP_WRAPPERS"
1829 Exim can be linked with the &'tcpwrappers'& library in order to check incoming
1830 SMTP calls using the &'tcpwrappers'& control files. This may be a convenient
1831 alternative to Exim's own checking facilities for installations that are
1832 already making use of &'tcpwrappers'& for other purposes. To do this, you
1833 should set USE_TCP_WRAPPERS in &_Local/Makefile_&, arrange for the file
1834 &_tcpd.h_& to be available at compile time, and also ensure that the library
1835 &_libwrap.a_& is available at link time, typically by including &%-lwrap%& in
1836 EXTRALIBS_EXIM. For example, if &'tcpwrappers'& is installed in &_/usr/local_&,
1839 USE_TCP_WRAPPERS=yes
1840 CFLAGS=-O -I/usr/local/include
1841 EXTRALIBS_EXIM=-L/usr/local/lib -lwrap
1843 in &_Local/Makefile_&. The name to use in the &'tcpwrappers'& control files is
1844 &"exim"&. For example, the line
1846 exim : LOCAL 192.168.1. .friendly.domain.example
1848 in your &_/etc/hosts.allow_& file allows connections from the local host, from
1849 the subnet 192.168.1.0/24, and from all hosts in &'friendly.domain.example'&.
1850 All other connections are denied. Consult the &'tcpwrappers'& documentation for
1855 .section "Including support for IPv6"
1856 .cindex "IPv6" "including support for"
1857 Exim contains code for use on systems that have IPv6 support. Setting
1858 &`HAVE_IPV6=YES`& in &_Local/Makefile_& causes the IPv6 code to be included;
1859 it may also be necessary to set IPV6_INCLUDE and IPV6_LIBS on systems
1860 where the IPv6 support is not fully integrated into the normal include and
1863 Two different types of DNS record for handling IPv6 addresses have been
1864 defined. AAAA records (analagous to A records for IPv4) are in use, and are
1865 currently seen as the mainstream. Another record type called A6 was proposed
1866 as better than AAAA because it had more flexibility. However, it was felt to be
1867 over-complex, and its status was reduced to &"experimental"&. It is not known
1868 if anyone is actually using A6 records. Exim has support for A6 records, but
1869 this is included only if you set &`SUPPORT_A6=YES`& in &_Local/Makefile_&. The
1870 support has not been tested for some time.
1874 .section "The building process"
1875 .cindex "build directory"
1876 Once &_Local/Makefile_& (and &_Local/eximon.conf_&, if required) have been
1877 created, run &'make'& at the top level. It determines the architecture and
1878 operating system types, and creates a build directory if one does not exist.
1879 For example, on a Sun system running Solaris 8, the directory
1880 &_build-SunOS5-5.8-sparc_& is created.
1881 .cindex "symbolic link" "to source files"
1882 Symbolic links to relevant source files are installed in the build directory.
1884 &*Warning*&: The &%-j%& (parallel) flag must not be used with &'make'&; the
1885 building process fails if it is set.
1887 If this is the first time &'make'& has been run, it calls a script that builds
1888 a make file inside the build directory, using the configuration files from the
1889 &_Local_& directory. The new make file is then passed to another instance of
1890 &'make'&. This does the real work, building a number of utility scripts, and
1891 then compiling and linking the binaries for the Exim monitor (if configured), a
1892 number of utility programs, and finally Exim itself. The command &`make
1893 makefile`& can be used to force a rebuild of the make file in the build
1894 directory, should this ever be necessary.
1896 If you have problems building Exim, check for any comments there may be in the
1897 &_README_& file concerning your operating system, and also take a look at the
1898 FAQ, where some common problems are covered.
1902 .section 'Output from &"make"&'
1904 The output produced by the &'make'& process for compile lines is often very
1905 unreadable, because these lines can be very long. For this reason, the normal
1906 output is suppressed by default, and instead output similar to that which
1907 appears when compiling the 2.6 Linux kernel is generated: just a short line for
1908 each module that is being compiled or linked. However, it is still possible to
1909 get the full output, by calling &'make'& like this:
1913 The value of FULLECHO defaults to &"@"&, the flag character that suppresses
1914 command reflection in &'make'&. When you ask for the full output, it is
1915 given in addition to the the short output.
1920 .section "Overriding build-time options for Exim" "SECToverride"
1921 .cindex "build-time options" "overriding"
1922 The main make file that is created at the beginning of the building process
1923 consists of the concatenation of a number of files which set configuration
1924 values, followed by a fixed set of &'make'& instructions. If a value is set
1925 more than once, the last setting overrides any previous ones. This provides a
1926 convenient way of overriding defaults. The files that are concatenated are, in
1929 &_OS/Makefile-Default_&
1930 &_OS/Makefile-_&<&'ostype'&>
1932 &_Local/Makefile-_&<&'ostype'&>
1933 &_Local/Makefile-_&<&'archtype'&>
1934 &_Local/Makefile-_&<&'ostype'&>-<&'archtype'&>
1935 &_OS/Makefile-Base_&
1937 .cindex "&_Local/Makefile_&"
1938 .cindex "building Exim" "operating system type"
1939 .cindex "building Exim" "architecture type"
1940 where <&'ostype'&> is the operating system type and <&'archtype'&> is the
1941 architecture type. &_Local/Makefile_& is required to exist, and the building
1942 process fails if it is absent. The other three &_Local_& files are optional,
1943 and are often not needed.
1945 The values used for <&'ostype'&> and <&'archtype'&> are obtained from scripts
1946 called &_scripts/os-type_& and &_scripts/arch-type_& respectively. If either of
1947 the environment variables EXIM_OSTYPE or EXIM_ARCHTYPE is set, their
1948 values are used, thereby providing a means of forcing particular settings.
1949 Otherwise, the scripts try to get values from the &%uname%& command. If this
1950 fails, the shell variables OSTYPE and ARCHTYPE are inspected. A number
1951 of &'ad hoc'& transformations are then applied, to produce the standard names
1952 that Exim expects. You can run these scripts directly from the shell in order
1953 to find out what values are being used on your system.
1956 &_OS/Makefile-Default_& contains comments about the variables that are set
1957 therein. Some (but not all) are mentioned below. If there is something that
1958 needs changing, review the contents of this file and the contents of the make
1959 file for your operating system (&_OS/Makefile-<ostype>_&) to see what the
1963 .cindex "building Exim" "overriding default settings"
1964 If you need to change any of the values that are set in &_OS/Makefile-Default_&
1965 or in &_OS/Makefile-<ostype>_&, or to add any new definitions, you do not
1966 need to change the original files. Instead, you should make the changes by
1967 putting the new values in an appropriate &_Local_& file. For example,
1968 .cindex "Tru64-Unix build-time settings"
1969 when building Exim in many releases of the Tru64-Unix (formerly Digital UNIX,
1970 formerly DEC-OSF1) operating system, it is necessary to specify that the C
1971 compiler is called &'cc'& rather than &'gcc'&. Also, the compiler must be
1972 called with the option &%-std1%&, to make it recognize some of the features of
1973 Standard C that Exim uses. (Most other compilers recognize Standard C by
1974 default.) To do this, you should create a file called &_Local/Makefile-OSF1_&
1975 containing the lines
1980 If you are compiling for just one operating system, it may be easier to put
1981 these lines directly into &_Local/Makefile_&.
1983 Keeping all your local configuration settings separate from the distributed
1984 files makes it easy to transfer them to new versions of Exim simply by copying
1985 the contents of the &_Local_& directory.
1988 .cindex "NIS lookup type" "including support for"
1989 .cindex "NIS+ lookup type" "including support for"
1990 .cindex "LDAP" "including support for"
1991 .cindex "lookup" "inclusion in binary"
1992 Exim contains support for doing LDAP, NIS, NIS+, and other kinds of file
1993 lookup, but not all systems have these components installed, so the default is
1994 not to include the relevant code in the binary. All the different kinds of file
1995 and database lookup that Exim supports are implemented as separate code modules
1996 which are included only if the relevant compile-time options are set. In the
1997 case of LDAP, NIS, and NIS+, the settings for &_Local/Makefile_& are:
2003 and similar settings apply to the other lookup types. They are all listed in
2004 &_src/EDITME_&. In many cases the relevant include files and interface
2005 libraries need to be installed before compiling Exim.
2006 .cindex "cdb" "including support for"
2007 However, there are some optional lookup types (such as cdb) for which
2008 the code is entirely contained within Exim, and no external include
2009 files or libraries are required. When a lookup type is not included in the
2010 binary, attempts to configure Exim to use it cause run time configuration
2013 .cindex "Perl" "including support for"
2014 Exim can be linked with an embedded Perl interpreter, allowing Perl
2015 subroutines to be called during string expansion. To enable this facility,
2019 must be defined in &_Local/Makefile_&. Details of this facility are given in
2020 chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&.
2022 .cindex "X11 libraries" "location of"
2023 The location of the X11 libraries is something that varies a lot between
2024 operating systems, and there may be different versions of X11 to cope
2025 with. Exim itself makes no use of X11, but if you are compiling the Exim
2026 monitor, the X11 libraries must be available.
2027 The following three variables are set in &_OS/Makefile-Default_&:
2030 XINCLUDE=-I$(X11)/include
2031 XLFLAGS=-L$(X11)/lib
2033 These are overridden in some of the operating-system configuration files. For
2034 example, in &_OS/Makefile-SunOS5_& there is
2037 XINCLUDE=-I$(X11)/include
2038 XLFLAGS=-L$(X11)/lib -R$(X11)/lib
2040 If you need to override the default setting for your operating system, place a
2041 definition of all three of these variables into your
2042 &_Local/Makefile-<ostype>_& file.
2045 If you need to add any extra libraries to the link steps, these can be put in a
2046 variable called EXTRALIBS, which appears in all the link commands, but by
2047 default is not defined. In contrast, EXTRALIBS_EXIM is used only on the
2048 command for linking the main Exim binary, and not for any associated utilities.
2050 .cindex "DBM libraries" "configuration for building"
2051 There is also DBMLIB, which appears in the link commands for binaries that
2052 use DBM functions (see also section &<<SECTdb>>&). Finally, there is
2053 EXTRALIBS_EXIMON, which appears only in the link step for the Exim monitor
2054 binary, and which can be used, for example, to include additional X11
2057 .cindex "configuration file" "editing"
2058 The make file copes with rebuilding Exim correctly if any of the configuration
2059 files are edited. However, if an optional configuration file is deleted, it is
2060 necessary to touch the associated non-optional file (that is,
2061 &_Local/Makefile_& or &_Local/eximon.conf_&) before rebuilding.
2064 .section "OS-specific header files"
2066 .cindex "building Exim" "OS-specific C header files"
2067 The &_OS_& directory contains a number of files with names of the form
2068 &_os.h-<ostype>_&. These are system-specific C header files that should not
2069 normally need to be changed. There is a list of macro settings that are
2070 recognized in the file &_OS/os.configuring_&, which should be consulted if you
2071 are porting Exim to a new operating system.
2075 .section "Overriding build-time options for the monitor"
2076 .cindex "building Eximon" "overriding default options"
2077 A similar process is used for overriding things when building the Exim monitor,
2078 where the files that are involved are
2080 &_OS/eximon.conf-Default_&
2081 &_OS/eximon.conf-_&<&'ostype'&>
2082 &_Local/eximon.conf_&
2083 &_Local/eximon.conf-_&<&'ostype'&>
2084 &_Local/eximon.conf-_&<&'archtype'&>
2085 &_Local/eximon.conf-_&<&'ostype'&>-<&'archtype'&>
2087 .cindex "&_Local/eximon.conf_&"
2088 As with Exim itself, the final three files need not exist, and in this case the
2089 &_OS/eximon.conf-<ostype>_& file is also optional. The default values in
2090 &_OS/eximon.conf-Default_& can be overridden dynamically by setting environment
2091 variables of the same name, preceded by EXIMON_. For example, setting
2092 EXIMON_LOG_DEPTH in the environment overrides the value of
2093 LOG_DEPTH at run time.
2098 .section "Installing Exim binaries and scripts"
2099 .cindex "installing Exim"
2100 .cindex "BIN_DIRECTORY"
2101 The command &`make install`& runs the &(exim_install)& script with no
2102 arguments. The script copies binaries and utility scripts into the directory
2103 whose name is specified by the BIN_DIRECTORY setting in &_Local/Makefile_&.
2104 .cindex "setuid" "installing Exim with"
2105 The install script copies files only if they are newer than the files they are
2106 going to replace. The Exim binary is required to be owned by root and have the
2107 &'setuid'& bit set, for normal configurations. Therefore, you must run &`make
2108 install`& as root so that it can set up the Exim binary in this way. However, in
2109 some special situations (for example, if a host is doing no local deliveries)
2110 it may be possible to run Exim without making the binary setuid root (see
2111 chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>& for details).
2113 .cindex "CONFIGURE_FILE"
2114 Exim's run time configuration file is named by the CONFIGURE_FILE setting
2115 in &_Local/Makefile_&. If this names a single file, and the file does not
2116 exist, the default configuration file &_src/configure.default_& is copied there
2117 by the installation script. If a run time configuration file already exists, it
2118 is left alone. If CONFIGURE_FILE is a colon-separated list, naming several
2119 alternative files, no default is installed.
2121 .cindex "system aliases file"
2122 .cindex "&_/etc/aliases_&"
2123 One change is made to the default configuration file when it is installed: the
2124 default configuration contains a router that references a system aliases file.
2125 The path to this file is set to the value specified by
2126 SYSTEM_ALIASES_FILE in &_Local/Makefile_& (&_/etc/aliases_& by default).
2127 If the system aliases file does not exist, the installation script creates it,
2128 and outputs a comment to the user.
2130 The created file contains no aliases, but it does contain comments about the
2131 aliases a site should normally have. Mail aliases have traditionally been
2132 kept in &_/etc/aliases_&. However, some operating systems are now using
2133 &_/etc/mail/aliases_&. You should check if yours is one of these, and change
2134 Exim's configuration if necessary.
2136 The default configuration uses the local host's name as the only local domain,
2137 and is set up to do local deliveries into the shared directory &_/var/mail_&,
2138 running as the local user. System aliases and &_.forward_& files in users' home
2139 directories are supported, but no NIS or NIS+ support is configured. Domains
2140 other than the name of the local host are routed using the DNS, with delivery
2143 It is possible to install Exim for special purposes (such as building a binary
2144 distribution) in a private part of the file system. You can do this by a
2147 make DESTDIR=/some/directory/ install
2149 This has the effect of pre-pending the specified directory to all the file
2150 paths, except the name of the system aliases file that appears in the default
2151 configuration. (If a default alias file is created, its name &'is'& modified.)
2152 For backwards compatibility, ROOT is used if DESTDIR is not set,
2153 but this usage is deprecated.
2155 .cindex "installing Exim" "what is not installed"
2156 Running &'make install'& does not copy the Exim 4 conversion script
2157 &'convert4r4'&, or the &'pcretest'& test program. You will probably run the
2158 first of these only once (if you are upgrading from Exim 3), and the second
2159 isn't really part of Exim. None of the documentation files in the &_doc_&
2160 directory are copied, except for the info files when you have set
2161 INFO_DIRECTORY, as described in section &<<SECTinsinfdoc>>& below.
2163 For the utility programs, old versions are renamed by adding the suffix &_.O_&
2164 to their names. The Exim binary itself, however, is handled differently. It is
2165 installed under a name that includes the version number and the compile number,
2166 for example &_exim-&version;-1_&. The script then arranges for a symbolic link
2167 called &_exim_& to point to the binary. If you are updating a previous version
2168 of Exim, the script takes care to ensure that the name &_exim_& is never absent
2169 from the directory (as seen by other processes).
2171 .cindex "installing Exim" "testing the script"
2172 If you want to see what the &'make install'& will do before running it for
2173 real, you can pass the &%-n%& option to the installation script by this
2176 make INSTALL_ARG=-n install
2178 The contents of the variable INSTALL_ARG are passed to the installation
2179 script. You do not need to be root to run this test. Alternatively, you can run
2180 the installation script directly, but this must be from within the build
2181 directory. For example, from the top-level Exim directory you could use this
2184 (cd build-SunOS5-5.5.1-sparc; ../scripts/exim_install -n)
2186 .cindex "installing Exim" "install script options"
2187 There are two other options that can be supplied to the installation script.
2190 &%-no_chown%& bypasses the call to change the owner of the installed binary
2191 to root, and the call to make it a setuid binary.
2193 &%-no_symlink%& bypasses the setting up of the symbolic link &_exim_& to the
2197 INSTALL_ARG can be used to pass these options to the script. For example:
2199 make INSTALL_ARG=-no_symlink install
2201 The installation script can also be given arguments specifying which files are
2202 to be copied. For example, to install just the Exim binary, and nothing else,
2203 without creating the symbolic link, you could use:
2205 make INSTALL_ARG='-no_symlink exim' install
2210 .section "Installing info documentation" "SECTinsinfdoc"
2211 .cindex "installing Exim" "&'info'& documentation"
2212 Not all systems use the GNU &'info'& system for documentation, and for this
2213 reason, the Texinfo source of Exim's documentation is not included in the main
2214 distribution. Instead it is available separately from the ftp site (see section
2217 If you have defined INFO_DIRECTORY in &_Local/Makefile_& and the Texinfo
2218 source of the documentation is found in the source tree, running &`make
2219 install`& automatically builds the info files and installs them.
2223 .section "Setting up the spool directory"
2224 .cindex "spool directory" "creating"
2225 When it starts up, Exim tries to create its spool directory if it does not
2226 exist. The Exim uid and gid are used for the owner and group of the spool
2227 directory. Sub-directories are automatically created in the spool directory as
2234 .cindex "testing" "installation"
2235 Having installed Exim, you can check that the run time configuration file is
2236 syntactically valid by running the following command, which assumes that the
2237 Exim binary directory is within your PATH environment variable:
2241 If there are any errors in the configuration file, Exim outputs error messages.
2242 Otherwise it outputs the version number and build date,
2243 the DBM library that is being used, and information about which drivers and
2244 other optional code modules are included in the binary.
2245 Some simple routing tests can be done by using the address testing option. For
2248 &`exim -bt`& <&'local username'&>
2250 should verify that it recognizes a local mailbox, and
2252 &`exim -bt`& <&'remote address'&>
2254 a remote one. Then try getting it to deliver mail, both locally and remotely.
2255 This can be done by passing messages directly to Exim, without going through a
2256 user agent. For example:
2258 exim -v postmaster@your.domain.example
2259 From: user@your.domain.example
2260 To: postmaster@your.domain.example
2261 Subject: Testing Exim
2263 This is a test message.
2266 The &%-v%& option causes Exim to output some verification of what it is doing.
2267 In this case you should see copies of three log lines, one for the message's
2268 arrival, one for its delivery, and one containing &"Completed"&.
2270 .cindex "delivery" "problems with"
2271 If you encounter problems, look at Exim's log files (&'mainlog'& and
2272 &'paniclog'&) to see if there is any relevant information there. Another source
2273 of information is running Exim with debugging turned on, by specifying the
2274 &%-d%& option. If a message is stuck on Exim's spool, you can force a delivery
2275 with debugging turned on by a command of the form
2277 &`exim -d -M`& <&'exim-message-id'&>
2279 You must be root or an &"admin user"& in order to do this. The &%-d%& option
2280 produces rather a lot of output, but you can cut this down to specific areas.
2281 For example, if you use &%-d-all+route%& only the debugging information
2282 relevant to routing is included. (See the &%-d%& option in chapter
2283 &<<CHAPcommandline>>& for more details.)
2285 .cindex '&"sticky"& bit'
2286 .cindex "lock files"
2287 One specific problem that has shown up on some sites is the inability to do
2288 local deliveries into a shared mailbox directory, because it does not have the
2289 &"sticky bit"& set on it. By default, Exim tries to create a lock file before
2290 writing to a mailbox file, and if it cannot create the lock file, the delivery
2291 is deferred. You can get round this either by setting the &"sticky bit"& on the
2292 directory, or by setting a specific group for local deliveries and allowing
2293 that group to create files in the directory (see the comments above the
2294 &(local_delivery)& transport in the default configuration file). Another
2295 approach is to configure Exim not to use lock files, but just to rely on
2296 &[fcntl()]& locking instead. However, you should do this only if all user
2297 agents also use &[fcntl()]& locking. For further discussion of locking issues,
2298 see chapter &<<CHAPappendfile>>&.
2300 One thing that cannot be tested on a system that is already running an MTA is
2301 the receipt of incoming SMTP mail on the standard SMTP port. However, the
2302 &%-oX%& option can be used to run an Exim daemon that listens on some other
2303 port, or &'inetd'& can be used to do this. The &%-bh%& option and the
2304 &'exim_checkaccess'& utility can be used to check out policy controls on
2307 Testing a new version on a system that is already running Exim can most easily
2308 be done by building a binary with a different CONFIGURE_FILE setting. From
2309 within the run time configuration, all other file and directory names
2310 that Exim uses can be altered, in order to keep it entirely clear of the
2314 .section "Replacing another MTA with Exim"
2315 .cindex "replacing another MTA"
2316 Building and installing Exim for the first time does not of itself put it in
2317 general use. The name by which the system's MTA is called by mail user agents
2318 is either &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&, or &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& (depending on the
2319 operating system), and it is necessary to make this name point to the &'exim'&
2320 binary in order to get the user agents to pass messages to Exim. This is
2321 normally done by renaming any existing file and making &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&
2322 or &_/usr/lib/sendmail_&
2323 .cindex "symbolic link" "to &'exim'& binary"
2324 a symbolic link to the &'exim'& binary. It is a good idea to remove any setuid
2325 privilege and executable status from the old MTA. It is then necessary to stop
2326 and restart the mailer daemon, if one is running.
2328 .cindex "FreeBSD" "MTA indirection"
2329 .cindex "&_/etc/mail/mailer.conf_&"
2330 Some operating systems have introduced alternative ways of switching MTAs. For
2331 example, if you are running FreeBSD, you need to edit the file
2332 &_/etc/mail/mailer.conf_& instead of setting up a symbolic link as just
2333 described. A typical example of the contents of this file for running Exim is
2336 sendmail /usr/exim/bin/exim
2337 send-mail /usr/exim/bin/exim
2338 mailq /usr/exim/bin/exim -bp
2339 newaliases /usr/bin/true
2341 Once you have set up the symbolic link, or edited &_/etc/mail/mailer.conf_&,
2342 your Exim installation is &"live"&. Check it by sending a message from your
2343 favourite user agent.
2345 You should consider what to tell your users about the change of MTA. Exim may
2346 have different capabilities to what was previously running, and there are
2347 various operational differences such as the text of messages produced by
2348 command line options and in bounce messages. If you allow your users to make
2349 use of Exim's filtering capabilities, you should make the document entitled
2350 &'Exim's interface to mail filtering'& available to them.
2354 .section "Upgrading Exim"
2355 .cindex "upgrading Exim"
2356 If you are already running Exim on your host, building and installing a new
2357 version automatically makes it available to MUAs, or any other programs that
2358 call the MTA directly. However, if you are running an Exim daemon, you do need
2359 to send it a HUP signal, to make it re-execute itself, and thereby pick up the
2360 new binary. You do not need to stop processing mail in order to install a new
2361 version of Exim. The install script does not modify an existing runtime
2367 .section "Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris"
2368 .cindex "Solaris" "stopping Exim on"
2369 The standard command for stopping the mailer daemon on Solaris is
2371 /etc/init.d/sendmail stop
2373 If &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& has been turned into a symbolic link, this script
2374 fails to stop Exim because it uses the command &'ps -e'& and greps the output
2375 for the text &"sendmail"&; this is not present because the actual program name
2376 (that is, &"exim"&) is given by the &'ps'& command with these options. A
2377 solution is to replace the line that finds the process id with something like
2379 pid=`cat /var/spool/exim/exim-daemon.pid`
2381 to obtain the daemon's pid directly from the file that Exim saves it in.
2383 Note, however, that stopping the daemon does not &"stop Exim"&. Messages can
2384 still be received from local processes, and if automatic delivery is configured
2385 (the normal case), deliveries will still occur.
2390 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2391 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2393 .chapter "The Exim command line" "CHAPcommandline"
2394 .cindex "command line" "options"
2395 .cindex "options" "command line"
2396 Exim's command line takes the standard Unix form of a sequence of options,
2397 each starting with a hyphen character, followed by a number of arguments. The
2398 options are compatible with the main options of Sendmail, and there are also
2399 some additional options, some of which are compatible with Smail 3. Certain
2400 combinations of options do not make sense, and provoke an error if used.
2401 The form of the arguments depends on which options are set.
2404 .section "Setting options by program name"
2406 If Exim is called under the name &'mailq'&, it behaves as if the option &%-bp%&
2407 were present before any other options.
2408 The &%-bp%& option requests a listing of the contents of the mail queue on the
2410 This feature is for compatibility with some systems that contain a command of
2411 that name in one of the standard libraries, symbolically linked to
2412 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& or &_/usr/lib/sendmail_&.
2415 If Exim is called under the name &'rsmtp'& it behaves as if the option &%-bS%&
2416 were present before any other options, for compatibility with Smail. The
2417 &%-bS%& option is used for reading in a number of messages in batched SMTP
2421 If Exim is called under the name &'rmail'& it behaves as if the &%-i%& and
2422 &%-oee%& options were present before any other options, for compatibility with
2423 Smail. The name &'rmail'& is used as an interface by some UUCP systems.
2426 .cindex "queue runner"
2427 If Exim is called under the name &'runq'& it behaves as if the option &%-q%&
2428 were present before any other options, for compatibility with Smail. The &%-q%&
2429 option causes a single queue runner process to be started.
2431 .cindex "&'newaliases'&"
2432 .cindex "alias file" "building"
2433 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "calling Exim as &'newaliases'&"
2434 If Exim is called under the name &'newaliases'& it behaves as if the option
2435 &%-bi%& were present before any other options, for compatibility with Sendmail.
2436 This option is used for rebuilding Sendmail's alias file. Exim does not have
2437 the concept of a single alias file, but can be configured to run a given
2438 command if called with the &%-bi%& option.
2441 .section "Trusted and admin users" "SECTtrustedadmin"
2442 Some Exim options are available only to &'trusted users'& and others are
2443 available only to &'admin users'&. In the description below, the phrases &"Exim
2444 user"& and &"Exim group"& mean the user and group defined by EXIM_USER and
2445 EXIM_GROUP in &_Local/Makefile_& or set by the &%exim_user%& and
2446 &%exim_group%& options. These do not necessarily have to use the name &"exim"&.
2449 .cindex "trusted user" "definition of"
2450 .cindex "user" "trusted definition of"
2451 The trusted users are root, the Exim user, any user listed in the
2452 &%trusted_users%& configuration option, and any user whose current group or any
2453 supplementary group is one of those listed in the &%trusted_groups%&
2454 configuration option. Note that the Exim group is not automatically trusted.
2456 .cindex '&"From"& line'
2457 .cindex "envelope sender"
2458 Trusted users are always permitted to use the &%-f%& option or a leading
2459 &"From&~"& line to specify the envelope sender of a message that is passed to
2460 Exim through the local interface (see the &%-bm%& and &%-f%& options below).
2461 See the &%untrusted_set_sender%& option for a way of permitting non-trusted
2462 users to set envelope senders.
2464 .cindex "&'From:'& header line"
2465 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line"
2466 For a trusted user, there is never any check on the contents of the &'From:'&
2467 header line, and a &'Sender:'& line is never added. Furthermore, any existing
2468 &'Sender:'& line in incoming local (non-TCP/IP) messages is not removed.
2470 Trusted users may also specify a host name, host address, interface address,
2471 protocol name, ident value, and authentication data when submitting a message
2472 locally. Thus, they are able to insert messages into Exim's queue locally that
2473 have the characteristics of messages received from a remote host. Untrusted
2474 users may in some circumstances use &%-f%&, but can never set the other values
2475 that are available to trusted users.
2477 .cindex "user" "admin definition of"
2478 .cindex "admin user" "definition of"
2479 The admin users are root, the Exim user, and any user that is a member of the
2480 Exim group or of any group listed in the &%admin_groups%& configuration option.
2481 The current group does not have to be one of these groups.
2483 Admin users are permitted to list the queue, and to carry out certain
2484 operations on messages, for example, to force delivery failures. It is also
2485 necessary to be an admin user in order to see the full information provided by
2486 the Exim monitor, and full debugging output.
2488 By default, the use of the &%-M%&, &%-q%&, &%-R%&, and &%-S%& options to cause
2489 Exim to attempt delivery of messages on its queue is restricted to admin users.
2490 However, this restriction can be relaxed by setting the &%prod_requires_admin%&
2491 option false (that is, specifying &%no_prod_requires_admin%&).
2493 Similarly, the use of the &%-bp%& option to list all the messages in the queue
2494 is restricted to admin users unless &%queue_list_requires_admin%& is set
2499 &*Warning*&: If you configure your system so that admin users are able to
2500 edit Exim's configuration file, you are giving those users an easy way of
2501 getting root. There is further discussion of this issue at the start of chapter
2507 .section "Command line options"
2508 The command options are described in alphabetical order below.
2510 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2511 . Insert a stylized XML comment here, to identify the start of the command line
2512 . options. This is for the benefit of the Perl script that automatically
2513 . creates a man page for the options.
2514 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2517 <!-- === Start of command line options === -->
2524 .cindex "options" "command line; terminating"
2525 This is a pseudo-option whose only purpose is to terminate the options and
2526 therefore to cause subsequent command line items to be treated as arguments
2527 rather than options, even if they begin with hyphens.
2530 .oindex "&%--help%&"
2531 This option causes Exim to output a few sentences stating what it is.
2532 The same output is generated if the Exim binary is called with no options and
2535 .vitem &%-B%&<&'type'&>
2537 .cindex "8-bit characters"
2538 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "8-bit characters"
2539 This is a Sendmail option for selecting 7 or 8 bit processing. Exim is 8-bit
2540 clean; it ignores this option.
2545 .cindex "SMTP listener"
2546 .cindex "queue runner"
2547 This option runs Exim as a daemon, awaiting incoming SMTP connections. Usually
2548 the &%-bd%& option is combined with the &%-q%&<&'time'&> option, to specify
2549 that the daemon should also initiate periodic queue runs.
2551 The &%-bd%& option can be used only by an admin user. If either of the &%-d%&
2552 (debugging) or &%-v%& (verifying) options are set, the daemon does not
2553 disconnect from the controlling terminal. When running this way, it can be
2554 stopped by pressing ctrl-C.
2556 By default, Exim listens for incoming connections to the standard SMTP port on
2557 all the host's running interfaces. However, it is possible to listen on other
2558 ports, on multiple ports, and only on specific interfaces. Chapter
2559 &<<CHAPinterfaces>>& contains a description of the options that control this.
2561 When a listening daemon
2562 .cindex "daemon" "process id (pid)"
2563 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of daemon"
2564 is started without the use of &%-oX%& (that is, without overriding the normal
2565 configuration), it writes its process id to a file called &_exim-daemon.pid_&
2566 in Exim's spool directory. This location can be overridden by setting
2567 PID_FILE_PATH in &_Local/Makefile_&. The file is written while Exim is still
2570 When &%-oX%& is used on the command line to start a listening daemon, the
2571 process id is not written to the normal pid file path. However, &%-oP%& can be
2572 used to specify a path on the command line if a pid file is required.
2576 can be used to cause the daemon to re-exec itself. This should be done whenever
2577 Exim's configuration file, or any file that is incorporated into it by means of
2578 the &%.include%& facility, is changed, and also whenever a new version of Exim
2579 is installed. It is not necessary to do this when other files that are
2580 referenced from the configuration (for example, alias files) are changed,
2581 because these are reread each time they are used.
2585 This option has the same effect as &%-bd%& except that it never disconnects
2586 from the controlling terminal, even when no debugging is specified.
2590 .cindex "testing" "string expansion"
2591 .cindex "expansion" "testing"
2592 Run Exim in expansion testing mode. Exim discards its root privilege, to
2593 prevent ordinary users from using this mode to read otherwise inaccessible
2594 files. If no arguments are given, Exim runs interactively, prompting for lines
2595 of data. &new("Otherwise, it processes each argument in turn.")
2597 If Exim was built with USE_READLINE=yes in &_Local/Makefile_&, it tries
2598 to load the &%libreadline%& library dynamically whenever the &%-be%& option is
2599 used without command line arguments. If successful, it uses the &[readline()]&
2600 function, which provides extensive line-editing facilities, for reading the
2601 test data. A line history is supported.
2603 Long expansion expressions can be split over several lines by using backslash
2604 continuations. As in Exim's run time configuration, white space at the start of
2605 continuation lines is ignored. Each argument or data line is passed through the
2606 string expansion mechanism, and the result is output. Variable values from the
2607 configuration file (for example, &$qualify_domain$&) are available, but no
2608 message-specific values (such as &$domain$&) are set, because no message is
2612 &*Note*&: If you use this mechanism to test lookups, and you change the data
2613 files or databases you are using, you must exit and restart Exim before trying
2614 the same lookup again. Otherwise, because each Exim process caches the results
2615 of lookups, you will just get the same result as before.
2618 .vitem &%-bF%&&~<&'filename'&>
2620 .cindex "system filter" "testing"
2621 .cindex "testing" "system filter"
2622 This option is the same as &%-bf%& except that it assumes that the filter being
2623 tested is a system filter. The additional commands that are available only in
2624 system filters are recognized.
2626 .vitem &%-bf%&&~<&'filename'&>
2628 .cindex "filter" "testing"
2629 .cindex "testing" "filter file"
2630 .cindex "forward file" "testing"
2631 .cindex "testing" "forward file"
2632 .cindex "Sieve filter" "testing"
2633 This option runs Exim in user filter testing mode; the file is the filter file
2634 to be tested, and a test message must be supplied on the standard input. If
2635 there are no message-dependent tests in the filter, an empty file can be
2638 If you want to test a system filter file, use &%-bF%& instead of &%-bf%&. You
2639 can use both &%-bF%& and &%-bf%& on the same command, in order to test a system
2640 filter and a user filter in the same run. For example:
2642 exim -bF /system/filter -bf /user/filter </test/message
2644 This is helpful when the system filter adds header lines or sets filter
2645 variables that are used by the user filter.
2647 If the test filter file does not begin with one of the special lines
2652 it is taken to be a normal &_.forward_& file, and is tested for validity under
2653 that interpretation. See sections &<<SECTitenonfilred>>& to
2654 &<<SECTspecitredli>>& for a description of the possible contents of non-filter
2657 The result of an Exim command that uses &%-bf%&, provided no errors are
2658 detected, is a list of the actions that Exim would try to take if presented
2659 with the message for real. More details of filter testing are given in the
2660 separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'&.
2662 When testing a filter file,
2663 .cindex "&""From""& line"
2664 .cindex "envelope sender"
2665 .cindex "&%-f%& option" "for filter testing"
2666 the envelope sender can be set by the &%-f%& option,
2667 or by a &"From&~"& line at the start of the test message. Various parameters
2668 that would normally be taken from the envelope recipient address of the message
2669 can be set by means of additional command line options (see the next four
2672 .vitem &%-bfd%&&~<&'domain'&>
2674 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
2675 This sets the domain of the recipient address when a filter file is being
2676 tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is the value of
2679 .vitem &%-bfl%&&~<&'local&~part'&>
2681 This sets the local part of the recipient address when a filter file is being
2682 tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is the username of the
2683 process that calls Exim. A local part should be specified with any prefix or
2684 suffix stripped, because that is how it appears to the filter when a message is
2685 actually being delivered.
2687 .vitem &%-bfp%&&~<&'prefix'&>
2689 This sets the prefix of the local part of the recipient address when a filter
2690 file is being tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is an empty
2693 .vitem &%-bfs%&&~<&'suffix'&>
2695 This sets the suffix of the local part of the recipient address when a filter
2696 file is being tested by means of the &%-bf%& option. The default is an empty
2699 .vitem &%-bh%&&~<&'IP&~address'&>
2701 .cindex "testing" "incoming SMTP"
2702 .cindex "SMTP" "testing incoming"
2703 .cindex "testing" "relay control"
2704 .cindex "relaying" "testing configuration"
2705 .cindex "policy control" "testing"
2706 .cindex "debugging" "&%-bh%& option"
2707 This option runs a fake SMTP session as if from the given IP address, using the
2708 standard input and output. The IP address may include a port number at the end,
2709 after a full stop. For example:
2711 exim -bh 10.9.8.7.1234
2712 exim -bh fe80::a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678
2714 When an IPv6 address is given, it is converted into canonical form. In the case
2715 of the second example above, the value of &$sender_host_address$& after
2716 conversion to the canonical form is
2717 &`fe80:0000:0000:0a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678`&.
2719 Comments as to what is going on are written to the standard error file. These
2720 include lines beginning with &"LOG"& for anything that would have been logged.
2721 This facility is provided for testing configuration options for incoming
2722 messages, to make sure they implement the required policy. For example, you can
2723 test your relay controls using &%-bh%&.
2727 You cannot test features of the configuration that rely on
2728 ident (RFC 1413) callouts. These cannot be done when testing using
2729 &%-bh%& because there is no incoming SMTP connection.
2731 &*Warning 2*&: Address verification callouts (see section &<<SECTcallver>>&)
2732 are also skipped when testing using &%-bh%&. If you want these callouts to
2733 occur, use &%-bhc%& instead.
2735 Messages supplied during the testing session are discarded, and nothing is
2736 written to any of the real log files. There may be pauses when DNS (and other)
2737 lookups are taking place, and of course these may time out. The &%-oMi%& option
2738 can be used to specify a specific IP interface and port if this is important.
2740 The &'exim_checkaccess'& utility is a &"packaged"& version of &%-bh%& whose
2741 output just states whether a given recipient address from a given host is
2742 acceptable or not. See section &<<SECTcheckaccess>>&.
2744 .vitem &%-bhc%&&~<&'IP&~address'&>
2746 This option operates in the same way as &%-bh%&, except that address
2747 verification callouts are performed if required. This includes consulting and
2748 updating the callout cache database.
2752 .cindex "alias file" "building"
2753 .cindex "building alias file"
2754 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-bi%& option"
2755 Sendmail interprets the &%-bi%& option as a request to rebuild its alias file.
2756 Exim does not have the concept of a single alias file, and so it cannot mimic
2757 this behaviour. However, calls to &_/usr/lib/sendmail_& with the &%-bi%& option
2758 tend to appear in various scripts such as NIS make files, so the option must be
2761 If &%-bi%& is encountered, the command specified by the &%bi_command%&
2762 configuration option is run, under the uid and gid of the caller of Exim. If
2763 the &%-oA%& option is used, its value is passed to the command as an argument.
2764 The command set by &%bi_command%& may not contain arguments. The command can
2765 use the &'exim_dbmbuild'& utility, or some other means, to rebuild alias files
2766 if this is required. If the &%bi_command%& option is not set, calling Exim with
2771 .cindex "local message reception"
2772 This option runs an Exim receiving process that accepts an incoming,
2773 locally-generated message on the current input. The recipients are given as the
2774 command arguments (except when &%-t%& is also present &-- see below). Each
2775 argument can be a comma-separated list of RFC 2822 addresses. This is the
2776 default option for selecting the overall action of an Exim call; it is assumed
2777 if no other conflicting option is present.
2779 If any addresses in the message are unqualified (have no domain), they are
2780 qualified by the values of the &%qualify_domain%& or &%qualify_recipient%&
2781 options, as appropriate. The &%-bnq%& option (see below) provides a way of
2782 suppressing this for special cases.
2784 Policy checks on the contents of local messages can be enforced by means of
2785 the non-SMTP ACL. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for details.
2787 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bm%&"
2788 The return code is zero if the message is successfully accepted. Otherwise, the
2789 action is controlled by the &%-oe%&&'x'& option setting &-- see below.
2792 .cindex "message" "format"
2793 .cindex "format" "message"
2794 .cindex "&""From""& line"
2795 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
2796 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&""From""& line"
2797 of the message must be as defined in RFC 2822, except that, for
2798 compatibility with Sendmail and Smail, a line in one of the forms
2800 From sender Fri Jan 5 12:55 GMT 1997
2801 From sender Fri, 5 Jan 97 12:55:01
2803 (with the weekday optional, and possibly with additional text after the date)
2804 is permitted to appear at the start of the message. There appears to be no
2805 authoritative specification of the format of this line. Exim recognizes it by
2806 matching against the regular expression defined by the &%uucp_from_pattern%&
2807 option, which can be changed if necessary.
2810 .cindex "&%-f%& option" "overriding &""From""& line"
2811 specified sender is treated as if it were given as the argument to the
2812 &%-f%& option, but if a &%-f%& option is also present, its argument is used in
2813 preference to the address taken from the message. The caller of Exim must be a
2814 trusted user for the sender of a message to be set in this way.
2818 .cindex "address qualification" "suppressing"
2819 By default, Exim automatically qualifies unqualified addresses (those
2820 without domains) that appear in messages that are submitted locally (that
2821 is, not over TCP/IP). This qualification applies both to addresses in
2822 envelopes, and addresses in header lines. Sender addresses are qualified using
2823 &%qualify_domain%&, and recipient addresses using &%qualify_recipient%& (which
2824 defaults to the value of &%qualify_domain%&).
2826 Sometimes, qualification is not wanted. For example, if &%-bS%& (batch SMTP) is
2827 being used to re-submit messages that originally came from remote hosts after
2828 content scanning, you probably do not want to qualify unqualified addresses in
2829 header lines. (Such lines will be present only if you have not enabled a header
2830 syntax check in the appropriate ACL.)
2832 The &%-bnq%& option suppresses all qualification of unqualified addresses in
2833 messages that originate on the local host. When this is used, unqualified
2834 addresses in the envelope provoke errors (causing message rejection) and
2835 unqualified addresses in header lines are left alone.
2840 .cindex "configuration options" "extracting"
2841 .cindex "options" "configuration &-- extracting"
2842 If this option is given with no arguments, it causes the values of all Exim's
2843 main configuration options to be written to the standard output. The values
2844 of one or more specific options can be requested by giving their names as
2845 arguments, for example:
2847 exim -bP qualify_domain hold_domains
2849 However, any option setting that is preceded by the word &"hide"& in the
2850 configuration file is not shown in full, except to an admin user. For other
2851 users, the output is as in this example:
2853 mysql_servers = <value not displayable>
2855 If &%configure_file%& is given as an argument, the name of the run time
2856 configuration file is output.
2857 If a list of configuration files was supplied, the value that is output here
2858 is the name of the file that was actually used.
2860 .cindex "daemon" "process id (pid)"
2861 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of daemon"
2862 If &%log_file_path%& or &%pid_file_path%& are given, the names of the
2863 directories where log files and daemon pid files are written are output,
2864 respectively. If these values are unset, log files are written in a
2865 sub-directory of the spool directory called &%log%&, and the pid file is
2866 written directly into the spool directory.
2868 If &%-bP%& is followed by a name preceded by &`+`&, for example,
2870 exim -bP +local_domains
2872 it searches for a matching named list of any type (domain, host, address, or
2873 local part) and outputs what it finds.
2875 .cindex "options" "router &-- extracting"
2876 .cindex "options" "transport &-- extracting"
2877 If one of the words &%router%&, &%transport%&, or &%authenticator%& is given,
2878 followed by the name of an appropriate driver instance, the option settings for
2879 that driver are output. For example:
2881 exim -bP transport local_delivery
2883 The generic driver options are output first, followed by the driver's private
2884 options. A list of the names of drivers of a particular type can be obtained by
2885 using one of the words &%router_list%&, &%transport_list%&, or
2886 &%authenticator_list%&, and a complete list of all drivers with their option
2887 settings can be obtained by using &%routers%&, &%transports%&, or
2893 .cindex "queue" "listing messages on"
2894 .cindex "listing" "messages on the queue"
2895 This option requests a listing of the contents of the mail queue on the
2896 standard output. If the &%-bp%& option is followed by a list of message ids,
2897 just those messages are listed. By default, this option can be used only by an
2898 admin user. However, the &%queue_list_requires_admin%& option can be set false
2899 to allow any user to see the queue.
2901 Each message on the queue is displayed as in the following example:
2903 25m 2.9K 0t5C6f-0000c8-00 <alice@wonderland.fict.example>
2904 red.king@looking-glass.fict.example
2907 .cindex "message" "size in queue listing"
2908 .cindex "size" "of message"
2909 The first line contains the length of time the message has been on the queue
2910 (in this case 25 minutes), the size of the message (2.9K), the unique local
2911 identifier for the message, and the message sender, as contained in the
2912 envelope. For bounce messages, the sender address is empty, and appears as
2913 &"<>"&. If the message was submitted locally by an untrusted user who overrode
2914 the default sender address, the user's login name is shown in parentheses
2915 before the sender address.
2917 .cindex "frozen messages" "in queue listing"
2918 If the message is frozen (attempts to deliver it are suspended) then the text
2919 &"*** frozen ***"& is displayed at the end of this line.
2921 The recipients of the message (taken from the envelope, not the headers) are
2922 displayed on subsequent lines. Those addresses to which the message has already
2923 been delivered are marked with the letter D. If an original address gets
2924 expanded into several addresses via an alias or forward file, the original is
2925 displayed with a D only when deliveries for all of its child addresses are
2931 This option operates like &%-bp%&, but in addition it shows delivered addresses
2932 that were generated from the original top level address(es) in each message by
2933 alias or forwarding operations. These addresses are flagged with &"+D"& instead
2939 .cindex "queue" "count of messages on"
2940 This option counts the number of messages on the queue, and writes the total
2941 to the standard output. It is restricted to admin users, unless
2942 &%queue_list_requires_admin%& is set false.
2947 This option operates like &%-bp%&, but the output is not sorted into
2948 chronological order of message arrival. This can speed it up when there are
2949 lots of messages on the queue, and is particularly useful if the output is
2950 going to be post-processed in a way that doesn't need the sorting.
2954 This option is a combination of &%-bpr%& and &%-bpa%&.
2958 This option is a combination of &%-bpr%& and &%-bpu%&.
2963 This option operates like &%-bp%& but shows only undelivered top-level
2964 addresses for each message displayed. Addresses generated by aliasing or
2965 forwarding are not shown, unless the message was deferred after processing by a
2966 router with the &%one_time%& option set.
2971 .cindex "testing" "retry configuration"
2972 .cindex "retry" "configuration testing"
2973 This option is for testing retry rules, and it must be followed by up to three
2974 arguments. It causes Exim to look for a retry rule that matches the values
2975 and to write it to the standard output. For example:
2977 exim -brt bach.comp.mus.example
2978 Retry rule: *.comp.mus.example F,2h,15m; F,4d,30m;
2980 See chapter &<<CHAPretry>>& for a description of Exim's retry rules. The first
2981 argument, which is required, can be a complete address in the form
2982 &'local_part@domain'&, or it can be just a domain name. The second argument is
2983 an optional second domain name; if no retry rule is found for the first
2984 argument, the second is tried. This ties in with Exim's behaviour when looking
2985 for retry rules for remote hosts &-- if no rule is found that matches the host,
2986 one that matches the mail domain is sought. The final argument is the name of a
2987 specific delivery error, as used in setting up retry rules, for example
2992 .cindex "testing" "rewriting"
2993 .cindex "rewriting" "testing"
2994 This option is for testing address rewriting rules, and it must be followed by
2995 a single argument, consisting of either a local part without a domain, or a
2996 complete address with a fully qualified domain. Exim outputs how this address
2997 would be rewritten for each possible place it might appear. See chapter
2998 &<<CHAPrewrite>>& for further details.
3002 .cindex "SMTP" "batched incoming"
3003 .cindex "batched SMTP input"
3004 This option is used for batched SMTP input, which is an alternative interface
3005 for non-interactive local message submission. A number of messages can be
3006 submitted in a single run. However, despite its name, this is not really SMTP
3007 input. Exim reads each message's envelope from SMTP commands on the standard
3008 input, but generates no responses. If the caller is trusted, or
3009 &%untrusted_set_sender%& is set, the senders in the SMTP MAIL commands are
3010 believed; otherwise the sender is always the caller of Exim.
3012 The message itself is read from the standard input, in SMTP format (leading
3013 dots doubled), terminated by a line containing just a single dot. An error is
3014 provoked if the terminating dot is missing. A further message may then follow.
3016 As for other local message submissions, the contents of incoming batch SMTP
3017 messages can be checked using the non-SMTP ACL (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&).
3018 Unqualified addresses are automatically qualified using &%qualify_domain%& and
3019 &%qualify_recipient%&, as appropriate, unless the &%-bnq%& option is used.
3021 Some other SMTP commands are recognized in the input. HELO and EHLO act
3022 as RSET; VRFY, EXPN, ETRN, and HELP act as NOOP;
3023 QUIT quits, ignoring the rest of the standard input.
3025 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bS%&"
3026 If any error is encountered, reports are written to the standard output and
3027 error streams, and Exim gives up immediately. The return code is 0 if no error
3028 was detected; it is 1 if one or more messages were accepted before the error
3029 was detected; otherwise it is 2.
3031 More details of input using batched SMTP are given in section
3032 &<<SECTincomingbatchedSMTP>>&.
3036 .cindex "SMTP" "local input"
3037 .cindex "local SMTP input"
3038 This option causes Exim to accept one or more messages by reading SMTP commands
3039 on the standard input, and producing SMTP replies on the standard output. SMTP
3040 policy controls, as defined in ACLs (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&) are applied.
3041 Some user agents use this interface as a way of passing locally-generated
3042 messages to the MTA.
3045 .cindex "sender" "source of"
3046 this usage, if the caller of Exim is trusted, or &%untrusted_set_sender%& is
3047 set, the senders of messages are taken from the SMTP MAIL commands.
3048 Otherwise the content of these commands is ignored and the sender is set up as
3049 the calling user. Unqualified addresses are automatically qualified using
3050 &%qualify_domain%& and &%qualify_recipient%&, as appropriate, unless the
3051 &%-bnq%& option is used.
3055 &%-bs%& option is also used to run Exim from &'inetd'&, as an alternative to
3056 using a listening daemon. Exim can distinguish the two cases by checking
3057 whether the standard input is a TCP/IP socket. When Exim is called from
3058 &'inetd'&, the source of the mail is assumed to be remote, and the comments
3059 above concerning senders and qualification do not apply. In this situation,
3060 Exim behaves in exactly the same way as it does when receiving a message via
3061 the listening daemon.
3065 .cindex "testing" "addresses"
3066 .cindex "address" "testing"
3067 This option runs Exim in address testing mode, in which each argument is taken
3068 as an address to be tested for deliverability. The results are written to the
3069 standard output. If a test fails, and the caller is not an admin user, no
3070 details of the failure are output, because these might contain sensitive
3071 information such as usernames and passwords for database lookups.
3073 If no arguments are given, Exim runs in an interactive manner, prompting with a
3074 right angle bracket for addresses to be tested.
3076 Unlike the &%-be%& test option, you cannot arrange for Exim to use the
3077 &[readline()]& function, because it is running as &'root'& and there are
3080 Each address is handled as if it were the recipient address of a message
3081 (compare the &%-bv%& option). It is passed to the routers and the result is
3082 written to the standard output. However, any router that has
3083 &%no_address_test%& set is bypassed. This can make &%-bt%& easier to use for
3084 genuine routing tests if your first router passes everything to a scanner
3088 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bt%&"
3089 return code is 2 if any address failed outright; it is 1 if no address
3090 failed outright but at least one could not be resolved for some reason. Return
3091 code 0 is given only when all addresses succeed.
3093 &*Warning*&: &%-bt%& can only do relatively simple testing. If any of the
3094 routers in the configuration makes any tests on the sender address of a
3096 .cindex "&%-f%& option" "for address testing"
3097 you can use the &%-f%& option to set an appropriate sender when running
3098 &%-bt%& tests. Without it, the sender is assumed to be the calling user at the
3099 default qualifying domain. However, if you have set up (for example) routers
3100 whose behaviour depends on the contents of an incoming message, you cannot test
3101 those conditions using &%-bt%&. The &%-N%& option provides a possible way of
3106 .cindex "version number of Exim" "verifying"
3107 This option causes Exim to write the current version number, compilation
3108 number, and compilation date of the &'exim'& binary to the standard output.
3109 It also lists the DBM library this is being used, the optional modules (such as
3110 specific lookup types), the drivers that are included in the binary, and the
3111 name of the run time configuration file that is in use.
3113 As part of its operation, &%-bV%& causes Exim to read and syntax check its
3114 configuration file. However, this is a static check only. It cannot check
3115 values that are to be expanded. For example, although a misspelt ACL verb is
3116 detected, an error in the verb's arguments is not. You cannot rely on &%-bV%&
3117 alone to discover (for example) all the typos in the configuration; some
3118 realistic testing is needed. The &%-bh%& and &%-N%& options provide more
3119 dynamic testing facilities.
3123 .cindex "verifying address" "using &%-bv%&"
3124 .cindex "address" "verification"
3125 This option runs Exim in address verification mode, in which each argument is
3126 taken as an address to be verified. During normal operation, verification
3127 happens mostly as a consequence processing a &%verify%& condition in an ACL
3128 (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&). If you want to test an entire ACL, see the &%-bh%&
3131 If verification fails, and the caller is not an admin user, no details of the
3132 failure are output, because these might contain sensitive information such as
3133 usernames and passwords for database lookups.
3135 If no arguments are given, Exim runs in an interactive manner, prompting with a
3136 right angle bracket for addresses to be verified.
3138 Unlike the &%-be%& test option, you cannot arrange for Exim to use the
3139 &[readline()]& function, because it is running as &'exim'& and there are
3142 Verification differs from address testing (the &%-bt%& option) in that routers
3143 that have &%no_verify%& set are skipped, and if the address is accepted by a
3144 router that has &%fail_verify%& set, verification fails. The address is
3145 verified as a recipient if &%-bv%& is used; to test verification for a sender
3146 address, &%-bvs%& should be used.
3148 If the &%-v%& option is not set, the output consists of a single line for each
3149 address, stating whether it was verified or not, and giving a reason in the
3150 latter case. Otherwise, more details are given of how the address has been
3151 handled, and in the case of address redirection, all the generated addresses
3152 are also considered. Without &%-v%&, generating more than one address by
3153 redirection causes verification to end successfully.
3156 .cindex "return code" "for &%-bv%&"
3157 return code is 2 if any address failed outright; it is 1 if no address
3158 failed outright but at least one could not be resolved for some reason. Return
3159 code 0 is given only when all addresses succeed.
3161 If any of the routers in the configuration makes any tests on the sender
3162 address of a message, you should use the &%-f%& option to set an appropriate
3163 sender when running &%-bv%& tests. Without it, the sender is assumed to be the
3164 calling user at the default qualifying domain.
3168 This option acts like &%-bv%&, but verifies the address as a sender rather
3169 than a recipient address. This affects any rewriting and qualification that
3172 .vitem &%-C%&&~<&'filelist'&>
3174 .cindex "configuration file" "alternate"
3175 .cindex "CONFIGURE_FILE"
3176 .cindex "alternate configuration file"
3177 This option causes Exim to find the run time configuration file from the given
3178 list instead of from the list specified by the CONFIGURE_FILE
3179 compile-time setting. Usually, the list will consist of just a single file
3180 name, but it can be a colon-separated list of names. In this case, the first
3181 file that exists is used. Failure to open an existing file stops Exim from
3182 proceeding any further along the list, and an error is generated.
3184 When this option is used by a caller other than root or the Exim user, and the
3185 list is different from the compiled-in list, Exim gives up its root privilege
3186 immediately, and runs with the real and effective uid and gid set to those of
3187 the caller. However, if ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is defined in
3188 &_Local/Makefile_&, root privilege is retained for &%-C%& only if the caller of
3191 That is, the Exim user is no longer privileged in this regard. This build-time
3192 option is not set by default in the Exim source distribution tarbundle.
3193 However, if you are using a &"packaged"& version of Exim (source or binary),
3194 the packagers might have enabled it.
3196 Setting ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY locks out the possibility of testing a
3197 configuration using &%-C%& right through message reception and delivery, even
3198 if the caller is root. The reception works, but by that time, Exim is running
3199 as the Exim user, so when it re-executes to regain privilege for the delivery,
3200 the use of &%-C%& causes privilege to be lost. However, root can test reception
3201 and delivery using two separate commands (one to put a message on the queue,
3202 using &%-odq%&, and another to do the delivery, using &%-M%&).
3204 If ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX is defined &_in Local/Makefile_&, it specifies a
3205 prefix string with which any file named in a &%-C%& command line option
3206 must start. In addition, the file name must not contain the sequence &`/../`&.
3207 However, if the value of the &%-C%& option is identical to the value of
3208 CONFIGURE_FILE in &_Local/Makefile_&, Exim ignores &%-C%& and proceeds as
3209 usual. There is no default setting for ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX; when it is
3210 unset, any file name can be used with &%-C%&.
3212 ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX can be used to confine alternative configuration files
3213 to a directory to which only root has access. This prevents someone who has
3214 broken into the Exim account from running a privileged Exim with an arbitrary
3217 The &%-C%& facility is useful for ensuring that configuration files are
3218 syntactically correct, but cannot be used for test deliveries, unless the
3219 caller is privileged, or unless it is an exotic configuration that does not
3220 require privilege. No check is made on the owner or group of the files
3221 specified by this option.
3223 .vitem &%-D%&<&'macro'&>=<&'value'&>
3225 .cindex "macro" "setting on command line"
3226 This option can be used to override macro definitions in the configuration file
3227 (see section &<<SECTmacrodefs>>&). However, like &%-C%&, if it is used by an
3228 unprivileged caller, it causes Exim to give up its root privilege.
3229 If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, the use of &%-D%& is
3230 completely disabled, and its use causes an immediate error exit.
3232 The entire option (including equals sign if present) must all be within one
3233 command line item. &%-D%& can be used to set the value of a macro to the empty
3234 string, in which case the equals sign is optional. These two commands are
3240 To include spaces in a macro definition item, quotes must be used. If you use
3241 quotes, spaces are permitted around the macro name and the equals sign. For
3244 exim '-D ABC = something' ...
3246 &%-D%& may be repeated up to 10 times on a command line.
3248 .vitem &%-d%&<&'debug&~options'&>
3250 .cindex "debugging" "list of selectors"
3251 .cindex "debugging" "&%-d%& option"
3252 This option causes debugging information to be written to the standard
3253 error stream. It is restricted to admin users because debugging output may show
3254 database queries that contain password information. Also, the details of users'
3255 filter files should be protected. When &%-d%& is used, &%-v%& is assumed. If
3256 &%-d%& is given on its own, a lot of standard debugging data is output. This
3257 can be reduced, or increased to include some more rarely needed information, by
3258 directly following &%-d%& with a string made up of names preceded by plus or
3259 minus characters. These add or remove sets of debugging data, respectively. For
3260 example, &%-d+filter%& adds filter debugging, whereas &%-d-all+filter%& selects
3261 only filter debugging. Note that no spaces are allowed in the debug setting.
3262 The available debugging categories are:
3264 &`acl `& ACL interpretation
3265 &`auth `& authenticators
3266 &`deliver `& general delivery logic
3267 &`dns `& DNS lookups (see also resolver)
3268 &`dnsbl `& DNS black list (aka RBL) code
3269 &`exec `& arguments for &[execv()]& calls
3270 &`expand `& detailed debugging for string expansions
3271 &`filter `& filter handling
3272 &`hints_lookup `& hints data lookups
3273 &`host_lookup `& all types of name-to-IP address handling
3274 &`ident `& ident lookup
3275 &`interface `& lists of local interfaces
3276 &`lists `& matching things in lists
3277 &`load `& system load checks
3278 &`local_scan `& can be used by &[local_scan()]& (see chapter &&&
3279 &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&)
3280 &`lookup `& general lookup code and all lookups
3281 &`memory `& memory handling
3282 &`pid `& add pid to debug output lines
3283 &`process_info `& setting info for the process log
3284 &`queue_run `& queue runs
3285 &`receive `& general message reception logic
3286 &`resolver `& turn on the DNS resolver's debugging output
3287 &`retry `& retry handling
3288 &`rewrite `& address rewriting
3289 &`route `& address routing
3290 &`timestamp `& add timestamp to debug output lines
3292 &`transport `& transports
3293 &`uid `& changes of uid/gid and looking up uid/gid
3294 &`verify `& address verification logic
3295 &`all `& almost all of the above (see below), and also &%-v%&
3298 The &`all`& option excludes &`memory`& when used as &`+all`&, but includes it
3299 for &`-all`&. The reason for this is that &`+all`& is something that people
3300 tend to use when generating debug output for Exim maintainers. If &`+memory`&
3301 is included, an awful lot of output that is very rarely of interest is
3302 generated, so it now has to be explicitly requested. However, &`-all`& does
3303 turn everything off.
3306 .cindex "resolver" "debugging output"
3307 .cindex "DNS resolver" "debugging output"
3308 The &`resolver`& option produces output only if the DNS resolver was compiled
3309 with DEBUG enabled. This is not the case in some operating systems. Also,
3310 unfortunately, debugging output from the DNS resolver is written to stdout
3313 The default (&%-d%& with no argument) omits &`expand`&, &`filter`&,
3314 &`interface`&, &`load`&, &`memory`&, &`pid`&, &`resolver`&, and &`timestamp`&.
3315 However, the &`pid`& selector is forced when debugging is turned on for a
3316 daemon, which then passes it on to any re-executed Exims. Exim also
3317 automatically adds the pid to debug lines when several remote deliveries are
3320 The &`timestamp`& selector causes the current time to be inserted at the start
3321 of all debug output lines. This can be useful when trying to track down delays
3324 If the &%debug_print%& option is set in any driver, it produces output whenever
3325 any debugging is selected, or if &%-v%& is used.
3327 .vitem &%-dd%&<&'debug&~options'&>
3329 This option behaves exactly like &%-d%& except when used on a command that
3330 starts a daemon process. In that case, debugging is turned off for the
3331 subprocesses that the daemon creates. Thus, it is useful for monitoring the
3332 behaviour of the daemon without creating as much output as full debugging does.
3335 .oindex "&%-dropcr%&"
3336 This is an obsolete option that is now a no-op. It used to affect the way Exim
3337 handled CR and LF characters in incoming messages. What happens now is
3338 described in section &<<SECTlineendings>>&.
3342 .cindex "bounce message" "generating"
3343 This option specifies that an incoming message is a locally-generated delivery
3344 failure report. It is used internally by Exim when handling delivery failures
3345 and is not intended for external use. Its only effect is to stop Exim
3346 generating certain messages to the postmaster, as otherwise message cascades
3347 could occur in some situations. As part of the same option, a message id may
3348 follow the characters &%-E%&. If it does, the log entry for the receipt of the
3349 new message contains the id, following &"R="&, as a cross-reference.
3352 .oindex "&%-e%&&'x'&"
3353 There are a number of Sendmail options starting with &%-oe%& which seem to be
3354 called by various programs without the leading &%o%& in the option. For
3355 example, the &%vacation%& program uses &%-eq%&. Exim treats all options of the
3356 form &%-e%&&'x'& as synonymous with the corresponding &%-oe%&&'x'& options.
3358 .vitem &%-F%&&~<&'string'&>
3360 .cindex "sender" "name"
3361 .cindex "name" "of sender"
3362 This option sets the sender's full name for use when a locally-generated
3363 message is being accepted. In the absence of this option, the user's &'gecos'&
3364 entry from the password data is used. As users are generally permitted to alter
3365 their &'gecos'& entries, no security considerations are involved. White space
3366 between &%-F%& and the <&'string'&> is optional.
3368 .vitem &%-f%&&~<&'address'&>
3370 .cindex "sender" "address"
3371 .cindex "address" "sender"
3372 .cindex "trusted user"
3373 .cindex "envelope sender"
3374 .cindex "user" "trusted"
3375 This option sets the address of the envelope sender of a locally-generated
3376 message (also known as the return path). The option can normally be used only
3377 by a trusted user, but &%untrusted_set_sender%& can be set to allow untrusted
3380 Processes running as root or the Exim user are always trusted. Other
3381 trusted users are defined by the &%trusted_users%& or &%trusted_groups%&
3382 options. In the absence of &%-f%&, or if the caller is not trusted, the sender
3383 of a local message is set to the caller's login name at the default qualify
3386 There is one exception to the restriction on the use of &%-f%&: an empty sender
3387 can be specified by any user, trusted or not, to create a message that can
3388 never provoke a bounce. An empty sender can be specified either as an empty
3389 string, or as a pair of angle brackets with nothing between them, as in these
3390 examples of shell commands:
3392 exim -f '<>' user@domain
3393 exim -f "" user@domain
3395 In addition, the use of &%-f%& is not restricted when testing a filter file
3396 with &%-bf%& or when testing or verifying addresses using the &%-bt%& or
3399 Allowing untrusted users to change the sender address does not of itself make
3400 it possible to send anonymous mail. Exim still checks that the &'From:'& header
3401 refers to the local user, and if it does not, it adds a &'Sender:'& header,
3402 though this can be overridden by setting &%no_local_from_check%&.
3405 .cindex "&""From""& line"
3406 space between &%-f%& and the <&'address'&> is optional (that is, they can be
3407 given as two arguments or one combined argument). The sender of a
3408 locally-generated message can also be set (when permitted) by an initial
3409 &"From&~"& line in the message &-- see the description of &%-bm%& above &-- but
3410 if &%-f%& is also present, it overrides &"From&~"&.
3414 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-G%& option ignored"
3415 This is a Sendmail option which is ignored by Exim.
3417 .vitem &%-h%&&~<&'number'&>
3419 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-h%& option ignored"
3420 This option is accepted for compatibility with Sendmail, but has no effect. (In
3421 Sendmail it overrides the &"hop count"& obtained by counting &'Received:'&
3426 .cindex "Solaris" "&'mail'& command"
3427 .cindex "dot in incoming" "non-SMTP message"
3428 This option, which has the same effect as &%-oi%&, specifies that a dot on a
3429 line by itself should not terminate an incoming, non-SMTP message. I can find
3430 no documentation for this option in Solaris 2.4 Sendmail, but the &'mailx'&
3431 command in Solaris 2.4 uses it. See also &%-ti%&.
3433 .vitem &%-M%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3435 .cindex "forcing delivery"
3436 .cindex "delivery" "forcing attempt"
3437 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing delivery"
3438 This option requests Exim to run a delivery attempt on each message in turn. If
3439 any of the messages are frozen, they are automatically thawed before the
3440 delivery attempt. The settings of &%queue_domains%&, &%queue_smtp_domains%&,
3441 and &%hold_domains%& are ignored.
3444 .cindex "hints database" "overriding retry hints"
3445 hints for any of the addresses are overridden &-- Exim tries to deliver even if
3446 the normal retry time has not yet been reached. This option requires the caller
3447 to be an admin user. However, there is an option called &%prod_requires_admin%&
3448 which can be set false to relax this restriction (and also the same requirement
3449 for the &%-q%&, &%-R%&, and &%-S%& options).
3452 The deliveries happen synchronously, that is, the original Exim process does
3453 not terminate until all the delivery attempts have finished. No output is
3454 produced unless there is a serious error. If you want to see what is happening,
3455 use the &%-v%& option as well, or inspect Exim's main log.
3458 .vitem &%-Mar%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'address'&>&~<&'address'&>&~...
3460 .cindex "message" "adding recipients"
3461 .cindex "recipient" "adding"
3462 This option requests Exim to add the addresses to the list of recipients of the
3463 message (&"ar"& for &"add recipients"&). The first argument must be a message
3464 id, and the remaining ones must be email addresses. However, if the message is
3465 active (in the middle of a delivery attempt), it is not altered. This option
3466 can be used only by an admin user.
3468 .vitem "&*-MC*&&~<&'transport'&>&~<&'hostname'&>&~<&'sequence&~number'&>&&&
3469 &~<&'message&~id'&>"
3471 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
3472 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
3473 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
3474 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3475 by Exim to invoke another instance of itself to deliver a waiting message using
3476 an existing SMTP connection, which is passed as the standard input. Details are
3477 given in chapter &<<CHAPSMTP>>&. This must be the final option, and the caller
3478 must be root or the Exim user in order to use it.
3482 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3483 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option. It signifies that the
3484 connection to the remote host has been authenticated.
3488 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3489 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option. It signifies that the server to
3490 which Exim is connected supports pipelining.
3492 .vitem &%-MCQ%&&~<&'process&~id'&>&~<&'pipe&~fd'&>
3494 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3495 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option when the original delivery was
3496 started by a queue runner. It passes on the process id of the queue runner,
3497 together with the file descriptor number of an open pipe. Closure of the pipe
3498 signals the final completion of the sequence of processes that are passing
3499 messages through the same SMTP connection.
3503 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3504 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option, and passes on the fact that the
3505 SMTP SIZE option should be used on messages delivered down the existing
3510 This option is not intended for use by external callers. It is used internally
3511 by Exim in conjunction with the &%-MC%& option, and passes on the fact that the
3512 host to which Exim is connected supports TLS encryption.
3514 .vitem &%-Mc%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3516 .cindex "hints database" "not overridden by &%-Mc%&"
3517 .cindex "delivery" "manually started &-- not forced"
3518 This option requests Exim to run a delivery attempt on each message in turn,
3519 but unlike the &%-M%& option, it does check for retry hints, and respects any
3520 that are found. This option is not very useful to external callers. It is
3521 provided mainly for internal use by Exim when it needs to re-invoke itself in
3522 order to regain root privilege for a delivery (see chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>&).
3523 However, &%-Mc%& can be useful when testing, in order to run a delivery that
3524 respects retry times and other options such as &%hold_domains%& that are
3525 overridden when &%-M%& is used. Such a delivery does not count as a queue run.
3526 If you want to run a specific delivery as if in a queue run, you should use
3527 &%-q%& with a message id argument. A distinction between queue run deliveries
3528 and other deliveries is made in one or two places.
3530 .vitem &%-Mes%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'address'&>
3532 .cindex "message" "changing sender"
3533 .cindex "sender" "changing"
3534 This option requests Exim to change the sender address in the message to the
3535 given address, which must be a fully qualified address or &"<>"& (&"es"& for
3536 &"edit sender"&). There must be exactly two arguments. The first argument must
3537 be a message id, and the second one an email address. However, if the message
3538 is active (in the middle of a delivery attempt), its status is not altered.
3539 This option can be used only by an admin user.
3541 .vitem &%-Mf%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3543 .cindex "freezing messages"
3544 .cindex "message" "manually freezing"
3545 This option requests Exim to mark each listed message as &"frozen"&. This
3546 prevents any delivery attempts taking place until the message is &"thawed"&,
3547 either manually or as a result of the &%auto_thaw%& configuration option.
3548 However, if any of the messages are active (in the middle of a delivery
3549 attempt), their status is not altered. This option can be used only by an admin
3552 .vitem &%-Mg%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3554 .cindex "giving up on messages"
3555 .cindex "message" "abandoning delivery attempts"
3556 .cindex "delivery" "abandoning further attempts"
3557 This option requests Exim to give up trying to deliver the listed messages,
3558 including any that are frozen. However, if any of the messages are active,
3559 their status is not altered. For non-bounce messages, a delivery error message
3560 is sent to the sender, containing the text &"cancelled by administrator"&.
3561 Bounce messages are just discarded. This option can be used only by an admin
3564 .vitem &%-Mmad%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3566 .cindex "delivery" "cancelling all"
3567 This option requests Exim to mark all the recipient addresses in the messages
3568 as already delivered (&"mad"& for &"mark all delivered"&). However, if any
3569 message is active (in the middle of a delivery attempt), its status is not
3570 altered. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3572 .vitem &%-Mmd%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'address'&>&~<&'address'&>&~...
3574 .cindex "delivery" "cancelling by address"
3575 .cindex "recipient" "removing"
3576 .cindex "removing recipients"
3577 This option requests Exim to mark the given addresses as already delivered
3578 (&"md"& for &"mark delivered"&). The first argument must be a message id, and
3579 the remaining ones must be email addresses. These are matched to recipient
3580 addresses in the message in a case-sensitive manner. If the message is active
3581 (in the middle of a delivery attempt), its status is not altered. This option
3582 can be used only by an admin user.
3584 .vitem &%-Mrm%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3586 .cindex "removing messages"
3587 .cindex "abandoning mail"
3588 .cindex "message" "manually discarding"
3589 This option requests Exim to remove the given messages from the queue. No
3590 bounce messages are sent; each message is simply forgotten. However, if any of
3591 the messages are active, their status is not altered. This option can be used
3592 only by an admin user or by the user who originally caused the message to be
3593 placed on the queue.
3595 .vitem &%-Mt%&&~<&'message&~id'&>&~<&'message&~id'&>&~...
3597 .cindex "thawing messages"
3598 .cindex "unfreezing messages"
3599 .cindex "frozen messages" "thawing"
3600 .cindex "message" "thawing frozen"
3601 This option requests Exim to &"thaw"& any of the listed messages that are
3602 &"frozen"&, so that delivery attempts can resume. However, if any of the
3603 messages are active, their status is not altered. This option can be used only
3606 .vitem &%-Mvb%&&~<&'message&~id'&>
3608 .cindex "listing" "message body"
3609 .cindex "message" "listing body of"
3610 This option causes the contents of the message body (-D) spool file to be
3611 written to the standard output. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3613 .vitem &%-Mvh%&&~<&'message&~id'&>
3615 .cindex "listing" "message headers"
3616 .cindex "header lines" "listing"
3617 .cindex "message" "listing header lines"
3618 This option causes the contents of the message headers (-H) spool file to be
3619 written to the standard output. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3621 .vitem &%-Mvl%&&~<&'message&~id'&>
3623 .cindex "listing" "message log"
3624 .cindex "message" "listing message log"
3625 This option causes the contents of the message log spool file to be written to
3626 the standard output. This option can be used only by an admin user.
3630 This is apparently a synonym for &%-om%& that is accepted by Sendmail, so Exim
3631 treats it that way too.
3635 .cindex "debugging" "&%-N%& option"
3636 .cindex "debugging" "suppressing delivery"
3637 This is a debugging option that inhibits delivery of a message at the transport
3638 level. It implies &%-v%&. Exim goes through many of the motions of delivery &--
3639 it just doesn't actually transport the message, but instead behaves as if it
3640 had successfully done so. However, it does not make any updates to the retry
3641 database, and the log entries for deliveries are flagged with &"*>"& rather
3644 Because &%-N%& discards any message to which it applies, only root or the Exim
3645 user are allowed to use it with &%-bd%&, &%-q%&, &%-R%& or &%-M%&. In other
3646 words, an ordinary user can use it only when supplying an incoming message to
3647 which it will apply. Although transportation never fails when &%-N%& is set, an
3648 address may be deferred because of a configuration problem on a transport, or a
3649 routing problem. Once &%-N%& has been used for a delivery attempt, it sticks to
3650 the message, and applies to any subsequent delivery attempts that may happen
3655 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-n%& option ignored"
3656 This option is interpreted by Sendmail to mean &"no aliasing"&. It is ignored
3659 .vitem &%-O%&&~<&'data'&>
3661 This option is interpreted by Sendmail to mean &`set option`&. It is ignored by
3664 .vitem &%-oA%&&~<&'file&~name'&>
3666 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-oA%& option"
3667 This option is used by Sendmail in conjunction with &%-bi%& to specify an
3668 alternative alias file name. Exim handles &%-bi%& differently; see the
3671 .vitem &%-oB%&&~<&'n'&>
3673 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
3674 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
3675 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
3676 This is a debugging option which limits the maximum number of messages that can
3677 be delivered down one SMTP connection, overriding the value set in any &(smtp)&
3678 transport. If <&'n'&> is omitted, the limit is set to 1.
3682 .cindex "background delivery"
3683 .cindex "delivery" "in the background"
3684 This option applies to all modes in which Exim accepts incoming messages,
3685 including the listening daemon. It requests &"background"& delivery of such
3686 messages, which means that the accepting process automatically starts a
3687 delivery process for each message received, but does not wait for the delivery
3688 processes to finish.
3690 When all the messages have been received, the reception process exits,
3691 leaving the delivery processes to finish in their own time. The standard output
3692 and error streams are closed at the start of each delivery process.
3693 This is the default action if none of the &%-od%& options are present.
3695 If one of the queueing options in the configuration file
3696 (&%queue_only%& or &%queue_only_file%&, for example) is in effect, &%-odb%&
3697 overrides it if &%queue_only_override%& is set true, which is the default
3698 setting. If &%queue_only_override%& is set false, &%-odb%& has no effect.
3702 .cindex "foreground delivery"
3703 .cindex "delivery" "in the foreground"
3704 This option requests &"foreground"& (synchronous) delivery when Exim has
3705 accepted a locally-generated message. (For the daemon it is exactly the same as
3706 &%-odb%&.) A delivery process is automatically started to deliver the message,
3707 and Exim waits for it to complete before proceeding.
3709 The original Exim reception process does not finish until the delivery
3710 process for the final message has ended. The standard error stream is left open
3713 However, like &%-odb%&, this option has no effect if &%queue_only_override%& is
3714 false and one of the queueing options in the configuration file is in effect.
3716 If there is a temporary delivery error during foreground delivery, the
3717 message is left on the queue for later delivery, and the original reception
3718 process exits. See chapter &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>& for a way of setting up a
3719 restricted configuration that never queues messages.
3724 This option is synonymous with &%-odf%&. It is provided for compatibility with
3729 .cindex "non-immediate delivery"
3730 .cindex "delivery" "suppressing immediate"
3731 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
3732 This option applies to all modes in which Exim accepts incoming messages,
3733 including the listening daemon. It specifies that the accepting process should
3734 not automatically start a delivery process for each message received. Messages
3735 are placed on the queue, and remain there until a subsequent queue runner
3736 process encounters them. There are several configuration options (such as
3737 &%queue_only%&) that can be used to queue incoming messages under certain
3738 conditions. This option overrides all of them and also &%-odqs%&. It always
3743 .cindex "SMTP" "delaying delivery"
3744 This option is a hybrid between &%-odb%&/&%-odi%& and &%-odq%&.
3745 However, like &%-odb%& and &%-odi%&, this option has no effect if
3746 &%queue_only_override%& is false and one of the queueing options in the
3747 configuration file is in effect.
3749 When &%-odqs%& does operate, a delivery process is started for each incoming
3750 message, in the background by default, but in the foreground if &%-odi%& is
3751 also present. The recipient addresses are routed, and local deliveries are done
3752 in the normal way. However, if any SMTP deliveries are required, they are not
3753 done at this time, so the message remains on the queue until a subsequent queue
3754 runner process encounters it. Because routing was done, Exim knows which
3755 messages are waiting for which hosts, and so a number of messages for the same
3756 host can be sent in a single SMTP connection. The &%queue_smtp_domains%&
3757 configuration option has the same effect for specific domains. See also the
3762 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3763 If an error is detected while a non-SMTP message is being received (for
3764 example, a malformed address), the error is reported to the sender in a mail
3767 .cindex "return code" "for &%-oee%&"
3769 this error message is successfully sent, the Exim receiving process
3770 exits with a return code of zero. If not, the return code is 2 if the problem
3771 is that the original message has no recipients, or 1 any other error. This is
3772 the default &%-oe%&&'x'& option if Exim is called as &'rmail'&.
3776 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3777 .cindex "return code" "for &%-oem%&"
3778 This is the same as &%-oee%&, except that Exim always exits with a non-zero
3779 return code, whether or not the error message was successfully sent.
3780 This is the default &%-oe%&&'x'& option, unless Exim is called as &'rmail'&.
3784 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3785 If an error is detected while a non-SMTP message is being received, the
3786 error is reported by writing a message to the standard error file (stderr).
3787 .cindex "return code" "for &%-oep%&"
3788 The return code is 1 for all errors.
3792 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3793 This option is supported for compatibility with Sendmail, but has the same
3798 .cindex "error" "reporting"
3799 This option is supported for compatibility with Sendmail, but has the same
3804 .cindex "dot in incoming" "non-SMTP message"
3805 This option, which has the same effect as &%-i%&, specifies that a dot on a
3806 line by itself should not terminate an incoming, non-SMTP message. Otherwise, a
3807 single dot does terminate, though Exim does no special processing for other
3808 lines that start with a dot. This option is set by default if Exim is called as
3809 &'rmail'&. See also &%-ti%&.
3812 .oindex "&%-oitrue%&"
3813 This option is treated as synonymous with &%-oi%&.
3815 .vitem &%-oMa%&&~<&'host&~address'&>
3817 .cindex "sender host address" "specifying for local message"
3818 A number of options starting with &%-oM%& can be used to set values associated
3819 with remote hosts on locally-submitted messages (that is, messages not received
3820 over TCP/IP). These options can be used by any caller in conjunction with the
3821 &%-bh%&, &%-be%&, &%-bf%&, &%-bF%&, &%-bt%&, or &%-bv%& testing options. In
3822 other circumstances, they are ignored unless the caller is trusted.
3824 The &%-oMa%& option sets the sender host address. This may include a port
3825 number at the end, after a full stop (period). For example:
3827 exim -bs -oMa 10.9.8.7.1234
3829 An alternative syntax is to enclose the IP address in square brackets,
3830 followed by a colon and the port number:
3832 exim -bs -oMa [10.9.8.7]:1234
3834 The IP address is placed in the &$sender_host_address$& variable, and the
3835 port, if present, in &$sender_host_port$&.
3837 .vitem &%-oMaa%&&~<&'name'&>
3839 .cindex "authentication name" "specifying for local message"
3840 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMaa%&
3841 option sets the value of &$sender_host_authenticated$& (the authenticator
3842 name). See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for a discussion of SMTP authentication.
3844 .vitem &%-oMai%&&~<&'string'&>
3846 .cindex "authentication id" "specifying for local message"
3847 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMai%&
3848 option sets the value of &$authenticated_id$& (the id that was authenticated).
3849 This overrides the default value (the caller's login id) for messages from
3850 local sources. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for a discussion of authenticated
3853 .vitem &%-oMas%&&~<&'address'&>
3855 .cindex "authentication sender" "specifying for local message"
3856 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMas%&
3857 option sets the authenticated sender value in &$authenticated_sender$&. It
3858 overrides the sender address that is created from the caller's login id for
3859 messages from local sources. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for a discussion of
3860 authenticated senders.
3862 .vitem &%-oMi%&&~<&'interface&~address'&>
3864 .cindex "interface address" "specifying for local message"
3865 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMi%&
3866 option sets the IP interface address value. A port number may be included,
3867 using the same syntax as for &%-oMa%&. The interface address is placed in
3868 &$interface_address$& and the port number, if present, in &$interface_port$&.
3870 .vitem &%-oMr%&&~<&'protocol&~name'&>
3872 .cindex "protocol" "incoming &-- specifying for local message"
3873 .cindex "&$received_protocol$&"
3874 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMr%&
3875 option sets the received protocol value that is stored in
3876 &$received_protocol$&. However, this applies only when &%-bs%& is not used. For
3877 interactive SMTP input (&%-bs%&), the protocol is always &"local-"& followed by
3878 one of the standard SMTP protocol names (see the description of
3879 &$received_protocol$& in section &<<SECTexpvar>>&). For &%-bS%& (batch SMTP)
3880 however, the protocol can be set by &%-oMr%&.
3882 .vitem &%-oMs%&&~<&'host&~name'&>
3884 .cindex "sender host name" "specifying for local message"
3885 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMs%&
3886 option sets the sender host name in &$sender_host_name$&. When this option is
3887 present, Exim does not attempt to look up a host name from an IP address; it
3888 uses the name it is given.
3890 .vitem &%-oMt%&&~<&'ident&~string'&>
3892 .cindex "sender ident string" "specifying for local message"
3893 See &%-oMa%& above for general remarks about the &%-oM%& options. The &%-oMt%&
3894 option sets the sender ident value in &$sender_ident$&. The default setting for
3895 local callers is the login id of the calling process.
3899 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-om%& option ignored"
3900 In Sendmail, this option means &"me too"&, indicating that the sender of a
3901 message should receive a copy of the message if the sender appears in an alias
3902 expansion. Exim always does this, so the option does nothing.
3906 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-oo%& option ignored"
3907 This option is ignored. In Sendmail it specifies &"old style headers"&,
3908 whatever that means.
3910 .vitem &%-oP%&&~<&'path'&>
3912 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of daemon"
3913 .cindex "daemon" "process id (pid)"
3914 This option is useful only in conjunction with &%-bd%& or &%-q%& with a time
3915 value. The option specifies the file to which the process id of the daemon is
3916 written. When &%-oX%& is used with &%-bd%&, or when &%-q%& with a time is used
3917 without &%-bd%&, this is the only way of causing Exim to write a pid file,
3918 because in those cases, the normal pid file is not used.
3920 .vitem &%-or%&&~<&'time'&>
3922 .cindex "timeout" "for non-SMTP input"
3923 This option sets a timeout value for incoming non-SMTP messages. If it is not
3924 set, Exim will wait forever for the standard input. The value can also be set
3925 by the &%receive_timeout%& option. The format used for specifying times is
3926 described in section &<<SECTtimeformat>>&.
3928 .vitem &%-os%&&~<&'time'&>
3930 .cindex "timeout" "for SMTP input"
3931 .cindex "SMTP timeout" "input"
3932 This option sets a timeout value for incoming SMTP messages. The timeout
3933 applies to each SMTP command and block of data. The value can also be set by
3934 the &%smtp_receive_timeout%& option; it defaults to 5 minutes. The format used
3935 for specifying times is described in section &<<SECTtimeformat>>&.
3939 This option has exactly the same effect as &%-v%&.
3941 .vitem &%-oX%&&~<&'number&~or&~string'&>
3943 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening ports"
3944 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening interfaces"
3945 .cindex "port" "receiving TCP/IP"
3946 This option is relevant only when the &%-bd%& (start listening daemon) option
3947 is also given. It controls which ports and interfaces the daemon uses. Details
3948 of the syntax, and how it interacts with configuration file options, are given
3949 in chapter &<<CHAPinterfaces>>&. When &%-oX%& is used to start a daemon, no pid
3950 file is written unless &%-oP%& is also present to specify a pid file name.
3954 .cindex "Perl" "starting the interpreter"
3955 This option applies when an embedded Perl interpreter is linked with Exim (see
3956 chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&). It overrides the setting of the &%perl_at_start%&
3957 option, forcing the starting of the interpreter to be delayed until it is
3962 .cindex "Perl" "starting the interpreter"
3963 This option applies when an embedded Perl interpreter is linked with Exim (see
3964 chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&). It overrides the setting of the &%perl_at_start%&
3965 option, forcing the starting of the interpreter to occur as soon as Exim is
3968 .vitem &%-p%&<&'rval'&>:<&'sval'&>
3970 For compatibility with Sendmail, this option is equivalent to
3972 &`-oMr`& <&'rval'&> &`-oMs`& <&'sval'&>
3974 It sets the incoming protocol and host name (for trusted callers). The
3975 host name and its colon can be omitted when only the protocol is to be set.
3976 Note the Exim already has two private options, &%-pd%& and &%-ps%&, that refer
3977 to embedded Perl. It is therefore impossible to set a protocol value of &`p`&
3978 or &`s`& using this option (but that does not seem a real limitation).
3982 .cindex "queue runner" "starting manually"
3983 This option is normally restricted to admin users. However, there is a
3984 configuration option called &%prod_requires_admin%& which can be set false to
3985 relax this restriction (and also the same requirement for the &%-M%&, &%-R%&,
3986 and &%-S%& options).
3988 .cindex "queue runner" "description of operation"
3989 The &%-q%& option starts one queue runner process. This scans the queue of
3990 waiting messages, and runs a delivery process for each one in turn. It waits
3991 for each delivery process to finish before starting the next one. A delivery
3992 process may not actually do any deliveries if the retry times for the addresses
3993 have not been reached. Use &%-qf%& (see below) if you want to override this.
3996 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
3997 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
3998 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
3999 the delivery process spawns other processes to deliver other messages down
4000 passed SMTP connections, the queue runner waits for these to finish before
4003 When all the queued messages have been considered, the original queue runner
4004 process terminates. In other words, a single pass is made over the waiting
4005 mail, one message at a time. Use &%-q%& with a time (see below) if you want
4006 this to be repeated periodically.
4008 Exim processes the waiting messages in an unpredictable order. It isn't very
4009 random, but it is likely to be different each time, which is all that matters.
4010 If one particular message screws up a remote MTA, other messages to the same
4011 MTA have a chance of getting through if they get tried first.
4013 It is possible to cause the messages to be processed in lexical message id
4014 order, which is essentially the order in which they arrived, by setting the
4015 &%queue_run_in_order%& option, but this is not recommended for normal use.
4017 .vitem &%-q%&<&'qflags'&>
4018 The &%-q%& option may be followed by one or more flag letters that change its
4019 behaviour. They are all optional, but if more than one is present, they must
4020 appear in the correct order. Each flag is described in a separate item below.
4024 .cindex "queue" "double scanning"
4025 .cindex "queue" "routing"
4026 .cindex "routing" "whole queue before delivery"
4027 An option starting with &%-qq%& requests a two-stage queue run. In the first
4028 stage, the queue is scanned as if the &%queue_smtp_domains%& option matched
4029 every domain. Addresses are routed, local deliveries happen, but no remote
4032 .cindex "hints database" "remembering routing"
4033 The hints database that remembers which messages are waiting for specific hosts
4034 is updated, as if delivery to those hosts had been deferred. After this is
4035 complete, a second, normal queue scan happens, with routing and delivery taking
4036 place as normal. Messages that are routed to the same host should mostly be
4037 delivered down a single SMTP
4038 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
4039 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
4040 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
4041 connection because of the hints that were set up during the first queue scan.
4042 This option may be useful for hosts that are connected to the Internet
4045 .vitem &%-q[q]i...%&
4047 .cindex "queue" "initial delivery"
4048 If the &'i'& flag is present, the queue runner runs delivery processes only for
4049 those messages that haven't previously been tried. (&'i'& stands for &"initial
4050 delivery"&.) This can be helpful if you are putting messages on the queue using
4051 &%-odq%& and want a queue runner just to process the new messages.
4053 .vitem &%-q[q][i]f...%&
4055 .cindex "queue" "forcing delivery"
4056 .cindex "delivery" "forcing in queue run"
4057 If one &'f'& flag is present, a delivery attempt is forced for each non-frozen
4058 message, whereas without &'f'& only those non-frozen addresses that have passed
4059 their retry times are tried.
4061 .vitem &%-q[q][i]ff...%&
4063 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing delivery"
4064 If &'ff'& is present, a delivery attempt is forced for every message, whether
4067 .vitem &%-q[q][i][f[f]]l%&
4069 .cindex "queue" "local deliveries only"
4070 The &'l'& (the letter &"ell"&) flag specifies that only local deliveries are to
4071 be done. If a message requires any remote deliveries, it remains on the queue
4074 .vitem &%-q%&<&'qflags'&>&~<&'start&~id'&>&~<&'end&~id'&>
4075 .cindex "queue" "delivering specific messages"
4076 When scanning the queue, Exim can be made to skip over messages whose ids are
4077 lexically less than a given value by following the &%-q%& option with a
4078 starting message id. For example:
4080 exim -q 0t5C6f-0000c8-00
4082 Messages that arrived earlier than &`0t5C6f-0000c8-00`& are not inspected. If a
4083 second message id is given, messages whose ids are lexically greater than it
4084 are also skipped. If the same id is given twice, for example,
4086 exim -q 0t5C6f-0000c8-00 0t5C6f-0000c8-00
4088 just one delivery process is started, for that message. This differs from
4089 &%-M%& in that retry data is respected, and it also differs from &%-Mc%& in
4090 that it counts as a delivery from a queue run. Note that the selection
4091 mechanism does not affect the order in which the messages are scanned. There
4092 are also other ways of selecting specific sets of messages for delivery in a
4093 queue run &-- see &%-R%& and &%-S%&.
4095 .vitem &%-q%&<&'qflags'&><&'time'&>
4096 .cindex "queue runner" "starting periodically"
4097 .cindex "periodic queue running"
4098 When a time value is present, the &%-q%& option causes Exim to run as a daemon,
4099 starting a queue runner process at intervals specified by the given time value
4100 (whose format is described in section &<<SECTtimeformat>>&). This form of the
4101 &%-q%& option is commonly combined with the &%-bd%& option, in which case a
4102 single daemon process handles both functions. A common way of starting up a
4103 combined daemon at system boot time is to use a command such as
4105 /usr/exim/bin/exim -bd -q30m
4107 Such a daemon listens for incoming SMTP calls, and also starts a queue runner
4108 process every 30 minutes.
4110 When a daemon is started by &%-q%& with a time value, but without &%-bd%&, no
4111 pid file is written unless one is explicitly requested by the &%-oP%& option.
4113 .vitem &%-qR%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4115 This option is synonymous with &%-R%&. It is provided for Sendmail
4118 .vitem &%-qS%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4120 This option is synonymous with &%-S%&.
4122 .vitem &%-R%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4124 .cindex "queue runner" "for specific recipients"
4125 .cindex "delivery" "to given domain"
4126 .cindex "domain" "delivery to"
4127 The <&'rsflags'&> may be empty, in which case the white space before the string
4128 is optional, unless the string is &'f'&, &'ff'&, &'r'&, &'rf'&, or &'rff'&,
4129 which are the possible values for <&'rsflags'&>. White space is required if
4130 <&'rsflags'&> is not empty.
4132 This option is similar to &%-q%& with no time value, that is, it causes Exim to
4133 perform a single queue run, except that, when scanning the messages on the
4134 queue, Exim processes only those that have at least one undelivered recipient
4135 address containing the given string, which is checked in a case-independent
4136 way. If the <&'rsflags'&> start with &'r'&, <&'string'&> is interpreted as a
4137 regular expression; otherwise it is a literal string.
4139 Once a message is selected, all its addresses are processed. For the first
4140 selected message, Exim overrides any retry information and forces a delivery
4141 attempt for each undelivered address. This means that if delivery of any
4142 address in the first message is successful, any existing retry information is
4143 deleted, and so delivery attempts for that address in subsequently selected
4144 messages (which are processed without forcing) will run. However, if delivery
4145 of any address does not succeed, the retry information is updated, and in
4146 subsequently selected messages, the failing address will be skipped.
4148 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing delivery"
4149 If the <&'rsflags'&> contain &'f'& or &'ff'&, the delivery forcing applies to
4150 all selected messages, not just the first; frozen messages are included when
4153 The &%-R%& option makes it straightforward to initiate delivery of all messages
4154 to a given domain after a host has been down for some time. When the SMTP
4155 command ETRN is accepted by its ACL (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&), its default
4156 effect is to run Exim with the &%-R%& option, but it can be configured to run
4157 an arbitrary command instead.
4161 This is a documented (for Sendmail) obsolete alternative name for &%-f%&.
4163 .vitem &%-S%&<&'rsflags'&>&~<&'string'&>
4165 .cindex "delivery" "from given sender"
4166 .cindex "queue runner" "for specific senders"
4167 This option acts like &%-R%& except that it checks the string against each
4168 message's sender instead of against the recipients. If &%-R%& is also set, both
4169 conditions must be met for a message to be selected. If either of the options
4170 has &'f'& or &'ff'& in its flags, the associated action is taken.
4172 .vitem &%-Tqt%&&~<&'times'&>
4174 This an option that is exclusively for use by the Exim testing suite. It is not
4175 recognized when Exim is run normally. It allows for the setting up of explicit
4176 &"queue times"& so that various warning/retry features can be tested.
4181 .cindex "recipient" "extracting from header lines"
4182 .cindex "&'Bcc:'& header line"
4183 .cindex "&'Cc:'& header line"
4184 .cindex "&'To:'& header line"
4185 When Exim is receiving a locally-generated, non-SMTP message on its standard
4186 input, the &%-t%& option causes the recipients of the message to be obtained
4187 from the &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&, and &'Bcc:'& header lines in the message instead of
4188 from the command arguments. The addresses are extracted before any rewriting
4189 takes place and the &'Bcc:'& header line, if present, is then removed.
4192 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-t%& option"
4193 If the command has any arguments, they specify addresses to which the message
4194 is &'not'& to be delivered. That is, the argument addresses are removed from
4195 the recipients list obtained from the headers. This is compatible with Smail 3
4196 and in accordance with the documented behaviour of several versions of
4197 Sendmail, as described in man pages on a number of operating systems (e.g.
4198 Solaris 8, IRIX 6.5, HP-UX 11). However, some versions of Sendmail &'add'&
4199 argument addresses to those obtained from the headers, and the O'Reilly
4200 Sendmail book documents it that way. Exim can be made to add argument addresses
4201 instead of subtracting them by setting the option
4202 &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%& false.
4204 .cindex "&%Resent-%& header lines" "with &%-t%&"
4205 If there are any &%Resent-%& header lines in the message, Exim extracts
4206 recipients from all &'Resent-To:'&, &'Resent-Cc:'&, and &'Resent-Bcc:'& header
4207 lines instead of from &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&, and &'Bcc:'&. This is for compatibility
4208 with Sendmail and other MTAs. (Prior to release 4.20, Exim gave an error if
4209 &%-t%& was used in conjunction with &%Resent-%& header lines.)
4211 RFC 2822 talks about different sets of &%Resent-%& header lines (for when a
4212 message is resent several times). The RFC also specifies that they should be
4213 added at the front of the message, and separated by &'Received:'& lines. It is
4214 not at all clear how &%-t%& should operate in the present of multiple sets,
4215 nor indeed exactly what constitutes a &"set"&.
4216 In practice, it seems that MUAs do not follow the RFC. The &%Resent-%& lines
4217 are often added at the end of the header, and if a message is resent more than
4218 once, it is common for the original set of &%Resent-%& headers to be renamed as
4219 &%X-Resent-%& when a new set is added. This removes any possible ambiguity.
4223 This option is exactly equivalent to &%-t%& &%-i%&. It is provided for
4224 compatibility with Sendmail.
4226 .vitem &*-tls-on-connect*&
4227 .oindex "&%-tls-on-connect%&"
4228 .cindex "TLS" "use without STARTTLS"
4229 .cindex "TLS" "automatic start"
4230 This option is available when Exim is compiled with TLS support. It forces all
4231 incoming SMTP connections to behave as if the incoming port is listed in the
4232 &%tls_on_connect_ports%& option. See section &<<SECTsupobssmt>>& and chapter
4233 &<<CHAPTLS>>& for further details.
4238 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-U%& option ignored"
4239 Sendmail uses this option for &"initial message submission"&, and its
4240 documentation states that in future releases, it may complain about
4241 syntactically invalid messages rather than fixing them when this flag is not
4242 set. Exim ignores this option.
4246 This option causes Exim to write information to the standard error stream,
4247 describing what it is doing. In particular, it shows the log lines for
4248 receiving and delivering a message, and if an SMTP connection is made, the SMTP
4249 dialogue is shown. Some of the log lines shown may not actually be written to
4250 the log if the setting of &%log_selector%& discards them. Any relevant
4251 selectors are shown with each log line. If none are shown, the logging is
4256 AIX uses &%-x%& for a private purpose (&"mail from a local mail program has
4257 National Language Support extended characters in the body of the mail item"&).
4258 It sets &%-x%& when calling the MTA from its &%mail%& command. Exim ignores
4262 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4263 . Insert a stylized DocBook comment here, to identify the end of the command
4264 . line options. This is for the benefit of the Perl script that automatically
4265 . creates a man page for the options.
4266 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4269 <!-- === End of command line options === -->
4276 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4277 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4280 .chapter "The Exim run time configuration file" "CHAPconf" &&&
4281 "The runtime configuration file"
4283 .cindex "run time configuration"
4284 .cindex "configuration file" "general description"
4285 .cindex "CONFIGURE_FILE"
4286 .cindex "configuration file" "errors in"
4287 .cindex "error" "in configuration file"
4288 .cindex "return code" "for bad configuration"
4289 Exim uses a single run time configuration file that is read whenever an Exim
4290 binary is executed. Note that in normal operation, this happens frequently,
4291 because Exim is designed to operate in a distributed manner, without central
4294 If a syntax error is detected while reading the configuration file, Exim
4295 writes a message on the standard error, and exits with a non-zero return code.
4296 The message is also written to the panic log. &*Note*&: Only simple syntax
4297 errors can be detected at this time. The values of any expanded options are
4298 not checked until the expansion happens, even when the expansion does not
4299 actually alter the string.
4301 The name of the configuration file is compiled into the binary for security
4302 reasons, and is specified by the CONFIGURE_FILE compilation option. In
4303 most configurations, this specifies a single file. However, it is permitted to
4304 give a colon-separated list of file names, in which case Exim uses the first
4305 existing file in the list.
4308 .cindex "EXIM_GROUP"
4309 .cindex "CONFIGURE_OWNER"
4310 .cindex "CONFIGURE_GROUP"
4311 .cindex "configuration file" "ownership"
4312 .cindex "ownership" "configuration file"
4313 The run time configuration file must be owned by root or by the user that is
4314 specified at compile time by the EXIM_USER option, or by the user that is
4315 specified at compile time by the CONFIGURE_OWNER option (if set). The
4316 configuration file must not be world-writeable or group-writeable, unless its
4317 group is the one specified at compile time by the EXIM_GROUP option or by the
4318 CONFIGURE_GROUP option.
4320 &*Warning*&: In a conventional configuration, where the Exim binary is setuid
4321 to root, anybody who is able to edit the run time configuration file has an
4322 easy way to run commands as root. If you make your mail administrators members
4323 of the Exim group, but do not trust them with root, make sure that the run time
4324 configuration is not group writeable.
4326 A default configuration file, which will work correctly in simple situations,
4327 is provided in the file &_src/configure.default_&. If CONFIGURE_FILE
4328 defines just one file name, the installation process copies the default
4329 configuration to a new file of that name if it did not previously exist. If
4330 CONFIGURE_FILE is a list, no default is automatically installed. Chapter
4331 &<<CHAPdefconfil>>& is a &"walk-through"& discussion of the default
4336 .section "Using a different configuration file"
4337 .cindex "configuration file" "alternate"
4338 A one-off alternate configuration can be specified by the &%-C%& command line
4339 option, which may specify a single file or a list of files. However, when
4340 &%-C%& is used, Exim gives up its root privilege, unless called by root or the
4341 Exim user (or unless the argument for &%-C%& is identical to the built-in value
4342 from CONFIGURE_FILE). &%-C%& is useful mainly for checking the syntax of
4343 configuration files before installing them. No owner or group checks are done
4344 on a configuration file specified by &%-C%&.
4346 The privileged use of &%-C%& by the Exim user can be locked out by setting
4347 ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY in &_Local/Makefile_& when building Exim. However,
4348 if you do this, you also lock out the possibility of testing a
4349 configuration using &%-C%& right through message reception and delivery, even
4350 if the caller is root. The reception works, but by that time, Exim is running
4351 as the Exim user, so when it re-execs to regain privilege for the delivery, the
4352 use of &%-C%& causes privilege to be lost. However, root can test reception and
4353 delivery using two separate commands (one to put a message on the queue, using
4354 &%-odq%&, and another to do the delivery, using &%-M%&).
4356 If ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX is defined &_in Local/Makefile_&, it specifies a
4357 prefix string with which any file named in a &%-C%& command line option must
4358 start. In addition, the file name must not contain the sequence &"&`/../`&"&.
4359 There is no default setting for ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX; when it is unset, any file
4360 name can be used with &%-C%&.
4362 One-off changes to a configuration can be specified by the &%-D%& command line
4363 option, which defines and overrides values for macros used inside the
4364 configuration file. However, like &%-C%&, the use of this option by a
4365 non-privileged user causes Exim to discard its root privilege.
4366 If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, the use of &%-D%& is
4367 completely disabled, and its use causes an immediate error exit.
4369 Some sites may wish to use the same Exim binary on different machines that
4370 share a file system, but to use different configuration files on each machine.
4371 If CONFIGURE_FILE_USE_NODE is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, Exim first
4372 looks for a file whose name is the configuration file name followed by a dot
4373 and the machine's node name, as obtained from the &[uname()]& function. If this
4374 file does not exist, the standard name is tried. This processing occurs for
4375 each file name in the list given by CONFIGURE_FILE or &%-C%&.
4377 In some esoteric situations different versions of Exim may be run under
4378 different effective uids and the CONFIGURE_FILE_USE_EUID is defined to
4379 help with this. See the comments in &_src/EDITME_& for details.
4383 .section "Configuration file format" "SECTconffilfor"
4384 .cindex "configuration file" "format of"
4385 .cindex "format" "configuration file"
4386 Exim's configuration file is divided into a number of different parts. General
4387 option settings must always appear at the start of the file. The other parts
4388 are all optional, and may appear in any order. Each part other than the first
4389 is introduced by the word &"begin"& followed by the name of the part. The
4393 &'ACL'&: Access control lists for controlling incoming SMTP mail.
4395 .cindex "AUTH" "configuration"
4396 &'authenticators'&: Configuration settings for the authenticator drivers. These
4397 are concerned with the SMTP AUTH command (see chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&).
4399 &'routers'&: Configuration settings for the router drivers. Routers process
4400 addresses and determine how the message is to be delivered.
4402 &'transports'&: Configuration settings for the transport drivers. Transports
4403 define mechanisms for copying messages to destinations.
4405 &'retry'&: Retry rules, for use when a message cannot be immediately delivered.
4407 &'rewrite'&: Global address rewriting rules, for use when a message arrives and
4408 when new addresses are generated during delivery.
4410 &'local_scan'&: Private options for the &[local_scan()]& function. If you
4411 want to use this feature, you must set
4413 LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes
4415 in &_Local/Makefile_& before building Exim. Full details of the
4416 &[local_scan()]& facility are given in chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&.
4419 .cindex "configuration file" "leading white space in"
4420 .cindex "configuration file" "trailing white space in"
4421 .cindex "white space" "in configuration file"
4422 Leading and trailing white space in configuration lines is always ignored.
4424 Blank lines in the file, and lines starting with a # character (ignoring
4425 leading white space) are treated as comments and are ignored. &*Note*&: A
4426 # character other than at the beginning of a line is not treated specially,
4427 and does not introduce a comment.
4429 Any non-comment line can be continued by ending it with a backslash. Note that
4430 the general rule for white space means that trailing white space after the
4431 backslash and leading white space at the start of continuation
4432 lines is ignored. Comment lines beginning with # (but not empty lines) may
4433 appear in the middle of a sequence of continuation lines.
4435 A convenient way to create a configuration file is to start from the
4436 default, which is supplied in &_src/configure.default_&, and add, delete, or
4437 change settings as required.
4439 The ACLs, retry rules, and rewriting rules have their own syntax which is
4440 described in chapters &<<CHAPACL>>&, &<<CHAPretry>>&, and &<<CHAPrewrite>>&,
4441 respectively. The other parts of the configuration file have some syntactic
4442 items in common, and these are described below, from section &<<SECTcos>>&
4443 onwards. Before that, the inclusion, macro, and conditional facilities are
4448 .section "File inclusions in the configuration file"
4449 .cindex "inclusions in configuration file"
4450 .cindex "configuration file" "including other files"
4451 .cindex ".include in configuration file"
4452 .cindex ".include_if_exists in configuration file"
4453 You can include other files inside Exim's run time configuration file by
4456 &`.include`& <&'file name'&>
4457 &`.include_if_exists`& <&'file name'&>
4459 on a line by itself. Double quotes round the file name are optional. If you use
4460 the first form, a configuration error occurs if the file does not exist; the
4461 second form does nothing for non-existent files.
4463 Includes may be nested to any depth, but remember that Exim reads its
4464 configuration file often, so it is a good idea to keep them to a minimum.
4465 If you change the contents of an included file, you must HUP the daemon,
4466 because an included file is read only when the configuration itself is read.
4468 The processing of inclusions happens early, at a physical line level, so, like
4469 comment lines, an inclusion can be used in the middle of an option setting,
4472 hosts_lookup = a.b.c \
4475 Include processing happens after macro processing (see below). Its effect is to
4476 process the lines of the file as if they occurred inline where the inclusion
4481 .section "Macros in the configuration file" "SECTmacrodefs"
4482 .cindex "macro" "description of"
4483 .cindex "configuration file" "macros"
4484 If a line in the main part of the configuration (that is, before the first
4485 &"begin"& line) begins with an upper case letter, it is taken as a macro
4486 definition, and must be of the form
4488 <&'name'&> = <&'rest of line'&>
4490 The name must consist of letters, digits, and underscores, and need not all be
4491 in upper case, though that is recommended. The rest of the line, including any
4492 continuations, is the replacement text, and has leading and trailing white
4493 space removed. Quotes are not removed. The replacement text can never end with
4494 a backslash character, but this doesn't seem to be a serious limitation.
4497 Macros may also be defined between router, transport, authenticator, or ACL
4498 definitions. They may not, however, be defined within an individual driver or
4499 ACL, or in the &%local_scan%&, retry, or rewrite sections of the configuration.
4502 .section "Macro substitution"
4503 Once a macro is defined, all subsequent lines in the file (and any included
4504 files) are scanned for the macro name; if there are several macros, the line is
4505 scanned for each in turn, in the order in which the macros are defined. The
4506 replacement text is not re-scanned for the current macro, though it is scanned
4507 for subsequently defined macros. For this reason, a macro name may not contain
4508 the name of a previously defined macro as a substring. You could, for example,
4511 &`ABCD_XYZ = `&<&'something'&>
4512 &`ABCD = `&<&'something else'&>
4514 but putting the definitions in the opposite order would provoke a configuration
4515 error. Macro expansion is applied to individual physical lines from the file,
4516 before checking for line continuation or file inclusion (see above). If a line
4517 consists solely of a macro name, and the expansion of the macro is empty, the
4518 line is ignored. A macro at the start of a line may turn the line into a
4519 comment line or a &`.include`& line.
4523 .section "Redefining macros"
4524 Once defined, the value of a macro can be redefined later in the configuration
4525 (or in an included file). Redefinition is specified by using &'=='& instead of
4530 MAC == updated value
4532 Redefinition does not alter the order in which the macros are applied to the
4533 subsequent lines of the configuration file. It is still the same order in which
4534 the macros were originally defined. All that changes is the macro's value.
4535 Redefinition makes it possible to accumulate values. For example:
4539 MAC == MAC and something added
4541 This can be helpful in situations where the configuration file is built
4542 from a number of other files.
4545 .section "Overriding macro values"
4546 The values set for macros in the configuration file can be overridden by the
4547 &%-D%& command line option, but Exim gives up its root privilege when &%-D%& is
4548 used, unless called by root or the Exim user. A definition on the command line
4549 using the &%-D%& option causes all definitions and redefinitions within the
4554 .section "Example of macro usage"
4555 As an example of macro usage, consider a configuration where aliases are looked
4556 up in a MySQL database. It helps to keep the file less cluttered if long
4557 strings such as SQL statements are defined separately as macros, for example:
4559 ALIAS_QUERY = select mailbox from user where \
4560 login=${quote_mysql:$local_part};
4562 This can then be used in a &(redirect)& router setting like this:
4564 data = ${lookup mysql{ALIAS_QUERY}}
4566 In earlier versions of Exim macros were sometimes used for domain, host, or
4567 address lists. In Exim 4 these are handled better by named lists &-- see
4568 section &<<SECTnamedlists>>&.
4571 .section "Conditional skips in the configuration file"
4572 .cindex "configuration file" "conditional skips"
4574 You can use the directives &`.ifdef`&, &`.ifndef`&, &`.elifdef`&,
4575 &`.elifndef`&, &`.else`&, and &`.endif`& to dynamically include or exclude
4576 portions of the configuration file. The processing happens whenever the file is
4577 read (that is, when an Exim binary starts to run).
4579 The implementation is very simple. Instances of the first four directives must
4580 be followed by text that includes the names of one or macros. The condition
4581 that is tested is whether or not any macro substitution has taken place in the
4585 message_size_limit = 50M
4587 message_size_limit = 100M
4590 sets a message size limit of 50M if the macro &`AAA`& is defined, and 100M
4591 otherwise. If there is more than one macro named on the line, the condition
4592 is true if any of them are defined. That is, it is an &"or"& condition. To
4593 obtain an &"and"& condition, you need to use nested &`.ifdef`&s.
4595 Although you can use a macro expansion to generate one of these directives,
4596 it is not very useful, because the condition &"there was a macro substitution
4597 in this line"& will always be true.
4599 Text following &`.else`& and &`.endif`& is ignored, and can be used as comment
4600 to clarify complicated nestings.
4604 .section "Common option syntax" "SECTcos"
4605 .cindex "common option syntax"
4606 .cindex "syntax of common options"
4607 .cindex "configuration file" "common option syntax"
4608 For the main set of options, driver options, and &[local_scan()]& options,
4609 each setting is on a line by itself, and starts with a name consisting of
4610 lower-case letters and underscores. Many options require a data value, and in
4611 these cases the name must be followed by an equals sign (with optional white
4612 space) and then the value. For example:
4614 qualify_domain = mydomain.example.com
4616 Some option settings may contain sensitive data, for example, passwords for
4617 accessing databases. To stop non-admin users from using the &%-bP%& command
4618 line option to read these values, you can precede the option settings with the
4619 word &"hide"&. For example:
4621 hide mysql_servers = localhost/users/admin/secret-password
4623 For non-admin users, such options are displayed like this:
4625 mysql_servers = <value not displayable>
4627 If &"hide"& is used on a driver option, it hides the value of that option on
4628 all instances of the same driver.
4630 The following sections describe the syntax used for the different data types
4631 that are found in option settings.
4634 .section "Boolean options"
4635 .cindex "format" "boolean"
4636 .cindex "boolean configuration values"
4637 .oindex "&%no_%&&'xxx'&"
4638 .oindex "&%not_%&&'xxx'&"
4639 Options whose type is given as boolean are on/off switches. There are two
4640 different ways of specifying such options: with and without a data value. If
4641 the option name is specified on its own without data, the switch is turned on;
4642 if it is preceded by &"no_"& or &"not_"& the switch is turned off. However,
4643 boolean options may be followed by an equals sign and one of the words
4644 &"true"&, &"false"&, &"yes"&, or &"no"&, as an alternative syntax. For example,
4645 the following two settings have exactly the same effect:
4650 The following two lines also have the same (opposite) effect:
4655 You can use whichever syntax you prefer.
4660 .section "Integer values"
4661 .cindex "integer configuration values"
4662 .cindex "format" "integer"
4663 If an integer data item starts with the characters &"0x"&, the remainder of it
4664 is interpreted as a hexadecimal number. Otherwise, it is treated as octal if it
4665 starts with the digit 0, and decimal if not. If an integer value is followed by
4666 the letter K, it is multiplied by 1024; if it is followed by the letter M, it
4667 is multiplied by 1024x1024.
4669 When the values of integer option settings are output, values which are an
4670 exact multiple of 1024 or 1024x1024 are
4671 sometimes, but not always,
4672 printed using the letters K and M. The printing style is independent of the
4673 actual input format that was used.
4676 .section "Octal integer values"
4677 .cindex "integer format"
4678 .cindex "format" "octal integer"
4679 The value of an option specified as an octal integer is always interpreted in
4680 octal, whether or not it starts with the digit zero. Such options are always
4685 .section "Fixed point number values"
4686 .cindex "fixed point configuration values"
4687 .cindex "format" "fixed point"
4688 A fixed point number consists of a decimal integer, optionally followed by a
4689 decimal point and up to three further digits.
4693 .section "Time interval values" "SECTtimeformat"
4694 .cindex "time interval" "specifying in configuration"
4695 .cindex "format" "time interval"
4696 A time interval is specified as a sequence of numbers, each followed by one of
4697 the following letters, with no intervening white space:
4700 .row &~&%s%& seconds
4701 .row &~&%m%& minutes
4707 For example, &"3h50m"& specifies 3 hours and 50 minutes. The values of time
4708 intervals are output in the same format. Exim does not restrict the values; it
4709 is perfectly acceptable, for example, to specify &"90m"& instead of &"1h30m"&.
4713 .section "String values" "SECTstrings"
4714 .cindex "string" "format of configuration values"
4715 .cindex "format" "string"
4716 If a string data item does not start with a double-quote character, it is taken
4717 as consisting of the remainder of the line plus any continuation lines,
4718 starting at the first character after any leading white space, with trailing
4719 white space removed, and with no interpretation of the characters in the
4720 string. Because Exim removes comment lines (those beginning with #) at an early
4721 stage, they can appear in the middle of a multi-line string. The following
4722 settings are therefore equivalent:
4724 trusted_users = uucp:mail
4726 trusted_users = uucp:\
4727 # This comment line is ignored
4730 .cindex "string" "quoted"
4731 .cindex "escape characters in quoted strings"
4732 If a string does start with a double-quote, it must end with a closing
4733 double-quote, and any backslash characters other than those used for line
4734 continuation are interpreted as escape characters, as follows:
4737 .row &~&`\\`& "single backslash"
4738 .row &~&`\n`& "newline"
4739 .row &~&`\r`& "carriage return"
4741 .row "&~&`\`&<&'octal digits'&>" "up to 3 octal digits specify one character"
4742 .row "&~&`\x`&<&'hex digits'&>" "up to 2 hexadecimal digits specify one &&&
4746 If a backslash is followed by some other character, including a double-quote
4747 character, that character replaces the pair.
4749 Quoting is necessary only if you want to make use of the backslash escapes to
4750 insert special characters, or if you need to specify a value with leading or
4751 trailing spaces. These cases are rare, so quoting is almost never needed in
4752 current versions of Exim. In versions of Exim before 3.14, quoting was required
4753 in order to continue lines, so you may come across older configuration files
4754 and examples that apparently quote unnecessarily.
4757 .section "Expanded strings"
4758 .cindex "string expansion" "definition of"
4759 .cindex "expansion" "definition of"
4760 Some strings in the configuration file are subjected to &'string expansion'&,
4761 by which means various parts of the string may be changed according to the
4762 circumstances (see chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&). The input syntax for such strings
4763 is as just described; in particular, the handling of backslashes in quoted
4764 strings is done as part of the input process, before expansion takes place.
4765 However, backslash is also an escape character for the expander, so any
4766 backslashes that are required for that reason must be doubled if they are
4767 within a quoted configuration string.
4770 .section "User and group names"
4771 .cindex "user name" "format of"
4772 .cindex "format" "user name"
4773 .cindex "group" "name format"
4774 .cindex "format" "group name"
4775 User and group names are specified as strings, using the syntax described
4776 above, but the strings are interpreted specially. A user or group name must
4777 either consist entirely of digits, or be a name that can be looked up using the
4778 &[getpwnam()]& or &[getgrnam()]& function, as appropriate.
4781 .section "List construction" "SECTlistconstruct"
4782 .cindex "list" "syntax of in configuration"
4783 .cindex "format" "list item in configuration"
4784 .cindex "string list" "definition"
4785 The data for some configuration options is a list of items, with colon as the
4786 default separator. Many of these options are shown with type &"string list"& in
4787 the descriptions later in this document. Others are listed as &"domain list"&,
4788 &"host list"&, &"address list"&, or &"local part list"&. Syntactically, they
4789 are all the same; however, those other than &"string list"& are subject to
4790 particular kinds of interpretation, as described in chapter
4791 &<<CHAPdomhosaddlists>>&.
4793 In all these cases, the entire list is treated as a single string as far as the
4794 input syntax is concerned. The &%trusted_users%& setting in section
4795 &<<SECTstrings>>& above is an example. If a colon is actually needed in an item
4796 in a list, it must be entered as two colons. Leading and trailing white space
4797 on each item in a list is ignored. This makes it possible to include items that
4798 start with a colon, and in particular, certain forms of IPv6 address. For
4801 local_interfaces = 127.0.0.1 : ::::1
4803 contains two IP addresses, the IPv4 address 127.0.0.1 and the IPv6 address ::1.
4806 &*Note*&: Although leading and trailing white space is ignored in individual
4807 list items, it is not ignored when parsing the list. The space after the first
4808 colon in the example above is necessary. If it were not there, the list would
4809 be interpreted as the two items 127.0.0.1:: and 1.
4812 .cindex "list separator" "changing"
4813 .cindex "IPv6" "addresses in lists"
4814 Doubling colons in IPv6 addresses is an unwelcome chore, so a mechanism was
4815 introduced to allow the separator character to be changed. If a list begins
4816 with a left angle bracket, followed by any punctuation character, that
4817 character is used instead of colon as the list separator. For example, the list
4818 above can be rewritten to use a semicolon separator like this:
4820 local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1
4822 This facility applies to all lists, with the exception of the list in
4823 &%log_file_path%&. It is recommended that the use of non-colon separators be
4824 confined to circumstances where they really are needed.
4828 .section "Empty items in lists" "SECTempitelis"
4829 .cindex "list" "empty item in"
4830 An empty item at the end of a list is always ignored. In other words, trailing
4831 separator characters are ignored. Thus, the list in
4833 senders = user@domain :
4835 contains only a single item. If you want to include an empty string as one item
4836 in a list, it must not be the last item. For example, this list contains three
4837 items, the second of which is empty:
4839 senders = user1@domain : : user2@domain
4841 &*Note*&: There must be white space between the two colons, as otherwise they
4842 are interpreted as representing a single colon data character (and the list
4843 would then contain just one item). If you want to specify a list that contains
4844 just one, empty item, you can do it as in this example:
4848 In this case, the first item is empty, and the second is discarded because it
4849 is at the end of the list.
4854 .section "Format of driver configurations" "SECTfordricon"
4855 .cindex "drivers" "configuration format"
4856 There are separate parts in the configuration for defining routers, transports,
4857 and authenticators. In each part, you are defining a number of driver
4858 instances, each with its own set of options. Each driver instance is defined by
4859 a sequence of lines like this:
4861 <&'instance name'&>:
4866 In the following example, the instance name is &(localuser)&, and it is
4867 followed by three options settings:
4872 transport = local_delivery
4874 For each driver instance, you specify which Exim code module it uses &-- by the
4875 setting of the &%driver%& option &-- and (optionally) some configuration
4876 settings. For example, in the case of transports, if you want a transport to
4877 deliver with SMTP you would use the &(smtp)& driver; if you want to deliver to
4878 a local file you would use the &(appendfile)& driver. Each of the drivers is
4879 described in detail in its own separate chapter later in this manual.
4881 You can have several routers, transports, or authenticators that are based on
4882 the same underlying driver (each must have a different instance name).
4884 The order in which routers are defined is important, because addresses are
4885 passed to individual routers one by one, in order. The order in which
4886 transports are defined does not matter at all. The order in which
4887 authenticators are defined is used only when Exim, as a client, is searching
4888 them to find one that matches an authentication mechanism offered by the
4891 .cindex "generic options"
4892 .cindex "options" "generic &-- definition of"
4893 Within a driver instance definition, there are two kinds of option: &'generic'&
4894 and &'private'&. The generic options are those that apply to all drivers of the
4895 same type (that is, all routers, all transports or all authenticators). The
4896 &%driver%& option is a generic option that must appear in every definition.
4897 .cindex "private options"
4898 The private options are special for each driver, and none need appear, because
4899 they all have default values.
4901 The options may appear in any order, except that the &%driver%& option must
4902 precede any private options, since these depend on the particular driver. For
4903 this reason, it is recommended that &%driver%& always be the first option.
4905 Driver instance names, which are used for reference in log entries and
4906 elsewhere, can be any sequence of letters, digits, and underscores (starting
4907 with a letter) and must be unique among drivers of the same type. A router and
4908 a transport (for example) can each have the same name, but no two router
4909 instances can have the same name. The name of a driver instance should not be
4910 confused with the name of the underlying driver module. For example, the
4911 configuration lines:
4916 create an instance of the &(smtp)& transport driver whose name is
4917 &(remote_smtp)&. The same driver code can be used more than once, with
4918 different instance names and different option settings each time. A second
4919 instance of the &(smtp)& transport, with different options, might be defined
4925 command_timeout = 10s
4927 The names &(remote_smtp)& and &(special_smtp)& would be used to reference
4928 these transport instances from routers, and these names would appear in log
4931 Comment lines may be present in the middle of driver specifications. The full
4932 list of option settings for any particular driver instance, including all the
4933 defaulted values, can be extracted by making use of the &%-bP%& command line
4941 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4942 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
4944 .chapter "The default configuration file" "CHAPdefconfil"
4945 .cindex "configuration file" "default &""walk through""&"
4946 .cindex "default" "configuration file &""walk through""&"
4947 The default configuration file supplied with Exim as &_src/configure.default_&
4948 is sufficient for a host with simple mail requirements. As an introduction to
4949 the way Exim is configured, this chapter &"walks through"& the default
4950 configuration, giving brief explanations of the settings. Detailed descriptions
4951 of the options are given in subsequent chapters. The default configuration file
4952 itself contains extensive comments about ways you might want to modify the
4953 initial settings. However, note that there are many options that are not
4954 mentioned at all in the default configuration.
4958 .section "Main configuration settings"
4959 The main (global) configuration option settings must always come first in the
4960 file. The first thing you'll see in the file, after some initial comments, is
4963 # primary_hostname =
4965 This is a commented-out setting of the &%primary_hostname%& option. Exim needs
4966 to know the official, fully qualified name of your host, and this is where you
4967 can specify it. However, in most cases you do not need to set this option. When
4968 it is unset, Exim uses the &[uname()]& system function to obtain the host name.
4970 The first three non-comment configuration lines are as follows:
4972 domainlist local_domains = @
4973 domainlist relay_to_domains =
4974 hostlist relay_from_hosts = 127.0.0.1
4976 These are not, in fact, option settings. They are definitions of two named
4977 domain lists and one named host list. Exim allows you to give names to lists of
4978 domains, hosts, and email addresses, in order to make it easier to manage the
4979 configuration file (see section &<<SECTnamedlists>>&).
4981 The first line defines a domain list called &'local_domains'&; this is used
4982 later in the configuration to identify domains that are to be delivered
4985 .cindex "@ in a domain list"
4986 There is just one item in this list, the string &"@"&. This is a special form
4987 of entry which means &"the name of the local host"&. Thus, if the local host is
4988 called &'a.host.example'&, mail to &'any.user@a.host.example'& is expected to
4989 be delivered locally. Because the local host's name is referenced indirectly,
4990 the same configuration file can be used on different hosts.
4992 The second line defines a domain list called &'relay_to_domains'&, but the
4993 list itself is empty. Later in the configuration we will come to the part that
4994 controls mail relaying through the local host; it allows relaying to any
4995 domains in this list. By default, therefore, no relaying on the basis of a mail
4996 domain is permitted.
4998 The third line defines a host list called &'relay_from_hosts'&. This list is
4999 used later in the configuration to permit relaying from any host or IP address
5000 that matches the list. The default contains just the IP address of the IPv4
5001 loopback interface, which means that processes on the local host are able to
5002 submit mail for relaying by sending it over TCP/IP to that interface. No other
5003 hosts are permitted to submit messages for relaying.
5005 Just to be sure there's no misunderstanding: at this point in the configuration
5006 we aren't actually setting up any controls. We are just defining some domains
5007 and hosts that will be used in the controls that are specified later.
5009 The next two configuration lines are genuine option settings:
5011 acl_smtp_rcpt = acl_check_rcpt
5012 acl_smtp_data = acl_check_data
5015 These options specify &'Access Control Lists'& (ACLs) that are to be used
5016 during an incoming SMTP session for every recipient of a message (every RCPT
5017 command), and after the contents of the message have been received,
5018 respectively. The names of the lists are &'acl_check_rcpt'& and
5019 &'acl_check_data'&, and we will come to their definitions below, in the ACL
5020 section of the configuration. The RCPT ACL controls which recipients are
5021 accepted for an incoming message &-- if a configuration does not provide an ACL
5022 to check recipients, no SMTP mail can be accepted. The DATA ACL allows the
5023 contents of a message to be checked.
5025 Two commented-out option settings are next:
5027 # av_scanner = clamd:/tmp/clamd
5028 # spamd_address = 127.0.0.1 783
5030 These are example settings that can be used when Exim is compiled with the
5031 content-scanning extension. The first specifies the interface to the virus
5032 scanner, and the second specifies the interface to SpamAssassin. Further
5033 details are given in chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
5036 Two more commented-out options settings follow:
5039 # qualify_recipient =
5041 The first of these specifies a domain that Exim uses when it constructs a
5042 complete email address from a local login name. This is often needed when Exim
5043 receives a message from a local process. If you do not set &%qualify_domain%&,
5044 the value of &%primary_hostname%& is used. If you set both of these options,
5045 you can have different qualification domains for sender and recipient
5046 addresses. If you set only the first one, its value is used in both cases.
5048 .cindex "domain literal" "recognizing format"
5049 The following line must be uncommented if you want Exim to recognize
5050 addresses of the form &'user@[10.11.12.13]'& that is, with a &"domain literal"&
5051 (an IP address within square brackets) instead of a named domain.
5053 # allow_domain_literals
5055 The RFCs still require this form, but many people think that in the modern
5056 Internet it makes little sense to permit mail to be sent to specific hosts by
5057 quoting their IP addresses. This ancient format has been used by people who
5058 try to abuse hosts by using them for unwanted relaying. However, some
5059 people believe there are circumstances (for example, messages addressed to
5060 &'postmaster'&) where domain literals are still useful.
5062 The next configuration line is a kind of trigger guard:
5066 It specifies that no delivery must ever be run as the root user. The normal
5067 convention is to set up &'root'& as an alias for the system administrator. This
5068 setting is a guard against slips in the configuration.
5069 The list of users specified by &%never_users%& is not, however, the complete
5070 list; the build-time configuration in &_Local/Makefile_& has an option called
5071 FIXED_NEVER_USERS specifying a list that cannot be overridden. The
5072 contents of &%never_users%& are added to this list. By default
5073 FIXED_NEVER_USERS also specifies root.
5075 When a remote host connects to Exim in order to send mail, the only information
5076 Exim has about the host's identity is its IP address. The next configuration
5081 specifies that Exim should do a reverse DNS lookup on all incoming connections,
5082 in order to get a host name. This improves the quality of the logging
5083 information, but if you feel it is too expensive, you can remove it entirely,
5084 or restrict the lookup to hosts on &"nearby"& networks.
5085 Note that it is not always possible to find a host name from an IP address,
5086 because not all DNS reverse zones are maintained, and sometimes DNS servers are
5089 The next two lines are concerned with &'ident'& callbacks, as defined by RFC
5090 1413 (hence their names):
5093 rfc1413_query_timeout = 30s
5095 These settings cause Exim to make ident callbacks for all incoming SMTP calls.
5096 You can limit the hosts to which these calls are made, or change the timeout
5097 that is used. If you set the timeout to zero, all ident calls are disabled.
5098 Although they are cheap and can provide useful information for tracing problem
5099 messages, some hosts and firewalls have problems with ident calls. This can
5100 result in a timeout instead of an immediate refused connection, leading to
5101 delays on starting up an incoming SMTP session.
5103 When Exim receives messages over SMTP connections, it expects all addresses to
5104 be fully qualified with a domain, as required by the SMTP definition. However,
5105 if you are running a server to which simple clients submit messages, you may
5106 find that they send unqualified addresses. The two commented-out options:
5108 # sender_unqualified_hosts =
5109 # recipient_unqualified_hosts =
5111 show how you can specify hosts that are permitted to send unqualified sender
5112 and recipient addresses, respectively.
5114 The &%percent_hack_domains%& option is also commented out:
5116 # percent_hack_domains =
5118 It provides a list of domains for which the &"percent hack"& is to operate.
5119 This is an almost obsolete form of explicit email routing. If you do not know
5120 anything about it, you can safely ignore this topic.
5122 The last two settings in the main part of the default configuration are
5123 concerned with messages that have been &"frozen"& on Exim's queue. When a
5124 message is frozen, Exim no longer continues to try to deliver it. Freezing
5125 occurs when a bounce message encounters a permanent failure because the sender
5126 address of the original message that caused the bounce is invalid, so the
5127 bounce cannot be delivered. This is probably the most common case, but there
5128 are also other conditions that cause freezing, and frozen messages are not
5129 always bounce messages.
5131 ignore_bounce_errors_after = 2d
5132 timeout_frozen_after = 7d
5134 The first of these options specifies that failing bounce messages are to be
5135 discarded after 2 days on the queue. The second specifies that any frozen
5136 message (whether a bounce message or not) is to be timed out (and discarded)
5137 after a week. In this configuration, the first setting ensures that no failing
5138 bounce message ever lasts a week.
5142 .section "ACL configuration"
5143 .cindex "default" "ACLs"
5144 .cindex "&ACL;" "default configuration"
5145 In the default configuration, the ACL section follows the main configuration.
5146 It starts with the line
5150 and it contains the definitions of two ACLs, called &'acl_check_rcpt'& and
5151 &'acl_check_data'&, that were referenced in the settings of &%acl_smtp_rcpt%&
5152 and &%acl_smtp_data%& above.
5154 .cindex "RCPT" "ACL for"
5155 The first ACL is used for every RCPT command in an incoming SMTP message. Each
5156 RCPT command specifies one of the message's recipients. The ACL statements
5157 are considered in order, until the recipient address is either accepted or
5158 rejected. The RCPT command is then accepted or rejected, according to the
5159 result of the ACL processing.
5163 This line, consisting of a name terminated by a colon, marks the start of the
5168 This ACL statement accepts the recipient if the sending host matches the list.
5169 But what does that strange list mean? It doesn't actually contain any host
5170 names or IP addresses. The presence of the colon puts an empty item in the
5171 list; Exim matches this only if the incoming message did not come from a remote
5172 host, because in that case, the remote hostname is empty. The colon is
5173 important. Without it, the list itself is empty, and can never match anything.
5175 What this statement is doing is to accept unconditionally all recipients in
5176 messages that are submitted by SMTP from local processes using the standard
5177 input and output (that is, not using TCP/IP). A number of MUAs operate in this
5180 deny message = Restricted characters in address
5181 domains = +local_domains
5182 local_parts = ^[.] : ^.*[@%!/|]
5184 deny message = Restricted characters in address
5185 domains = !+local_domains
5186 local_parts = ^[./|] : ^.*[@%!] : ^.*/\\.\\./
5188 These statements are concerned with local parts that contain any of the
5189 characters &"@"&, &"%"&, &"!"&, &"/"&, &"|"&, or dots in unusual places.
5190 Although these characters are entirely legal in local parts (in the case of
5191 &"@"& and leading dots, only if correctly quoted), they do not commonly occur
5192 in Internet mail addresses.
5194 The first three have in the past been associated with explicitly routed
5195 addresses (percent is still sometimes used &-- see the &%percent_hack_domains%&
5196 option). Addresses containing these characters are regularly tried by spammers
5197 in an attempt to bypass relaying restrictions, and also by open relay testing
5198 programs. Unless you really need them it is safest to reject these characters
5199 at this early stage. This configuration is heavy-handed in rejecting these
5200 characters for all messages it accepts from remote hosts. This is a deliberate
5201 policy of being as safe as possible.
5203 The first rule above is stricter, and is applied to messages that are addressed
5204 to one of the local domains handled by this host. This is implemented by the
5205 first condition, which restricts it to domains that are listed in the
5206 &'local_domains'& domain list. The &"+"& character is used to indicate a
5207 reference to a named list. In this configuration, there is just one domain in
5208 &'local_domains'&, but in general there may be many.
5210 The second condition on the first statement uses two regular expressions to
5211 block local parts that begin with a dot or contain &"@"&, &"%"&, &"!"&, &"/"&,
5212 or &"|"&. If you have local accounts that include these characters, you will
5213 have to modify this rule.
5215 Empty components (two dots in a row) are not valid in RFC 2822, but Exim
5216 allows them because they have been encountered in practice. (Consider the
5217 common convention of local parts constructed as
5218 &"&'first-initial.second-initial.family-name'&"& when applied to someone like
5219 the author of Exim, who has no second initial.) However, a local part starting
5220 with a dot or containing &"/../"& can cause trouble if it is used as part of a
5221 file name (for example, for a mailing list). This is also true for local parts
5222 that contain slashes. A pipe symbol can also be troublesome if the local part
5223 is incorporated unthinkingly into a shell command line.
5225 The second rule above applies to all other domains, and is less strict. This
5226 allows your own users to send outgoing messages to sites that use slashes
5227 and vertical bars in their local parts. It blocks local parts that begin
5228 with a dot, slash, or vertical bar, but allows these characters within the
5229 local part. However, the sequence &"/../"& is barred. The use of &"@"&, &"%"&,
5230 and &"!"& is blocked, as before. The motivation here is to prevent your users
5231 (or your users' viruses) from mounting certain kinds of attack on remote sites.
5233 accept local_parts = postmaster
5234 domains = +local_domains
5236 This statement, which has two conditions, accepts an incoming address if the
5237 local part is &'postmaster'& and the domain is one of those listed in the
5238 &'local_domains'& domain list. The &"+"& character is used to indicate a
5239 reference to a named list. In this configuration, there is just one domain in
5240 &'local_domains'&, but in general there may be many.
5242 The presence of this statement means that mail to postmaster is never blocked
5243 by any of the subsequent tests. This can be helpful while sorting out problems
5244 in cases where the subsequent tests are incorrectly denying access.
5246 require verify = sender
5248 This statement requires the sender address to be verified before any subsequent
5249 ACL statement can be used. If verification fails, the incoming recipient
5250 address is refused. Verification consists of trying to route the address, to
5251 see if a bounce message could be delivered to it. In the case of remote
5252 addresses, basic verification checks only the domain, but &'callouts'& can be
5253 used for more verification if required. Section &<<SECTaddressverification>>&
5254 discusses the details of address verification.
5256 accept hosts = +relay_from_hosts
5257 control = submission
5260 This statement accepts the address if the message is coming from one of the
5261 hosts that are defined as being allowed to relay through this host. Recipient
5262 verification is omitted here, because in many cases the clients are dumb MUAs
5263 that do not cope well with SMTP error responses. For the same reason, the
5264 second line specifies &"submission mode"& for messages that are accepted. This
5265 is described in detail in section &<<SECTsubmodnon>>&; it causes Exim to fix
5266 messages that are deficient in some way, for example, because they lack a
5267 &'Date:'& header line. If you are actually relaying out from MTAs, you should
5268 probably add recipient verification here, and disable submission mode.
5270 accept authenticated = *
5271 control = submission
5273 This statement accepts the address if the client host has authenticated itself.
5274 Submission mode is again specified, on the grounds that such messages are most
5275 likely to come from MUAs. The default configuration does not define any
5276 authenticators, which means that no client can in fact authenticate. You will
5277 need to add authenticator definitions if you want to make use of this ACL
5281 # deny message = rejected because $sender_host_address \
5282 # is in a black list at $dnslist_domain\n\
5284 # dnslists = black.list.example
5286 # warn message = X-Warning: $sender_host_address is \
5287 # in a black list at $dnslist_domain
5288 # log_message = found in $dnslist_domain
5289 # dnslists = black.list.example
5291 These commented-out lines are examples of how you could configure Exim to check
5292 sending hosts against a DNS black list. The first statement rejects messages
5293 from blacklisted hosts, whereas the second merely inserts a warning header
5296 accept domains = +local_domains
5300 This statement accepts the incoming recipient address if its domain is one of
5301 the local domains, but only if the address can be verified. Verification of
5302 local addresses normally checks both the local part and the domain. The
5303 &%endpass%& line needs some explanation: if the condition above &%endpass%&
5304 fails, that is, if the address is not in a local domain, control is passed to
5305 the next ACL statement. However, if the condition below &%endpass%& fails, that
5306 is, if a recipient in a local domain cannot be verified, access is denied and
5307 the recipient is rejected.
5309 accept domains = +relay_to_domains
5313 This statement accepts the incoming recipient address if its domain is one of
5314 the domains for which this host is a relay, but again, only if the address can
5317 deny message = relay not permitted
5319 The final statement denies access, giving a specific error message. Reaching
5320 the end of the ACL also causes access to be denied, but with the generic
5321 message &"administrative prohibition"&.
5326 This line marks the start of the second ACL, and names it. Most of the contents
5327 of this ACL are commented out:
5330 # message = This message contains a virus \
5333 These lines are examples of how to arrange for messages to be scanned for
5334 viruses when Exim has been compiled with the content-scanning extension, and a
5335 suitable virus scanner is installed. If the message is found to contain a
5336 virus, it is rejected with the given custom error message.
5338 # warn spam = nobody
5339 # message = X-Spam_score: $spam_score\n\
5340 # X-Spam_score_int: $spam_score_int\n\
5341 # X-Spam_bar: $spam_bar\n\
5342 # X-Spam_report: $spam_report
5344 These lines are an example of how to arrange for messages to be scanned by
5345 SpamAssassin when Exim has been compiled with the content-scanning extension,
5346 and SpamAssassin has been installed. The SpamAssassin check is run with
5347 &`nobody`& as its user parameter, and the results are added to the message as a
5348 series of extra header line. In this case, the message is not rejected,
5349 whatever the spam score.
5353 This final line in the DATA ACL accepts the message unconditionally.
5357 .section "Router configuration"
5358 .cindex "default" "routers"
5359 .cindex "routers" "default"
5360 The router configuration comes next in the default configuration, introduced
5365 Routers are the modules in Exim that make decisions about where to send
5366 messages. An address is passed to each router in turn, until it is either
5367 accepted, or failed. This means that the order in which you define the routers
5368 matters. Each router is fully described in its own chapter later in this
5369 manual. Here we give only brief overviews.
5372 # driver = ipliteral
5373 # domains = !+local_domains
5374 # transport = remote_smtp
5376 .cindex "domain literal" "default router"
5377 This router is commented out because the majority of sites do not want to
5378 support domain literal addresses (those of the form &'user@[10.9.8.7]'&). If
5379 you uncomment this router, you also need to uncomment the setting of
5380 &%allow_domain_literals%& in the main part of the configuration.
5384 domains = ! +local_domains
5385 transport = remote_smtp
5386 ignore_target_hosts = 0.0.0.0 : 127.0.0.0/8
5389 The first uncommented router handles addresses that do not involve any local
5390 domains. This is specified by the line
5392 domains = ! +local_domains
5394 The &%domains%& option lists the domains to which this router applies, but the
5395 exclamation mark is a negation sign, so the router is used only for domains
5396 that are not in the domain list called &'local_domains'& (which was defined at
5397 the start of the configuration). The plus sign before &'local_domains'&
5398 indicates that it is referring to a named list. Addresses in other domains are
5399 passed on to the following routers.
5401 The name of the router driver is &(dnslookup)&,
5402 and is specified by the &%driver%& option. Do not be confused by the fact that
5403 the name of this router instance is the same as the name of the driver. The
5404 instance name is arbitrary, but the name set in the &%driver%& option must be
5405 one of the driver modules that is in the Exim binary.
5407 The &(dnslookup)& router routes addresses by looking up their domains in the
5408 DNS in order to obtain a list of hosts to which the address is routed. If the
5409 router succeeds, the address is queued for the &(remote_smtp)& transport, as
5410 specified by the &%transport%& option. If the router does not find the domain
5411 in the DNS, no further routers are tried because of the &%no_more%& setting, so
5412 the address fails and is bounced.
5414 The &%ignore_target_hosts%& option specifies a list of IP addresses that are to
5415 be entirely ignored. This option is present because a number of cases have been
5416 encountered where MX records in the DNS point to host names
5417 whose IP addresses are 0.0.0.0 or are in the 127 subnet (typically 127.0.0.1).
5418 Completely ignoring these IP addresses causes Exim to fail to route the
5419 email address, so it bounces. Otherwise, Exim would log a routing problem, and
5420 continue to try to deliver the message periodically until the address timed
5427 data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/aliases}}
5429 file_transport = address_file
5430 pipe_transport = address_pipe
5432 Control reaches this and subsequent routers only for addresses in the local
5433 domains. This router checks to see whether the local part is defined as an
5434 alias in the &_/etc/aliases_& file, and if so, redirects it according to the
5435 data that it looks up from that file. If no data is found for the local part,
5436 the value of the &%data%& option is empty, causing the address to be passed to
5439 &_/etc/aliases_& is a conventional name for the system aliases file that is
5440 often used. That is why it is referenced by from the default configuration
5441 file. However, you can change this by setting SYSTEM_ALIASES_FILE in
5442 &_Local/Makefile_& before building Exim.
5447 # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
5448 # local_part_suffix_optional
5449 file = $home/.forward
5454 file_transport = address_file
5455 pipe_transport = address_pipe
5456 reply_transport = address_reply
5459 This is the most complicated router in the default configuration. It is another
5460 redirection router, but this time it is looking for forwarding data set up by
5461 individual users. The &%check_local_user%& setting specifies a check that the
5462 local part of the address is the login name of a local user. If it is not, the
5463 router is skipped. The two commented options that follow &%check_local_user%&,
5466 # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
5467 # local_part_suffix_optional
5469 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
5470 show how you can specify the recognition of local part suffixes. If the first
5471 is uncommented, a suffix beginning with either a plus or a minus sign, followed
5472 by any sequence of characters, is removed from the local part and placed in the
5473 variable &$local_part_suffix$&. The second suffix option specifies that the
5474 presence of a suffix in the local part is optional. When a suffix is present,
5475 the check for a local login uses the local part with the suffix removed.
5478 When a local user account is found, the file called &_.forward_& in the user's
5479 home directory is consulted. If it does not exist, or is empty, the router
5480 declines. Otherwise, the contents of &_.forward_& are interpreted as
5481 redirection data (see chapter &<<CHAPredirect>>& for more details).
5483 .cindex "Sieve filter" "enabling in default router"
5484 Traditional &_.forward_& files contain just a list of addresses, pipes, or
5485 files. Exim supports this by default. However, if &%allow_filter%& is set (it
5486 is commented out by default), the contents of the file are interpreted as a set
5487 of Exim or Sieve filtering instructions, provided the file begins with &"#Exim
5488 filter"& or &"#Sieve filter"&, respectively. User filtering is discussed in the
5489 separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'&.
5491 The &%no_verify%& and &%no_expn%& options mean that this router is skipped when
5492 verifying addresses, or when running as a consequence of an SMTP EXPN command.
5493 There are two reasons for doing this:
5496 Whether or not a local user has a &_.forward_& file is not really relevant when
5497 checking an address for validity; it makes sense not to waste resources doing
5500 More importantly, when Exim is verifying addresses or handling an EXPN
5501 command during an SMTP session, it is running as the Exim user, not as root.
5502 The group is the Exim group, and no additional groups are set up.
5503 It may therefore not be possible for Exim to read users' &_.forward_& files at
5507 The setting of &%check_ancestor%& prevents the router from generating a new
5508 address that is the same as any previous address that was redirected. (This
5509 works round a problem concerning a bad interaction between aliasing and
5510 forwarding &-- see section &<<SECTredlocmai>>&).
5512 The final three option settings specify the transports that are to be used when
5513 forwarding generates a direct delivery to a file, or to a pipe, or sets up an
5514 auto-reply, respectively. For example, if a &_.forward_& file contains
5516 a.nother@elsewhere.example, /home/spqr/archive
5518 the delivery to &_/home/spqr/archive_& is done by running the &%address_file%&
5524 # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
5525 # local_part_suffix_optional
5526 transport = local_delivery
5529 The final router sets up delivery into local mailboxes, provided that the local
5530 part is the name of a local login, by accepting the address and assigning it to
5531 the &(local_delivery)& transport. Otherwise, we have reached the end of the
5532 routers, so the address is bounced. The commented suffix settings fulfil the
5533 same purpose as they do for the &(userforward)& router.
5537 .section "Transport configuration"
5538 .cindex "default" "transports"
5539 .cindex "transports" "default"
5540 Transports define mechanisms for actually delivering messages. They operate
5541 only when referenced from routers, so the order in which they are defined does
5542 not matter. The transports section of the configuration starts with
5546 One remote transport and four local transports are defined.
5551 This transport is used for delivering messages over SMTP connections. All its
5552 options are defaulted. The list of remote hosts comes from the router.
5556 file = /var/mail/$local_part
5563 This &(appendfile)& transport is used for local delivery to user mailboxes in
5564 traditional BSD mailbox format. By default it runs under the uid and gid of the
5565 local user, which requires the sticky bit to be set on the &_/var/mail_&
5566 directory. Some systems use the alternative approach of running mail deliveries
5567 under a particular group instead of using the sticky bit. The commented options
5568 show how this can be done.
5570 Exim adds three headers to the message as it delivers it: &'Delivery-date:'&,
5571 &'Envelope-to:'& and &'Return-path:'&. This action is requested by the three
5572 similarly-named options above.
5578 This transport is used for handling deliveries to pipes that are generated by
5579 redirection (aliasing or users' &_.forward_& files). The &%return_output%&
5580 option specifies that any output generated by the pipe is to be returned to the
5589 This transport is used for handling deliveries to files that are generated by
5590 redirection. The name of the file is not specified in this instance of
5591 &(appendfile)&, because it comes from the &(redirect)& router.
5596 This transport is used for handling automatic replies generated by users'
5601 .section "Default retry rule"
5602 .cindex "retry" "default rule"
5603 .cindex "default" "retry rule"
5604 The retry section of the configuration file contains rules which affect the way
5605 Exim retries deliveries that cannot be completed at the first attempt. It is
5606 introduced by the line
5610 In the default configuration, there is just one rule, which applies to all
5613 * * F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,4d,6h
5615 This causes any temporarily failing address to be retried every 15 minutes for
5616 2 hours, then at intervals starting at one hour and increasing by a factor of
5617 1.5 until 16 hours have passed, then every 6 hours up to 4 days. If an address
5618 is not delivered after 4 days of temporary failure, it is bounced.
5622 .section "Rewriting configuration"
5623 The rewriting section of the configuration, introduced by
5627 contains rules for rewriting addresses in messages as they arrive. There are no
5628 rewriting rules in the default configuration file.
5632 .section "Authenticators configuration"
5633 .cindex "AUTH" "configuration"
5634 The authenticators section of the configuration, introduced by
5636 begin authenticators
5638 defines mechanisms for the use of the SMTP AUTH command. No authenticators
5639 are specified in the default configuration file.
5643 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5644 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5646 .chapter "Regular expressions" "CHAPregexp"
5648 .cindex "regular expressions" "library"
5650 Exim supports the use of regular expressions in many of its options. It
5651 uses the PCRE regular expression library; this provides regular expression
5652 matching that is compatible with Perl 5. The syntax and semantics of
5653 regular expressions is discussed in many Perl reference books, and also in
5654 Jeffrey Friedl's &'Mastering Regular Expressions'&, which is published by
5655 O'Reilly (see &url(http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/regex2/)).
5657 The documentation for the syntax and semantics of the regular expressions that
5658 are supported by PCRE is included in plain text in the file
5659 &_doc/pcrepattern.txt_& in the Exim distribution, and also in the HTML
5660 tarbundle of Exim documentation. It describes in detail the features of the
5661 regular expressions that PCRE supports, so no further description is included
5662 here. The PCRE functions are called from Exim using the default option settings
5663 (that is, with no PCRE options set), except that the PCRE_CASELESS option is
5664 set when the matching is required to be case-insensitive.
5666 In most cases, when a regular expression is required in an Exim configuration,
5667 it has to start with a circumflex, in order to distinguish it from plain text
5668 or an &"ends with"& wildcard. In this example of a configuration setting, the
5669 second item in the colon-separated list is a regular expression.
5671 domains = a.b.c : ^\\d{3} : *.y.z : ...
5673 The doubling of the backslash is required because of string expansion that
5674 precedes interpretation &-- see section &<<SECTlittext>>& for more discussion
5675 of this issue, and a way of avoiding the need for doubling backslashes. The
5676 regular expression that is eventually used in this example contains just one
5677 backslash. The circumflex is included in the regular expression, and has the
5678 normal effect of &"anchoring"& it to the start of the string that is being
5681 There are, however, two cases where a circumflex is not required for the
5682 recognition of a regular expression: these are the &%match%& condition in a
5683 string expansion, and the &%matches%& condition in an Exim filter file. In
5684 these cases, the relevant string is always treated as a regular expression; if
5685 it does not start with a circumflex, the expression is not anchored, and can
5686 match anywhere in the subject string.
5688 In all cases, if you want a regular expression to match at the end of a string,
5689 you must code the $ metacharacter to indicate this. For example:
5691 domains = ^\\d{3}\\.example
5693 matches the domain &'123.example'&, but it also matches &'123.example.com'&.
5696 domains = ^\\d{3}\\.example\$
5698 if you want &'example'& to be the top-level domain. The backslash before the
5699 $ is needed because string expansion also interprets dollar characters.
5703 .section "Testing regular expressions"
5704 .cindex "testing" "regular expressions"
5705 .cindex "regular expressions" "testing"
5706 .cindex "&'pcretest'&"
5707 A program called &'pcretest'& forms part of the PCRE distribution and is built
5708 with PCRE during the process of building Exim. It is primarily intended for
5709 testing PCRE itself, but it can also be used for experimenting with regular
5710 expressions. After building Exim, the binary can be found in the build
5711 directory (it is not installed anywhere automatically). There is documentation
5712 of various options in &_doc/pcretest.txt_&, but for simple testing, none are
5713 needed. This is the output of a sample run of &'pcretest'&:
5715 &` re> `&&*&`/^([@]+)@.+\.(ac|edu)\.(?!kr)[a-z]{2}$/`&*&
5716 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.ac.uk`&*&
5720 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.ac.kr`&*&
5722 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.edu.com`&*&
5724 &`data> `&&*&`x@y.edu.co`&*&
5729 Input typed by the user is shown in bold face. After the &"re>"& prompt, a
5730 regular expression enclosed in delimiters is expected. If this compiles without
5731 error, &"data>"& prompts are given for strings against which the expression is
5732 matched. An empty data line causes a new regular expression to be read. If the
5733 match is successful, the captured substring values (that is, what would be in
5734 the variables &$0$&, &$1$&, &$2$&, etc.) are shown. The above example tests for
5735 an email address whose domain ends with either &"ac"& or &"edu"& followed by a
5736 two-character top-level domain that is not &"kr"&. The local part is captured
5737 in &$1$& and the &"ac"& or &"edu"& in &$2$&.
5744 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5745 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
5747 .chapter "File and database lookups" "CHAPfdlookup"
5748 .cindex "file" "lookup"
5749 .cindex "database lookups"
5750 .cindex "lookup" "description of"
5751 Exim can be configured to look up data in files or databases as it processes
5752 messages. Two different kinds of syntax are used:
5755 A string that is to be expanded may contain explicit lookup requests. These
5756 cause parts of the string to be replaced by data that is obtained from the
5757 lookup. Lookups of this type are conditional expansion items. Different results
5758 can be defined for the cases of lookup success and failure. See chapter
5759 &<<CHAPexpand>>&, where string expansions are described in detail.
5761 Lists of domains, hosts, and email addresses can contain lookup requests as a
5762 way of avoiding excessively long linear lists. In this case, the data that is
5763 returned by the lookup is often (but not always) discarded; whether the lookup
5764 succeeds or fails is what really counts. These kinds of list are described in
5765 chapter &<<CHAPdomhosaddlists>>&.
5769 String expansions, lists, and lookups interact with each other in such a way
5770 that there is no order in which to describe any one of them that does not
5771 involve references to the others. Each of these three chapters makes more sense
5772 if you have read the other two first. If you are reading this for the first
5773 time, be aware that some of it will make a lot more sense after you have read
5774 chapters &<<CHAPdomhosaddlists>>& and &<<CHAPexpand>>&.
5777 .section "Examples of different lookup syntax"
5778 It is easy to confuse the two different kinds of lookup, especially as the
5779 lists that may contain the second kind are always expanded before being
5780 processed as lists. Therefore, they may also contain lookups of the first kind.
5781 Be careful to distinguish between the following two examples:
5783 domains = ${lookup{$sender_host_address}lsearch{/some/file}}
5784 domains = lsearch;/some/file
5787 The first uses a string expansion, the result of which must be a domain list.
5788 No strings have been specified for a successful or a failing lookup; the
5789 defaults in this case are the looked-up data and an empty string, respectively.
5790 The expansion takes place before the string is processed as a list, and the
5791 file that is searched could contain lines like this:
5794 192.168.3.4: domain1:domain2:...
5795 192.168.1.9: domain3:domain4:...
5797 When the lookup succeeds, the result of the expansion is a list of domains (and
5798 possibly other types of item that are allowed in domain lists).
5800 In the second example, the lookup is a single item in a domain list. It causes
5801 Exim to use a lookup to see if the domain that is being processed can be found
5802 in the file. The file could contains lines like this:
5807 Any data that follows the keys is not relevant when checking that the domain
5808 matches the list item.
5810 It is possible, though no doubt confusing, to use both kinds of lookup at once.
5811 Consider a file containing lines like this:
5813 192.168.5.6: lsearch;/another/file
5815 If the value of &$sender_host_address$& is 192.168.5.6, expansion of the
5816 first &%domains%& setting above generates the second setting, which therefore
5817 causes a second lookup to occur.
5819 The rest of this chapter describes the different lookup types that are
5820 available. Any of them can be used in any part of the configuration where a
5821 lookup is permitted.
5824 .section "Lookup types"
5825 .cindex "lookup" "types of"
5826 .cindex "single-key lookup" "definition of"
5827 Two different types of data lookup are implemented:
5830 The &'single-key'& type requires the specification of a file in which to look,
5831 and a single key to search for. The key must be a non-empty string for the
5832 lookup to succeed. The lookup type determines how the file is searched.
5834 .cindex "query-style lookup" "definition of"
5835 The &'query-style'& type accepts a generalized database query. No particular
5836 key value is assumed by Exim for query-style lookups. You can use whichever
5837 Exim variables you need to construct the database query.
5840 The code for each lookup type is in a separate source file that is included in
5841 the binary of Exim only if the corresponding compile-time option is set. The
5842 default settings in &_src/EDITME_& are:
5847 which means that only linear searching and DBM lookups are included by default.
5848 For some types of lookup (e.g. SQL databases), you need to install appropriate
5849 libraries and header files before building Exim.
5854 .section "Single-key lookup types" "SECTsinglekeylookups"
5855 .cindex "lookup" "single-key types"
5856 .cindex "single-key lookup" "list of types"
5857 The following single-key lookup types are implemented:
5860 .cindex "cdb" "description of"
5861 .cindex "lookup" "cdb"
5862 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5863 &(cdb)&: The given file is searched as a Constant DataBase file, using the key
5864 string without a terminating binary zero. The cdb format is designed for
5865 indexed files that are read frequently and never updated, except by total
5866 re-creation. As such, it is particulary suitable for large files containing
5867 aliases or other indexed data referenced by an MTA. Information about cdb can
5868 be found in several places:
5870 &url(http://www.pobox.com/~djb/cdb.html)
5871 &url(ftp://ftp.corpit.ru/pub/tinycdb/)
5872 &url(http://packages.debian.org/stable/utils/freecdb.html)
5874 A cdb distribution is not needed in order to build Exim with cdb support,
5875 because the code for reading cdb files is included directly in Exim itself.
5876 However, no means of building or testing cdb files is provided with Exim, so
5877 you need to obtain a cdb distribution in order to do this.
5879 .cindex "DBM" "lookup type"
5880 .cindex "lookup" "dbm"
5881 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5882 &(dbm)&: Calls to DBM library functions are used to extract data from the given
5883 DBM file by looking up the record with the given key. A terminating binary
5884 zero is included in the key that is passed to the DBM library. See section
5885 &<<SECTdb>>& for a discussion of DBM libraries.
5887 .cindex "Berkeley DB library" "file format"
5888 For all versions of Berkeley DB, Exim uses the DB_HASH style of database
5889 when building DBM files using the &%exim_dbmbuild%& utility. However, when
5890 using Berkeley DB versions 3 or 4, it opens existing databases for reading with
5891 the DB_UNKNOWN option. This enables it to handle any of the types of database
5892 that the library supports, and can be useful for accessing DBM files created by
5893 other applications. (For earlier DB versions, DB_HASH is always used.)
5895 .cindex "lookup" "dbmnz"
5896 .cindex "lookup" "dbm &-- terminating zero"
5897 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5899 .cindex "&_/etc/userdbshadow.dat_&"
5900 .cindex "dmbnz lookup type"
5901 &(dbmnz)&: This is the same as &(dbm)&, except that a terminating binary zero
5902 is not included in the key that is passed to the DBM library. You may need this
5903 if you want to look up data in files that are created by or shared with some
5904 other application that does not use terminating zeros. For example, you need to
5905 use &(dbmnz)& rather than &(dbm)& if you want to authenticate incoming SMTP
5906 calls using the passwords from Courier's &_/etc/userdbshadow.dat_& file. Exim's
5907 utility program for creating DBM files (&'exim_dbmbuild'&) includes the zeros
5908 by default, but has an option to omit them (see section &<<SECTdbmbuild>>&).
5910 .cindex "lookup" "dsearch"
5911 .cindex "dsearch lookup type"
5912 &(dsearch)&: The given file must be a directory; this is searched for a file
5913 whose name is the key. The key may not contain any forward slash characters.
5914 The result of a successful lookup is the name of the file. An example of how
5915 this lookup can be used to support virtual domains is given in section
5916 &<<SECTvirtualdomains>>&.
5918 .cindex "lookup" "iplsearch"
5919 .cindex "iplsearch lookup type"
5920 &(iplsearch)&: The given file is a text file containing keys and data. A key is
5921 terminated by a colon or white space or the end of the line. The keys in the
5922 file must be IP addresses, or IP addresses with CIDR masks. Keys that involve
5923 IPv6 addresses must be enclosed in quotes to prevent the first internal colon
5924 being interpreted as a key terminator. For example:
5926 1.2.3.4: data for 1.2.3.4
5927 192.168.0.0/16 data for 192.168.0.0/16
5928 "abcd::cdab": data for abcd::cdab
5929 "abcd:abcd::/32" data for abcd:abcd::/32
5931 The key for an &(iplsearch)& lookup must be an IP address (without a mask). The
5932 file is searched linearly, using the CIDR masks where present, until a matching
5933 key is found. The first key that matches is used; there is no attempt to find a
5934 &"best"& match. Apart from the way the keys are matched, the processing for
5935 &(iplsearch)& is the same as for &(lsearch)&.
5937 &*Warning 1*&: Unlike most other single-key lookup types, a file of data for
5938 &(iplsearch)& can &'not'& be turned into a DBM or cdb file, because those
5939 lookup types support only literal keys.
5941 &*Warning 2*&: In a host list, you must always use &(net-iplsearch)& so that
5942 the implicit key is the host's IP address rather than its name (see section
5943 &<<SECThoslispatsikey>>&).
5946 .cindex "linear search"
5947 .cindex "lookup" "lsearch"
5948 .cindex "lsearch lookup type"
5949 &(lsearch)&: The given file is a text file that is searched linearly for a
5950 line beginning with the search key, terminated by a colon or white space or the
5951 end of the line. The first occurrence that is found in the file is used. White
5952 space between the key and the colon is permitted. The remainder of the line,
5953 with leading and trailing white space removed, is the data. This can be
5954 continued onto subsequent lines by starting them with any amount of white
5955 space, but only a single space character is included in the data at such a
5956 junction. If the data begins with a colon, the key must be terminated by a
5961 Empty lines and lines beginning with # are ignored, even if they occur in the
5962 middle of an item. This is the traditional textual format of alias files. Note
5963 that the keys in an &(lsearch)& file are literal strings. There is no
5964 wildcarding of any kind.
5966 .cindex "lookup" "lsearch &-- colons in keys"
5967 .cindex "white space" "in lsearch key"
5968 In most &(lsearch)& files, keys are not required to contain colons or #
5969 characters, or white space. However, if you need this feature, it is available.
5970 If a key begins with a doublequote character, it is terminated only by a
5971 matching quote (or end of line), and the normal escaping rules apply to its
5972 contents (see section &<<SECTstrings>>&). An optional colon is permitted after
5973 quoted keys (exactly as for unquoted keys). There is no special handling of
5974 quotes for the data part of an &(lsearch)& line.
5977 .cindex "NIS lookup type"
5978 .cindex "lookup" "NIS"
5979 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
5980 &(nis)&: The given file is the name of a NIS map, and a NIS lookup is done with
5981 the given key, without a terminating binary zero. There is a variant called
5982 &(nis0)& which does include the terminating binary zero in the key. This is
5983 reportedly needed for Sun-style alias files. Exim does not recognize NIS
5984 aliases; the full map names must be used.
5987 .cindex "wildlsearch lookup type"
5988 .cindex "lookup" "wildlsearch"
5989 .cindex "nwildlsearch lookup type"
5990 .cindex "lookup" "nwildlsearch"
5991 &(wildlsearch)& or &(nwildlsearch)&: These search a file linearly, like
5992 &(lsearch)&, but instead of being interpreted as a literal string, each key in
5993 the file may be wildcarded. The difference between these two lookup types is
5994 that for &(wildlsearch)&, each key in the file is string-expanded before being
5995 used, whereas for &(nwildlsearch)&, no expansion takes place.
5997 Like &(lsearch)&, the testing is done case-insensitively. The following forms
5998 of wildcard are recognized:
6000 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
6001 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
6004 The string may begin with an asterisk to mean &"ends with"&. For example:
6006 *.a.b.c data for anything.a.b.c
6007 *fish data for anythingfish
6010 The string may begin with a circumflex to indicate a regular expression. For
6011 example, for &(wildlsearch)&:
6013 ^\N\d+\.a\.b\N data for <digits>.a.b
6015 Note the use of &`\N`& to disable expansion of the contents of the regular
6016 expression. If you are using &(nwildlsearch)&, where the keys are not
6017 string-expanded, the equivalent entry is:
6019 ^\d+\.a\.b data for <digits>.a.b
6021 If the regular expression contains white space or colon characters, you must
6022 either quote it (see &(lsearch)& above), or represent these characters in other
6023 ways. For example, &`\s`& can be used for white space and &`\x3A`& for a
6024 colon. This may be easier than quoting, because if you quote, you have to
6025 escape all the backslashes inside the quotes.
6027 &*Note*&: It is not possible to capture substrings in a regular expression
6028 match for later use, because the results of all lookups are cached. If a lookup
6029 is repeated, the result is taken from the cache, and no actual pattern matching
6030 takes place. The values of all the numeric variables are unset after a
6031 &((n)wildlsearch)& match.
6034 Although I cannot see it being of much use, the general matching function that
6035 is used to implement &((n)wildlsearch)& means that the string may begin with a
6036 lookup name terminated by a semicolon, and followed by lookup data. For
6039 cdb;/some/file data for keys that match the file
6041 The data that is obtained from the nested lookup is discarded.
6044 Keys that do not match any of these patterns are interpreted literally. The
6045 continuation rules for the data are the same as for &(lsearch)&, and keys may
6046 be followed by optional colons.
6048 &*Warning*&: Unlike most other single-key lookup types, a file of data for
6049 &((n)wildlsearch)& can &'not'& be turned into a DBM or cdb file, because those
6050 lookup types support only literal keys.
6054 .section "Query-style lookup types"
6055 .cindex "lookup" "query-style types"
6056 .cindex "query-style lookup" "list of types"
6057 The supported query-style lookup types are listed below. Further details about
6058 many of them are given in later sections.
6061 .cindex "DNS" "as a lookup type"
6062 .cindex "lookup" "DNS"
6063 &(dnsdb)&: This does a DNS search for one or more records whose domain names
6064 are given in the supplied query. The resulting data is the contents of the
6065 records. See section &<<SECTdnsdb>>&.
6067 .cindex "Interbase lookup type"
6068 .cindex "lookup" "Interbase"
6069 &(ibase)&: This does a lookup in an Interbase database.
6071 .cindex "LDAP" "lookup type"
6072 .cindex "lookup" "LDAP"
6073 &(ldap)&: This does an LDAP lookup using a query in the form of a URL, and
6074 returns attributes from a single entry. There is a variant called &(ldapm)&
6075 that permits values from multiple entries to be returned. A third variant
6076 called &(ldapdn)& returns the Distinguished Name of a single entry instead of
6077 any attribute values. See section &<<SECTldap>>&.
6079 .cindex "MySQL" "lookup type"
6080 .cindex "lookup" "MySQL"
6081 &(mysql)&: The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to a
6082 MySQL database. See section &<<SECTsql>>&.
6084 .cindex "NIS+ lookup type"
6085 .cindex "lookup" "NIS+"
6086 &(nisplus)&: This does a NIS+ lookup using a query that can specify the name of
6087 the field to be returned. See section &<<SECTnisplus>>&.
6089 .cindex "Oracle" "lookup type"
6090 .cindex "lookup" "Oracle"
6091 &(oracle)&: The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to an
6092 Oracle database. See section &<<SECTsql>>&.
6094 .cindex "lookup" "passwd"
6095 .cindex "passwd lookup type"
6096 .cindex "&_/etc/passwd_&"
6097 &(passwd)& is a query-style lookup with queries that are just user names. The
6098 lookup calls &[getpwnam()]& to interrogate the system password data, and on
6099 success, the result string is the same as you would get from an &(lsearch)&
6100 lookup on a traditional &_/etc/passwd file_&, though with &`*`& for the
6101 password value. For example:
6103 *:42:42:King Rat:/home/kr:/bin/bash
6106 .cindex "PostgreSQL lookup type"
6107 .cindex "lookup" "PostgreSQL"
6108 &(pgsql)&: The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to a
6109 PostgreSQL database. See section &<<SECTsql>>&.
6113 .cindex "sqlite lookup type"
6114 .cindex "lookup" "sqlite"
6115 &(sqlite)&: The format of the query is a file name followed by an SQL statement
6116 that is passed to an SQLite database. See section &<<SECTsqlite>>&.
6120 &(testdb)&: This is a lookup type that is used for testing Exim. It is
6121 not likely to be useful in normal operation.
6123 .cindex "whoson lookup type"
6124 .cindex "lookup" "whoson"
6125 &(whoson)&: &'Whoson'& (&url(http://whoson.sourceforge.net)) is a proposed
6126 Internet protocol that allows Internet server programs to check whether a
6127 particular (dynamically allocated) IP address is currently allocated to a known
6128 (trusted) user and, optionally, to obtain the identity of the said user. In
6129 Exim, this can be used to implement &"POP before SMTP"& checking using ACL
6132 require condition = \
6133 ${lookup whoson {$sender_host_address}{yes}{no}}
6136 The query consists of a single IP address. The value returned is the name of
6137 the authenticated user, which is stored in the variable &$value$&. However, in
6138 this example, the data in &$value$& is not used; the result of the lookup is
6139 one of the fixed strings &"yes"& or &"no"&.
6145 .section "Temporary errors in lookups"
6146 .cindex "lookup" "temporary error in"
6147 Lookup functions can return temporary error codes if the lookup cannot be
6148 completed. For example, an SQL or LDAP database might be unavailable. For this
6149 reason, it is not advisable to use a lookup that might do this for critical
6150 options such as a list of local domains.
6152 When a lookup cannot be completed in a router or transport, delivery
6153 of the message (to the relevant address) is deferred, as for any other
6154 temporary error. In other circumstances Exim may assume the lookup has failed,
6155 or may give up altogether.
6159 .section "Default values in single-key lookups" "SECTdefaultvaluelookups"
6160 .cindex "wildcard lookups"
6161 .cindex "lookup" "default values"
6162 .cindex "lookup" "wildcard"
6163 .cindex "lookup" "* added to type"
6164 .cindex "default" "in single-key lookups"
6165 In this context, a &"default value"& is a value specified by the administrator
6166 that is to be used if a lookup fails.
6168 If &"*"& is added to a single-key lookup type (for example, &%lsearch*%&)
6169 and the initial lookup fails, the key &"*"& is looked up in the file to
6170 provide a default value. See also the section on partial matching below.
6172 .cindex "*@ with single-key lookup"
6173 .cindex "lookup" "*@ added to type"
6174 .cindex "alias file" "per-domain default"
6175 Alternatively, if &"*@"& is added to a single-key lookup type (for example
6176 &%dbm*@%&) then, if the initial lookup fails and the key contains an @
6177 character, a second lookup is done with everything before the last @ replaced
6178 by *. This makes it possible to provide per-domain defaults in alias files
6179 that include the domains in the keys. If the second lookup fails (or doesn't
6180 take place because there is no @ in the key), &"*"& is looked up.
6181 For example, a &(redirect)& router might contain:
6183 data = ${lookup{$local_part@$domain}lsearch*@{/etc/mix-aliases}}
6185 Suppose the address that is being processed is &'jane@eyre.example'&. Exim
6186 looks up these keys, in this order:
6192 The data is taken from whichever key it finds first. &*Note*&: In an
6193 &(lsearch)& file, this does not mean the first of these keys in the file. A
6194 complete scan is done for each key, and only if it is not found at all does
6195 Exim move on to try the next key.
6199 .section "Partial matching in single-key lookups" "SECTpartiallookup"
6200 .cindex "partial matching"
6201 .cindex "wildcard lookups"
6202 .cindex "lookup" "partial matching"
6203 .cindex "lookup" "wildcard"
6204 .cindex "asterisk" "in search type"
6205 The normal operation of a single-key lookup is to search the file for an exact
6206 match with the given key. However, in a number of situations where domains are
6207 being looked up, it is useful to be able to do partial matching. In this case,
6208 information in the file that has a key starting with &"*."& is matched by any
6209 domain that ends with the components that follow the full stop. For example, if
6210 a key in a DBM file is
6212 *.dates.fict.example
6214 then when partial matching is enabled this is matched by (amongst others)
6215 &'2001.dates.fict.example'& and &'1984.dates.fict.example'&. It is also matched
6216 by &'dates.fict.example'&, if that does not appear as a separate key in the
6219 &*Note*&: Partial matching is not available for query-style lookups. It is
6220 also not available for any lookup items in address lists (see section
6221 &<<SECTaddresslist>>&).
6223 Partial matching is implemented by doing a series of separate lookups using
6224 keys constructed by modifying the original subject key. This means that it can
6225 be used with any of the single-key lookup types, provided that
6226 partial matching keys
6227 beginning with a special prefix (default &"*."&) are included in the data file.
6228 Keys in the file that do not begin with the prefix are matched only by
6229 unmodified subject keys when partial matching is in use.
6231 Partial matching is requested by adding the string &"partial-"& to the front of
6232 the name of a single-key lookup type, for example, &%partial-dbm%&. When this
6233 is done, the subject key is first looked up unmodified; if that fails, &"*."&
6234 is added at the start of the subject key, and it is looked up again. If that
6235 fails, further lookups are tried with dot-separated components removed from the
6236 start of the subject key, one-by-one, and &"*."& added on the front of what
6239 A minimum number of two non-* components are required. This can be adjusted
6240 by including a number before the hyphen in the search type. For example,
6241 &%partial3-lsearch%& specifies a minimum of three non-* components in the
6242 modified keys. Omitting the number is equivalent to &"partial2-"&. If the
6243 subject key is &'2250.dates.fict.example'& then the following keys are looked
6244 up when the minimum number of non-* components is two:
6246 2250.dates.fict.example
6247 *.2250.dates.fict.example
6248 *.dates.fict.example
6251 As soon as one key in the sequence is successfully looked up, the lookup
6254 .cindex "lookup" "partial matching &-- changing prefix"
6255 .cindex "prefix" "for partial matching"
6256 The use of &"*."& as the partial matching prefix is a default that can be
6257 changed. The motivation for this feature is to allow Exim to operate with file
6258 formats that are used by other MTAs. A different prefix can be supplied in
6259 parentheses instead of the hyphen after &"partial"&. For example:
6261 domains = partial(.)lsearch;/some/file
6263 In this example, if the domain is &'a.b.c'&, the sequence of lookups is
6264 &`a.b.c`&, &`.a.b.c`&, and &`.b.c`& (the default minimum of 2 non-wild
6265 components is unchanged). The prefix may consist of any punctuation characters
6266 other than a closing parenthesis. It may be empty, for example:
6268 domains = partial1()cdb;/some/file
6270 For this example, if the domain is &'a.b.c'&, the sequence of lookups is
6271 &`a.b.c`&, &`b.c`&, and &`c`&.
6273 If &"partial0"& is specified, what happens at the end (when the lookup with
6274 just one non-wild component has failed, and the original key is shortened right
6275 down to the null string) depends on the prefix:
6278 If the prefix has zero length, the whole lookup fails.
6280 If the prefix has length 1, a lookup for just the prefix is done. For
6281 example, the final lookup for &"partial0(.)"& is for &`.`& alone.
6283 Otherwise, if the prefix ends in a dot, the dot is removed, and the
6284 remainder is looked up. With the default prefix, therefore, the final lookup is
6285 for &"*"& on its own.
6287 Otherwise, the whole prefix is looked up.
6291 If the search type ends in &"*"& or &"*@"& (see section
6292 &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>& above), the search for an ultimate default that
6293 this implies happens after all partial lookups have failed. If &"partial0"& is
6294 specified, adding &"*"& to the search type has no effect with the default
6295 prefix, because the &"*"& key is already included in the sequence of partial
6296 lookups. However, there might be a use for lookup types such as
6297 &"partial0(.)lsearch*"&.
6299 The use of &"*"& in lookup partial matching differs from its use as a wildcard
6300 in domain lists and the like. Partial matching works only in terms of
6301 dot-separated components; a key such as &`*fict.example`&
6302 in a database file is useless, because the asterisk in a partial matching
6303 subject key is always followed by a dot.
6308 .section "Lookup caching"
6309 .cindex "lookup" "caching"
6310 .cindex "caching" "lookup data"
6311 Exim caches all lookup results in order to avoid needless repetition of
6312 lookups. However, because (apart from the daemon) Exim operates as a collection
6313 of independent, short-lived processes, this caching applies only within a
6314 single Exim process. There is no inter-process lookup caching facility.
6316 For single-key lookups, Exim keeps the relevant files open in case there is
6317 another lookup that needs them. In some types of configuration this can lead to
6318 many files being kept open for messages with many recipients. To avoid hitting
6319 the operating system limit on the number of simultaneously open files, Exim
6320 closes the least recently used file when it needs to open more files than its
6321 own internal limit, which can be changed via the &%lookup_open_max%& option.
6323 The single-key lookup files are closed and the lookup caches are flushed at
6324 strategic points during delivery &-- for example, after all routing is
6330 .section "Quoting lookup data"
6331 .cindex "lookup" "quoting"
6332 .cindex "quoting" "in lookups"
6333 When data from an incoming message is included in a query-style lookup, there
6334 is the possibility of special characters in the data messing up the syntax of
6335 the query. For example, a NIS+ query that contains
6339 will be broken if the local part happens to contain a closing square bracket.
6340 For NIS+, data can be enclosed in double quotes like this:
6342 [name="$local_part"]
6344 but this still leaves the problem of a double quote in the data. The rule for
6345 NIS+ is that double quotes must be doubled. Other lookup types have different
6346 rules, and to cope with the differing requirements, an expansion operator
6347 of the following form is provided:
6349 ${quote_<lookup-type>:<string>}
6351 For example, the safest way to write the NIS+ query is
6353 [name="${quote_nisplus:$local_part}"]
6355 See chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>& for full coverage of string expansions. The quote
6356 operator can be used for all lookup types, but has no effect for single-key
6357 lookups, since no quoting is ever needed in their key strings.
6362 .section "More about dnsdb" "SECTdnsdb"
6363 .cindex "dnsdb lookup"
6364 .cindex "lookup" "dnsdb"
6365 .cindex "DNS" "as a lookup type"
6366 The &(dnsdb)& lookup type uses the DNS as its database. A simple query consists
6367 of a record type and a domain name, separated by an equals sign. For example,
6368 an expansion string could contain:
6370 ${lookup dnsdb{mx=a.b.example}{$value}fail}
6373 If the lookup succeeds, the result is placed in &$value$&, which in this case
6374 is used on its own as the result. If the lookup succeeds, the &`fail`& keyword
6375 causes a &'forced expansion failure'& &-- see section &<<SECTforexpfai>>& for
6376 an explanation of what this means.
6379 The supported DNS record types are A, CNAME, MX, NS, PTR, SRV, and TXT, and,
6380 when Exim is compiled with IPv6 support, AAAA (and A6 if that is also
6381 configured). If no type is given, TXT is assumed. When the type is PTR,
6382 the data can be an IP address, written as normal; inversion and the addition of
6383 &%in-addr.arpa%& or &%ip6.arpa%& happens automatically. For example:
6385 ${lookup dnsdb{ptr=192.168.4.5}{$value}fail}
6387 If the data for a PTR record is not a syntactically valid IP address, it is not
6388 altered and nothing is added.
6390 .cindex "MX record" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6391 .cindex "SRV record" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6392 For an MX lookup, both the preference value and the host name are returned for
6393 each record, separated by a space. For an SRV lookup, the priority, weight,
6394 port, and host name are returned for each record, separated by spaces.
6396 For any record type, if multiple records are found (or, for A6 lookups, if a
6397 single record leads to multiple addresses), the data is returned as a
6398 concatenation, with newline as the default separator. The order, of course,
6399 depends on the DNS resolver. You can specify a different separator character
6400 between multiple records by putting a right angle-bracket followed immediately
6401 by the new separator at the start of the query. For example:
6403 ${lookup dnsdb{>: a=host1.example}}
6405 It is permitted to specify a space as the separator character. Further
6406 white space is ignored.
6408 .section "Pseudo dnsdb record types"
6409 .cindex "MX record" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6410 By default, both the preference value and the host name are returned for
6411 each MX record, separated by a space. If you want only host names, you can use
6412 the pseudo-type MXH:
6414 ${lookup dnsdb{mxh=a.b.example}}
6416 In this case, the preference values are omitted, and just the host names are
6419 .cindex "name server" "for enclosing domain"
6420 Another pseudo-type is ZNS (for &"zone NS"&). It performs a lookup for NS
6421 records on the given domain, but if none are found, it removes the first
6422 component of the domain name, and tries again. This process continues until NS
6423 records are found or there are no more components left (or there is a DNS
6424 error). In other words, it may return the name servers for a top-level domain,
6425 but it never returns the root name servers. If there are no NS records for the
6426 top-level domain, the lookup fails. Consider these examples:
6428 ${lookup dnsdb{zns=xxx.quercite.com}}
6429 ${lookup dnsdb{zns=xxx.edu}}
6431 Assuming that in each case there are no NS records for the full domain name,
6432 the first returns the name servers for &%quercite.com%&, and the second returns
6433 the name servers for &%edu%&.
6435 You should be careful about how you use this lookup because, unless the
6436 top-level domain does not exist, the lookup always returns some host names. The
6437 sort of use to which this might be put is for seeing if the name servers for a
6438 given domain are on a blacklist. You can probably assume that the name servers
6439 for the high-level domains such as &%com%& or &%co.uk%& are not going to be on
6443 .cindex "CSA" "in &(dnsdb)& lookup"
6444 A third pseudo-type is CSA (Client SMTP Authorization). This looks up SRV
6445 records according to the CSA rules, which are described in section
6446 &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&. Although &(dnsdb)& supports SRV lookups directly, this is
6447 not sufficient because of the extra parent domain search behaviour of CSA. The
6448 result of a successful lookup such as:
6450 ${lookup dnsdb {csa=$sender_helo_name}}
6452 has two space-separated fields: an authorization code and a target host name.
6453 The authorization code can be &"Y"& for yes, &"N"& for no, &"X"& for explicit
6454 authorization required but absent, or &"?"& for unknown.
6458 .section "Multiple dnsdb lookups"
6459 In the previous sections, &(dnsdb)& lookups for a single domain are described.
6460 However, you can specify a list of domains or IP addresses in a single
6461 &(dnsdb)& lookup. The list is specified in the normal Exim way, with colon as
6462 the default separator, but with the ability to change this. For example:
6464 ${lookup dnsdb{one.domain.com:two.domain.com}}
6465 ${lookup dnsdb{a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
6466 ${lookup dnsdb{ptr = <; 1.2.3.4 ; 4.5.6.8}}
6468 In order to retain backwards compatibility, there is one special case: if
6469 the lookup type is PTR and no change of separator is specified, Exim looks
6470 to see if the rest of the string is precisely one IPv6 address. In this
6471 case, it does not treat it as a list.
6473 The data from each lookup is concatenated, with newline separators by default,
6474 in the same way that multiple DNS records for a single item are handled. A
6475 different separator can be specified, as described above.
6477 The &(dnsdb)& lookup fails only if all the DNS lookups fail. If there is a
6478 temporary DNS error for any of them, the behaviour is controlled by
6479 an optional keyword followed by a comma that may appear before the record
6480 type. The possible keywords are &"defer_strict"&, &"defer_never"&, and
6481 &"defer_lax"&. With &"strict"& behaviour, any temporary DNS error causes the
6482 whole lookup to defer. With &"never"& behaviour, a temporary DNS error is
6483 ignored, and the behaviour is as if the DNS lookup failed to find anything.
6484 With &"lax"& behaviour, all the queries are attempted, but a temporary DNS
6485 error causes the whole lookup to defer only if none of the other lookups
6486 succeed. The default is &"lax"&, so the following lookups are equivalent:
6488 ${lookup dnsdb{defer_lax,a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
6489 ${lookup dnsdb{a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
6491 Thus, in the default case, as long as at least one of the DNS lookups
6492 yields some data, the lookup succeeds.
6497 .section "More about LDAP" "SECTldap"
6498 .cindex "LDAP lookup"
6499 .cindex "lookup" "LDAP"
6500 .cindex "Solaris" "LDAP"
6501 The original LDAP implementation came from the University of Michigan; this has
6502 become &"Open LDAP"&, and there are now two different releases. Another
6503 implementation comes from Netscape, and Solaris 7 and subsequent releases
6504 contain inbuilt LDAP support. Unfortunately, though these are all compatible at
6505 the lookup function level, their error handling is different. For this reason
6506 it is necessary to set a compile-time variable when building Exim with LDAP, to
6507 indicate which LDAP library is in use. One of the following should appear in
6508 your &_Local/Makefile_&:
6510 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=UMICHIGAN
6511 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=OPENLDAP1
6512 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=OPENLDAP2
6513 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=NETSCAPE
6514 LDAP_LIB_TYPE=SOLARIS
6516 If LDAP_LIB_TYPE is not set, Exim assumes &`OPENLDAP1`&, which has the
6517 same interface as the University of Michigan version.
6519 There are three LDAP lookup types in Exim. These behave slightly differently in
6520 the way they handle the results of a query:
6523 &(ldap)& requires the result to contain just one entry; if there are more, it
6526 &(ldapdn)& also requires the result to contain just one entry, but it is the
6527 Distinguished Name that is returned rather than any attribute values.
6529 &(ldapm)& permits the result to contain more than one entry; the attributes
6530 from all of them are returned.
6534 For &(ldap)& and &(ldapm)&, if a query finds only entries with no attributes,
6535 Exim behaves as if the entry did not exist, and the lookup fails. The format of
6536 the data returned by a successful lookup is described in the next section.
6537 First we explain how LDAP queries are coded.
6540 .section "Format of LDAP queries" "SECTforldaque"
6541 .cindex "LDAP" "query format"
6542 An LDAP query takes the form of a URL as defined in RFC 2255. For example, in
6543 the configuration of a &(redirect)& router one might have this setting:
6545 data = ${lookup ldap \
6546 {ldap:///cn=$local_part,o=University%20of%20Cambridge,\
6547 c=UK?mailbox?base?}}
6549 .cindex "LDAP" "with TLS"
6550 The URL may begin with &`ldap`& or &`ldaps`& if your LDAP library supports
6551 secure (encrypted) LDAP connections. The second of these ensures that an
6552 encrypted TLS connection is used.
6555 .section "LDAP quoting"
6556 .cindex "LDAP" "quoting"
6557 Two levels of quoting are required in LDAP queries, the first for LDAP itself
6558 and the second because the LDAP query is represented as a URL. Furthermore,
6559 within an LDAP query, two different kinds of quoting are required. For this
6560 reason, there are two different LDAP-specific quoting operators.
6562 The &%quote_ldap%& operator is designed for use on strings that are part of
6563 filter specifications. Conceptually, it first does the following conversions on
6571 in accordance with RFC 2254. The resulting string is then quoted according
6572 to the rules for URLs, that is, all non-alphanumeric characters except
6576 are converted to their hex values, preceded by a percent sign. For example:
6578 ${quote_ldap: a(bc)*, a<yz>; }
6582 %20a%5C28bc%5C29%5C2A%2C%20a%3Cyz%3E%3B%20
6584 Removing the URL quoting, this is (with a leading and a trailing space):
6586 a\28bc\29\2A, a<yz>;
6588 The &%quote_ldap_dn%& operator is designed for use on strings that are part of
6589 base DN specifications in queries. Conceptually, it first converts the string
6590 by inserting a backslash in front of any of the following characters:
6594 It also inserts a backslash before any leading spaces or # characters, and
6595 before any trailing spaces. (These rules are in RFC 2253.) The resulting string
6596 is then quoted according to the rules for URLs. For example:
6598 ${quote_ldap_dn: a(bc)*, a<yz>; }
6602 %5C%20a(bc)*%5C%2C%20a%5C%3Cyz%5C%3E%5C%3B%5C%20
6604 Removing the URL quoting, this is (with a trailing space):
6606 \ a(bc)*\, a\<yz\>\;\
6608 There are some further comments about quoting in the section on LDAP
6609 authentication below.
6612 .section "LDAP connections"
6613 .cindex "LDAP" "connections"
6614 The connection to an LDAP server may either be over TCP/IP, or, when OpenLDAP
6615 is in use, via a Unix domain socket. The example given above does not specify
6616 an LDAP server. A server that is reached by TCP/IP can be specified in a query
6619 ldap://<hostname>:<port>/...
6621 If the port (and preceding colon) are omitted, the standard LDAP port (389) is
6622 used. When no server is specified in a query, a list of default servers is
6623 taken from the &%ldap_default_servers%& configuration option. This supplies a
6624 colon-separated list of servers which are tried in turn until one successfully
6625 handles a query, or there is a serious error. Successful handling either
6626 returns the requested data, or indicates that it does not exist. Serious errors
6627 are syntactical, or multiple values when only a single value is expected.
6628 Errors which cause the next server to be tried are connection failures, bind
6629 failures, and timeouts.
6631 For each server name in the list, a port number can be given. The standard way
6632 of specifing a host and port is to use a colon separator (RFC 1738). Because
6633 &%ldap_default_servers%& is a colon-separated list, such colons have to be
6634 doubled. For example
6636 ldap_default_servers = ldap1.example.com::145:ldap2.example.com
6638 If &%ldap_default_servers%& is unset, a URL with no server name is passed
6639 to the LDAP library with no server name, and the library's default (normally
6640 the local host) is used.
6642 If you are using the OpenLDAP library, you can connect to an LDAP server using
6643 a Unix domain socket instead of a TCP/IP connection. This is specified by using
6644 &`ldapi`& instead of &`ldap`& in LDAP queries. What follows here applies only
6645 to OpenLDAP. If Exim is compiled with a different LDAP library, this feature is
6648 For this type of connection, instead of a host name for the server, a pathname
6649 for the socket is required, and the port number is not relevant. The pathname
6650 can be specified either as an item in &%ldap_default_servers%&, or inline in
6651 the query. In the former case, you can have settings such as
6653 ldap_default_servers = /tmp/ldap.sock : backup.ldap.your.domain
6655 When the pathname is given in the query, you have to escape the slashes as
6656 &`%2F`& to fit in with the LDAP URL syntax. For example:
6658 ${lookup ldap {ldapi://%2Ftmp%2Fldap.sock/o=...
6660 When Exim processes an LDAP lookup and finds that the &"hostname"& is really
6661 a pathname, it uses the Unix domain socket code, even if the query actually
6662 specifies &`ldap`& or &`ldaps`&. In particular, no encryption is used for a
6663 socket connection. This behaviour means that you can use a setting of
6664 &%ldap_default_servers%& such as in the example above with traditional &`ldap`&
6665 or &`ldaps`& queries, and it will work. First, Exim tries a connection via
6666 the Unix domain socket; if that fails, it tries a TCP/IP connection to the
6669 If an explicit &`ldapi`& type is given in a query when a host name is
6670 specified, an error is diagnosed. However, if there are more items in
6671 &%ldap_default_servers%&, they are tried. In other words:
6674 Using a pathname with &`ldap`& or &`ldaps`& forces the use of the Unix domain
6677 Using &`ldapi`& with a host name causes an error.
6681 Using &`ldapi`& with no host or path in the query, and no setting of
6682 &%ldap_default_servers%&, does whatever the library does by default.
6686 .section "LDAP authentication and control information"
6687 .cindex "LDAP" "authentication"
6688 The LDAP URL syntax provides no way of passing authentication and other control
6689 information to the server. To make this possible, the URL in an LDAP query may
6690 be preceded by any number of <&'name'&>=<&'value'&> settings, separated by
6691 spaces. If a value contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes, and
6692 when double quotes are used, backslash is interpreted in the usual way inside
6693 them. The following names are recognized:
6695 &`DEREFERENCE`& set the dereferencing parameter
6696 &`NETTIME `& set a timeout for a network operation
6697 &`USER `& set the DN, for authenticating the LDAP bind
6698 &`PASS `& set the password, likewise
6699 &`SIZE `& set the limit for the number of entries returned
6700 &`TIME `& set the maximum waiting time for a query
6702 The value of the DEREFERENCE parameter must be one of the words &"never"&,
6703 &"searching"&, &"finding"&, or &"always"&.
6705 The name CONNECT is an obsolete name for NETTIME, retained for
6706 backwards compatibility. This timeout (specified as a number of seconds) is
6707 enforced from the client end for operations that can be carried out over a
6708 network. Specifically, it applies to network connections and calls to the
6709 &'ldap_result()'& function. If the value is greater than zero, it is used if
6710 LDAP_OPT_NETWORK_TIMEOUT is defined in the LDAP headers (OpenLDAP), or
6711 if LDAP_X_OPT_CONNECT_TIMEOUT is defined in the LDAP headers (Netscape
6712 SDK 4.1). A value of zero forces an explicit setting of &"no timeout"& for
6713 Netscape SDK; for OpenLDAP no action is taken.
6715 The TIME parameter (also a number of seconds) is passed to the server to
6716 set a server-side limit on the time taken to complete a search.
6719 Here is an example of an LDAP query in an Exim lookup that uses some of these
6720 values. This is a single line, folded to fit on the page:
6723 {user="cn=manager,o=University of Cambridge,c=UK" pass=secret
6724 ldap:///o=University%20of%20Cambridge,c=UK?sn?sub?(cn=foo)}
6727 The encoding of spaces as &`%20`& is a URL thing which should not be done for
6728 any of the auxiliary data. Exim configuration settings that include lookups
6729 which contain password information should be preceded by &"hide"& to prevent
6730 non-admin users from using the &%-bP%& option to see their values.
6732 The auxiliary data items may be given in any order. The default is no
6733 connection timeout (the system timeout is used), no user or password, no limit
6734 on the number of entries returned, and no time limit on queries.
6736 When a DN is quoted in the USER= setting for LDAP authentication, Exim
6737 removes any URL quoting that it may contain before passing it LDAP. Apparently
6738 some libraries do this for themselves, but some do not. Removing the URL
6739 quoting has two advantages:
6742 It makes it possible to use the same &%quote_ldap_dn%& expansion for USER=
6743 DNs as with DNs inside actual queries.
6745 It permits spaces inside USER= DNs.
6748 For example, a setting such as
6750 USER=cn=${quote_ldap_dn:$1}
6752 should work even if &$1$& contains spaces.
6754 Expanded data for the PASS= value should be quoted using the &%quote%&
6755 expansion operator, rather than the LDAP quote operators. The only reason this
6756 field needs quoting is to ensure that it conforms to the Exim syntax, which
6757 does not allow unquoted spaces. For example:
6761 The LDAP authentication mechanism can be used to check passwords as part of
6762 SMTP authentication. See the &%ldapauth%& expansion string condition in chapter
6767 .section "Format of data returned by LDAP"
6768 .cindex "LDAP" "returned data formats"
6769 The &(ldapdn)& lookup type returns the Distinguished Name from a single entry
6770 as a sequence of values, for example
6772 cn=manager, o=University of Cambridge, c=UK
6774 The &(ldap)& lookup type generates an error if more than one entry matches the
6775 search filter, whereas &(ldapm)& permits this case, and inserts a newline in
6776 the result between the data from different entries. It is possible for multiple
6777 values to be returned for both &(ldap)& and &(ldapm)&, but in the former case
6778 you know that whatever values are returned all came from a single entry in the
6781 In the common case where you specify a single attribute in your LDAP query, the
6782 result is not quoted, and does not contain the attribute name. If the attribute
6783 has multiple values, they are separated by commas.
6785 If you specify multiple attributes, the result contains space-separated, quoted
6786 strings, each preceded by the attribute name and an equals sign. Within the
6787 quotes, the quote character, backslash, and newline are escaped with
6788 backslashes, and commas are used to separate multiple values for the attribute.
6789 Apart from the escaping, the string within quotes takes the same form as the
6790 output when a single attribute is requested. Specifying no attributes is the
6791 same as specifying all of an entry's attributes.
6793 Here are some examples of the output format. The first line of each pair is an
6794 LDAP query, and the second is the data that is returned. The attribute called
6795 &%attr1%& has two values, whereas &%attr2%& has only one value:
6797 ldap:///o=base?attr1?sub?(uid=fred)
6800 ldap:///o=base?attr2?sub?(uid=fred)
6803 ldap:///o=base?attr1,attr2?sub?(uid=fred)
6804 attr1="value1.1, value1.2" attr2="value two"
6806 ldap:///o=base??sub?(uid=fred)
6807 objectClass="top" attr1="value1.1, value1.2" attr2="value two"
6809 The &%extract%& operator in string expansions can be used to pick out
6810 individual fields from data that consists of &'key'&=&'value'& pairs. You can
6811 make use of Exim's &%-be%& option to run expansion tests and thereby check the
6812 results of LDAP lookups.
6817 .section "More about NIS+" "SECTnisplus"
6818 .cindex "NIS+ lookup type"
6819 .cindex "lookup" "NIS+"
6820 NIS+ queries consist of a NIS+ &'indexed name'& followed by an optional colon
6821 and field name. If this is given, the result of a successful query is the
6822 contents of the named field; otherwise the result consists of a concatenation
6823 of &'field-name=field-value'& pairs, separated by spaces. Empty values and
6824 values containing spaces are quoted. For example, the query
6826 [name=mg1456],passwd.org_dir
6828 might return the string
6830 name=mg1456 passwd="" uid=999 gid=999 gcos="Martin Guerre"
6831 home=/home/mg1456 shell=/bin/bash shadow=""
6833 (split over two lines here to fit on the page), whereas
6835 [name=mg1456],passwd.org_dir:gcos
6841 with no quotes. A NIS+ lookup fails if NIS+ returns more than one table entry
6842 for the given indexed key. The effect of the &%quote_nisplus%& expansion
6843 operator is to double any quote characters within the text.
6847 .section "SQL lookups" "SECTsql"
6849 .cindex "SQL lookup types"
6850 Exim can support lookups in Interbase, MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, and SQLite
6851 databases. Queries for these databases contain SQL statements, so an example
6855 ${lookup mysql{select mailbox from users where id='userx'}\
6858 If the result of the query contains more than one field, the data for each
6859 field in the row is returned, preceded by its name, so the result of
6861 ${lookup pgsql{select home,name from users where id='userx'}\
6866 home=/home/userx name="Mister X"
6868 Empty values and values containing spaces are double quoted, with embedded
6869 quotes escaped by a backslash. If the result of the query contains just one
6870 field, the value is passed back verbatim, without a field name, for example:
6874 If the result of the query yields more than one row, it is all concatenated,
6875 with a newline between the data for each row.
6878 .section "More about MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, and Interbase"
6879 .cindex "MySQL" "lookup type"
6880 .cindex "PostgreSQL lookup type"
6881 .cindex "lookup" "MySQL"
6882 .cindex "lookup" "PostgreSQL"
6883 .cindex "Oracle" "lookup type"
6884 .cindex "lookup" "Oracle"
6885 .cindex "Interbase lookup type"
6886 .cindex "lookup" "Interbase"
6887 If any MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, or Interbase lookups are used, the
6888 &%mysql_servers%&, &%pgsql_servers%&, &%oracle_servers%&, or &%ibase_servers%&
6889 option (as appropriate) must be set to a colon-separated list of server
6890 information. Each item in the list is a slash-separated list of four items:
6891 host name, database name, user name, and password. In the case of Oracle, the
6892 host name field is used for the &"service name"&, and the database name field
6893 is not used and should be empty. For example:
6895 hide oracle_servers = oracle.plc.example//userx/abcdwxyz
6897 Because password data is sensitive, you should always precede the setting with
6898 &"hide"&, to prevent non-admin users from obtaining the setting via the &%-bP%&
6899 option. Here is an example where two MySQL servers are listed:
6901 hide mysql_servers = localhost/users/root/secret:\
6902 otherhost/users/root/othersecret
6904 For MySQL and PostgreSQL, a host may be specified as <&'name'&>:<&'port'&> but
6905 because this is a colon-separated list, the colon has to be doubled. For each
6906 query, these parameter groups are tried in order until a connection and a query
6909 The &%quote_mysql%&, &%quote_pgsql%&, and &%quote_oracle%& expansion operators
6910 convert newline, tab, carriage return, and backspace to \n, \t, \r, and \b
6911 respectively, and the characters single-quote, double-quote, and backslash
6912 itself are escaped with backslashes. The &%quote_pgsql%& expansion operator, in
6913 addition, escapes the percent and underscore characters. This cannot be done
6914 for MySQL because these escapes are not recognized in contexts where these
6915 characters are not special.
6918 .section "Special MySQL features"
6919 For MySQL, an empty host name or the use of &"localhost"& in &%mysql_servers%&
6920 causes a connection to the server on the local host by means of a Unix domain
6921 socket. An alternate socket can be specified in parentheses. The full syntax of
6922 each item in &%mysql_servers%& is:
6924 <&'hostname'&>::<&'port'&>(<&'socket name'&>)/<&'database'&>/&&&
6925 <&'user'&>/<&'password'&>
6927 Any of the three sub-parts of the first field can be omitted. For normal use on
6928 the local host it can be left blank or set to just &"localhost"&.
6930 No database need be supplied &-- but if it is absent here, it must be given in
6933 If a MySQL query is issued that does not request any data (an insert, update,
6934 or delete command), the result of the lookup is the number of rows affected.
6936 &*Warning*&: This can be misleading. If an update does not actually change
6937 anything (for example, setting a field to the value it already has), the result
6938 is zero because no rows are affected.
6941 .section "Special PostgreSQL features"
6942 PostgreSQL lookups can also use Unix domain socket connections to the database.
6943 This is usually faster and costs less CPU time than a TCP/IP connection.
6944 However it can be used only if the mail server runs on the same machine as the
6945 database server. A configuration line for PostgreSQL via Unix domain sockets
6948 hide pgsql_servers = (/tmp/.s.PGSQL.5432)/db/user/password : ...
6950 In other words, instead of supplying a host name, a path to the socket is
6951 given. The path name is enclosed in parentheses so that its slashes aren't
6952 visually confused with the delimiters for the other server parameters.
6954 If a PostgreSQL query is issued that does not request any data (an insert,
6955 update, or delete command), the result of the lookup is the number of rows
6959 .section "More about SQLite" "SECTsqlite"
6960 .cindex "lookup" "SQLite"
6961 .cindex "SQLite lookup type"
6962 SQLite is different to the other SQL lookups because a file name is required in
6963 addition to the SQL query. An SQLite database is a single file, and there is no
6964 daemon as in the other SQL databases. The interface to Exim requires the name
6965 of the file, as an absolute path, to be given at the start of the query. It is
6966 separated from the query by white space. This means that the path name cannot
6967 contain white space. Here is a lookup expansion example:
6969 ${lookup sqlite {/some/thing/sqlitedb \
6970 select name from aliases where id='userx';}}
6972 In a list, the syntax is similar. For example:
6974 domainlist relay_domains = sqlite;/some/thing/sqlitedb \
6975 select * from relays where ip='$sender_host_address';
6977 The only character affected by the &%quote_sqlite%& operator is a single
6978 quote, which it doubles.
6980 The SQLite library handles multiple simultaneous accesses to the database
6981 internally. Multiple readers are permitted, but only one process can
6982 update at once. Attempts to access the database while it is being updated
6983 are rejected after a timeout period, during which the SQLite library
6984 waits for the lock to be released. In Exim, the default timeout is set
6985 to 5 seconds, but it can be changed by means of the &%sqlite_lock_timeout%&
6990 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
6991 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
6993 .chapter "Domain, host, address, and local part lists" &&&
6994 "CHAPdomhosaddlists" &&&
6995 "Domain, host, and address lists"
6996 .cindex "list of domains; hosts; etc."
6997 A number of Exim configuration options contain lists of domains, hosts,
6998 email addresses, or local parts. For example, the &%hold_domains%& option
6999 contains a list of domains whose delivery is currently suspended. These lists
7000 are also used as data in ACL statements (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&), and as
7001 arguments to expansion conditions such as &%match_domain%&.
7003 Each item in one of these lists is a pattern to be matched against a domain,
7004 host, email address, or local part, respectively. In the sections below, the
7005 different types of pattern for each case are described, but first we cover some
7006 general facilities that apply to all four kinds of list.
7010 .section "Expansion of lists"
7011 .cindex "expansion" "of lists"
7012 Each list is expanded as a single string before it is used. The result of
7013 expansion must be a list, possibly containing empty items, which is split up
7014 into separate items for matching. By default, colon is the separator character,
7015 but this can be varied if necessary. See sections &<<SECTlistconstruct>>& and
7016 &<<SECTempitelis>>& for details of the list syntax; the second of these
7017 discusses the way to specify empty list items.
7020 If the string expansion is forced to fail, Exim behaves as if the item it is
7021 testing (domain, host, address, or local part) is not in the list. Other
7022 expansion failures cause temporary errors.
7024 If an item in a list is a regular expression, backslashes, dollars and possibly
7025 other special characters in the expression must be protected against
7026 misinterpretation by the string expander. The easiest way to do this is to use
7027 the &`\N`& expansion feature to indicate that the contents of the regular
7028 expression should not be expanded. For example, in an ACL you might have:
7030 deny senders = \N^\d{8}\w@.*\.baddomain\.example$\N : \
7031 ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/badsenders/bydomain}}
7033 The first item is a regular expression that is protected from expansion by
7034 &`\N`&, whereas the second uses the expansion to obtain a list of unwanted
7035 senders based on the receiving domain.
7040 .section "Negated items in lists"
7041 .cindex "list" "negation"
7042 .cindex "negation in lists"
7043 Items in a list may be positive or negative. Negative items are indicated by a
7044 leading exclamation mark, which may be followed by optional white space. A list
7045 defines a set of items (domains, etc). When Exim processes one of these lists,
7046 it is trying to find out whether a domain, host, address, or local part
7047 (respectively) is in the set that is defined by the list. It works like this:
7049 The list is scanned from left to right. If a positive item is matched, the
7050 subject that is being checked is in the set; if a negative item is matched, the
7051 subject is not in the set. If the end of the list is reached without the
7052 subject having matched any of the patterns, it is in the set if the last item
7053 was a negative one, but not if it was a positive one. For example, the list in
7055 domainlist relay_domains = !a.b.c : *.b.c
7057 matches any domain ending in &'.b.c'& except for &'a.b.c'&. Domains that match
7058 neither &'a.b.c'& nor &'*.b.c'& do not match, because the last item in the
7059 list is positive. However, if the setting were
7061 domainlist relay_domains = !a.b.c
7063 then all domains other than &'a.b.c'& would match because the last item in the
7064 list is negative. In other words, a list that ends with a negative item behaves
7065 as if it had an extra item &`:*`& on the end.
7067 Another way of thinking about positive and negative items in lists is to read
7068 the connector as &"or"& after a positive item and as &"and"& after a negative
7073 .section "File names in lists" "SECTfilnamlis"
7074 .cindex "list" "file name in"
7075 If an item in a domain, host, address, or local part list is an absolute file
7076 name (beginning with a slash character), each line of the file is read and
7077 processed as if it were an independent item in the list, except that further
7078 file names are not allowed,
7079 and no expansion of the data from the file takes place.
7080 Empty lines in the file are ignored, and the file may also contain comment
7084 For domain and host lists, if a # character appears anywhere in a line of the
7085 file, it and all following characters are ignored.
7087 Because local parts may legitimately contain # characters, a comment in an
7088 address list or local part list file is recognized only if # is preceded by
7089 white space or the start of the line. For example:
7091 not#comment@x.y.z # but this is a comment
7095 Putting a file name in a list has the same effect as inserting each line of the
7096 file as an item in the list (blank lines and comments excepted). However, there
7097 is one important difference: the file is read each time the list is processed,
7098 so if its contents vary over time, Exim's behaviour changes.
7100 If a file name is preceded by an exclamation mark, the sense of any match
7101 within the file is inverted. For example, if
7103 hold_domains = !/etc/nohold-domains
7105 and the file contains the lines
7110 then &'a.b.c'& is in the set of domains defined by &%hold_domains%&, whereas
7111 any domain matching &`*.b.c`& is not.
7115 .section "An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list"
7116 As will be described in the sections that follow, lookups can be used in lists
7117 to provide indexed methods of checking list membership. There has been some
7118 confusion about the way &(lsearch)& lookups work in lists. Because
7119 an &(lsearch)& file contains plain text and is scanned sequentially, it is
7120 sometimes thought that it is allowed to contain wild cards and other kinds of
7121 non-constant pattern. This is not the case. The keys in an &(lsearch)& file are
7122 always fixed strings, just as for any other single-key lookup type.
7124 If you want to use a file to contain wild-card patterns that form part of a
7125 list, just give the file name on its own, without a search type, as described
7126 in the previous section.
7131 .section "Named lists" "SECTnamedlists"
7132 .cindex "named lists"
7133 .cindex "list" "named"
7134 A list of domains, hosts, email addresses, or local parts can be given a name
7135 which is then used to refer to the list elsewhere in the configuration. This is
7136 particularly convenient if the same list is required in several different
7137 places. It also allows lists to be given meaningful names, which can improve
7138 the readability of the configuration. For example, it is conventional to define
7139 a domain list called &'local_domains'& for all the domains that are handled
7140 locally on a host, using a configuration line such as
7142 domainlist local_domains = localhost:my.dom.example
7144 Named lists are referenced by giving their name preceded by a plus sign, so,
7145 for example, a router that is intended to handle local domains would be
7146 configured with the line
7148 domains = +local_domains
7150 The first router in a configuration is often one that handles all domains
7151 except the local ones, using a configuration with a negated item like this:
7155 domains = ! +local_domains
7156 transport = remote_smtp
7159 The four kinds of named list are created by configuration lines starting with
7160 the words &%domainlist%&, &%hostlist%&, &%addresslist%&, or &%localpartlist%&,
7161 respectively. Then there follows the name that you are defining, followed by an
7162 equals sign and the list itself. For example:
7164 hostlist relay_hosts = 192.168.23.0/24 : my.friend.example
7165 addresslist bad_senders = cdb;/etc/badsenders
7167 A named list may refer to other named lists:
7169 domainlist dom1 = first.example : second.example
7170 domainlist dom2 = +dom1 : third.example
7171 domainlist dom3 = fourth.example : +dom2 : fifth.example
7173 &*Warning*&: If the last item in a referenced list is a negative one, the
7174 effect may not be what you intended, because the negation does not propagate
7175 out to the higher level. For example, consider:
7177 domainlist dom1 = !a.b
7178 domainlist dom2 = +dom1 : *.b
7180 The second list specifies &"either in the &%dom1%& list or &'*.b'&"&. The first
7181 list specifies just &"not &'a.b'&"&, so the domain &'x.y'& matches it. That
7182 means it matches the second list as well. The effect is not the same as
7184 domainlist dom2 = !a.b : *.b
7186 where &'x.y'& does not match. It's best to avoid negation altogether in
7187 referenced lists if you can.
7189 Named lists may have a performance advantage. When Exim is routing an
7190 address or checking an incoming message, it caches the result of tests on named
7191 lists. So, if you have a setting such as
7193 domains = +local_domains
7195 on several of your routers
7196 or in several ACL statements,
7197 the actual test is done only for the first one. However, the caching works only
7198 if there are no expansions within the list itself or any sublists that it
7199 references. In other words, caching happens only for lists that are known to be
7200 the same each time they are referenced.
7202 By default, there may be up to 16 named lists of each type. This limit can be
7203 extended by changing a compile-time variable. The use of domain and host lists
7204 is recommended for concepts such as local domains, relay domains, and relay
7205 hosts. The default configuration is set up like this.
7209 .section "Named lists compared with macros"
7210 .cindex "list" "named compared with macro"
7211 .cindex "macro" "compared with named list"
7212 At first sight, named lists might seem to be no different from macros in the
7213 configuration file. However, macros are just textual substitutions. If you
7216 ALIST = host1 : host2
7217 auth_advertise_hosts = !ALIST
7219 it probably won't do what you want, because that is exactly the same as
7221 auth_advertise_hosts = !host1 : host2
7223 Notice that the second host name is not negated. However, if you use a host
7226 hostlist alist = host1 : host2
7227 auth_advertise_hosts = ! +alist
7229 the negation applies to the whole list, and so that is equivalent to
7231 auth_advertise_hosts = !host1 : !host2
7235 .section "Named list caching"
7236 .cindex "list" "caching of named"
7237 .cindex "caching" "named lists"
7238 While processing a message, Exim caches the result of checking a named list if
7239 it is sure that the list is the same each time. In practice, this means that
7240 the cache operates only if the list contains no $ characters, which guarantees
7241 that it will not change when it is expanded. Sometimes, however, you may have
7242 an expanded list that you know will be the same each time within a given
7243 message. For example:
7245 domainlist special_domains = \
7246 ${lookup{$sender_host_address}cdb{/some/file}}
7248 This provides a list of domains that depends only on the sending host's IP
7249 address. If this domain list is referenced a number of times (for example,
7250 in several ACL lines, or in several routers) the result of the check is not
7251 cached by default, because Exim does not know that it is going to be the
7252 same list each time.
7254 By appending &`_cache`& to &`domainlist`& you can tell Exim to go ahead and
7255 cache the result anyway. For example:
7257 domainlist_cache special_domains = ${lookup{...
7259 If you do this, you should be absolutely sure that caching is going to do
7260 the right thing in all cases. When in doubt, leave it out.
7264 .section "Domain lists" "SECTdomainlist"
7265 .cindex "domain list" "patterns for"
7266 .cindex "list" "domain list"
7267 Domain lists contain patterns that are to be matched against a mail domain.
7268 The following types of item may appear in domain lists:
7271 .cindex "primary host name"
7272 .cindex "host name" "matched in domain list"
7273 .cindex "&%primary_hostname%&"
7274 .cindex "domain list" "matching primary host name"
7275 .cindex "@ in a domain list"
7276 If a pattern consists of a single @ character, it matches the local host name,
7277 as set by the &%primary_hostname%& option (or defaulted). This makes it
7278 possible to use the same configuration file on several different hosts that
7279 differ only in their names.
7281 .cindex "@[] in a domain list"
7282 .cindex "domain list" "matching local IP interfaces"
7283 .cindex "domain literal"
7284 If a pattern consists of the string &`@[]`& it matches any local IP interface
7285 address, enclosed in square brackets, as in an email address that contains a
7287 In today's Internet, the use of domain literals is controversial.
7290 .cindex "@mx_primary"
7291 .cindex "@mx_secondary"
7292 .cindex "domain list" "matching MX pointers to local host"
7293 If a pattern consists of the string &`@mx_any`& it matches any domain that
7294 has an MX record pointing to the local host or to any host that is listed in
7295 .cindex "&%hosts_treat_as_local%&"
7296 &%hosts_treat_as_local%&. The items &`@mx_primary`& and &`@mx_secondary`&
7297 are similar, except that the first matches only when a primary MX target is the
7298 local host, and the second only when no primary MX target is the local host,
7299 but a secondary MX target is. &"Primary"& means an MX record with the lowest
7300 preference value &-- there may of course be more than one of them.
7302 The MX lookup that takes place when matching a pattern of this type is
7303 performed with the resolver options for widening names turned off. Thus, for
7304 example, a single-component domain will &'not'& be expanded by adding the
7305 resolver's default domain. See the &%qualify_single%& and &%search_parents%&
7306 options of the &(dnslookup)& router for a discussion of domain widening.
7308 Sometimes you may want to ignore certain IP addresses when using one of these
7309 patterns. You can specify this by following the pattern with &`/ignore=`&<&'ip
7310 list'&>, where <&'ip list'&> is a list of IP addresses. These addresses are
7311 ignored when processing the pattern (compare the &%ignore_target_hosts%& option
7312 on a router). For example:
7314 domains = @mx_any/ignore=127.0.0.1
7316 This example matches any domain that has an MX record pointing to one of
7317 the local host's IP addresses other than 127.0.0.1.
7319 The list of IP addresses is in fact processed by the same code that processes
7320 host lists, so it may contain CIDR-coded network specifications and it may also
7321 contain negative items.
7323 Because the list of IP addresses is a sublist within a domain list, you have to
7324 be careful about delimiters if there is more than one address. Like any other
7325 list, the default delimiter can be changed. Thus, you might have:
7327 domains = @mx_any/ignore=<;127.0.0.1;0.0.0.0 : \
7328 an.other.domain : ...
7330 so that the sublist uses semicolons for delimiters. When IPv6 addresses are
7331 involved, it is easiest to change the delimiter for the main list as well:
7333 domains = <? @mx_any/ignore=<;127.0.0.1;::1 ? \
7334 an.other.domain ? ...
7337 .cindex "asterisk" "in domain list"
7338 .cindex "domain list" "asterisk in"
7339 .cindex "domain list" "matching &""ends with""&"
7340 If a pattern starts with an asterisk, the remaining characters of the pattern
7341 are compared with the terminating characters of the domain. The use of &"*"& in
7342 domain lists differs from its use in partial matching lookups. In a domain
7343 list, the character following the asterisk need not be a dot, whereas partial
7344 matching works only in terms of dot-separated components. For example, a domain
7345 list item such as &`*key.ex`& matches &'donkey.ex'& as well as
7349 .cindex "regular expressions" "in domain list"
7350 .cindex "domain list" "matching regular expression"
7351 If a pattern starts with a circumflex character, it is treated as a regular
7352 expression, and matched against the domain using a regular expression matching
7353 function. The circumflex is treated as part of the regular expression.
7354 References to descriptions of the syntax of regular expressions are given in
7355 chapter &<<CHAPregexp>>&.
7357 &*Warning*&: Because domain lists are expanded before being processed, you
7358 must escape any backslash and dollar characters in the regular expression, or
7359 use the special &`\N`& sequence (see chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&) to specify that
7360 it is not to be expanded (unless you really do want to build a regular
7361 expression by expansion, of course).
7363 .cindex "lookup" "in domain list"
7364 .cindex "domain list" "matching by lookup"
7365 If a pattern starts with the name of a single-key lookup type followed by a
7366 semicolon (for example, &"dbm;"& or &"lsearch;"&), the remainder of the pattern
7367 must be a file name in a suitable format for the lookup type. For example, for
7368 &"cdb;"& it must be an absolute path:
7370 domains = cdb;/etc/mail/local_domains.cdb
7372 The appropriate type of lookup is done on the file using the domain name as the
7373 key. In most cases, the data that is looked up is not used; Exim is interested
7374 only in whether or not the key is present in the file. However, when a lookup
7375 is used for the &%domains%& option on a router
7376 or a &%domains%& condition in an ACL statement, the data is preserved in the
7377 &$domain_data$& variable and can be referred to in other router options or
7378 other statements in the same ACL.
7381 Any of the single-key lookup type names may be preceded by
7382 &`partial`&<&'n'&>&`-`&, where the <&'n'&> is optional, for example,
7384 domains = partial-dbm;/partial/domains
7386 This causes partial matching logic to be invoked; a description of how this
7387 works is given in section &<<SECTpartiallookup>>&.
7390 .cindex "asterisk" "in lookup type"
7391 Any of the single-key lookup types may be followed by an asterisk. This causes
7392 a default lookup for a key consisting of a single asterisk to be done if the
7393 original lookup fails. This is not a useful feature when using a domain list to
7394 select particular domains (because any domain would match), but it might have
7395 value if the result of the lookup is being used via the &$domain_data$&
7398 If the pattern starts with the name of a query-style lookup type followed by a
7399 semicolon (for example, &"nisplus;"& or &"ldap;"&), the remainder of the
7400 pattern must be an appropriate query for the lookup type, as described in
7401 chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&. For example:
7403 hold_domains = mysql;select domain from holdlist \
7404 where domain = '$domain';
7406 In most cases, the data that is looked up is not used (so for an SQL query, for
7407 example, it doesn't matter what field you select). Exim is interested only in
7408 whether or not the query succeeds. However, when a lookup is used for the
7409 &%domains%& option on a router, the data is preserved in the &$domain_data$&
7410 variable and can be referred to in other options.
7412 .cindex "domain list" "matching literal domain name"
7413 If none of the above cases apply, a caseless textual comparison is made
7414 between the pattern and the domain.
7417 Here is an example that uses several different kinds of pattern:
7419 domainlist funny_domains = \
7422 *.foundation.fict.example : \
7423 \N^[1-2]\d{3}\.fict\.example$\N : \
7424 partial-dbm;/opt/data/penguin/book : \
7425 nis;domains.byname : \
7426 nisplus;[name=$domain,status=local],domains.org_dir
7428 There are obvious processing trade-offs among the various matching modes. Using
7429 an asterisk is faster than a regular expression, and listing a few names
7430 explicitly probably is too. The use of a file or database lookup is expensive,
7431 but may be the only option if hundreds of names are required. Because the
7432 patterns are tested in order, it makes sense to put the most commonly matched
7437 .section "Host lists" "SECThostlist"
7438 .cindex "host list" "patterns in"
7439 .cindex "list" "host list"
7440 Host lists are used to control what remote hosts are allowed to do. For
7441 example, some hosts may be allowed to use the local host as a relay, and some
7442 may be permitted to use the SMTP ETRN command. Hosts can be identified in
7443 two different ways, by name or by IP address. In a host list, some types of
7444 pattern are matched to a host name, and some are matched to an IP address.
7445 You need to be particularly careful with this when single-key lookups are
7446 involved, to ensure that the right value is being used as the key.
7449 .section "Special host list patterns"
7450 .cindex "empty item in hosts list"
7451 .cindex "host list" "empty string in"
7452 If a host list item is the empty string, it matches only when no remote host is
7453 involved. This is the case when a message is being received from a local
7454 process using SMTP on the standard input, that is, when a TCP/IP connection is
7457 .cindex "asterisk" "in host list"
7458 The special pattern &"*"& in a host list matches any host or no host. Neither
7459 the IP address nor the name is actually inspected.
7463 .section "Host list patterns that match by IP address" "SECThoslispatip"
7464 .cindex "host list" "matching IP addresses"
7465 If an IPv4 host calls an IPv6 host and the call is accepted on an IPv6 socket,
7466 the incoming address actually appears in the IPv6 host as
7467 &`::ffff:`&<&'v4address'&>. When such an address is tested against a host
7468 list, it is converted into a traditional IPv4 address first. (Not all operating
7469 systems accept IPv4 calls on IPv6 sockets, as there have been some security
7472 The following types of pattern in a host list check the remote host by
7473 inspecting its IP address:
7476 If the pattern is a plain domain name (not a regular expression, not starting
7477 with *, not a lookup of any kind), Exim calls the operating system function
7478 to find the associated IP address(es). Exim uses the newer
7479 &[getipnodebyname()]& function when available, otherwise &[gethostbyname()]&.
7480 This typically causes a forward DNS lookup of the name. The result is compared
7481 with the IP address of the subject host.
7483 If there is a temporary problem (such as a DNS timeout) with the host name
7484 lookup, a temporary error occurs. For example, if the list is being used in an
7485 ACL condition, the ACL gives a &"defer"& response, usually leading to a
7486 temporary SMTP error code. If no IP address can be found for the host name,
7487 what happens is described in section &<<SECTbehipnot>>& below.
7490 .cindex "@ in a host list"
7491 If the pattern is &"@"&, the primary host name is substituted and used as a
7492 domain name, as just described.
7495 If the pattern is an IP address, it is matched against the IP address of the
7496 subject host. IPv4 addresses are given in the normal &"dotted-quad"& notation.
7497 IPv6 addresses can be given in colon-separated format, but the colons have to
7498 be doubled so as not to be taken as item separators when the default list
7499 separator is used. IPv6 addresses are recognized even when Exim is compiled
7500 without IPv6 support. This means that if they appear in a host list on an
7501 IPv4-only host, Exim will not treat them as host names. They are just addresses
7502 that can never match a client host.
7505 .cindex "@[] in a host list"
7506 If the pattern is &"@[]"&, it matches the IP address of any IP interface on
7507 the local host. For example, if the local host is an IPv4 host with one
7508 interface address 10.45.23.56, these two ACL statements have the same effect:
7510 accept hosts = 127.0.0.1 : 10.45.23.56
7514 .cindex "CIDR notation"
7515 If the pattern is an IP address followed by a slash and a mask length (for
7516 example 10.11.42.0/24), it is matched against the IP address of the subject
7517 host under the given mask. This allows, an entire network of hosts to be
7518 included (or excluded) by a single item. The mask uses CIDR notation; it
7519 specifies the number of address bits that must match, starting from the most
7520 significant end of the address.
7522 &*Note*&: The mask is &'not'& a count of addresses, nor is it the high number
7523 of a range of addresses. It is the number of bits in the network portion of the
7524 address. The above example specifies a 24-bit netmask, so it matches all 256
7525 addresses in the 10.11.42.0 network. An item such as
7529 matches just two addresses, 192.168.23.236 and 192.168.23.237. A mask value of
7530 32 for an IPv4 address is the same as no mask at all; just a single address
7533 Here is another example which shows an IPv4 and an IPv6 network:
7535 recipient_unqualified_hosts = 192.168.0.0/16: \
7536 3ffe::ffff::836f::::/48
7538 The doubling of list separator characters applies only when these items
7539 appear inline in a host list. It is not required when indirecting via a file.
7542 recipient_unqualified_hosts = /opt/exim/unqualnets
7544 could make use of a file containing
7549 to have exactly the same effect as the previous example. When listing IPv6
7550 addresses inline, it is usually more convenient to use the facility for
7551 changing separator characters. This list contains the same two networks:
7553 recipient_unqualified_hosts = <; 172.16.0.0/12; \
7556 The separator is changed to semicolon by the leading &"<;"& at the start of the
7562 .section "Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address" &&&
7563 "SECThoslispatsikey"
7564 .cindex "host list" "lookup of IP address"
7565 When a host is to be identified by a single-key lookup of its complete IP
7566 address, the pattern takes this form:
7568 &`net-<`&&'single-key-search-type'&&`>;<`&&'search-data'&&`>`&
7572 hosts_lookup = net-cdb;/hosts-by-ip.db
7574 The text form of the IP address of the subject host is used as the lookup key.
7575 IPv6 addresses are converted to an unabbreviated form, using lower case
7576 letters, with dots as separators because colon is the key terminator in
7577 &(lsearch)& files. [Colons can in fact be used in keys in &(lsearch)& files by
7578 quoting the keys, but this is a facility that was added later.] The data
7579 returned by the lookup is not used.
7581 .cindex "IP address" "masking"
7582 .cindex "host list" "masked IP address"
7583 Single-key lookups can also be performed using masked IP addresses, using
7584 patterns of this form:
7586 &`net<`&&'number'&&`>-<`&&'single-key-search-type'&&`>;<`&&'search-data'&&`>`&
7590 net24-dbm;/networks.db
7592 The IP address of the subject host is masked using <&'number'&> as the mask
7593 length. A textual string is constructed from the masked value, followed by the
7594 mask, and this is used as the lookup key. For example, if the host's IP address
7595 is 192.168.34.6, the key that is looked up for the above example is
7596 &"192.168.34.0/24"&. IPv6 addresses are converted to a text value using lower
7597 case letters and dots as separators instead of the more usual colon, because
7598 colon is the key terminator in &(lsearch)& files. Full, unabbreviated IPv6
7599 addresses are always used.
7601 &*Warning*&: Specifing &%net32-%& (for an IPv4 address) or &%net128-%& (for an
7602 IPv6 address) is not the same as specifing just &%net-%& without a number. In
7603 the former case the key strings include the mask value, whereas in the latter
7604 case the IP address is used on its own.
7608 .section "Host list patterns that match by host name" "SECThoslispatnam"
7609 .cindex "host" "lookup failures"
7610 .cindex "unknown host name"
7611 .cindex "host list" "matching host name"
7612 There are several types of pattern that require Exim to know the name of the
7613 remote host. These are either wildcard patterns or lookups by name. (If a
7614 complete hostname is given without any wildcarding, it is used to find an IP
7615 address to match against, as described in the section &<<SECThoslispatip>>&
7618 If the remote host name is not already known when Exim encounters one of these
7619 patterns, it has to be found from the IP address.
7620 Although many sites on the Internet are conscientious about maintaining reverse
7621 DNS data for their hosts, there are also many that do not do this.
7622 Consequently, a name cannot always be found, and this may lead to unwanted
7623 effects. Take care when configuring host lists with wildcarded name patterns.
7624 Consider what will happen if a name cannot be found.
7626 Because of the problems of determining host names from IP addresses, matching
7627 against host names is not as common as matching against IP addresses.
7629 By default, in order to find a host name, Exim first does a reverse DNS lookup;
7630 if no name is found in the DNS, the system function (&[gethostbyaddr()]& or
7631 &[getipnodebyaddr()]& if available) is tried. The order in which these lookups
7632 are done can be changed by setting the &%host_lookup_order%& option.
7634 There are some options that control what happens if a host name cannot be
7635 found. These are described in section &<<SECTbehipnot>>& below.
7637 .cindex "host" "alias for"
7638 .cindex "alias for host"
7639 As a result of aliasing, hosts may have more than one name. When processing any
7640 of the following types of pattern, all the host's names are checked:
7643 .cindex "asterisk" "in host list"
7644 If a pattern starts with &"*"& the remainder of the item must match the end of
7645 the host name. For example, &`*.b.c`& matches all hosts whose names end in
7646 &'.b.c'&. This special simple form is provided because this is a very common
7647 requirement. Other kinds of wildcarding require the use of a regular
7650 .cindex "regular expressions" "in host list"
7651 .cindex "host list" "regular expression in"
7652 If the item starts with &"^"& it is taken to be a regular expression which is
7653 matched against the host name. For example,
7657 is a regular expression that matches either of the two hosts &'a.c.d'& or
7658 &'b.c.d'&. When a regular expression is used in a host list, you must take care
7659 that backslash and dollar characters are not misinterpreted as part of the
7660 string expansion. The simplest way to do this is to use &`\N`& to mark that
7661 part of the string as non-expandable. For example:
7663 sender_unqualified_hosts = \N^(a|b)\.c\.d$\N : ....
7665 &*Warning*&: If you want to match a complete host name, you must include the
7666 &`$`& terminating metacharacter in the regular expression, as in the above
7667 example. Without it, a match at the start of the host name is all that is
7674 .section "Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found" "SECTbehipnot"
7675 .cindex "host" "lookup failures"
7676 While processing a host list, Exim may need to look up an IP address from a
7677 name (see section &<<SECThoslispatip>>&), or it may need to look up a host name
7678 from an IP address (see section &<<SECThoslispatnam>>&). In either case, the
7679 behaviour when it fails to find the information it is seeking is the same.
7681 .cindex "&`+include_unknown`&"
7682 .cindex "&`+ignore_unknown`&"
7683 By default, Exim behaves as if the host does not match the list. This may not
7684 always be what you want to happen. To change Exim's behaviour, the special
7685 items &`+include_unknown`& or &`+ignore_unknown`& may appear in the list (at
7686 top level &-- they are not recognized in an indirected file).
7689 If any item that follows &`+include_unknown`& requires information that
7690 cannot found, Exim behaves as if the host does match the list. For example,
7692 host_reject_connection = +include_unknown:*.enemy.ex
7694 rejects connections from any host whose name matches &`*.enemy.ex`&, and also
7695 any hosts whose name it cannot find.
7698 If any item that follows &`+ignore_unknown`& requires information that cannot
7699 be found, Exim ignores that item and proceeds to the rest of the list. For
7702 accept hosts = +ignore_unknown : friend.example : \
7705 accepts from any host whose name is &'friend.example'& and from 192.168.4.5,
7706 whether or not its host name can be found. Without &`+ignore_unknown`&, if no
7707 name can be found for 192.168.4.5, it is rejected.
7710 Both &`+include_unknown`& and &`+ignore_unknown`& may appear in the same
7711 list. The effect of each one lasts until the next, or until the end of the
7714 &*Note*&: This section applies to permanent lookup failures. It does &'not'&
7715 apply to temporary DNS errors. They always cause a defer action.
7719 .section "Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name" &&&
7720 "SECThoslispatnamsk"
7721 .cindex "host" "lookup failures"
7722 .cindex "unknown host name"
7723 .cindex "host list" "matching host name"
7724 If a pattern is of the form
7726 <&'single-key-search-type'&>;<&'search-data'&>
7730 dbm;/host/accept/list
7732 a single-key lookup is performend, using the host name as its key. If the
7733 lookup succeeds, the host matches the item. The actual data that is looked up
7736 &*Reminder*&: With this kind of pattern, you must have host &'names'& as
7737 keys in the file, not IP addresses. If you want to do lookups based on IP
7738 addresses, you must precede the search type with &"net-"& (see section
7739 &<<SECThoslispatsikey>>&). There is, however, no reason why you could not use
7740 two items in the same list, one doing an address lookup and one doing a name
7741 lookup, both using the same file.
7745 .section "Host list patterns for query-style lookups"
7746 If a pattern is of the form
7748 <&'query-style-search-type'&>;<&'query'&>
7750 the query is obeyed, and if it succeeds, the host matches the item. The actual
7751 data that is looked up is not used. The variables &$sender_host_address$& and
7752 &$sender_host_name$& can be used in the query. For example:
7754 hosts_lookup = pgsql;\
7755 select ip from hostlist where ip='$sender_host_address'
7757 The value of &$sender_host_address$& for an IPv6 address contains colons. You
7758 can use the &%sg%& expansion item to change this if you need to. If you want to
7759 use masked IP addresses in database queries, you can use the &%mask%& expansion
7762 If the query contains a reference to &$sender_host_name$&, Exim automatically
7763 looks up the host name if has not already done so. (See section
7764 &<<SECThoslispatnam>>& for comments on finding host names.)
7766 Historical note: prior to release 4.30, Exim would always attempt to find a
7767 host name before running the query, unless the search type was preceded by
7768 &`net-`&. This is no longer the case. For backwards compatibility, &`net-`& is
7769 still recognized for query-style lookups, but its presence or absence has no
7770 effect. (Of course, for single-key lookups, &`net-`& &'is'& important.
7771 See section &<<SECThoslispatsikey>>&.)
7775 .section "Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists" &&&
7777 .cindex "host list" "mixing names and addresses in"
7778 If you have name lookups or wildcarded host names and IP addresses in the same
7779 host list, you should normally put the IP addresses first. For example, in an
7782 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7 : *.friend.example
7784 The reason for this lies in the left-to-right way that Exim processes lists.
7785 It can test IP addresses without doing any DNS lookups, but when it reaches an
7786 item that requires a host name, it fails if it cannot find a host name to
7787 compare with the pattern. If the above list is given in the opposite order, the
7788 &%accept%& statement fails for a host whose name cannot be found, even if its
7789 IP address is 10.9.8.7.
7791 If you really do want to do the name check first, and still recognize the IP
7792 address, you can rewrite the ACL like this:
7794 accept hosts = *.friend.example
7795 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7
7797 If the first &%accept%& fails, Exim goes on to try the second one. See chapter
7798 &<<CHAPACL>>& for details of ACLs.
7804 .section "Address lists" "SECTaddresslist"
7805 .cindex "list" "address list"
7806 .cindex "address list" "empty item"
7807 .cindex "address list" "patterns"
7808 Address lists contain patterns that are matched against mail addresses. There
7809 is one special case to be considered: the sender address of a bounce message is
7810 always empty. You can test for this by providing an empty item in an address
7811 list. For example, you can set up a router to process bounce messages by
7812 using this option setting:
7816 The presence of the colon creates an empty item. If you do not provide any
7817 data, the list is empty and matches nothing. The empty sender can also be
7818 detected by a regular expression that matches an empty string,
7819 and by a query-style lookup that succeeds when &$sender_address$& is empty.
7821 The following kinds of address list pattern can match any address, including
7822 the empty address that is characteristic of bounce message senders:
7825 As explained above, if a pattern item is empty, it matches the empty address
7829 .cindex "regular expressions" "in address list"
7830 .cindex "address list" "regular expression in"
7831 If (after expansion) a pattern starts with &"^"&, a regular expression match is
7832 done against the complete address, with the pattern as the regular expression.
7833 You must take care that backslash and dollar characters are not misinterpreted
7834 as part of the string expansion. The simplest way to do this is to use &`\N`&
7835 to mark that part of the string as non-expandable. For example:
7837 deny senders = \N^\d{8}.+@spamhaus.example$\N : ...
7839 The &`\N`& sequences are removed by the expansion, so this item does indeed
7840 start with &"^"& by the time it is being interpreted as an address pattern.
7843 .cindex "address list" "lookup for complete address"
7844 Complete addresses can be looked up by using a pattern that starts with a
7845 lookup type terminated by a semicolon, followed by the data for the lookup. For
7848 deny senders = cdb;/etc/blocked.senders : \
7849 mysql;select address from blocked where \
7850 address='${quote_mysql:$sender_address}'
7852 Both query-style and single-key lookup types can be used. For a single-key
7853 lookup type, Exim uses the complete address as the key. However, empty keys are
7854 not supported for single-key lookups, so a match against the empty address
7855 always fails. This restriction does not apply to query-style lookups.
7857 Partial matching for single-key lookups (section &<<SECTpartiallookup>>&)
7858 cannot be used, and is ignored if specified, with an entry being written to the
7860 .cindex "*@ with single-key lookup"
7861 However, you can configure lookup defaults, as described in section
7862 &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>&, but this is useful only for the &"*@"& type of
7863 default. For example, with this lookup:
7865 accept senders = lsearch*@;/some/file
7867 the file could contains lines like this:
7869 user1@domain1.example
7872 and for the sender address &'nimrod@jaeger.example'&, the sequence of keys
7875 nimrod@jaeger.example
7879 &*Warning 1*&: Do not include a line keyed by &"*"& in the file, because that
7880 would mean that every address matches, thus rendering the test useless.
7882 &*Warning 2*&: Do not confuse these two kinds of item:
7884 deny recipients = dbm*@;/some/file
7885 deny recipients = *@dbm;/some/file
7887 The first does a whole address lookup, with defaulting, as just described,
7888 because it starts with a lookup type. The second matches the local part and
7889 domain independently, as described in a bullet point below.
7893 The following kinds of address list pattern can match only non-empty addresses.
7894 If the subject address is empty, a match against any of these pattern types
7899 .cindex "@@ with single-key lookup"
7900 .cindex "address list" "@@ lookup type"
7901 .cindex "address list" "split local part and domain"
7902 If a pattern starts with &"@@"& followed by a single-key lookup item
7903 (for example, &`@@lsearch;/some/file`&), the address that is being checked is
7904 split into a local part and a domain. The domain is looked up in the file. If
7905 it is not found, there is no match. If it is found, the data that is looked up
7906 from the file is treated as a colon-separated list of local part patterns, each
7907 of which is matched against the subject local part in turn.
7909 .cindex "asterisk" "in address list"
7910 The lookup may be a partial one, and/or one involving a search for a default
7911 keyed by &"*"& (see section &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>&). The local part
7912 patterns that are looked up can be regular expressions or begin with &"*"&, or
7913 even be further lookups. They may also be independently negated. For example,
7916 deny senders = @@dbm;/etc/reject-by-domain
7918 the data from which the DBM file is built could contain lines like
7920 baddomain.com: !postmaster : *
7922 to reject all senders except &%postmaster%& from that domain.
7924 .cindex "local part" "starting with !"
7925 If a local part that actually begins with an exclamation mark is required, it
7926 has to be specified using a regular expression. In &(lsearch)& files, an entry
7927 may be split over several lines by indenting the second and subsequent lines,
7928 but the separating colon must still be included at line breaks. White space
7929 surrounding the colons is ignored. For example:
7931 aol.com: spammer1 : spammer2 : ^[0-9]+$ :
7934 As in all colon-separated lists in Exim, a colon can be included in an item by
7937 If the last item in the list starts with a right angle-bracket, the remainder
7938 of the item is taken as a new key to look up in order to obtain a continuation
7939 list of local parts. The new key can be any sequence of characters. Thus one
7940 might have entries like
7942 aol.com: spammer1 : spammer 2 : >*
7943 xyz.com: spammer3 : >*
7946 in a file that was searched with &%@@dbm*%&, to specify a match for 8-digit
7947 local parts for all domains, in addition to the specific local parts listed for
7948 each domain. Of course, using this feature costs another lookup each time a
7949 chain is followed, but the effort needed to maintain the data is reduced.
7951 .cindex "loop" "in lookups"
7952 It is possible to construct loops using this facility, and in order to catch
7953 them, the chains may be no more than fifty items long.
7956 The @@<&'lookup'&> style of item can also be used with a query-style
7957 lookup, but in this case, the chaining facility is not available. The lookup
7958 can only return a single list of local parts.
7960 If a pattern contains an @ character, but is not a regular expression and does
7961 not begin with a lookup type as described above, the local part of the subject
7962 address is compared with the local part of the pattern, which may start with an
7963 asterisk. If the local parts match, the domain is checked in exactly the same
7964 way as for a pattern in a domain list. For example, the domain can be
7965 wildcarded, refer to a named list, or be a lookup:
7967 deny senders = *@*.spamming.site:\
7968 *@+hostile_domains:\
7969 bozo@partial-lsearch;/list/of/dodgy/sites:\
7970 *@dbm;/bad/domains.db
7972 .cindex "local part" "starting with !"
7973 .cindex "address list" "local part starting with !"
7974 If a local part that begins with an exclamation mark is required, it has to be
7975 specified using a regular expression, because otherwise the exclamation mark is
7976 treated as a sign of negation.
7978 If a pattern is not one of the above syntax forms, that is, if a
7979 non-empty pattern that is not a regular expression or a lookup does not contain
7980 an @ character, it is matched against the domain part of the subject address.
7981 The only two formats that are recognized this way are a literal domain, or a
7982 domain pattern that starts with *. In both these cases, the effect is the same
7983 as if &`*@`& preceded the pattern.
7986 &*Warning*&: There is an important difference between the address list items
7987 in these two examples:
7990 senders = *@+my_list
7992 In the first one, &`my_list`& is a named address list, whereas in the second
7993 example it is a named domain list.
7998 .section "Case of letters in address lists" "SECTcasletadd"
7999 .cindex "case of local parts"
8000 .cindex "address list" "case forcing"
8001 .cindex "case forcing in address lists"
8002 Domains in email addresses are always handled caselessly, but for local parts
8003 case may be significant on some systems (see &%caseful_local_part%& for how
8004 Exim deals with this when routing addresses). However, RFC 2505 (&'Anti-Spam
8005 Recommendations for SMTP MTAs'&) suggests that matching of addresses to
8006 blocking lists should be done in a case-independent manner. Since most address
8007 lists in Exim are used for this kind of control, Exim attempts to do this by
8010 The domain portion of an address is always lowercased before matching it to an
8011 address list. The local part is lowercased by default, and any string
8012 comparisons that take place are done caselessly. This means that the data in
8013 the address list itself, in files included as plain file names, and in any file
8014 that is looked up using the &"@@"& mechanism, can be in any case. However, the
8015 keys in files that are looked up by a search type other than &(lsearch)& (which
8016 works caselessly) must be in lower case, because these lookups are not
8019 .cindex "&`+caseful`&"
8020 To allow for the possibility of caseful address list matching, if an item in
8021 an address list is the string &"+caseful"&, the original case of the local
8022 part is restored for any comparisons that follow, and string comparisons are no
8023 longer case-independent. This does not affect the domain, which remains in
8024 lower case. However, although independent matches on the domain alone are still
8025 performed caselessly, regular expressions that match against an entire address
8026 become case-sensitive after &"+caseful"& has been seen.
8030 .section "Local part lists" "SECTlocparlis"
8031 .cindex "list" "local part list"
8032 .cindex "local part" "list"
8033 Case-sensitivity in local part lists is handled in the same way as for address
8034 lists, as just described. The &"+caseful"& item can be used if required. In a
8035 setting of the &%local_parts%& option in a router with &%caseful_local_part%&
8036 set false, the subject is lowercased and the matching is initially
8037 case-insensitive. In this case, &"+caseful"& will restore case-sensitive
8038 matching in the local part list, but not elsewhere in the router. If
8039 &%caseful_local_part%& is set true in a router, matching in the &%local_parts%&
8040 option is case-sensitive from the start.
8042 If a local part list is indirected to a file (see section &<<SECTfilnamlis>>&),
8043 comments are handled in the same way as address lists &-- they are recognized
8044 only if the # is preceded by white space or the start of the line.
8045 Otherwise, local part lists are matched in the same way as domain lists, except
8046 that the special items that refer to the local host (&`@`&, &`@[]`&,
8047 &`@mx_any`&, &`@mx_primary`&, and &`@mx_secondary`&) are not recognized.
8048 Refer to section &<<SECTdomainlist>>& for details of the other available item
8054 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
8055 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
8057 .chapter "String expansions" "CHAPexpand"
8058 .cindex "expansion" "of strings"
8059 Many strings in Exim's run time configuration are expanded before use. Some of
8060 them are expanded every time they are used; others are expanded only once.
8062 When a string is being expanded it is copied verbatim from left to right except
8063 when a dollar or backslash character is encountered. A dollar specifies the
8064 start of a portion of the string that is interpreted and replaced as described
8065 below in section &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& onwards. Backslash is used as an
8066 escape character, as described in the following section.
8070 .section "Literal text in expanded strings" "SECTlittext"
8071 .cindex "expansion" "including literal text"
8072 An uninterpreted dollar can be included in an expanded string by putting a
8073 backslash in front of it. A backslash can be used to prevent any special
8074 character being treated specially in an expansion, including backslash itself.
8075 If the string appears in quotes in the configuration file, two backslashes are
8076 required because the quotes themselves cause interpretation of backslashes when
8077 the string is read in (see section &<<SECTstrings>>&).
8079 .cindex "expansion" "non-expandable substrings"
8080 A portion of the string can specified as non-expandable by placing it between
8081 two occurrences of &`\N`&. This is particularly useful for protecting regular
8082 expressions, which often contain backslashes and dollar signs. For example:
8084 deny senders = \N^\d{8}[a-z]@some\.site\.example$\N
8086 On encountering the first &`\N`&, the expander copies subsequent characters
8087 without interpretation until it reaches the next &`\N`& or the end of the
8092 .section "Character escape sequences in expanded strings"
8093 .cindex "expansion" "escape sequences"
8094 A backslash followed by one of the letters &"n"&, &"r"&, or &"t"& in an
8095 expanded string is recognized as an escape sequence for the character newline,
8096 carriage return, or tab, respectively. A backslash followed by up to three
8097 octal digits is recognized as an octal encoding for a single character, and a
8098 backslash followed by &"x"& and up to two hexadecimal digits is a hexadecimal
8101 These escape sequences are also recognized in quoted strings when they are read
8102 in. Their interpretation in expansions as well is useful for unquoted strings,
8103 and for other cases such as looked-up strings that are then expanded.
8106 .section "Testing string expansions"
8107 .cindex "expansion" "testing"
8108 .cindex "testing" "string expansion"
8109 .cindex "&%-be%& option"
8110 Many expansions can be tested by calling Exim with the &%-be%& option. This
8111 takes the command arguments, or lines from the standard input if there are no
8112 arguments, runs them through the string expansion code, and writes the results
8113 to the standard output. Variables based on configuration values are set up, but
8114 since no message is being processed, variables such as &$local_part$& have no
8115 value. Nevertheless the &%-be%& option can be useful for checking out file and
8116 database lookups, and the use of expansion operators such as &%sg%&, &%substr%&
8119 Exim gives up its root privilege when it is called with the &%-be%& option, and
8120 instead runs under the uid and gid it was called with, to prevent users from
8121 using &%-be%& for reading files to which they do not have access.
8125 .section "Forced expansion failure" "SECTforexpfai"
8126 .cindex "expansion" "forced failure"
8127 A number of expansions that are described in the following section have
8128 alternative &"true"& and &"false"& substrings, enclosed in brace characters
8129 (which are sometimes called &"curly brackets"&). Which of the two strings is
8130 used depends on some condition that is evaluated as part of the expansion. If,
8131 instead of a &"false"& substring, the word &"fail"& is used (not in braces),
8132 the entire string expansion fails in a way that can be detected by the code
8133 that requested the expansion. This is called &"forced expansion failure"&, and
8134 its consequences depend on the circumstances. In some cases it is no different
8135 from any other expansion failure, but in others a different action may be
8136 taken. Such variations are mentioned in the documentation of the option that is
8142 .section "Expansion items" "SECTexpansionitems"
8143 The following items are recognized in expanded strings. White space may be used
8144 between sub-items that are keywords or substrings enclosed in braces inside an
8145 outer set of braces, to improve readability. &*Warning*&: Within braces,
8146 white space is significant.
8149 .vitem &*$*&<&'variable&~name'&>&~or&~&*${*&<&'variable&~name'&>&*}*&
8150 .cindex "expansion" "variables"
8151 Substitute the contents of the named variable, for example:
8156 The second form can be used to separate the name from subsequent alphanumeric
8157 characters. This form (using braces) is available only for variables; it does
8158 &'not'& apply to message headers. The names of the variables are given in
8159 section &<<SECTexpvar>>& below. If the name of a non-existent variable is
8160 given, the expansion fails.
8162 .vitem &*${*&<&'op'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8163 .cindex "expansion" "operators"
8164 The string is first itself expanded, and then the operation specified by
8165 <&'op'&> is applied to it. For example:
8169 The string starts with the first character after the colon, which may be
8170 leading white space. A list of operators is given in section &<<SECTexpop>>&
8171 below. The operator notation is used for simple expansion items that have just
8172 one argument, because it reduces the number of braces and therefore makes the
8173 string easier to understand.
8176 .vitem "&*${dlfunc{*&<&'file'&>&*}{*&<&'function'&>&*}{*&<&'arg'&>&*}&&&
8177 {*&<&'arg'&>&*}...}*&"
8179 This expansion dynamically loads and then calls a locally-written C function.
8180 This functionality is available only if Exim is compiled with
8184 set in &_Local/Makefile_&. Once loaded, Exim remembers the dynamically loaded
8185 object so that it doesn't reload the same object file in the same Exim process
8186 (but of course Exim does start new processes frequently).
8188 There may be from zero to eight arguments to the function. When compiling
8189 a local function that is to be called in this way, &_local_scan.h_& should be
8190 included. The Exim variables and functions that are defined by that API
8191 are also available for dynamically loaded functions. The function itself
8192 must have the following type:
8194 int dlfunction(uschar **yield, int argc, uschar *argv[])
8196 Where &`uschar`& is a typedef for &`unsigned char`& in &_local_scan.h_&. The
8197 function should return one of the following values:
8199 &`OK`&: Success. The string that is placed in the variable &'yield'& is put
8200 into the expanded string that is being built.
8202 &`FAIL`&: A non-forced expansion failure occurs, with the error message taken
8203 from &'yield'&, if it is set.
8205 &`FAIL_FORCED`&: A forced expansion failure occurs, with the error message
8206 taken from &'yield'& if it is set.
8208 &`ERROR`&: Same as &`FAIL`&, except that a panic log entry is written.
8210 When compiling a function that is to be used in this way with gcc,
8211 you need to add &%-shared%& to the gcc command. Also, in the Exim build-time
8212 configuration, you must add &%-export-dynamic%& to EXTRALIBS.
8215 .vitem "&*${extract{*&<&'key'&>&*}{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}&&&
8216 {*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&"
8217 .cindex "expansion" "extracting substrings by key"
8218 The key and <&'string1'&> are first expanded separately. Leading and trailing
8219 white space is removed from the key (but not from any of the strings). The key
8220 must not consist entirely of digits. The expanded <&'string1'&> must be of the
8223 <&'key1'&> = <&'value1'&> <&'key2'&> = <&'value2'&> ...
8226 where the equals signs and spaces (but not both) are optional. If any of the
8227 values contain white space, they must be enclosed in double quotes, and any
8228 values that are enclosed in double quotes are subject to escape processing as
8229 described in section &<<SECTstrings>>&. The expanded <&'string1'&> is searched
8230 for the value that corresponds to the key. The search is case-insensitive. If
8231 the key is found, <&'string2'&> is expanded, and replaces the whole item;
8232 otherwise <&'string3'&> is used. During the expansion of <&'string2'&> the
8233 variable &$value$& contains the value that has been extracted. Afterwards, it
8234 is restored to any previous value it might have had.
8236 If {<&'string3'&>} is omitted, the item is replaced by an empty string if the
8237 key is not found. If {<&'string2'&>} is also omitted, the value that was
8238 extracted is used. Thus, for example, these two expansions are identical, and
8241 ${extract{gid}{uid=1984 gid=2001}}
8242 ${extract{gid}{uid=1984 gid=2001}{$value}}
8244 Instead of {<&'string3'&>} the word &"fail"& (not in curly brackets) can
8245 appear, for example:
8247 ${extract{Z}{A=... B=...}{$value} fail }
8249 This forces an expansion failure (see section &<<SECTforexpfai>>&);
8250 {<&'string2'&>} must be present for &"fail"& to be recognized.
8253 .vitem "&*${extract{*&<&'number'&>&*}{*&<&'separators'&>&*}&&&
8254 {*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&"
8255 .cindex "expansion" "extracting substrings by number"
8256 The <&'number'&> argument must consist entirely of decimal digits,
8257 apart from leading and trailing white space, which is ignored.
8258 This is what distinguishes this form of &%extract%& from the previous kind. It
8259 behaves in the same way, except that, instead of extracting a named field, it
8260 extracts from <&'string1'&> the field whose number is given as the first
8261 argument. You can use &$value$& in <&'string2'&> or &`fail`& instead of
8262 <&'string3'&> as before.
8264 The fields in the string are separated by any one of the characters in the
8265 separator string. These may include space or tab characters.
8266 The first field is numbered one. If the number is negative, the fields are
8267 counted from the end of the string, with the rightmost one numbered -1. If the
8268 number given is zero, the entire string is returned. If the modulus of the
8269 number is greater than the number of fields in the string, the result is the
8270 expansion of <&'string3'&>, or the empty string if <&'string3'&> is not
8271 provided. For example:
8273 ${extract{2}{:}{x:42:99:& Mailer::/bin/bash}}
8277 ${extract{-4}{:}{x:42:99:& Mailer::/bin/bash}}
8279 yields &"99"&. Two successive separators mean that the field between them is
8280 empty (for example, the fifth field above).
8283 .vitem &*${hash{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&
8284 .cindex "hash function" "textual"
8285 .cindex "expansion" "textual hash"
8286 This is a textual hashing function, and was the first to be implemented in
8287 early versions of Exim. In current releases, there are other hashing functions
8288 (numeric, MD5, and SHA-1), which are described below.
8290 The first two strings, after expansion, must be numbers. Call them <&'m'&> and
8291 <&'n'&>. If you are using fixed values for these numbers, that is, if
8292 <&'string1'&> and <&'string2'&> do not change when they are expanded, you can
8293 use the simpler operator notation that avoids some of the braces:
8295 ${hash_<n>_<m>:<string>}
8297 The second number is optional (in both notations). If <&'n'&> is greater than
8298 or equal to the length of the string, the expansion item returns the string.
8299 Otherwise it computes a new string of length <&'n'&> by applying a hashing
8300 function to the string. The new string consists of characters taken from the
8301 first <&'m'&> characters of the string
8303 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQWRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
8305 If <&'m'&> is not present the value 26 is used, so that only lower case
8306 letters appear. For example:
8308 &`$hash{3}{monty}} `& yields &`jmg`&
8309 &`$hash{5}{monty}} `& yields &`monty`&
8310 &`$hash{4}{62}{monty python}}`& yields &`fbWx`&
8313 .vitem "&*$header_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~or&~&&&
8314 &*$h_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
8315 See &*$rheader*& below.
8317 .vitem "&*$bheader_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~or&~&&&
8318 &*$bh_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
8319 See &*$rheader*& below.
8321 .vitem "&*$rheader_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~or&~&&&
8322 &*$rh_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
8323 .cindex "expansion" "header insertion"
8324 .cindex "&$header_$&"
8325 .cindex "&$bheader_$&"
8326 .cindex "&$rheader_$&"
8327 .cindex "header lines" "in expansion strings"
8328 .cindex "header lines" "character sets"
8329 .cindex "header lines" "decoding"
8330 Substitute the contents of the named message header line, for example
8334 The newline that terminates a header line is not included in the expansion, but
8335 internal newlines (caused by splitting the header line over several physical
8336 lines) may be present.
8338 The difference between &%rheader%&, &%bheader%&, and &%header%& is in the way
8339 the data in the header line is interpreted.
8342 .cindex "white space" "in header lines"
8343 &%rheader%& gives the original &"raw"& content of the header line, with no
8344 processing at all, and without the removal of leading and trailing white space.
8347 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in header lines"
8348 &%bheader%& removes leading and trailing white space, and then decodes base64
8349 or quoted-printable MIME &"words"& within the header text, but does no
8350 character set translation. If decoding of what looks superficially like a MIME
8351 &"word"& fails, the raw string is returned. If decoding
8352 .cindex "binary zero" "in header line"
8353 produces a binary zero character, it is replaced by a question mark &-- this is
8354 what Exim does for binary zeros that are actually received in header lines.
8357 &%header%& tries to translate the string as decoded by &%bheader%& to a
8358 standard character set. This is an attempt to produce the same string as would
8359 be displayed on a user's MUA. If translation fails, the &%bheader%& string is
8360 returned. Translation is attempted only on operating systems that support the
8361 &[iconv()]& function. This is indicated by the compile-time macro HAVE_ICONV in
8362 a system Makefile or in &_Local/Makefile_&.
8365 In a filter file, the target character set for &%header%& can be specified by a
8366 command of the following form:
8368 headers charset "UTF-8"
8370 This command affects all references to &$h_$& (or &$header_$&) expansions in
8371 subsequently obeyed filter commands. In the absence of this command, the target
8372 character set in a filter is taken from the setting of the &%headers_charset%&
8373 option in the runtime configuration. The value of this option defaults to the
8374 value of HEADERS_CHARSET in &_Local/Makefile_&. The ultimate default is
8377 Header names follow the syntax of RFC 2822, which states that they may contain
8378 any printing characters except space and colon. Consequently, curly brackets
8379 &'do not'& terminate header names, and should not be used to enclose them as
8380 if they were variables. Attempting to do so causes a syntax error.
8382 Only header lines that are common to all copies of a message are visible to
8383 this mechanism. These are the original header lines that are received with the
8384 message, and any that are added by an ACL &%warn%& statement or by a system
8385 filter. Header lines that are added to a particular copy of a message by a
8386 router or transport are not accessible.
8388 For incoming SMTP messages, no header lines are visible in ACLs that are obeyed
8389 before the DATA ACL, because the header structure is not set up until the
8390 message is received. Header lines that are added by &%warn%& statements in a
8391 RCPT ACL (for example) are saved until the message's incoming header lines
8392 are available, at which point they are added. When a DATA ACL is running,
8393 however, header lines added by earlier ACLs are visible.
8395 Upper case and lower case letters are synonymous in header names. If the
8396 following character is white space, the terminating colon may be omitted, but
8397 this is not recommended, because you may then forget it when it is needed. When
8398 white space terminates the header name, it is included in the expanded string.
8399 If the message does not contain the given header, the expansion item is
8400 replaced by an empty string. (See the &%def%& condition in section
8401 &<<SECTexpcond>>& for a means of testing for the existence of a header.)
8403 If there is more than one header with the same name, they are all
8404 concatenated to form the substitution string, up to a maximum length of 64K. A
8405 newline character is inserted between each line. For the &%header%& expansion,
8406 for those headers that contain lists of addresses, a comma is also inserted at
8407 the junctions between lines. This does not happen for the &%rheader%&
8411 .vitem &*${hmac{*&<&'hashname'&>&*}{*&<&'secret'&>&*}{*&<&'string'&>&*}}*&
8412 .cindex "expansion" "hmac hashing"
8413 This function uses cryptographic hashing (either MD5 or SHA-1) to convert a
8414 shared secret and some text into a message authentication code, as specified in
8415 RFC 2104. This differs from &`${md5:secret_text...}`& or
8416 &`${sha1:secret_text...}`& in that the hmac step adds a signature to the
8417 cryptographic hash, allowing for authentication that is not possible with MD5
8418 or SHA-1 alone. The hash name must expand to either &`md5`& or &`sha1`& at
8419 present. For example:
8421 ${hmac{md5}{somesecret}{$primary_hostname $tod_log}}
8423 For the hostname &'mail.example.com'& and time 2002-10-17 11:30:59, this
8426 dd97e3ba5d1a61b5006108f8c8252953
8428 As an example of how this might be used, you might put in the main part of
8429 an Exim configuration:
8431 SPAMSCAN_SECRET=cohgheeLei2thahw
8433 In a router or a transport you could then have:
8436 X-Spam-Scanned: ${primary_hostname} ${message_exim_id} \
8437 ${hmac{md5}{SPAMSCAN_SECRET}\
8438 {${primary_hostname},${message_exim_id},$h_message-id:}}
8440 Then given a message, you can check where it was scanned by looking at the
8441 &'X-Spam-Scanned:'& header line. If you know the secret, you can check that
8442 this header line is authentic by recomputing the authentication code from the
8443 host name, message ID and the &'Message-id:'& header line. This can be done
8444 using Exim's &%-be%& option, or by other means, for example by using the
8445 &'hmac_md5_hex()'& function in Perl.
8448 .vitem &*${if&~*&<&'condition'&>&*&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&
8449 .cindex "expansion" "conditional"
8450 If <&'condition'&> is true, <&'string1'&> is expanded and replaces the whole
8451 item; otherwise <&'string2'&> is used. The available conditions are described
8452 in section &<<SECTexpcond>>& below. For example:
8454 ${if eq {$local_part}{postmaster} {yes}{no} }
8456 The second string need not be present; if it is not and the condition is not
8457 true, the item is replaced with nothing. Alternatively, the word &"fail"& may
8458 be present instead of the second string (without any curly brackets). In this
8459 case, the expansion is forced to fail if the condition is not true (see section
8460 &<<SECTforexpfai>>&).
8462 If both strings are omitted, the result is the string &`true`& if the condition
8463 is true, and the empty string if the condition is false. This makes it less
8464 cumbersome to write custom ACL and router conditions. For example, instead of
8466 condition = ${if >{$acl_m4}{3}{true}{false}}
8470 condition = ${if >{$acl_m4}{3}}
8473 .vitem &*${length{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&
8474 .cindex "expansion" "string truncation"
8475 The &%length%& item is used to extract the initial portion of a string. Both
8476 strings are expanded, and the first one must yield a number, <&'n'&>, say. If
8477 you are using a fixed value for the number, that is, if <&'string1'&> does not
8478 change when expanded, you can use the simpler operator notation that avoids
8481 ${length_<n>:<string>}
8483 The result of this item is either the first <&'n'&> characters or the whole
8484 of <&'string2'&>, whichever is the shorter. Do not confuse &%length%& with
8485 &%strlen%&, which gives the length of a string.
8488 .vitem "&*${lookup{*&<&'key'&>&*}&~*&<&'search&~type'&>&*&~&&&
8489 {*&<&'file'&>&*}&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}&~{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&"
8490 This is the first of one of two different types of lookup item, which are both
8491 described in the next item.
8493 .vitem "&*${lookup&~*&<&'search&~type'&>&*&~{*&<&'query'&>&*}&~&&&
8494 {*&<&'string1'&>&*}&~{*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&"
8495 .cindex "expansion" "lookup in"
8496 .cindex "file" "lookup"
8497 .cindex "lookup" "in expanded string"
8498 The two forms of lookup item specify data lookups in files and databases, as
8499 discussed in chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&. The first form is used for single-key
8500 lookups, and the second is used for query-style lookups. The <&'key'&>,
8501 <&'file'&>, and <&'query'&> strings are expanded before use.
8503 If there is any white space in a lookup item which is part of a filter command,
8504 a retry or rewrite rule, a routing rule for the &(manualroute)& router, or any
8505 other place where white space is significant, the lookup item must be enclosed
8506 in double quotes. The use of data lookups in users' filter files may be locked
8507 out by the system administrator.
8510 If the lookup succeeds, <&'string1'&> is expanded and replaces the entire item.
8511 During its expansion, the variable &$value$& contains the data returned by the
8512 lookup. Afterwards it reverts to the value it had previously (at the outer
8513 level it is empty). If the lookup fails, <&'string2'&> is expanded and replaces
8514 the entire item. If {<&'string2'&>} is omitted, the replacement is the empty
8515 string on failure. If <&'string2'&> is provided, it can itself be a nested
8516 lookup, thus providing a mechanism for looking up a default value when the
8517 original lookup fails.
8519 If a nested lookup is used as part of <&'string1'&>, &$value$& contains the
8520 data for the outer lookup while the parameters of the second lookup are
8521 expanded, and also while <&'string2'&> of the second lookup is expanded, should
8522 the second lookup fail. Instead of {<&'string2'&>} the word &"fail"& can
8523 appear, and in this case, if the lookup fails, the entire expansion is forced
8524 to fail (see section &<<SECTforexpfai>>&). If both {<&'string1'&>} and
8525 {<&'string2'&>} are omitted, the result is the looked up value in the case of a
8526 successful lookup, and nothing in the case of failure.
8528 For single-key lookups, the string &"partial"& is permitted to precede the
8529 search type in order to do partial matching, and * or *@ may follow a search
8530 type to request default lookups if the key does not match (see sections
8531 &<<SECTdefaultvaluelookups>>& and &<<SECTpartiallookup>>& for details).
8533 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in lookup expansion"
8534 If a partial search is used, the variables &$1$& and &$2$& contain the wild
8535 and non-wild parts of the key during the expansion of the replacement text.
8536 They return to their previous values at the end of the lookup item.
8538 This example looks up the postmaster alias in the conventional alias file:
8540 ${lookup {postmaster} lsearch {/etc/aliases} {$value}}
8542 This example uses NIS+ to look up the full name of the user corresponding to
8543 the local part of an address, forcing the expansion to fail if it is not found:
8545 ${lookup nisplus {[name=$local_part],passwd.org_dir:gcos} \
8549 .vitem &*${nhash{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&
8550 .cindex "expansion" "numeric hash"
8551 .cindex "hash function" "numeric"
8552 The three strings are expanded; the first two must yield numbers. Call them
8553 <&'n'&> and <&'m'&>. If you are using fixed values for these numbers, that is,
8554 if <&'string1'&> and <&'string2'&> do not change when they are expanded, you
8555 can use the simpler operator notation that avoids some of the braces:
8557 ${nhash_<n>_<m>:<string>}
8559 The second number is optional (in both notations). If there is only one number,
8560 the result is a number in the range 0&--<&'n'&>-1. Otherwise, the string is
8561 processed by a div/mod hash function that returns two numbers, separated by a
8562 slash, in the ranges 0 to <&'n'&>-1 and 0 to <&'m'&>-1, respectively. For
8565 ${nhash{8}{64}{supercalifragilisticexpialidocious}}
8567 returns the string &"6/33"&.
8571 .vitem &*${perl{*&<&'subroutine'&>&*}{*&<&'arg'&>&*}{*&<&'arg'&>&*}...}*&
8572 .cindex "Perl" "use in expanded string"
8573 .cindex "expansion" "calling Perl from"
8574 This item is available only if Exim has been built to include an embedded Perl
8575 interpreter. The subroutine name and the arguments are first separately
8576 expanded, and then the Perl subroutine is called with those arguments. No
8577 additional arguments need be given; the maximum number permitted, including the
8578 name of the subroutine, is nine.
8580 The return value of the subroutine is inserted into the expanded string, unless
8581 the return value is &%undef%&. In that case, the expansion fails in the same
8582 way as an explicit &"fail"& on a lookup item. The return value is a scalar.
8583 Whatever you return is evaluated in a scalar context. For example, if you
8584 return the name of a Perl vector, the return value is the size of the vector,
8587 If the subroutine exits by calling Perl's &%die%& function, the expansion fails
8588 with the error message that was passed to &%die%&. More details of the embedded
8589 Perl facility are given in chapter &<<CHAPperl>>&.
8591 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_perl%& which locks
8592 out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8596 .vitem &*${prvs{*&<&'address'&>&*}{*&<&'secret'&>&*}{*&<&'keynumber'&>&*}}*&
8597 .cindex "prvs" "expansion item"
8598 The first argument is a complete email address and the second is secret
8599 keystring. The third argument, specifying a key number, is optional. If absent,
8600 it defaults to 0. The result of the expansion is a prvs-signed email address,
8601 to be typically used with the &%return_path%& option on an &(smtp)& transport
8602 as part of a bounce address tag validation (BATV) scheme. For more discussion
8603 and an example, see section &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
8607 .vitem "&*${prvscheck{*&<&'address'&>&*}{*&<&'secret'&>&*}&&&
8608 {*&<&'string'&>&*}}*&"
8609 .cindex "prvscheck" "expansion item"
8610 This expansion item is the complement of the &%prvs%& item. It is used for
8611 checking prvs-signed addresses. If the expansion of the first argument does not
8612 yield a syntactically valid prvs-signed address, the whole item expands to the
8613 empty string. When the first argument does expand to a syntactically valid
8614 prvs-signed address, the second argument is expanded, with the prvs-decoded
8615 version of the address and the key number extracted from the address in the
8616 variables &$prvscheck_address$& and &$prvscheck_keynum$&, respectively.
8618 These two variables can be used in the expansion of the second argument to
8619 retrieve the secret. The validity of the prvs-signed address is then checked
8620 against the secret. The result is stored in the variable &$prvscheck_result$&,
8621 which is empty for failure or &"1"& for success.
8623 The third argument is optional; if it is missing, it defaults to an empty
8624 string. This argument is now expanded. If the result is an empty string, the
8625 result of the expansion is the decoded version of the address. This is the case
8626 whether or not the signature was valid. Otherwise, the result of the expansion
8627 is the expansion of the third argument.
8629 All three variables can be used in the expansion of the third argument.
8630 However, once the expansion is complete, only &$prvscheck_result$& remains set.
8631 For more discussion and an example, see section &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
8634 .vitem &*${readfile{*&<&'file&~name'&>&*}{*&<&'eol&~string'&>&*}}*&
8635 .cindex "expansion" "inserting an entire file"
8636 .cindex "file" "inserting into expansion"
8637 The file name and end-of-line string are first expanded separately. The file is
8638 then read, and its contents replace the entire item. All newline characters in
8639 the file are replaced by the end-of-line string if it is present. Otherwise,
8640 newlines are left in the string.
8641 String expansion is not applied to the contents of the file. If you want this,
8642 you must wrap the item in an &%expand%& operator. If the file cannot be read,
8643 the string expansion fails.
8645 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_readfile%& which
8646 locks out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8650 .vitem "&*${readsocket{*&<&'name'&>&*}{*&<&'request'&>&*}&&&
8651 {*&<&'timeout'&>&*}{*&<&'eol&~string'&>&*}{*&<&'fail&~string'&>&*}}*&"
8652 .cindex "expansion" "inserting from a socket"
8653 .cindex "socket" "use of in expansion"
8654 This item inserts data that is read from a Unix domain socket into the expanded
8655 string. The minimal way of using it uses just two arguments:
8657 ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request string}}
8659 Exim connects to the socket, writes the request string (unless it is an
8660 empty string) and reads from the socket until an end-of-file is read. A timeout
8661 of 5 seconds is applied. Additional, optional arguments extend what can be
8662 done. Firstly, you can vary the timeout. For example:
8664 ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request-string}{3s}}
8666 A fourth argument allows you to change any newlines that are in the data
8667 that is read, in the same way as for &%readfile%& (see above). This example
8668 turns them into spaces:
8670 ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request-string}{3s}{ }}
8672 As with all expansions, the substrings are expanded before the processing
8673 happens. Errors in these sub-expansions cause the expansion to fail. In
8674 addition, the following errors can occur:
8677 Failure to create a socket file descriptor;
8679 Failure to connect the socket;
8681 Failure to write the request-string;
8683 Timeout on reading from the socket.
8686 By default, any of these errors causes the expansion to fail. However, if
8687 you supply a fifth substring, it is expanded and used when any of the above
8688 errors occurs. For example:
8690 ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request-string}{3s}{\n}\
8693 You can test for the existence of the socket by wrapping this expansion in
8694 &`${if exists`&, but there is a race condition between that test and the
8695 actual opening of the socket, so it is safer to use the fifth argument if you
8696 want to be absolutely sure of avoiding an expansion error for a non-existent
8699 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_readsocket%& which
8700 locks out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8702 .vitem &*$rheader_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:&~or&~$rh_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&
8703 This item inserts &"raw"& header lines. It is described with the &%header%&
8704 expansion item above.
8706 .vitem "&*${run{*&<&'command'&>&*&~*&<&'args'&>&*}{*&<&'string1'&>&*}&&&
8707 {*&<&'string2'&>&*}}*&"
8708 .cindex "expansion" "running a command"
8709 The command and its arguments are first expanded separately, and then the
8710 command is run in a separate process, but under the same uid and gid. As in
8711 other command executions from Exim, a shell is not used by default. If you want
8712 a shell, you must explicitly code it.
8715 .cindex "return code" "from &%run%& expansion"
8717 If the command succeeds (gives a zero return code) <&'string1'&> is expanded
8718 and replaces the entire item; during this expansion, the standard output from
8719 the command is in the variable &$value$&. If the command fails, <&'string2'&>,
8720 if present, is expanded and used. Once again, during the expansion, the
8721 standard output from the command is in the variable &$value$&. If <&'string2'&>
8722 is absent, the result is empty. Alternatively, <&'string2'&> can be the word
8723 &"fail"& (not in braces) to force expansion failure if the command does not
8724 succeed. If both strings are omitted, the result is contents of the standard
8725 output on success, and nothing on failure.
8729 The return code from the command is put in the variable &$runrc$&, and this
8730 remains set afterwards, so in a filter file you can do things like this:
8732 if "${run{x y z}{}}$runrc" is 1 then ...
8733 elif $runrc is 2 then ...
8737 If execution of the command fails (for example, the command does not exist),
8738 the return code is 127 &-- the same code that shells use for non-existent
8741 &*Warning*&: In a router or transport, you cannot assume the order in which
8742 option values are expanded, except for those preconditions whose order of
8743 testing is documented. Therefore, you cannot reliably expect to set &$runrc$&
8744 by the expansion of one option, and use it in another.
8746 The &(redirect)& router has an option called &%forbid_filter_run%& which locks
8747 out the use of this expansion item in filter files.
8750 .vitem &*${sg{*&<&'subject'&>&*}{*&<&'regex'&>&*}{*&<&'replacement'&>&*}}*&
8751 .cindex "expansion" "string substitution"
8752 This item works like Perl's substitution operator (s) with the global (/g)
8753 option; hence its name. However, unlike the Perl equivalent, Exim does not
8754 modify the subject string; instead it returns the modified string for insertion
8755 into the overall expansion. The item takes three arguments: the subject string,
8756 a regular expression, and a substitution string. For example:
8758 ${sg{abcdefabcdef}{abc}{xyz}}
8760 yields &"xyzdefxyzdef"&. Because all three arguments are expanded before use,
8761 if any $ or \ characters are required in the regular expression or in the
8762 substitution string, they have to be escaped. For example:
8764 ${sg{abcdef}{^(...)(...)\$}{\$2\$1}}
8766 yields &"defabc"&, and
8768 ${sg{1=A 4=D 3=C}{\N(\d+)=\N}{K\$1=}}
8770 yields &"K1=A K4=D K3=C"&. Note the use of &`\N`& to protect the contents of
8771 the regular expression from string expansion.
8775 .vitem &*${substr{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}{*&<&'string3'&>&*}}*&
8776 .cindex "&%substr%&"
8777 .cindex "substring extraction"
8778 .cindex "expansion" "substring extraction"
8779 The three strings are expanded; the first two must yield numbers. Call them
8780 <&'n'&> and <&'m'&>. If you are using fixed values for these numbers, that is,
8781 if <&'string1'&> and <&'string2'&> do not change when they are expanded, you
8782 can use the simpler operator notation that avoids some of the braces:
8784 ${substr_<n>_<m>:<string>}
8786 The second number is optional (in both notations).
8787 If it is absent in the simpler format, the preceding underscore must also be
8790 The &%substr%& item can be used to extract more general substrings than
8791 &%length%&. The first number, <&'n'&>, is a starting offset, and <&'m'&> is the
8792 length required. For example
8794 ${substr{3}{2}{$local_part}}
8796 If the starting offset is greater than the string length the result is the
8797 null string; if the length plus starting offset is greater than the string
8798 length, the result is the right-hand part of the string, starting from the
8799 given offset. The first character in the string has offset zero.
8801 The &%substr%& expansion item can take negative offset values to count
8802 from the right-hand end of its operand. The last character is offset -1, the
8803 second-last is offset -2, and so on. Thus, for example,
8805 ${substr{-5}{2}{1234567}}
8807 yields &"34"&. If the absolute value of a negative offset is greater than the
8808 length of the string, the substring starts at the beginning of the string, and
8809 the length is reduced by the amount of overshoot. Thus, for example,
8811 ${substr{-5}{2}{12}}
8813 yields an empty string, but
8815 ${substr{-3}{2}{12}}
8819 When the second number is omitted from &%substr%&, the remainder of the string
8820 is taken if the offset is positive. If it is negative, all characters in the
8821 string preceding the offset point are taken. For example, an offset of -1 and
8822 no length, as in these semantically identical examples:
8825 ${substr{-1}{abcde}}
8827 yields all but the last character of the string, that is, &"abcd"&.
8831 .vitem "&*${tr{*&<&'subject'&>&*}{*&<&'characters'&>&*}&&&
8832 {*&<&'replacements'&>&*}}*&"
8833 .cindex "expansion" "character translation"
8834 This item does single-character translation on its subject string. The second
8835 argument is a list of characters to be translated in the subject string. Each
8836 matching character is replaced by the corresponding character from the
8837 replacement list. For example
8839 ${tr{abcdea}{ac}{13}}
8841 yields &`1b3de1`&. If there are duplicates in the second character string, the
8842 last occurrence is used. If the third string is shorter than the second, its
8843 last character is replicated. However, if it is empty, no translation takes
8849 .section "Expansion operators" "SECTexpop"
8850 .cindex "expansion" "operators"
8851 For expansion items that perform transformations on a single argument string,
8852 the &"operator"& notation is used because it is simpler and uses fewer braces.
8853 The substring is first expanded before the operation is applied to it. The
8854 following operations can be performed:
8857 .vitem &*${address:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8858 .cindex "expansion" "RFC 2822 address handling"
8859 The string is interpreted as an RFC 2822 address, as it might appear in a
8860 header line, and the effective address is extracted from it. If the string does
8861 not parse successfully, the result is empty.
8865 .vitem &*${base62:*&<&'digits'&>&*}*&
8867 .cindex "expansion" "conversion to base 62"
8868 The string must consist entirely of decimal digits. The number is converted to
8869 base 62 and output as a string of six characters, including leading zeros. In
8870 the few operating environments where Exim uses base 36 instead of base 62 for
8871 its message identifiers (because those systems do not have case-sensitive file
8872 names), base 36 is used by this operator, despite its name. &*Note*&: Just to
8873 be absolutely clear: this is &'not'& base64 encoding.
8877 .vitem &*${base62d:*&<&'base-62&~digits'&>&*}*&
8879 .cindex "expansion" "conversion to base 62"
8880 The string must consist entirely of base-62 digits, or, in operating
8881 environments where Exim uses base 36 instead of base 62 for its message
8882 identifiers, base-36 digits. The number is converted to decimal and output as a
8886 .vitem &*${domain:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8887 .cindex "domain" "extraction"
8888 .cindex "expansion" "domain extraction"
8889 The string is interpreted as an RFC 2822 address and the domain is extracted
8890 from it. If the string does not parse successfully, the result is empty.
8893 .vitem &*${escape:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8894 .cindex "expansion" "escaping non-printing characters"
8895 If the string contains any non-printing characters, they are converted to
8896 escape sequences starting with a backslash. Whether characters with the most
8897 significant bit set (so-called &"8-bit characters"&) count as printing or not
8898 is controlled by the &%print_topbitchars%& option.
8901 .vitem &*${eval:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&&~and&~&*${eval10:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8902 .cindex "expansion" "expression evaluation"
8903 .cindex "expansion" "arithmetic expression"
8905 These items supports simple arithmetic in expansion strings. The string (after
8906 expansion) must be a conventional arithmetic expression, but it is limited to
8907 five basic operators (plus, minus, times, divide, remainder) and parentheses.
8908 All operations are carried out using integer arithmetic. Plus and minus have a
8909 lower priority than times, divide, and remainder; operators with the same
8910 priority are evaluated from left to right.
8913 For &%eval%&, numbers may be decimal, octal (starting with &"0"&) or
8914 hexadecimal (starting with &"0x"&). For &%eval10%&, all numbers are taken as
8915 decimal, even if they start with a leading zero. This can be useful when
8916 processing numbers extracted from dates or times, which often do have leading
8919 A number may be followed by &"K"& or &"M"& to multiply it by 1024 or 1024*1024,
8920 respectively. Negative numbers are supported. The result of the computation is
8921 a decimal representation of the answer (without &"K"& or &"M"&). For example:
8925 &`${eval:1+1} `& yields 2
8926 &`${eval:1+2*3} `& yields 7
8927 &`${eval:(1+2)*3} `& yields 9
8928 &`${eval:2+42%5} `& yields 4
8932 As a more realistic example, in an ACL you might have
8934 deny message = Too many bad recipients
8937 {>{$rcpt_count}{10}} \
8940 {$recipients_count} \
8941 {${eval:$rcpt_count/2}} \
8945 The condition is true if there have been more than 10 RCPT commands and
8946 fewer than half of them have resulted in a valid recipient.
8949 .vitem &*${expand:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8950 .cindex "expansion" "re-expansion of substring"
8951 The &%expand%& operator causes a string to be expanded for a second time. For
8954 ${expand:${lookup{$domain}dbm{/some/file}{$value}}}
8956 first looks up a string in a file while expanding the operand for &%expand%&,
8957 and then re-expands what it has found.
8960 .vitem &*${from_utf8:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8962 .cindex "UTF-8" "conversion from"
8963 .cindex "expansion" "UTF-8 conversion"
8964 The world is slowly moving towards Unicode, although there are no standards for
8965 email yet. However, other applications (including some databases) are starting
8966 to store data in Unicode, using UTF-8 encoding. This operator converts from a
8967 UTF-8 string to an ISO-8859-1 string. UTF-8 code values greater than 255 are
8968 converted to underscores. The input must be a valid UTF-8 string. If it is not,
8969 the result is an undefined sequence of bytes.
8971 Unicode code points with values less than 256 are compatible with ASCII and
8972 ISO-8859-1 (also known as Latin-1).
8973 For example, character 169 is the copyright symbol in both cases, though the
8974 way it is encoded is different. In UTF-8, more than one byte is needed for
8975 characters with code values greater than 127, whereas ISO-8859-1 is a
8976 single-byte encoding (but thereby limited to 256 characters). This makes
8977 translation from UTF-8 to ISO-8859-1 straightforward.
8980 .vitem &*${hash_*&<&'n'&>&*_*&<&'m'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
8981 .cindex "hash function" "textual"
8982 .cindex "expansion" "textual hash"
8983 The &%hash%& operator is a simpler interface to the hashing function that can
8984 be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers (as opposed to strings that
8985 change when expanded). The effect is the same as
8987 ${hash{<n>}{<m>}{<string>}}
8989 See the description of the general &%hash%& item above for details. The
8990 abbreviation &%h%& can be used when &%hash%& is used as an operator.
8994 .vitem &*${hex2b64:*&<&'hexstring'&>&*}*&
8995 .cindex "base64 encoding" "conversion from hex"
8996 .cindex "expansion" "hex to base64"
8997 This operator converts a hex string into one that is base64 encoded. This can
8998 be useful for processing the output of the MD5 and SHA-1 hashing functions.
9001 .vitem &*${lc:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9002 .cindex "case forcing in strings"
9003 .cindex "string" "case forcing"
9004 .cindex "lower casing"
9005 .cindex "expansion" "case forcing"
9006 This forces the letters in the string into lower-case, for example:
9011 .vitem &*${length_*&<&'number'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9012 .cindex "expansion" "string truncation"
9013 The &%length%& operator is a simpler interface to the &%length%& function that
9014 can be used when the parameter is a fixed number (as opposed to a string that
9015 changes when expanded). The effect is the same as
9017 ${length{<number>}{<string>}}
9019 See the description of the general &%length%& item above for details. Note that
9020 &%length%& is not the same as &%strlen%&. The abbreviation &%l%& can be used
9021 when &%length%& is used as an operator.
9024 .vitem &*${local_part:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9025 .cindex "expansion" "local part extraction"
9026 The string is interpreted as an RFC 2822 address and the local part is
9027 extracted from it. If the string does not parse successfully, the result is
9031 .vitem &*${mask:*&<&'IP&~address'&>&*/*&<&'bit&~count'&>&*}*&
9032 .cindex "masked IP address"
9033 .cindex "IP address" "masking"
9034 .cindex "CIDR notation"
9035 .cindex "expansion" "IP address masking"
9036 If the form of the string to be operated on is not an IP address followed by a
9037 slash and an integer (that is, a network address in CIDR notation), the
9038 expansion fails. Otherwise, this operator converts the IP address to binary,
9039 masks off the least significant bits according to the bit count, and converts
9040 the result back to text, with mask appended. For example,
9042 ${mask:10.111.131.206/28}
9044 returns the string &"10.111.131.192/28"&. Since this operation is expected to
9045 be mostly used for looking up masked addresses in files, the result for an IPv6
9046 address uses dots to separate components instead of colons, because colon
9047 terminates a key string in lsearch files. So, for example,
9049 ${mask:3ffe:ffff:836f:0a00:000a:0800:200a:c031/99}
9053 3ffe.ffff.836f.0a00.000a.0800.2000.0000/99
9055 Letters in IPv6 addresses are always output in lower case.
9058 .vitem &*${md5:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9060 .cindex "expansion" "MD5 hash"
9061 The &%md5%& operator computes the MD5 hash value of the string, and returns it
9062 as a 32-digit hexadecimal number, in which any letters are in lower case.
9065 .vitem &*${nhash_*&<&'n'&>&*_*&<&'m'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9066 .cindex "expansion" "numeric hash"
9067 .cindex "hash function" "numeric"
9068 The &%nhash%& operator is a simpler interface to the numeric hashing function
9069 that can be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers (as opposed to
9070 strings that change when expanded). The effect is the same as
9072 ${nhash{<n>}{<m>}{<string>}}
9074 See the description of the general &%nhash%& item above for details.
9077 .vitem &*${quote:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9078 .cindex "quoting" "in string expansions"
9079 .cindex "expansion" "quoting"
9080 The &%quote%& operator puts its argument into double quotes if it
9081 is an empty string or
9082 contains anything other than letters, digits, underscores, dots, and hyphens.
9083 Any occurrences of double quotes and backslashes are escaped with a backslash.
9084 Newlines and carriage returns are converted to &`\n`& and &`\r`&,
9085 respectively For example,
9093 The place where this is useful is when the argument is a substitution from a
9094 variable or a message header.
9096 .vitem &*${quote_local_part:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9097 This operator is like &%quote%&, except that it quotes the string only if
9098 required to do so by the rules of RFC 2822 for quoting local parts. For
9099 example, a plus sign would not cause quoting (but it would for &%quote%&).
9100 If you are creating a new email address from the contents of &$local_part$&
9101 (or any other unknown data), you should always use this operator.
9104 .vitem &*${quote_*&<&'lookup-type'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9105 .cindex "quoting" "lookup-specific"
9106 This operator applies lookup-specific quoting rules to the string. Each
9107 query-style lookup type has its own quoting rules which are described with
9108 the lookups in chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&. For example,
9110 ${quote_ldap:two * two}
9116 For single-key lookup types, no quoting is ever necessary and this operator
9117 yields an unchanged string.
9120 .vitem &*${rxquote:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9121 .cindex "quoting" "in regular expressions"
9122 .cindex "regular expressions" "quoting"
9123 The &%rxquote%& operator inserts a backslash before any non-alphanumeric
9124 characters in its argument. This is useful when substituting the values of
9125 variables or headers inside regular expressions.
9128 .vitem &*${rfc2047:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9129 .cindex "expansion" "RFC 2047"
9130 .cindex "RFC 2047" "expansion operator"
9131 This operator encodes text according to the rules of RFC 2047. This is an
9132 encoding that is used in header lines to encode non-ASCII characters. It is
9133 assumed that the input string is in the encoding specified by the
9134 &%headers_charset%& option, which defaults to ISO-8859-1. If the string
9135 contains only characters in the range 33&--126, and no instances of the
9138 ? = ( ) < > @ , ; : \ " . [ ] _
9140 it is not modified. Otherwise, the result is the RFC 2047 encoding of the
9141 string, using as many &"encoded words"& as necessary to encode all the
9146 .vitem &*${sha1:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9147 .cindex "SHA-1 hash"
9148 .cindex "expansion" "SHA-1 hashing"
9149 The &%sha1%& operator computes the SHA-1 hash value of the string, and returns
9150 it as a 40-digit hexadecimal number, in which any letters are in upper case.
9153 .vitem &*${stat:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9154 .cindex "expansion" "statting a file"
9155 .cindex "file" "extracting characteristics"
9156 The string, after expansion, must be a file path. A call to the &[stat()]&
9157 function is made for this path. If &[stat()]& fails, an error occurs and the
9158 expansion fails. If it succeeds, the data from the stat replaces the item, as a
9159 series of <&'name'&>=<&'value'&> pairs, where the values are all numerical,
9160 except for the value of &"smode"&. The names are: &"mode"& (giving the mode as
9161 a 4-digit octal number), &"smode"& (giving the mode in symbolic format as a
9162 10-character string, as for the &'ls'& command), &"inode"&, &"device"&,
9163 &"links"&, &"uid"&, &"gid"&, &"size"&, &"atime"&, &"mtime"&, and &"ctime"&. You
9164 can extract individual fields using the &%extract%& expansion item.
9167 The use of the &%stat%& expansion in users' filter files can be locked out by
9168 the system administrator. &*Warning*&: The file size may be incorrect on 32-bit
9169 systems for files larger than 2GB.
9172 .vitem &*${str2b64:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9173 .cindex "expansion" "base64 encoding"
9174 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in string expansion"
9175 This operator converts a string into one that is base64 encoded.
9179 .vitem &*${strlen:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9180 .cindex "expansion" "string length"
9181 .cindex "string" "length in expansion"
9182 The item is replace by the length of the expanded string, expressed as a
9183 decimal number. &*Note*&: Do not confuse &%strlen%& with &%length%&.
9186 .vitem &*${substr_*&<&'start'&>&*_*&<&'length'&>&*:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9187 .cindex "&%substr%&"
9188 .cindex "substring extraction"
9189 .cindex "expansion" "substring expansion"
9190 The &%substr%& operator is a simpler interface to the &%substr%& function that
9191 can be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers (as opposed to strings
9192 that change when expanded). The effect is the same as
9194 ${substr{<start>}{<length>}{<string>}}
9196 See the description of the general &%substr%& item above for details. The
9197 abbreviation &%s%& can be used when &%substr%& is used as an operator.
9199 .vitem &*${time_interval:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9200 .cindex "&%time_interval%&"
9201 .cindex "time interval" "formatting"
9202 The argument (after sub-expansion) must be a sequence of decimal digits that
9203 represents an interval of time as a number of seconds. It is converted into a
9204 number of larger units and output in Exim's normal time format, for example,
9207 .vitem &*${uc:*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9208 .cindex "case forcing in strings"
9209 .cindex "string" "case forcing"
9210 .cindex "upper casing"
9211 .cindex "expansion" "case forcing"
9212 This forces the letters in the string into upper-case.
9220 .section "Expansion conditions" "SECTexpcond"
9221 .cindex "expansion" "conditions"
9222 The following conditions are available for testing by the &%${if%& construct
9223 while expanding strings:
9226 .vitem &*!*&<&'condition'&>
9227 .cindex "expansion" "negating a condition"
9228 Preceding any condition with an exclamation mark negates the result of the
9231 .vitem <&'symbolic&~operator'&>&~&*{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9232 .cindex "numeric comparison"
9233 .cindex "expansion" "numeric comparison"
9234 There are a number of symbolic operators for doing numeric comparisons. They
9240 &`>= `& greater or equal
9242 &`<= `& less or equal
9246 ${if >{$message_size}{10M} ...
9248 Note that the general negation operator provides for inequality testing. The
9249 two strings must take the form of optionally signed decimal integers,
9250 optionally followed by one of the letters &"K"& or &"M"& (in either upper or
9251 lower case), signifying multiplication by 1024 or 1024*1024, respectively.
9253 .vitem &*crypteq&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9254 .cindex "expansion" "encrypted comparison"
9255 .cindex "encrypted strings" "comparing"
9256 This condition is included in the Exim binary if it is built to support any
9257 authentication mechanisms (see chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&). Otherwise, it is
9258 necessary to define SUPPORT_CRYPTEQ in &_Local/Makefile_& to get &%crypteq%&
9259 included in the binary.
9261 The &%crypteq%& condition has two arguments. The first is encrypted and
9262 compared against the second, which is already encrypted. The second string may
9263 be in the LDAP form for storing encrypted strings, which starts with the
9264 encryption type in curly brackets, followed by the data. If the second string
9265 does not begin with &"{"& it is assumed to be encrypted with &[crypt()]& or
9266 &[crypt16()]& (see below), since such strings cannot begin with &"{"&.
9267 Typically this will be a field from a password file. An example of an encrypted
9268 string in LDAP form is:
9270 {md5}CY9rzUYh03PK3k6DJie09g==
9272 If such a string appears directly in an expansion, the curly brackets have to
9273 be quoted, because they are part of the expansion syntax. For example:
9275 ${if crypteq {test}{\{md5\}CY9rzUYh03PK3k6DJie09g==}{yes}{no}}
9277 The following encryption types (whose names are matched case-independently) are
9282 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in encrypted password"
9283 &%{md5}%& computes the MD5 digest of the first string, and expresses this as
9284 printable characters to compare with the remainder of the second string. If the
9285 length of the comparison string is 24, Exim assumes that it is base64 encoded
9286 (as in the above example). If the length is 32, Exim assumes that it is a
9287 hexadecimal encoding of the MD5 digest. If the length not 24 or 32, the
9291 .cindex "SHA-1 hash"
9292 &%{sha1}%& computes the SHA-1 digest of the first string, and expresses this as
9293 printable characters to compare with the remainder of the second string. If the
9294 length of the comparison string is 28, Exim assumes that it is base64 encoded.
9295 If the length is 40, Exim assumes that it is a hexadecimal encoding of the
9296 SHA-1 digest. If the length is not 28 or 40, the comparison fails.
9299 .cindex "&[crypt()]&"
9300 &%{crypt}%& calls the &[crypt()]& function, which traditionally used to use
9301 only the first eight characters of the password. However, in modern operating
9302 systems this is no longer true, and in many cases the entire password is used,
9303 whatever its length.
9305 .cindex "&[crypt16()]&"
9306 &%{crypt16}%& calls the &[crypt16()]& function (also known as &[bigcrypt()]&),
9307 which was orginally created to use up to 16 characters of the password. Again,
9308 in modern operating systems, more characters may be used.
9311 Exim has its own version of &[crypt16()]& (which is just a double call to
9312 &[crypt()]&). For operating systems that have their own version, setting
9313 HAVE_CRYPT16 in &_Local/Makefile_& when building Exim causes it to use the
9314 operating system version instead of its own. This option is set by default in
9315 the OS-dependent &_Makefile_& for those operating systems that are known to
9316 support &[crypt16()]&.
9318 If you do not put any curly bracket encryption type in a &%crypteq%&
9319 comparison, the default is either &`{crypt}`& or &`{crypt16}`&, as determined
9320 by the setting of DEFAULT_CRYPT in &_Local/Makefile_&. The default default is
9321 &`{crypt}`&. Whatever the default, you can always use either function by
9322 specifying it explicitly in curly brackets.
9324 Note that if a password is no longer than 8 characters, the results of
9325 encrypting it with &[crypt()]& and &[crypt16()]& are identical. That means that
9326 &[crypt16()]& is backwards compatible, as long as nobody feeds it a password
9327 longer than 8 characters.
9329 .vitem &*def:*&<&'variable&~name'&>
9330 .cindex "expansion" "checking for empty variable"
9331 The &%def%& condition must be followed by the name of one of the expansion
9332 variables defined in section &<<SECTexpvar>>&. The condition is true if the
9333 variable does not contain the empty string. For example:
9335 ${if def:sender_ident {from $sender_ident}}
9337 Note that the variable name is given without a leading &%$%& character. If the
9338 variable does not exist, the expansion fails.
9340 .vitem "&*def:header_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&&~&~or&~&&&
9341 &~&*def:h_*&<&'header&~name'&>&*:*&"
9342 .cindex "expansion" "checking header line existence"
9343 This condition is true if a message is being processed and the named header
9344 exists in the message. For example,
9346 ${if def:header_reply-to:{$h_reply-to:}{$h_from:}}
9348 &*Note*&: No &%$%& appears before &%header_%& or &%h_%& in the condition, and
9349 the header name must be terminated by a colon if white space does not follow.
9351 .vitem &*eq&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9352 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9353 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9354 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the two
9355 resulting strings are identical, including the case of letters.
9357 .vitem &*eqi&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9358 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9359 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9360 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the two
9361 resulting strings are identical when compared in a case-independent way.
9363 .vitem &*exists&~{*&<&'file&~name'&>&*}*&
9364 .cindex "expansion" "file existence test"
9365 .cindex "file" "existence test"
9366 The substring is first expanded and then interpreted as an absolute path. The
9367 condition is true if the named file (or directory) exists. The existence test
9368 is done by calling the &[stat()]& function. The use of the &%exists%& test in
9369 users' filter files may be locked out by the system administrator.
9371 .vitem &*first_delivery*&
9372 .cindex "delivery" "first"
9373 .cindex "first delivery"
9374 .cindex "expansion" "first delivery test"
9375 This condition, which has no data, is true during a message's first delivery
9376 attempt. It is false during any subsequent delivery attempts.
9378 .vitem &*ge&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9381 .vitem &*gei&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9382 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9383 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9384 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9385 string is lexically greater than or equal to the second string: for &%ge%& the
9386 comparison includes the case of letters, whereas for &%gei%& the comparison is
9389 .vitem &*gt&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9392 .vitem &*gti&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9393 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9394 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9395 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9396 string is lexically greater than the second string: for &%gt%& the comparison
9397 includes the case of letters, whereas for &%gti%& the comparison is
9400 .vitem &*isip&~{*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9403 .vitem &*isip4&~{*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9406 .vitem &*isip6&~{*&<&'string'&>&*}*&
9407 .cindex "IP address" "testing string format"
9408 .cindex "string" "testing for IP address"
9409 The substring is first expanded, and then tested to see if it has the form of
9410 an IP address. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are valid for &%isip%&, whereas
9411 &%isip4%& and &%isip6%& test just for IPv4 or IPv6 addresses, respectively. For
9412 example, you could use
9414 ${if isip4{$sender_host_address}...
9416 to test which version of IP an incoming SMTP connection is using.
9419 .vitem &*ldapauth&~{*&<&'ldap&~query'&>&*}*&
9420 .cindex "LDAP" "use for authentication"
9421 .cindex "expansion" "LDAP authentication test"
9422 This condition supports user authentication using LDAP. See section
9423 &<<SECTldap>>& for details of how to use LDAP in lookups and the syntax of
9424 queries. For this use, the query must contain a user name and password. The
9425 query itself is not used, and can be empty. The condition is true if the
9426 password is not empty, and the user name and password are accepted by the LDAP
9427 server. An empty password is rejected without calling LDAP because LDAP binds
9428 with an empty password are considered anonymous regardless of the username, and
9429 will succeed in most configurations. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details
9430 of SMTP authentication, and chapter &<<CHAPplaintext>>& for an example of how
9434 .vitem &*le&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9437 .vitem &*lei&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9438 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9439 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9440 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9441 string is lexically less than or equal to the second string: for &%le%& the
9442 comparison includes the case of letters, whereas for &%lei%& the comparison is
9445 .vitem &*lt&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9448 .vitem &*lti&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9449 .cindex "string" "comparison"
9450 .cindex "expansion" "string comparison"
9451 The two substrings are first expanded. The condition is true if the first
9452 string is lexically less than the second string: for &%lt%& the comparison
9453 includes the case of letters, whereas for &%lti%& the comparison is
9457 .vitem &*match&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9458 .cindex "expansion" "regular expression comparison"
9459 .cindex "regular expressions" "match in expanded string"
9460 The two substrings are first expanded. The second is then treated as a regular
9461 expression and applied to the first. Because of the pre-expansion, if the
9462 regular expression contains dollar, or backslash characters, they must be
9463 escaped. Care must also be taken if the regular expression contains braces
9464 (curly brackets). A closing brace must be escaped so that it is not taken as a
9465 premature termination of <&'string2'&>. The easiest approach is to use the
9466 &`\N`& feature to disable expansion of the regular expression.
9469 ${if match {$local_part}{\N^\d{3}\N} ...
9471 If the whole expansion string is in double quotes, further escaping of
9472 backslashes is also required.
9474 The condition is true if the regular expression match succeeds.
9475 The regular expression is not required to begin with a circumflex
9476 metacharacter, but if there is no circumflex, the expression is not anchored,
9477 and it may match anywhere in the subject, not just at the start. If you want
9478 the pattern to match at the end of the subject, you must include the &`$`&
9479 metacharacter at an appropriate point.
9481 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &%if%& expansion"
9482 At the start of an &%if%& expansion the values of the numeric variable
9483 substitutions &$1$& etc. are remembered. Obeying a &%match%& condition that
9484 succeeds causes them to be reset to the substrings of that condition and they
9485 will have these values during the expansion of the success string. At the end
9486 of the &%if%& expansion, the previous values are restored. After testing a
9487 combination of conditions using &%or%&, the subsequent values of the numeric
9488 variables are those of the condition that succeeded.
9490 .vitem &*match_address&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9491 See &*match_local_part*&.
9493 .vitem &*match_domain&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9494 See &*match_local_part*&.
9497 .vitem &*match_ip&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9498 This condition matches an IP address to a list of IP address patterns. It must
9499 be followed by two argument strings. The first (after expansion) must be an IP
9500 address or an empty string. The second (after expansion) is a restricted host
9501 list that can match only an IP address, not a host name. For example:
9503 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{1.2.3.4:5.6.7.8}{...}{...}}
9505 The specific types of host list item that are permitted in the list are:
9508 An IP address, optionally with a CIDR mask.
9510 A single asterisk, which matches any IP address.
9512 An empty item, which matches only if the IP address is empty. This could be
9513 useful for testing for a locally submitted message or one from specific hosts
9514 in a single test such as
9515 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
9516 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
9518 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{:4.3.2.1:...}{...}{...}}
9520 where the first item in the list is the empty string.
9522 The item @[] matches any of the local host's interface addresses.
9524 Lookups are assumed to be &"net-"& style lookups, even if &`net-`& is not
9525 specified. Thus, the following are equivalent:
9527 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{lsearch;/some/file}...
9528 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{net-lsearch;/some/file}...
9530 You do need to specify the &`net-`& prefix if you want to specify a
9531 specific address mask, for example, by using &`net24-`&.
9534 Consult section &<<SECThoslispatip>>& for further details of these patterns.
9537 .vitem &*match_local_part&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*}{*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9538 .cindex "domain list" "in expansion condition"
9539 .cindex "address list" "in expansion condition"
9540 .cindex "local part list" "in expansion condition"
9541 This condition, together with &%match_address%& and &%match_domain%&, make it
9542 possible to test domain, address, and local part lists within expansions. Each
9543 condition requires two arguments: an item and a list to match. A trivial
9546 ${if match_domain{a.b.c}{x.y.z:a.b.c:p.q.r}{yes}{no}}
9548 In each case, the second argument may contain any of the allowable items for a
9549 list of the appropriate type. Also, because the second argument (after
9550 expansion) is a standard form of list, it is possible to refer to a named list.
9551 Thus, you can use conditions like this:
9553 ${if match_domain{$domain}{+local_domains}{...
9555 .cindex "&`+caseful`&"
9556 For address lists, the matching starts off caselessly, but the &`+caseful`&
9557 item can be used, as in all address lists, to cause subsequent items to
9558 have their local parts matched casefully. Domains are always matched
9561 &*Note*&: Host lists are &'not'& supported in this way. This is because
9562 hosts have two identities: a name and an IP address, and it is not clear
9563 how to specify cleanly how such a test would work. However, IP addresses can be
9564 matched using &%match_ip%&.
9566 .vitem &*pam&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*:*&<&'string2'&>&*:...}*&
9567 .cindex "PAM authentication"
9568 .cindex "AUTH" "with PAM"
9569 .cindex "Solaris" "PAM support"
9570 .cindex "expansion" "PAM authentication test"
9571 &'Pluggable Authentication Modules'&
9572 (&url(http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam/)) are a facility that is
9573 available in the latest releases of Solaris and in some GNU/Linux
9574 distributions. The Exim support, which is intended for use in conjunction with
9575 the SMTP AUTH command, is available only if Exim is compiled with
9579 in &_Local/Makefile_&. You probably need to add &%-lpam%& to EXTRALIBS, and
9580 in some releases of GNU/Linux &%-ldl%& is also needed.
9582 The argument string is first expanded, and the result must be a
9583 colon-separated list of strings. Leading and trailing white space is ignored.
9584 The PAM module is initialized with the service name &"exim"& and the user name
9585 taken from the first item in the colon-separated data string (<&'string1'&>).
9586 The remaining items in the data string are passed over in response to requests
9587 from the authentication function. In the simple case there will only be one
9588 request, for a password, so the data consists of just two strings.
9590 There can be problems if any of the strings are permitted to contain colon
9591 characters. In the usual way, these have to be doubled to avoid being taken as
9592 separators. If the data is being inserted from a variable, the &%sg%& expansion
9593 item can be used to double any existing colons. For example, the configuration
9594 of a LOGIN authenticator might contain this setting:
9596 server_condition = ${if pam{$1:${sg{$2}{:}{::}}}{yes}{no}}
9598 For a PLAIN authenticator you could use:
9600 server_condition = ${if pam{$2:${sg{$3}{:}{::}}}{yes}{no}}
9602 In some operating systems, PAM authentication can be done only from a process
9603 running as root. Since Exim is running as the Exim user when receiving
9604 messages, this means that PAM cannot be used directly in those systems.
9605 A patched version of the &'pam_unix'& module that comes with the
9606 Linux PAM package is available from &url(http://www.e-admin.de/pam_exim/).
9607 The patched module allows one special uid/gid combination, in addition to root,
9608 to authenticate. If you build the patched module to allow the Exim user and
9609 group, PAM can then be used from an Exim authenticator.
9612 .vitem &*pwcheck&~{*&<&'string1'&>&*:*&<&'string2'&>&*}*&
9613 .cindex "&'pwcheck'& daemon"
9615 .cindex "expansion" "&'pwcheck'& authentication test"
9616 This condition supports user authentication using the Cyrus &'pwcheck'& daemon.
9617 This is one way of making it possible for passwords to be checked by a process
9618 that is not running as root. &*Note*&: The use of &'pwcheck'& is now
9619 deprecated. Its replacement is &'saslauthd'& (see below).
9621 The pwcheck support is not included in Exim by default. You need to specify
9622 the location of the pwcheck daemon's socket in &_Local/Makefile_& before
9623 building Exim. For example:
9625 CYRUS_PWCHECK_SOCKET=/var/pwcheck/pwcheck
9627 You do not need to install the full Cyrus software suite in order to use
9628 the pwcheck daemon. You can compile and install just the daemon alone
9629 from the Cyrus SASL library. Ensure that &'exim'& is the only user that has
9630 access to the &_/var/pwcheck_& directory.
9632 The &%pwcheck%& condition takes one argument, which must be the user name and
9633 password, separated by a colon. For example, in a LOGIN authenticator
9634 configuration, you might have this:
9636 server_condition = ${if pwcheck{$1:$2}{1}{0}}
9638 .vitem &*queue_running*&
9639 .cindex "queue runner" "detecting when delivering from"
9640 .cindex "expansion" "queue runner test"
9641 This condition, which has no data, is true during delivery attempts that are
9642 initiated by queue runner processes, and false otherwise.
9645 .vitem &*radius&~{*&<&'authentication&~string'&>&*}*&
9647 .cindex "expansion" "Radius authentication"
9648 Radius authentication (RFC 2865) is supported in a similar way to PAM. You must
9649 set RADIUS_CONFIG_FILE in &_Local/Makefile_& to specify the location of
9650 the Radius client configuration file in order to build Exim with Radius
9654 With just that one setting, Exim expects to be linked with the &%radiusclient%&
9655 library, using the original API. If you are using release 0.4.0 or later of
9656 this library, you need to set
9658 RADIUS_LIB_TYPE=RADIUSCLIENTNEW
9660 in &_Local/Makefile_& when building Exim. You can also link Exim with the
9661 &%libradius%& library that comes with FreeBSD. To do this, set
9664 RADIUS_LIB_TYPE=RADLIB
9666 in &_Local/Makefile_&, in addition to setting RADIUS_CONFIGURE_FILE.
9667 You may also have to supply a suitable setting in EXTRALIBS so that the
9668 Radius library can be found when Exim is linked.
9670 The string specified by RADIUS_CONFIG_FILE is expanded and passed to the
9671 Radius client library, which calls the Radius server. The condition is true if
9672 the authentication is successful. For example:
9674 server_condition = ${if radius{<arguments>}{yes}{no}}
9678 .vitem "&*saslauthd&~{{*&<&'user'&>&*}{*&<&'password'&>&*}&&&
9679 {*&<&'service'&>&*}{*&<&'realm'&>&*}}*&"
9680 .cindex "&'saslauthd'& daemon"
9682 .cindex "expansion" "&'saslauthd'& authentication test"
9683 This condition supports user authentication using the Cyrus &'saslauthd'&
9684 daemon. This replaces the older &'pwcheck'& daemon, which is now deprecated.
9685 Using this daemon is one way of making it possible for passwords to be checked
9686 by a process that is not running as root.
9688 The saslauthd support is not included in Exim by default. You need to specify
9689 the location of the saslauthd daemon's socket in &_Local/Makefile_& before
9690 building Exim. For example:
9692 CYRUS_SASLAUTHD_SOCKET=/var/state/saslauthd/mux
9694 You do not need to install the full Cyrus software suite in order to use
9695 the saslauthd daemon. You can compile and install just the daemon alone
9696 from the Cyrus SASL library.
9698 Up to four arguments can be supplied to the &%saslauthd%& condition, but only
9699 two are mandatory. For example:
9701 server_condition = ${if saslauthd{{$1}{$2}}{1}{0}}
9703 The service and the realm are optional (which is why the arguments are enclosed
9704 in their own set of braces). For details of the meaning of the service and
9705 realm, and how to run the daemon, consult the Cyrus documentation.
9710 .section "Combining expansion conditions"
9711 .cindex "expansion" "combining conditions"
9712 Several conditions can be tested at once by combining them using the &%and%&
9713 and &%or%& combination conditions. Note that &%and%& and &%or%& are complete
9714 conditions on their own, and precede their lists of sub-conditions. Each
9715 sub-condition must be enclosed in braces within the overall braces that contain
9716 the list. No repetition of &%if%& is used.
9720 .vitem &*or&~{{*&<&'cond1'&>&*}{*&<&'cond2'&>&*}...}*&
9721 .cindex "&""or""& expansion condition"
9722 .cindex "expansion" "&""or""& of conditions"
9723 The sub-conditions are evaluated from left to right. The condition is true if
9724 any one of the sub-conditions is true.
9727 ${if or {{eq{$local_part}{spqr}}{eq{$domain}{testing.com}}}...
9729 When a true sub-condition is found, the following ones are parsed but not
9730 evaluated. If there are several &"match"& sub-conditions the values of the
9731 numeric variables afterwards are taken from the first one that succeeds.
9733 .vitem &*and&~{{*&<&'cond1'&>&*}{*&<&'cond2'&>&*}...}*&
9734 .cindex "&""and""& expansion condition"
9735 .cindex "expansion" "&""and""& of conditions"
9736 The sub-conditions are evaluated from left to right. The condition is true if
9737 all of the sub-conditions are true. If there are several &"match"&
9738 sub-conditions, the values of the numeric variables afterwards are taken from
9739 the last one. When a false sub-condition is found, the following ones are
9740 parsed but not evaluated.
9746 .section "Expansion variables" "SECTexpvar"
9747 .cindex "expansion variables" "list of"
9748 This section contains an alphabetical list of all the expansion variables. Some
9749 of them are available only when Exim is compiled with specific options such as
9750 support for TLS or the content scanning extension.
9753 .vitem "&$0$&, &$1$&, etc"
9754 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)"
9755 When a &%match%& expansion condition succeeds, these variables contain the
9756 captured substrings identified by the regular expression during subsequent
9757 processing of the success string of the containing &%if%& expansion item. They
9758 may also be set externally by some other matching process which precedes the
9759 expansion of the string. For example, the commands available in Exim filter
9760 files include an &%if%& command with its own regular expression matching
9763 .vitem "&$acl_c0$& &-- &$acl_c9$&"
9764 Values can be placed in these variables by the &%set%& modifier in an ACL. The
9765 values persist throughout the lifetime of an SMTP connection. They can be used
9766 to pass information between ACLs and different invocations of the same ACL.
9767 When a message is received, the values of these variables are saved with the
9768 message, and can be accessed by filters, routers, and transports during
9769 subsequent delivery.
9771 .vitem "&$acl_m0$& &-- &$acl_m9$&"
9772 Values can be placed in these variables by the &%set%& modifier in an ACL. They
9773 retain their values while a message is being received, but are reset
9774 afterwards. They are also reset by MAIL, RSET, EHLO, HELO, and after starting a
9775 TLS session. When a message is received, the values of these variables are
9776 saved with the message, and can be accessed by filters, routers, and transports
9777 during subsequent delivery.
9780 .vitem &$acl_verify_message$&
9781 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
9782 After an address verification has failed, this variable contains the failure
9783 message. It retains its value for use in subsequent modifiers. The message can
9784 be preserved by coding like this:
9786 warn !verify = sender
9787 set acl_m0 = $acl_verify_message
9789 You can use &$acl_verify_message$& during the expansion of the &%message%& or
9790 &%log_message%& modifiers, to include information about the verification
9794 .vitem &$address_data$&
9795 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
9796 This variable is set by means of the &%address_data%& option in routers. The
9797 value then remains with the address while it is processed by subsequent routers
9798 and eventually a transport. If the transport is handling multiple addresses,
9799 the value from the first address is used. See chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&
9800 for more details. &*Note*&: The contents of &$address_data$& are visible in
9803 If &$address_data$& is set when the routers are called from an ACL to verify
9804 a recipient address, the final value is still in the variable for subsequent
9805 conditions and modifiers of the ACL statement. If routing the address caused it
9806 to be redirected to just one address, the child address is also routed as part
9807 of the verification, and in this case the final value of &$address_data$& is
9808 from the child's routing.
9810 If &$address_data$& is set when the routers are called from an ACL to verify a
9811 sender address, the final value is also preserved, but this time in
9812 &$sender_address_data$&, to distinguish it from data from a recipient
9815 In both cases (recipient and sender verification), the value does not persist
9816 after the end of the current ACL statement. If you want to preserve
9817 these values for longer, you can save them in ACL variables.
9819 .vitem &$address_file$&
9820 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
9821 When, as a result of aliasing, forwarding, or filtering, a message is directed
9822 to a specific file, this variable holds the name of the file when the transport
9823 is running. At other times, the variable is empty. For example, using the
9824 default configuration, if user &%r2d2%& has a &_.forward_& file containing
9828 then when the &(address_file)& transport is running, &$address_file$&
9829 contains &"/home/r2d2/savemail"&.
9831 .cindex "Sieve filter" "value of &$address_file$&"
9832 For Sieve filters, the value may be &"inbox"& or a relative folder name. It is
9833 then up to the transport configuration to generate an appropriate absolute path
9834 to the relevant file.
9836 .vitem &$address_pipe$&
9837 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
9838 When, as a result of aliasing or forwarding, a message is directed to a pipe,
9839 this variable holds the pipe command when the transport is running.
9841 .vitem &$authenticated_id$&
9842 .cindex "authentication" "id"
9843 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
9844 When a server successfully authenticates a client it may be configured to
9845 preserve some of the authentication information in the variable
9846 &$authenticated_id$& (see chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&). For example, a
9847 user/password authenticator configuration might preserve the user name for use
9848 in the routers. Note that this is not the same information that is saved in
9849 &$sender_host_authenticated$&. When a message is submitted locally (that is,
9850 not over a TCP connection), the value of &$authenticated_id$& is the login name
9851 of the calling process.
9853 .vitem &$authenticated_sender$&
9854 .cindex "sender" "authenticated"
9855 .cindex "authentication" "sender"
9856 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
9857 .cindex "&$authenticated_sender$&"
9858 When acting as a server, Exim takes note of the AUTH= parameter on an incoming
9859 SMTP MAIL command if it believes the sender is sufficiently trusted, as
9860 described in section &<<SECTauthparamail>>&. Unless the data is the string
9861 &"<>"&, it is set as the authenticated sender of the message, and the value is
9862 available during delivery in the &$authenticated_sender$& variable. If the
9863 sender is not trusted, Exim accepts the syntax of AUTH=, but ignores the data.
9865 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
9866 When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP connection), the
9867 value of &$authenticated_sender$& is an address constructed from the login
9868 name of the calling process and &$qualify_domain$&.
9871 .vitem &$authentication_failed$&
9872 .cindex "authentication" "failure"
9873 .cindex "&$authentication_failed$&"
9874 This variable is set to &"1"& in an Exim server if a client issues an AUTH
9875 command that does not succeed. Otherwise it is set to &"0"&. This makes it
9876 possible to distinguish between &"did not try to authenticate"&
9877 (&$sender_host_authenticated$& is empty and &$authentication_failed$& is set to
9878 &"0"&) and &"tried to authenticate but failed"& (&$sender_host_authenticated$&
9879 is empty and &$authentication_failed$& is set to &"1"&). Failure includes any
9880 negative response to an AUTH command, including (for example) an attempt to use
9881 an undefined mechanism.
9883 .vitem &$body_linecount$&
9884 .cindex "message body" "line count"
9885 .cindex "body of message" "line count"
9886 .cindex "&$body_linecount$&"
9887 When a message is being received or delivered, this variable contains the
9888 number of lines in the message's body. See also &$message_linecount$&.
9890 .vitem &$body_zerocount$&
9891 .cindex "message body" "binary zero count"
9892 .cindex "body of message" "binary zero count"
9893 .cindex "binary zero" "in message body"
9894 .cindex "&$body_zerocount$&"
9895 When a message is being received or delivered, this variable contains the
9896 number of binary zero bytes in the message's body.
9898 .vitem &$bounce_recipient$&
9899 .cindex "&$bounce_recipient$&"
9900 This is set to the recipient address of a bounce message while Exim is creating
9901 it. It is useful if a customized bounce message text file is in use (see
9902 chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&).
9904 .vitem &$bounce_return_size_limit$&
9905 .cindex "&$bounce_return_size_limit$&"
9906 This contains the value set in the &%bounce_return_size_limit%& option, rounded
9907 up to a multiple of 1000. It is useful when a customized error message text
9908 file is in use (see chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&).
9910 .vitem &$caller_gid$&
9911 .cindex "gid (group id)" "caller"
9912 .cindex "&$caller_gid$&"
9913 The real group id under which the process that called Exim was running. This is
9914 not the same as the group id of the originator of a message (see
9915 &$originator_gid$&). If Exim re-execs itself, this variable in the new
9916 incarnation normally contains the Exim gid.
9918 .vitem &$caller_uid$&
9919 .cindex "uid (user id)" "caller"
9920 .cindex "&$caller_uid$&"
9921 The real user id under which the process that called Exim was running. This is
9922 not the same as the user id of the originator of a message (see
9923 &$originator_uid$&). If Exim re-execs itself, this variable in the new
9924 incarnation normally contains the Exim uid.
9926 .vitem &$compile_date$&
9927 .cindex "&$compile_date$&"
9928 The date on which the Exim binary was compiled.
9930 .vitem &$compile_number$&
9931 .cindex "&$compile_number$&"
9932 The building process for Exim keeps a count of the number
9933 of times it has been compiled. This serves to distinguish different
9934 compilations of the same version of the program.
9936 .vitem &$demime_errorlevel$&
9937 .cindex "&$demime_errorlevel$&"
9938 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with
9939 the content-scanning extension and the obsolete &%demime%& condition. For
9940 details, see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
9942 .vitem &$demime_reason$&
9943 .cindex "&$demime_reason$&"
9944 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
9945 content-scanning extension and the obsolete &%demime%& condition. For details,
9946 see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
9949 .vitem &$dnslist_domain$&
9950 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
9951 .cindex "&$dnslist_domain$&"
9952 When a client host is found to be on a DNS (black) list,
9953 the list's domain name is put into this variable so that it can be included in
9954 the rejection message.
9956 .vitem &$dnslist_text$&
9957 .cindex "&$dnslist_text$&"
9958 When a client host is found to be on a DNS (black) list, the
9959 contents of any associated TXT record are placed in this variable.
9961 .vitem &$dnslist_value$&
9962 .cindex "&$dnslist_value$&"
9963 When a client host is found to be on a DNS (black) list,
9964 the IP address from the resource record is placed in this variable.
9965 If there are multiple records, all the addresses are included, comma-space
9969 .cindex "&$domain$&"
9970 When an address is being routed, or delivered on its own, this variable
9971 contains the domain. Global address rewriting happens when a message is
9972 received, so the value of &$domain$& during routing and delivery is the value
9973 after rewriting. &$domain$& is set during user filtering, but not during system
9974 filtering, because a message may have many recipients and the system filter is
9977 When more than one address is being delivered at once (for example, several
9978 RCPT commands in one SMTP delivery), &$domain$& is set only if they all
9979 have the same domain. Transports can be restricted to handling only one domain
9980 at a time if the value of &$domain$& is required at transport time &-- this is
9981 the default for local transports. For further details of the environment in
9982 which local transports are run, see chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
9984 .cindex "&%delay_warning_condition%&"
9985 At the end of a delivery, if all deferred addresses have the same domain, it is
9986 set in &$domain$& during the expansion of &%delay_warning_condition%&.
9988 The &$domain$& variable is also used in some other circumstances:
9991 When an ACL is running for a RCPT command, &$domain$& contains the domain of
9992 the recipient address. The domain of the &'sender'& address is in
9993 &$sender_address_domain$& at both MAIL time and at RCPT time. &$domain$& is not
9994 normally set during the running of the MAIL ACL. However, if the sender address
9995 is verified with a callout during the MAIL ACL, the sender domain is placed in
9996 &$domain$& during the expansions of &%hosts%&, &%interface%&, and &%port%& in
9997 the &(smtp)& transport.
10000 When a rewrite item is being processed (see chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&),
10001 &$domain$& contains the domain portion of the address that is being rewritten;
10002 it can be used in the expansion of the replacement address, for example, to
10003 rewrite domains by file lookup.
10006 With one important exception, whenever a domain list is being scanned,
10007 &$domain$& contains the subject domain. &*Exception*&: When a domain list in
10008 a &%sender_domains%& condition in an ACL is being processed, the subject domain
10009 is in &$sender_address_domain$& and not in &$domain$&. It works this way so
10010 that, in a RCPT ACL, the sender domain list can be dependent on the
10011 recipient domain (which is what is in &$domain$& at this time).
10014 .cindex "ETRN" "value of &$domain$&"
10015 .cindex "&%smtp_etrn_command%&"
10016 When the &%smtp_etrn_command%& option is being expanded, &$domain$& contains
10017 the complete argument of the ETRN command (see section &<<SECTETRN>>&).
10021 .vitem &$domain_data$&
10022 .cindex "&$domain_data$&"
10023 When the &%domains%& option on a router matches a domain by
10024 means of a lookup, the data read by the lookup is available during the running
10025 of the router as &$domain_data$&. In addition, if the driver routes the
10026 address to a transport, the value is available in that transport. If the
10027 transport is handling multiple addresses, the value from the first address is
10030 &$domain_data$& is also set when the &%domains%& condition in an ACL matches a
10031 domain by means of a lookup. The data read by the lookup is available during
10032 the rest of the ACL statement. In all other situations, this variable expands
10035 .vitem &$exim_gid$&
10036 .cindex "&$exim_gid$&"
10037 This variable contains the numerical value of the Exim group id.
10039 .vitem &$exim_path$&
10040 .cindex "&$exim_path$&"
10041 This variable contains the path to the Exim binary.
10043 .vitem &$exim_uid$&
10044 .cindex "&$exim_uid$&"
10045 This variable contains the numerical value of the Exim user id.
10047 .vitem &$found_extension$&
10048 .cindex "&$found_extension$&"
10049 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
10050 content-scanning extension and the obsolete &%demime%& condition. For details,
10051 see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
10053 .vitem &$header_$&<&'name'&>
10054 This is not strictly an expansion variable. It is expansion syntax for
10055 inserting the message header line with the given name. Note that the name must
10056 be terminated by colon or white space, because it may contain a wide variety of
10057 characters. Note also that braces must &'not'& be used.
10061 When the &%check_local_user%& option is set for a router, the user's home
10062 directory is placed in &$home$& when the check succeeds. In particular, this
10063 means it is set during the running of users' filter files. A router may also
10064 explicitly set a home directory for use by a transport; this can be overridden
10065 by a setting on the transport itself.
10067 When running a filter test via the &%-bf%& option, &$home$& is set to the value
10068 of the environment variable HOME.
10072 When the &(smtp)& transport is expanding its options for encryption using TLS,
10073 &$host$& contains the name of the host to which it is connected. Likewise, when
10074 used in the client part of an authenticator configuration (see chapter
10075 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&), &$host$& contains the name of the server to which the
10076 client is connected.
10078 .cindex "transport" "filter"
10079 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
10080 When used in a transport filter (see chapter &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&)
10081 &$host$& refers to the host involved in the current connection. When a local
10082 transport is run as a result of a router that sets up a host list, &$host$&
10083 contains the name of the first host.
10085 .vitem &$host_address$&
10086 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
10087 This variable is set to the remote host's IP address whenever &$host$& is set
10088 for a remote connection. It is also set to the IP address that is being checked
10089 when the &%ignore_target_hosts%& option is being processed.
10091 .vitem &$host_data$&
10092 .cindex "&$host_data$&"
10093 If a &%hosts%& condition in an ACL is satisfied by means of a lookup, the
10094 result of the lookup is made available in the &$host_data$& variable. This
10095 allows you, for example, to do things like this:
10097 deny hosts = net-lsearch;/some/file
10098 message = $host_data
10100 .vitem &$host_lookup_deferred$&
10101 .cindex "host name lookup" "failure of"
10102 .cindex "&$host_lookup_deferred$&"
10103 This variable normally contains &"0"&, as does &$host_lookup_failed$&. When a
10104 message comes from a remote host and there is an attempt to look up the host's
10105 name from its IP address, and the attempt is not successful, one of these
10106 variables is set to &"1"&.
10109 If the lookup receives a definite negative response (for example, a DNS lookup
10110 succeeded, but no records were found), &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&.
10113 If there is any kind of problem during the lookup, such that Exim cannot
10114 tell whether or not the host name is defined (for example, a timeout for a DNS
10115 lookup), &$host_lookup_deferred$& is set to &"1"&.
10118 Looking up a host's name from its IP address consists of more than just a
10119 single reverse lookup. Exim checks that a forward lookup of at least one of the
10120 names it receives from a reverse lookup yields the original IP address. If this
10121 is not the case, Exim does not accept the looked up name(s), and
10122 &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&. Thus, being able to find a name from an
10123 IP address (for example, the existence of a PTR record in the DNS) is not
10124 sufficient on its own for the success of a host name lookup. If the reverse
10125 lookup succeeds, but there is a lookup problem such as a timeout when checking
10126 the result, the name is not accepted, and &$host_lookup_deferred$& is set to
10127 &"1"&. See also &$sender_host_name$&.
10129 .vitem &$host_lookup_failed$&
10130 .cindex "&$host_lookup_failed$&"
10131 See &$host_lookup_deferred$&.
10135 .cindex "&$inode$&"
10136 The only time this variable is set is while expanding the &%directory_file%&
10137 option in the &(appendfile)& transport. The variable contains the inode number
10138 of the temporary file which is about to be renamed. It can be used to construct
10139 a unique name for the file.
10142 .vitem &$interface_address$&
10143 .cindex "&$interface_address$&"
10144 As soon as a server starts processing a TCP/IP connection, this variable is set
10145 to the address of the local IP interface, and &$interface_port$& is set to the
10146 port number. These values are therefore available for use in the &"connect"&
10147 ACL. See also the &%-oMi%& command line option. As well as being used in ACLs,
10148 these variable could be used, for example, to make the file name for a TLS
10149 certificate depend on which interface and/or port is being used.
10152 .vitem &$interface_port$&
10153 .cindex "&$interface_port$&"
10154 See &$interface_address$&.
10157 .cindex "&$ldap_dn$&"
10158 This variable, which is available only when Exim is compiled with LDAP support,
10159 contains the DN from the last entry in the most recently successful LDAP
10162 .vitem &$load_average$&
10163 .cindex "&$load_average$&"
10164 This variable contains the system load average, multiplied by 1000 to that it
10165 is an integer. For example, if the load average is 0.21, the value of the
10166 variable is 210. The value is recomputed every time the variable is referenced.
10168 .vitem &$local_part$&
10169 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
10170 When an address is being routed, or delivered on its own, this
10171 variable contains the local part. When a number of addresses are being
10172 delivered together (for example, multiple RCPT commands in an SMTP
10173 session), &$local_part$& is not set.
10175 Global address rewriting happens when a message is received, so the value of
10176 &$local_part$& during routing and delivery is the value after rewriting.
10177 &$local_part$& is set during user filtering, but not during system filtering,
10178 because a message may have many recipients and the system filter is called just
10181 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
10182 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
10183 If a local part prefix or suffix has been recognized, it is not included in the
10184 value of &$local_part$& during routing and subsequent delivery. The values of
10185 any prefix or suffix are in &$local_part_prefix$& and
10186 &$local_part_suffix$&, respectively.
10188 When a message is being delivered to a file, pipe, or autoreply transport as a
10189 result of aliasing or forwarding, &$local_part$& is set to the local part of
10190 the parent address, not to the file name or command (see &$address_file$& and
10193 When an ACL is running for a RCPT command, &$local_part$& contains the
10194 local part of the recipient address.
10196 When a rewrite item is being processed (see chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&),
10197 &$local_part$& contains the local part of the address that is being rewritten;
10198 it can be used in the expansion of the replacement address, for example.
10200 In all cases, all quoting is removed from the local part. For example, for both
10203 "abc:xyz"@test.example
10204 abc\:xyz@test.example
10206 the value of &$local_part$& is
10210 If you use &$local_part$& to create another address, you should always wrap it
10211 inside a quoting operator. For example, in a &(redirect)& router you could
10214 data = ${quote_local_part:$local_part}@new.domain.example
10216 &*Note*&: The value of &$local_part$& is normally lower cased. If you want
10217 to process local parts in a case-dependent manner in a router, you can set the
10218 &%caseful_local_part%& option (see chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&).
10220 .vitem &$local_part_data$&
10221 .cindex "&$local_part_data$&"
10222 When the &%local_parts%& option on a router matches a local part by means of a
10223 lookup, the data read by the lookup is available during the running of the
10224 router as &$local_part_data$&. In addition, if the driver routes the address
10225 to a transport, the value is available in that transport. If the transport is
10226 handling multiple addresses, the value from the first address is used.
10228 &$local_part_data$& is also set when the &%local_parts%& condition in an ACL
10229 matches a local part by means of a lookup. The data read by the lookup is
10230 available during the rest of the ACL statement. In all other situations, this
10231 variable expands to nothing.
10233 .vitem &$local_part_prefix$&
10234 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
10235 When an address is being routed or delivered, and a
10236 specific prefix for the local part was recognized, it is available in this
10237 variable, having been removed from &$local_part$&.
10239 .vitem &$local_part_suffix$&
10240 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
10241 When an address is being routed or delivered, and a
10242 specific suffix for the local part was recognized, it is available in this
10243 variable, having been removed from &$local_part$&.
10245 .vitem &$local_scan_data$&
10246 .cindex "&$local_scan_data$&"
10247 This variable contains the text returned by the &[local_scan()]& function when
10248 a message is received. See chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>& for more details.
10250 .vitem &$local_user_gid$&
10251 .cindex "&$local_user_gid$&"
10252 See &$local_user_uid$&.
10254 .vitem &$local_user_uid$&
10255 .cindex "&$local_user_uid$&"
10256 This variable and &$local_user_gid$& are set to the uid and gid after the
10257 &%check_local_user%& router precondition succeeds. This means that their values
10258 are available for the remaining preconditions (&%senders%&, &%require_files%&,
10259 and &%condition%&), for the &%address_data%& expansion, and for any
10260 router-specific expansions. At all other times, the values in these variables
10261 are &`(uid_t)(-1)`& and &`(gid_t)(-1)`&, respectively.
10263 .vitem &$localhost_number$&
10264 .cindex "&$localhost_number$&"
10265 This contains the expanded value of the
10266 &%localhost_number%& option. The expansion happens after the main options have
10269 .vitem &$log_inodes$&
10270 .cindex "&$log_inodes$&"
10271 The number of free inodes in the disk partition where Exim's
10272 log files are being written. The value is recalculated whenever the variable is
10273 referenced. If the relevant file system does not have the concept of inodes,
10274 the value of is -1. See also the &%check_log_inodes%& option.
10276 .vitem &$log_space$&
10277 .cindex "&$log_space$&"
10278 The amount of free space (as a number of kilobytes) in the disk
10279 partition where Exim's log files are being written. The value is recalculated
10280 whenever the variable is referenced. If the operating system does not have the
10281 ability to find the amount of free space (only true for experimental systems),
10282 the space value is -1. See also the &%check_log_space%& option.
10285 .vitem &$mailstore_basename$&
10286 .cindex "&$mailstore_basename$&"
10287 This variable is set only when doing deliveries in &"mailstore"& format in the
10288 &(appendfile)& transport. During the expansion of the &%mailstore_prefix%&,
10289 &%mailstore_suffix%&, &%message_prefix%&, and &%message_suffix%& options, it
10290 contains the basename of the files that are being written, that is, the name
10291 without the &".tmp"&, &".env"&, or &".msg"& suffix. At all other times, this
10294 .vitem &$malware_name$&
10295 .cindex "&$malware_name$&"
10296 This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
10297 content-scanning extension. It is set to the name of the virus that was found
10298 when the ACL &%malware%& condition is true (see section &<<SECTscanvirus>>&).
10301 .vitem &$message_age$&
10302 .cindex "message" "age of"
10303 .cindex "&$message_age$&"
10304 This variable is set at the start of a delivery attempt to contain the number
10305 of seconds since the message was received. It does not change during a single
10308 .vitem &$message_body$&
10309 .cindex "body of message" "expansion variable"
10310 .cindex "message body" "in expansion"
10311 .cindex "binary zero" "in message body"
10312 .cindex "&$message_body$&"
10313 This variable contains the initial portion of a message's
10314 body while it is being delivered, and is intended mainly for use in filter
10315 files. The maximum number of characters of the body that are put into the
10316 variable is set by the &%message_body_visible%& configuration option; the
10317 default is 500. Newlines are converted into spaces to make it easier to search
10318 for phrases that might be split over a line break.
10319 Binary zeros are also converted into spaces.
10321 .vitem &$message_body_end$&
10322 .cindex "body of message" "expansion variable"
10323 .cindex "message body" "in expansion"
10324 .cindex "&$message_body_end$&"
10325 This variable contains the final portion of a message's
10326 body while it is being delivered. The format and maximum size are as for
10329 .vitem &$message_body_size$&
10330 .cindex "body of message" "size"
10331 .cindex "message body" "size"
10332 .cindex "&$message_body_size$&"
10333 When a message is being delivered, this variable contains the size of the body
10334 in bytes. The count starts from the character after the blank line that
10335 separates the body from the header. Newlines are included in the count. See
10336 also &$message_size$&, &$body_linecount$&, and &$body_zerocount$&.
10339 .vitem &$message_exim_id$&
10340 .cindex "&$message_exim_id$&"
10341 When a message is being received or delivered, this variable contains the
10342 unique message id that is generated and used by Exim to identify the message.
10343 An id is not created for a message until after its header has been successfully
10344 received. &*Note*&: This is &'not'& the contents of the &'Message-ID:'& header
10345 line; it is the local id that Exim assigns to the message, for example:
10346 &`1BXTIK-0001yO-VA`&.
10349 .vitem &$message_headers$&
10350 This variable contains a concatenation of all the header lines when a message
10351 is being processed, except for lines added by routers or transports. The header
10352 lines are separated by newline characters.
10354 .vitem &$message_id$&
10356 This is an old name for &$message_exim_id$&, which is now deprecated.
10360 .vitem &$message_linecount$&
10361 .cindex "&$message_linecount$&"
10362 This variable contains the total number of lines in the header and body of the
10363 message. Compare &$body_linecount$&, which is the count for the body only.
10364 During the DATA and content-scanning ACLs, &$message_linecount$& contains the
10365 number of lines received. Before delivery happens (that is, before filters,
10366 routers, and transports run) the count is increased to include the
10367 &'Received:'& header line that Exim standardly adds, and also any other header
10368 lines that are added by ACLs. The blank line that separates the message header
10369 from the body is not counted. Here is an example of the use of this variable in
10372 deny message = Too many lines in message header
10374 ${if <{250}{${eval:$message_linecount - $body_linecount}}}
10376 In the MAIL and RCPT ACLs, the value is zero because at that stage the
10377 message has not yet been received.
10380 .vitem &$message_size$&
10381 .cindex "size" "of message"
10382 .cindex "message" "size"
10383 .cindex "&$message_size$&"
10384 When a message is being processed, this variable contains its size in bytes. In
10385 most cases, the size includes those headers that were received with the
10386 message, but not those (such as &'Envelope-to:'&) that are added to individual
10387 deliveries as they are written. However, there is one special case: during the
10388 expansion of the &%maildir_tag%& option in the &(appendfile)& transport while
10389 doing a delivery in maildir format, the value of &$message_size$& is the
10390 precise size of the file that has been written. See also
10391 &$message_body_size$&, &$body_linecount$&, and &$body_zerocount$&.
10393 .cindex "RCPT" "value of &$message_size$&"
10394 While running an ACL at the time of an SMTP RCPT command, &$message_size$&
10395 contains the size supplied on the MAIL command, or -1 if no size was given. The
10396 value may not, of course, be truthful.
10398 .vitem &$mime_$&&'xxx'&
10399 A number of variables whose names start with &$mime$& are
10400 available when Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension. For
10401 details, see section &<<SECTscanmimepart>>&.
10403 .vitem "&$n0$& &-- &$n9$&"
10404 These variables are counters that can be incremented by means
10405 of the &%add%& command in filter files.
10407 .vitem &$original_domain$&
10408 .cindex "&$domain$&"
10409 .cindex "&$original_domain$&"
10410 When a top-level address is being processed for delivery, this contains the
10411 same value as &$domain$&. However, if a &"child"& address (for example,
10412 generated by an alias, forward, or filter file) is being processed, this
10413 variable contains the domain of the original address. This differs from
10414 &$parent_domain$& only when there is more than one level of aliasing or
10415 forwarding. When more than one address is being delivered in a single transport
10416 run, &$original_domain$& is not set.
10418 If a new address is created by means of a &%deliver%& command in a system
10419 filter, it is set up with an artificial &"parent"& address. This has the local
10420 part &'system-filter'& and the default qualify domain.
10422 .vitem &$original_local_part$&
10423 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
10424 .cindex "&$original_local_part$&"
10425 When a top-level address is being processed for delivery, this contains the
10426 same value as &$local_part$&, unless a prefix or suffix was removed from the
10427 local part, because &$original_local_part$& always contains the full local
10428 part. When a &"child"& address (for example, generated by an alias, forward, or
10429 filter file) is being processed, this variable contains the full local part of
10430 the original address.
10432 If the router that did the redirection processed the local part
10433 case-insensitively, the value in &$original_local_part$& is in lower case.
10434 This variable differs from &$parent_local_part$& only when there is more than
10435 one level of aliasing or forwarding. When more than one address is being
10436 delivered in a single transport run, &$original_local_part$& is not set.
10438 If a new address is created by means of a &%deliver%& command in a system
10439 filter, it is set up with an artificial &"parent"& address. This has the local
10440 part &'system-filter'& and the default qualify domain.
10442 .vitem &$originator_gid$&
10443 .cindex "gid (group id)" "of originating user"
10444 .cindex "sender" "gid"
10445 .cindex "&$caller_gid$&"
10446 .cindex "&$originator_gid$&"
10447 This variable contains the value of &$caller_gid$& that was set when the
10448 message was received. For messages received via the command line, this is the
10449 gid of the sending user. For messages received by SMTP over TCP/IP, this is
10450 normally the gid of the Exim user.
10452 .vitem &$originator_uid$&
10453 .cindex "uid (user id)" "of originating user"
10454 .cindex "sender" "uid"
10455 .cindex "&$caller_uid$&"
10456 .cindex "&$originaltor_uid$&"
10457 The value of &$caller_uid$& that was set when the message was received. For
10458 messages received via the command line, this is the uid of the sending user.
10459 For messages received by SMTP over TCP/IP, this is normally the uid of the Exim
10462 .vitem &$parent_domain$&
10463 .cindex "&$parent_domain$&"
10464 This variable is similar to &$original_domain$& (see
10465 above), except that it refers to the immediately preceding parent address.
10467 .vitem &$parent_local_part$&
10468 .cindex "&$parent_local_part$&"
10469 This variable is similar to &$original_local_part$&
10470 (see above), except that it refers to the immediately preceding parent address.
10473 .cindex "pid (process id)" "of current process"
10475 This variable contains the current process id.
10477 .vitem &$pipe_addresses$&
10478 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
10479 .cindex "transport" "filter"
10480 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
10481 This is not an expansion variable, but is mentioned here because the string
10482 &"$pipe_addresses"& is handled specially in the command specification for the
10483 &(pipe)& transport (chapter &<<CHAPpipetransport>>&) and in transport filters
10484 (described under &%transport_filter%& in chapter &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&).
10485 It cannot be used in general expansion strings, and provokes an &"unknown
10486 variable"& error if encountered.
10488 .vitem &$primary_hostname$&
10489 .cindex "&$primary_hostname$&"
10490 This variable contains the value set by &%primary_hostname%& in the
10491 configuration file, or read by the &[uname()]& function. If &[uname()]& returns
10492 a single-component name, Exim calls &[gethostbyname()]& (or
10493 &[getipnodebyname()]& where available) in an attempt to acquire a fully
10494 qualified host name. See also &$smtp_active_hostname$&.
10498 .vitem &$prvscheck_address$&
10499 This variable is used in conjunction with the &%prvscheck%& expansion item,
10500 which is described in sections &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& and
10501 &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
10503 .vitem &$prvscheck_keynum$&
10504 This variable is used in conjunction with the &%prvscheck%& expansion item,
10505 which is described in sections &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& and
10506 &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
10508 .vitem &$prvscheck_result$&
10509 This variable is used in conjunction with the &%prvscheck%& expansion item,
10510 which is described in sections &<<SECTexpansionitems>>& and
10511 &<<SECTverifyPRVS>>&.
10514 .vitem &$qualify_domain$&
10515 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
10516 The value set for the &%qualify_domain%& option in the configuration file.
10518 .vitem &$qualify_recipient$&
10519 .cindex "&$qualify_recipient$&"
10520 The value set for the &%qualify_recipient%& option in the configuration file,
10521 or if not set, the value of &$qualify_domain$&.
10523 .vitem &$rcpt_count$&
10524 .cindex "&$rcpt_count$&"
10525 When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains the number of
10526 RCPT commands received for the current message. If this variable is used in a
10527 RCPT ACL, its value includes the current command.
10529 .vitem &$rcpt_defer_count$&
10530 .cindex "&$rcpt_defer_count$&"
10531 When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains the number of
10532 RCPT commands in the current message that have previously been rejected with a
10533 temporary (4&'xx'&) response.
10535 .vitem &$rcpt_fail_count$&
10536 .cindex "&$rcpt_fail_count$&"
10537 When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains the number of
10538 RCPT commands in the current message that have previously been rejected with a
10539 permanent (5&'xx'&) response.
10541 .vitem &$received_count$&
10542 .cindex "&$received_count$&"
10543 This variable contains the number of &'Received:'& header lines in the message,
10544 including the one added by Exim (so its value is always greater than zero). It
10545 is available in the DATA ACL, the non-SMTP ACL, and while routing and
10548 .vitem &$received_for$&
10549 .cindex "&$received_for$&"
10550 If there is only a single recipient address in an incoming message, this
10551 variable contains that address when the &'Received:'& header line is being
10552 built. The value is copied after recipient rewriting has happened, but before
10553 the &[local_scan()]& function is run.
10555 .vitem &$received_protocol$&
10556 .cindex "&$received_protocol$&"
10557 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the name of the
10558 protocol by which it was received. Most of the names used by Exim are defined
10559 by RFCs 821, 2821, and 3848. They start with &"smtp"& (the client used HELO) or
10560 &"esmtp"& (the client used EHLO). This can be followed by &"s"& for secure
10561 (encrypted) and/or &"a"& for authenticated. Thus, for example, if the protocol
10562 is set to &"esmtpsa"&, the message was received over an encrypted SMTP
10563 connection and the client was successfully authenticated.
10565 Exim uses the protocol name &"smtps"& for the case when encryption is
10566 automatically set up on connection without the use of STARTTLS (see
10567 &%tls_on_connect_ports%&), and the client uses HELO to initiate the
10568 encrypted SMTP session. The name &"smtps"& is also used for the rare situation
10569 where the client initially uses EHLO, sets up an encrypted connection using
10570 STARTTLS, and then uses HELO afterwards.
10572 The &%-oMr%& option provides a way of specifying a custom protocol name for
10573 messages that are injected locally by trusted callers. This is commonly used to
10574 identify messages that are being re-injected after some kind of scanning.
10577 .vitem &$received_time$&
10578 .cindex "&$received_time$&"
10579 This variable contains the date and time when the current message was received,
10580 as a number of seconds since the start of the Unix epoch.
10583 .vitem &$recipient_data$&
10584 .cindex "&$recipient_data$&"
10585 This variable is set after an indexing lookup success in an ACL &%recipients%&
10586 condition. It contains the data from the lookup, and the value remains set
10587 until the next &%recipients%& test. Thus, you can do things like this:
10589 &`require recipients = cdb*@;/some/file`&
10590 &`deny `&&'some further test involving'& &`$recipient_data`&
10592 &*Warning*&: This variable is set only when a lookup is used as an indexing
10593 method in the address list, using the semicolon syntax as in the example above.
10594 The variable is not set for a lookup that is used as part of the string
10595 expansion that all such lists undergo before being interpreted.
10597 .vitem &$recipient_verify_failure$&
10598 .cindex "&$recipient_verify_failure$&"
10599 In an ACL, when a recipient verification fails, this variable contains
10600 information about the failure. It is set to one of the following words:
10603 &"qualify"&: The address was unqualified (no domain), and the message
10604 was neither local nor came from an exempted host.
10607 &"route"&: Routing failed.
10610 &"mail"&: Routing succeeded, and a callout was attempted; rejection occurred at
10611 or before the MAIL command (that is, on initial connection, HELO, or
10615 &"recipient"&: The RCPT command in a callout was rejected.
10618 &"postmaster"&: The postmaster check in a callout was rejected.
10621 The main use of this variable is expected to be to distinguish between
10622 rejections of MAIL and rejections of RCPT.
10624 .vitem &$recipients$&
10625 .cindex "&$recipients$&"
10626 This variable contains a list of envelope recipients for a
10627 message. A comma and a space separate the addresses in the replacement text.
10628 However, the variable is not generally available, to prevent exposure of Bcc
10629 recipients in unprivileged users' filter files. You can use &$recipients$& only
10630 in these two cases:
10633 In a system filter file.
10635 In the ACLs associated with the DATA command, that is, the ACLs defined by
10636 &%acl_smtp_predata%& and &%acl_smtp_data%&.
10640 .vitem &$recipients_count$&
10641 .cindex "&$recipients_count$&"
10642 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the number of
10643 envelope recipients that came with the message. Duplicates are not excluded
10644 from the count. While a message is being received over SMTP, the number
10645 increases for each accepted recipient. It can be referenced in an ACL.
10647 .vitem &$reply_address$&
10648 .cindex "&$reply_address$&"
10649 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the contents of the
10650 &'Reply-To:'& header line if one exists and it is not empty, or otherwise the
10651 contents of the &'From:'& header line.
10653 .vitem &$return_path$&
10654 .cindex "&$return_path$&"
10655 When a message is being delivered, this variable contains the return path &--
10656 the sender field that will be sent as part of the envelope. It is not enclosed
10657 in <> characters. At the start of routing an address, &$return_path$& has the
10658 same value as &$sender_address$&, but if, for example, an incoming message to a
10659 mailing list has been expanded by a router which specifies a different address
10660 for bounce messages, &$return_path$& subsequently contains the new bounce
10661 address, whereas &$sender_address$& always contains the original sender address
10662 that was received with the message. In other words, &$sender_address$& contains
10663 the incoming envelope sender, and &$return_path$& contains the outgoing
10666 .vitem &$return_size_limit$&
10667 .cindex "&$return_size_limit$&"
10668 This is an obsolete name for &$bounce_return_size_limit$&.
10671 .cindex "return code" "from &%run%& expansion"
10672 .cindex "&$runrc$&"
10673 This variable contains the return code from a command that is run by the
10674 &%${run...}%& expansion item. &*Warning*&: In a router or transport, you cannot
10675 assume the order in which option values are expanded, except for those
10676 preconditions whose order of testing is documented. Therefore, you cannot
10677 reliably expect to set &$runrc$& by the expansion of one option, and use it in
10680 .vitem &$self_hostname$&
10681 .cindex "&%self%& option" "value of host name"
10682 .cindex "&$self_hostname$&"
10683 When an address is routed to a supposedly remote host that turns out to be the
10684 local host, what happens is controlled by the &%self%& generic router option.
10685 One of its values causes the address to be passed to another router. When this
10686 happens, &$self_hostname$& is set to the name of the local host that the
10687 original router encountered. In other circumstances its contents are null.
10689 .vitem &$sender_address$&
10690 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
10691 When a message is being processed, this variable contains the sender's address
10692 that was received in the message's envelope. For bounce messages, the value of
10693 this variable is the empty string. See also &$return_path$&.
10695 .vitem &$sender_address_data$&
10696 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
10697 .cindex "&$sender_address_data$&"
10698 If &$address_data$& is set when the routers are called from an ACL to verify a
10699 sender address, the final value is preserved in &$sender_address_data$&, to
10700 distinguish it from data from a recipient address. The value does not persist
10701 after the end of the current ACL statement. If you want to preserve it for
10702 longer, you can save it in an ACL variable.
10704 .vitem &$sender_address_domain$&
10705 .cindex "&$sender_address_domain$&"
10706 The domain portion of &$sender_address$&.
10708 .vitem &$sender_address_local_part$&
10709 .cindex "&$sender_address_local_part$&"
10710 The local part portion of &$sender_address$&.
10712 .vitem &$sender_data$&
10713 .cindex "&$sender_data$&"
10714 This variable is set after a lookup success in an ACL &%senders%& condition or
10715 in a router &%senders%& option. It contains the data from the lookup, and the
10716 value remains set until the next &%senders%& test. Thus, you can do things like
10719 &`require senders = cdb*@;/some/file`&
10720 &`deny `&&'some further test involving'& &`$sender_data`&
10722 &*Warning*&: This variable is set only when a lookup is used as an indexing
10723 method in the address list, using the semicolon syntax as in the example above.
10724 The variable is not set for a lookup that is used as part of the string
10725 expansion that all such lists undergo before being interpreted.
10727 .vitem &$sender_fullhost$&
10728 .cindex "&$sender_fullhost$&"
10729 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the host
10730 name and IP address in a single string. It ends with the IP address in square
10731 brackets, followed by a colon and a port number if the logging of ports is
10732 enabled. The format of the rest of the string depends on whether the host
10733 issued a HELO or EHLO SMTP command, and whether the host name was verified by
10734 looking up its IP address. (Looking up the IP address can be forced by the
10735 &%host_lookup%& option, independent of verification.) A plain host name at the
10736 start of the string is a verified host name; if this is not present,
10737 verification either failed or was not requested. A host name in parentheses is
10738 the argument of a HELO or EHLO command. This is omitted if it is identical to
10739 the verified host name or to the host's IP address in square brackets.
10741 .vitem &$sender_helo_name$&
10742 .cindex "&$sender_hslo_name$&"
10743 When a message is received from a remote host that has issued a HELO or EHLO
10744 command, the argument of that command is placed in this variable. It is also
10745 set if HELO or EHLO is used when a message is received using SMTP locally via
10746 the &%-bs%& or &%-bS%& options.
10748 .vitem &$sender_host_address$&
10749 .cindex "&$sender_host_address$&"
10750 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains that
10751 host's IP address. For locally submitted messages, it is empty.
10753 .vitem &$sender_host_authenticated$&
10754 .cindex "&$sender_host_authenticated$&"
10755 This variable contains the name (not the public name) of the authenticator
10756 driver that successfully authenticated the client from which the message was
10757 received. It is empty if there was no successful authentication. See also
10758 &$authenticated_id$&.
10760 .vitem &$sender_host_name$&
10761 .cindex "&$sender_host_name$&"
10762 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the
10763 host's name as obtained by looking up its IP address. For messages received by
10764 other means, this variable is empty.
10766 .cindex "&$host_lookup_failed$&"
10767 If the host name has not previously been looked up, a reference to
10768 &$sender_host_name$& triggers a lookup (for messages from remote hosts).
10769 A looked up name is accepted only if it leads back to the original IP address
10770 via a forward lookup. If either the reverse or the forward lookup fails to find
10771 any data, or if the forward lookup does not yield the original IP address,
10772 &$sender_host_name$& remains empty, and &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&.
10774 .cindex "&$host_lookup_deferred$&"
10775 However, if either of the lookups cannot be completed (for example, there is a
10776 DNS timeout), &$host_lookup_deferred$& is set to &"1"&, and
10777 &$host_lookup_failed$& remains set to &"0"&.
10779 Once &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to &"1"&, Exim does not try to look up the
10780 host name again if there is a subsequent reference to &$sender_host_name$&
10781 in the same Exim process, but it does try again if &$sender_host_deferred$&
10784 Exim does not automatically look up every calling host's name. If you want
10785 maximum efficiency, you should arrange your configuration so that it avoids
10786 these lookups altogether. The lookup happens only if one or more of the
10787 following are true:
10790 A string containing &$sender_host_name$& is expanded.
10792 The calling host matches the list in &%host_lookup%&. In the default
10793 configuration, this option is set to *, so it must be changed if lookups are
10794 to be avoided. (In the code, the default for &%host_lookup%& is unset.)
10796 Exim needs the host name in order to test an item in a host list. The items
10797 that require this are described in sections &<<SECThoslispatnam>>& and
10798 &<<SECThoslispatnamsk>>&.
10800 The calling host matches &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& or &%helo_verify_hosts%&.
10801 In this case, the host name is required to compare with the name quoted in any
10802 EHLO or HELO commands that the client issues.
10804 The remote host issues a EHLO or HELO command that quotes one of the
10805 domains in &%helo_lookup_domains%&. The default value of this option is
10806 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
10807 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
10809 helo_lookup_domains = @ : @[]
10811 which causes a lookup if a remote host (incorrectly) gives the server's name or
10812 IP address in an EHLO or HELO command.
10816 .vitem &$sender_host_port$&
10817 .cindex "&$sender_host_port$&"
10818 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the port
10819 number that was used on the remote host.
10821 .vitem &$sender_ident$&
10822 .cindex "&$sender_ident$&"
10823 When a message is received from a remote host, this variable contains the
10824 identification received in response to an RFC 1413 request. When a message has
10825 been received locally, this variable contains the login name of the user that
10829 .vitem &$sender_rate_$&&'xxx'&
10830 A number of variables whose names begin &$sender_rate_$& are set as part of the
10831 &%ratelimit%& ACL condition. Details are given in section
10832 &<<SECTratelimiting>>&.
10835 .vitem &$sender_rcvhost$&
10836 .cindex "DNS" "reverse lookup"
10837 .cindex "reverse DNS lookup"
10838 .cindex "&$sender_rcvhost$&"
10839 This is provided specifically for use in &'Received:'& headers. It starts with
10840 either the verified host name (as obtained from a reverse DNS lookup) or, if
10841 there is no verified host name, the IP address in square brackets. After that
10842 there may be text in parentheses. When the first item is a verified host name,
10843 the first thing in the parentheses is the IP address in square brackets,
10844 followed by a colon and a port number if port logging is enabled. When the
10845 first item is an IP address, the port is recorded as &"port=&'xxxx'&"& inside
10848 There may also be items of the form &"helo=&'xxxx'&"& if HELO or EHLO
10849 was used and its argument was not identical to the real host name or IP
10850 address, and &"ident=&'xxxx'&"& if an RFC 1413 ident string is available. If
10851 all three items are present in the parentheses, a newline and tab are inserted
10852 into the string, to improve the formatting of the &'Received:'& header.
10854 .vitem &$sender_verify_failure$&
10855 .cindex "&$sender_verify_failure$&"
10856 In an ACL, when a sender verification fails, this variable contains information
10857 about the failure. The details are the same as for
10858 &$recipient_verify_failure$&.
10860 .vitem &$smtp_active_hostname$&
10861 .cindex "&$smtp_active_hostname$&"
10862 During an SMTP session, this variable contains the value of the active host
10863 name, as specified by the &%smtp_active_hostname%& option. The value of
10864 &$smtp_active_hostname$& is saved with any message that is received, so its
10865 value can be consulted during routing and delivery.
10868 .vitem &$smtp_command$&
10869 .cindex "&$smtp_command$&"
10870 During the processing of an incoming SMTP command, this variable contains the
10871 entire command. This makes it possible to distinguish between HELO and EHLO in
10872 the HELO ACL, and also to distinguish between commands such as these:
10877 For a MAIL command, extra parameters such as SIZE can be inspected. For a RCPT
10878 command, the address in &$smtp_command$& is the original address before any
10879 rewriting, whereas the values in &$local_part$& and &$domain$& are taken from
10880 the address after SMTP-time rewriting.
10883 .vitem &$smtp_command_argument$&
10885 .cindex "SMTP command" "argument for"
10886 .cindex "&$smtp_command_argument$&"
10887 While an ACL is running to check an SMTP command, this variable contains the
10888 argument, that is, the text that follows the command name, with leading white
10889 space removed. Following the introduction of &$smtp_command$&, this variable is
10890 somewhat redundant, but is retained for backwards compatibility.
10893 .vitem "&$sn0$& &-- &$sn9$&"
10894 These variables are copies of the values of the &$n0$& &-- &$n9$& accumulators
10895 that were current at the end of the system filter file. This allows a system
10896 filter file to set values that can be tested in users' filter files. For
10897 example, a system filter could set a value indicating how likely it is that a
10898 message is junk mail.
10900 .vitem &$spam_$&&'xxx'&
10901 A number of variables whose names start with &$spam$& are available when Exim
10902 is compiled with the content-scanning extension. For details, see section
10903 &<<SECTscanspamass>>&.
10906 .vitem &$spool_directory$&
10907 .cindex "&$spool_directory$&"
10908 The name of Exim's spool directory.
10910 .vitem &$spool_inodes$&
10911 .cindex "&$spool_inodes$&"
10912 The number of free inodes in the disk partition where Exim's spool files are
10913 being written. The value is recalculated whenever the variable is referenced.
10914 If the relevant file system does not have the concept of inodes, the value of
10915 is -1. See also the &%check_spool_inodes%& option.
10917 .vitem &$spool_space$&
10918 .cindex "&$spool_space$&"
10919 The amount of free space (as a number of kilobytes) in the disk partition where
10920 Exim's spool files are being written. The value is recalculated whenever the
10921 variable is referenced. If the operating system does not have the ability to
10922 find the amount of free space (only true for experimental systems), the space
10923 value is -1. For example, to check in an ACL that there is at least 50
10924 megabytes free on the spool, you could write:
10926 condition = ${if > {$spool_space}{50000}}
10928 See also the &%check_spool_space%& option.
10931 .vitem &$thisaddress$&
10932 .cindex "&$thisaddress$&"
10933 This variable is set only during the processing of the &%foranyaddress%&
10934 command in a filter file. Its use is explained in the description of that
10935 command, which can be found in the separate document entitled &'Exim's
10936 interfaces to mail filtering'&.
10938 .vitem &$tls_certificate_verified$&
10939 .cindex "&$tls_certificate_verified$&"
10940 This variable is set to &"1"& if a TLS certificate was verified when the
10941 message was received, and &"0"& otherwise.
10943 .vitem &$tls_cipher$&
10944 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
10945 When a message is received from a remote host over an encrypted SMTP
10946 connection, this variable is set to the cipher suite that was negotiated, for
10947 example DES-CBC3-SHA. In other circumstances, in particular, for message
10948 received over unencrypted connections, the variable is empty. See chapter
10949 &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS support.
10951 .vitem &$tls_peerdn$&
10952 .cindex "&$tls_peerdn$&"
10953 When a message is received from a remote host over an encrypted SMTP
10954 connection, and Exim is configured to request a certificate from the client,
10955 the value of the Distinguished Name of the certificate is made available in the
10956 &$tls_peerdn$& during subsequent processing.
10958 .vitem &$tod_bsdinbox$&
10959 .cindex "&$tod_bsdinbox$&"
10960 The time of day and the date, in the format required for BSD-style mailbox
10961 files, for example: Thu Oct 17 17:14:09 1995.
10963 .vitem &$tod_epoch$&
10964 .cindex "&$tod_epoch$&"
10965 The time and date as a number of seconds since the start of the Unix epoch.
10967 .vitem &$tod_full$&
10968 .cindex "&$tod_full$&"
10969 A full version of the time and date, for example: Wed, 16 Oct 1995 09:51:40
10970 +0100. The timezone is always given as a numerical offset from UTC, with
10971 positive values used for timezones that are ahead (east) of UTC, and negative
10972 values for those that are behind (west).
10975 .cindex "&$tod_log$&"
10976 The time and date in the format used for writing Exim's log files, for example:
10977 1995-10-12 15:32:29, but without a timezone.
10979 .vitem &$tod_logfile$&
10980 .cindex "&$tod_logfile$&"
10981 This variable contains the date in the format yyyymmdd. This is the format that
10982 is used for datestamping log files when &%log_file_path%& contains the &`%D`&
10985 .vitem &$tod_zone$&
10986 .cindex "&$tod_zone$&"
10987 This variable contains the numerical value of the local timezone, for example:
10990 .vitem &$tod_zulu$&
10991 .cindex "&$tod_zulu$&"
10992 This variable contains the UTC date and time in &"Zulu"& format, as specified
10993 by ISO 8601, for example: 20030221154023Z.
10996 .cindex "&$value$&"
10997 This variable contains the result of an expansion lookup, extraction operation,
10998 or external command, as described above.
11000 .vitem &$version_number$&
11001 .cindex "&$version_number$&"
11002 The version number of Exim.
11004 .vitem &$warn_message_delay$&
11005 .cindex "&$warn_message_delay$&"
11006 This variable is set only during the creation of a message warning about a
11007 delivery delay. Details of its use are explained in section &<<SECTcustwarn>>&.
11009 .vitem &$warn_message_recipients$&
11010 .cindex "&$warn_message_recipients$&"
11011 This variable is set only during the creation of a message warning about a
11012 delivery delay. Details of its use are explained in section &<<SECTcustwarn>>&.
11017 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11018 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11020 .chapter "Embedded Perl" "CHAPperl"
11021 .cindex "Perl" "calling from Exim"
11022 Exim can be built to include an embedded Perl interpreter. When this is done,
11023 Perl subroutines can be called as part of the string expansion process. To make
11024 use of the Perl support, you need version 5.004 or later of Perl installed on
11025 your system. To include the embedded interpreter in the Exim binary, include
11030 in your &_Local/Makefile_& and then build Exim in the normal way.
11033 .section "Setting up so Perl can be used"
11034 .cindex "&%perl_startup%&"
11035 Access to Perl subroutines is via a global configuration option called
11036 &%perl_startup%& and an expansion string operator &%${perl ...}%&. If there is
11037 no &%perl_startup%& option in the Exim configuration file then no Perl
11038 interpreter is started and there is almost no overhead for Exim (since none of
11039 the Perl library will be paged in unless used). If there is a &%perl_startup%&
11040 option then the associated value is taken to be Perl code which is executed in
11041 a newly created Perl interpreter.
11043 The value of &%perl_startup%& is not expanded in the Exim sense, so you do not
11044 need backslashes before any characters to escape special meanings. The option
11045 should usually be something like
11047 perl_startup = do '/etc/exim.pl'
11049 where &_/etc/exim.pl_& is Perl code which defines any subroutines you want to
11050 use from Exim. Exim can be configured either to start up a Perl interpreter as
11051 soon as it is entered, or to wait until the first time it is needed. Starting
11052 the interpreter at the beginning ensures that it is done while Exim still has
11053 its setuid privilege, but can impose an unnecessary overhead if Perl is not in
11054 fact used in a particular run. Also, note that this does not mean that Exim is
11055 necessarily running as root when Perl is called at a later time. By default,
11056 the interpreter is started only when it is needed, but this can be changed in
11060 .cindex "&%perl_at_start%&"
11061 Setting &%perl_at_start%& (a boolean option) in the configuration requests
11062 a startup when Exim is entered.
11064 The command line option &%-ps%& also requests a startup when Exim is entered,
11065 overriding the setting of &%perl_at_start%&.
11068 There is also a command line option &%-pd%& (for delay) which suppresses the
11069 initial startup, even if &%perl_at_start%& is set.
11072 .section "Calling Perl subroutines"
11073 When the configuration file includes a &%perl_startup%& option you can make use
11074 of the string expansion item to call the Perl subroutines that are defined
11075 by the &%perl_startup%& code. The operator is used in any of the following
11079 ${perl{foo}{argument}}
11080 ${perl{foo}{argument1}{argument2} ... }
11082 which calls the subroutine &%foo%& with the given arguments. A maximum of eight
11083 arguments may be passed. Passing more than this results in an expansion failure
11084 with an error message of the form
11086 Too many arguments passed to Perl subroutine "foo" (max is 8)
11088 The return value of the Perl subroutine is evaluated in a scalar context before
11089 it is passed back to Exim to be inserted into the expanded string. If the
11090 return value is &'undef'&, the expansion is forced to fail in the same way as
11091 an explicit &"fail"& on an &%if%& or &%lookup%& item. If the subroutine aborts
11092 by obeying Perl's &%die%& function, the expansion fails with the error message
11093 that was passed to &%die%&.
11096 .section "Calling Exim functions from Perl"
11097 Within any Perl code called from Exim, the function &'Exim::expand_string()'&
11098 is available to call back into Exim's string expansion function. For example,
11101 my $lp = Exim::expand_string('$local_part');
11103 makes the current Exim &$local_part$& available in the Perl variable &$lp$&.
11104 Note those are single quotes and not double quotes to protect against
11105 &$local_part$& being interpolated as a Perl variable.
11107 If the string expansion is forced to fail by a &"fail"& item, the result of
11108 &'Exim::expand_string()'& is &%undef%&. If there is a syntax error in the
11109 expansion string, the Perl call from the original expansion string fails with
11110 an appropriate error message, in the same way as if &%die%& were used.
11112 .cindex "debugging" "from embedded Perl"
11113 .cindex "log" "writing from embedded Perl"
11114 Two other Exim functions are available for use from within Perl code.
11115 &'Exim::debug_write()'& writes a string to the standard error stream if Exim's
11116 debugging is enabled. If you want a newline at the end, you must supply it.
11117 &'Exim::log_write()'& writes a string to Exim's main log, adding a leading
11118 timestamp. In this case, you should not supply a terminating newline.
11121 .section "Use of standard output and error by Perl"
11122 .cindex "Perl" "standard output and error"
11123 You should not write to the standard error or output streams from within your
11124 Perl code, as it is not defined how these are set up. In versions of Exim
11125 before 4.50, it is possible for the standard output or error to refer to the
11126 SMTP connection during message reception via the daemon. Writing to this stream
11127 is certain to cause chaos. From Exim 4.50 onwards, the standard output and
11128 error streams are connected to &_/dev/null_& in the daemon. The chaos is
11129 avoided, but the output is lost.
11131 .cindex "Perl" "use of &%warn%&"
11132 The Perl &%warn%& statement writes to the standard error stream by default.
11133 Calls to &%warn%& may be embedded in Perl modules that you use, but over which
11134 you have no control. When Exim starts up the Perl interpreter, it arranges for
11135 output from the &%warn%& statement to be written to the Exim main log. You can
11136 change this by including appropriate Perl magic somewhere in your Perl code.
11137 For example, to discard &%warn%& output completely, you need this:
11139 $SIG{__WARN__} = sub { };
11141 Whenever a &%warn%& is obeyed, the anonymous subroutine is called. In this
11142 example, the code for the subroutine is empty, so it does nothing, but you can
11143 include any Perl code that you like. The text of the &%warn%& message is passed
11144 as the first subroutine argument.
11148 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11149 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11151 .chapter "Starting the daemon and the use of network interfaces" &&&
11152 "CHAPinterfaces" &&&
11153 "Starting the daemon"
11154 .cindex "daemon" "starting"
11155 .cindex "interface" "listening"
11156 .cindex "network interface"
11157 .cindex "interface" "network"
11158 .cindex "IP address" "for listening"
11159 .cindex "daemon" "listening IP addresses"
11160 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening interfaces"
11161 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening ports"
11162 A host that is connected to a TCP/IP network may have one or more physical
11163 hardware network interfaces. Each of these interfaces may be configured as one
11164 or more &"logical"& interfaces, which are the entities that a program actually
11165 works with. Each of these logical interfaces is associated with an IP address.
11166 In addition, TCP/IP software supports &"loopback"& interfaces (127.0.0.1 in
11167 IPv4 and ::1 in IPv6), which do not use any physical hardware. Exim requires
11168 knowledge about the host's interfaces for use in three different circumstances:
11171 When a listening daemon is started, Exim needs to know which interfaces
11172 and ports to listen on.
11174 When Exim is routing an address, it needs to know which IP addresses
11175 are associated with local interfaces. This is required for the correct
11176 processing of MX lists by removing the local host and others with the
11177 same or higher priority values. Also, Exim needs to detect cases
11178 when an address is routed to an IP address that in fact belongs to the
11179 local host. Unless the &%self%& router option or the &%allow_localhost%&
11180 option of the smtp transport is set (as appropriate), this is treated
11181 as an error situation.
11183 When Exim connects to a remote host, it may need to know which interface to use
11184 for the outgoing connection.
11188 Exim's default behaviour is likely to be appropriate in the vast majority
11189 of cases. If your host has only one interface, and you want all its IP
11190 addresses to be treated in the same way, and you are using only the
11191 standard SMTP port, you should not need to take any special action. The
11192 rest of this chapter does not apply to you.
11194 In a more complicated situation you may want to listen only on certain
11195 interfaces, or on different ports, and for this reason there are a number of
11196 options that can be used to influence Exim's behaviour. The rest of this
11197 chapter describes how they operate.
11199 When a message is received over TCP/IP, the interface and port that were
11200 actually used are set in &$interface_address$& and &$interface_port$&.
11204 .section "Starting a listening daemon"
11205 When a listening daemon is started (by means of the &%-bd%& command line
11206 option), the interfaces and ports on which it listens are controlled by the
11210 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& contains a list of default ports. (For backward
11211 compatibility, this option can also be specified in the singular.)
11213 &%local_interfaces%& contains list of interface IP addresses on which to
11214 listen. Each item may optionally also specify a port.
11217 The default list separator in both cases is a colon, but this can be changed as
11218 described in section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&. When IPv6 addresses are involved,
11219 it is usually best to change the separator to avoid having to double all the
11220 colons. For example:
11222 local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; \
11225 3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061
11227 There are two different formats for specifying a port along with an IP address
11228 in &%local_interfaces%&:
11231 The port is added onto the address with a dot separator. For example, to listen
11232 on port 1234 on two different IP addresses:
11234 local_interfaces = <; 192.168.23.65.1234 ; \
11235 3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061.1234
11238 The IP address is enclosed in square brackets, and the port is added
11239 with a colon separator, for example:
11241 local_interfaces = <; [192.168.23.65]:1234 ; \
11242 [3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061]:1234
11246 When a port is not specified, the value of &%daemon_smtp_ports%& is used. The
11247 default setting contains just one port:
11249 daemon_smtp_ports = smtp
11251 If more than one port is listed, each interface that does not have its own port
11252 specified listens on all of them. Ports that are listed in
11253 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& can be identified either by name (defined in
11254 &_/etc/services_&) or by number. However, when ports are given with individual
11255 IP addresses in &%local_interfaces%&, only numbers (not names) can be used.
11259 .section "Special IP listening addresses"
11260 The addresses 0.0.0.0 and ::0 are treated specially. They are interpreted
11261 as &"all IPv4 interfaces"& and &"all IPv6 interfaces"&, respectively. In each
11262 case, Exim tells the TCP/IP stack to &"listen on all IPv&'x'& interfaces"&
11263 instead of setting up separate listening sockets for each interface. The
11264 default value of &%local_interfaces%& is
11266 local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0
11268 when Exim is built without IPv6 support; otherwise it is:
11270 local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
11272 Thus, by default, Exim listens on all available interfaces, on the SMTP port.
11276 .section "Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports"
11277 The &%-oX%& command line option can be used to override the values of
11278 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& and/or &%local_interfaces%& for a particular daemon
11279 instance. Another way of doing this would be to use macros and the &%-D%&
11280 option. However, &%-oX%& can be used by any admin user, whereas modification of
11281 the runtime configuration by &%-D%& is allowed only when the caller is root or
11284 The value of &%-oX%& is a list of items. The default colon separator can be
11285 changed in the usual way if required. If there are any items that do not
11286 contain dots or colons (that is, are not IP addresses), the value of
11287 &%daemon_smtp_ports%& is replaced by the list of those items. If there are any
11288 items that do contain dots or colons, the value of &%local_interfaces%& is
11289 replaced by those items. Thus, for example,
11293 overrides &%daemon_smtp_ports%&, but leaves &%local_interfaces%& unchanged,
11296 -oX 192.168.34.5.1125
11298 overrides &%local_interfaces%&, leaving &%daemon_smtp_ports%& unchanged.
11299 (However, since &%local_interfaces%& now contains no items without ports, the
11300 value of &%daemon_smtp_ports%& is no longer relevant in this example.)
11304 .section "Support for the obsolete SSMTP (or SMTPS) protocol" "SECTsupobssmt"
11305 .cindex "ssmtp protocol"
11306 .cindex "smtps protocol"
11307 .cindex "SMTP" "ssmtp protocol"
11308 .cindex "SMTP" "smtps protocol"
11309 Exim supports the obsolete SSMTP protocol (also known as SMTPS) that was used
11310 before the STARTTLS command was standardized for SMTP. Some legacy clients
11311 still use this protocol. If the &%tls_on_connect_ports%& option is set to a
11312 list of port numbers, connections to those ports must use SSMTP. The most
11313 common use of this option is expected to be
11315 tls_on_connect_ports = 465
11317 because 465 is the usual port number used by the legacy clients. There is also
11318 a command line option &%-tls-on-connect%&, which forces all ports to behave in
11319 this way when a daemon is started.
11321 &*Warning*&: Setting &%tls_on_connect_ports%& does not of itself cause the
11322 daemon to listen on those ports. You must still specify them in
11323 &%daemon_smtp_ports%&, &%local_interfaces%&, or the &%-oX%& option. (This is
11324 because &%tls_on_connect_ports%& applies to &%inetd%& connections as well as to
11325 connections via the daemon.)
11330 .section "IPv6 address scopes"
11331 IPv6 addresses have &"scopes"&, and a host with multiple hardware interfaces
11332 can, in principle, have the same link-local IPv6 address on different
11333 interfaces. Thus, additional information is needed, over and above the IP
11334 address, to distinguish individual interfaces. A convention of using a
11335 percent sign followed by something (often the interface name) has been
11336 adopted in some cases, leading to addresses like this:
11338 fe80::202:b3ff:fe03:45c1%eth0
11340 To accommodate this usage, a percent sign followed by an arbitrary string is
11341 allowed at the end of an IPv6 address. By default, Exim calls &[getaddrinfo()]&
11342 to convert a textual IPv6 address for actual use. This function recognizes the
11343 percent convention in operating systems that support it, and it processes the
11344 address appropriately. Unfortunately, some older libraries have problems with
11345 &[getaddrinfo()]&. If
11347 IPV6_USE_INET_PTON=yes
11349 is set in &_Local/Makefile_& (or an OS-dependent Makefile) when Exim is built,
11350 Exim uses &'inet_pton()'& to convert a textual IPv6 address for actual use,
11351 instead of &[getaddrinfo()]&. (Before version 4.14, it always used this
11352 function.) Of course, this means that the additional functionality of
11353 &[getaddrinfo()]& &-- recognizing scoped addresses &-- is lost.
11357 .section "Examples of starting a listening daemon"
11358 The default case in an IPv6 environment is
11360 daemon_smtp_ports = smtp
11361 local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
11363 This specifies listening on the smtp port on all IPv6 and IPv4 interfaces.
11364 Either one or two sockets may be used, depending on the characteristics of
11365 the TCP/IP stack. (This is complicated and messy; for more information,
11366 read the comments in the &_daemon.c_& source file.)
11368 To specify listening on ports 25 and 26 on all interfaces:
11370 daemon_smtp_ports = 25 : 26
11372 (leaving &%local_interfaces%& at the default setting) or, more explicitly:
11374 local_interfaces = <; ::0.25 ; ::0.26 \
11375 0.0.0.0.25 ; 0.0.0.0.26
11377 To listen on the default port on all IPv4 interfaces, and on port 26 on the
11378 IPv4 loopback address only:
11380 local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0 : 127.0.0.1.26
11382 To specify listening on the default port on specific interfaces only:
11384 local_interfaces = 192.168.34.67 : 192.168.34.67
11386 &*Warning*&: Such a setting excludes listening on the loopback interfaces.
11390 .section "Recognising the local host" "SECTreclocipadd"
11391 The &%local_interfaces%& option is also used when Exim needs to determine
11392 whether or not an IP address refers to the local host. That is, the IP
11393 addresses of all the interfaces on which a daemon is listening are always
11396 For this usage, port numbers in &%local_interfaces%& are ignored. If either of
11397 the items 0.0.0.0 or ::0 are encountered, Exim gets a complete list of
11398 available interfaces from the operating system, and extracts the relevant
11399 (that is, IPv4 or IPv6) addresses to use for checking.
11401 Some systems set up large numbers of virtual interfaces in order to provide
11402 many virtual web servers. In this situation, you may want to listen for
11403 email on only a few of the available interfaces, but nevertheless treat all
11404 interfaces as local when routing. You can do this by setting
11405 &%extra_local_interfaces%& to a list of IP addresses, possibly including the
11406 &"all"& wildcard values. These addresses are recognized as local, but are not
11407 used for listening. Consider this example:
11409 local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1 ; \
11411 3ffe:2101:12:1:a00:20ff:fe86:a061
11413 extra_local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
11415 The daemon listens on the loopback interfaces and just one IPv4 and one IPv6
11416 address, but all available interface addresses are treated as local when
11419 In some environments the local host name may be in an MX list, but with an IP
11420 address that is not assigned to any local interface. In other cases it may be
11421 desirable to treat other host names as if they referred to the local host. Both
11422 these cases can be handled by setting the &%hosts_treat_as_local%& option.
11423 This contains host names rather than IP addresses. When a host is referenced
11424 during routing, either via an MX record or directly, it is treated as the local
11425 host if its name matches &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, or if any of its IP
11426 addresses match &%local_interfaces%& or &%extra_local_interfaces%&.
11430 .section "Delivering to a remote host"
11431 Delivery to a remote host is handled by the smtp transport. By default, it
11432 allows the system's TCP/IP functions to choose which interface to use (if
11433 there is more than one) when connecting to a remote host. However, the
11434 &%interface%& option can be set to specify which interface is used. See the
11435 description of the smtp transport in chapter &<<CHAPsmtptrans>>& for more
11441 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11442 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
11444 .chapter "Main configuration" "CHAPmainconfig"
11445 .cindex "configuration file" "main section"
11446 .cindex "main configuration"
11447 The first part of the run time configuration file contains three types of item:
11450 Macro definitions: These lines start with an upper case letter. See section
11451 &<<SECTmacrodefs>>& for details of macro processing.
11453 Named list definitions: These lines start with one of the words &"domainlist"&,
11454 &"hostlist"&, &"addresslist"&, or &"localpartlist"&. Their use is described in
11455 section &<<SECTnamedlists>>&.
11457 Main configuration settings: Each setting occupies one line of the file
11458 (with possible continuations). If any setting is preceded by the word
11459 &"hide"&, the &%-bP%& command line option displays its value to admin users
11460 only. See section &<<SECTcos>>& for a description of the syntax of these option
11464 This chapter specifies all the main configuration options, along with their
11465 types and default values. For ease of finding a particular option, they appear
11466 in alphabetical order in section &<<SECTalomo>>& below. However, because there
11467 are now so many options, they are first listed briefly in functional groups, as
11468 an aid to finding the name of the option you are looking for. Some options are
11469 listed in more than one group.
11471 .section "Miscellaneous"
11473 .row &%bi_command%& "to run for &%-bi%& command line option"
11474 .row &%keep_malformed%& "for broken files &-- should not happen"
11475 .row &%localhost_number%& "for unique message ids in clusters"
11476 .row &%message_body_visible%& "how much to show in &$message_body$&"
11477 .row &%mua_wrapper%& "run in &""MUA wrapper""& mode"
11478 .row &%print_topbitchars%& "top-bit characters are printing"
11479 .row &%timezone%& "force time zone"
11483 .section "Exim parameters"
11485 .row &%exim_group%& "override compiled-in value"
11486 .row &%exim_path%& "override compiled-in value"
11487 .row &%exim_user%& "override compiled-in value"
11488 .row &%primary_hostname%& "default from &[uname()]&"
11489 .row &%split_spool_directory%& "use multiple directories"
11490 .row &%spool_directory%& "override compiled-in value"
11495 .section "Privilege controls"
11497 .row &%admin_groups%& "groups that are Exim admin users"
11498 .row &%deliver_drop_privilege%& "drop root for delivery processes"
11499 .row &%local_from_check%& "insert &'Sender:'& if necessary"
11500 .row &%local_from_prefix%& "for testing &'From:'& for local sender"
11501 .row &%local_from_suffix%& "for testing &'From:'& for local sender"
11502 .row &%local_sender_retain%& "keep &'Sender:'& from untrusted user"
11503 .row &%never_users%& "do not run deliveries as these"
11504 .row &%prod_requires_admin%& "forced delivery requires admin user"
11505 .row &%queue_list_requires_admin%& "queue listing requires admin user"
11506 .row &%trusted_groups%& "groups that are trusted"
11507 .row &%trusted_users%& "users that are trusted"
11514 .row &%hosts_connection_nolog%& "exemption from connect logging"
11515 .row &%log_file_path%& "override compiled-in value"
11516 .row &%log_selector%& "set/unset optional logging"
11517 .row &%log_timezone%& "add timezone to log lines"
11518 .row &%message_logs%& "create per-message logs"
11519 .row &%preserve_message_logs%& "after message completion"
11520 .row &%process_log_path%& "for SIGUSR1 and &'exiwhat'&"
11521 .row &%syslog_duplication%& "controls duplicate log lines on syslog"
11522 .row &%syslog_facility%& "set syslog &""facility""& field"
11523 .row &%syslog_processname%& "set syslog &""ident""& field"
11524 .row &%syslog_timestamp%& "timestamp syslog lines"
11525 .row &%write_rejectlog%& "control use of message log"
11530 .section "Frozen messages"
11532 .row &%auto_thaw%& "sets time for retrying frozen messages"
11533 .row &%freeze_tell%& "send message when freezing"
11534 .row &%move_frozen_messages%& "to another directory"
11535 .row &%timeout_frozen_after%& "keep frozen messages only so long"
11540 .section "Data lookups"
11542 .row &%ldap_default_servers%& "used if no server in query"
11543 .row &%ldap_version%& "set protocol version"
11544 .row &%lookup_open_max%& "lookup files held open"
11545 .row &%mysql_servers%& "as it says"
11546 .row &%oracle_servers%& "as it says"
11547 .row &%pgsql_servers%& "as it says"
11548 .row &%sqlite_lock_timeout%& "as it says"
11553 .section "Message ids"
11555 .row &%message_id_header_domain%& "used to build &'Message-ID:'& header"
11556 .row &%message_id_header_text%& "ditto"
11561 .section "Embedded Perl Startup"
11563 .row &%perl_at_start%& "always start the interpreter"
11564 .row &%perl_startup%& "code to obey when starting Perl"
11571 .row &%daemon_smtp_ports%& "default ports"
11572 .row &%daemon_startup_retries%& "number of times to retry"
11573 .row &%daemon_startup_sleep%& "time to sleep between tries"
11574 .row &%extra_local_interfaces%& "not necessarily listened on"
11575 .row &%local_interfaces%& "on which to listen, with optional ports"
11576 .row &%pid_file_path%& "override compiled-in value"
11577 .row &%queue_run_max%& "maximum simultaneous queue runners"
11582 .section "Resource control"
11584 .row &%check_log_inodes%& "before accepting a message"
11585 .row &%check_log_space%& "before accepting a message"
11586 .row &%check_spool_inodes%& "before accepting a message"
11587 .row &%check_spool_space%& "before accepting a message"
11588 .row &%deliver_queue_load_max%& "no queue deliveries if load high"
11589 .row &%queue_only_load%& "queue incoming if load high"
11590 .row &%queue_run_max%& "maximum simultaneous queue runners"
11591 .row &%remote_max_parallel%& "parallel SMTP delivery per message"
11592 .row &%smtp_accept_max%& "simultaneous incoming connections"
11593 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nommail%& "non-mail commands"
11594 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%& "hosts to which the limit applies"
11595 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_connection%& "messages per connection"
11596 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& "connections from one host"
11597 .row &%smtp_accept_queue%& "queue mail if more connections"
11598 .row &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& "queue if more messages per &&&
11600 .row &%smtp_accept_reserve%& "only reserve hosts if more connections"
11601 .row &%smtp_check_spool_space%& "from SIZE on MAIL command"
11602 .row &%smtp_connect_backlog%& "passed to TCP/IP stack"
11603 .row &%smtp_load_reserve%& "SMTP from reserved hosts if load high"
11604 .row &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& "these are the reserve hosts"
11609 .section "Policy controls"
11611 .row &%acl_not_smtp%& "ACL for non-SMTP messages"
11612 .row &%acl_not_smtp_mime%& "ACL for non-SMTP MIME parts"
11613 .row &%acl_smtp_auth%& "ACL for AUTH"
11614 .row &%acl_smtp_connect%& "ACL for connection"
11615 .row &%acl_smtp_data%& "ACL for DATA"
11616 .row &%acl_smtp_etrn%& "ACL for ETRN"
11617 .row &%acl_smtp_expn%& "ACL for EXPN"
11618 .row &%acl_smtp_helo%& "ACL for EHLO or HELO"
11619 .row &%acl_smtp_mail%& "ACL for MAIL"
11620 .row &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& "ACL for AUTH on MAIL command"
11621 .row &%acl_smtp_mime%& "ACL for MIME parts"
11622 .row &%acl_smtp_predata%& "ACL for start of data"
11623 .row &%acl_smtp_quit%& "ACL for QUIT"
11624 .row &%acl_smtp_rcpt%& "ACL for RCPT"
11625 .row &%acl_smtp_starttls%& "ACL for STARTTLS"
11626 .row &%acl_smtp_vrfy%& "ACL for VRFY"
11627 .row &%av_scanner%& "specify virus scanner"
11628 .row &%check_rfc2047_length%& "check length of RFC 2047 &""encoded &&&
11630 .row &%dns_csa_search_limit%& "control CSA parent search depth"
11631 .row &%dns_csa_use_reverse%& "en/disable CSA IP reverse search"
11632 .row &%header_maxsize%& "total size of message header"
11633 .row &%header_line_maxsize%& "individual header line limit"
11634 .row &%helo_accept_junk_hosts%& "allow syntactic junk from these hosts"
11635 .row &%helo_allow_chars%& "allow illegal chars in HELO names"
11636 .row &%helo_lookup_domains%& "lookup hostname for these HELO names"
11637 .row &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& "HELO soft-checked for these hosts"
11638 .row &%helo_verify_hosts%& "HELO hard-checked for these hosts"
11639 .row &%host_lookup%& "host name looked up for these hosts"
11640 .row &%host_lookup_order%& "order of DNS and local name lookups"
11641 .row &%host_reject_connection%& "reject connection from these hosts"
11642 .row &%hosts_treat_as_local%& "useful in some cluster configurations"
11643 .row &%local_scan_timeout%& "timeout for &[local_scan()]&"
11644 .row &%message_size_limit%& "for all messages"
11645 .row &%percent_hack_domains%& "recognize %-hack for these domains"
11646 .row &%spamd_address%& "set interface to SpamAssassin"
11651 .section "Callout cache"
11653 .row &%callout_domain_negative_expire%& "timeout for negative domain cache &&&
11655 .row &%callout_domain_positive_expire%& "timeout for positive domain cache &&&
11657 .row &%callout_negative_expire%& "timeout for negative address cache item"
11658 .row &%callout_positive_expire%& "timeout for positive address cache item"
11659 .row &%callout_random_local_part%& "string to use for &""random""& testing"
11666 .row &%tls_advertise_hosts%& "advertise TLS to these hosts"
11667 .row &%tls_certificate%& "location of server certificate"
11668 .row &%tls_crl%& "certificate revocation list"
11669 .row &%tls_dhparam%& "DH parameters for server"
11670 .row &%tls_on_connect_ports%& "specify SSMTP (SMTPS) ports"
11671 .row &%tls_privatekey%& "location of server private key"
11672 .row &%tls_remember_esmtp%& "don't reset after starting TLS"
11673 .row &%tls_require_ciphers%& "specify acceptable cipers"
11674 .row &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& "try to verify client certificate"
11675 .row &%tls_verify_certificates%& "expected client certificates"
11676 .row &%tls_verify_hosts%& "insist on client certificate verify"
11681 .section "Local user handling"
11683 .row &%finduser_retries%& "useful in NIS environments"
11684 .row &%gecos_name%& "used when creating &'Sender:'&"
11685 .row &%gecos_pattern%& "ditto"
11686 .row &%max_username_length%& "for systems that truncate"
11687 .row &%unknown_login%& "used when no login name found"
11688 .row &%unknown_username%& "ditto"
11689 .row &%uucp_from_pattern%& "for recognizing &""From ""& lines"
11690 .row &%uucp_from_sender%& "ditto"
11695 .section "All incoming messages (SMTP and non-SMTP)"
11697 .row &%header_maxsize%& "total size of message header"
11698 .row &%header_line_maxsize%& "individual header line limit"
11699 .row &%message_size_limit%& "applies to all messages"
11700 .row &%percent_hack_domains%& "recognize %-hack for these domains"
11701 .row &%received_header_text%& "expanded to make &'Received:'&"
11702 .row &%received_headers_max%& "for mail loop detection"
11703 .row &%recipients_max%& "limit per message"
11704 .row &%recipients_max_reject%& "permanently reject excess"
11710 .section "Non-SMTP incoming messages"
11712 .row &%receive_timeout%& "for non-SMTP messages"
11719 .section "Incoming SMTP messages"
11720 See also the &'Policy controls'& section above.
11723 .row &%host_lookup%& "host name looked up for these hosts"
11724 .row &%host_lookup_order%& "order of DNS and local name lookups"
11725 .row &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%& "may send unqualified recipients"
11726 .row &%rfc1413_hosts%& "make ident calls to these hosts"
11727 .row &%rfc1413_query_timeout%& "zero disables ident calls"
11728 .row &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& "may send unqualified senders"
11729 .row &%smtp_accept_keepalive%& "some TCP/IP magic"
11730 .row &%smtp_accept_max%& "simultaneous incoming connections"
11731 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%& "non-mail commands"
11732 .row &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%& "hosts to which the limit applies"
11733 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_connection%& "messages per connection"
11734 .row &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& "connections from one host"
11735 .row &%smtp_accept_queue%& "queue mail if more connections"
11736 .row &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& "queue if more messages per &&&
11738 .row &%smtp_accept_reserve%& "only reserve hosts if more connections"
11739 .row &%smtp_active_hostname%& "host name to use in messages"
11740 .row &%smtp_banner%& "text for welcome banner"
11741 .row &%smtp_check_spool_space%& "from SIZE on MAIL command"
11742 .row &%smtp_connect_backlog%& "passed to TCP/IP stack"
11743 .row &%smtp_enforce_sync%& "of SMTP command/responses"
11744 .row &%smtp_etrn_command%& "what to run for ETRN"
11745 .row &%smtp_etrn_serialize%& "only one at once"
11746 .row &%smtp_load_reserve%& "only reserve hosts if this load"
11747 .row &%smtp_max_unknown_commands%& "before dropping connection"
11748 .row &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& "apply ratelimiting to these hosts"
11749 .row &%smtp_ratelimit_mail%& "ratelimit for MAIL commands"
11750 .row &%smtp_ratelimit_rcpt%& "ratelimit for RCPT commands"
11751 .row &%smtp_receive_timeout%& "per command or data line"
11752 .row &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& "these are the reserve hosts"
11753 .row &%smtp_return_error_details%& "give detail on rejections"
11758 .section "SMTP extensions"
11760 .row &%accept_8bitmime%& "advertise 8BITMIME"
11761 .row &%auth_advertise_hosts%& "advertise AUTH to these hosts"
11762 .row &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& "allow &""From ""& from these hosts"
11763 .row &%ignore_fromline_local%& "allow &""From ""& from local SMTP"
11764 .row &%pipelining_advertise_hosts%& "advertise pipelining to these hosts"
11765 .row &%tls_advertise_hosts%& "advertise TLS to these hosts"
11770 .section "Processing messages"
11772 .row &%allow_domain_literals%& "recognize domain literal syntax"
11773 .row &%allow_mx_to_ip%& "allow MX to point to IP address"
11774 .row &%allow_utf8_domains%& "in addresses"
11775 .row &%check_rfc2047_length%& "check length of RFC 2047 &""encoded &&&
11777 .row &%delivery_date_remove%& "from incoming messages"
11778 .row &%envelope_to_remote%& "from incoming messages"
11779 .row &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%& "affects &%-t%& processing"
11780 .row &%headers_charset%& "default for translations"
11781 .row &%qualify_domain%& "default for senders"
11782 .row &%qualify_recipient%& "default for recipients"
11783 .row &%return_path_remove%& "from incoming messages"
11784 .row &%strip_excess_angle_brackets%& "in addresses"
11785 .row &%strip_trailing_dot%& "at end of addresses"
11786 .row &%untrusted_set_sender%& "untrusted can set envelope sender"
11791 .section "System filter"
11793 .row &%system_filter%& "locate system filter"
11794 .row &%system_filter_directory_transport%& "transport for delivery to a &&&
11796 .row &%system_filter_file_transport%& "transport for delivery to a file"
11797 .row &%system_filter_group%& "group for filter running"
11798 .row &%system_filter_pipe_transport%& "transport for delivery to a pipe"
11799 .row &%system_filter_reply_transport%& "transport for autoreply delivery"
11800 .row &%system_filter_user%& "user for filter running"
11805 .section "Routing and delivery"
11807 .row &%dns_again_means_nonexist%& "for broken domains"
11808 .row &%dns_check_names_pattern%& "pre-DNS syntax check"
11809 .row &%dns_ipv4_lookup%& "only v4 lookup for these domains"
11810 .row &%dns_retrans%& "parameter for resolver"
11811 .row &%dns_retry%& "parameter for resolver"
11812 .row &%hold_domains%& "hold delivery for these domains"
11813 .row &%local_interfaces%& "for routing checks"
11814 .row &%queue_domains%& "no immediate delivery for these"
11815 .row &%queue_only%& "no immediate delivery at all"
11816 .row &%queue_only_file%& "no immediate delivery if file exists"
11817 .row &%queue_only_load%& "no immediate delivery if load is high"
11818 .row &%queue_only_override%& "allow command line to override"
11819 .row &%queue_run_in_order%& "order of arrival"
11820 .row &%queue_run_max%& "of simultaneous queue runners"
11821 .row &%queue_smtp_domains%& "no immediate SMTP delivery for these"
11822 .row &%remote_max_parallel%& "parallel SMTP delivery per message"
11823 .row &%remote_sort_domains%& "order of remote deliveries"
11824 .row &%retry_data_expire%& "timeout for retry data"
11825 .row &%retry_interval_max%& "safety net for retry rules"
11830 .section "Bounce and warning messages"
11832 .row &%bounce_message_file%& "content of bounce"
11833 .row &%bounce_message_text%& "content of bounce"
11834 .row &%bounce_return_body%& "include body if returning message"
11835 .row &%bounce_return_message%& "include original message in bounce"
11836 .row &%bounce_return_size_limit%& "limit on returned message"
11837 .row &%bounce_sender_authentication%& "send authenticated sender with bounce"
11838 .row &%errors_copy%& "copy bounce messages"
11839 .row &%errors_reply_to%& "&'Reply-to:'& in bounces"
11840 .row &%delay_warning%& "time schedule"
11841 .row &%delay_warning_condition%& "condition for warning messages"
11842 .row &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%& "discard undeliverable bounces"
11843 .row &%smtp_return_error_details%& "give detail on rejections"
11844 .row &%warn_message_file%& "content of warning message"
11849 .section "Alphabetical list of main options" "SECTalomo"
11850 Those options that undergo string expansion before use are marked with
11853 .option accept_8bitmime main boolean false
11855 .cindex "8-bit characters"
11856 This option causes Exim to send 8BITMIME in its response to an SMTP
11857 EHLO command, and to accept the BODY= parameter on MAIL commands.
11858 However, though Exim is 8-bit clean, it is not a protocol converter, and it
11859 takes no steps to do anything special with messages received by this route.
11860 Consequently, this option is turned off by default.
11862 .option acl_not_smtp main string&!! unset
11863 .cindex "&ACL;" "for non-SMTP messages"
11864 .cindex "non-SMTP messages" "ACLs for"
11865 This option defines the ACL that is run when a non-SMTP message is on the point
11866 of being accepted. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11869 .option acl_not_smtp_mime main string&!! unset
11870 This option defines the ACL that is run for individual MIME parts of non-SMTP
11871 messages. It operates in exactly the same way as &%acl_smtp_mime%& operates for
11875 .option acl_smtp_auth main string&!! unset
11876 .cindex "&ACL;" "setting up for SMTP commands"
11877 .cindex "AUTH" "ACL for"
11878 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP AUTH command is
11879 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11881 .option acl_smtp_connect main string&!! unset
11882 .cindex "&ACL;" "on SMTP connection"
11883 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP connection is received.
11884 See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11886 .option acl_smtp_data main string&!! unset
11887 .cindex "DATA" "ACL for"
11888 This option defines the ACL that is run after an SMTP DATA command has been
11889 processed and the message itself has been received, but before the final
11890 acknowledgement is sent. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11892 .option acl_smtp_etrn main string&!! unset
11893 .cindex "ETRN" "ACL for"
11894 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP ETRN command is
11895 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11897 .option acl_smtp_expn main string&!! unset
11898 .cindex "EXPN" "ACL for"
11899 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP EXPN command is
11900 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11902 .option acl_smtp_helo main string&!! unset
11903 .cindex "EHLO" "ACL for"
11904 .cindex "HELO" "ACL for"
11905 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP EHLO or HELO
11906 command is received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11909 .option acl_smtp_mail main string&!! unset
11910 .cindex "MAIL" "ACL for"
11911 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP MAIL command is
11912 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11914 .option acl_smtp_mailauth main string&!! unset
11915 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
11916 This option defines the ACL that is run when there is an AUTH parameter on
11917 a MAIL command. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for details of ACLs, and chapter
11918 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details of authentication.
11920 .option acl_smtp_mime main string&!! unset
11921 .cindex "MIME content scanning" "ACL for"
11922 This option is available when Exim is built with the content-scanning
11923 extension. It defines the ACL that is run for each MIME part in a message. See
11924 section &<<SECTscanmimepart>>& for details.
11926 .option acl_smtp_predata main string&!! unset
11927 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP DATA command is
11928 received, before the message itself is received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for
11931 .option acl_smtp_quit main string&!! unset
11932 .cindex "QUIT" "ACL for"
11933 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP QUIT command is
11934 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11936 .option acl_smtp_rcpt main string&!! unset
11937 .cindex "RCPT" "ACL for"
11938 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP RCPT command is
11939 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11941 .option acl_smtp_starttls main string&!! unset
11942 .cindex "STARTTLS" "ACL for"
11943 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP STARTTLS command is
11944 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11946 .option acl_smtp_vrfy main string&!! unset
11947 .cindex "VRFY" "ACL for"
11948 This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP VRFY command is
11949 received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for further details.
11951 .option admin_groups main "string list&!!" unset
11952 .cindex "admin user"
11954 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. If the
11955 current group or any of the supplementary groups of an Exim caller is in this
11956 colon-separated list, the caller has admin privileges. If all your system
11957 programmers are in a specific group, for example, you can give them all Exim
11958 admin privileges by putting that group in &%admin_groups%&. However, this does
11959 not permit them to read Exim's spool files (whose group owner is the Exim gid).
11960 To permit this, you have to add individuals to the Exim group.
11963 .option allow_domain_literals main boolean false
11964 .cindex "domain literal"
11965 If this option is set, the RFC 2822 domain literal format is permitted in
11966 email addresses. The option is not set by default, because the domain literal
11967 format is not normally required these days, and few people know about it. It
11968 has, however, been exploited by mail abusers.
11970 Unfortunately, it seems that some DNS black list maintainers are using this
11971 format to report black listing to postmasters. If you want to accept messages
11972 addressed to your hosts by IP address, you need to set
11973 &%allow_domain_literals%& true, and also to add &`@[]`& to the list of local
11974 domains (defined in the named domain list &%local_domains%& in the default
11975 configuration). This &"magic string"& matches the domain literal form of all
11976 the local host's IP addresses.
11979 .option allow_mx_to_ip main boolean false
11980 .cindex "MX record" "pointing to IP address"
11981 It appears that more and more DNS zone administrators are breaking the rules
11982 and putting domain names that look like IP addresses on the right hand side of
11983 MX records. Exim follows the rules and rejects this, giving an error message
11984 that explains the mis-configuration. However, some other MTAs support this
11985 practice, so to avoid &"Why can't Exim do this?"& complaints,
11986 &%allow_mx_to_ip%& exists, in order to enable this heinous activity. It is not
11987 recommended, except when you have no other choice.
11989 .option allow_utf8_domains main boolean false
11990 .cindex "domain" "UTF-8 characters in"
11991 .cindex "UTF-8" "in domain name"
11992 Lots of discussion is going on about internationalized domain names. One
11993 camp is strongly in favour of just using UTF-8 characters, and it seems
11994 that at least two other MTAs permit this. This option allows Exim users to
11995 experiment if they wish.
11997 If it is set true, Exim's domain parsing function allows valid
11998 UTF-8 multicharacters to appear in domain name components, in addition to
11999 letters, digits, and hyphens. However, just setting this option is not
12000 enough; if you want to look up these domain names in the DNS, you must also
12001 adjust the value of &%dns_check_names_pattern%& to match the extended form. A
12002 suitable setting is:
12004 dns_check_names_pattern = (?i)^(?>(?(1)\.|())[a-z0-9\xc0-\xff]\
12005 (?>[-a-z0-9\x80-\xff]*[a-z0-9\x80-\xbf])?)+$
12007 Alternatively, you can just disable this feature by setting
12009 dns_check_names_pattern =
12011 That is, set the option to an empty string so that no check is done.
12014 .option auth_advertise_hosts main "host list&!!" *
12015 .cindex "authentication" "advertising"
12016 .cindex "AUTH" "advertising"
12017 If any server authentication mechanisms are configured, Exim advertises them in
12018 response to an EHLO command only if the calling host matches this list.
12019 Otherwise, Exim does not advertise AUTH.
12020 Exim does not accept AUTH commands from clients to which it has not
12021 advertised the availability of AUTH. The advertising of individual
12022 authentication mechanisms can be controlled by the use of the
12023 &%server_advertise_condition%& generic authenticator option on the individual
12024 authenticators. See chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for further details.
12026 Certain mail clients (for example, Netscape) require the user to provide a name
12027 and password for authentication if AUTH is advertised, even though it may
12028 not be needed (the host may accept messages from hosts on its local LAN without
12029 authentication, for example). The &%auth_advertise_hosts%& option can be used
12030 to make these clients more friendly by excluding them from the set of hosts to
12031 which Exim advertises AUTH.
12033 .cindex "AUTH" "advertising when encrypted"
12034 If you want to advertise the availability of AUTH only when the connection
12035 is encrypted using TLS, you can make use of the fact that the value of this
12036 option is expanded, with a setting like this:
12038 auth_advertise_hosts = ${if eq{$tls_cipher}{}{}{*}}
12040 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
12041 If &$tls_cipher$& is empty, the session is not encrypted, and the result of
12042 the expansion is empty, thus matching no hosts. Otherwise, the result of the
12043 expansion is *, which matches all hosts.
12046 .option auto_thaw main time 0s
12048 .cindex "thawing messages"
12049 .cindex "unfreezing messages"
12050 If this option is set to a time greater than zero, a queue runner will try a
12051 new delivery attempt on any frozen message, other than a bounce message, if
12052 this much time has passed since it was frozen. This may result in the message
12053 being re-frozen if nothing has changed since the last attempt. It is a way of
12054 saying &"keep on trying, even though there are big problems"&.
12056 &*Note*&: This is an old option, which predates &%timeout_frozen_after%& and
12057 &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&. It is retained for compatibility, but it is not
12058 thought to be very useful any more, and its use should probably be avoided.
12061 .option av_scanner main string "see below"
12062 This option is available if Exim is built with the content-scanning extension.
12063 It specifies which anti-virus scanner to use. The default value is:
12065 sophie:/var/run/sophie
12067 If the value of &%av_scanner%& starts with dollar character, it is expanded
12068 before use. See section &<<SECTscanvirus>>& for further details.
12072 .option bi_command main string unset
12073 .cindex "&%-bi%& option"
12074 This option supplies the name of a command that is run when Exim is called with
12075 the &%-bi%& option (see chapter &<<CHAPcommandline>>&). The string value is
12076 just the command name, it is not a complete command line. If an argument is
12077 required, it must come from the &%-oA%& command line option.
12080 .option bounce_message_file main string unset
12081 .cindex "bounce message" "customizing"
12082 .cindex "customizing" "bounce message"
12083 This option defines a template file containing paragraphs of text to be used
12084 for constructing bounce messages. Details of the file's contents are given in
12085 chapter &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&. See also &%warn_message_file%&.
12088 .option bounce_message_text main string unset
12089 When this option is set, its contents are included in the default bounce
12090 message immediately after &"This message was created automatically by mail
12091 delivery software."& It is not used if &%bounce_message_file%& is set.
12093 .option bounce_return_body main boolean true
12094 .cindex "bounce message" "including body"
12095 This option controls whether the body of an incoming message is included in a
12096 bounce message when &%bounce_return_message%& is true. If it is not set, only
12097 the message header is included.
12098 .cindex "bounce message" "including original"
12100 .option bounce_return_message main boolean true
12101 If this option is set false, the original message is not included in bounce
12102 messages generated by Exim. See also &%bounce_return_size_limit%&.
12105 .option bounce_return_size_limit main integer 100K
12106 .cindex "size limit" "of bounce"
12107 .cindex "bounce message" "size limit"
12108 .cindex "limit" "bounce message size"
12109 This option sets a limit in bytes on the size of messages that are returned to
12110 senders as part of bounce messages when &%bounce_return_message%& is true. The
12111 limit should be less than the value of the global &%message_size_limit%& and of
12112 any &%message_size_limit%& settings on transports, to allow for the bounce text
12113 that Exim generates. If this option is set to zero there is no limit.
12115 When the body of any message that is to be included in a bounce message is
12116 greater than the limit, it is truncated, and a comment pointing this out is
12117 added at the top. The actual cutoff may be greater than the value given, owing
12118 to the use of buffering for transferring the message in chunks (typically 8K in
12119 size). The idea is to save bandwidth on those undeliverable 15-megabyte
12122 .option bounce_sender_authentication main string unset
12123 .cindex "bounce message" "sender authentication"
12124 .cindex "authentication" "bounce message"
12125 .cindex "AUTH" "on bounce message"
12126 This option provides an authenticated sender address that is sent with any
12127 bounce messages generated by Exim that are sent over an authenticated SMTP
12128 connection. A typical setting might be:
12130 bounce_sender_authentication = mailer-daemon@my.domain.example
12132 which would cause bounce messages to be sent using the SMTP command:
12134 MAIL FROM:<> AUTH=mailer-daemon@my.domain.example
12136 The value of &%bounce_sender_authentication%& must always be a complete email
12139 .option callout_domain_negative_expire main time 3h
12140 .cindex "caching" "callout timeouts"
12141 .cindex "callout" "caching timeouts"
12142 This option specifies the expiry time for negative callout cache data for a
12143 domain. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12144 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12147 .option callout_domain_positive_expire main time 7d
12148 This option specifies the expiry time for positive callout cache data for a
12149 domain. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12150 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12153 .option callout_negative_expire main time 2h
12154 This option specifies the expiry time for negative callout cache data for an
12155 address. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12156 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12159 .option callout_positive_expire main time 24h
12160 This option specifies the expiry time for positive callout cache data for an
12161 address. See section &<<SECTcallver>>& for details of callout verification, and
12162 section &<<SECTcallvercache>>& for details of the caching.
12165 .option callout_random_local_part main string&!! "see below"
12166 This option defines the &"random"& local part that can be used as part of
12167 callout verification. The default value is
12169 $primary_host_name-$tod_epoch-testing
12171 See section &<<CALLaddparcall>>& for details of how this value is used.
12174 .option check_log_inodes main integer 0
12175 See &%check_spool_space%& below.
12178 .option check_log_space main integer 0
12179 See &%check_spool_space%& below.
12181 .oindex "&%check_rfc2047_length%&"
12182 .cindex "RFC 2047" "disabling length check"
12183 .option check_rfc2047_length " User: main" boolean true
12184 RFC 2047 defines a way of encoding non-ASCII characters in headers using a
12185 system of &"encoded words"&. The RFC specifies a maximum length for an encoded
12186 word; strings to be encoded that exceed this length are supposed to use
12187 multiple encoded words. By default, Exim does not recognize encoded words that
12188 exceed the maximum length. However, it seems that some software, in violation
12189 of the RFC, generates overlong encoded words. If &%check_rfc2047_length%& is
12190 set false, Exim recognizes encoded words of any length.
12193 .option check_spool_inodes main integer 0
12194 See &%check_spool_space%& below.
12197 .option check_spool_space main integer 0
12198 .cindex "checking disk space"
12199 .cindex "disk space" "checking"
12200 .cindex "spool directory" "checking space"
12201 The four &%check_...%& options allow for checking of disk resources before a
12202 message is accepted.
12204 .cindex "&$log_inodes$&"
12205 .cindex "&$log_space$&"
12206 .cindex "&$spool_inodes$&"
12207 .cindex "&$spool_space$&"
12208 When any of these options are set, they apply to all incoming messages. If you
12209 want to apply different checks to different kinds of message, you can do so by
12210 testing the the variables &$log_inodes$&, &$log_space$&, &$spool_inodes$&, and
12211 &$spool_space$& in an ACL with appropriate additional conditions.
12214 &%check_spool_space%& and &%check_spool_inodes%& check the spool partition if
12215 either value is greater than zero, for example:
12217 check_spool_space = 10M
12218 check_spool_inodes = 100
12220 The spool partition is the one that contains the directory defined by
12221 SPOOL_DIRECTORY in &_Local/Makefile_&. It is used for holding messages in
12224 &%check_log_space%& and &%check_log_inodes%& check the partition in which log
12225 files are written if either is greater than zero. These should be set only if
12226 &%log_file_path%& and &%spool_directory%& refer to different partitions.
12228 If there is less space or fewer inodes than requested, Exim refuses to accept
12229 incoming mail. In the case of SMTP input this is done by giving a 452 temporary
12230 error response to the MAIL command. If ESMTP is in use and there was a
12231 SIZE parameter on the MAIL command, its value is added to the
12232 &%check_spool_space%& value, and the check is performed even if
12233 &%check_spool_space%& is zero, unless &%no_smtp_check_spool_space%& is set.
12235 The values for &%check_spool_space%& and &%check_log_space%& are held as a
12236 number of kilobytes. If a non-multiple of 1024 is specified, it is rounded up.
12238 For non-SMTP input and for batched SMTP input, the test is done at start-up; on
12239 failure a message is written to stderr and Exim exits with a non-zero code, as
12240 it obviously cannot send an error message of any kind.
12242 .option daemon_smtp_ports main string &`smtp`&
12243 .cindex "port" "for daemon"
12244 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting listening ports"
12245 This option specifies one or more default SMTP ports on which the Exim daemon
12246 listens. See chapter &<<CHAPinterfaces>>& for details of how it is used. For
12247 backward compatibility, &%daemon_smtp_port%& (singular) is a synonym.
12250 .option daemon_startup_retries main integer 9
12251 .cindex "daemon startup" "retrying"
12252 This option, along with &%daemon_startup_sleep%&, controls the retrying done by
12253 the daemon at startup when it cannot immediately bind a listening socket
12254 (typically because the socket is already in use): &%daemon_startup_retries%&
12255 defines the number of retries after the first failure, and
12256 &%daemon_startup_sleep%& defines the length of time to wait between retries.
12258 .option daemon_startup_sleep main time 30s
12259 See &%daemon_startup_retries%&.
12262 .option delay_warning main "time list" 24h
12263 .cindex "warning of delay"
12264 .cindex "delay warning" "specifying"
12265 When a message is delayed, Exim sends a warning message to the sender at
12266 intervals specified by this option. The data is a colon-separated list of times
12267 after which to send warning messages. If the value of the option is an empty
12268 string or a zero time, no warnings are sent. Up to 10 times may be given. If a
12269 message has been on the queue for longer than the last time, the last interval
12270 between the times is used to compute subsequent warning times. For example,
12273 delay_warning = 4h:8h:24h
12275 the first message is sent after 4 hours, the second after 8 hours, and
12276 the third one after 24 hours. After that, messages are sent every 16 hours,
12277 because that is the interval between the last two times on the list. If you set
12278 just one time, it specifies the repeat interval. For example, with:
12282 messages are repeated every six hours. To stop warnings after a given time, set
12283 a very large time at the end of the list. For example:
12285 delay_warning = 2h:12h:99d
12288 .option delay_warning_condition main string&!! "see below"
12289 .cindex "&$domain$&"
12290 The string is expanded at the time a warning message might be sent. If all the
12291 deferred addresses have the same domain, it is set in &$domain$& during the
12292 expansion. Otherwise &$domain$& is empty. If the result of the expansion is a
12293 forced failure, an empty string, or a string matching any of &"0"&, &"no"& or
12294 &"false"& (the comparison being done caselessly) then the warning message is
12295 not sent. The default is
12297 delay_warning_condition = \
12298 ${if match{$h_precedence:}{(?i)bulk|list|junk}{no}{yes}}
12300 which suppresses the sending of warnings about messages that have &"bulk"&,
12301 &"list"& or &"junk"& in a &'Precedence:'& header.
12303 .option deliver_drop_privilege main boolean false
12304 .cindex "unprivileged delivery"
12305 .cindex "delivery" "unprivileged"
12306 If this option is set true, Exim drops its root privilege at the start of a
12307 delivery process, and runs as the Exim user throughout. This severely restricts
12308 the kinds of local delivery that are possible, but is viable in certain types
12309 of configuration. There is a discussion about the use of root privilege in
12310 chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>&.
12312 .option deliver_queue_load_max main fixed-point unset
12313 .cindex "load average"
12314 .cindex "queue runner" "abandoning"
12315 When this option is set, a queue run is abandoned if the system load average
12316 becomes greater than the value of the option. The option has no effect on
12317 ancient operating systems on which Exim cannot determine the load average.
12318 See also &%queue_only_load%& and &%smtp_load_reserve%&.
12321 .option delivery_date_remove main boolean true
12322 .cindex "&'Delivery-date:'& header line"
12323 Exim's transports have an option for adding a &'Delivery-date:'& header to a
12324 message when it is delivered, in exactly the same way as &'Return-path:'& is
12325 handled. &'Delivery-date:'& records the actual time of delivery. Such headers
12326 should not be present in incoming messages, and this option causes them to be
12327 removed at the time the message is received, to avoid any problems that might
12328 occur when a delivered message is subsequently sent on to some other recipient.
12330 .option dns_again_means_nonexist main "domain list&!!" unset
12331 .cindex "DNS" "&""try again""& response; overriding"
12332 DNS lookups give a &"try again"& response for the DNS errors
12333 &"non-authoritative host not found"& and &"SERVERFAIL"&. This can cause Exim to
12334 keep trying to deliver a message, or to give repeated temporary errors to
12335 incoming mail. Sometimes the effect is caused by a badly set up name server and
12336 may persist for a long time. If a domain which exhibits this problem matches
12337 anything in &%dns_again_means_nonexist%&, it is treated as if it did not exist.
12338 This option should be used with care. You can make it apply to reverse lookups
12339 by a setting such as this:
12341 dns_again_means_nonexist = *.in-addr.arpa
12343 This option applies to all DNS lookups that Exim does. The &(dnslookup)& router
12344 has some options of its own for controlling what happens when lookups for MX or
12345 SRV records give temporary errors. These more specific options are applied
12346 after the global option.
12348 .option dns_check_names_pattern main string "see below"
12349 .cindex "DNS" "pre-check of name syntax"
12350 When this option is set to a non-empty string, it causes Exim to check domain
12351 names for illegal characters before handing them to the DNS resolver, because
12352 some resolvers give temporary errors for malformed names. If a domain name
12353 contains any illegal characters, a &"not found"& result is forced, and the
12354 resolver is not called. The check is done by matching the domain name against a
12355 regular expression, which is the value of this option. The default pattern is
12357 dns_check_names_pattern = \
12358 (?i)^(?>(?(1)\.|())[^\W_](?>[a-z0-9-]*[^\W_])?)+$
12360 which permits only letters, digits, and hyphens in components, but they may not
12361 start or end with a hyphen.
12362 If you set &%allow_utf8_domains%&, you must modify this pattern, or set the
12363 option to an empty string.
12366 .option dns_csa_search_limit main integer 5
12367 This option controls the depth of parental searching for CSA SRV records in the
12368 DNS, as described in more detail in section &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&.
12370 .option dns_csa_use_reverse main boolean true
12371 This option controls whether or not an IP address, given as a CSA domain, is
12372 reversed and looked up in the reverse DNS, as described in more detail in
12373 section &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&.
12376 .option dns_ipv4_lookup main "domain list&!!" unset
12377 .cindex "IPv6" "DNS lookup for AAAA records"
12378 .cindex "DNS" "IPv6 lookup for AAAA records"
12379 When Exim is compiled with IPv6 support, it looks for IPv6 address records
12380 (AAAA and, if configured, A6) as well as IPv4 address records when trying to
12381 find IP addresses for hosts, unless the host's domain matches this list.
12383 This is a fudge to help with name servers that give big delays or otherwise do
12384 not work for the new IPv6 record types. If Exim is handed an IPv6 address
12385 record as a result of an MX lookup, it always recognizes it, and may as a
12386 result make an outgoing IPv6 connection. All this option does is to make Exim
12387 look only for IPv4-style A records when it needs to find an IP address for a
12388 host name. In due course, when the world's name servers have all been upgraded,
12389 there should be no need for this option.
12392 .option dns_retrans main time 0s
12393 .cindex "DNS" "resolver options"
12394 The options &%dns_retrans%& and &%dns_retry%& can be used to set the
12395 retransmission and retry parameters for DNS lookups. Values of zero (the
12396 defaults) leave the system default settings unchanged. The first value is the
12397 time between retries, and the second is the number of retries. It isn't
12398 totally clear exactly how these settings affect the total time a DNS lookup may
12399 take. I haven't found any documentation about timeouts on DNS lookups; these
12400 parameter values are available in the external resolver interface structure,
12401 but nowhere does it seem to describe how they are used or what you might want
12405 .option dns_retry main integer 0
12406 See &%dns_retrans%& above.
12409 .option drop_cr main boolean false
12410 This is an obsolete option that is now a no-op. It used to affect the way Exim
12411 handled CR and LF characters in incoming messages. What happens now is
12412 described in section &<<SECTlineendings>>&.
12415 .option envelope_to_remove main boolean true
12416 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
12417 Exim's transports have an option for adding an &'Envelope-to:'& header to a
12418 message when it is delivered, in exactly the same way as &'Return-path:'& is
12419 handled. &'Envelope-to:'& records the original recipient address from the
12420 messages's envelope that caused the delivery to happen. Such headers should not
12421 be present in incoming messages, and this option causes them to be removed at
12422 the time the message is received, to avoid any problems that might occur when a
12423 delivered message is subsequently sent on to some other recipient.
12426 .option errors_copy main "string list&!!" unset
12427 .cindex "bounce message" "copy to other address"
12428 .cindex "copy of bounce message"
12429 Setting this option causes Exim to send bcc copies of bounce messages that it
12430 generates to other addresses. &*Note*&: This does not apply to bounce messages
12431 coming from elsewhere. The value of the option is a colon-separated list of
12432 items. Each item consists of a pattern, terminated by white space, followed by
12433 a comma-separated list of email addresses. If a pattern contains spaces, it
12434 must be enclosed in double quotes.
12436 Each pattern is processed in the same way as a single item in an address list
12437 (see section &<<SECTaddresslist>>&). When a pattern matches the recipient of
12438 the bounce message, the message is copied to the addresses on the list. The
12439 items are scanned in order, and once a matching one is found, no further items
12440 are examined. For example:
12442 errors_copy = spqr@mydomain postmaster@mydomain.example :\
12443 rqps@mydomain hostmaster@mydomain.example,\
12444 postmaster@mydomain.example
12446 .cindex "&$domain$&"
12447 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
12448 The address list is expanded before use. The expansion variables &$local_part$&
12449 and &$domain$& are set from the original recipient of the error message, and if
12450 there was any wildcard matching in the pattern, the expansion
12451 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &%errors_copy%&"
12452 variables &$0$&, &$1$&, etc. are set in the normal way.
12455 .option errors_reply_to main string unset
12456 .cindex "bounce message" "&'Reply-to:'& in"
12457 Exim's bounce and delivery warning messages contain the header line
12459 &`From: Mail Delivery System <Mailer-Daemon@`&&'qualify-domain'&&`>`&
12461 where &'qualify-domain'& is the value of the &%qualify_domain%& option.
12462 Experience shows that people reply to bounce messages. If the
12463 &%errors_reply_to%& option is set, a &'Reply-To:'& header is added to bounce
12464 and warning messages. For example:
12466 errors_reply_to = postmaster@my.domain.example
12468 The value of the option is not expanded. It must specify a valid RFC 2822
12472 .option exim_group main string "compile-time configured"
12473 .cindex "gid (group id)" "Exim's own"
12474 .cindex "Exim group"
12475 This option changes the gid under which Exim runs when it gives up root
12476 privilege. The default value is compiled into the binary. The value of this
12477 option is used only when &%exim_user%& is also set. Unless it consists entirely
12478 of digits, the string is looked up using &[getgrnam()]&, and failure causes a
12479 configuration error. See chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>& for a discussion of
12483 .option exim_path main string "see below"
12484 .cindex "Exim binary" "path name"
12485 This option specifies the path name of the Exim binary, which is used when Exim
12486 needs to re-exec itself. The default is set up to point to the file &'exim'& in
12487 the directory configured at compile time by the BIN_DIRECTORY setting. It
12488 is necessary to change &%exim_path%& if, exceptionally, Exim is run from some
12490 &*Warning*&: Do not use a macro to define the value of this option, because
12491 you will break those Exim utilities that scan the configuration file to find
12492 where the binary is. (They then use the &%-bP%& option to extract option
12493 settings such as the value of &%spool_directory%&.)
12496 .option exim_user main string "compile-time configured"
12497 .cindex "uid (user id)" "Exim's own"
12498 .cindex "Exim user"
12499 This option changes the uid under which Exim runs when it gives up root
12500 privilege. The default value is compiled into the binary. Ownership of the run
12501 time configuration file and the use of the &%-C%& and &%-D%& command line
12502 options is checked against the values in the binary, not what is set here.
12504 Unless it consists entirely of digits, the string is looked up using
12505 &[getpwnam()]&, and failure causes a configuration error. If &%exim_group%& is
12506 not also supplied, the gid is taken from the result of &[getpwnam()]& if it is
12507 used. See chapter &<<CHAPsecurity>>& for a discussion of security issues.
12510 .option extra_local_interfaces main "string list" unset
12511 This option defines network interfaces that are to be considered local when
12512 routing, but which are not used for listening by the daemon. See section
12513 &<<SECTreclocipadd>>& for details.
12516 .option "extract_addresses_remove_ &~arguments" main boolean true
12517 .cindex "&%-t%& option"
12518 .cindex "command line" "addresses with &%-t%&"
12519 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&%-t%& option"
12520 According to some Sendmail documentation (Sun, IRIX, HP-UX), if any addresses
12521 are present on the command line when the &%-t%& option is used to build an
12522 envelope from a message's &'To:'&, &'Cc:'& and &'Bcc:'& headers, the command
12523 line addresses are removed from the recipients list. This is also how Smail
12524 behaves. However, other Sendmail documentation (the O'Reilly book) states that
12525 command line addresses are added to those obtained from the header lines. When
12526 &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%& is true (the default), Exim subtracts
12527 argument headers. If it is set false, Exim adds rather than removes argument
12531 .option finduser_retries main integer 0
12532 .cindex "NIS" "looking up users; retrying"
12533 On systems running NIS or other schemes in which user and group information is
12534 distributed from a remote system, there can be times when &[getpwnam()]& and
12535 related functions fail, even when given valid data, because things time out.
12536 Unfortunately these failures cannot be distinguished from genuine &"not found"&
12537 errors. If &%finduser_retries%& is set greater than zero, Exim will try that
12538 many extra times to find a user or a group, waiting for one second between
12541 .cindex "&_/etc/passwd_&" "multiple reading of"
12542 You should not set this option greater than zero if your user information is in
12543 a traditional &_/etc/passwd_& file, because it will cause Exim needlessly to
12544 search the file multiple times for non-existent users, and also cause delay.
12548 .option freeze_tell main "string list, comma separated" unset
12549 .cindex "freezing messages" "sending a message when freezing"
12550 On encountering certain errors, or when configured to do so in a system filter,
12551 ACL, or special router, Exim freezes a message. This means that no further
12552 delivery attempts take place until an administrator thaws the message, or the
12553 &%auto_thaw%&, &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&, or &%timeout_frozen_after%&
12554 feature cause it to be processed. If &%freeze_tell%& is set, Exim generates a
12555 warning message whenever it freezes something, unless the message it is
12556 freezing is a locally-generated bounce message. (Without this exception there
12557 is the possibility of looping.) The warning message is sent to the addresses
12558 supplied as the comma-separated value of this option. If several of the
12559 message's addresses cause freezing, only a single message is sent. If the
12560 freezing was automatic, the reason(s) for freezing can be found in the message
12561 log. If you configure freezing in a filter or ACL, you must arrange for any
12562 logging that you require.
12565 .option gecos_name main string&!! unset
12567 .cindex "&""gecos""& field" "parsing"
12568 Some operating systems, notably HP-UX, use the &"gecos"& field in the system
12569 password file to hold other information in addition to users' real names. Exim
12570 looks up this field for use when it is creating &'Sender:'& or &'From:'&
12571 headers. If either &%gecos_pattern%& or &%gecos_name%& are unset, the contents
12572 of the field are used unchanged, except that, if an ampersand is encountered,
12573 it is replaced by the user's login name with the first character forced to
12574 upper case, since this is a convention that is observed on many systems.
12576 When these options are set, &%gecos_pattern%& is treated as a regular
12577 expression that is to be applied to the field (again with && replaced by the
12578 login name), and if it matches, &%gecos_name%& is expanded and used as the
12581 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &%gecos_name%&"
12582 Numeric variables such as &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. can be used in the expansion to
12583 pick up sub-fields that were matched by the pattern. In HP-UX, where the user's
12584 name terminates at the first comma, the following can be used:
12586 gecos_pattern = ([^,]*)
12590 .option gecos_pattern main string unset
12591 See &%gecos_name%& above.
12594 .option headers_charset main string "see below"
12595 This option sets a default character set for translating from encoded MIME
12596 &"words"& in header lines, when referenced by an &$h_xxx$& expansion item. The
12597 default is the value of HEADERS_CHARSET in &_Local/Makefile_&. The
12598 ultimate default is ISO-8859-1. For more details see the description of header
12599 insertions in section &<<SECTexpansionitems>>&.
12603 .option header_maxsize main integer "see below"
12604 .cindex "header section" "maximum size of"
12605 .cindex "limit" "size of message header section"
12606 This option controls the overall maximum size of a message's header
12607 section. The default is the value of HEADER_MAXSIZE in
12608 &_Local/Makefile_&; the default for that is 1M. Messages with larger header
12609 sections are rejected.
12612 .option header_line_maxsize main integer 0
12613 .cindex "header lines" "maximum size of"
12614 .cindex "limit" "size of one header line"
12615 This option limits the length of any individual header line in a message, after
12616 all the continuations have been joined together. Messages with individual
12617 header lines that are longer than the limit are rejected. The default value of
12618 zero means &"no limit"&.
12623 .option helo_accept_junk_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12624 .cindex "HELO" "accepting junk data"
12625 .cindex "EHLO" "accepting junk data"
12626 Exim checks the syntax of HELO and EHLO commands for incoming SMTP
12627 mail, and gives an error response for invalid data. Unfortunately, there are
12628 some SMTP clients that send syntactic junk. They can be accommodated by setting
12629 this option. Note that this is a syntax check only. See &%helo_verify_hosts%&
12630 if you want to do semantic checking.
12631 See also &%helo_allow_chars%& for a way of extending the permitted character
12635 .option helo_allow_chars main string unset
12636 .cindex "HELO" "underscores in"
12637 .cindex "EHLO" "underscores in"
12638 .cindex "underscore in EHLO/HELO"
12639 This option can be set to a string of rogue characters that are permitted in
12640 all EHLO and HELO names in addition to the standard letters, digits,
12641 hyphens, and dots. If you really must allow underscores, you can set
12643 helo_allow_chars = _
12645 Note that the value is one string, not a list.
12648 .option helo_lookup_domains main "domain list&!!" &`@:@[]`&
12649 .cindex "HELO" "forcing reverse lookup"
12650 .cindex "EHLO" "forcing reverse lookup"
12651 If the domain given by a client in a HELO or EHLO command matches this
12652 list, a reverse lookup is done in order to establish the host's true name. The
12653 default forces a lookup if the client host gives the server's name or any of
12654 its IP addresses (in brackets), something that broken clients have been seen to
12658 .option helo_try_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12660 .cindex "HELO verifying" "optional"
12661 .cindex "EHLO verifying" "optional"
12662 By default, Exim just checks the syntax of HELO and EHLO commands (see
12663 &%helo_accept_junk_hosts%& and &%helo_allow_chars%&). However, some sites like
12664 to do more extensive checking of the data supplied by these commands. The ACL
12665 condition &`verify`& &`=`& &`helo`& is provided to make this possible.
12666 Formerly, it was necessary also to set this option (&%helo_try_verify_hosts%&)
12667 to force the check to occur. From release 4.53 onwards, this is no longer
12668 necessary. If the check has not been done before &`verify`& &`=`& &`helo`& is
12669 encountered, it is done at that time. Consequently, this option is obsolete.
12670 Its specification is retained here for backwards compatibility.
12672 When an EHLO or HELO command is received, if the calling host matches
12673 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%&, Exim checks that the host name given in the HELO or
12674 EHLO command either:
12677 is an IP literal matching the calling address of the host, or
12679 .cindex "DNS" "reverse lookup"
12680 .cindex "reverse DNS lookup"
12681 matches the host name that Exim obtains by doing a reverse lookup of the
12682 calling host address, or
12684 when looked up using &[gethostbyname()]& (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when
12685 available) yields the calling host address.
12688 However, the EHLO or HELO command is not rejected if any of the checks
12689 fail. Processing continues, but the result of the check is remembered, and can
12690 be detected later in an ACL by the &`verify`& &`=`& &`helo`& condition.
12692 .option helo_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12693 .cindex "HELO verifying" "mandatory"
12694 .cindex "EHLO verifying" "mandatory"
12695 Like &%helo_try_verify_hosts%&, this option is obsolete, and retained only for
12696 backwards compatibility. For hosts that match this option, Exim checks the host
12697 name given in the HELO or EHLO in the same way as for
12698 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%&. If the check fails, the HELO or EHLO command is
12699 rejected with a 550 error, and entries are written to the main and reject logs.
12700 If a MAIL command is received before EHLO or HELO, it is rejected with a 503
12704 .option hold_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
12705 .cindex "domain" "delaying delivery"
12706 .cindex "delivery" "delaying certain domains"
12707 This option allows mail for particular domains to be held on the queue
12708 manually. The option is overridden if a message delivery is forced with the
12709 &%-M%&, &%-qf%&, &%-Rf%& or &%-Sf%& options, and also while testing or
12710 verifying addresses using &%-bt%& or &%-bv%&. Otherwise, if a domain matches an
12711 item in &%hold_domains%&, no routing or delivery for that address is done, and
12712 it is deferred every time the message is looked at.
12714 This option is intended as a temporary operational measure for delaying the
12715 delivery of mail while some problem is being sorted out, or some new
12716 configuration tested. If you just want to delay the processing of some
12717 domains until a queue run occurs, you should use &%queue_domains%& or
12718 &%queue_smtp_domains%&, not &%hold_domains%&.
12720 A setting of &%hold_domains%& does not override Exim's code for removing
12721 messages from the queue if they have been there longer than the longest retry
12722 time in any retry rule. If you want to hold messages for longer than the normal
12723 retry times, insert a dummy retry rule with a long retry time.
12726 .option host_lookup main "host list&!!" unset
12727 .cindex "host name lookup" "forcing"
12728 Exim does not look up the name of a calling host from its IP address unless it
12729 is required to compare against some host list, or the host matches
12730 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& or &%helo_verify_hosts%&, or the host matches this
12731 option (which normally contains IP addresses rather than host names). The
12732 default configuration file contains
12736 which causes a lookup to happen for all hosts. If the expense of these lookups
12737 is felt to be too great, the setting can be changed or removed.
12739 After a successful reverse lookup, Exim does a forward lookup on the name it
12740 has obtained, to verify that it yields the IP address that it started with. If
12741 this check fails, Exim behaves as if the name lookup failed.
12743 .cindex "&$host_lookup_failed$&"
12744 .cindex "&$sender_host_name$&"
12745 After any kind of failure, the host name (in &$sender_host_name$&) remains
12746 unset, and &$host_lookup_failed$& is set to the string &"1"&. See also
12747 &%dns_again_means_nonexist%&, &%helo_lookup_domains%&, and &`verify`& &`=`&
12748 &`reverse_host_lookup`& in ACLs.
12751 .option host_lookup_order main "string list" &`bydns:byaddr`&
12752 This option specifies the order of different lookup methods when Exim is trying
12753 to find a host name from an IP address. The default is to do a DNS lookup
12754 first, and then to try a local lookup (using &[gethostbyaddr()]& or equivalent)
12755 if that fails. You can change the order of these lookups, or omit one entirely,
12758 &*Warning*&: The &"byaddr"& method does not always yield aliases when there are
12759 multiple PTR records in the DNS and the IP address is not listed in
12760 &_/etc/hosts_&. Different operating systems give different results in this
12761 case. That is why the default tries a DNS lookup first.
12765 .option host_reject_connection main "host list&!!" unset
12766 .cindex "host" "rejecting connections from"
12767 If this option is set, incoming SMTP calls from the hosts listed are rejected
12768 as soon as the connection is made.
12769 This option is obsolete, and retained only for backward compatibility, because
12770 nowadays the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_connect%& can also reject incoming
12771 connections immediately.
12773 The ability to give an immediate rejection (either by this option or using an
12774 ACL) is provided for use in unusual cases. Many hosts will just try again,
12775 sometimes without much delay. Normally, it is better to use an ACL to reject
12776 incoming messages at a later stage, such as after RCPT commands. See
12777 chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&.
12780 .option hosts_connection_nolog main "host list&!!" unset
12781 .cindex "host" "not logging connections from"
12782 This option defines a list of hosts for which connection logging does not
12783 happen, even though the &%smtp_connection%& log selector is set. For example,
12784 you might want not to log SMTP connections from local processes, or from
12785 127.0.0.1, or from your local LAN. This option is consulted in the main loop of
12786 the daemon; you should therefore strive to restrict its value to a short inline
12787 list of IP addresses and networks. To disable logging SMTP connections from
12788 local processes, you must create a host list with an empty item. For example:
12790 hosts_connection_nolog = :
12792 If the &%smtp_connection%& log selector is not set, this option has no effect.
12796 .option hosts_treat_as_local main "domain list&!!" unset
12797 .cindex "local host" "domains treated as"
12798 .cindex "host" "treated as local"
12799 If this option is set, any host names that match the domain list are treated as
12800 if they were the local host when Exim is scanning host lists obtained from MX
12802 or other sources. Note that the value of this option is a domain list, not a
12803 host list, because it is always used to check host names, not IP addresses.
12805 This option also applies when Exim is matching the special items
12806 &`@mx_any`&, &`@mx_primary`&, and &`@mx_secondary`& in a domain list (see
12807 section &<<SECTdomainlist>>&), and when checking the &%hosts%& option in the
12808 &(smtp)& transport for the local host (see the &%allow_localhost%& option in
12809 that transport). See also &%local_interfaces%&, &%extra_local_interfaces%&, and
12810 chapter &<<CHAPinterfaces>>&, which contains a discussion about local network
12811 interfaces and recognising the local host.
12814 .option ignore_bounce_errors_after main time 10w
12815 .cindex "bounce message" "discarding"
12816 .cindex "discarding bounce message"
12817 This option affects the processing of bounce messages that cannot be delivered,
12818 that is, those that suffer a permanent delivery failure. (Bounce messages that
12819 suffer temporary delivery failures are of course retried in the usual way.)
12821 After a permanent delivery failure, bounce messages are frozen,
12822 because there is no sender to whom they can be returned. When a frozen bounce
12823 message has been on the queue for more than the given time, it is unfrozen at
12824 the next queue run, and a further delivery is attempted. If delivery fails
12825 again, the bounce message is discarded. This makes it possible to keep failed
12826 bounce messages around for a shorter time than the normal maximum retry time
12827 for frozen messages. For example,
12829 ignore_bounce_errors_after = 12h
12831 retries failed bounce message deliveries after 12 hours, discarding any further
12832 failures. If the value of this option is set to a zero time period, bounce
12833 failures are discarded immediately. Setting a very long time (as in the default
12834 value) has the effect of disabling this option. For ways of automatically
12835 dealing with other kinds of frozen message, see &%auto_thaw%& and
12836 &%timeout_frozen_after%&.
12839 .option ignore_fromline_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
12840 .cindex "&""From""& line"
12841 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
12842 Some broken SMTP clients insist on sending a UUCP-like &"From&~"& line before
12843 the headers of a message. By default this is treated as the start of the
12844 message's body, which means that any following headers are not recognized as
12845 such. Exim can be made to ignore it by setting &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& to
12846 match those hosts that insist on sending it. If the sender is actually a local
12847 process rather than a remote host, and is using &%-bs%& to inject the messages,
12848 &%ignore_fromline_local%& must be set to achieve this effect.
12851 .option ignore_fromline_local main boolean false
12852 See &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& above.
12855 .option keep_malformed main time 4d
12856 This option specifies the length of time to keep messages whose spool files
12857 have been corrupted in some way. This should, of course, never happen. At the
12858 next attempt to deliver such a message, it gets removed. The incident is
12862 .option ldap_default_servers main "string list" unset
12863 .cindex "LDAP" "default servers"
12864 This option provides a list of LDAP servers which are tried in turn when an
12865 LDAP query does not contain a server. See section &<<SECTforldaque>>& for
12866 details of LDAP queries. This option is available only when Exim has been built
12870 .option ldap_version main integer unset
12871 .cindex "LDAP protocol version" "forcing"
12872 This option can be used to force Exim to set a specific protocol version for
12873 LDAP. If it option is unset, it is shown by the &%-bP%& command line option as
12874 -1. When this is the case, the default is 3 if LDAP_VERSION3 is defined in
12875 the LDAP headers; otherwise it is 2. This option is available only when Exim
12876 has been built with LDAP support.
12880 .option local_from_check main boolean true
12881 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line" "disabling addition of"
12882 .cindex "&'From:'& header line" "disabling checking of"
12883 When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP/IP connection) by
12884 an untrusted user, Exim removes any existing &'Sender:'& header line, and
12885 checks that the &'From:'& header line matches the login of the calling user and
12886 the domain specified by &%qualify_domain%&.
12888 &*Note*&: An unqualified address (no domain) in the &'From:'& header in a
12889 locally submitted message is automatically qualified by Exim, unless the
12890 &%-bnq%& command line option is used.
12892 You can use &%local_from_prefix%& and &%local_from_suffix%& to permit affixes
12893 on the local part. If the &'From:'& header line does not match, Exim adds a
12894 &'Sender:'& header with an address constructed from the calling user's login
12895 and the default qualify domain.
12897 If &%local_from_check%& is set false, the &'From:'& header check is disabled,
12898 and no &'Sender:'& header is ever added. If, in addition, you want to retain
12899 &'Sender:'& header lines supplied by untrusted users, you must also set
12900 &%local_sender_retain%& to be true.
12902 .cindex "envelope sender"
12903 These options affect only the header lines in the message. The envelope sender
12904 is still forced to be the login id at the qualify domain unless
12905 &%untrusted_set_sender%& permits the user to supply an envelope sender.
12907 For messages received over TCP/IP, an ACL can specify &"submission mode"& to
12908 request similar header line checking. See section &<<SECTthesenhea>>&, which
12909 has more details about &'Sender:'& processing.
12914 .option local_from_prefix main string unset
12915 When Exim checks the &'From:'& header line of locally submitted messages for
12916 matching the login id (see &%local_from_check%& above), it can be configured to
12917 ignore certain prefixes and suffixes in the local part of the address. This is
12918 done by setting &%local_from_prefix%& and/or &%local_from_suffix%& to
12919 appropriate lists, in the same form as the &%local_part_prefix%& and
12920 &%local_part_suffix%& router options (see chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&). For
12923 local_from_prefix = *-
12925 is set, a &'From:'& line containing
12927 From: anything-user@your.domain.example
12929 will not cause a &'Sender:'& header to be added if &'user@your.domain.example'&
12930 matches the actual sender address that is constructed from the login name and
12934 .option local_from_suffix main string unset
12935 See &%local_from_prefix%& above.
12938 .option local_interfaces main "string list" "see below"
12939 This option controls which network interfaces are used by the daemon for
12940 listening; they are also used to identify the local host when routing. Chapter
12941 &<<CHAPinterfaces>>& contains a full description of this option and the related
12942 options &%daemon_smtp_ports%&, &%extra_local_interfaces%&,
12943 &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, and &%tls_on_connect_ports%&. The default value for
12944 &%local_interfaces%& is
12946 local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0
12948 when Exim is built without IPv6 support; otherwise it is
12950 local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0
12953 .option local_scan_timeout main time 5m
12954 .cindex "timeout" "for &[local_scan()]& function"
12955 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "timeout"
12956 This timeout applies to the &[local_scan()]& function (see chapter
12957 &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&). Zero means &"no timeout"&. If the timeout is exceeded,
12958 the incoming message is rejected with a temporary error if it is an SMTP
12959 message. For a non-SMTP message, the message is dropped and Exim ends with a
12960 non-zero code. The incident is logged on the main and reject logs.
12964 .option local_sender_retain main boolean false
12965 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line" "retaining from local submission"
12966 When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP/IP connection) by
12967 an untrusted user, Exim removes any existing &'Sender:'& header line. If you
12968 do not want this to happen, you must set &%local_sender_retain%&, and you must
12969 also set &%local_from_check%& to be false (Exim will complain if you do not).
12970 See also the ACL modifier &`control = suppress_local_fixups`&. Section
12971 &<<SECTthesenhea>>& has more details about &'Sender:'& processing.
12976 .option localhost_number main string&!! unset
12977 .cindex "host" "locally unique number for"
12978 .cindex "message ids" "with multiple hosts"
12979 .cindex "&$localhost_number$&"
12980 Exim's message ids are normally unique only within the local host. If
12981 uniqueness among a set of hosts is required, each host must set a different
12982 value for the &%localhost_number%& option. The string is expanded immediately
12983 after reading the configuration file (so that a number can be computed from the
12984 host name, for example) and the result of the expansion must be a number in the
12985 range 0&--16 (or 0&--10 on operating systems with case-insensitive file
12986 systems). This is available in subsequent string expansions via the variable
12987 &$localhost_number$&. When &%localhost_number is set%&, the final two
12988 characters of the message id, instead of just being a fractional part of the
12989 time, are computed from the time and the local host number as described in
12990 section &<<SECTmessiden>>&.
12994 .option log_file_path main "string list&!!" "set at compile time"
12995 .cindex "log" "file path for"
12996 This option sets the path which is used to determine the names of Exim's log
12997 files, or indicates that logging is to be to syslog, or both. It is expanded
12998 when Exim is entered, so it can, for example, contain a reference to the host
12999 name. If no specific path is set for the log files at compile or run time, they
13000 are written in a sub-directory called &_log_& in Exim's spool directory.
13001 Chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& contains further details about Exim's logging, and
13002 section &<<SECTwhelogwri>>& describes how the contents of &%log_file_path%& are
13003 used. If this string is fixed at your installation (contains no expansion
13004 variables) it is recommended that you do not set this option in the
13005 configuration file, but instead supply the path using LOG_FILE_PATH in
13006 &_Local/Makefile_& so that it is available to Exim for logging errors detected
13007 early on &-- in particular, failure to read the configuration file.
13010 .option log_selector main string unset
13011 .cindex "log" "selectors"
13012 This option can be used to reduce or increase the number of things that Exim
13013 writes to its log files. Its argument is made up of names preceded by plus or
13014 minus characters. For example:
13016 log_selector = +arguments -retry_defer
13018 A list of possible names and what they control is given in the chapter on
13019 logging, in section &<<SECTlogselector>>&.
13022 .option log_timezone main boolean false
13023 .cindex "log" "timezone for entries"
13024 .cindex "&$tod_log$&"
13025 .cindex "&$tod_zone$&"
13026 By default, the timestamps on log lines are in local time without the
13027 timezone. This means that if your timezone changes twice a year, the timestamps
13028 in log lines are ambiguous for an hour when the clocks go back. One way of
13029 avoiding this problem is to set the timezone to UTC. An alternative is to set
13030 &%log_timezone%& true. This turns on the addition of the timezone offset to
13031 timestamps in log lines. Turning on this option can add quite a lot to the size
13032 of log files because each line is extended by 6 characters. Note that the
13033 &$tod_log$& variable contains the log timestamp without the zone, but there is
13034 another variable called &$tod_zone$& that contains just the timezone offset.
13037 .option lookup_open_max main integer 25
13038 .cindex "too many open files"
13039 .cindex "open files" "too many"
13040 .cindex "file" "too many open"
13041 .cindex "lookup" "maximum open files"
13042 .cindex "limit" "open files for lookups"
13043 This option limits the number of simultaneously open files for single-key
13044 lookups that use regular files (that is, &(lsearch)&, &(dbm)&, and &(cdb)&).
13045 Exim normally keeps these files open during routing, because often the same
13046 file is required several times. If the limit is reached, Exim closes the least
13047 recently used file. Note that if you are using the &'ndbm'& library, it
13048 actually opens two files for each logical DBM database, though it still counts
13049 as one for the purposes of &%lookup_open_max%&. If you are getting &"too many
13050 open files"& errors with NDBM, you need to reduce the value of
13051 &%lookup_open_max%&.
13054 .option max_username_length main integer 0
13055 .cindex "length of login name"
13056 .cindex "user name" "maximum length"
13057 .cindex "limit" "user name length"
13058 Some operating systems are broken in that they truncate long arguments to
13059 &[getpwnam()]& to eight characters, instead of returning &"no such user"&. If
13060 this option is set greater than zero, any attempt to call &[getpwnam()]& with
13061 an argument that is longer behaves as if &[getpwnam()]& failed.
13065 .option message_body_visible main integer 500
13066 .cindex "body of message" "visible size"
13067 .cindex "message body" "visible size"
13068 .cindex "&$message_body$&"
13069 .cindex "&$message_body_end$&"
13070 This option specifies how much of a message's body is to be included in the
13071 &$message_body$& and &$message_body_end$& expansion variables.
13074 .option message_id_header_domain main string&!! unset
13075 .cindex "&'Message-ID:'& header line"
13076 If this option is set, the string is expanded and used as the right hand side
13077 (domain) of the &'Message-ID:'& header that Exim creates if a
13078 locally-originated incoming message does not have one. &"Locally-originated"&
13079 means &"not received over TCP/IP."&
13080 Otherwise, the primary host name is used.
13081 Only letters, digits, dot and hyphen are accepted; any other characters are
13082 replaced by hyphens. If the expansion is forced to fail, or if the result is an
13083 empty string, the option is ignored.
13086 .option message_id_header_text main string&!! unset
13087 If this variable is set, the string is expanded and used to augment the text of
13088 the &'Message-id:'& header that Exim creates if a locally-originated incoming
13089 message does not have one. The text of this header is required by RFC 2822 to
13090 take the form of an address. By default, Exim uses its internal message id as
13091 the local part, and the primary host name as the domain. If this option is set,
13092 it is expanded, and provided the expansion is not forced to fail, and does not
13093 yield an empty string, the result is inserted into the header immediately
13094 before the @, separated from the internal message id by a dot. Any characters
13095 that are illegal in an address are automatically converted into hyphens. This
13096 means that variables such as &$tod_log$& can be used, because the spaces and
13097 colons will become hyphens.
13100 .option message_logs main boolean true
13101 .cindex "message log" "disabling"
13102 .cindex "log" "message log; disabling"
13103 If this option is turned off, per-message log files are not created in the
13104 &_msglog_& spool sub-directory. This reduces the amount of disk I/O required by
13105 Exim, by reducing the number of files involved in handling a message from a
13106 minimum of four (header spool file, body spool file, delivery journal, and
13107 per-message log) to three. The other major I/O activity is Exim's main log,
13108 which is not affected by this option.
13111 .option message_size_limit main string&!! 50M
13112 .cindex "message" "size limit"
13113 .cindex "limit" "message size"
13114 .cindex "size of message" "limit"
13115 This option limits the maximum size of message that Exim will process. The
13116 value is expanded for each incoming
13117 connection so, for example, it can be made to depend on the IP address of the
13118 remote host for messages arriving via TCP/IP. &*Note*&: This limit cannot be
13119 made to depend on a message's sender or any other properties of an individual
13120 message, because it has to be advertised in the server's response to EHLO.
13121 String expansion failure causes a temporary error. A value of zero means no
13122 limit, but its use is not recommended. See also &%bounce_return_size_limit%&.
13124 Incoming SMTP messages are failed with a 552 error if the limit is
13125 exceeded; locally-generated messages either get a stderr message or a delivery
13126 failure message to the sender, depending on the &%-oe%& setting. Rejection of
13127 an oversized message is logged in both the main and the reject logs. See also
13128 the generic transport option &%message_size_limit%&, which limits the size of
13129 message that an individual transport can process.
13132 .option move_frozen_messages main boolean false
13133 .cindex "frozen messages" "moving"
13134 This option, which is available only if Exim has been built with the setting
13136 SUPPORT_MOVE_FROZEN_MESSAGES=yes
13138 in &_Local/Makefile_&, causes frozen messages and their message logs to be
13139 moved from the &_input_& and &_msglog_& directories on the spool to &_Finput_&
13140 and &_Fmsglog_&, respectively. There is currently no support in Exim or the
13141 standard utilities for handling such moved messages, and they do not show up in
13142 lists generated by &%-bp%& or by the Exim monitor.
13145 .option mua_wrapper main boolean false
13146 Setting this option true causes Exim to run in a very restrictive mode in which
13147 it passes messages synchronously to a smart host. Chapter &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>&
13148 contains a full description of this facility.
13152 .option mysql_servers main "string list" unset
13153 .cindex "MySQL" "server list"
13154 This option provides a list of MySQL servers and associated connection data, to
13155 be used in conjunction with &(mysql)& lookups (see section &<<SECTsql>>&). The
13156 option is available only if Exim has been built with MySQL support.
13159 .option never_users main "string list&!!" unset
13161 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. Local
13162 message deliveries are normally run in processes that are setuid to the
13163 recipient, and remote deliveries are normally run under Exim's own uid and gid.
13164 It is usually desirable to prevent any deliveries from running as root, as a
13168 When Exim is built, an option called FIXED_NEVER_USERS can be set to a
13169 list of users that must not be used for local deliveries. This list is fixed in
13170 the binary and cannot be overridden by the configuration file. By default, it
13171 contains just the single user name &"root"&. The &%never_users%& runtime option
13172 can be used to add more users to the fixed list.
13174 If a message is to be delivered as one of the users on the fixed list or the
13175 &%never_users%& list, an error occurs, and delivery is deferred. A common
13178 never_users = root:daemon:bin
13180 Including root is redundant if it is also on the fixed list, but it does no
13181 harm. This option overrides the &%pipe_as_creator%& option of the &(pipe)&
13185 .option oracle_servers main "string list" unset
13186 .cindex "Oracle" "server list"
13187 This option provides a list of Oracle servers and associated connection data,
13188 to be used in conjunction with &(oracle)& lookups (see section &<<SECTsql>>&).
13189 The option is available only if Exim has been built with Oracle support.
13192 .option percent_hack_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13193 .cindex "&""percent hack""&"
13194 .cindex "source routing" "in email address"
13195 .cindex "address" "source-routed"
13196 The &"percent hack"& is the convention whereby a local part containing a
13197 percent sign is re-interpreted as a new email address, with the percent
13198 replaced by @. This is sometimes called &"source routing"&, though that term is
13199 also applied to RFC 2822 addresses that begin with an @ character. If this
13200 option is set, Exim implements the percent facility for those domains listed,
13201 but no others. This happens before an incoming SMTP address is tested against
13204 &*Warning*&: The &"percent hack"& has often been abused by people who are
13205 trying to get round relaying restrictions. For this reason, it is best avoided
13206 if at all possible. Unfortunately, a number of less security-conscious MTAs
13207 implement it unconditionally. If you are running Exim on a gateway host, and
13208 routing mail through to internal MTAs without processing the local parts, it is
13209 a good idea to reject recipient addresses with percent characters in their
13210 local parts. Exim's default configuration does this.
13213 .option perl_at_start main boolean false
13214 This option is available only when Exim is built with an embedded Perl
13215 interpreter. See chapter &<<CHAPperl>>& for details of its use.
13218 .option perl_startup main string unset
13219 This option is available only when Exim is built with an embedded Perl
13220 interpreter. See chapter &<<CHAPperl>>& for details of its use.
13223 .option pgsql_servers main "string list" unset
13224 .cindex "PostgreSQL lookup type" "server list"
13225 This option provides a list of PostgreSQL servers and associated connection
13226 data, to be used in conjunction with &(pgsql)& lookups (see section
13227 &<<SECTsql>>&). The option is available only if Exim has been built with
13228 PostgreSQL support.
13231 .option pid_file_path main string&!! "set at compile time"
13232 .cindex "daemon" "pid file path"
13233 .cindex "pid file" "path for"
13234 This option sets the name of the file to which the Exim daemon writes its
13235 process id. The string is expanded, so it can contain, for example, references
13238 pid_file_path = /var/log/$primary_hostname/exim.pid
13240 If no path is set, the pid is written to the file &_exim-daemon.pid_& in Exim's
13242 The value set by the option can be overridden by the &%-oP%& command line
13243 option. A pid file is not written if a &"non-standard"& daemon is run by means
13244 of the &%-oX%& option, unless a path is explicitly supplied by &%-oP%&.
13247 .option pipelining_advertise_hosts main "host list&!!" *
13248 .cindex "PIPELINING advertising" "suppressing"
13249 This option can be used to suppress the advertisement of the SMTP
13250 PIPELINING extension to specific hosts. When PIPELINING is not
13251 advertised and &%smtp_enforce_sync%& is true, an Exim server enforces strict
13252 synchronization for each SMTP command and response.
13253 When PIPELINING is advertised, Exim assumes that clients will use it; &"out
13254 of order"& commands that are &"expected"& do not count as protocol errors (see
13255 &%smtp_max_synprot_errors%&).
13258 .option preserve_message_logs main boolean false
13259 .cindex "message logs" "preserving"
13260 If this option is set, message log files are not deleted when messages are
13261 completed. Instead, they are moved to a sub-directory of the spool directory
13262 called &_msglog.OLD_&, where they remain available for statistical or debugging
13263 purposes. This is a dangerous option to set on systems with any appreciable
13264 volume of mail. Use with care!
13267 .option primary_hostname main string "see below"
13268 .cindex "name" "of local host"
13269 .cindex "host" "name of local"
13270 .cindex "local host" "name of"
13271 .cindex "&$primary_hostname$&"
13272 This specifies the name of the current host. It is used in the default EHLO or
13273 HELO command for outgoing SMTP messages (changeable via the &%helo_data%&
13274 option in the &(smtp)& transport), and as the default for &%qualify_domain%&.
13275 The value is also used by default in some SMTP response messages from an Exim
13276 server. This can be changed dynamically by setting &%smtp_active_hostname%&.
13278 If &%primary_hostname%& is not set, Exim calls &[uname()]& to find the host
13279 name. If this fails, Exim panics and dies. If the name returned by &[uname()]&
13280 contains only one component, Exim passes it to &[gethostbyname()]& (or
13281 &[getipnodebyname()]& when available) in order to obtain the fully qualified
13282 version. The variable &$primary_hostname$& contains the host name, whether set
13283 explicitly by this option, or defaulted.
13286 .option print_topbitchars main boolean false
13287 .cindex "printing characters"
13288 .cindex "8-bit characters"
13289 By default, Exim considers only those characters whose codes lie in the range
13290 32&--126 to be printing characters. In a number of circumstances (for example,
13291 when writing log entries) non-printing characters are converted into escape
13292 sequences, primarily to avoid messing up the layout. If &%print_topbitchars%&
13293 is set, code values of 128 and above are also considered to be printing
13297 .option process_log_path main string unset
13298 .cindex "process log path"
13299 .cindex "log" "process log"
13300 .cindex "&'exiwhat'&"
13301 This option sets the name of the file to which an Exim process writes its
13302 &"process log"& when sent a USR1 signal. This is used by the &'exiwhat'&
13303 utility script. If this option is unset, the file called &_exim-process.info_&
13304 in Exim's spool directory is used. The ability to specify the name explicitly
13305 can be useful in environments where two different Exims are running, using
13306 different spool directories.
13309 .option prod_requires_admin main boolean true
13310 .cindex "&%-M%& option"
13311 .cindex "&%-R%& option"
13312 .cindex "&%-q%& option"
13313 The &%-M%&, &%-R%&, and &%-q%& command-line options require the caller to be an
13314 admin user unless &%prod_requires_admin%& is set false. See also
13315 &%queue_list_requires_admin%&.
13318 .option qualify_domain main string "see below"
13319 .cindex "domain" "for qualifying addresses"
13320 .cindex "address" "qualification"
13321 This option specifies the domain name that is added to any envelope sender
13322 addresses that do not have a domain qualification. It also applies to
13323 recipient addresses if &%qualify_recipient%& is not set. Unqualified addresses
13324 are accepted by default only for locally-generated messages. Qualification is
13325 also applied to addresses in header lines such as &'From:'& and &'To:'& for
13326 locally-generated messages, unless the &%-bnq%& command line option is used.
13328 Messages from external sources must always contain fully qualified addresses,
13329 unless the sending host matches &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& or
13330 &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%& (as appropriate), in which case incoming
13331 addresses are qualified with &%qualify_domain%& or &%qualify_recipient%& as
13332 necessary. Internally, Exim always works with fully qualified envelope
13333 addresses. If &%qualify_domain%& is not set, it defaults to the
13334 &%primary_hostname%& value.
13337 .option qualify_recipient main string "see below"
13338 This option allows you to specify a different domain for qualifying recipient
13339 addresses to the one that is used for senders. See &%qualify_domain%& above.
13343 .option queue_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13344 .cindex "domain" "specifying non-immediate delivery"
13345 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13346 .cindex "message" "queueing certain domains"
13347 This option lists domains for which immediate delivery is not required.
13348 A delivery process is started whenever a message is received, but only those
13349 domains that do not match are processed. All other deliveries wait until the
13350 next queue run. See also &%hold_domains%& and &%queue_smtp_domains%&.
13353 .option queue_list_requires_admin main boolean true
13354 .cindex "&%-bp%& option"
13355 The &%-bp%& command-line option, which lists the messages that are on the
13356 queue, requires the caller to be an admin user unless
13357 &%queue_list_requires_admin%& is set false. See also &%prod_requires_admin%&.
13360 .option queue_only main boolean false
13361 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13362 .cindex "message" "queueing unconditionally"
13363 If &%queue_only%& is set, a delivery process is not automatically started
13364 whenever a message is received. Instead, the message waits on the queue for the
13365 next queue run. Even if &%queue_only%& is false, incoming messages may not get
13366 delivered immediately when certain conditions (such as heavy load) occur.
13368 The &%-odq%& command line has the same effect as &%queue_only%&. The &%-odb%&
13369 and &%-odi%& command line options override &%queue_only%& unless
13370 &%queue_only_override%& is set false. See also &%queue_only_file%&,
13371 &%queue_only_load%&, and &%smtp_accept_queue%&.
13374 .option queue_only_file main string unset
13375 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13376 .cindex "message" "queueing by file existence"
13377 This option can be set to a colon-separated list of absolute path names, each
13378 one optionally preceded by &"smtp"&. When Exim is receiving a message,
13379 it tests for the existence of each listed path using a call to &[stat()]&. For
13380 each path that exists, the corresponding queuing option is set.
13381 For paths with no prefix, &%queue_only%& is set; for paths prefixed by
13382 &"smtp"&, &%queue_smtp_domains%& is set to match all domains. So, for example,
13384 queue_only_file = smtp/some/file
13386 causes Exim to behave as if &%queue_smtp_domains%& were set to &"*"& whenever
13387 &_/some/file_& exists.
13390 .option queue_only_load main fixed-point unset
13391 .cindex "load average"
13392 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13393 .cindex "message" "queueing by load"
13394 If the system load average is higher than this value, incoming messages from
13395 all sources are queued, and no automatic deliveries are started. If this
13396 happens during local or remote SMTP input, all subsequent messages on the same
13397 connection are queued. Deliveries will subsequently be performed by queue
13398 runner processes. This option has no effect on ancient operating systems on
13399 which Exim cannot determine the load average. See also
13400 &%deliver_queue_load_max%& and &%smtp_load_reserve%&.
13403 .option queue_only_override main boolean true
13404 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13405 When this option is true, the &%-od%&&'x'& command line options override the
13406 setting of &%queue_only%& or &%queue_only_file%& in the configuration file. If
13407 &%queue_only_override%& is set false, the &%-od%&&'x'& options cannot be used
13408 to override; they are accepted, but ignored.
13411 .option queue_run_in_order main boolean false
13412 .cindex "queue runner" "processing messages in order"
13413 If this option is set, queue runs happen in order of message arrival instead of
13414 in an arbitrary order. For this to happen, a complete list of the entire queue
13415 must be set up before the deliveries start. When the queue is all held in a
13416 single directory (the default),
13418 a single list is created for both the ordered and the non-ordered cases.
13419 However, if &%split_spool_directory%& is set, a single list is not created when
13420 &%queue_run_in_order%& is false. In this case, the sub-directories are
13421 processed one at a time (in a random order), and this avoids setting up one
13422 huge list for the whole queue. Thus, setting &%queue_run_in_order%& with
13423 &%split_spool_directory%& may degrade performance when the queue is large,
13424 because of the extra work in setting up the single, large list. In most
13425 situations, &%queue_run_in_order%& should not be set.
13429 .option queue_run_max main integer 5
13430 .cindex "queue runner" "maximum number of"
13431 This controls the maximum number of queue runner processes that an Exim daemon
13432 can run simultaneously. This does not mean that it starts them all at once,
13433 but rather that if the maximum number are still running when the time comes to
13434 start another one, it refrains from starting another one. This can happen with
13435 very large queues and/or very sluggish deliveries. This option does not,
13436 however, interlock with other processes, so additional queue runners can be
13437 started by other means, or by killing and restarting the daemon.
13440 Setting this option to zero does not suppress queue runs; rather, it disables
13441 the limit, allowing any number of simultaneous queue runner processes to be
13442 run. If you do not want queue runs to occur, omit the &%-q%&&'xx'& setting on
13443 the daemon's command line.
13446 .option queue_smtp_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13447 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13448 .cindex "message" "queueing remote deliveries"
13449 When this option is set, a delivery process is started whenever a message is
13450 received, routing is performed, and local deliveries take place.
13451 However, if any SMTP deliveries are required for domains that match
13452 &%queue_smtp_domains%&, they are not immediately delivered, but instead the
13453 message waits on the queue for the next queue run. Since routing of the message
13454 has taken place, Exim knows to which remote hosts it must be delivered, and so
13455 when the queue run happens, multiple messages for the same host are delivered
13456 over a single SMTP connection. The &%-odqs%& command line option causes all
13457 SMTP deliveries to be queued in this way, and is equivalent to setting
13458 &%queue_smtp_domains%& to &"*"&. See also &%hold_domains%& and
13462 .option receive_timeout main time 0s
13463 .cindex "timeout" "for non-SMTP input"
13464 This option sets the timeout for accepting a non-SMTP message, that is, the
13465 maximum time that Exim waits when reading a message on the standard input. If
13466 the value is zero, it will wait for ever. This setting is overridden by the
13467 &%-or%& command line option. The timeout for incoming SMTP messages is
13468 controlled by &%smtp_receive_timeout%&.
13470 .option received_header_text main string&!! "see below"
13471 .cindex "customizing" "&'Received:'& header"
13472 .cindex "&'Received:'& header line" "customizing"
13473 This string defines the contents of the &'Received:'& message header that is
13474 added to each message, except for the timestamp, which is automatically added
13475 on at the end (preceded by a semicolon). The string is expanded each time it is
13476 used. If the expansion yields an empty string, no &'Received:'& header line is
13477 added to the message. Otherwise, the string should start with the text
13478 &"Received:"& and conform to the RFC 2822 specification for &'Received:'&
13479 header lines. The default setting is:
13483 received_header_text = Received: \
13484 ${if def:sender_rcvhost {from $sender_rcvhost\n\t}\
13485 {${if def:sender_ident \
13486 {from ${quote_local_part: $sender_ident} }}\
13487 ${if def:sender_helo_name {(helo=$sender_helo_name)\n\t}}}}\
13488 by $primary_hostname \
13489 ${if def:received_protocol {with $received_protocol}} \
13490 ${if def:tls_cipher {($tls_cipher)\n\t}}\
13491 (Exim $version_number)\n\t\
13492 ${if def:sender_address \
13493 {(envelope-from <$sender_address>)\n\t}}\
13494 id $message_exim_id\
13495 ${if def:received_for {\n\tfor $received_for}}
13499 The reference to the TLS cipher is omitted when Exim is built without TLS
13500 support. The use of conditional expansions ensures that this works for both
13501 locally generated messages and messages received from remote hosts, giving
13502 header lines such as the following:
13504 Received: from scrooge.carol.example ([192.168.12.25] ident=root)
13505 by marley.carol.example with esmtp (Exim 4.00)
13506 (envelope-from <bob@carol.example>)
13507 id 16IOWa-00019l-00
13508 for chas@dickens.example; Tue, 25 Dec 2001 14:43:44 +0000
13509 Received: by scrooge.carol.example with local (Exim 4.00)
13510 id 16IOWW-000083-00; Tue, 25 Dec 2001 14:43:41 +0000
13512 Until the body of the message has been received, the timestamp is the time when
13513 the message started to be received. Once the body has arrived, and all policy
13514 checks have taken place, the timestamp is updated to the time at which the
13515 message was accepted.
13518 .option received_headers_max main integer 30
13519 .cindex "loop" "prevention"
13520 .cindex "mail loop prevention"
13521 .cindex "&'Received:'& header line" "counting"
13522 When a message is to be delivered, the number of &'Received:'& headers is
13523 counted, and if it is greater than this parameter, a mail loop is assumed to
13524 have occurred, the delivery is abandoned, and an error message is generated.
13525 This applies to both local and remote deliveries.
13528 .option recipient_unqualified_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
13529 .cindex "unqualified addresses"
13530 .cindex "host" "unqualified addresses from"
13531 This option lists those hosts from which Exim is prepared to accept unqualified
13532 recipient addresses in message envelopes. The addresses are made fully
13533 qualified by the addition of the &%qualify_recipient%& value. This option also
13534 affects message header lines. Exim does not reject unqualified recipient
13535 addresses in headers, but it qualifies them only if the message came from a
13536 host that matches &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&,
13537 or if the message was submitted locally (not using TCP/IP), and the &%-bnq%&
13538 option was not set.
13541 .option recipients_max main integer 0
13542 .cindex "limit" "number of recipients"
13543 .cindex "recipient" "maximum number"
13544 If this option is set greater than zero, it specifies the maximum number of
13545 original recipients for any message. Additional recipients that are generated
13546 by aliasing or forwarding do not count. SMTP messages get a 452 response for
13547 all recipients over the limit; earlier recipients are delivered as normal.
13548 Non-SMTP messages with too many recipients are failed, and no deliveries are
13551 .cindex "RCPT" "maximum number of incoming"
13552 &*Note*&: The RFCs specify that an SMTP server should accept at least 100
13553 RCPT commands in a single message.
13556 .option recipients_max_reject main boolean false
13557 If this option is set true, Exim rejects SMTP messages containing too many
13558 recipients by giving 552 errors to the surplus RCPT commands, and a 554
13559 error to the eventual DATA command. Otherwise (the default) it gives a 452
13560 error to the surplus RCPT commands and accepts the message on behalf of the
13561 initial set of recipients. The remote server should then re-send the message
13562 for the remaining recipients at a later time.
13565 .option remote_max_parallel main integer 2
13566 .cindex "delivery" "parallelism for remote"
13567 This option controls parallel delivery of one message to a number of remote
13568 hosts. If the value is less than 2, parallel delivery is disabled, and Exim
13569 does all the remote deliveries for a message one by one. Otherwise, if a single
13570 message has to be delivered to more than one remote host, or if several copies
13571 have to be sent to the same remote host, up to &%remote_max_parallel%&
13572 deliveries are done simultaneously. If more than &%remote_max_parallel%&
13573 deliveries are required, the maximum number of processes are started, and as
13574 each one finishes, another is begun. The order of starting processes is the
13575 same as if sequential delivery were being done, and can be controlled by the
13576 &%remote_sort_domains%& option. If parallel delivery takes place while running
13577 with debugging turned on, the debugging output from each delivery process is
13578 tagged with its process id.
13580 This option controls only the maximum number of parallel deliveries for one
13581 message in one Exim delivery process. Because Exim has no central queue
13582 manager, there is no way of controlling the total number of simultaneous
13583 deliveries if the configuration allows a delivery attempt as soon as a message
13586 .cindex "number of deliveries"
13587 .cindex "delivery" "maximum number of"
13588 If you want to control the total number of deliveries on the system, you
13589 need to set the &%queue_only%& option. This ensures that all incoming messages
13590 are added to the queue without starting a delivery process. Then set up an Exim
13591 daemon to start queue runner processes at appropriate intervals (probably
13592 fairly often, for example, every minute), and limit the total number of queue
13593 runners by setting the &%queue_run_max%& parameter. Because each queue runner
13594 delivers only one message at a time, the maximum number of deliveries that can
13595 then take place at once is &%queue_run_max%& multiplied by
13596 &%remote_max_parallel%&.
13598 If it is purely remote deliveries you want to control, use
13599 &%queue_smtp_domains%& instead of &%queue_only%&. This has the added benefit of
13600 doing the SMTP routing before queuing, so that several messages for the same
13601 host will eventually get delivered down the same connection.
13604 .option remote_sort_domains main "domain list&!!" unset
13605 .cindex "sorting remote deliveries"
13606 .cindex "delivery" "sorting remote"
13607 When there are a number of remote deliveries for a message, they are sorted by
13608 domain into the order given by this list. For example,
13610 remote_sort_domains = *.cam.ac.uk:*.uk
13612 would attempt to deliver to all addresses in the &'cam.ac.uk'& domain first,
13613 then to those in the &%uk%& domain, then to any others.
13616 .option retry_data_expire main time 7d
13617 .cindex "hints database" "data expiry"
13618 This option sets a &"use before"& time on retry information in Exim's hints
13619 database. Any older retry data is ignored. This means that, for example, once a
13620 host has not been tried for 7 days, Exim behaves as if it has no knowledge of
13624 .option retry_interval_max main time 24h
13625 .cindex "retry" "limit on interval"
13626 .cindex "limit" "on retry interval"
13627 Chapter &<<CHAPretry>>& describes Exim's mechanisms for controlling the
13628 intervals between delivery attempts for messages that cannot be delivered
13629 straight away. This option sets an overall limit to the length of time between
13633 .option return_path_remove main boolean true
13634 .cindex "&'Return-path:'& header line" "removing"
13635 RFC 2821, section 4.4, states that an SMTP server must insert a
13636 &'Return-path:'& header line into a message when it makes a &"final delivery"&.
13637 The &'Return-path:'& header preserves the sender address as received in the
13638 MAIL command. This description implies that this header should not be present
13639 in an incoming message. If &%return_path_remove%& is true, any existing
13640 &'Return-path:'& headers are removed from messages at the time they are
13641 received. Exim's transports have options for adding &'Return-path:'& headers at
13642 the time of delivery. They are normally used only for final local deliveries.
13645 .option return_size_limit main integer 100K
13646 This option is an obsolete synonym for &%bounce_return_size_limit%&.
13649 .option rfc1413_hosts main "host list&!!" *
13651 .cindex "host" "for RFC 1413 calls"
13652 RFC 1413 identification calls are made to any client host which matches an item
13656 .option rfc1413_query_timeout main time 30s
13657 .cindex "RFC 1413" "query timeout"
13658 .cindex "timeout" "for RFC 1413 call"
13659 This sets the timeout on RFC 1413 identification calls. If it is set to zero,
13660 no RFC 1413 calls are ever made.
13663 .option sender_unqualified_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
13664 .cindex "unqualified addresses"
13665 .cindex "host" "unqualified addresses from"
13666 This option lists those hosts from which Exim is prepared to accept unqualified
13667 sender addresses. The addresses are made fully qualified by the addition of
13668 &%qualify_domain%&. This option also affects message header lines. Exim does
13669 not reject unqualified addresses in headers that contain sender addresses, but
13670 it qualifies them only if the message came from a host that matches
13671 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%&, or if the message was submitted locally (not
13672 using TCP/IP), and the &%-bnq%& option was not set.
13675 .option smtp_accept_keepalive main boolean true
13676 .cindex "keepalive" "on incoming connection"
13677 This option controls the setting of the SO_KEEPALIVE option on incoming
13678 TCP/IP socket connections. When set, it causes the kernel to probe idle
13679 connections periodically, by sending packets with &"old"& sequence numbers. The
13680 other end of the connection should send an acknowledgement if the connection is
13681 still okay or a reset if the connection has been aborted. The reason for doing
13682 this is that it has the beneficial effect of freeing up certain types of
13683 connection that can get stuck when the remote host is disconnected without
13684 tidying up the TCP/IP call properly. The keepalive mechanism takes several
13685 hours to detect unreachable hosts.
13689 .option smtp_accept_max main integer 20
13690 .cindex "limit" "incoming SMTP connections"
13691 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming connection count"
13693 This option specifies the maximum number of simultaneous incoming SMTP calls
13694 that Exim will accept. It applies only to the listening daemon; there is no
13695 control (in Exim) when incoming SMTP is being handled by &'inetd'&. If the
13696 value is set to zero, no limit is applied. However, it is required to be
13697 non-zero if either &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& or &%smtp_accept_queue%& is
13698 set. See also &%smtp_accept_reserve%&.
13702 .option smtp_accept_max_nonmail main integer 10
13703 .cindex "limit" "non-mail SMTP commands"
13704 .cindex "SMTP" "limiting non-mail commands"
13705 Exim counts the number of &"non-mail"& commands in an SMTP session, and drops
13706 the connection if there are too many. This option defines &"too many"&. The
13707 check catches some denial-of-service attacks, repeated failing AUTHs, or a mad
13708 client looping sending EHLO, for example. The check is applied only if the
13709 client host matches &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%&.
13711 When a new message is expected, one occurrence of RSET is not counted. This
13712 allows a client to send one RSET between messages (this is not necessary,
13713 but some clients do it). Exim also allows one uncounted occurence of HELO
13714 or EHLO, and one occurrence of STARTTLS between messages. After
13715 starting up a TLS session, another EHLO is expected, and so it too is not
13716 counted. The first occurrence of AUTH in a connection, or immediately
13717 following STARTTLS is not counted. Otherwise, all commands other than
13718 MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and QUIT are counted.
13721 .option smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts main "host list&!!" *
13722 You can control which hosts are subject to the &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%&
13723 check by setting this option. The default value makes it apply to all hosts. By
13724 changing the value, you can exclude any badly-behaved hosts that you have to
13729 .option smtp_accept_max_per_connection main integer 1000
13730 .cindex "SMTP incoming message count" "limiting"
13731 .cindex "limit" "messages per SMTP connection"
13732 The value of this option limits the number of MAIL commands that Exim is
13733 prepared to accept over a single SMTP connection, whether or not each command
13734 results in the transfer of a message. After the limit is reached, a 421
13735 response is given to subsequent MAIL commands. This limit is a safety
13736 precaution against a client that goes mad (incidents of this type have been
13740 .option smtp_accept_max_per_host main string&!! unset
13741 .cindex "limit" "SMTP connections from one host"
13742 .cindex "host" "limiting SMTP connections from"
13743 This option restricts the number of simultaneous IP connections from a single
13744 host (strictly, from a single IP address) to the Exim daemon. The option is
13745 expanded, to enable different limits to be applied to different hosts by
13746 reference to &$sender_host_address$&. Once the limit is reached, additional
13747 connection attempts from the same host are rejected with error code 421. The
13748 default value of zero imposes no limit. If this option is set, it is required
13749 that &%smtp_accept_max%& be non-zero.
13751 &*Warning*&: When setting this option you should not use any expansion
13752 constructions that take an appreciable amount of time. The expansion and test
13753 happen in the main daemon loop, in order to reject additional connections
13754 without forking additional processes (otherwise a denial-of-service attack
13755 could cause a vast number or processes to be created). While the daemon is
13756 doing this processing, it cannot accept any other incoming connections.
13760 .option smtp_accept_queue main integer 0
13761 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming connection count"
13762 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13763 .cindex "message" "queueing by SMTP connection count"
13764 If the number of simultaneous incoming SMTP calls handled via the listening
13765 daemon exceeds this value, messages received by SMTP are just placed on the
13766 queue; no delivery processes are started automatically. A value of zero implies
13767 no limit, and clearly any non-zero value is useful only if it is less than the
13768 &%smtp_accept_max%& value (unless that is zero). See also &%queue_only%&,
13769 &%queue_only_load%&, &%queue_smtp_domains%&, and the various &%-od%&&'x'&
13770 command line options.
13773 .option smtp_accept_queue_per_connection main integer 10
13774 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
13775 .cindex "message" "queueing by message count"
13776 This option limits the number of delivery processes that Exim starts
13777 automatically when receiving messages via SMTP, whether via the daemon or by
13778 the use of &%-bs%& or &%-bS%&. If the value of the option is greater than zero,
13779 and the number of messages received in a single SMTP session exceeds this
13780 number, subsequent messages are placed on the queue, but no delivery processes
13781 are started. This helps to limit the number of Exim processes when a server
13782 restarts after downtime and there is a lot of mail waiting for it on other
13783 systems. On large systems, the default should probably be increased, and on
13784 dial-in client systems it should probably be set to zero (that is, disabled).
13787 .option smtp_accept_reserve main integer 0
13788 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming call count"
13789 .cindex "host" "reserved"
13790 When &%smtp_accept_max%& is set greater than zero, this option specifies a
13791 number of SMTP connections that are reserved for connections from the hosts
13792 that are specified in &%smtp_reserve_hosts%&. The value set in
13793 &%smtp_accept_max%& includes this reserve pool. The specified hosts are not
13794 restricted to this number of connections; the option specifies a minimum number
13795 of connection slots for them, not a maximum. It is a guarantee that that group
13796 of hosts can always get at least &%smtp_accept_reserve%& connections.
13798 For example, if &%smtp_accept_max%& is set to 50 and &%smtp_accept_reserve%& is
13799 set to 5, once there are 45 active connections (from any hosts), new
13800 connections are accepted only from hosts listed in &%smtp_reserve_hosts%&.
13801 See also &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%&.
13804 .option smtp_active_hostname main string&!! unset
13805 .cindex "host" "name in SMTP responses"
13806 .cindex "SMTP" "host name in responses"
13807 .cindex "&$primary_hostname$&"
13808 This option is provided for multi-homed servers that want to masquerade as
13809 several different hosts. At the start of an SMTP connection, its value is
13810 expanded and used instead of the value of &$primary_hostname$& in SMTP
13811 responses. For example, it is used as domain name in the response to an
13812 incoming HELO or EHLO command.
13814 .cindex "&$smtp_active_hostname$&"
13815 It is also used in HELO commands for callout verification. The active hostname
13816 is placed in the &$smtp_active_hostname$& variable, which is saved with any
13817 messages that are received. It is therefore available for use in routers and
13818 transports when the message is later delivered.
13820 If this option is unset, or if its expansion is forced to fail, or if the
13821 expansion results in an empty string, the value of &$primary_hostname$& is
13822 used. Other expansion failures cause a message to be written to the main and
13823 panic logs, and the SMTP command receives a temporary error. Typically, the
13824 value of &%smtp_active_hostname%& depends on the incoming interface address.
13827 smtp_active_hostname = ${if eq{$interface_address}{10.0.0.1}\
13828 {cox.mydomain}{box.mydomain}}
13831 .option smtp_banner main string&!! "see below"
13832 .cindex "SMTP" "welcome banner"
13833 .cindex "banner for SMTP"
13834 .cindex "welcome banner for SMTP"
13835 .cindex "customizing" "SMTP banner"
13836 This string, which is expanded every time it is used, is output as the initial
13837 positive response to an SMTP connection. The default setting is:
13839 smtp_banner = $smtp_active_hostname ESMTP Exim \
13840 $version_number $tod_full
13842 Failure to expand the string causes a panic error. If you want to create a
13843 multiline response to the initial SMTP connection, use &"\n"& in the string at
13844 appropriate points, but not at the end. Note that the 220 code is not included
13845 in this string. Exim adds it automatically (several times in the case of a
13846 multiline response).
13849 .option smtp_check_spool_space main boolean true
13850 .cindex "checking disk space"
13851 .cindex "disk space" "checking"
13852 .cindex "spool directory" "checking space"
13853 When this option is set, if an incoming SMTP session encounters the SIZE
13854 option on a MAIL command, it checks that there is enough space in the
13855 spool directory's partition to accept a message of that size, while still
13856 leaving free the amount specified by &%check_spool_space%& (even if that value
13857 is zero). If there isn't enough space, a temporary error code is returned.
13860 .option smtp_connect_backlog main integer 20
13861 .cindex "connection backlog"
13862 .cindex "SMTP" "connection backlog"
13863 .cindex "backlog of connections"
13864 This option specifies a maximum number of waiting SMTP connections. Exim passes
13865 this value to the TCP/IP system when it sets up its listener. Once this number
13866 of connections are waiting for the daemon's attention, subsequent connection
13867 attempts are refused at the TCP/IP level. At least, that is what the manuals
13868 say; in some circumstances such connection attempts have been observed to time
13869 out instead. For large systems it is probably a good idea to increase the
13870 value (to 50, say). It also gives some protection against denial-of-service
13871 attacks by SYN flooding.
13874 .option smtp_enforce_sync main boolean true
13875 .cindex "SMTP" "synchronization checking"
13876 .cindex "synchronization checking in SMTP"
13877 The SMTP protocol specification requires the client to wait for a response from
13878 the server at certain points in the dialogue. Without PIPELINING these
13879 synchronization points are after every command; with PIPELINING they are
13880 fewer, but they still exist.
13882 Some spamming sites send out a complete set of SMTP commands without waiting
13883 for any response. Exim protects against this by rejecting a message if the
13884 client has sent further input when it should not have. The error response &"554
13885 SMTP synchronization error"& is sent, and the connection is dropped. Testing
13886 for this error cannot be perfect because of transmission delays (unexpected
13887 input may be on its way but not yet received when Exim checks). However, it
13888 does detect many instances.
13890 The check can be globally disabled by setting &%smtp_enforce_sync%& false.
13891 If you want to disable the check selectively (for example, only for certain
13892 hosts), you can do so by an appropriate use of a &%control%& modifier in an ACL
13893 (see section &<<SECTcontrols>>&). See also &%pipelining_advertise_hosts%&.
13897 .option smtp_etrn_command main string&!! unset
13898 .cindex "ETRN" "command to be run"
13899 .cindex "&$domain$&"
13900 If this option is set, the given command is run whenever an SMTP ETRN
13901 command is received from a host that is permitted to issue such commands (see
13902 chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&). The string is split up into separate arguments which
13903 are independently expanded. The expansion variable &$domain$& is set to the
13904 argument of the ETRN command, and no syntax checking is done on it. For
13907 smtp_etrn_command = /etc/etrn_command $domain \
13908 $sender_host_address
13910 A new process is created to run the command, but Exim does not wait for it to
13911 complete. Consequently, its status cannot be checked. If the command cannot be
13912 run, a line is written to the panic log, but the ETRN caller still receives
13913 a 250 success response. Exim is normally running under its own uid when
13914 receiving SMTP, so it is not possible for it to change the uid before running
13918 .option smtp_etrn_serialize main boolean true
13919 .cindex "ETRN" "serializing"
13920 When this option is set, it prevents the simultaneous execution of more than
13921 one identical command as a result of ETRN in an SMTP connection. See
13922 section &<<SECTETRN>>& for details.
13925 .option smtp_load_reserve main fixed-point unset
13926 .cindex "load average"
13927 If the system load average ever gets higher than this, incoming SMTP calls are
13928 accepted only from those hosts that match an entry in &%smtp_reserve_hosts%&.
13929 If &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& is not set, no incoming SMTP calls are accepted when
13930 the load is over the limit. The option has no effect on ancient operating
13931 systems on which Exim cannot determine the load average. See also
13932 &%deliver_queue_load_max%& and &%queue_only_load%&.
13936 .option smtp_max_synprot_errors main integer 3
13937 .cindex "SMTP" "limiting syntax and protocol errors"
13938 .cindex "limit" "SMTP syntax and protocol errors"
13939 Exim rejects SMTP commands that contain syntax or protocol errors. In
13940 particular, a syntactically invalid email address, as in this command:
13942 RCPT TO:<abc xyz@a.b.c>
13944 causes immediate rejection of the command, before any other tests are done.
13945 (The ACL cannot be run if there is no valid address to set up for it.) An
13946 example of a protocol error is receiving RCPT before MAIL. If there are
13947 too many syntax or protocol errors in one SMTP session, the connection is
13948 dropped. The limit is set by this option.
13950 .cindex "PIPELINING" "expected errors"
13951 When the PIPELINING extension to SMTP is in use, some protocol errors are
13952 &"expected"&, for instance, a RCPT command after a rejected MAIL command.
13953 Exim assumes that PIPELINING will be used if it advertises it (see
13954 &%pipelining_advertise_hosts%&), and in this situation, &"expected"& errors do
13955 not count towards the limit.
13959 .option smtp_max_unknown_commands main integer 3
13960 .cindex "SMTP" "limiting unknown commands"
13961 .cindex "limit" "unknown SMTP commands"
13962 If there are too many unrecognized commands in an incoming SMTP session, an
13963 Exim server drops the connection. This is a defence against some kinds of abuse
13966 into making connections to SMTP ports; in these circumstances, a number of
13967 non-SMTP command lines are sent first.
13971 .option smtp_ratelimit_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
13972 .cindex "SMTP" "rate limiting"
13973 .cindex "limit" "rate of message arrival"
13974 .cindex "RCPT" "rate limiting"
13975 Some sites find it helpful to be able to limit the rate at which certain hosts
13976 can send them messages, and the rate at which an individual message can specify
13980 Exim has two rate-limiting facilities. This section describes the older
13981 facility, which can limit rates within a single connection. The newer
13982 &%ratelimit%& ACL condition can limit rates across all connections. See section
13983 &<<SECTratelimiting>>& for details of the newer facility.
13986 When a host matches &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%&, the values of
13987 &%smtp_ratelimit_mail%& and &%smtp_ratelimit_rcpt%& are used to control the
13988 rate of acceptance of MAIL and RCPT commands in a single SMTP session,
13989 respectively. Each option, if set, must contain a set of four comma-separated
13993 A threshold, before which there is no rate limiting.
13995 An initial time delay. Unlike other times in Exim, numbers with decimal
13996 fractional parts are allowed here.
13998 A factor by which to increase the delay each time.
14000 A maximum value for the delay. This should normally be less than 5 minutes,
14001 because after that time, the client is liable to timeout the SMTP command.
14004 For example, these settings have been used successfully at the site which
14005 first suggested this feature, for controlling mail from their customers:
14007 smtp_ratelimit_mail = 2,0.5s,1.05,4m
14008 smtp_ratelimit_rcpt = 4,0.25s,1.015,4m
14010 The first setting specifies delays that are applied to MAIL commands after
14011 two have been received over a single connection. The initial delay is 0.5
14012 seconds, increasing by a factor of 1.05 each time. The second setting applies
14013 delays to RCPT commands when more than four occur in a single message.
14016 .option smtp_ratelimit_mail main string unset
14017 See &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& above.
14020 .option smtp_ratelimit_rcpt main string unset
14021 See &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& above.
14024 .option smtp_receive_timeout main time 5m
14025 .cindex "timeout" "for SMTP input"
14026 .cindex "SMTP timeout" "input"
14027 This sets a timeout value for SMTP reception. It applies to all forms of SMTP
14028 input, including batch SMTP. If a line of input (either an SMTP command or a
14029 data line) is not received within this time, the SMTP connection is dropped and
14030 the message is abandoned.
14031 A line is written to the log containing one of the following messages:
14033 SMTP command timeout on connection from...
14034 SMTP data timeout on connection from...
14036 The former means that Exim was expecting to read an SMTP command; the latter
14037 means that it was in the DATA phase, reading the contents of a message.
14040 .cindex "&%-os%& option"
14041 The value set by this option can be overridden by the
14042 &%-os%& command-line option. A setting of zero time disables the timeout, but
14043 this should never be used for SMTP over TCP/IP. (It can be useful in some cases
14044 of local input using &%-bs%& or &%-bS%&.) For non-SMTP input, the reception
14045 timeout is controlled by &%receive_timeout%& and &%-or%&.
14048 .option smtp_reserve_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14049 This option defines hosts for which SMTP connections are reserved; see
14050 &%smtp_accept_reserve%& and &%smtp_load_reserve%& above.
14053 .option smtp_return_error_details main boolean false
14054 .cindex "SMTP" "details policy failures"
14055 .cindex "policy control rejection" "returning details"
14056 In the default state, Exim uses bland messages such as
14057 &"Administrative prohibition"& when it rejects SMTP commands for policy
14058 reasons. Many sysadmins like this because it gives away little information
14059 to spammers. However, some other syadmins who are applying strict checking
14060 policies want to give out much fuller information about failures. Setting
14061 &%smtp_return_error_details%& true causes Exim to be more forthcoming. For
14062 example, instead of &"Administrative prohibition"&, it might give:
14064 550-Rejected after DATA: '>' missing at end of address:
14065 550 failing address in "From" header is: <user@dom.ain
14068 .option spamd_address main string "see below"
14069 This option is available when Exim is compiled with the content-scanning
14070 extension. It specifies how Exim connects to SpamAssassin's &%spamd%& daemon.
14071 The default value is
14075 See section &<<SECTscanspamass>>& for more details.
14079 .option split_spool_directory main boolean false
14080 .cindex "multiple spool directories"
14081 .cindex "spool directory" "split"
14082 .cindex "directories" "multiple"
14083 If this option is set, it causes Exim to split its input directory into 62
14084 subdirectories, each with a single alphanumeric character as its name. The
14085 sixth character of the message id is used to allocate messages to
14086 subdirectories; this is the least significant base-62 digit of the time of
14087 arrival of the message.
14089 Splitting up the spool in this way may provide better performance on systems
14090 where there are long mail queues, by reducing the number of files in any one
14091 directory. The msglog directory is also split up in a similar way to the input
14092 directory; however, if &%preserve_message_logs%& is set, all old msglog files
14093 are still placed in the single directory &_msglog.OLD_&.
14095 It is not necessary to take any special action for existing messages when
14096 changing &%split_spool_directory%&. Exim notices messages that are in the
14097 &"wrong"& place, and continues to process them. If the option is turned off
14098 after a period of being on, the subdirectories will eventually empty and be
14099 automatically deleted.
14101 When &%split_spool_directory%& is set, the behaviour of queue runner processes
14102 changes. Instead of creating a list of all messages in the queue, and then
14103 trying to deliver each one in turn, it constructs a list of those in one
14104 sub-directory and tries to deliver them, before moving on to the next
14105 sub-directory. The sub-directories are processed in a random order. This
14106 spreads out the scanning of the input directories, and uses less memory. It is
14107 particularly beneficial when there are lots of messages on the queue. However,
14108 if &%queue_run_in_order%& is set, none of this new processing happens. The
14109 entire queue has to be scanned and sorted before any deliveries can start.
14112 .option spool_directory main string&!! "set at compile time"
14113 .cindex "spool directory" "path to"
14114 This defines the directory in which Exim keeps its spool, that is, the messages
14115 it is waiting to deliver. The default value is taken from the compile-time
14116 configuration setting, if there is one. If not, this option must be set. The
14117 string is expanded, so it can contain, for example, a reference to
14118 &$primary_hostname$&.
14120 If the spool directory name is fixed on your installation, it is recommended
14121 that you set it at build time rather than from this option, particularly if the
14122 log files are being written to the spool directory (see &%log_file_path%&).
14123 Otherwise log files cannot be used for errors that are detected early on, such
14124 as failures in the configuration file.
14126 By using this option to override the compiled-in path, it is possible to run
14127 tests of Exim without using the standard spool.
14130 .option sqlite_lock_timeout main time 5s
14131 .cindex "sqlite" "lock timeout"
14132 This option controls the timeout that the &(sqlite)& lookup uses when trying to
14133 access an SQLite database. See section &<<SECTsqlite>>& for more details.
14136 .option strip_excess_angle_brackets main boolean false
14137 .cindex "angle brackets" "excess"
14138 If this option is set, redundant pairs of angle brackets round &"route-addr"&
14139 items in addresses are stripped. For example, &'<<xxx@a.b.c.d>>'& is
14140 treated as &'<xxx@a.b.c.d>'&. If this is in the envelope and the message is
14141 passed on to another MTA, the excess angle brackets are not passed on. If this
14142 option is not set, multiple pairs of angle brackets cause a syntax error.
14145 .option strip_trailing_dot main boolean false
14146 .cindex "trailing dot on domain"
14147 .cindex "dot" "trailing on domain"
14148 If this option is set, a trailing dot at the end of a domain in an address is
14149 ignored. If this is in the envelope and the message is passed on to another
14150 MTA, the dot is not passed on. If this option is not set, a dot at the end of a
14151 domain causes a syntax error.
14152 However, addresses in header lines are checked only when an ACL requests header
14156 .option syslog_duplication main boolean true
14157 .cindex "syslog" "duplicate log lines; suppressing"
14158 When Exim is logging to syslog, it writes the log lines for its three
14159 separate logs at different syslog priorities so that they can in principle
14160 be separated on the logging hosts. Some installations do not require this
14161 separation, and in those cases, the duplication of certain log lines is a
14162 nuisance. If &%syslog_duplication%& is set false, only one copy of any
14163 particular log line is written to syslog. For lines that normally go to
14164 both the main log and the reject log, the reject log version (possibly
14165 containing message header lines) is written, at LOG_NOTICE priority.
14166 Lines that normally go to both the main and the panic log are written at
14167 the LOG_ALERT priority.
14170 .option syslog_facility main string unset
14171 .cindex "syslog" "facility; setting"
14172 This option sets the syslog &"facility"& name, used when Exim is logging to
14173 syslog. The value must be one of the strings &"mail"&, &"user"&, &"news"&,
14174 &"uucp"&, &"daemon"&, or &"local&'x'&"& where &'x'& is a digit between 0 and 7.
14175 If this option is unset, &"mail"& is used. See chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& for
14176 details of Exim's logging.
14180 .option syslog_processname main string &`exim`&
14181 .cindex "syslog" "process name; setting"
14182 This option sets the syslog &"ident"& name, used when Exim is logging to
14183 syslog. The value must be no longer than 32 characters. See chapter
14184 &<<CHAPlog>>& for details of Exim's logging.
14188 .option syslog_timestamp main boolean true
14189 .cindex "syslog" "timestamps"
14190 If &%syslog_timestamp%& is set false, the timestamps on Exim's log lines are
14191 omitted when these lines are sent to syslog. See chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& for
14192 details of Exim's logging.
14195 .option system_filter main string&!! unset
14196 .cindex "filter" "system filter"
14197 .cindex "system filter" "specifying"
14198 .cindex "Sieve filter" "not available for system filter"
14199 This option specifies an Exim filter file that is applied to all messages at
14200 the start of each delivery attempt, before any routing is done. System filters
14201 must be Exim filters; they cannot be Sieve filters. If the system filter
14202 generates any deliveries to files or pipes, or any new mail messages, the
14203 appropriate &%system_filter_..._transport%& option(s) must be set, to define
14204 which transports are to be used. Details of this facility are given in chapter
14205 &<<CHAPsystemfilter>>&.
14208 .option system_filter_directory_transport main string&!! unset
14209 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
14210 This sets the name of the transport driver that is to be used when the
14211 &%save%& command in a system message filter specifies a path ending in &"/"&,
14212 implying delivery of each message into a separate file in some directory.
14213 During the delivery, the variable &$address_file$& contains the path name.
14216 .option system_filter_file_transport main string&!! unset
14217 .cindex "file" "transport for system filter"
14218 This sets the name of the transport driver that is to be used when the &%save%&
14219 command in a system message filter specifies a path not ending in &"/"&. During
14220 the delivery, the variable &$address_file$& contains the path name.
14222 .option system_filter_group main string unset
14223 .cindex "gid (group id)" "system filter"
14224 This option is used only when &%system_filter_user%& is also set. It sets the
14225 gid under which the system filter is run, overriding any gid that is associated
14226 with the user. The value may be numerical or symbolic.
14228 .option system_filter_pipe_transport main string&!! unset
14229 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "for system filter"
14230 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
14231 This specifies the transport driver that is to be used when a &%pipe%& command
14232 is used in a system filter. During the delivery, the variable &$address_pipe$&
14233 contains the pipe command.
14236 .option system_filter_reply_transport main string&!! unset
14237 .cindex "&(autoreply)& transport" "for system filter"
14238 This specifies the transport driver that is to be used when a &%mail%& command
14239 is used in a system filter.
14241 .option system_filter_user main string unset
14242 .cindex "uid (user id)" "system filter"
14243 If this option is not set, the system filter is run in the main Exim delivery
14244 process, as root. When the option is set, the system filter runs in a separate
14245 process, as the given user. Unless the string consists entirely of digits, it
14246 is looked up in the password data. Failure to find the named user causes a
14247 configuration error. The gid is either taken from the password data, or
14248 specified by &%system_filter_group%&. When the uid is specified numerically,
14249 &%system_filter_group%& is required to be set.
14251 If the system filter generates any pipe, file, or reply deliveries, the uid
14252 under which the filter is run is used when transporting them, unless a
14253 transport option overrides. Normally you should set &%system_filter_user%& if
14254 your system filter generates these kinds of delivery.
14257 .option tcp_nodelay main boolean true
14258 .cindex "daemon" "TCP_NODELAY on sockets"
14259 .cindex "Nagle algorithm"
14260 .cindex "TCP_NODELAY on listening sockets"
14261 If this option is set false, it stops the Exim daemon setting the
14262 TCP_NODELAY option on its listening sockets. Setting TCP_NODELAY
14263 turns off the &"Nagle algorithm"&, which is a way of improving network
14264 performance in interactive (character-by-character) situations. Turning it off
14265 should improve Exim's performance a bit, so that is what happens by default.
14266 However, it appears that some broken clients cannot cope, and time out. Hence
14267 this option. It affects only those sockets that are set up for listening by the
14268 daemon. Sockets created by the smtp transport for delivering mail always set
14272 .option timeout_frozen_after main time 0s
14273 .cindex "frozen messages" "timing out"
14274 .cindex "timeout" "frozen messages"
14275 If &%timeout_frozen_after%& is set to a time greater than zero, a frozen
14276 message of any kind that has been on the queue for longer than the given
14277 time is automatically cancelled at the next queue run. If it is a bounce
14278 message, it is just discarded; otherwise, a bounce is sent to the sender, in a
14279 similar manner to cancellation by the &%-Mg%& command line option. If you want
14280 to timeout frozen bounce messages earlier than other kinds of frozen message,
14281 see &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&.
14284 .option timezone main string unset
14285 .cindex "timezone" "setting"
14286 The value of &%timezone%& is used to set the environment variable TZ while
14287 running Exim (if it is different on entry). This ensures that all timestamps
14288 created by Exim are in the required timezone. If you want all your timestamps
14289 to be in UTC (aka GMT) you should set
14293 The default value is taken from TIMEZONE_DEFAULT in &_Local/Makefile_&,
14294 or, if that is not set, from the value of the TZ environment variable when Exim
14295 is built. If &%timezone%& is set to the empty string, either at build or run
14296 time, any existing TZ variable is removed from the environment when Exim
14297 runs. This is appropriate behaviour for obtaining wall-clock time on some, but
14298 unfortunately not all, operating systems.
14301 .option tls_advertise_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14302 .cindex "TLS" "advertising"
14303 .cindex "encryption" "on SMTP connection"
14304 .cindex "SMTP" "encrypted connection"
14305 When Exim is built with support for TLS encrypted connections, the availability
14306 of the STARTTLS command to set up an encrypted session is advertised in
14307 response to EHLO only to those client hosts that match this option. See
14308 chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of Exim's support for TLS.
14311 .option tls_certificate main string&!! unset
14312 .cindex "TLS" "server certificate; location of"
14313 .cindex "certificate for server" "location of"
14314 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to a
14315 file which contains the server's certificates. The server's private key is also
14316 assumed to be in this file if &%tls_privatekey%& is unset. See chapter
14317 &<<CHAPTLS>>& for further details.
14319 &*Note*&: The certificates defined by this option are used only when Exim is
14320 receiving incoming messages as a server. If you want to supply certificates for
14321 use when sending messages as a client, you must set the &%tls_certificate%&
14322 option in the relevant &(smtp)& transport.
14325 .option tls_crl main string&!! unset
14326 .cindex "TLS" "server certificate revocation list"
14327 .cindex "certificate" "revocation list for server"
14328 This option specifies a certificate revocation list. The expanded value must
14329 be the name of a file that contains a CRL in PEM format.
14332 .option tls_dhparam main string&!! unset
14333 .cindex "TLS" "D-H parameters for server"
14334 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to
14335 a file which contains the server's DH parameter values.
14336 This is used only for OpenSSL. When Exim is linked with GnuTLS, this option is
14337 ignored. See section &<<SECTopenvsgnu>>& for further details.
14340 .option tls_on_connect_ports main "string list" unset
14341 This option specifies a list of incoming SSMTP (aka SMTPS) ports that should
14342 operate the obsolete SSMTP (SMTPS) protocol, where a TLS session is immediately
14343 set up without waiting for the client to issue a STARTTLS command. For
14344 further details, see section &<<SECTsupobssmt>>&.
14348 .option tls_privatekey main string&!! unset
14349 .cindex "TLS" "server private key; location of"
14350 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to a
14351 file which contains the server's private key. If this option is unset, the
14352 private key is assumed to be in the same file as the server's certificates. See
14353 chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for further details.
14356 .option tls_remember_esmtp main boolean false
14357 .cindex "TLS" "esmtp state; remembering"
14358 .cindex "TLS" "broken clients"
14359 If this option is set true, Exim violates the RFCs by remembering that it is in
14360 &"esmtp"& state after successfully negotiating a TLS session. This provides
14361 support for broken clients that fail to send a new EHLO after starting a
14365 .option tls_require_ciphers main string&!! unset
14366 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers"
14367 .cindex "cipher" "requiring specific"
14368 This option controls which ciphers can be used for incoming TLS connections.
14369 The &(smtp)& transport has an option of the same name for controlling outgoing
14370 connections. This option is expanded for each connection, so can be varied for
14371 different clients if required. The value of this option must be a list of
14372 permitted cipher suites. The OpenSSL and GnuTLS libraries handle cipher control
14373 in somewhat different ways. If GnuTLS is being used, the client controls the
14374 preference order of the available ciphers. Details are given in sections
14375 &<<SECTreqciphssl>>& and &<<SECTreqciphgnu>>&.
14378 .option tls_try_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14379 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
14380 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
14381 See &%tls_verify_hosts%& below.
14384 .option tls_verify_certificates main string&!! unset
14385 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
14386 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
14387 The value of this option is expanded, and must then be the absolute path to
14388 a file containing permitted certificates for clients that
14389 match &%tls_verify_hosts%& or &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&. Alternatively, if you
14390 are using OpenSSL, you can set &%tls_verify_certificates%& to the name of a
14391 directory containing certificate files. This does not work with GnuTLS; the
14392 option must be set to the name of a single file if you are using GnuTLS.
14395 .option tls_verify_hosts main "host list&!!" unset
14396 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
14397 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
14398 This option, along with &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&, controls the checking of
14399 certificates from clients.
14400 The expected certificates are defined by &%tls_verify_certificates%&, which
14401 must be set. A configuration error occurs if either &%tls_verify_hosts%& or
14402 &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& is set and &%tls_verify_certificates%& is not set.
14404 Any client that matches &%tls_verify_hosts%& is constrained by
14405 &%tls_verify_certificates%&. The client must present one of the listed
14406 certificates. If it does not, the connection is aborted.
14408 A weaker form of checking is provided by &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&. If a client
14409 matches this option (but not &%tls_verify_hosts%&), Exim requests a
14410 certificate and checks it against &%tls_verify_certificates%&, but does not
14411 abort the connection if there is no certificate or if it does not match. This
14412 state can be detected in an ACL, which makes it possible to implement policies
14413 such as &"accept for relay only if a verified certificate has been received,
14414 but accept for local delivery if encrypted, even without a verified
14417 Client hosts that match neither of these lists are not asked to present
14421 .option trusted_groups main "string list&!!" unset
14422 .cindex "trusted group"
14423 .cindex "group" "trusted"
14425 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. If this
14426 option is set, any process that is running in one of the listed groups, or
14427 which has one of them as a supplementary group, is trusted. The groups can be
14428 specified numerically or by name. See section &<<SECTtrustedadmin>>& for
14429 details of what trusted callers are permitted to do. If neither
14430 &%trusted_groups%& nor &%trusted_users%& is set, only root and the Exim user
14434 .option trusted_users main "string list&!!" unset
14435 .cindex "trusted user"
14436 .cindex "user" "trusted"
14438 This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing. If this
14439 option is set, any process that is running as one of the listed users is
14440 trusted. The users can be specified numerically or by name. See section
14441 &<<SECTtrustedadmin>>& for details of what trusted callers are permitted to do.
14442 If neither &%trusted_groups%& nor &%trusted_users%& is set, only root and the
14443 Exim user are trusted.
14446 .option unknown_login main string&!! unset
14447 .cindex "uid (user id)" "unknown caller"
14448 .cindex "&$caller_uid$&"
14449 This is a specialized feature for use in unusual configurations. By default, if
14450 the uid of the caller of Exim cannot be looked up using &[getpwuid()]&, Exim
14451 gives up. The &%unknown_login%& option can be used to set a login name to be
14452 used in this circumstance. It is expanded, so values like &%user$caller_uid%&
14453 can be set. When &%unknown_login%& is used, the value of &%unknown_username%&
14454 is used for the user's real name (gecos field), unless this has been set by the
14457 .option unknown_username main string unset
14458 See &%unknown_login%&.
14460 .option untrusted_set_sender main "address list&!!" unset
14461 .cindex "trusted user"
14462 .cindex "sender" "setting by untrusted user"
14463 .cindex "untrusted user" "setting sender"
14464 .cindex "user" "untrusted setting sender"
14465 .cindex "envelope sender"
14466 When an untrusted user submits a message to Exim using the standard input, Exim
14467 normally creates an envelope sender address from the user's login and the
14468 default qualification domain. Data from the &%-f%& option (for setting envelope
14469 senders on non-SMTP messages) or the SMTP MAIL command (if &%-bs%& or &%-bS%&
14470 is used) is ignored.
14472 However, untrusted users are permitted to set an empty envelope sender address,
14473 to declare that a message should never generate any bounces. For example:
14475 exim -f '<>' user@domain.example
14477 .cindex "&$sender_ident$&"
14478 The &%untrusted_set_sender%& option allows you to permit untrusted users to set
14479 other envelope sender addresses in a controlled way. When it is set, untrusted
14480 users are allowed to set envelope sender addresses that match any of the
14481 patterns in the list. Like all address lists, the string is expanded. The
14482 identity of the user is in &$sender_ident$&, so you can, for example, restrict
14483 users to setting senders that start with their login ids
14484 followed by a hyphen
14485 by a setting like this:
14487 untrusted_set_sender = ^$sender_ident-
14489 If you want to allow untrusted users to set envelope sender addresses without
14490 restriction, you can use
14492 untrusted_set_sender = *
14494 The &%untrusted_set_sender%& option applies to all forms of local input, but
14495 only to the setting of the envelope sender. It does not permit untrusted users
14496 to use the other options which trusted user can use to override message
14497 parameters. Furthermore, it does not stop Exim from removing an existing
14498 &'Sender:'& header in the message, or from adding a &'Sender:'& header if
14499 necessary. See &%local_sender_retain%& and &%local_from_check%& for ways of
14500 overriding these actions. The handling of the &'Sender:'& header is also
14501 described in section &<<SECTthesenhea>>&.
14503 The log line for a message's arrival shows the envelope sender following
14504 &"<="&. For local messages, the user's login always follows, after &"U="&. In
14505 &%-bp%& displays, and in the Exim monitor, if an untrusted user sets an
14506 envelope sender address, the user's login is shown in parentheses after the
14510 .option uucp_from_pattern main string "see below"
14511 .cindex "&""From""& line"
14512 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
14513 Some applications that pass messages to an MTA via a command line interface use
14514 an initial line starting with &"From&~"& to pass the envelope sender. In
14515 particular, this is used by UUCP software. Exim recognizes such a line by means
14516 of a regular expression that is set in &%uucp_from_pattern%&. When the pattern
14517 matches, the sender address is constructed by expanding the contents of
14518 &%uucp_from_sender%&, provided that the caller of Exim is a trusted user. The
14519 default pattern recognizes lines in the following two forms:
14521 From ph10 Fri Jan 5 12:35 GMT 1996
14522 From ph10 Fri, 7 Jan 97 14:00:00 GMT
14524 The pattern can be seen by running
14526 exim -bP uucp_from_pattern
14528 It checks only up to the hours and minutes, and allows for a 2-digit or 4-digit
14529 year in the second case. The first word after &"From&~"& is matched in the
14530 regular expression by a parenthesized subpattern. The default value for
14531 &%uucp_from_sender%& is &"$1"&, which therefore just uses this first word
14532 (&"ph10"& in the example above) as the message's sender. See also
14533 &%ignore_fromline_hosts%&.
14536 .option uucp_from_sender main string&!! &`$1`&
14537 See &%uucp_from_pattern%& above.
14540 .option warn_message_file main string unset
14541 .cindex "warning of delay" "customizing the message"
14542 .cindex "customizing" "warning message"
14543 This option defines a template file containing paragraphs of text to be used
14544 for constructing the warning message which is sent by Exim when a message has
14545 been on the queue for a specified amount of time, as specified by
14546 &%delay_warning%&. Details of the file's contents are given in chapter
14547 &<<CHAPemsgcust>>&. See also &%bounce_message_file%&.
14550 .option write_rejectlog main boolean true
14551 .cindex "reject log" "disabling"
14552 If this option is set false, Exim no longer writes anything to the reject log.
14553 See chapter &<<CHAPlog>>& for details of what Exim writes to its logs.
14558 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
14559 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
14561 .chapter "Generic options for routers" "CHAProutergeneric"
14562 .cindex "options" "generic; for routers"
14563 .cindex "generic options" "router"
14564 This chapter describes the generic options that apply to all routers.
14565 Those that are preconditions are marked with ‡ in the &"use"& field.
14567 For a general description of how a router operates, see sections
14568 &<<SECTrunindrou>>& and &<<SECTrouprecon>>&. The latter specifies the order in
14569 which the preconditions are tested. The order of expansion of the options that
14570 provide data for a transport is: &%errors_to%&, &%headers_add%&,
14571 &%headers_remove%&, &%transport%&.
14575 .option address_data routers string&!! unset
14576 .cindex "router" "data attached to address"
14578 The string is expanded just before the router is run, that is, after all the
14579 precondition tests have succeeded. If the expansion is forced to fail, the
14580 router declines, the value of &%address_data%& remains unchanged, and the
14581 &%more%& option controls what happens next. Other expansion failures cause
14582 delivery of the address to be deferred.
14585 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
14586 When the expansion succeeds, the value is retained with the address, and can be
14587 accessed using the variable &$address_data$& in the current router, subsequent
14588 routers, and the eventual transport.
14590 &*Warning*&: If the current or any subsequent router is a &(redirect)& router
14591 that runs a user's filter file, the contents of &$address_data$& are accessible
14592 in the filter. This is not normally a problem, because such data is usually
14593 either not confidential or it &"belongs"& to the current user, but if you do
14594 put confidential data into &$address_data$& you need to remember this point.
14596 Even if the router declines or passes, the value of &$address_data$& remains
14597 with the address, though it can be changed by another &%address_data%& setting
14598 on a subsequent router. If a router generates child addresses, the value of
14599 &$address_data$& propagates to them. This also applies to the special kind of
14600 &"child"& that is generated by a router with the &%unseen%& option.
14602 The idea of &%address_data%& is that you can use it to look up a lot of data
14603 for the address once, and then pick out parts of the data later. For example,
14604 you could use a single LDAP lookup to return a string of the form
14606 uid=1234 gid=5678 mailbox=/mail/xyz forward=/home/xyz/.forward
14608 In the transport you could pick out the mailbox by a setting such as
14610 file = ${extract{mailbox}{$address_data}}
14612 This makes the configuration file less messy, and also reduces the number of
14613 lookups (though Exim does cache lookups).
14615 The &%address_data%& facility is also useful as a means of passing information
14616 from one router to another, and from a router to a transport. In addition, if
14618 .cindex "&$sender_address_data$&"
14619 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
14620 When &$address_data$& is set by a router when verifying a recipient address
14621 from an ACL, it remains available for use in the rest of the ACL statement.
14622 After verifying a sender, the value is transferred to &$sender_address_data$&.
14627 .option address_test routers&!? boolean true
14628 .cindex "&%-bt%& option"
14629 .cindex "router" "skipping when address testing"
14630 If this option is set false, the router is skipped when routing is being tested
14631 by means of the &%-bt%& command line option. This can be a convenience when
14632 your first router sends messages to an external scanner, because it saves you
14633 having to set the &"already scanned"& indicator when testing real address
14638 .option cannot_route_message routers string&!! unset
14639 .cindex "router" "customizing &""cannot route""& message"
14640 .cindex "customizing" "&""cannot route""& message"
14641 This option specifies a text message that is used when an address cannot be
14642 routed because Exim has run out of routers. The default message is
14643 &"Unrouteable address"&. This option is useful only on routers that have
14644 &%more%& set false, or on the very last router in a configuration, because the
14645 value that is used is taken from the last router that is considered. &new("This
14646 includes a router that is skipped because its preconditions are not met, as
14647 well as a router that declines.") For example, using the default configuration,
14650 cannot_route_message = Remote domain not found in DNS
14652 on the first router, which is a &(dnslookup)& router with &%more%& set false,
14655 cannot_route_message = Unknown local user
14657 on the final router that checks for local users. If string expansion fails for
14658 this option, the default message is used. Unless the expansion failure was
14659 explicitly forced, a message about the failure is written to the main and panic
14660 logs, in addition to the normal message about the routing failure.
14663 .option caseful_local_part routers boolean false
14664 .cindex "case of local parts"
14665 .cindex "router" "case of local parts"
14666 By default, routers handle the local parts of addresses in a case-insensitive
14667 manner, though the actual case is preserved for transmission with the message.
14668 If you want the case of letters to be significant in a router, you must set
14669 this option true. For individual router options that contain address or local
14670 part lists (for example, &%local_parts%&), case-sensitive matching can be
14671 turned on by &"+caseful"& as a list item. See section &<<SECTcasletadd>>& for
14674 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
14675 .cindex "&$original_local_part$&"
14676 .cindex "&$parent_local_part$&"
14677 The value of the &$local_part$& variable is forced to lower case while a
14678 router is running unless &%caseful_local_part%& is set. When a router assigns
14679 an address to a transport, the value of &$local_part$& when the transport runs
14680 is the same as it was in the router. Similarly, when a router generates child
14681 addresses by aliasing or forwarding, the values of &$original_local_part$&
14682 and &$parent_local_part$& are those that were used by the redirecting router.
14684 This option applies to the processing of an address by a router. When a
14685 recipient address is being processed in an ACL, there is a separate &%control%&
14686 modifier that can be used to specify case-sensitive processing within the ACL
14687 (see section &<<SECTcontrols>>&).
14691 .option check_local_user routers&!? boolean false
14692 .cindex "local user" "checking in router"
14693 .cindex "router" "checking for local user"
14694 .cindex "&_/etc/passwd_&"
14696 When this option is true, Exim checks that the local part of the recipient
14697 address (with affixes removed if relevant) is the name of an account on the
14698 local system. The check is done by calling the &[getpwnam()]& function rather
14699 than trying to read &_/etc/passwd_& directly. This means that other methods of
14700 holding password data (such as NIS) are supported. If the local part is a local
14701 user, &$home$& is set from the password data, and can be tested in other
14702 preconditions that are evaluated after this one (the order of evaluation is
14703 given in section &<<SECTrouprecon>>&). However, the value of &$home$& can be
14704 overridden by &%router_home_directory%&. If the local part is not a local user,
14705 the router is skipped.
14707 If you want to check that the local part is either the name of a local user
14708 or matches something else, you cannot combine &%check_local_user%& with a
14709 setting of &%local_parts%&, because that specifies the logical &'and'& of the
14710 two conditions. However, you can use a &(passwd)& lookup in a &%local_parts%&
14711 setting to achieve this. For example:
14713 local_parts = passwd;$local_part : lsearch;/etc/other/users
14715 Note, however, that the side effects of &%check_local_user%& (such as setting
14716 up a home directory) do not occur when a &(passwd)& lookup is used in a
14717 &%local_parts%& (or any other) precondition.
14721 .option condition routers&!? string&!! unset
14722 .cindex "router" "customized precondition"
14723 This option specifies a general precondition test that has to succeed for the
14724 router to be called. The &%condition%& option is the last precondition to be
14725 evaluated (see section &<<SECTrouprecon>>&). The string is expanded, and if the
14726 result is a forced failure, or an empty string, or one of the strings &"0"& or
14727 &"no"& or &"false"& (checked without regard to the case of the letters), the
14728 router is skipped, and the address is offered to the next one.
14730 If the result is any other value, the router is run (as this is the last
14731 precondition to be evaluated, all the other preconditions must be true).
14733 The &%condition%& option provides a means of applying custom conditions to the
14734 running of routers. Note that in the case of a simple conditional expansion,
14735 the default expansion values are exactly what is wanted. For example:
14737 condition = ${if >{$message_age}{600}}
14739 Because of the default behaviour of the string expansion, this is equivalent to
14741 condition = ${if >{$message_age}{600}{true}{}}
14743 If the expansion fails (other than forced failure) delivery is deferred. Some
14744 of the other precondition options are common special cases that could in fact
14745 be specified using &%condition%&.
14749 .option debug_print routers string&!! unset
14750 .cindex "testing" "variables in drivers"
14751 If this option is set and debugging is enabled (see the &%-d%& command line
14752 option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging output.
14753 If expansion of the string fails, the error message is written to the debugging
14754 output, and Exim carries on processing.
14755 This option is provided to help with checking out the values of variables and
14756 so on when debugging router configurations. For example, if a &%condition%&
14757 option appears not to be working, &%debug_print%& can be used to output the
14758 variables it references. The output happens after checks for &%domains%&,
14759 &%local_parts%&, and &%check_local_user%& but before any other preconditions
14760 are tested. A newline is added to the text if it does not end with one.
14764 .option disable_logging routers boolean false
14765 If this option is set true, nothing is logged for any routing errors
14766 or for any deliveries caused by this router. You should not set this option
14767 unless you really, really know what you are doing. See also the generic
14768 transport option of the same name.
14771 .option domains routers&!? "domain list&!!" unset
14772 .cindex "router" "restricting to specific domains"
14773 .cindex "&$domain_data$&"
14774 If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the current domain matches
14775 the list. If the match is achieved by means of a file lookup, the data that the
14776 lookup returned for the domain is placed in &$domain_data$& for use in string
14777 expansions of the driver's private options. See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for
14778 a list of the order in which preconditions are evaluated.
14782 .option driver routers string unset
14783 This option must always be set. It specifies which of the available routers is
14788 .option errors_to routers string&!! unset
14789 .cindex "envelope sender"
14790 .cindex "router" "changing address for errors"
14791 If a router successfully handles an address, it may queue the address for
14792 delivery or it may generate child addresses. In both cases, if there is a
14793 delivery problem during later processing, the resulting bounce message is sent
14794 to the address that results from expanding this string, provided that the
14795 address verifies successfully. &%errors_to%& is expanded before
14796 &%headers_add%&, &%headers_remove%&, and &%transport%&.
14798 If the option is unset, or the expansion is forced to fail, or the result of
14799 the expansion fails to verify, the errors address associated with the incoming
14800 address is used. At top level, this is the envelope sender. A non-forced
14801 expansion failure causes delivery to be deferred.
14803 If an address for which &%errors_to%& has been set ends up being delivered over
14804 SMTP, the envelope sender for that delivery is the &%errors_to%& value, so that
14805 any bounces that are generated by other MTAs on the delivery route are also
14806 sent there. The most common use of &%errors_to%& is probably to direct mailing
14807 list bounces to the manager of the list, as described in section
14808 &<<SECTmailinglists>>&.
14810 The &%errors_to%& setting associated with an address can be overridden if it
14811 subsequently passes through other routers that have their own &%errors_to%&
14813 or if it is delivered by a transport with a &%return_path%& setting.
14815 You can set &%errors_to%& to the empty string by either of these settings:
14820 An expansion item that yields an empty string has the same effect. If you do
14821 this, a locally detected delivery error for addresses processed by this router
14822 no longer gives rise to a bounce message; the error is discarded. If the
14823 address is delivered to a remote host, the return path is set to &`<>`&, unless
14824 overridden by the &%return_path%& option on the transport.
14826 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
14827 If for some reason you want to discard local errors, but use a non-empty
14828 MAIL command for remote delivery, you can preserve the original return
14829 path in &$address_data$& in the router, and reinstate it in the transport by
14830 setting &%return_path%&.
14834 .option expn routers&!? boolean true
14835 .cindex "address" "testing"
14836 .cindex "testing" "addresses"
14837 .cindex "EXPN" "router skipping"
14838 .cindex "router" "skipping for EXPN"
14839 If this option is turned off, the router is skipped when testing an address
14840 as a result of processing an SMTP EXPN command. You might, for example,
14841 want to turn it off on a router for users' &_.forward_& files, while leaving it
14842 on for the system alias file.
14843 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
14846 The use of the SMTP EXPN command is controlled by an ACL (see chapter
14847 &<<CHAPACL>>&). When Exim is running an EXPN command, it is similar to testing
14848 an address with &%-bt%&. Compare VRFY, whose counterpart is &%-bv%&.
14852 .option fail_verify routers boolean false
14853 .cindex "router" "forcing verification failure"
14854 Setting this option has the effect of setting both &%fail_verify_sender%& and
14855 &%fail_verify_recipient%& to the same value.
14859 .option fail_verify_recipient routers boolean false
14860 If this option is true and an address is accepted by this router when
14861 verifying a recipient, verification fails.
14865 .option fail_verify_sender routers boolean false
14866 If this option is true and an address is accepted by this router when
14867 verifying a sender, verification fails.
14871 .option fallback_hosts routers "string list" unset
14873 .cindex "router" "fallback hosts"
14874 .cindex "fallback" "hosts specified on router"
14875 String expansion is not applied to this option. The argument must be a
14876 colon-separated list of host names or IP addresses. The list separator can be
14877 changed (see section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&), and a port can be specified with
14878 each name or address. In fact, the format of each item is exactly the same as
14879 defined for the list of hosts in a &(manualroute)& router (see section
14880 &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&).
14883 If a router queues an address for a remote transport, this host list is
14884 associated with the address, and used instead of the transport's fallback host
14885 list. If &%hosts_randomize%& is set on the transport, the order of the list is
14886 randomized for each use. See the &%fallback_hosts%& option of the &(smtp)&
14887 transport for further details.
14890 .option group routers string&!! "see below"
14891 .cindex "gid (group id)" "local delivery"
14892 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
14893 .cindex "transport" "local"
14894 .cindex "router" "setting group"
14895 When a router queues an address for a transport, and the transport does not
14896 specify a group, the group given here is used when running the delivery
14898 The group may be specified numerically or by name. If expansion fails, the
14899 error is logged and delivery is deferred.
14900 The default is unset, unless &%check_local_user%& is set, when the default
14901 is taken from the password information. See also &%initgroups%& and &%user%&
14902 and the discussion in chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
14906 .option headers_add routers string&!! unset
14908 .cindex "header lines" "adding"
14909 .cindex "router" "adding header lines"
14910 This option specifies a string of text that is expanded at routing time, and
14911 associated with any addresses that are accepted by the router. However, this
14912 option has no effect when an address is just being verified. The way in which
14913 the text is used to add header lines at transport time is described in section
14914 &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. New header lines are not actually added until the
14915 message is in the process of being transported. This means that references to
14916 header lines in string expansions in the transport's configuration do not
14917 &"see"& the added header lines.
14920 The &%headers_add%& option is expanded after &%errors_to%&, but before
14921 &%headers_remove%& and &%transport%&. If the expanded string is empty, or if
14922 the expansion is forced to fail, the option has no effect. Other expansion
14923 failures are treated as configuration errors.
14925 &*Warning 1*&: The &%headers_add%& option cannot be used for a &(redirect)&
14926 router that has the &%one_time%& option set.
14929 &*Warning 2*&: If the &%unseen%& option is set on the router, all header
14930 additions are deleted when the address is passed on to subsequent routers.
14935 .option headers_remove routers string&!! unset
14937 .cindex "header lines" "removing"
14938 .cindex "router" "removing header lines"
14939 This option specifies a string of text that is expanded at routing time, and
14940 associated with any addresses that are accepted by the router. However, this
14941 option has no effect when an address is just being verified. The way in which
14942 the text is used to remove header lines at transport time is described in
14943 section &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. Header lines are not actually removed until
14944 the message is in the process of being transported. This means that references
14945 to header lines in string expansions in the transport's configuration still
14946 &"see"& the original header lines.
14949 The &%headers_remove%& option is expanded after &%errors_to%& and
14950 &%headers_add%&, but before &%transport%&. If the expansion is forced to fail,
14951 the option has no effect. Other expansion failures are treated as configuration
14954 &*Warning 1*&: The &%headers_remove%& option cannot be used for a &(redirect)&
14955 router that has the &%one_time%& option set.
14958 &*Warning 2*&: If the &%unseen%& option is set on the router, all header
14959 removal requests are deleted when the address is passed on to subsequent
14964 .option ignore_target_hosts routers "host list&!!" unset
14965 .cindex "IP address" "discarding"
14966 .cindex "router" "discarding IP addresses"
14967 Although this option is a host list, it should normally contain IP address
14968 entries rather than names. If any host that is looked up by the router has an
14969 IP address that matches an item in this list, Exim behaves as if that IP
14970 address did not exist. This option allows you to cope with rogue DNS entries
14973 remote.domain.example. A 127.0.0.1
14977 ignore_target_hosts = 127.0.0.1
14979 on the relevant router. If all the hosts found by a &(dnslookup)& router are
14980 discarded in this way, the router declines. In a conventional configuration, an
14981 attempt to mail to such a domain would normally provoke the &"unrouteable
14982 domain"& error, and an attempt to verify an address in the domain would fail.
14983 Similarly, if &%ignore_target_hosts%& is set on an &(ipliteral)& router, the
14984 router declines if presented with one of the listed addresses.
14987 You can use this option to disable the use of IPv4 or IPv6 for mail delivery by
14988 means of the first or the second of the following settings, respectively:
14990 ignore_target_hosts = 0.0.0.0/0
14991 ignore_target_hosts = <; 0::0/0
14993 The pattern in the first line matches all IPv4 addresses, whereas the pattern
14994 in the second line matches all IPv6 addresses.
14997 This option may also be useful for ignoring link-local and site-local IPv6
14998 addresses. Because, like all host lists, the value of &%ignore_target_hosts%&
14999 is expanded before use as a list, it is possible to make it dependent on the
15000 domain that is being routed.
15002 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
15003 During its expansion, &$host_address$& is set to the IP address that is being
15006 .option initgroups routers boolean false
15007 .cindex "additional groups"
15008 .cindex "groups" "additional"
15009 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
15010 .cindex "transport" "local"
15011 If the router queues an address for a transport, and this option is true, and
15012 the uid supplied by the router is not overridden by the transport, the
15013 &[initgroups()]& function is called when running the transport to ensure that
15014 any additional groups associated with the uid are set up. See also &%group%&
15015 and &%user%& and the discussion in chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
15019 .option local_part_prefix routers&!? "string list" unset
15020 .cindex "router" "prefix for local part"
15021 .cindex "prefix" "for local part; used in router"
15022 If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the local part starts with
15023 one of the given strings, or &%local_part_prefix_optional%& is true. See
15024 section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions are
15027 The list is scanned from left to right, and the first prefix that matches is
15028 used. A limited form of wildcard is available; if the prefix begins with an
15029 asterisk, it matches the longest possible sequence of arbitrary characters at
15030 the start of the local part. An asterisk should therefore always be followed by
15031 some character that does not occur in normal local parts.
15032 .cindex "multiple mailboxes"
15033 .cindex "mailbox" "multiple"
15034 Wildcarding can be used to set up multiple user mailboxes, as described in
15035 section &<<SECTmulbox>>&.
15038 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
15039 .cindex "&$local_part_prefix$&"
15040 During the testing of the &%local_parts%& option, and while the router is
15041 running, the prefix is removed from the local part, and is available in the
15042 expansion variable &$local_part_prefix$&. When a message is being delivered, if
15043 the router accepts the address, this remains true during subsequent delivery by
15044 a transport. In particular, the local part that is transmitted in the RCPT
15045 command for LMTP, SMTP, and BSMTP deliveries has the prefix removed by default.
15046 This behaviour can be overridden by setting &%rcpt_include_affixes%& true on
15047 the relevant transport.
15049 When an address is being verified, &%local_part_prefix%& affects only the
15050 behaviour of the router. If the callout feature of verification is in use, this
15051 means that the full address, including the prefix, will be used during the
15055 The prefix facility is commonly used to handle local parts of the form
15056 &%owner-something%&. Another common use is to support local parts of the form
15057 &%real-username%& to bypass a user's &_.forward_& file &-- helpful when trying
15058 to tell a user their forwarding is broken &-- by placing a router like this one
15059 immediately before the router that handles &_.forward_& files:
15063 local_part_prefix = real-
15065 transport = local_delivery
15067 If both &%local_part_prefix%& and &%local_part_suffix%& are set for a router,
15068 both conditions must be met if not optional. Care must be taken if wildcards
15069 are used in both a prefix and a suffix on the same router. Different
15070 separator characters must be used to avoid ambiguity.
15073 .option local_part_prefix_optional routers boolean false
15074 See &%local_part_prefix%& above.
15078 .option local_part_suffix routers&!? "string list" unset
15079 .cindex "router" "suffix for local part"
15080 .cindex "suffix for local part" "used in router"
15081 This option operates in the same way as &%local_part_prefix%&, except that the
15082 local part must end (rather than start) with the given string, the
15083 &%local_part_suffix_optional%& option determines whether the suffix is
15084 mandatory, and the wildcard * character, if present, must be the last
15085 character of the suffix. This option facility is commonly used to handle local
15086 parts of the form &%something-request%& and multiple user mailboxes of the form
15090 .option local_part_suffix_optional routers boolean false
15091 See &%local_part_suffix%& above.
15095 .option local_parts routers&!? "local part list&!!" unset
15096 .cindex "router" "restricting to specific local parts"
15097 .cindex "local part" "checking in router"
15098 The router is run only if the local part of the address matches the list.
15099 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15101 section &<<SECTlocparlis>>& for a discussion of local part lists. Because the
15102 string is expanded, it is possible to make it depend on the domain, for
15105 local_parts = dbm;/usr/local/specials/$domain
15107 .cindex "&$local_part_data$&"
15108 If the match is achieved by a lookup, the data that the lookup returned
15109 for the local part is placed in the variable &$local_part_data$& for use in
15110 expansions of the router's private options. You might use this option, for
15111 example, if you have a large number of local virtual domains, and you want to
15112 send all postmaster mail to the same place without having to set up an alias in
15113 each virtual domain:
15117 local_parts = postmaster
15118 data = postmaster@real.domain.example
15122 .option log_as_local routers boolean "see below"
15123 .cindex "log" "delivery line"
15124 .cindex "delivery" "log line format"
15125 Exim has two logging styles for delivery, the idea being to make local
15126 deliveries stand out more visibly from remote ones. In the &"local"& style, the
15127 recipient address is given just as the local part, without a domain. The use of
15128 this style is controlled by this option. It defaults to true for the &(accept)&
15129 router, and false for all the others. &new("This option applies only when a
15130 router assigns an address to a transport. It has no effect on routers that
15131 redirect addresses.")
15135 .option more routers boolean&!! true
15136 The result of string expansion for this option must be a valid boolean value,
15137 that is, one of the strings &"yes"&, &"no"&, &"true"&, or &"false"&. Any other
15138 result causes an error, and delivery is deferred. If the expansion is forced to
15139 fail, the default value for the option (true) is used. Other failures cause
15140 delivery to be deferred.
15142 If this option is set false, and the router declines to handle the address, no
15143 further routers are tried, routing fails, and the address is bounced.
15144 .cindex "&%self%& option"
15145 However, if the router explicitly passes an address to the following router by
15146 means of the setting
15150 or otherwise, the setting of &%more%& is ignored. Also, the setting of &%more%&
15151 does not affect the behaviour if one of the precondition tests fails. In that
15152 case, the address is always passed to the next router.
15155 Note that &%address_data%& is not considered to be a precondition. If its
15156 expansion is forced to fail, the router declines, and the value of &%more%&
15157 controls what happens next.
15161 .option pass_on_timeout routers boolean false
15162 .cindex "timeout" "of router"
15163 .cindex "router" "timeout"
15164 If a router times out during a host lookup, it normally causes deferral of the
15165 address. If &%pass_on_timeout%& is set, the address is passed on to the next
15166 router, overriding &%no_more%&. This may be helpful for systems that are
15167 intermittently connected to the Internet, or those that want to pass to a smart
15168 host any messages that cannot immediately be delivered.
15170 There are occasional other temporary errors that can occur while doing DNS
15171 lookups. They are treated in the same way as a timeout, and this option
15172 applies to all of them.
15176 .option pass_router routers string unset
15177 .cindex "router" "go to after &""pass""&"
15178 When a router returns &"pass"&, the address is normally handed on to the next
15179 router in sequence. This can be changed by setting &%pass_router%& to the name
15180 of another router. However (unlike &%redirect_router%&) the named router must
15181 be below the current router, to avoid loops. Note that this option applies only
15182 to the special case of &"pass"&. It does not apply when a router returns
15187 .option redirect_router routers string unset
15188 .cindex "router" "start at after redirection"
15189 Sometimes an administrator knows that it is pointless to reprocess addresses
15190 generated from alias or forward files with the same router again. For
15191 example, if an alias file translates real names into login ids there is no
15192 point searching the alias file a second time, especially if it is a large file.
15194 The &%redirect_router%& option can be set to the name of any router instance.
15195 It causes the routing of any generated addresses to start at the named router
15196 instead of at the first router. This option has no effect if the router in
15197 which it is set does not generate new addresses.
15201 .option require_files routers&!? "string list&!!" unset
15202 .cindex "file" "requiring for router"
15203 .cindex "router" "requiring file existence"
15204 This option provides a general mechanism for predicating the running of a
15205 router on the existence or non-existence of certain files or directories.
15206 Before running a router, as one of its precondition tests, Exim works its way
15207 through the &%require_files%& list, expanding each item separately.
15209 Because the list is split before expansion, any colons in expansion items must
15210 be doubled, or the facility for using a different list separator must be used.
15211 If any expansion is forced to fail, the item is ignored. Other expansion
15212 failures cause routing of the address to be deferred.
15214 If any expanded string is empty, it is ignored. Otherwise, except as described
15215 below, each string must be a fully qualified file path, optionally preceded by
15216 &"!"&. The paths are passed to the &[stat()]& function to test for the
15217 existence of the files or directories. The router is skipped if any paths not
15218 preceded by &"!"& do not exist, or if any paths preceded by &"!"& do exist.
15221 If &[stat()]& cannot determine whether a file exists or not, delivery of
15222 the message is deferred. This can happen when NFS-mounted filesystems are
15225 This option is checked after the &%domains%&, &%local_parts%&, and &%senders%&
15226 options, so you cannot use it to check for the existence of a file in which to
15227 look up a domain, local part, or sender. (See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a
15228 full list of the order in which preconditions are evaluated.) However, as
15229 these options are all expanded, you can use the &%exists%& expansion condition
15230 to make such tests. The &%require_files%& option is intended for checking files
15231 that the router may be going to use internally, or which are needed by a
15232 transport (for example &_.procmailrc_&).
15234 During delivery, the &[stat()]& function is run as root, but there is a
15235 facility for some checking of the accessibility of a file by another user.
15236 This is not a proper permissions check, but just a &"rough"& check that
15237 operates as follows:
15239 If an item in a &%require_files%& list does not contain any forward slash
15240 characters, it is taken to be the user (and optional group, separated by a
15241 comma) to be checked for subsequent files in the list. If no group is specified
15242 but the user is specified symbolically, the gid associated with the uid is
15245 require_files = mail:/some/file
15246 require_files = $local_part:$home/.procmailrc
15248 If a user or group name in a &%require_files%& list does not exist, the
15249 &%require_files%& condition fails.
15251 Exim performs the check by scanning along the components of the file path, and
15252 checking the access for the given uid and gid. It checks for &"x"& access on
15253 directories, and &"r"& access on the final file. Note that this means that file
15254 access control lists, if the operating system has them, are ignored.
15256 &*Warning 1*&: When the router is being run to verify addresses for an
15257 incoming SMTP message, Exim is not running as root, but under its own uid. This
15258 may affect the result of a &%require_files%& check. In particular, &[stat()]&
15259 may yield the error EACCES (&"Permission denied"&). This means that the Exim
15260 user is not permitted to read one of the directories on the file's path.
15262 &*Warning 2*&: Even when Exim is running as root while delivering a message,
15263 &[stat()]& can yield EACCES for a file in an NFS directory that is mounted
15264 without root access. In this case, if a check for access by a particular user
15265 is requested, Exim creates a subprocess that runs as that user, and tries the
15266 check again in that process.
15268 The default action for handling an unresolved EACCES is to consider it to
15269 be caused by a configuration error, and routing is deferred because the
15270 existence or non-existence of the file cannot be determined. However, in some
15271 circumstances it may be desirable to treat this condition as if the file did
15272 not exist. If the file name (or the exclamation mark that precedes the file
15273 name for non-existence) is preceded by a plus sign, the EACCES error is treated
15274 as if the file did not exist. For example:
15276 require_files = +/some/file
15278 If the router is not an essential part of verification (for example, it
15279 handles users' &_.forward_& files), another solution is to set the &%verify%&
15280 option false so that the router is skipped when verifying.
15284 .option retry_use_local_part routers boolean "see below"
15285 .cindex "hints database" "retry keys"
15286 .cindex "local part" "in retry keys"
15287 When a delivery suffers a temporary routing failure, a retry record is created
15288 in Exim's hints database. For addresses whose routing depends only on the
15289 domain, the key for the retry record should not involve the local part, but for
15290 other addresses, both the domain and the local part should be included.
15291 Usually, remote routing is of the former kind, and local routing is of the
15294 This option controls whether the local part is used to form the key for retry
15295 hints for addresses that suffer temporary errors while being handled by this
15296 router. The default value is true for any router that has &%check_local_user%&
15297 set, and false otherwise. Note that this option does not apply to hints keys
15298 for transport delays; they are controlled by a generic transport option of the
15301 The setting of &%retry_use_local_part%& applies only to the router on which it
15302 appears. If the router generates child addresses, they are routed
15303 independently; this setting does not become attached to them.
15307 .option router_home_directory routers string&!! unset
15308 .cindex "router" "home directory for"
15309 .cindex "home directory" "for router"
15311 This option sets a home directory for use while the router is running. (Compare
15312 &%transport_home_directory%&, which sets a home directory for later
15313 transporting.) In particular, if used on a &(redirect)& router, this option
15314 sets a value for &$home$& while a filter is running. The value is expanded;
15315 forced expansion failure causes the option to be ignored &-- other failures
15316 cause the router to defer.
15318 Expansion of &%router_home_directory%& happens immediately after the
15319 &%check_local_user%& test (if configured), before any further expansions take
15321 (See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15323 While the router is running, &%router_home_directory%& overrides the value of
15324 &$home$& that came from &%check_local_user%&.
15326 When a router accepts an address and routes it to a transport (including the
15327 cases when a redirect router generates a pipe, file, or autoreply delivery),
15328 the home directory setting for the transport is taken from the first of these
15329 values that is set:
15332 The &%home_directory%& option on the transport;
15334 The &%transport_home_directory%& option on the router;
15336 The password data if &%check_local_user%& is set on the router;
15338 The &%router_home_directory%& option on the router.
15341 In other words, &%router_home_directory%& overrides the password data for the
15342 router, but not for the transport.
15346 .option self routers string freeze
15347 .cindex "MX record" "pointing to local host"
15348 .cindex "local host" "MX pointing to"
15349 This option applies to those routers that use a recipient address to find a
15350 list of remote hosts. Currently, these are the &(dnslookup)&, &(ipliteral)&,
15351 and &(manualroute)& routers.
15352 Certain configurations of the &(queryprogram)& router can also specify a list
15354 Usually such routers are configured to send the message to a remote host via an
15355 &(smtp)& transport. The &%self%& option specifies what happens when the first
15356 host on the list turns out to be the local host.
15357 The way in which Exim checks for the local host is described in section
15358 &<<SECTreclocipadd>>&.
15360 Normally this situation indicates either an error in Exim's configuration (for
15361 example, the router should be configured not to process this domain), or an
15362 error in the DNS (for example, the MX should not point to this host). For this
15363 reason, the default action is to log the incident, defer the address, and
15364 freeze the message. The following alternatives are provided for use in special
15369 Delivery of the message is tried again later, but the message is not frozen.
15371 .vitem "&%reroute%&: <&'domain'&>"
15372 The domain is changed to the given domain, and the address is passed back to
15373 be reprocessed by the routers. No rewriting of headers takes place. This
15374 behaviour is essentially a redirection.
15376 .vitem "&%reroute: rewrite:%& <&'domain'&>"
15377 The domain is changed to the given domain, and the address is passed back to be
15378 reprocessed by the routers. Any headers that contain the original domain are
15382 .cindex "&%more%& option"
15383 .cindex "&$self_hostname$&"
15384 The router passes the address to the next router, or to the router named in the
15385 &%pass_router%& option if it is set. This overrides &%no_more%&. During
15386 subsequent routing and delivery, the variable &$self_hostname$& contains the
15387 name of the local host that the router encountered. This can be used to
15388 distinguish between different cases for hosts with multiple names. The
15394 ensures that only those addresses that routed to the local host are passed on.
15395 Without &%no_more%&, addresses that were declined for other reasons would also
15396 be passed to the next router.
15399 Delivery fails and an error report is generated.
15402 .cindex "local host" "sending to"
15403 The anomaly is ignored and the address is queued for the transport. This
15404 setting should be used with extreme caution. For an &(smtp)& transport, it
15405 makes sense only in cases where the program that is listening on the SMTP port
15406 is not this version of Exim. That is, it must be some other MTA, or Exim with a
15407 different configuration file that handles the domain in another way.
15412 .option senders routers&!? "address list&!!" unset
15413 .cindex "router" "checking senders"
15414 If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the message's sender
15415 address matches something on the list.
15416 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15419 There are issues concerning verification when the running of routers is
15420 dependent on the sender. When Exim is verifying the address in an &%errors_to%&
15421 setting, it sets the sender to the null string. When using the &%-bt%& option
15422 to check a configuration file, it is necessary also to use the &%-f%& option to
15423 set an appropriate sender. For incoming mail, the sender is unset when
15424 verifying the sender, but is available when verifying any recipients. If the
15425 SMTP VRFY command is enabled, it must be used after MAIL if the sender address
15429 .option translate_ip_address routers string&!! unset
15430 .cindex "IP address" "translating"
15431 .cindex "packet radio"
15432 .cindex "router" "IP address translation"
15433 There exist some rare networking situations (for example, packet radio) where
15434 it is helpful to be able to translate IP addresses generated by normal routing
15435 mechanisms into other IP addresses, thus performing a kind of manual IP
15436 routing. This should be done only if the normal IP routing of the TCP/IP stack
15437 is inadequate or broken. Because this is an extremely uncommon requirement, the
15438 code to support this option is not included in the Exim binary unless
15439 SUPPORT_TRANSLATE_IP_ADDRESS=yes is set in &_Local/Makefile_&.
15441 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
15442 The &%translate_ip_address%& string is expanded for every IP address generated
15443 by the router, with the generated address set in &$host_address$&. If the
15444 expansion is forced to fail, no action is taken.
15445 For any other expansion error, delivery of the message is deferred.
15446 If the result of the expansion is an IP address, that replaces the original
15447 address; otherwise the result is assumed to be a host name &-- this is looked
15448 up using &[gethostbyname()]& (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when available) to
15449 produce one or more replacement IP addresses. For example, to subvert all IP
15450 addresses in some specific networks, this could be added to a router:
15452 translate_ip_address = \
15453 ${lookup{${mask:$host_address/26}}lsearch{/some/file}\
15456 The file would contain lines like
15458 10.2.3.128/26 some.host
15459 10.8.4.34/26 10.44.8.15
15461 You should not make use of this facility unless you really understand what you
15466 .option transport routers string&!! unset
15467 This option specifies the transport to be used when a router accepts an address
15468 and sets it up for delivery. A transport is never needed if a router is used
15469 only for verification. The value of the option is expanded at routing time,
15470 after the expansion of &%errors_to%&, &%headers_add%&, and &%headers_remove%&,
15471 and result must be the name of one of the configured transports. If it is not,
15472 delivery is deferred.
15474 The &%transport%& option is not used by the &(redirect)& router, but it does
15475 have some private options that set up transports for pipe and file deliveries
15476 (see chapter &<<CHAPredirect>>&).
15480 .option transport_current_directory routers string&!! unset
15481 .cindex "current directory for local transport"
15482 This option associates a current directory with any address that is routed
15483 to a local transport. This can happen either because a transport is
15484 explicitly configured for the router, or because it generates a delivery to a
15485 file or a pipe. During the delivery process (that is, at transport time), this
15486 option string is expanded and is set as the current directory, unless
15487 overridden by a setting on the transport.
15488 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is
15489 logged, and delivery is deferred.
15490 See chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>& for details of the local delivery
15496 .option transport_home_directory routers string&!! "see below"
15497 .cindex "home directory" "for local transport"
15498 This option associates a home directory with any address that is routed to a
15499 local transport. This can happen either because a transport is explicitly
15500 configured for the router, or because it generates a delivery to a file or a
15501 pipe. During the delivery process (that is, at transport time), the option
15502 string is expanded and is set as the home directory, unless overridden by a
15503 setting of &%home_directory%& on the transport.
15504 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is
15505 logged, and delivery is deferred.
15507 If the transport does not specify a home directory, and
15508 &%transport_home_directory%& is not set for the router, the home directory for
15509 the tranport is taken from the password data if &%check_local_user%& is set for
15510 the router. Otherwise it is taken from &%router_home_directory%& if that option
15511 is set; if not, no home directory is set for the transport.
15513 See chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>& for further details of the local delivery
15519 .option unseen routers boolean&!! false
15520 .cindex "router" "carrying on after success"
15521 The result of string expansion for this option must be a valid boolean value,
15522 that is, one of the strings &"yes"&, &"no"&, &"true"&, or &"false"&. Any other
15523 result causes an error, and delivery is deferred. If the expansion is forced to
15524 fail, the default value for the option (false) is used. Other failures cause
15525 delivery to be deferred.
15527 When this option is set true, routing does not cease if the router accepts the
15528 address. Instead, a copy of the incoming address is passed to the next router,
15529 overriding a false setting of &%more%&. There is little point in setting
15530 &%more%& false if &%unseen%& is always true, but it may be useful in cases when
15531 the value of &%unseen%& contains expansion items (and therefore, presumably, is
15532 sometimes true and sometimes false).
15535 .cindex "copy of message (&%unseen%& option)"
15536 The &%unseen%& option can be used to cause copies of messages to be delivered
15537 to some other destination, while also carrying out a normal delivery. In
15538 effect, the current address is made into a &"parent"& that has two children &--
15539 one that is delivered as specified by this router, and a clone that goes on to
15540 be routed further. For this reason, &%unseen%& may not be combined with the
15541 &%one_time%& option in a &(redirect)& router.
15544 &*Warning*&: Header lines added to the address (or specified for removal) by
15545 this router or by previous routers affect the &"unseen"& copy of the message
15546 only. The clone that continues to be processed by further routers starts with
15547 no added headers and none specified for removal. However, any data that was set
15548 by the &%address_data%& option in the current or previous routers is passed on.
15549 Setting the &%unseen%& option has a similar effect to the &%unseen%& command
15550 qualifier in filter files.
15554 .option user routers string&!! "see below"
15555 .cindex "uid (user id)" "local delivery"
15556 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
15557 .cindex "transport" "local"
15558 .cindex "router" "user for filter processing"
15559 .cindex "filter" "user for processing"
15560 When a router queues an address for a transport, and the transport does not
15561 specify a user, the user given here is used when running the delivery process.
15562 The user may be specified numerically or by name. If expansion fails, the
15563 error is logged and delivery is deferred.
15564 This user is also used by the &(redirect)& router when running a filter file.
15565 The default is unset, except when &%check_local_user%& is set. In this case,
15566 the default is taken from the password information. If the user is specified as
15567 a name, and &%group%& is not set, the group associated with the user is used.
15568 See also &%initgroups%& and &%group%& and the discussion in chapter
15569 &<<CHAPenvironment>>&.
15573 .option verify routers&!? boolean true
15574 Setting this option has the effect of setting &%verify_sender%& and
15575 &%verify_recipient%& to the same value.
15578 .option verify_only routers&!? boolean false
15579 .cindex "EXPN" "with &%verify_only%&"
15580 .cindex "&%-bv%& option"
15581 .cindex "router" "used only when verifying"
15582 If this option is set, the router is used only when verifying an address or
15583 testing with the &%-bv%& option, not when actually doing a delivery, testing
15584 with the &%-bt%& option, or running the SMTP EXPN command. It can be further
15585 restricted to verifying only senders or recipients by means of
15586 &%verify_sender%& and &%verify_recipient%&.
15588 &*Warning*&: When the router is being run to verify addresses for an incoming
15589 SMTP message, Exim is not running as root, but under its own uid. If the router
15590 accesses any files, you need to make sure that they are accessible to the Exim
15594 .option verify_recipient routers&!? boolean true
15595 If this option is false, the router is skipped when verifying recipient
15597 or testing recipient verification using &%-bv%&.
15598 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15602 .option verify_sender routers&!? boolean true
15603 If this option is false, the router is skipped when verifying sender addresses
15604 or testing sender verification using &%-bvs%&.
15605 See section &<<SECTrouprecon>>& for a list of the order in which preconditions
15613 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15614 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15616 .chapter "The accept router"
15617 .cindex "&(accept)& router"
15618 .cindex "routers" "&(accept)&"
15619 The &(accept)& router has no private options of its own. Unless it is being
15620 used purely for verification (see &%verify_only%&) a transport is required to
15621 be defined by the generic &%transport%& option. If the preconditions that are
15622 specified by generic options are met, the router accepts the address and queues
15623 it for the given transport. The most common use of this router is for setting
15624 up deliveries to local mailboxes. For example:
15628 domains = mydomain.example
15630 transport = local_delivery
15632 The &%domains%& condition in this example checks the domain of the address, and
15633 &%check_local_user%& checks that the local part is the login of a local user.
15634 When both preconditions are met, the &(accept)& router runs, and queues the
15635 address for the &(local_delivery)& transport.
15642 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15643 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15645 .chapter "The dnslookup router" "CHAPdnslookup"
15646 .cindex "&(dnslookup)& router"
15647 .cindex "routers" "&(dnslookup)&"
15648 The &(dnslookup)& router looks up the hosts that handle mail for the
15649 recipient's domain in the DNS. A transport must always be set for this router,
15650 unless &%verify_only%& is set.
15652 If SRV support is configured (see &%check_srv%& below), Exim first searches for
15653 SRV records. If none are found, or if SRV support is not configured,
15654 MX records are looked up. If no MX records exist, address records are sought.
15655 However, &%mx_domains%& can be set to disable the direct use of address
15658 MX records of equal priority are sorted by Exim into a random order. Exim then
15659 looks for address records for the host names obtained from MX or SRV records.
15660 When a host has more than one IP address, they are sorted into a random order,
15661 except that IPv6 addresses are always sorted before IPv4 addresses. If all the
15662 IP addresses found are discarded by a setting of the &%ignore_target_hosts%&
15663 generic option, the router declines.
15665 Unless they have the highest priority (lowest MX value), MX records that point
15666 to the local host, or to any host name that matches &%hosts_treat_as_local%&,
15667 are discarded, together with any other MX records of equal or lower priority.
15669 .cindex "MX record" "pointing to local host"
15670 .cindex "local host" "MX pointing to"
15671 .cindex "&%self%& option" "in &(dnslookup)& router"
15672 If the host pointed to by the highest priority MX record, or looked up as an
15673 address record, is the local host, or matches &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, what
15674 happens is controlled by the generic &%self%& option.
15677 .section "Problems with DNS lookups" "SECTprowitdnsloo"
15678 There have been problems with DNS servers when SRV records are looked up.
15679 Some mis-behaving servers return a DNS error or timeout when a non-existent
15680 SRV record is sought. Similar problems have in the past been reported for
15681 MX records. The global &%dns_again_means_nonexist%& option can help with this
15682 problem, but it is heavy-handed because it is a global option.
15684 For this reason, there are two options, &%srv_fail_domains%& and
15685 &%mx_fail_domains%&, that control what happens when a DNS lookup in a
15686 &(dnslookup)& router results in a DNS failure or a &"try again"& response. If
15687 an attempt to look up an SRV or MX record causes one of these results, and the
15688 domain matches the relevant list, Exim behaves as if the DNS had responded &"no
15689 such record"&. In the case of an SRV lookup, this means that the router
15690 proceeds to look for MX records; in the case of an MX lookup, it proceeds to
15691 look for A or AAAA records, unless the domain matches &%mx_domains%&, in which
15692 case routing fails.
15697 .section "Private options for dnslookup"
15698 .cindex "options" "&(dnslookup)& router"
15699 The private options for the &(dnslookup)& router are as follows:
15701 .option check_secondary_mx dnslookup boolean false
15702 .cindex "MX record" "checking for secondary"
15703 If this option is set, the router declines unless the local host is found in
15704 (and removed from) the list of hosts obtained by MX lookup. This can be used to
15705 process domains for which the local host is a secondary mail exchanger
15706 differently to other domains. The way in which Exim decides whether a host is
15707 the local host is described in section &<<SECTreclocipadd>>&.
15710 .option check_srv dnslookup string&!! unset
15711 .cindex "SRV record" "enabling use of"
15712 The &(dnslookup)& router supports the use of SRV records (see RFC 2782) in
15713 addition to MX and address records. The support is disabled by default. To
15714 enable SRV support, set the &%check_srv%& option to the name of the service
15715 required. For example,
15719 looks for SRV records that refer to the normal smtp service. The option is
15720 expanded, so the service name can vary from message to message or address
15721 to address. This might be helpful if SRV records are being used for a
15722 submission service. If the expansion is forced to fail, the &%check_srv%&
15723 option is ignored, and the router proceeds to look for MX records in the
15726 When the expansion succeeds, the router searches first for SRV records for
15727 the given service (it assumes TCP protocol). A single SRV record with a
15728 host name that consists of just a single dot indicates &"no such service for
15729 this domain"&; if this is encountered, the router declines. If other kinds of
15730 SRV record are found, they are used to construct a host list for delivery
15731 according to the rules of RFC 2782. MX records are not sought in this case.
15733 When no SRV records are found, MX records (and address records) are sought in
15734 the traditional way. In other words, SRV records take precedence over MX
15735 records, just as MX records take precedence over address records. Note that
15736 this behaviour is not sanctioned by RFC 2782, though a previous draft RFC
15737 defined it. It is apparently believed that MX records are sufficient for email
15738 and that SRV records should not be used for this purpose. However, SRV records
15739 have an additional &"weight"& feature which some people might find useful when
15740 trying to split an SMTP load between hosts of different power.
15742 See section &<<SECTprowitdnsloo>>& above for a discussion of Exim's behaviour
15743 when there is a DNS lookup error.
15747 .option mx_domains dnslookup "domain list&!!" unset
15748 .cindex "MX record" "required to exist"
15749 .cindex "SRV record" "required to exist"
15750 A domain that matches &%mx_domains%& is required to have either an MX or an SRV
15751 record in order to be recognised. (The name of this option could be improved.)
15752 For example, if all the mail hosts in &'fict.example'& are known to have MX
15753 records, except for those in &'discworld.fict.example'&, you could use this
15756 mx_domains = ! *.discworld.fict.example : *.fict.example
15758 This specifies that messages addressed to a domain that matches the list but
15759 has no MX record should be bounced immediately instead of being routed using
15760 the address record.
15763 .option mx_fail_domains dnslookup "domain list&!!" unset
15764 If the DNS lookup for MX records for one of the domains in this list causes a
15765 DNS lookup error, Exim behaves as if no MX records were found. See section
15766 &<<SECTprowitdnsloo>>& for more discussion.
15771 .option qualify_single dnslookup boolean true
15772 .cindex "DNS" "resolver options"
15773 .cindex "DNS" "qualifying single-component names"
15774 When this option is true, the resolver option RES_DEFNAMES is set for DNS
15775 lookups. Typically, but not standardly, this causes the resolver to qualify
15776 single-component names with the default domain. For example, on a machine
15777 called &'dictionary.ref.example'&, the domain &'thesaurus'& would be changed to
15778 &'thesaurus.ref.example'& inside the resolver. For details of what your
15779 resolver actually does, consult your man pages for &'resolver'& and
15784 .option rewrite_headers dnslookup boolean true
15785 .cindex "rewriting" "header lines"
15786 .cindex "header lines" "rewriting"
15787 If the domain name in the address that is being processed is not fully
15788 qualified, it may be expanded to its full form by a DNS lookup. For example, if
15789 an address is specified as &'dormouse@teaparty'&, the domain might be
15790 expanded to &'teaparty.wonderland.fict.example'&. Domain expansion can also
15791 occur as a result of setting the &%widen_domains%& option. If
15792 &%rewrite_headers%& is true, all occurrences of the abbreviated domain name in
15793 any &'Bcc:'&, &'Cc:'&, &'From:'&, &'Reply-to:'&, &'Sender:'&, and &'To:'&
15794 header lines of the message are rewritten with the full domain name.
15796 This option should be turned off only when it is known that no message is
15797 ever going to be sent outside an environment where the abbreviation makes
15800 When an MX record is looked up in the DNS and matches a wildcard record, name
15801 servers normally return a record containing the name that has been looked up,
15802 making it impossible to detect whether a wildcard was present or not. However,
15803 some name servers have recently been seen to return the wildcard entry. If the
15804 name returned by a DNS lookup begins with an asterisk, it is not used for
15808 .option same_domain_copy_routing dnslookup boolean false
15809 .cindex "address" "copying routing"
15810 Addresses with the same domain are normally routed by the &(dnslookup)& router
15811 to the same list of hosts. However, this cannot be presumed, because the router
15812 options and preconditions may refer to the local part of the address. By
15813 default, therefore, Exim routes each address in a message independently. DNS
15814 servers run caches, so repeated DNS lookups are not normally expensive, and in
15815 any case, personal messages rarely have more than a few recipients.
15817 If you are running mailing lists with large numbers of subscribers at the same
15818 domain, and you are using a &(dnslookup)& router which is independent of the
15819 local part, you can set &%same_domain_copy_routing%& to bypass repeated DNS
15820 lookups for identical domains in one message. In this case, when &(dnslookup)&
15821 routes an address to a remote transport, any other unrouted addresses in the
15822 message that have the same domain are automatically given the same routing
15823 without processing them independently,
15824 provided the following conditions are met:
15827 No router that processed the address specified &%headers_add%& or
15828 &%headers_remove%&.
15830 The router did not change the address in any way, for example, by &"widening"&
15837 .option search_parents dnslookup boolean false
15838 .cindex "DNS" "resolver options"
15839 When this option is true, the resolver option RES_DNSRCH is set for DNS
15840 lookups. This is different from the &%qualify_single%& option in that it
15841 applies to domains containing dots. Typically, but not standardly, it causes
15842 the resolver to search for the name in the current domain and in parent
15843 domains. For example, on a machine in the &'fict.example'& domain, if looking
15844 up &'teaparty.wonderland'& failed, the resolver would try
15845 &'teaparty.wonderland.fict.example'&. For details of what your resolver
15846 actually does, consult your man pages for &'resolver'& and &'resolv.conf'&.
15848 Setting this option true can cause problems in domains that have a wildcard MX
15849 record, because any domain that does not have its own MX record matches the
15854 .option srv_fail_domains dnslookup "domain list&!!" unset
15855 If the DNS lookup for SRV records for one of the domains in this list causes a
15856 DNS lookup error, Exim behaves as if no SRV records were found. See section
15857 &<<SECTprowitdnsloo>>& for more discussion.
15862 .option widen_domains dnslookup "string list" unset
15863 .cindex "domain" "partial; widening"
15864 If a DNS lookup fails and this option is set, each of its strings in turn is
15865 added onto the end of the domain, and the lookup is tried again. For example,
15868 widen_domains = fict.example:ref.example
15870 is set and a lookup of &'klingon.dictionary'& fails,
15871 &'klingon.dictionary.fict.example'& is looked up, and if this fails,
15872 &'klingon.dictionary.ref.example'& is tried. Note that the &%qualify_single%&
15873 and &%search_parents%& options can cause some widening to be undertaken inside
15874 the DNS resolver. &new("&%widen_domains%& is not applied to sender addresses
15875 when verifying, unless &%rewrite_headers%& is false (not the default).")
15878 .section "Effect of qualify_single and search_parents"
15879 When a domain from an envelope recipient is changed by the resolver as a result
15880 of the &%qualify_single%& or &%search_parents%& options, Exim rewrites the
15881 corresponding address in the message's header lines unless &%rewrite_headers%&
15882 is set false. Exim then re-routes the address, using the full domain.
15884 These two options affect only the DNS lookup that takes place inside the router
15885 for the domain of the address that is being routed. They do not affect lookups
15886 such as that implied by
15890 that may happen while processing a router precondition before the router is
15891 entered. No widening ever takes place for these lookups.
15901 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15902 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15904 .chapter "The ipliteral router"
15905 .cindex "&(ipliteral)& router"
15906 .cindex "domain literal" "routing"
15907 .cindex "routers" "&(ipliteral)&"
15908 This router has no private options. Unless it is being used purely for
15909 verification (see &%verify_only%&) a transport is required to be defined by the
15910 generic &%transport%& option. The router accepts the address if its domain part
15911 takes the form of an RFC 2822 domain literal, that is, an IP address enclosed
15912 in square brackets. For example, the &(ipliteral)& router handles the address
15916 by setting up delivery to the host with that IP address.
15918 .cindex "&%self%& option" "in &(ipliteral)& router"
15919 If the IP address matches something in &%ignore_target_hosts%&, the router
15920 declines. If an IP literal turns out to refer to the local host, the generic
15921 &%self%& option determines what happens.
15923 The RFCs require support for domain literals; however, their use is
15924 controversial in today's Internet. If you want to use this router, you must
15925 also set the main configuration option &%allow_domain_literals%&. Otherwise,
15926 Exim will not recognize the domain literal syntax in addresses.
15930 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15931 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
15933 .chapter "The iplookup router"
15934 .cindex "&(iplookup)& router"
15935 .cindex "routers" "&(iplookup)&"
15936 The &(iplookup)& router was written to fulfil a specific requirement in
15937 Cambridge University (which in fact no longer exists). For this reason, it is
15938 not included in the binary of Exim by default. If you want to include it, you
15941 ROUTER_IPLOOKUP=yes
15943 in your &_Local/Makefile_& configuration file.
15945 The &(iplookup)& router routes an address by sending it over a TCP or UDP
15946 connection to one or more specific hosts. The host can then return the same or
15947 a different address &-- in effect rewriting the recipient address in the
15948 message's envelope. The new address is then passed on to subsequent routers. If
15949 this process fails, the address can be passed on to other routers, or delivery
15950 can be deferred. Since &(iplookup)& is just a rewriting router, a transport
15951 must not be specified for it.
15953 .cindex "options" "&(iplookup)& router"
15954 .option hosts iplookup string unset
15955 This option must be supplied. Its value is a colon-separated list of host
15956 names. The hosts are looked up using &[gethostbyname()]&
15957 (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when available)
15958 and are tried in order until one responds to the query. If none respond, what
15959 happens is controlled by &%optional%&.
15962 .option optional iplookup boolean false
15963 If &%optional%& is true, if no response is obtained from any host, the address
15964 is passed to the next router, overriding &%no_more%&. If &%optional%& is false,
15965 delivery to the address is deferred.
15968 .option port iplookup integer 0
15969 .cindex "port" "&(iplookup)& router"
15970 This option must be supplied. It specifies the port number for the TCP or UDP
15974 .option protocol iplookup string udp
15975 This option can be set to &"udp"& or &"tcp"& to specify which of the two
15976 protocols is to be used.
15979 .option query iplookup string&!! "&`$local_part@$domain $local_part@$domain`&"
15980 This defines the content of the query that is sent to the remote hosts. The
15981 repetition serves as a way of checking that a response is to the correct query
15982 in the default case (see &%response_pattern%& below).
15985 .option reroute iplookup string&!! unset
15986 If this option is not set, the rerouted address is precisely the byte string
15987 returned by the remote host, up to the first white space, if any. If set, the
15988 string is expanded to form the rerouted address. It can include parts matched
15989 in the response by &%response_pattern%& by means of numeric variables such as
15990 &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. The variable &$0$& refers to the entire input string,
15991 whether or not a pattern is in use. In all cases, the rerouted address must end
15992 up in the form &'local_part@domain'&.
15995 .option response_pattern iplookup string unset
15996 This option can be set to a regular expression that is applied to the string
15997 returned from the remote host. If the pattern does not match the response, the
15998 router declines. If &%response_pattern%& is not set, no checking of the
15999 response is done, unless the query was defaulted, in which case there is a
16000 check that the text returned after the first white space is the original
16001 address. This checks that the answer that has been received is in response to
16002 the correct question. For example, if the response is just a new domain, the
16003 following could be used:
16005 response_pattern = ^([^@]+)$
16006 reroute = $local_part@$1
16009 .option timeout iplookup time 5s
16010 This specifies the amount of time to wait for a response from the remote
16011 machine. The same timeout is used for the &[connect()]& function for a TCP
16012 call. It does not apply to UDP.
16017 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16018 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16020 .chapter "The manualroute router"
16021 .cindex "&(manualroute)& router"
16022 .cindex "routers" "&(manualroute)&"
16023 .cindex "domain" "manually routing"
16024 The &(manualroute)& router is so-called because it provides a way of manually
16025 routing an address according to its domain. It is mainly used when you want to
16026 route addresses to remote hosts according to your own rules, bypassing the
16027 normal DNS routing that looks up MX records. However, &(manualroute)& can also
16028 route to local transports, a facility that may be useful if you want to save
16029 messages for dial-in hosts in local files.
16031 The &(manualroute)& router compares a list of domain patterns with the domain
16032 it is trying to route. If there is no match, the router declines. Each pattern
16033 has associated with it a list of hosts and some other optional data, which may
16034 include a transport. The combination of a pattern and its data is called a
16035 &"routing rule"&. For patterns that do not have an associated transport, the
16036 generic &%transport%& option must specify a transport, unless the router is
16037 being used purely for verification (see &%verify_only%&).
16040 In the case of verification, matching the domain pattern is sufficient for the
16041 router to accept the address. When actually routing an address for delivery,
16042 an address that matches a domain pattern is queued for the associated
16043 transport. If the transport is not a local one, a host list must be associated
16044 with the pattern; IP addresses are looked up for the hosts, and these are
16045 passed to the transport along with the mail address. For local transports, a
16046 host list is optional. If it is present, it is passed in &$host$& as a single
16049 The list of routing rules can be provided as an inline string in
16050 &%route_list%&, or the data can be obtained by looking up the domain in a file
16051 or database by setting &%route_data%&. Only one of these settings may appear in
16052 any one instance of &(manualroute)&. The format of routing rules is described
16053 below, following the list of private options.
16056 .section "Private options for manualroute" "SECTprioptman"
16058 .cindex "options" "&(manualroute)& router"
16059 The private options for the &(manualroute)& router are as follows:
16062 .option host_find_failed manualroute string freeze
16063 This option controls what happens when &(manualroute)& tries to find an IP
16064 address for a host, and the host does not exist. The option can be set to one
16073 The default assumes that this state is a serious configuration error. The
16074 difference between &"pass"& and &"decline"& is that the former forces the
16075 address to be passed to the next router (or the router defined by
16077 .cindex "&%more%& option"
16078 overriding &%no_more%&, whereas the latter passes the address to the next
16079 router only if &%more%& is true.
16081 This option applies only to a definite &"does not exist"& state; if a host
16082 lookup gets a temporary error, delivery is deferred unless the generic
16083 &%pass_on_timeout%& option is set.
16086 .option hosts_randomize manualroute boolean false
16087 .cindex "randomized host list"
16088 .cindex "host" "list of; randomized"
16089 If this option is set, the order of the items in a host list in a routing rule
16090 is randomized each time the list is used, unless an option in the routing rule
16091 overrides (see below). Randomizing the order of a host list can be used to do
16092 crude load sharing. However, if more than one mail address is routed by the
16093 same router to the same host list, the host lists are considered to be the same
16094 (even though they may be randomized into different orders) for the purpose of
16095 deciding whether to batch the deliveries into a single SMTP transaction.
16097 When &%hosts_randomize%& is true, a host list may be split
16098 into groups whose order is separately randomized. This makes it possible to
16099 set up MX-like behaviour. The boundaries between groups are indicated by an
16100 item that is just &`+`& in the host list. For example:
16102 route_list = * host1:host2:host3:+:host4:host5
16104 The order of the first three hosts and the order of the last two hosts is
16105 randomized for each use, but the first three always end up before the last two.
16106 If &%hosts_randomize%& is not set, a &`+`& item in the list is ignored. If a
16107 randomized host list is passed to an &(smtp)& transport that also has
16108 &%hosts_randomize set%&, the list is not re-randomized.
16111 .option route_data manualroute string&!! unset
16112 If this option is set, it must expand to yield the data part of a routing rule.
16113 Typically, the expansion string includes a lookup based on the domain. For
16116 route_data = ${lookup{$domain}dbm{/etc/routes}}
16118 If the expansion is forced to fail, or the result is an empty string, the
16119 router declines. Other kinds of expansion failure cause delivery to be
16123 .option route_list manualroute " "string list" " semicolon-separated""
16124 This string is a list of routing rules, in the form defined below. Note that,
16125 unlike most string lists, the items are separated by semicolons. This is so
16126 that they may contain colon-separated host lists.
16129 .option same_domain_copy_routing manualroute boolean false
16130 .cindex "address" "copying routing"
16131 Addresses with the same domain are normally routed by the &(manualroute)&
16132 router to the same list of hosts. However, this cannot be presumed, because the
16133 router options and preconditions may refer to the local part of the address. By
16134 default, therefore, Exim routes each address in a message independently. DNS
16135 servers run caches, so repeated DNS lookups are not normally expensive, and in
16136 any case, personal messages rarely have more than a few recipients.
16138 If you are running mailing lists with large numbers of subscribers at the same
16139 domain, and you are using a &(manualroute)& router which is independent of the
16140 local part, you can set &%same_domain_copy_routing%& to bypass repeated DNS
16141 lookups for identical domains in one message. In this case, when
16142 &(manualroute)& routes an address to a remote transport, any other unrouted
16143 addresses in the message that have the same domain are automatically given the
16144 same routing without processing them independently. However, this is only done
16145 if &%headers_add%& and &%headers_remove%& are unset.
16150 .section "Routing rules in route_list"
16151 The value of &%route_list%& is a string consisting of a sequence of routing
16152 rules, separated by semicolons. If a semicolon is needed in a rule, it can be
16153 entered as two semicolons. Alternatively, the list separator can be changed as
16154 described (for colon-separated lists) in section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&.
16155 Empty rules are ignored. The format of each rule is
16157 <&'domain pattern'&> <&'list of hosts'&> <&'options'&>
16159 The following example contains two rules, each with a simple domain pattern and
16163 dict.ref.example mail-1.ref.example:mail-2.ref.example ; \
16164 thes.ref.example mail-3.ref.example:mail-4.ref.example
16166 The three parts of a rule are separated by white space. The pattern and the
16167 list of hosts can be enclosed in quotes if necessary, and if they are, the
16168 usual quoting rules apply. Each rule in a &%route_list%& must start with a
16169 single domain pattern, which is the only mandatory item in the rule. The
16170 pattern is in the same format as one item in a domain list (see section
16171 &<<SECTdomainlist>>&),
16172 except that it may not be the name of an interpolated file.
16173 That is, it may be wildcarded, or a regular expression, or a file or database
16174 lookup (with semicolons doubled, because of the use of semicolon as a separator
16175 in a &%route_list%&).
16177 The rules in &%route_list%& are searched in order until one of the patterns
16178 matches the domain that is being routed. The list of hosts and then options are
16179 then used as described below. If there is no match, the router declines. When
16180 &%route_list%& is set, &%route_data%& must not be set.
16184 .section "Routing rules in route_data"
16185 The use of &%route_list%& is convenient when there are only a small number of
16186 routing rules. For larger numbers, it is easier to use a file or database to
16187 hold the routing information, and use the &%route_data%& option instead.
16188 The value of &%route_data%& is a list of hosts, followed by (optional) options.
16189 Most commonly, &%route_data%& is set as a string that contains an
16190 expansion lookup. For example, suppose we place two routing rules in a file
16193 dict.ref.example: mail-1.ref.example:mail-2.ref.example
16194 thes.ref.example: mail-3.ref.example:mail-4.ref.example
16196 This data can be accessed by setting
16198 route_data = ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/the/file/name}}
16200 Failure of the lookup results in an empty string, causing the router to
16201 decline. However, you do not have to use a lookup in &%route_data%&. The only
16202 requirement is that the result of expanding the string is a list of hosts,
16203 possibly followed by options, separated by white space. The list of hosts must
16204 be enclosed in quotes if it contains white space.
16209 .section "Format of the list of hosts"
16211 A list of hosts, whether obtained via &%route_data%& or &%route_list%&, is
16212 always separately expanded before use. If the expansion fails, the router
16213 declines. The result of the expansion must be a colon-separated list of names
16214 and/or IP addresses, optionally also including ports. The format of each item
16215 in the list is described in the next section. The list separator can be changed
16216 as described in section &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&.
16219 If the list of hosts was obtained from a &%route_list%& item, the following
16220 variables are set during its expansion:
16223 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &(manualroute)& router"
16224 If the domain was matched against a regular expression, the numeric variables
16225 &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. may be set. For example:
16227 route_list = ^domain(\d+) host-$1.text.example
16230 &$0$& is always set to the entire domain.
16232 &$1$& is also set when partial matching is done in a file lookup.
16235 .cindex "&$value$&"
16236 If the pattern that matched the domain was a lookup item, the data that was
16237 looked up is available in the expansion variable &$value$&. For example:
16239 route_list = lsearch;;/some/file.routes $value
16243 Note the doubling of the semicolon in the pattern that is necessary because
16244 semicolon is the default route list separator.
16248 .section "Format of one host item" "SECTformatonehostitem"
16250 Each item in the list of hosts is either a host name or an IP address,
16251 optionally with an attached port number. When no port is given, an IP address
16252 is not enclosed in brackets. When a port is specified, it overrides the port
16253 specification on the transport. The port is separated from the name or address
16254 by a colon. This leads to some complications:
16257 Because colon is the default separator for the list of hosts, either
16258 the colon that specifies a port must be doubled, or the list separator must
16259 be changed. The following two examples have the same effect:
16261 route_list = * "host1.tld::1225 : host2.tld::1226"
16262 route_list = * "<+ host1.tld:1225 + host2.tld:1226"
16265 When IPv6 addresses are involved, it gets worse, because they contain
16266 colons of their own. To make this case easier, it is permitted to
16267 enclose an IP address (either v4 or v6) in square brackets if a port
16268 number follows. For example:
16270 route_list = * "</ [10.1.1.1]:1225 / [::1]:1226"
16275 .section "How the list of hosts is used" "SECThostshowused"
16276 When an address is routed to an &(smtp)& transport by &(manualroute)&, each of
16277 the hosts is tried, in the order specified, when carrying out the SMTP
16278 delivery. However, the order can be changed by setting the &%hosts_randomize%&
16279 option, either on the router (see section &<<SECTprioptman>>& above), or on the
16282 Hosts may be listed by name or by IP address. An unadorned name in the list of
16283 hosts is interpreted as a host name. A name that is followed by &`/MX`& is
16284 interpreted as an indirection to a sublist of hosts obtained by looking up MX
16285 records in the DNS. For example:
16287 route_list = * x.y.z:p.q.r/MX:e.f.g
16290 If this feature is used with a port specifier, the port must come last. For
16293 route_list = * dom1.tld/mx::1225
16296 If the &%hosts_randomize%& option is set, the order of the items in the list is
16297 randomized before any lookups are done. Exim then scans the list; for any name
16298 that is not followed by &`/MX`& it looks up an IP address. If this turns out to
16299 be an interface on the local host and the item is not the first in the list,
16300 Exim discards it and any subsequent items. If it is the first item, what
16301 happens is controlled by the
16302 .cindex "&%self%& option" "in &(manualroute)& router"
16303 &%self%& option of the router.
16305 A name on the list that is followed by &`/MX`& is replaced with the list of
16306 hosts obtained by looking up MX records for the name. This is always a DNS
16307 lookup; the &%bydns%& and &%byname%& options (see section &<<SECThowoptused>>&
16308 below) are not relevant here. The order of these hosts is determined by the
16309 preference values in the MX records, according to the usual rules. Because
16310 randomizing happens before the MX lookup, it does not affect the order that is
16311 defined by MX preferences.
16313 If the local host is present in the sublist obtained from MX records, but is
16314 not the most preferred host in that list, it and any equally or less
16315 preferred hosts are removed before the sublist is inserted into the main list.
16317 If the local host is the most preferred host in the MX list, what happens
16318 depends on where in the original list of hosts the &`/MX`& item appears. If it
16319 is not the first item (that is, there are previous hosts in the main list),
16320 Exim discards this name and any subsequent items in the main list.
16322 If the MX item is first in the list of hosts, and the local host is the
16323 most preferred host, what happens is controlled by the &%self%& option of the
16326 DNS failures when lookup up the MX records are treated in the same way as DNS
16327 failures when looking up IP addresses: &%pass_on_timeout%& and
16328 &%host_find_failed%& are used when relevant.
16330 The generic &%ignore_target_hosts%& option applies to all hosts in the list,
16331 whether obtained from an MX lookup or not.
16335 .section "How the options are used" "SECThowoptused"
16336 The options are a sequence of words; in practice no more than three are ever
16337 present. One of the words can be the name of a transport; this overrides the
16338 &%transport%& option on the router for this particular routing rule only. The
16339 other words (if present) control randomization of the list of hosts on a
16340 per-rule basis, and how the IP addresses of the hosts are to be found when
16341 routing to a remote transport. These options are as follows:
16344 &%randomize%&: randomize the order of the hosts in this list, overriding the
16345 setting of &%hosts_randomize%& for this routing rule only.
16347 &%no_randomize%&: do not randomize the order of the hosts in this list,
16348 overriding the setting of &%hosts_randomize%& for this routing rule only.
16350 &%byname%&: use &[getipnodebyname()]& (&[gethostbyname()]& on older systems) to
16351 find IP addresses. This function may ultimately cause a DNS lookup, but it may
16352 also look in &_/etc/hosts_& or other sources of information.
16354 &%bydns%&: look up address records for the hosts directly in the DNS; fail if
16355 no address records are found. If there is a temporary DNS error (such as a
16356 timeout), delivery is deferred.
16361 route_list = domain1 host1:host2:host3 randomize bydns;\
16362 domain2 host4:host5
16364 If neither &%byname%& nor &%bydns%& is given, Exim behaves as follows: First, a
16365 DNS lookup is done. If this yields anything other than HOST_NOT_FOUND, that
16366 result is used. Otherwise, Exim goes on to try a call to &[getipnodebyname()]&
16367 or &[gethostbyname()]&, and the result of the lookup is the result of that
16370 &*Warning*&: It has been discovered that on some systems, if a DNS lookup
16371 called via &[getipnodebyname()]& times out, HOST_NOT_FOUND is returned
16372 instead of TRY_AGAIN. That is why the default action is to try a DNS
16373 lookup first. Only if that gives a definite &"no such host"& is the local
16378 If no IP address for a host can be found, what happens is controlled by the
16379 &%host_find_failed%& option.
16382 When an address is routed to a local transport, IP addresses are not looked up.
16383 The host list is passed to the transport in the &$host$& variable.
16387 .section "Manualroute examples"
16388 In some of the examples that follow, the presence of the &%remote_smtp%&
16389 transport, as defined in the default configuration file, is assumed:
16392 .cindex "smart host" "example router"
16393 The &(manualroute)& router can be used to forward all external mail to a
16394 &'smart host'&. If you have set up, in the main part of the configuration, a
16395 named domain list that contains your local domains, for example:
16397 domainlist local_domains = my.domain.example
16399 You can arrange for all other domains to be routed to a smart host by making
16400 your first router something like this:
16403 driver = manualroute
16404 domains = !+local_domains
16405 transport = remote_smtp
16406 route_list = * smarthost.ref.example
16408 This causes all non-local addresses to be sent to the single host
16409 &'smarthost.ref.example'&. If a colon-separated list of smart hosts is given,
16410 they are tried in order
16411 (but you can use &%hosts_randomize%& to vary the order each time).
16412 Another way of configuring the same thing is this:
16415 driver = manualroute
16416 transport = remote_smtp
16417 route_list = !+local_domains smarthost.ref.example
16419 There is no difference in behaviour between these two routers as they stand.
16420 However, they behave differently if &%no_more%& is added to them. In the first
16421 example, the router is skipped if the domain does not match the &%domains%&
16422 precondition; the following router is always tried. If the router runs, it
16423 always matches the domain and so can never decline. Therefore, &%no_more%&
16424 would have no effect. In the second case, the router is never skipped; it
16425 always runs. However, if it doesn't match the domain, it declines. In this case
16426 &%no_more%& would prevent subsequent routers from running.
16429 .cindex "mail hub example"
16430 A &'mail hub'& is a host which receives mail for a number of domains via MX
16431 records in the DNS and delivers it via its own private routing mechanism. Often
16432 the final destinations are behind a firewall, with the mail hub being the one
16433 machine that can connect to machines both inside and outside the firewall. The
16434 &(manualroute)& router is usually used on a mail hub to route incoming messages
16435 to the correct hosts. For a small number of domains, the routing can be inline,
16436 using the &%route_list%& option, but for a larger number a file or database
16437 lookup is easier to manage.
16439 If the domain names are in fact the names of the machines to which the mail is
16440 to be sent by the mail hub, the configuration can be quite simple. For
16444 driver = manualroute
16445 transport = remote_smtp
16446 route_list = *.rhodes.tvs.example $domain
16448 This configuration routes domains that match &`*.rhodes.tvs.example`& to hosts
16449 whose names are the same as the mail domains. A similar approach can be taken
16450 if the host name can be obtained from the domain name by a string manipulation
16451 that the expansion facilities can handle. Otherwise, a lookup based on the
16452 domain can be used to find the host:
16455 driver = manualroute
16456 transport = remote_smtp
16457 route_data = ${lookup {$domain} cdb {/internal/host/routes}}
16459 The result of the lookup must be the name or IP address of the host (or
16460 hosts) to which the address is to be routed. If the lookup fails, the route
16461 data is empty, causing the router to decline. The address then passes to the
16465 .cindex "batched SMTP output example"
16466 .cindex "SMTP" "batched outgoing; example"
16467 You can use &(manualroute)& to deliver messages to pipes or files in batched
16468 SMTP format for onward transportation by some other means. This is one way of
16469 storing mail for a dial-up host when it is not connected. The route list entry
16470 can be as simple as a single domain name in a configuration like this:
16473 driver = manualroute
16474 transport = batchsmtp_appendfile
16475 route_list = saved.domain.example
16477 though often a pattern is used to pick up more than one domain. If there are
16478 several domains or groups of domains with different transport requirements,
16479 different transports can be listed in the routing information:
16482 driver = manualroute
16484 *.saved.domain1.example $domain batch_appendfile; \
16485 *.saved.domain2.example \
16486 ${lookup{$domain}dbm{/domain2/hosts}{$value}fail} \
16489 .cindex "&$domain$&"
16491 The first of these just passes the domain in the &$host$& variable, which
16492 doesn't achieve much (since it is also in &$domain$&), but the second does a
16493 file lookup to find a value to pass, causing the router to decline to handle
16494 the address if the lookup fails.
16497 .cindex "UUCP" "example of router for"
16498 Routing mail directly to UUCP software is a specific case of the use of
16499 &(manualroute)& in a gateway to another mail environment. This is an example of
16500 one way it can be done:
16506 command = /usr/local/bin/uux -r - \
16507 ${substr_-5:$host}!rmail ${local_part}
16508 return_fail_output = true
16513 driver = manualroute
16515 ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/usr/local/exim/uucphosts}}
16517 The file &_/usr/local/exim/uucphosts_& contains entries like
16519 darksite.ethereal.example: darksite.UUCP
16521 It can be set up more simply without adding and removing &".UUCP"& but this way
16522 makes clear the distinction between the domain name
16523 &'darksite.ethereal.example'& and the UUCP host name &'darksite'&.
16533 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16534 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16536 .chapter "The queryprogram router" "CHAPdriverlast"
16537 .cindex "&(queryprogram)& router"
16538 .cindex "routers" "&(queryprogram)&"
16539 .cindex "routing" "by external program"
16540 The &(queryprogram)& router routes an address by running an external command
16541 and acting on its output. This is an expensive way to route, and is intended
16542 mainly for use in lightly-loaded systems, or for performing experiments.
16543 However, if it is possible to use the precondition options (&%domains%&,
16544 &%local_parts%&, etc) to skip this router for most addresses, it could sensibly
16545 be used in special cases, even on a busy host. There are the following private
16547 .cindex "options" "&(queryprogram)& router"
16549 .option command queryprogram string&!! unset
16550 This option must be set. It specifies the command that is to be run. The
16551 command is split up into a command name and arguments, and then each is
16552 expanded separately (exactly as for a &(pipe)& transport, described in chapter
16553 &<<CHAPpipetransport>>&).
16556 .option command_group queryprogram string unset
16557 .cindex "gid (group id)" "in &(queryprogram)& router"
16558 This option specifies a gid to be set when running the command. It must be set
16559 if &%command_user%& specifies a numerical uid. If it begins with a digit, it is
16560 interpreted as the numerical value of the gid. Otherwise it is looked up using
16564 .option command_user queryprogram string unset
16565 .cindex "uid (user id)" "for &(queryprogram)&"
16566 This option must be set. It specifies the uid which is set when running the
16567 command. If it begins with a digit it is interpreted as the numerical value of
16568 the uid. Otherwise, it is looked up using &[getpwnam()]& to obtain a value for
16569 the uid and, if &%command_group%& is not set, a value for the gid also.
16572 .option current_directory queryprogram string /
16573 This option specifies an absolute path which is made the current directory
16574 before running the command.
16577 .option timeout queryprogram time 1h
16578 If the command does not complete within the timeout period, its process group
16579 is killed and the message is frozen. A value of zero time specifies no
16583 The standard output of the command is connected to a pipe, which is read when
16584 the command terminates. It should consist of a single line of output,
16585 containing up to five fields, separated by white space. The maximum length of
16586 the line is 1023 characters. Longer lines are silently truncated. The first
16587 field is one of the following words (case-insensitive):
16590 &'Accept'&: routing succeeded; the remaining fields specify what to do (see
16593 &'Decline'&: the router declines; pass the address to the next router, unless
16594 &%no_more%& is set.
16596 &'Fail'&: routing failed; do not pass the address to any more routers. Any
16597 subsequent text on the line is an error message. If the router is run as part
16598 of address verification during an incoming SMTP message, the message is
16599 included in the SMTP response.
16601 &'Defer'&: routing could not be completed at this time; try again later. Any
16602 subsequent text on the line is an error message which is logged. It is not
16603 included in any SMTP response.
16605 &'Freeze'&: the same as &'defer'&, except that the message is frozen.
16607 &'Pass'&: pass the address to the next router (or the router specified by
16608 &%pass_router%&), overriding &%no_more%&.
16610 &'Redirect'&: the message is redirected. The remainder of the line is a list of
16611 new addresses, which are routed independently, starting with the first router,
16612 or the router specified by &%redirect_router%&, if set.
16615 When the first word is &'accept'&, the remainder of the line consists of a
16616 number of keyed data values, as follows (split into two lines here, to fit on
16619 ACCEPT TRANSPORT=<transport> HOSTS=<list of hosts>
16620 LOOKUP=byname|bydns DATA=<text>
16622 The data items can be given in any order, and all are optional. If no transport
16623 is included, the transport specified by the generic &%transport%& option is
16624 used. The list of hosts and the lookup type are needed only if the transport is
16625 an &(smtp)& transport that does not itself supply a list of hosts.
16627 The format of the list of hosts is the same as for the &(manualroute)& router.
16628 As well as host names and IP addresses with optional port numbers, as described
16629 in section &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&, it may contain names followed by
16630 &`/MX`& to specify sublists of hosts that are obtained by looking up MX records
16631 (see section &<<SECThostshowused>>&).
16633 If the lookup type is not specified, Exim behaves as follows when trying to
16634 find an IP address for each host: First, a DNS lookup is done. If this yields
16635 anything other than HOST_NOT_FOUND, that result is used. Otherwise, Exim
16636 goes on to try a call to &[getipnodebyname()]& or &[gethostbyname()]&, and the
16637 result of the lookup is the result of that call.
16639 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
16640 If the DATA field is set, its value is placed in the &$address_data$&
16641 variable. For example, this return line
16643 accept hosts=x1.y.example:x2.y.example data="rule1"
16645 routes the address to the default transport, passing a list of two hosts. When
16646 the transport runs, the string &"rule1"& is in &$address_data$&.
16651 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16652 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
16654 .chapter "The redirect router" "CHAPredirect"
16655 .cindex "&(redirect)& router"
16656 .cindex "routers" "&(redirect)&"
16657 .cindex "alias file" "in a &(redirect)& router"
16658 .cindex "address redirection" "&(redirect)& router"
16659 The &(redirect)& router handles several kinds of address redirection. Its most
16660 common uses are for resolving local part aliases from a central alias file
16661 (usually called &_/etc/aliases_&) and for handling users' personal &_.forward_&
16662 files, but it has many other potential uses. The incoming address can be
16663 redirected in several different ways:
16666 It can be replaced by one or more new addresses which are themselves routed
16669 It can be routed to be delivered to a given file or directory.
16671 It can be routed to be delivered to a specified pipe command.
16673 It can cause an automatic reply to be generated.
16675 It can be forced to fail, with a custom error message.
16677 It can be temporarily deferred.
16679 It can be discarded.
16682 The generic &%transport%& option must not be set for &(redirect)& routers.
16683 However, there are some private options which define transports for delivery to
16684 files and pipes, and for generating autoreplies. See the &%file_transport%&,
16685 &%pipe_transport%& and &%reply_transport%& descriptions below.
16689 .section "Redirection data"
16690 The router operates by interpreting a text string which it obtains either by
16691 expanding the contents of the &%data%& option, or by reading the entire
16692 contents of a file whose name is given in the &%file%& option. These two
16693 options are mutually exclusive. The first is commonly used for handling system
16694 aliases, in a configuration like this:
16698 data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/aliases}}
16700 If the lookup fails, the expanded string in this example is empty. When the
16701 expansion of &%data%& results in an empty string, the router declines. A forced
16702 expansion failure also causes the router to decline; other expansion failures
16703 cause delivery to be deferred.
16705 A configuration using &%file%& is commonly used for handling users'
16706 &_.forward_& files, like this:
16711 file = $home/.forward
16714 If the file does not exist, or causes no action to be taken (for example, it is
16715 empty or consists only of comments), the router declines. &*Warning*&: This
16716 is not the case when the file contains syntactically valid items that happen to
16717 yield empty addresses, for example, items containing only RFC 2822 address
16722 .section "Forward files and address verification"
16723 .cindex "address redirection" "while verifying"
16724 It is usual to set &%no_verify%& on &(redirect)& routers which handle users'
16725 &_.forward_& files, as in the example above. There are two reasons for this:
16728 When Exim is receiving an incoming SMTP message from a remote host, it is
16729 running under the Exim uid, not as root.
16730 No additional groups are set up, even if the Exim uid is a member of other
16731 groups (that is, the &[initgroups()]& function is not run).
16732 Exim is unable to change uid to read the file as the user, and it may not be
16733 able to read it as the Exim user. So in practice the router may not be able to
16736 However, even when the router can operate, the existence of a &_.forward_& file
16737 is unimportant when verifying an address. What should be checked is whether the
16738 local part is a valid user name or not. Cutting out the redirection processing
16739 saves some resources.
16747 .section "Interpreting redirection data"
16748 .cindex "Sieve filter" "specifying in redirection data"
16749 .cindex "filter" "specifying in redirection data"
16750 The contents of the data string, whether obtained from &%data%& or &%file%&,
16751 can be interpreted in two different ways:
16754 If the &%allow_filter%& option is set true, and the data begins with the text
16755 &"#Exim filter"& or &"#Sieve filter"&, it is interpreted as a list of
16756 &'filtering'& instructions in the form of an Exim or Sieve filter file,
16757 respectively. Details of the syntax and semantics of filter files are described
16758 in a separate document entitled &'Exim's interfaces to mail filtering'&; this
16759 document is intended for use by end users.
16761 Otherwise, the data must be a comma-separated list of redirection items, as
16762 described in the next section.
16765 When a message is redirected to a file (a &"mail folder"&), the file name given
16766 in a non-filter redirection list must always be an absolute path. A filter may
16767 generate a relative path &-- how this is handled depends on the transport's
16768 configuration. See section &<<SECTfildiropt>>& for a discussion of this issue
16769 for the &(appendfile)& transport.
16773 .section "Items in a non-filter redirection list" "SECTitenonfilred"
16774 .cindex "address redirection" "non-filter list items"
16775 When the redirection data is not an Exim or Sieve filter, for example, if it
16776 comes from a conventional alias or forward file, it consists of a list of
16777 addresses, file names, pipe commands, or certain special items (see section
16778 &<<SECTspecitredli>>& below). The special items can be individually enabled or
16779 disabled by means of options whose names begin with &%allow_%& or &%forbid_%&,
16780 depending on their default values. The items in the list are separated by
16781 commas or newlines.
16782 If a comma is required in an item, the entire item must be enclosed in double
16785 Lines starting with a # character are comments, and are ignored, and # may
16786 also appear following a comma, in which case everything between the # and the
16787 next newline character is ignored.
16789 If an item is entirely enclosed in double quotes, these are removed. Otherwise
16790 double quotes are retained because some forms of mail address require their use
16791 (but never to enclose the entire address). In the following description,
16792 &"item"& refers to what remains after any surrounding double quotes have been
16795 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
16796 &*Warning*&: If you use an Exim expansion to construct a redirection address,
16797 and the expansion contains a reference to &$local_part$&, you should make use
16798 of the &%quote_local_part%& expansion operator, in case the local part contains
16799 special characters. For example, to redirect all mail for the domain
16800 &'obsolete.example'&, retaining the existing local part, you could use this
16803 data = ${quote_local_part:$local_part}@newdomain.example
16807 .section "Redirecting to a local mailbox" "SECTredlocmai"
16808 .cindex "routing" "loops in"
16809 .cindex "loop while routing" "avoidance of"
16810 .cindex "address redirection" "to local mailbox"
16811 A redirection item may safely be the same as the address currently under
16812 consideration. This does not cause a routing loop, because a router is
16813 automatically skipped if any ancestor of the address that is being processed
16814 is the same as the current address and was processed by the current router.
16815 Such an address is therefore passed to the following routers, so it is handled
16816 as if there were no redirection. When making this loop-avoidance test, the
16817 complete local part, including any prefix or suffix, is used.
16819 .cindex "address redirection" "local part without domain"
16820 Specifying the same local part without a domain is a common usage in personal
16821 filter files when the user wants to have messages delivered to the local
16822 mailbox and also forwarded elsewhere. For example, the user whose login is
16823 &'cleo'& might have a &_.forward_& file containing this:
16825 cleo, cleopatra@egypt.example
16827 .cindex "backslash in alias file"
16828 .cindex "alias file" "backslash in"
16829 For compatibility with other MTAs, such unqualified local parts may be
16830 preceeded by &"\"&, but this is not a requirement for loop prevention. However,
16831 it does make a difference if more than one domain is being handled
16834 If an item begins with &"\"& and the rest of the item parses as a valid RFC
16835 2822 address that does not include a domain, the item is qualified using the
16836 domain of the incoming address. In the absence of a leading &"\"&, unqualified
16837 addresses are qualified using the value in &%qualify_recipient%&, but you can
16838 force the incoming domain to be used by setting &%qualify_preserve_domain%&.
16840 Care must be taken if there are alias names for local users.
16841 Consider an MTA handling a single local domain where the system alias file
16846 Now suppose that Sam (whose login id is &'spqr'&) wants to save copies of
16847 messages in the local mailbox, and also forward copies elsewhere. He creates
16850 Sam.Reman, spqr@reme.elsewhere.example
16852 With these settings, an incoming message addressed to &'Sam.Reman'& fails. The
16853 &(redirect)& router for system aliases does not process &'Sam.Reman'& the
16854 second time round, because it has previously routed it,
16855 and the following routers presumably cannot handle the alias. The forward file
16856 should really contain
16858 spqr, spqr@reme.elsewhere.example
16860 but because this is such a common error, the &%check_ancestor%& option (see
16861 below) exists to provide a way to get round it. This is normally set on a
16862 &(redirect)& router that is handling users' &_.forward_& files.
16866 .section "Special items in redirection lists" "SECTspecitredli"
16867 In addition to addresses, the following types of item may appear in redirection
16868 lists (that is, in non-filter redirection data):
16871 .cindex "pipe" "in redirection list"
16872 .cindex "address redirection" "to pipe"
16873 An item is treated as a pipe command if it begins with &"|"& and does not parse
16874 as a valid RFC 2822 address that includes a domain. A transport for running the
16875 command must be specified by the &%pipe_transport%& option.
16876 Normally, either the router or the transport specifies a user and a group under
16877 which to run the delivery. The default is to use the Exim user and group.
16879 Single or double quotes can be used for enclosing the individual arguments of
16880 the pipe command; no interpretation of escapes is done for single quotes. If
16881 the command contains a comma character, it is necessary to put the whole item
16882 in double quotes, for example:
16884 "|/some/command ready,steady,go"
16886 since items in redirection lists are terminated by commas. Do not, however,
16887 quote just the command. An item such as
16889 |"/some/command ready,steady,go"
16891 is interpreted as a pipe with a rather strange command name, and no arguments.
16894 .cindex "file" "in redirection list"
16895 .cindex "address redirection" "to file"
16896 An item is interpreted as a path name if it begins with &"/"& and does not
16897 parse as a valid RFC 2822 address that includes a domain. For example,
16899 /home/world/minbari
16901 is treated as a file name, but
16903 /s=molari/o=babylon/@x400gate.way
16905 is treated as an address. For a file name, a transport must be specified using
16906 the &%file_transport%& option. However, if the generated path name ends with a
16907 forward slash character, it is interpreted as a directory name rather than a
16908 file name, and &%directory_transport%& is used instead.
16910 Normally, either the router or the transport specifies a user and a group under
16911 which to run the delivery. The default is to use the Exim user and group.
16913 .cindex "&_/dev/null_&"
16914 However, if a redirection item is the path &_/dev/null_&, delivery to it is
16915 bypassed at a high level, and the log entry shows &"**bypassed**"&
16916 instead of a transport name. In this case the user and group are not used.
16919 .cindex "included address list"
16920 .cindex "address redirection" "included external list"
16921 If an item is of the form
16923 :include:<path name>
16925 a list of further items is taken from the given file and included at that
16926 point. &*Note*&: Such a file can not be a filter file; it is just an
16927 out-of-line addition to the list. The items in the included list are separated
16928 by commas or newlines and are not subject to expansion. If this is the first
16929 item in an alias list in an &(lsearch)& file, a colon must be used to terminate
16930 the alias name. This example is incorrect:
16932 list1 :include:/opt/lists/list1
16934 It must be given as
16936 list1: :include:/opt/lists/list1
16939 .cindex "address redirection" "to black hole"
16940 Sometimes you want to throw away mail to a particular local part. Making the
16941 &%data%& option expand to an empty string does not work, because that causes
16942 the router to decline. Instead, the alias item
16943 .cindex "black hole"
16944 .cindex "abandoning mail"
16948 can be used. It does what its name implies. No delivery is done, and no error
16949 message is generated. This has the same effect as specifing &_/dev/null_&, but
16950 can be independently disabled.
16952 &*Warning*&: If &`:blackhole:`& appears anywhere in a redirection list, no
16953 delivery is done for the original local part, even if other redirection items
16954 are present. If you are generating a multi-item list (for example, by reading a
16955 database) and need the ability to provide a no-op item, you must use
16959 .cindex "delivery" "forcing failure"
16960 .cindex "delivery" "forcing deferral"
16961 .cindex "failing delivery" "forcing"
16962 .cindex "deferred delivery" "forcing"
16963 .cindex "customizing" "failure message"
16964 An attempt to deliver a particular address can be deferred or forced to fail by
16965 redirection items of the form
16970 respectively. When a redirection list contains such an item, it applies to the
16971 entire redirection; any other items in the list are ignored (&':blackhole:'& is
16972 different). Any text following &':fail:'& or &':defer:'& is placed in the error
16973 text associated with the failure. For example, an alias file might contain:
16975 X.Employee: :fail: Gone away, no forwarding address
16977 In the case of an address that is being verified from an ACL or as the subject
16979 .cindex "VRFY error text" "display of"
16980 VRFY command, the text is included in the SMTP error response by
16982 .cindex "EXPN error text" "display of"
16983 The text is not included in the response to an EXPN command.
16985 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
16986 In an ACL, an explicitly provided message overrides the default, but the
16987 default message is available in the variable &$acl_verify_message$& and can
16988 therefore be included in a custom message if this is desired. Exim sends a 451
16989 SMTP code for a &':defer:'&, and 550 for &':fail:'&. In non-SMTP cases the text
16990 is included in the error message that Exim generates.
16992 Normally the error text is the rest of the redirection list &-- a comma does
16993 not terminate it &-- but a newline does act as a terminator. Newlines are not
16994 normally present in alias expansions. In &(lsearch)& lookups they are removed
16995 as part of the continuation process, but they may exist in other kinds of
16996 lookup and in &':include:'& files.
16998 During routing for message delivery (as opposed to verification), a redirection
16999 containing &':fail:'& causes an immediate failure of the incoming address,
17000 whereas &':defer:'& causes the message to remain on the queue so that a
17001 subsequent delivery attempt can happen at a later time. If an address is
17002 deferred for too long, it will ultimately fail, because the normal retry
17006 .cindex "alias file" "exception to default"
17007 Sometimes it is useful to use a single-key search type with a default (see
17008 chapter &<<CHAPfdlookup>>&) to look up aliases. However, there may be a need
17009 for exceptions to the default. These can be handled by aliasing them to
17013 This differs from &':fail:'& in that it causes the &(redirect)& router to
17014 decline, whereas &':fail:'& forces routing to fail. A lookup which results in
17015 an empty redirection list has the same effect.
17019 .section "Duplicate addresses"
17020 .cindex "duplicate addresses"
17021 .cindex "address duplicate" "discarding"
17022 .cindex "pipe" "duplicated"
17023 Exim removes duplicate addresses from the list to which it is delivering, so as
17024 to deliver just one copy to each address. This does not apply to deliveries
17025 routed to pipes by different immediate parent addresses, but an indirect
17026 aliasing scheme of the type
17028 pipe: |/some/command $local_part
17032 does not work with a message that is addressed to both local parts, because
17033 when the second is aliased to the intermediate local part &"pipe"& it gets
17034 discarded as being the same as a previously handled address. However, a scheme
17037 localpart1: |/some/command $local_part
17038 localpart2: |/some/command $local_part
17040 does result in two different pipe deliveries, because the immediate parents of
17041 the pipes are distinct.
17045 .section "Repeated redirection expansion"
17046 .cindex "repeated redirection expansion"
17047 .cindex "address redirection" "repeated for each delivery attempt"
17048 When a message cannot be delivered to all of its recipients immediately,
17049 leading to two or more delivery attempts, redirection expansion is carried out
17050 afresh each time for those addresses whose children were not all previously
17051 delivered. If redirection is being used as a mailing list, this can lead to new
17052 members of the list receiving copies of old messages. The &%one_time%& option
17053 can be used to avoid this.
17056 .section "Errors in redirection lists"
17057 .cindex "address redirection" "errors"
17058 If &%skip_syntax_errors%& is set, a malformed address that causes a parsing
17059 error is skipped, and an entry is written to the main log. This may be useful
17060 for mailing lists that are automatically managed. Otherwise, if an error is
17061 detected while generating the list of new addresses, the original address is
17062 deferred. See also &%syntax_errors_to%&.
17066 .section "Private options for the redirect router"
17068 .cindex "options" "&(redirect)& router"
17069 The private options for the &(redirect)& router are as follows:
17072 .option allow_defer redirect boolean false
17073 Setting this option allows the use of &':defer:'& in non-filter redirection
17074 data, or the &%defer%& command in an Exim filter file.
17077 .option allow_fail redirect boolean false
17078 .cindex "failing delivery" "from filter"
17079 If this option is true, the &':fail:'& item can be used in a redirection list,
17080 and the &%fail%& command may be used in an Exim filter file.
17083 .option allow_filter redirect boolean false
17084 .cindex "filter" "enabling use of"
17085 .cindex "Sieve filter" "enabling use of"
17086 Setting this option allows Exim to interpret redirection data that starts with
17087 &"#Exim filter"& or &"#Sieve filter"& as a set of filtering instructions. There
17088 are some features of Exim filter files that some administrators may wish to
17089 lock out; see the &%forbid_filter_%&&'xxx'& options below.
17091 It is also possible to lock out Exim filters or Sieve filters while allowing
17092 the other type; see &%forbid_exim_filter%& and &%forbid_sieve_filter%&.
17095 The filter is run using the uid and gid set by the generic &%user%& and
17096 &%group%& options. These take their defaults from the password data if
17097 &%check_local_user%& is set, so in the normal case of users' personal filter
17098 files, the filter is run as the relevant user. When &%allow_filter%& is set
17099 true, Exim insists that either &%check_local_user%& or &%user%& is set.
17103 .option allow_freeze redirect boolean false
17104 .cindex "freezing messages" "allowing in filter"
17105 Setting this option allows the use of the &%freeze%& command in an Exim filter.
17106 This command is more normally encountered in system filters, and is disabled by
17107 default for redirection filters because it isn't something you usually want to
17108 let ordinary users do.
17112 .option check_ancestor redirect boolean false
17113 This option is concerned with handling generated addresses that are the same
17114 as some address in the list of redirection ancestors of the current address.
17115 Although it is turned off by default in the code, it is set in the default
17116 configuration file for handling users' &_.forward_& files. It is recommended
17117 for this use of the &(redirect)& router.
17119 When &%check_ancestor%& is set, if a generated address (including the domain)
17120 is the same as any ancestor of the current address, it is replaced by a copy of
17121 the current address. This helps in the case where local part A is aliased to B,
17122 and B has a &_.forward_& file pointing back to A. For example, within a single
17123 domain, the local part &"Joe.Bloggs"& is aliased to &"jb"& and
17124 &_&~jb/.forward_& contains:
17126 \Joe.Bloggs, <other item(s)>
17128 Without the &%check_ancestor%& setting, either local part (&"jb"& or
17129 &"joe.bloggs"&) gets processed once by each router and so ends up as it was
17130 originally. If &"jb"& is the real mailbox name, mail to &"jb"& gets delivered
17131 (having been turned into &"joe.bloggs"& by the &_.forward_& file and back to
17132 &"jb"& by the alias), but mail to &"joe.bloggs"& fails. Setting
17133 &%check_ancestor%& on the &(redirect)& router that handles the &_.forward_&
17134 file prevents it from turning &"jb"& back into &"joe.bloggs"& when that was the
17135 original address. See also the &%repeat_use%& option below.
17138 .option check_group redirect boolean "see below"
17139 When the &%file%& option is used, the group owner of the file is checked only
17140 when this option is set. The permitted groups are those listed in the
17141 &%owngroups%& option, together with the user's default group if
17142 &%check_local_user%& is set. If the file has the wrong group, routing is
17143 deferred. The default setting for this option is true if &%check_local_user%&
17144 is set and the &%modemask%& option permits the group write bit, or if the
17145 &%owngroups%& option is set. Otherwise it is false, and no group check occurs.
17149 .option check_owner redirect boolean "see below"
17150 When the &%file%& option is used, the owner of the file is checked only when
17151 this option is set. If &%check_local_user%& is set, the local user is
17152 permitted; otherwise the owner must be one of those listed in the &%owners%&
17153 option. The default value for this option is true if &%check_local_user%& or
17154 &%owners%& is set. Otherwise the default is false, and no owner check occurs.
17157 .option data redirect string&!! unset
17158 This option is mutually exclusive with &%file%&. One or other of them must be
17159 set, but not both. The contents of &%data%& are expanded, and then used as the
17160 list of forwarding items, or as a set of filtering instructions. If the
17161 expansion is forced to fail, or the result is an empty string or a string that
17162 has no effect (consists entirely of comments), the router declines.
17164 When filtering instructions are used, the string must begin with &"#Exim
17165 filter"&, and all comments in the string, including this initial one, must be
17166 terminated with newline characters. For example:
17168 data = #Exim filter\n\
17169 if $h_to: contains Exim then save $home/mail/exim endif
17171 If you are reading the data from a database where newlines cannot be included,
17172 you can use the &${sg}$& expansion item to turn the escape string of your
17173 choice into a newline.
17176 .option directory_transport redirect string&!! unset
17177 A &(redirect)& router sets up a direct delivery to a directory when a path name
17178 ending with a slash is specified as a new &"address"&. The transport used is
17179 specified by this option, which, after expansion, must be the name of a
17180 configured transport. This should normally be an &(appendfile)& transport.
17183 .option file redirect string&!! unset
17184 This option specifies the name of a file that contains the redirection data. It
17185 is mutually exclusive with the &%data%& option. The string is expanded before
17186 use; if the expansion is forced to fail, the router declines. Other expansion
17187 failures cause delivery to be deferred. The result of a successful expansion
17188 must be an absolute path. The entire file is read and used as the redirection
17189 data. If the data is an empty string or a string that has no effect (consists
17190 entirely of comments), the router declines.
17192 .cindex "NFS" "checking for file existence"
17193 If the attempt to open the file fails with a &"does not exist"& error, Exim
17194 runs a check on the containing directory,
17195 unless &%ignore_enotdir%& is true (see below).
17196 If the directory does not appear to exist, delivery is deferred. This can
17197 happen when users' &_.forward_& files are in NFS-mounted directories, and there
17198 is a mount problem. If the containing directory does exist, but the file does
17199 not, the router declines.
17202 .option file_transport redirect string&!! unset
17203 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
17204 A &(redirect)& router sets up a direct delivery to a file when a path name not
17205 ending in a slash is specified as a new &"address"&. The transport used is
17206 specified by this option, which, after expansion, must be the name of a
17207 configured transport. This should normally be an &(appendfile)& transport. When
17208 it is running, the file name is in &$address_file$&.
17211 .option forbid_blackhole redirect boolean false
17212 If this option is true, the &':blackhole:'& item may not appear in a
17216 .option forbid_exim_filter redirect boolean false
17217 If this option is set true, only Sieve filters are permitted when
17218 &%allow_filter%& is true.
17223 .option forbid_file redirect boolean false
17224 .cindex "delivery" "to file; forbidding"
17225 .cindex "Sieve filter" "forbidding delivery to a file"
17226 .cindex "Sieve filter" "&""keep""& facility; disabling"
17227 If this option is true, this router may not generate a new address that
17228 specifies delivery to a local file or directory, either from a filter or from a
17229 conventional forward file. This option is forced to be true if &%one_time%& is
17230 set. It applies to Sieve filters as well as to Exim filters, but if true, it
17231 locks out the Sieve's &"keep"& facility.
17235 .option forbid_filter_dlfunc redirect boolean false
17236 .cindex "filter" "locking out certain features"
17237 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filters are not allowed to
17238 make use of the &%dlfunc%& expansion facility to run dynamically loaded
17242 .option forbid_filter_existstest redirect boolean false
17244 .cindex "expansion" "statting a file"
17245 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filters are not allowed to
17246 make use of the &%exists%& condition or the &%stat%& expansion item.
17249 .option forbid_filter_logwrite redirect boolean false
17250 If this option is true, use of the logging facility in Exim filters is not
17251 permitted. Logging is in any case available only if the filter is being run
17252 under some unprivileged uid (which is normally the case for ordinary users'
17253 &_.forward_& files).
17256 .option forbid_filter_lookup redirect boolean false
17257 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17258 to make use of &%lookup%& items.
17261 .option forbid_filter_perl redirect boolean false
17262 This option has an effect only if Exim is built with embedded Perl support. If
17263 it is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed to make use
17264 of the embedded Perl support.
17267 .option forbid_filter_readfile redirect boolean false
17268 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17269 to make use of &%readfile%& items.
17272 .option forbid_filter_readsocket redirect boolean false
17273 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17274 to make use of &%readsocket%& items.
17277 .option forbid_filter_reply redirect boolean false
17278 If this option is true, this router may not generate an automatic reply
17279 message. Automatic replies can be generated only from Exim or Sieve filter
17280 files, not from traditional forward files. This option is forced to be true if
17281 &%one_time%& is set.
17284 .option forbid_filter_run redirect boolean false
17285 If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not allowed
17286 to make use of &%run%& items.
17289 .option forbid_include redirect boolean false
17290 If this option is true, items of the form
17292 :include:<path name>
17294 are not permitted in non-filter redirection lists.
17297 .option forbid_pipe redirect boolean false
17298 .cindex "delivery" "to pipe; forbidding"
17299 If this option is true, this router may not generate a new address which
17300 specifies delivery to a pipe, either from an Exim filter or from a conventional
17301 forward file. This option is forced to be true if &%one_time%& is set.
17304 .option forbid_sieve_filter redirect boolean false
17305 If this option is set true, only Exim filters are permitted when
17306 &%allow_filter%& is true.
17311 .option hide_child_in_errmsg redirect boolean false
17312 .cindex "bounce message" "redirection details; suppressing"
17313 If this option is true, it prevents Exim from quoting a child address if it
17314 generates a bounce or delay message for it. Instead it says &"an address
17315 generated from <&'the top level address'&>"&. Of course, this applies only to
17316 bounces generated locally. If a message is forwarded to another host, &'its'&
17317 bounce may well quote the generated address.
17320 .option ignore_eacces redirect boolean false
17322 If this option is set and an attempt to open a redirection file yields the
17323 EACCES error (permission denied), the &(redirect)& router behaves as if the
17324 file did not exist.
17327 .option ignore_enotdir redirect boolean false
17329 If this option is set and an attempt to open a redirection file yields the
17330 ENOTDIR error (something on the path is not a directory), the &(redirect)&
17331 router behaves as if the file did not exist.
17333 Setting &%ignore_enotdir%& has another effect as well: When a &(redirect)&
17334 router that has the &%file%& option set discovers that the file does not exist
17335 (the ENOENT error), it tries to &[stat()]& the parent directory, as a check
17336 against unmounted NFS directories. If the parent can not be statted, delivery
17337 is deferred. However, it seems wrong to do this check when &%ignore_enotdir%&
17338 is set, because that option tells Exim to ignore &"something on the path is not
17339 a directory"& (the ENOTDIR error). This is a confusing area, because it seems
17340 that some operating systems give ENOENT where others give ENOTDIR.
17344 .option include_directory redirect string unset
17345 If this option is set, the path names of any &':include:'& items in a
17346 redirection list must start with this directory.
17349 .option modemask redirect "octal integer" 022
17350 This specifies mode bits which must not be set for a file specified by the
17351 &%file%& option. If any of the forbidden bits are set, delivery is deferred.
17354 .option one_time redirect boolean false
17355 .cindex "one-time aliasing/forwarding expansion"
17356 .cindex "alias file" "one-time expansion"
17357 .cindex "forward file" "one-time expansion"
17358 .cindex "mailing lists" "one-time expansion"
17359 .cindex "address redirection" "one-time expansion"
17360 Sometimes the fact that Exim re-evaluates aliases and reprocesses redirection
17361 files each time it tries to deliver a message causes a problem when one or more
17362 of the generated addresses fails be delivered at the first attempt. The problem
17363 is not one of duplicate delivery &-- Exim is clever enough to handle that &--
17364 but of what happens when the redirection list changes during the time that the
17365 message is on Exim's queue. This is particularly true in the case of mailing
17366 lists, where new subscribers might receive copies of messages that were posted
17367 before they subscribed.
17369 If &%one_time%& is set and any addresses generated by the router fail to
17370 deliver at the first attempt, the failing addresses are added to the message as
17371 &"top level"& addresses, and the parent address that generated them is marked
17372 &"delivered"&. Thus, redirection does not happen again at the next delivery
17375 &*Warning 1*&: Any header line addition or removal that is specified by this
17376 router would be lost if delivery did not succeed at the first attempt. For this
17377 reason, the &%headers_add%& and &%headers_remove%& generic options are not
17378 permitted when &%one_time%& is set.
17380 &*Warning 2*&: To ensure that the router generates only addresses (as opposed
17381 to pipe or file deliveries or auto-replies) &%forbid_file%&, &%forbid_pipe%&,
17382 and &%forbid_filter_reply%& are forced to be true when &%one_time%& is set.
17385 &*Warning 3*&: The &%unseen%& generic router option may not be set with
17389 The original top-level address is remembered with each of the generated
17390 addresses, and is output in any log messages. However, any intermediate parent
17391 addresses are not recorded. This makes a difference to the log only if
17392 &%all_parents%& log selector is set. It is expected that &%one_time%& will
17393 typically be used for mailing lists, where there is normally just one level of
17397 .option owners redirect "string list" unset
17398 .cindex "ownership" "alias file"
17399 .cindex "ownership" "forward file"
17400 .cindex "alias file" "ownership"
17401 .cindex "forward file" "ownership"
17402 This specifies a list of permitted owners for the file specified by &%file%&.
17403 This list is in addition to the local user when &%check_local_user%& is set.
17404 See &%check_owner%& above.
17407 .option owngroups redirect "string list" unset
17408 This specifies a list of permitted groups for the file specified by &%file%&.
17409 The list is in addition to the local user's primary group when
17410 &%check_local_user%& is set. See &%check_group%& above.
17413 .option pipe_transport redirect string&!! unset
17414 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
17415 A &(redirect)& router sets up a direct delivery to a pipe when a string
17416 starting with a vertical bar character is specified as a new &"address"&. The
17417 transport used is specified by this option, which, after expansion, must be the
17418 name of a configured transport. This should normally be a &(pipe)& transport.
17419 When the transport is run, the pipe command is in &$address_pipe$&.
17422 .option qualify_domain redirect string&!! unset
17423 .cindex "&$qualify_recipient$&"
17424 If this option is set and an unqualified address (one without a domain) is
17425 generated, it is qualified with the domain specified by expanding this string,
17426 instead of the global setting in &%qualify_recipient%&. If the expansion fails,
17427 the router declines. If you want to revert to the default, you can have the
17428 expansion generate &$qualify_recipient$&.
17431 .option qualify_preserve_domain redirect boolean false
17432 .cindex "domain" "in redirection; preserving"
17433 .cindex "preserving domain in redirection"
17434 .cindex "address redirection" "domain; preserving"
17435 If this is set and an unqualified address (one without a domain) is generated,
17436 it is qualified with the domain of the
17437 parent address (the immediately preceding ancestor) instead of the local
17438 &%qualify_domain%& or global &%qualify_recipient%& value.
17441 .option repeat_use redirect boolean true
17442 If this option is set false, the router is skipped for a child address that has
17443 any ancestor that was routed by this router. This test happens before any of
17444 the other preconditions are tested. Exim's default anti-looping rules skip
17445 only when the ancestor is the same as the current address. See also
17446 &%check_ancestor%& above and the generic &%redirect_router%& option.
17449 .option reply_transport redirect string&!! unset
17450 A &(redirect)& router sets up an automatic reply when a &%mail%& or
17451 &%vacation%& command is used in a filter file. The transport used is specified
17452 by this option, which, after expansion, must be the name of a configured
17453 transport. This should normally be an &(autoreply)& transport. Other transports
17454 are unlikely to do anything sensible or useful.
17457 .option rewrite redirect boolean true
17458 .cindex "address redirection" "disabling rewriting"
17459 If this option is set false, addresses generated by the router are not
17460 subject to address rewriting. Otherwise, they are treated like new addresses
17461 and are rewritten according to the global rewriting rules.
17465 .option sieve_subaddress redirect string&!! unset
17466 The value of this option is passed to a Sieve filter to specify the
17467 :subaddress part of an address.
17469 .option sieve_useraddress redirect string&!! unset
17470 The value of this option is passed to a Sieve filter to specify the :user part
17471 of an address. However, if it is unset, the entire original local part
17472 (including any prefix or suffix) is used for :user.
17476 .option sieve_vacation_directory redirect string&!! unset
17478 .cindex "Sieve filter" "vacation directory"
17479 To enable the &"vacation"& extension for Sieve filters, you must set
17480 &%sieve_vacation_directory%& to the directory where vacation databases are held
17481 (do not put anything else in that directory), and ensure that the
17482 &%reply_transport%& option refers to an &(autoreply)& transport. Each user
17483 needs their own directory; Exim will create it if necessary.
17488 .option skip_syntax_errors redirect boolean false
17489 .cindex "forward file" "broken"
17490 .cindex "address redirection" "broken files"
17491 .cindex "alias file" "broken"
17492 .cindex "broken alias or forward files"
17493 .cindex "ignoring faulty addresses"
17494 .cindex "skipping faulty addresses"
17495 .cindex "error" "skipping bad syntax"
17496 If &%skip_syntax_errors%& is set, syntactically malformed addresses in
17497 non-filter redirection data are skipped, and each failing address is logged. If
17498 &%syntax_errors_to%& is set, a message is sent to the address it defines,
17499 giving details of the failures. If &%syntax_errors_text%& is set, its contents
17500 are expanded and placed at the head of the error message generated by
17501 &%syntax_errors_to%&. Usually it is appropriate to set &%syntax_errors_to%& to
17502 be the same address as the generic &%errors_to%& option. The
17503 &%skip_syntax_errors%& option is often used when handling mailing lists.
17505 If all the addresses in a redirection list are skipped because of syntax
17506 errors, the router declines to handle the original address, and it is passed to
17507 the following routers.
17509 If &%skip_syntax_errors%& is set when an Exim filter is interpreted, any syntax
17510 error in the filter causes filtering to be abandoned without any action being
17511 taken. The incident is logged, and the router declines to handle the address,
17512 so it is passed to the following routers.
17514 .cindex "Sieve filter" "syntax errors in"
17515 Syntax errors in a Sieve filter file cause the &"keep"& action to occur. This
17516 action is specified by RFC 3028. The values of &%skip_syntax_errors%&,
17517 &%syntax_errors_to%&, and &%syntax_errors_text%& are not used.
17519 &%skip_syntax_errors%& can be used to specify that errors in users' forward
17520 lists or filter files should not prevent delivery. The &%syntax_errors_to%&
17521 option, used with an address that does not get redirected, can be used to
17522 notify users of these errors, by means of a router like this:
17528 file = $home/.forward
17529 file_transport = address_file
17530 pipe_transport = address_pipe
17531 reply_transport = address_reply
17534 syntax_errors_to = real-$local_part@$domain
17535 syntax_errors_text = \
17536 This is an automatically generated message. An error has\n\
17537 been found in your .forward file. Details of the error are\n\
17538 reported below. While this error persists, you will receive\n\
17539 a copy of this message for every message that is addressed\n\
17540 to you. If your .forward file is a filter file, or if it is\n\
17541 a non-filter file containing no valid forwarding addresses,\n\
17542 a copy of each incoming message will be put in your normal\n\
17543 mailbox. If a non-filter file contains at least one valid\n\
17544 forwarding address, forwarding to the valid addresses will\n\
17545 happen, and those will be the only deliveries that occur.
17547 You also need a router to ensure that local addresses that are prefixed by
17548 &`real-`& are recognized, but not forwarded or filtered. For example, you could
17549 put this immediately before the &(userforward)& router:
17554 local_part_prefix = real-
17555 transport = local_delivery
17558 .option syntax_errors_text redirect string&!! unset
17559 See &%skip_syntax_errors%& above.
17562 .option syntax_errors_to redirect string unset
17563 See &%skip_syntax_errors%& above.
17570 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17571 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17573 .chapter "Environment for running local transports" "CHAPenvironment" &&&
17574 "Environment for local transports"
17575 .cindex "local transports" "environment for"
17576 .cindex "environment for local transports"
17577 .cindex "transport" "local; environment for"
17578 Local transports handle deliveries to files and pipes. (The &(autoreply)&
17579 transport can be thought of as similar to a pipe.) Exim always runs transports
17580 in subprocesses, under specified uids and gids. Typical deliveries to local
17581 mailboxes run under the uid and gid of the local user.
17583 Exim also sets a specific current directory while running the transport; for
17584 some transports a home directory setting is also relevant. The &(pipe)&
17585 transport is the only one that sets up environment variables; see section
17586 &<<SECTpipeenv>>& for details.
17588 The values used for the uid, gid, and the directories may come from several
17589 different places. In many cases, the router that handles the address associates
17590 settings with that address as a result of its &%check_local_user%&, &%group%&,
17591 or &%user%& options. However, values may also be given in the transport's own
17592 configuration, and these override anything that comes from the router.
17596 .section "Concurrent deliveries"
17597 .cindex "concurrent deliveries"
17598 .cindex "simultaneous deliveries"
17599 If two different messages for the same local recpient arrive more or less
17600 simultaneously, the two delivery processes are likely to run concurrently. When
17601 the &(appendfile)& transport is used to write to a file, Exim applies locking
17602 rules to stop concurrent processes from writing to the same file at the same
17605 However, when you use a &(pipe)& transport, it is up to you to arrange any
17606 locking that is needed. Here is a silly example:
17610 command = /bin/sh -c 'cat >>/some/file'
17612 This is supposed to write the message at the end of the file. However, if two
17613 messages arrive at the same time, the file will be scrambled. You can use the
17614 &%exim_lock%& utility program (see section &<<SECTmailboxmaint>>&) to lock a
17615 file using the same algorithm that Exim itself uses.
17620 .section "Uids and gids" "SECTenvuidgid"
17621 .cindex "local transports" "uid and gid"
17622 .cindex "transport" "local; uid and gid"
17623 All transports have the options &%group%& and &%user%&. If &%group%& is set, it
17624 overrides any group that the router set in the address, even if &%user%& is not
17625 set for the transport. This makes it possible, for example, to run local mail
17626 delivery under the uid of the recipient (set by the router), but in a special
17627 group (set by the transport). For example:
17630 # User/group are set by check_local_user in this router
17634 transport = group_delivery
17637 # This transport overrides the group
17639 driver = appendfile
17640 file = /var/spool/mail/$local_part
17643 If &%user%& is set for a transport, its value overrides what is set in the
17644 address by the router. If &%user%& is non-numeric and &%group%& is not set, the
17645 gid associated with the user is used. If &%user%& is numeric, &%group%& must be
17648 .cindex "&%initgroups%& option"
17649 When the uid is taken from the transport's configuration, the &[initgroups()]&
17650 function is called for the groups associated with that uid if the
17651 &%initgroups%& option is set for the transport. When the uid is not specified
17652 by the transport, but is associated with the address by a router, the option
17653 for calling &[initgroups()]& is taken from the router configuration.
17655 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "uid for"
17656 The &(pipe)& transport contains the special option &%pipe_as_creator%&. If this
17657 is set and &%user%& is not set, the uid of the process that called Exim to
17658 receive the message is used, and if &%group%& is not set, the corresponding
17659 original gid is also used.
17662 This is the detailed preference order for obtaining a gid; the first of the
17663 following that is set is used:
17666 A &%group%& setting of the transport;
17668 A &%group%& setting of the router;
17670 A gid associated with a user setting of the router, either as a result of
17671 &%check_local_user%& or an explicit non-numeric &%user%& setting;
17673 The group associated with a non-numeric &%user%& setting of the transport;
17675 In a &(pipe)& transport, the creator's gid if &%deliver_as_creator%& is set and
17676 the uid is the creator's uid;
17678 The Exim gid if the Exim uid is being used as a default.
17681 If, for example, the user is specified numerically on the router and there are
17682 no group settings, no gid is available. In this situation, an error occurs.
17683 This is different for the uid, for which there always is an ultimate default.
17684 The first of the following that is set is used:
17687 A &%user%& setting of the transport;
17689 In a &(pipe)& transport, the creator's uid if &%deliver_as_creator%& is set;
17691 A &%user%& setting of the router;
17693 A &%check_local_user%& setting of the router;
17698 Of course, an error will still occur if the uid that is chosen is on the
17699 &%never_users%& list.
17706 .section "Current and home directories"
17707 .cindex "current directory for local transport"
17708 .cindex "home directory" "for local transport"
17709 .cindex "transport" "local; home directory for"
17710 .cindex "transport" "local; current directory for"
17711 Routers may set current and home directories for local transports by means of
17712 the &%transport_current_directory%& and &%transport_home_directory%& options.
17713 However, if the transport's &%current_directory%& or &%home_directory%& options
17714 are set, they override the router's values. In detail, the home directory
17715 for a local transport is taken from the first of these values that is set:
17718 The &%home_directory%& option on the transport;
17720 The &%transport_home_directory%& option on the router;
17722 The password data if &%check_local_user%& is set on the router;
17724 The &%router_home_directory%& option on the router.
17727 The current directory is taken from the first of these values that is set:
17730 The &%current_directory%& option on the transport;
17732 The &%transport_current_directory%& option on the router.
17736 If neither the router nor the transport sets a current directory, Exim uses the
17737 value of the home directory, if it is set. Otherwise it sets the current
17738 directory to &_/_& before running a local transport.
17742 .section "Expansion variables derived from the address"
17743 .cindex "&$domain$&"
17744 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
17745 .cindex "&$original_domain$&"
17746 Normally a local delivery is handling a single address, and in that case the
17747 variables such as &$domain$& and &$local_part$& are set during local
17748 deliveries. However, in some circumstances more than one address may be handled
17749 at once (for example, while writing batch SMTP for onward transmission by some
17750 other means). In this case, the variables associated with the local part are
17751 never set, &$domain$& is set only if all the addresses have the same domain,
17752 and &$original_domain$& is never set.
17760 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17761 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
17763 .chapter "Generic options for transports" "CHAPtransportgeneric"
17765 .cindex "generic options" "transport"
17766 .cindex "options" "generic; for transports"
17767 .cindex "transport" "generic options for"
17768 The following generic options apply to all transports:
17771 .option body_only transports boolean false
17772 .cindex "transport" "body only"
17773 .cindex "message" "transporting body only"
17774 .cindex "body of message" "transporting"
17775 If this option is set, the message's headers are not transported. It is
17776 mutually exclusive with &%headers_only%&. If it is used with the &(appendfile)&
17777 or &(pipe)& transports, the settings of &%message_prefix%& and
17778 &%message_suffix%& should be checked, because this option does not
17779 automatically suppress them.
17782 .option current_directory transports string&!! unset
17783 .cindex "transport" "current directory for"
17784 This specifies the current directory that is to be set while running the
17785 transport, overriding any value that may have been set by the router.
17786 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is
17787 logged, and delivery is deferred.
17790 .option disable_logging transports boolean false
17791 If this option is set true, nothing is logged for any
17792 deliveries by the transport or for any
17793 transport errors. You should not set this option unless you really, really know
17794 what you are doing.
17797 .option debug_print transports string&!! unset
17798 .cindex "testing" "variables in drivers"
17799 If this option is set and debugging is enabled (see the &%-d%& command line
17800 option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging output when the
17802 If expansion of the string fails, the error message is written to the debugging
17803 output, and Exim carries on processing.
17804 This facility is provided to help with checking out the values of variables and
17805 so on when debugging driver configurations. For example, if a &%headers_add%&
17806 option is not working properly, &%debug_print%& could be used to output the
17807 variables it references. A newline is added to the text if it does not end with
17811 .option delivery_date_add transports boolean false
17812 .cindex "&'Delivery-date:'& header line"
17813 If this option is true, a &'Delivery-date:'& header is added to the message.
17814 This gives the actual time the delivery was made. As this is not a standard
17815 header, Exim has a configuration option (&%delivery_date_remove%&) which
17816 requests its removal from incoming messages, so that delivered messages can
17817 safely be resent to other recipients.
17820 .option driver transports string unset
17821 This specifies which of the available transport drivers is to be used.
17822 There is no default, and this option must be set for every transport.
17825 .option envelope_to_add transports boolean false
17826 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
17827 If this option is true, an &'Envelope-to:'& header is added to the message.
17828 This gives the original address(es) in the incoming envelope that caused this
17829 delivery to happen. More than one address may be present if the transport is
17830 configured to handle several addresses at once, or if more than one original
17831 address was redirected to the same final address. As this is not a standard
17832 header, Exim has a configuration option (&%envelope_to_remove%&) which requests
17833 its removal from incoming messages, so that delivered messages can safely be
17834 resent to other recipients.
17837 .option group transports string&!! "Exim group"
17838 .cindex "transport" "group; specifying"
17839 This option specifies a gid for running the transport process, overriding any
17840 value that the router supplies, and also overriding any value associated with
17841 &%user%& (see below).
17844 .option headers_add transports string&!! unset
17845 .cindex "header lines" "adding in transport"
17846 .cindex "transport" "header lines; adding"
17847 This option specifies a string of text that is expanded and added to the header
17848 portion of a message as it is transported, as described in section
17849 &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. Additional header lines can also be specified by
17850 routers. If the result of the expansion is an empty string, or if the expansion
17851 is forced to fail, no action is taken. Other expansion failures are treated as
17852 errors and cause the delivery to be deferred.
17856 .option headers_only transports boolean false
17857 .cindex "transport" "header lines only"
17858 .cindex "message" "transporting headers only"
17859 .cindex "header lines" "transporting"
17860 If this option is set, the message's body is not transported. It is mutually
17861 exclusive with &%body_only%&. If it is used with the &(appendfile)& or &(pipe)&
17862 transports, the settings of &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& should be
17863 checked, since this option does not automatically suppress them.
17866 .option headers_remove transports string&!! unset
17867 .cindex "header lines" "removing"
17868 .cindex "transport" "header lines; removing"
17869 This option specifies a string that is expanded into a list of header names;
17870 these headers are omitted from the message as it is transported, as described
17871 in section &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&. Header removal can also be specified by
17872 routers. If the result of the expansion is an empty string, or if the expansion
17873 is forced to fail, no action is taken. Other expansion failures are treated as
17874 errors and cause the delivery to be deferred.
17878 .option headers_rewrite transports string unset
17879 .cindex "transport" "header lines; rewriting"
17880 .cindex "rewriting" "at transport time"
17881 This option allows addresses in header lines to be rewritten at transport time,
17882 that is, as the message is being copied to its destination. The contents of the
17883 option are a colon-separated list of rewriting rules. Each rule is in exactly
17884 the same form as one of the general rewriting rules that are applied when a
17885 message is received. These are described in chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&. For
17888 headers_rewrite = a@b c@d f : \
17891 changes &'a@b'& into &'c@d'& in &'From:'& header lines, and &'x@y'& into
17892 &'w@z'& in all address-bearing header lines. The rules are applied to the
17893 header lines just before they are written out at transport time, so they affect
17894 only those copies of the message that pass through the transport. However, only
17895 the message's original header lines, and any that were added by a system
17896 filter, are rewritten. If a router or transport adds header lines, they are not
17897 affected by this option. These rewriting rules are &'not'& applied to the
17898 envelope. You can change the return path using &%return_path%&, but you cannot
17899 change envelope recipients at this time.
17902 .option home_directory transports string&!! unset
17903 .cindex "transport" "home directory for"
17905 This option specifies a home directory setting for the transport, overriding
17906 any value that may be set by the router. The home directory is placed in
17907 &$home$& while expanding the transport's private options. It is also used as
17908 the current directory if no current directory is set by the
17909 &%current_directory%& option on the transport or the
17910 &%transport_current_directory%& option on the router.
17911 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is
17912 logged, and delivery is deferred.
17915 .option initgroups transports boolean false
17916 .cindex "additional groups"
17917 .cindex "groups" "additional"
17918 .cindex "transport" "group; additional"
17919 If this option is true and the uid for the delivery process is provided by the
17920 transport, the &[initgroups()]& function is called when running the transport
17921 to ensure that any additional groups associated with the uid are set up.
17924 .option message_size_limit transports string&!! 0
17925 .cindex "limit" "message size per transport"
17926 .cindex "size of message" "limit"
17927 .cindex "transport" "message size; limiting"
17928 This option controls the size of messages passed through the transport. It is
17929 expanded before use; the result of the expansion must be a sequence of digits,
17930 optionally followed by K or M.
17931 If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, or if the
17932 result is not of the required form, delivery is deferred.
17933 If the value is greater than zero and the size of a message exceeds this
17934 limit, the address is failed. If there is any chance that the resulting bounce
17935 message could be routed to the same transport, you should ensure that
17936 &%return_size_limit%& is less than the transport's &%message_size_limit%&, as
17937 otherwise the bounce message will fail to get delivered.
17941 .option rcpt_include_affixes transports boolean false
17942 .cindex "prefix" "for local part; including in envelope"
17943 .cindex "suffix" "for local part; including in envelope"
17944 .cindex "local part" "prefix"
17945 .cindex "local part" "suffix"
17946 When this option is false (the default), and an address that has had any
17947 affixes (prefixes or suffixes) removed from the local part is delivered by any
17948 form of SMTP or LMTP, the affixes are not included. For example, if a router
17951 local_part_prefix = *-
17953 routes the address &'abc-xyz@some.domain'& to an SMTP transport, the envelope
17956 RCPT TO:<xyz@some.domain>
17958 &new("This is also the case when an ACL-time callout is being used to verify a
17959 recipient address.") However, if &%rcpt_include_affixes%& is set true, the
17960 whole local part is included in the RCPT command. This option applies to BSMTP
17961 deliveries by the &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports as well as to the
17962 &(lmtp)& and &(smtp)& transports.
17965 .option retry_use_local_part transports boolean "see below"
17966 .cindex "hints database" "retry keys"
17967 When a delivery suffers a temporary failure, a retry record is created
17968 in Exim's hints database. For remote deliveries, the key for the retry record
17969 is based on the name and/or IP address of the failing remote host. For local
17970 deliveries, the key is normally the entire address, including both the local
17971 part and the domain. This is suitable for most common cases of local delivery
17972 temporary failure &-- for example, exceeding a mailbox quota should delay only
17973 deliveries to that mailbox, not to the whole domain.
17975 However, in some special cases you may want to treat a temporary local delivery
17976 as a failure associated with the domain, and not with a particular local part.
17977 (For example, if you are storing all mail for some domain in files.) You can do
17978 this by setting &%retry_use_local_part%& false.
17980 For all the local transports, its default value is true. For remote transports,
17981 the default value is false for tidiness, but changing the value has no effect
17982 on a remote transport in the current implementation.
17985 .option return_path transports string&!! unset
17986 .cindex "envelope sender"
17987 .cindex "transport" "return path; changing"
17988 .cindex "return path" "changing in transport"
17989 If this option is set, the string is expanded at transport time and replaces
17990 the existing return path (envelope sender) value in the copy of the message
17991 that is being delivered. An empty return path is permitted. This feature is
17992 designed for remote deliveries, where the value of this option is used in the
17993 SMTP MAIL command. If you set &%return_path%& for a local transport, the
17994 only effect is to change the address that is placed in the &'Return-path:'&
17995 header line, if one is added to the message (see the next option).
17997 .cindex "&$return_path$&"
17998 The expansion can refer to the existing value via &$return_path$&. This is
17999 either the message's envelope sender, or an address set by the
18000 &%errors_to%& option on a router. If the expansion is forced to fail, no
18001 replacement occurs; if it fails for another reason, delivery is deferred. This
18002 option can be used to support VERP (Variable Envelope Return Paths) &-- see
18003 chapter &<<CHAPSMTP>>&.
18005 &*Note*&: If a delivery error is detected locally,
18006 including the case when a remote server rejects a message at SMTP time,
18007 the bounce message is not sent to the value of this option, but to the
18008 previously set errors address (which defaults to the incoming sender address).
18012 .option return_path_add transports boolean false
18013 .cindex "&'Return-path:'& header line"
18014 If this option is true, a &'Return-path:'& header is added to the message.
18015 Although the return path is normally available in the prefix line of BSD
18016 mailboxes, this is commonly not displayed by MUAs, and so the user does not
18017 have easy access to it.
18019 RFC 2821 states that the &'Return-path:'& header is added to a message &"when
18020 the delivery SMTP server makes the final delivery"&. This implies that this
18021 header should not be present in incoming messages. Exim has a configuration
18022 option, &%return_path_remove%&, which requests removal of this header from
18023 incoming messages, so that delivered messages can safely be resent to other
18027 .option shadow_condition transports string&!! unset
18028 See &%shadow_transport%& below.
18031 .option shadow_transport transports string unset
18032 .cindex "shadow transport"
18033 .cindex "transport" "shadow"
18034 A local transport may set the &%shadow_transport%& option to the name of
18035 another local transport. Shadow remote transports are not supported.
18037 Whenever a delivery to the main transport succeeds, and either
18038 &%shadow_condition%& is unset, or its expansion does not result in the empty
18039 string or one of the strings &"0"& or &"no"& or &"false"&, the message is also
18040 passed to the shadow transport, with the same delivery address or addresses. If
18041 expansion fails, no action is taken except that non-forced expansion failures
18042 cause a log line to be written.
18044 The result of the shadow transport is discarded and does not affect the
18045 subsequent processing of the message. Only a single level of shadowing is
18046 provided; the &%shadow_transport%& option is ignored on any transport when it
18047 is running as a shadow. Options concerned with output from pipes are also
18048 ignored. The log line for the successful delivery has an item added on the end,
18051 ST=<shadow transport name>
18053 If the shadow transport did not succeed, the error message is put in
18054 parentheses afterwards. Shadow transports can be used for a number of different
18055 purposes, including keeping more detailed log information than Exim normally
18056 provides, and implementing automatic acknowledgement policies based on message
18057 headers that some sites insist on.
18060 .option transport_filter transports string&!! unset
18061 .cindex "transport" "filter"
18062 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
18063 This option sets up a filtering (in the Unix shell sense) process for messages
18064 at transport time. It should not be confused with mail filtering as set up by
18065 individual users or via a system filter.
18067 When the message is about to be written out, the command specified by
18068 &%transport_filter%& is started up in a separate, &new(parallel) process, and
18069 the entire message, including the header lines, is passed to it on its standard
18070 input (this in fact is done from a third process, to avoid deadlock). The
18071 command must be specified as an absolute path.
18073 The lines of the message that are written to the transport filter are
18074 terminated by newline (&"\n"&). The message is passed to the filter before any
18075 SMTP-specific processing, such as turning &"\n"& into &"\r\n"& and escaping
18076 lines beginning with a dot, and also before any processing implied by the
18077 settings of &%check_string%& and &%escape_string%& in the &(appendfile)& or
18078 &(pipe)& transports.
18080 The standard error for the filter process is set to the same destination as its
18081 standard output; this is read and written to the message's ultimate
18082 destination. &new("The process that writes the message to the filter, the
18083 filter itself, and the original process that reads the result and delivers it
18084 are all run in parallel, like a shell pipeline.")
18086 The filter can perform any transformations it likes, but of course should take
18087 care not to break RFC 2822 syntax. A demonstration Perl script is provided in
18088 &_util/transport-filter.pl_&; this makes a few arbitrary modifications just to
18089 show the possibilities. Exim does not check the result, except to test for a
18090 final newline when SMTP is in use. All messages transmitted over SMTP must end
18091 with a newline, so Exim supplies one if it is missing.
18094 .cindex "content scanning" "per user"
18095 A transport filter can be used to provide content-scanning on a per-user basis
18096 at delivery time if the only required effect of the scan is to modify the
18097 message. For example, a content scan could insert a new header line containing
18098 a spam score. This could be interpreted by a filter in the user's MUA. It is
18099 not possible to discard a message at this stage.
18102 .cindex "SMTP" "SIZE"
18103 A problem might arise if the filter increases the size of a message that is
18104 being sent down an SMTP connection. If the receiving SMTP server has indicated
18105 support for the SIZE parameter, Exim will have sent the size of the message
18106 at the start of the SMTP session. If what is actually sent is substantially
18107 more, the server might reject the message. This can be worked round by setting
18108 the &%size_addition%& option on the &(smtp)& transport, either to allow for
18109 additions to the message, or to disable the use of SIZE altogether.
18111 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
18112 The value of the &%transport_filter%& option is the command string for starting
18113 the filter, which is run directly from Exim, not under a shell. The string is
18114 parsed by Exim in the same way as a command string for the &(pipe)& transport:
18115 Exim breaks it up into arguments and then expands each argument separately.
18116 &new("Any kind of expansion failure causes delivery to be deferred.") The
18117 special argument &$pipe_addresses$& is replaced by a number of arguments, one
18118 for each address that applies to this delivery. (This isn't an ideal name for
18119 this feature here, but as it was already implemented for the &(pipe)&
18120 transport, it seemed sensible not to change it.)
18123 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
18124 The expansion variables &$host$& and &$host_address$& are available when the
18125 transport is a remote one. They contain the name and IP address of the host to
18126 which the message is being sent. For example:
18128 transport_filter = /some/directory/transport-filter.pl \
18129 $host $host_address $sender_address $pipe_addresses
18131 The filter process is run under the same uid and gid as the normal delivery.
18132 For remote deliveries this is the Exim uid/gid by default.
18135 The command should normally yield a zero return code. Transport filters are not
18136 supposed to fail. A non-zero code is taken to mean that the transport filter
18137 encountered some serious problem. Delivery of the message is deferred; the
18138 message remains on the queue and is tried again later. It is not possible to
18139 cause a message to be bounced from a transport filter.
18142 If a transport filter is set on an autoreply transport, the original message is
18143 passed through the filter as it is being copied into the newly generated
18144 message, which happens if the &%return_message%& option is set.
18147 .option transport_filter_timeout transports time 5m
18149 .cindex "transport filter" "timeout"
18150 When Exim is reading the output of a transport filter, it a applies a timeout
18151 that can be set by this option. Exceeding the timeout is normally treated as a
18152 temporary delivery failure. However, if a transport filter is used with a
18153 &(pipe)& transport, a timeout in the transport filter is treated in the same
18154 way as a timeout in the pipe command itself. By default, a timeout is a hard
18155 error, but if the &(pipe)& transport's &%timeout_defer%& option is set true, it
18156 becomes a temporary error.
18160 .option user transports string&!! "Exim user"
18161 .cindex "uid (user id)" "local delivery"
18162 .cindex "transport user" "specifying"
18163 This option specifies the user under whose uid the delivery process is to be
18164 run, overriding any uid that may have been set by the router. If the user is
18165 given as a name, the uid is looked up from the password data, and the
18166 associated group is taken as the value of the gid to be used if the &%group%&
18169 For deliveries that use local transports, a user and group are normally
18170 specified explicitly or implicitly (for example, as a result of
18171 &%check_local_user%&) by the router or transport.
18173 .cindex "hints database" "access by remote transport"
18174 For remote transports, you should leave this option unset unless you really are
18175 sure you know what you are doing. When a remote transport is running, it needs
18176 to be able to access Exim's hints databases, because each host may have its own
18184 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18185 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18187 .chapter "Address batching in local transports" "CHAPbatching" &&&
18189 .cindex "transport" "local; address batching in"
18190 The only remote transport (&(smtp)&) is normally configured to handle more than
18191 one address at a time, so that when several addresses are routed to the same
18192 remote host, just one copy of the message is sent. Local transports, however,
18193 normally handle one address at a time. That is, a separate instance of the
18194 transport is run for each address that is routed to the transport. A separate
18195 copy of the message is delivered each time.
18197 .cindex "batched local delivery"
18198 .cindex "&%batch_max%&"
18199 .cindex "&%batch_id%&"
18200 In special cases, it may be desirable to handle several addresses at once in a
18201 local transport, for example:
18204 In an &(appendfile)& transport, when storing messages in files for later
18205 delivery by some other means, a single copy of the message with multiple
18206 recipients saves space.
18208 In an &(lmtp)& transport, when delivering over &"local SMTP"& to some process,
18209 a single copy saves time, and is the normal way LMTP is expected to work.
18211 In a &(pipe)& transport, when passing the message
18212 to a scanner program or
18213 to some other delivery mechanism such as UUCP, multiple recipients may be
18217 The three local transports (&(appendfile)&, &(lmtp)&, and &(pipe)&) all have
18218 the same options for controlling multiple (&"batched"&) deliveries, namely
18219 &%batch_max%& and &%batch_id%&. To save repeating the information for each
18220 transport, these options are described here.
18222 The &%batch_max%& option specifies the maximum number of addresses that can be
18223 delivered together in a single run of the transport. Its default value is one.
18224 When more than one address is routed to a transport that has a &%batch_max%&
18225 value greater than one, the addresses are delivered in a batch (that is, in a
18226 single run of the transport), subject to certain conditions:
18229 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
18230 If any of the transport's options contain a reference to &$local_part$&, no
18231 batching is possible.
18233 .cindex "&$domain$&"
18234 If any of the transport's options contain a reference to &$domain$&, only
18235 addresses with the same domain are batched.
18237 .cindex "customizing" "batching condition"
18238 If &%batch_id%& is set, it is expanded for each address, and only those
18239 addresses with the same expanded value are batched. This allows you to specify
18240 customized batching conditions.
18241 Failure of the expansion for any reason, including forced failure, disables
18242 batching, but it does not stop the delivery from taking place.
18244 Batched addresses must also have the same errors address (where to send
18245 delivery errors), the same header additions and removals, the same user and
18246 group for the transport, and if a host list is present, the first host must
18250 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
18251 If the generic &%envelope_to_add%& option is set for the transport, the
18252 &'Envelope-to:'& header that is added to the message contains all the addresses
18253 that are batched together.
18255 The &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports have an option called &%use_bsmtp%&,
18256 which causes them to deliver the message in &"batched SMTP"& format, with the
18257 envelope represented as SMTP commands. The &%check_string%& and
18258 &%escape_string%& options are forced to the values
18261 escape_string = ".."
18263 when batched SMTP is in use. A full description of the batch SMTP mechanism is
18264 given in section &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>&. The &(lmtp)& transport does not have a
18265 &%use_bsmtp%& option, because it always delivers using the SMTP protocol.
18267 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "with multiple addresses"
18268 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
18269 If you are not using BSMTP, but are using a &(pipe)& transport, you can include
18270 &$pipe_addresses$& as part of the command. This is not a true variable; it is
18271 a bit of magic that causes each of the recipient addresses to be inserted into
18272 the command as a separate argument. This provides a way of accessing all the
18273 addresses that are being delivered in the batch.
18275 If you are using a batching &(appendfile)& transport without &%use_bsmtp%&, the
18276 only way to preserve the recipient addresses is to set the &%envelope_to_add%&
18277 option. This causes an &'Envelope-to:'& header line to be added to the message,
18278 containing all the recipients.
18282 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18283 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
18285 .chapter "The appendfile transport" "CHAPappendfile"
18286 .cindex "&(appendfile)& transport"
18287 .cindex "transports" "&(appendfile)&"
18288 .cindex "directory creation"
18289 .cindex "creating directories"
18290 The &(appendfile)& transport delivers a message by appending it to an existing
18291 file, or by creating an entirely new file in a specified directory. Single
18292 files to which messages are appended can be in the traditional Unix mailbox
18293 format, or optionally in the MBX format supported by the Pine MUA and
18294 University of Washington IMAP daemon, &'inter alia'&. When each message is
18295 being delivered as a separate file, &"maildir"& format can optionally be used
18296 to give added protection against failures that happen part-way through the
18297 delivery. A third form of separate-file delivery known as &"mailstore"& is also
18298 supported. For all file formats, Exim attempts to create as many levels of
18299 directory as necessary, provided that &%create_directory%& is set.
18301 The code for the optional formats is not included in the Exim binary by
18302 default. It is necessary to set SUPPORT_MBX, SUPPORT_MAILDIR and/or
18303 SUPPORT_MAILSTORE in &_Local/Makefile_& to have the appropriate code
18306 .cindex "quota" "system"
18307 Exim recognises system quota errors, and generates an appropriate message. Exim
18308 also supports its own quota control within the transport, for use when the
18309 system facility is unavailable or cannot be used for some reason.
18311 If there is an error while appending to a file (for example, quota exceeded or
18312 partition filled), Exim attempts to reset the file's length and last
18313 modification time back to what they were before. If there is an error while
18314 creating an entirely new file, the new file is removed.
18316 Before appending to a file, a number of security checks are made, and the
18317 file is locked. A detailed description is given below, after the list of
18320 The &(appendfile)& transport is most commonly used for local deliveries to
18321 users' mailboxes. However, it can also be used as a pseudo-remote transport for
18322 putting messages into files for remote delivery by some means other than Exim.
18323 &"Batch SMTP"& format is often used in this case (see the &%use_bsmtp%&
18328 .section "The file and directory options" "SECTfildiropt"
18329 The &%file%& option specifies a single file, to which the message is appended;
18330 the &%directory%& option specifies a directory, in which a new file containing
18331 the message is created. Only one of these two options can be set, and for
18332 normal deliveries to mailboxes, one of them &'must'& be set.
18334 .cindex "&$address_file$&"
18335 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
18336 However, &(appendfile)& is also used for delivering messages to files or
18337 directories whose names (or parts of names) are obtained from alias,
18338 forwarding, or filtering operations (for example, a &%save%& command in a
18339 user's Exim filter). When such a transport is running, &$local_part$& contains
18340 the local part that was aliased or forwarded, and &$address_file$& contains the
18341 name (or partial name) of the file or directory generated by the redirection
18342 operation. There are two cases:
18345 If neither &%file%& nor &%directory%& is set, the redirection operation
18346 must specify an absolute path (one that begins with &`/`&). This is the most
18347 common case when users with local accounts use filtering to sort mail into
18348 different folders. See for example, the &(address_file)& transport in the
18349 default configuration. If the path ends with a slash, it is assumed to be the
18350 name of a directory. A delivery to a directory can also be forced by setting
18351 &%maildir_format%& or &%mailstore_format%&.
18353 If &%file%& or &%directory%& is set for a delivery from a redirection, it is
18354 used to determine the file or directory name for the delivery. Normally, the
18355 contents of &$address_file$& are used in some way in the string expansion.
18359 .cindex "Sieve filter" "configuring &(appendfile)&"
18360 .cindex "Sieve filter" "relative mailbox path handling"
18361 As an example of the second case, consider an environment where users do not
18362 have home directories. They may be permitted to use Exim filter commands of the
18367 or Sieve filter commands of the form:
18369 require "fileinto";
18370 fileinto "folder23";
18372 In this situation, the expansion of &%file%& or &%directory%& in the transport
18373 must transform the relative path into an appropriate absolute file name. In the
18374 case of Sieve filters, the name &'inbox'& must be handled. It is the name that
18375 is used as a result of a &"keep"& action in the filter. This example shows one
18376 way of handling this requirement:
18378 file = ${if eq{$address_file}{inbox} \
18379 {/var/mail/$local_part} \
18380 {${if eq{${substr_0_1:$address_file}}{/} \
18382 {$home/mail/$address_file} \
18386 With this setting of &%file%&, &'inbox'& refers to the standard mailbox
18387 location, absolute paths are used without change, and other folders are in the
18388 &_mail_& directory within the home directory.
18390 &*Note 1*&: While processing an Exim filter, a relative path such as
18391 &_folder23_& is turned into an absolute path if a home directory is known to
18392 the router. In particular, this is the case if &%check_local_user%& is set. If
18393 you want to prevent this happening at routing time, you can set
18394 &%router_home_directory%& empty. This forces the router to pass the relative
18395 path to the transport.
18397 &*Note 2*&: An absolute path in &$address_file$& is not treated specially;
18398 the &%file%& or &%directory%& option is still used if it is set.
18403 .section "Private options for appendfile"
18404 .cindex "options" "&(appendfile)& transport"
18408 .option allow_fifo appendfile boolean false
18409 .cindex "fifo (named pipe)"
18410 .cindex "named pipe (fifo)"
18411 .cindex "pipe" "named (fifo)"
18412 Setting this option permits delivery to named pipes (FIFOs) as well as to
18413 regular files. If no process is reading the named pipe at delivery time, the
18414 delivery is deferred.
18417 .option allow_symlink appendfile boolean false
18418 .cindex "symbolic link" "to mailbox"
18419 .cindex "mailbox" "symbolic link"
18420 By default, &(appendfile)& will not deliver if the path name for the file is
18421 that of a symbolic link. Setting this option relaxes that constraint, but there
18422 are security issues involved in the use of symbolic links. Be sure you know
18423 what you are doing if you set this. Details of exactly what this option affects
18424 are included in the discussion which follows this list of options.
18427 .option batch_id appendfile string&!! unset
18428 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
18429 However, batching is automatically disabled for &(appendfile)& deliveries that
18430 happen as a result of forwarding or aliasing or other redirection directly to a
18434 .option batch_max appendfile integer 1
18435 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
18438 .option check_group appendfile boolean false
18439 When this option is set, the group owner of the file defined by the &%file%&
18440 option is checked to see that it is the same as the group under which the
18441 delivery process is running. The default setting is false because the default
18442 file mode is 0600, which means that the group is irrelevant.
18445 .option check_owner appendfile boolean true
18446 When this option is set, the owner of the file defined by the &%file%& option
18447 is checked to ensure that it is the same as the user under which the delivery
18448 process is running.
18451 .option check_string appendfile string "see below"
18452 .cindex "&""From""& line"
18453 As &(appendfile)& writes the message, the start of each line is tested for
18454 matching &%check_string%&, and if it does, the initial matching characters are
18455 replaced by the contents of &%escape_string%&. The value of &%check_string%& is
18456 a literal string, not a regular expression, and the case of any letters it
18457 contains is significant.
18459 If &%use_bsmtp%& is set the values of &%check_string%& and &%escape_string%&
18460 are forced to &"."& and &".."& respectively, and any settings in the
18461 configuration are ignored. Otherwise, they default to &"From&~"& and
18462 &">From&~"& when the &%file%& option is set, and unset when any of the
18463 &%directory%&, &%maildir%&, or &%mailstore%& options are set.
18465 The default settings, along with &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%&, are
18466 suitable for traditional &"BSD"& mailboxes, where a line beginning with
18467 &"From&~"& indicates the start of a new message. All four options need changing
18468 if another format is used. For example, to deliver to mailboxes in MMDF format:
18469 .cindex "MMDF format mailbox"
18470 .cindex "mailbox" "MMDF format"
18472 check_string = "\1\1\1\1\n"
18473 escape_string = "\1\1\1\1 \n"
18474 message_prefix = "\1\1\1\1\n"
18475 message_suffix = "\1\1\1\1\n"
18477 .option create_directory appendfile boolean true
18478 .cindex "directory creation"
18479 When this option is true, Exim attempts to create any missing superior
18480 directories for the file that it is about to write. A created directory's mode
18481 is given by the &%directory_mode%& option.
18483 The group ownership of a newly created directory is highly dependent on the
18484 operating system (and possibly the file system) that is being used. For
18485 example, in Solaris, if the parent directory has the setgid bit set, its group
18486 is propagated to the child; if not, the currently set group is used. However,
18487 in FreeBSD, the parent's group is always used.
18491 .option create_file appendfile string anywhere
18492 This option constrains the location of files and directories that are created
18493 by this transport. It applies to files defined by the &%file%& option and
18494 directories defined by the &%directory%& option. In the case of maildir
18495 delivery, it applies to the top level directory, not the maildir directories
18498 The option must be set to one of the words &"anywhere"&, &"inhome"&, or
18499 &"belowhome"&. In the second and third cases, a home directory must have been
18500 set for the transport. This option is not useful when an explicit file name is
18501 given for normal mailbox deliveries. It is intended for the case when file
18502 names are generated from users' &_.forward_& files. These are usually handled
18503 by an &(appendfile)& transport called &%address_file%&. See also
18504 &%file_must_exist%&.
18507 .option directory appendfile string&!! unset
18508 This option is mutually exclusive with the &%file%& option, but one of &%file%&
18509 or &%directory%& must be set, unless the delivery is the direct result of a
18510 redirection (see section &<<SECTfildiropt>>&).
18512 When &%directory%& is set, the string is expanded, and the message is delivered
18513 into a new file or files in or below the given directory, instead of being
18514 appended to a single mailbox file. A number of different formats are provided
18515 (see &%maildir_format%& and &%mailstore_format%&), and see section
18516 &<<SECTopdir>>& for further details of this form of delivery.
18519 .option directory_file appendfile string&!! &`q${base62:$tod_epoch}-$inode`&
18521 .cindex "&$inode$&"
18522 When &%directory%& is set, but neither &%maildir_format%& nor
18523 &%mailstore_format%& is set, &(appendfile)& delivers each message into a file
18524 whose name is obtained by expanding this string. The default value generates a
18525 unique name from the current time, in base 62 form, and the inode of the file.
18526 The variable &$inode$& is available only when expanding this option.
18529 .option directory_mode appendfile "octal integer" 0700
18530 If &(appendfile)& creates any directories as a result of the
18531 &%create_directory%& option, their mode is specified by this option.
18534 .option escape_string appendfile string "see description"
18535 See &%check_string%& above.
18538 .option file appendfile string&!! unset
18539 This option is mutually exclusive with the &%directory%& option, but one of
18540 &%file%& or &%directory%& must be set, unless the delivery is the direct result
18541 of a redirection (see section &<<SECTfildiropt>>&). The &%file%& option
18542 specifies a single file, to which the message is appended. One or more of
18543 &%use_fcntl_lock%&, &%use_flock_lock%&, or &%use_lockfile%& must be set with
18546 .cindex "NFS" "lock file"
18547 .cindex "locking files"
18548 .cindex "lock files"
18549 If you are using more than one host to deliver over NFS into the same
18550 mailboxes, you should always use lock files.
18552 The string value is expanded for each delivery, and must yield an absolute
18553 path. The most common settings of this option are variations on one of these
18556 file = /var/spool/mail/$local_part
18557 file = /home/$local_part/inbox
18560 .cindex "&""sticky""& bit"
18561 In the first example, all deliveries are done into the same directory. If Exim
18562 is configured to use lock files (see &%use_lockfile%& below) it must be able to
18563 create a file in the directory, so the &"sticky"& bit must be turned on for
18564 deliveries to be possible, or alternatively the &%group%& option can be used to
18565 run the delivery under a group id which has write access to the directory.
18569 .option file_format appendfile string unset
18570 .cindex "file" "mailbox; checking existing format"
18571 This option requests the transport to check the format of an existing file
18572 before adding to it. The check consists of matching a specific string at the
18573 start of the file. The value of the option consists of an even number of
18574 colon-separated strings. The first of each pair is the test string, and the
18575 second is the name of a transport. If the transport associated with a matched
18576 string is not the current transport, control is passed over to the other
18577 transport. For example, suppose the standard &(local_delivery)& transport has
18580 file_format = "From : local_delivery :\
18581 \1\1\1\1\n : local_mmdf_delivery"
18583 Mailboxes that begin with &"From"& are still handled by this transport, but if
18584 a mailbox begins with four binary ones followed by a newline, control is passed
18585 to a transport called &%local_mmdf_delivery%&, which presumably is configured
18586 to do the delivery in MMDF format. If a mailbox does not exist or is empty, it
18587 is assumed to match the current transport. If the start of a mailbox doesn't
18588 match any string, or if the transport named for a given string is not defined,
18589 delivery is deferred.
18592 .option file_must_exist appendfile boolean false
18593 If this option is true, the file specified by the &%file%& option must exist,
18594 and an error occurs if it does not. Otherwise, it is created if it does not
18598 .option lock_fcntl_timeout appendfile time 0s
18599 .cindex "timeout" "mailbox locking"
18600 .cindex "mailbox locking" "blocking and non-blocking"
18601 .cindex "locking files"
18602 By default, the &(appendfile)& transport uses non-blocking calls to &[fcntl()]&
18603 when locking an open mailbox file. If the call fails, the delivery process
18604 sleeps for &%lock_interval%& and tries again, up to &%lock_retries%& times.
18605 Non-blocking calls are used so that the file is not kept open during the wait
18606 for the lock; the reason for this is to make it as safe as possible for
18607 deliveries over NFS in the case when processes might be accessing an NFS
18608 mailbox without using a lock file. This should not be done, but
18609 misunderstandings and hence misconfigurations are not unknown.
18611 On a busy system, however, the performance of a non-blocking lock approach is
18612 not as good as using a blocking lock with a timeout. In this case, the waiting
18613 is done inside the system call, and Exim's delivery process acquires the lock
18614 and can proceed as soon as the previous lock holder releases it.
18616 If &%lock_fcntl_timeout%& is set to a non-zero time, blocking locks, with that
18617 timeout, are used. There may still be some retrying: the maximum number of
18620 (lock_retries * lock_interval) / lock_fcntl_timeout
18622 rounded up to the next whole number. In other words, the total time during
18623 which &(appendfile)& is trying to get a lock is roughly the same, unless
18624 &%lock_fcntl_timeout%& is set very large.
18626 You should consider setting this option if you are getting a lot of delayed
18627 local deliveries because of errors of the form
18629 failed to lock mailbox /some/file (fcntl)
18632 .option lock_flock_timeout appendfile time 0s
18633 This timeout applies to file locking when using &[flock()]& (see
18634 &%use_flock%&); the timeout operates in a similar manner to
18635 &%lock_fcntl_timeout%&.
18638 .option lock_interval appendfile time 3s
18639 This specifies the time to wait between attempts to lock the file. See below
18640 for details of locking.
18643 .option lock_retries appendfile integer 10
18644 This specifies the maximum number of attempts to lock the file. A value of zero
18645 is treated as 1. See below for details of locking.
18648 .option lockfile_mode appendfile "octal integer" 0600
18649 This specifies the mode of the created lock file, when a lock file is being
18650 used (see &%use_lockfile%&).
18653 .option lockfile_timeout appendfile time 30m
18654 .cindex "timeout" "mailbox locking"
18655 When a lock file is being used (see &%use_lockfile%&), if a lock file already
18656 exists and is older than this value, it is assumed to have been left behind by
18657 accident, and Exim attempts to remove it.
18660 .option mailbox_filecount appendfile string&!! unset
18661 .cindex "mailbox" "specifying size of"
18662 .cindex "size" "of mailbox"
18663 If this option is set, it is expanded, and the result is taken as the current
18664 number of files in the mailbox. It must be a decimal number, optionally
18665 followed by K or M. This provides a way of obtaining this information from an
18666 external source that maintains the data.
18669 .option mailbox_size appendfile string&!! unset
18670 .cindex "mailbox" "specifying size of"
18671 .cindex "size" "of mailbox"
18672 If this option is set, it is expanded, and the result is taken as the current
18673 size the mailbox. It must be a decimal number, optionally followed by K or M.
18674 This provides a way of obtaining this information from an external source that
18675 maintains the data. This is likely to be helpful for maildir deliveries where
18676 it is computationally expensive to compute the size of a mailbox.
18680 .option maildir_format appendfile boolean false
18681 .cindex "maildir format" "specifying"
18682 If this option is set with the &%directory%& option, the delivery is into a new
18683 file, in the &"maildir"& format that is used by other mail software. When the
18684 transport is activated directly from a &(redirect)& router (for example, the
18685 &(address_file)& transport in the default configuration), setting
18686 &%maildir_format%& causes the path received from the router to be treated as a
18687 directory, whether or not it ends with &`/`&. This option is available only if
18688 SUPPORT_MAILDIR is present in &_Local/Makefile_&. See section
18689 &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below for further details.
18692 .option maildir_quota_directory_regex appendfile string "See below"
18693 .cindex "maildir format" "quota; directories included in"
18694 .cindex "quota" "maildir; directories included in"
18695 This option is relevant only when &%maildir_use_size_file%& is set. It defines
18696 a regular expression for specifying directories that should be included in the
18697 quota calculation. The default value is
18699 maildir_quota_directory_regex = ^(?:cur|new|\..*)$
18701 which includes the &_cur_& and &_new_& directories, and any maildir++ folders
18702 (directories whose names begin with a dot). If you want to exclude the
18704 folder from the count (as some sites do), you need to change this setting to
18706 maildir_quota_directory_regex = ^(?:cur|new|\.(?!Trash).*)$
18708 This uses a negative lookahead in the regular expression to exclude the
18709 directory whose name is &_.Trash_&.
18712 .option maildir_retries appendfile integer 10
18713 This option specifies the number of times to retry when writing a file in
18714 &"maildir"& format. See section &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below.
18717 .option maildir_tag appendfile string&!! unset
18718 This option applies only to deliveries in maildir format, and is described in
18719 section &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below.
18722 .option maildir_use_size_file appendfile boolean false
18723 .cindex "maildir format" "&_maildirsize_& file"
18724 Setting this option true enables support for &_maildirsize_& files. Exim
18725 creates a &_maildirsize_& file in a maildir if one does not exist, taking the
18726 quota from the &%quota%& option of the transport. If &%quota%& is unset, the
18727 value is zero. See section &<<SECTmaildirdelivery>>& below for further details.
18730 .option mailstore_format appendfile boolean false
18731 .cindex "mailstore format" "specifying"
18732 If this option is set with the &%directory%& option, the delivery is into two
18733 new files in &"mailstore"& format. The option is available only if
18734 SUPPORT_MAILSTORE is present in &_Local/Makefile_&. See section &<<SECTopdir>>&
18735 below for further details.
18738 .option mailstore_prefix appendfile string&!! unset
18739 This option applies only to deliveries in mailstore format, and is described in
18740 section &<<SECTopdir>>& below.
18743 .option mailstore_suffix appendfile string&!! unset
18744 This option applies only to deliveries in mailstore format, and is described in
18745 section &<<SECTopdir>>& below.
18748 .option mbx_format appendfile boolean false
18749 .cindex "locking files"
18750 .cindex "file" "locking"
18751 .cindex "file" "MBX format"
18752 .cindex "MBX format" "specifying"
18753 This option is available only if Exim has been compiled with SUPPORT_MBX
18754 set in &_Local/Makefile_&. If &%mbx_format%& is set with the &%file%& option,
18755 the message is appended to the mailbox file in MBX format instead of
18756 traditional Unix format. This format is supported by Pine4 and its associated
18757 IMAP and POP daemons, by means of the &'c-client'& library that they all use.
18759 &*Note*&: The &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& options are not
18760 automatically changed by the use of &%mbx_format%&. They should normally be set
18761 empty when using MBX format, so this option almost always appears in this
18768 If none of the locking options are mentioned in the configuration,
18769 &%use_mbx_lock%& is assumed and the other locking options default to false. It
18770 is possible to specify the other kinds of locking with &%mbx_format%&, but
18771 &%use_fcntl_lock%& and &%use_mbx_lock%& are mutually exclusive. MBX locking
18772 interworks with &'c-client'&, providing for shared access to the mailbox. It
18773 should not be used if any program that does not use this form of locking is
18774 going to access the mailbox, nor should it be used if the mailbox file is NFS
18775 mounted, because it works only when the mailbox is accessed from a single host.
18777 If you set &%use_fcntl_lock%& with an MBX-format mailbox, you cannot use
18778 the standard version of &'c-client'&, because as long as it has a mailbox open
18779 (this means for the whole of a Pine or IMAP session), Exim will not be able to
18780 append messages to it.
18783 .option message_prefix appendfile string&!! "see below"
18784 .cindex "&""From""& line"
18785 The string specified here is expanded and output at the start of every message.
18786 The default is unset unless &%file%& is specified and &%use_bsmtp%& is not set,
18787 in which case it is:
18789 message_prefix = "From ${if def:return_path{$return_path}\
18790 {MAILER-DAEMON}} $tod_bsdinbox\n"
18794 .option message_suffix appendfile string&!! "see below"
18795 The string specified here is expanded and output at the end of every message.
18796 The default is unset unless &%file%& is specified and &%use_bsmtp%& is not set,
18797 in which case it is a single newline character. The suffix can be suppressed by
18803 .option mode appendfile "octal integer" 0600
18804 If the output file is created, it is given this mode. If it already exists and
18805 has wider permissions, they are reduced to this mode. If it has narrower
18806 permissions, an error occurs unless &%mode_fail_narrower%& is false. However,
18807 if the delivery is the result of a &%save%& command in a filter file specifing
18808 a particular mode, the mode of the output file is always forced to take that
18809 value, and this option is ignored.
18812 .option mode_fail_narrower appendfile boolean true
18813 This option applies in the case when an existing mailbox file has a narrower
18814 mode than that specified by the &%mode%& option. If &%mode_fail_narrower%& is
18815 true, the delivery is deferred (&"mailbox has the wrong mode"&); otherwise Exim
18816 continues with the delivery attempt, using the existing mode of the file.
18819 .option notify_comsat appendfile boolean false
18820 If this option is true, the &'comsat'& daemon is notified after every
18821 successful delivery to a user mailbox. This is the daemon that notifies logged
18822 on users about incoming mail.
18825 .option quota appendfile string&!! unset
18826 .cindex "quota" "imposed by Exim"
18827 This option imposes a limit on the size of the file to which Exim is appending,
18828 or to the total space used in the directory tree when the &%directory%& option
18829 is set. In the latter case, computation of the space used is expensive, because
18830 all the files in the directory (and any sub-directories) have to be
18831 individually inspected and their sizes summed. (See &%quota_size_regex%& and
18832 &%maildir_use_size_file%& for ways to avoid this in environments where users
18833 have no shell access to their mailboxes).
18835 As there is no interlock against two simultaneous deliveries into a
18836 multi-file mailbox, it is possible for the quota to be overrun in this case.
18837 For single-file mailboxes, of course, an interlock is a necessity.
18839 A file's size is taken as its &'used'& value. Because of blocking effects, this
18840 may be a lot less than the actual amount of disk space allocated to the file.
18841 If the sizes of a number of files are being added up, the rounding effect can
18842 become quite noticeable, especially on systems that have large block sizes.
18843 Nevertheless, it seems best to stick to the &'used'& figure, because this is
18844 the obvious value which users understand most easily.
18847 The value of the option is expanded, and must then be a numerical value
18848 (decimal point allowed), optionally followed by one of the letters K, M, or G,
18849 for kilobytes, megabytes, or gigabytes. If Exim is running on a system with
18850 large file support (Linux and FreeBSD have this), mailboxes larger than 2G can
18854 &*Note*&: A value of zero is interpreted as &"no quota"&.
18856 The expansion happens while Exim is running as root, before it changes uid for
18857 the delivery. This means that files that are inaccessible to the end user can
18858 be used to hold quota values that are looked up in the expansion. When delivery
18859 fails because this quota is exceeded, the handling of the error is as for
18860 system quota failures.
18862 By default, Exim's quota checking mimics system quotas, and restricts the
18863 mailbox to the specified maximum size, though the value is not accurate to the
18864 last byte, owing to separator lines and additional headers that may get added
18865 during message delivery. When a mailbox is nearly full, large messages may get
18866 refused even though small ones are accepted, because the size of the current
18867 message is added to the quota when the check is made. This behaviour can be
18868 changed by setting &%quota_is_inclusive%& false. When this is done, the check
18869 for exceeding the quota does not include the current message. Thus, deliveries
18870 continue until the quota has been exceeded; thereafter, no further messages are
18871 delivered. See also &%quota_warn_threshold%&.
18874 .option quota_directory appendfile string&!! unset
18875 This option defines the directory to check for quota purposes when delivering
18876 into individual files. The default is the delivery directory, or, if a file
18877 called &_maildirfolder_& exists in a maildir directory, the parent of the
18878 delivery directory.
18881 .option quota_filecount appendfile string&!! 0
18882 This option applies when the &%directory%& option is set. It limits the total
18883 number of files in the directory (compare the inode limit in system quotas). It
18884 can only be used if &%quota%& is also set. The value is expanded; an expansion
18885 failure causes delivery to be deferred.
18888 .option quota_is_inclusive appendfile boolean true
18889 See &%quota%& above.
18892 .option quota_size_regex appendfile string unset
18893 This option applies when one of the delivery modes that writes a separate file
18894 for each message is being used. When Exim wants to find the size of one of
18895 these files in order to test the quota, it first checks &%quota_size_regex%&.
18896 If this is set to a regular expression that matches the file name, and it
18897 captures one string, that string is interpreted as a representation of the
18898 file's size. The value of &%quota_size_regex%& is not expanded.
18900 This feature is useful only when users have no shell access to their mailboxes
18901 &-- otherwise they could defeat the quota simply by renaming the files. This
18902 facility can be used with maildir deliveries, by setting &%maildir_tag%& to add
18903 the file length to the file name. For example:
18905 maildir_tag = ,S=$message_size
18906 quota_size_regex = ,S=(\d+)
18909 An alternative to &$message_size$& is &$message_linecount$&, which contains the
18910 number of lines in the message.
18913 The regular expression should not assume that the length is at the end of the
18914 file name (even though &%maildir_tag%& puts it there) because maildir MUAs
18915 sometimes add other information onto the ends of message file names.
18919 .option quota_warn_message appendfile string&!! "see below"
18920 See below for the use of this option. If it is not set when
18921 &%quota_warn_threshold%& is set, it defaults to
18923 quota_warn_message = "\
18924 To: $local_part@$domain\n\
18925 Subject: Your mailbox\n\n\
18926 This message is automatically created \
18927 by mail delivery software.\n\n\
18928 The size of your mailbox has exceeded \
18929 a warning threshold that is\n\
18930 set by the system administrator.\n"
18934 .option quota_warn_threshold appendfile string&!! 0
18935 .cindex "quota" "warning threshold"
18936 .cindex "mailbox" "size warning"
18937 .cindex "size" "of mailbox"
18938 This option is expanded in the same way as &%quota%& (see above). If the
18939 resulting value is greater than zero, and delivery of the message causes the
18940 size of the file or total space in the directory tree to cross the given
18941 threshold, a warning message is sent. If &%quota%& is also set, the threshold
18942 may be specified as a percentage of it by following the value with a percent
18946 quota_warn_threshold = 75%
18948 If &%quota%& is not set, a setting of &%quota_warn_threshold%& that ends with a
18949 percent sign is ignored.
18952 The warning message itself is specified by the &%quota_warn_message%& option,
18953 and it must start with a &'To:'& header line containing the recipient(s) of the
18954 warning message. These do not necessarily have to include the recipient(s) of
18955 the original message. A &'Subject:'& line should also normally be supplied. You
18956 can include any other header lines that you want.
18959 The &%quota%& option does not have to be set in order to use this option; they
18960 are independent of one another except when the threshold is specified as a
18964 .option use_bsmtp appendfile boolean false
18965 .cindex "envelope sender"
18966 If this option is set true, &(appendfile)& writes messages in &"batch SMTP"&
18967 format, with the envelope sender and recipient(s) included as SMTP commands. If
18968 you want to include a leading HELO command with such messages, you can do
18969 so by setting the &%message_prefix%& option. See section &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>&
18970 for details of batch SMTP.
18973 .option use_crlf appendfile boolean false
18974 .cindex "carriage return"
18976 This option causes lines to be terminated with the two-character CRLF sequence
18977 (carriage return, linefeed) instead of just a linefeed character. In the case
18978 of batched SMTP, the byte sequence written to the file is then an exact image
18979 of what would be sent down a real SMTP connection.
18981 The contents of the &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& options are
18982 written verbatim, so must contain their own carriage return characters if these
18983 are needed. In cases where these options have non-empty defaults, the values
18984 end with a single linefeed, so they must be changed to end with &`\r\n`& if
18985 &%use_crlf%& is set.
18988 .option use_fcntl_lock appendfile boolean "see below"
18989 This option controls the use of the &[fcntl()]& function to lock a file for
18990 exclusive use when a message is being appended. It is set by default unless
18991 &%use_flock_lock%& is set. Otherwise, it should be turned off only if you know
18992 that all your MUAs use lock file locking. When both &%use_fcntl_lock%& and
18993 &%use_flock_lock%& are unset, &%use_lockfile%& must be set.
18996 .option use_flock_lock appendfile boolean false
18997 This option is provided to support the use of &[flock()]& for file locking, for
18998 the few situations where it is needed. Most modern operating systems support
18999 &[fcntl()]& and &[lockf()]& locking, and these two functions interwork with
19000 each other. Exim uses &[fcntl()]& locking by default.
19002 This option is required only if you are using an operating system where
19003 &[flock()]& is used by programs that access mailboxes (typically MUAs), and
19004 where &[flock()]& does not correctly interwork with &[fcntl()]&. You can use
19005 both &[fcntl()]& and &[flock()]& locking simultaneously if you want.
19007 .cindex "Solaris" "&[flock()]& support"
19008 Not all operating systems provide &[flock()]&. Some versions of Solaris do not
19009 have it (and some, I think, provide a not quite right version built on top of
19010 &[lockf()]&). If the OS does not have &[flock()]&, Exim will be built without
19011 the ability to use it, and any attempt to do so will cause a configuration
19014 &*Warning*&: &[flock()]& locks do not work on NFS files (unless &[flock()]&
19015 is just being mapped onto &[fcntl()]& by the OS).
19018 .option use_lockfile appendfile boolean "see below"
19019 If this option is turned off, Exim does not attempt to create a lock file when
19020 appending to a mailbox file. In this situation, the only locking is by
19021 &[fcntl()]&. You should only turn &%use_lockfile%& off if you are absolutely
19022 sure that every MUA that is ever going to look at your users' mailboxes uses
19023 &[fcntl()]& rather than a lock file, and even then only when you are not
19024 delivering over NFS from more than one host.
19026 .cindex "NFS" "lock file"
19027 In order to append to an NFS file safely from more than one host, it is
19028 necessary to take out a lock &'before'& opening the file, and the lock file
19029 achieves this. Otherwise, even with &[fcntl()]& locking, there is a risk of
19032 The &%use_lockfile%& option is set by default unless &%use_mbx_lock%& is set.
19033 It is not possible to turn both &%use_lockfile%& and &%use_fcntl_lock%& off,
19034 except when &%mbx_format%& is set.
19037 .option use_mbx_lock appendfile boolean "see below"
19038 This option is available only if Exim has been compiled with SUPPORT_MBX
19039 set in &_Local/Makefile_&. Setting the option specifies that special MBX
19040 locking rules be used. It is set by default if &%mbx_format%& is set and none
19041 of the locking options are mentioned in the configuration. The locking rules
19042 are the same as are used by the &'c-client'& library that underlies Pine and
19043 the IMAP4 and POP daemons that come with it (see the discussion below). The
19044 rules allow for shared access to the mailbox. However, this kind of locking
19045 does not work when the mailbox is NFS mounted.
19047 You can set &%use_mbx_lock%& with either (or both) of &%use_fcntl_lock%& and
19048 &%use_flock_lock%& to control what kind of locking is used in implementing the
19049 MBX locking rules. The default is to use &[fcntl()]& if &%use_mbx_lock%& is set
19050 without &%use_fcntl_lock%& or &%use_flock_lock%&.
19055 .section "Operational details for appending" "SECTopappend"
19056 .cindex "appending to a file"
19057 .cindex "file" "appending"
19058 Before appending to a file, the following preparations are made:
19061 If the name of the file is &_/dev/null_&, no action is taken, and a success
19065 .cindex "directory creation"
19066 If any directories on the file's path are missing, Exim creates them if the
19067 &%create_directory%& option is set. A created directory's mode is given by the
19068 &%directory_mode%& option.
19071 If &%file_format%& is set, the format of an existing file is checked. If this
19072 indicates that a different transport should be used, control is passed to that
19076 .cindex "file" "locking"
19077 .cindex "locking files"
19078 .cindex "NFS" "lock file"
19079 If &%use_lockfile%& is set, a lock file is built in a way that will work
19080 reliably over NFS, as follows:
19083 Create a &"hitching post"& file whose name is that of the lock file with the
19084 current time, primary host name, and process id added, by opening for writing
19085 as a new file. If this fails with an access error, delivery is deferred.
19087 Close the hitching post file, and hard link it to the lock file name.
19089 If the call to &[link()]& succeeds, creation of the lock file has succeeded.
19090 Unlink the hitching post name.
19092 Otherwise, use &[stat()]& to get information about the hitching post file, and
19093 then unlink hitching post name. If the number of links is exactly two, creation
19094 of the lock file succeeded but something (for example, an NFS server crash and
19095 restart) caused this fact not to be communicated to the &[link()]& call.
19097 If creation of the lock file failed, wait for &%lock_interval%& and try again,
19098 up to &%lock_retries%& times. However, since any program that writes to a
19099 mailbox should complete its task very quickly, it is reasonable to time out old
19100 lock files that are normally the result of user agent and system crashes. If an
19101 existing lock file is older than &%lockfile_timeout%& Exim attempts to unlink
19102 it before trying again.
19106 A call is made to &[lstat()]& to discover whether the main file exists, and if
19107 so, what its characteristics are. If &[lstat()]& fails for any reason other
19108 than non-existence, delivery is deferred.
19111 .cindex "symbolic link" "to mailbox"
19112 .cindex "mailbox" "symbolic link"
19113 If the file does exist and is a symbolic link, delivery is deferred, unless the
19114 &%allow_symlink%& option is set, in which case the ownership of the link is
19115 checked, and then &[stat()]& is called to find out about the real file, which
19116 is then subjected to the checks below. The check on the top-level link
19117 ownership prevents one user creating a link for another's mailbox in a sticky
19118 directory, though allowing symbolic links in this case is definitely not a good
19119 idea. If there is a chain of symbolic links, the intermediate ones are not
19123 If the file already exists but is not a regular file, or if the file's owner
19124 and group (if the group is being checked &-- see &%check_group%& above) are
19125 different from the user and group under which the delivery is running,
19126 delivery is deferred.
19129 If the file's permissions are more generous than specified, they are reduced.
19130 If they are insufficient, delivery is deferred, unless &%mode_fail_narrower%&
19131 is set false, in which case the delivery is tried using the existing
19135 The file's inode number is saved, and the file is then opened for appending.
19136 If this fails because the file has vanished, &(appendfile)& behaves as if it
19137 hadn't existed (see below). For any other failures, delivery is deferred.
19140 If the file is opened successfully, check that the inode number hasn't
19141 changed, that it is still a regular file, and that the owner and permissions
19142 have not changed. If anything is wrong, defer delivery and freeze the message.
19145 If the file did not exist originally, defer delivery if the &%file_must_exist%&
19146 option is set. Otherwise, check that the file is being created in a permitted
19147 directory if the &%create_file%& option is set (deferring on failure), and then
19148 open for writing as a new file, with the O_EXCL and O_CREAT options,
19149 except when dealing with a symbolic link (the &%allow_symlink%& option must be
19150 set). In this case, which can happen if the link points to a non-existent file,
19151 the file is opened for writing using O_CREAT but not O_EXCL, because
19152 that prevents link following.
19155 .cindex "loop" "while file testing"
19156 If opening fails because the file exists, obey the tests given above for
19157 existing files. However, to avoid looping in a situation where the file is
19158 being continuously created and destroyed, the exists/not-exists loop is broken
19159 after 10 repetitions, and the message is then frozen.
19162 If opening fails with any other error, defer delivery.
19165 .cindex "file" "locking"
19166 .cindex "locking files"
19167 Once the file is open, unless both &%use_fcntl_lock%& and &%use_flock_lock%&
19168 are false, it is locked using &[fcntl()]& or &[flock()]& or both. If
19169 &%use_mbx_lock%& is false, an exclusive lock is requested in each case.
19170 However, if &%use_mbx_lock%& is true, Exim takes out a shared lock on the open
19171 file, and an exclusive lock on the file whose name is
19173 /tmp/.<device-number>.<inode-number>
19175 using the device and inode numbers of the open mailbox file, in accordance with
19176 the MBX locking rules.
19178 If Exim fails to lock the file, there are two possible courses of action,
19179 depending on the value of the locking timeout. This is obtained from
19180 &%lock_fcntl_timeout%& or &%lock_flock_timeout%&, as appropriate.
19182 If the timeout value is zero, the file is closed, Exim waits for
19183 &%lock_interval%&, and then goes back and re-opens the file as above and tries
19184 to lock it again. This happens up to &%lock_retries%& times, after which the
19185 delivery is deferred.
19187 If the timeout has a value greater than zero, blocking calls to &[fcntl()]& or
19188 &[flock()]& are used (with the given timeout), so there has already been some
19189 waiting involved by the time locking fails. Nevertheless, Exim does not give up
19190 immediately. It retries up to
19192 (lock_retries * lock_interval) / <timeout>
19194 times (rounded up).
19197 At the end of delivery, Exim closes the file (which releases the &[fcntl()]&
19198 and/or &[flock()]& locks) and then deletes the lock file if one was created.
19201 .section "Operational details for delivery to a new file" "SECTopdir"
19202 .cindex "delivery" "to single file"
19203 .cindex "&""From""& line"
19204 When the &%directory%& option is set instead of &%file%&, each message is
19205 delivered into a newly-created file or set of files. When &(appendfile)& is
19206 activated directly from a &(redirect)& router, neither &%file%& nor
19207 &%directory%& is normally set, because the path for delivery is supplied by the
19208 router. (See for example, the &(address_file)& transport in the default
19209 configuration.) In this case, delivery is to a new file if either the path name
19210 ends in &`/`&, or the &%maildir_format%& or &%mailstore_format%& option is set.
19212 No locking is required while writing the message to a new file, so the various
19213 locking options of the transport are ignored. The &"From"& line that by default
19214 separates messages in a single file is not normally needed, nor is the escaping
19215 of message lines that start with &"From"&, and there is no need to ensure a
19216 newline at the end of each message. Consequently, the default values for
19217 &%check_string%&, &%message_prefix%&, and &%message_suffix%& are all unset when
19218 any of &%directory%&, &%maildir_format%&, or &%mailstore_format%& is set.
19220 If Exim is required to check a &%quota%& setting, it adds up the sizes of all
19221 the files in the delivery directory by default. However, you can specify a
19222 different directory by setting &%quota_directory%&. Also, for maildir
19223 deliveries (see below) the &_maildirfolder_& convention is honoured.
19226 .cindex "maildir format"
19227 .cindex "mailstore format"
19228 There are three different ways in which delivery to individual files can be
19229 done, controlled by the settings of the &%maildir_format%& and
19230 &%mailstore_format%& options. Note that code to support maildir or mailstore
19231 formats is not included in the binary unless SUPPORT_MAILDIR or
19232 SUPPORT_MAILSTORE, respectively, is set in &_Local/Makefile_&.
19234 .cindex "directory creation"
19235 In all three cases an attempt is made to create the directory and any necessary
19236 sub-directories if they do not exist, provided that the &%create_directory%&
19237 option is set (the default). The location of a created directory can be
19238 constrained by setting &%create_file%&. A created directory's mode is given by
19239 the &%directory_mode%& option. If creation fails, or if the
19240 &%create_directory%& option is not set when creation is required, delivery is
19245 .section "Maildir delivery" "SECTmaildirdelivery"
19246 .cindex "maildir format" "description of"
19247 If the &%maildir_format%& option is true, Exim delivers each message by writing
19248 it to a file whose name is &_tmp/<stime>.H<mtime>P<pid>.<host>_& in the
19249 given directory. If the delivery is successful, the file is renamed into the
19250 &_new_& subdirectory.
19252 In the file name, <&'stime'&> is the current time of day in seconds, and
19253 <&'mtime'&> is the microsecond fraction of the time. After a maildir delivery,
19254 Exim checks that the time-of-day clock has moved on by at least one microsecond
19255 before terminating the delivery process. This guarantees uniqueness for the
19256 file name. However, as a precaution, Exim calls &[stat()]& for the file before
19257 opening it. If any response other than ENOENT (does not exist) is given,
19258 Exim waits 2 seconds and tries again, up to &%maildir_retries%& times.
19260 .cindex "quota" "in maildir delivery"
19261 .cindex "maildir++"
19262 If Exim is required to check a &%quota%& setting before a maildir delivery, and
19263 &%quota_directory%& is not set, it looks for a file called &_maildirfolder_& in
19264 the maildir directory (alongside &_new_&, &_cur_&, &_tmp_&). If this exists,
19265 Exim assumes the directory is a maildir++ folder directory, which is one level
19266 down from the user's top level mailbox directory. This causes it to start at
19267 the parent directory instead of the current directory when calculating the
19268 amount of space used.
19270 One problem with delivering into a multi-file mailbox is that it is
19271 computationally expensive to compute the size of the mailbox for quota
19272 checking. Various approaches have been taken to reduce the amount of work
19273 needed. The next two sections describe two of them. A third alternative is to
19274 use some external process for maintaining the size data, and use the expansion
19275 of the &%mailbox_size%& option as a way of importing it into Exim.
19280 .section "Using tags to record message sizes"
19281 If &%maildir_tag%& is set, the string is expanded for each delivery.
19282 When the maildir file is renamed into the &_new_& sub-directory, the
19283 tag is added to its name. However, if adding the tag takes the length of the
19284 name to the point where the test &[stat()]& call fails with ENAMETOOLONG,
19285 the tag is dropped and the maildir file is created with no tag.
19287 .cindex "&$message_size$&"
19288 Tags can be used to encode the size of files in their names; see
19289 &%quota_size_regex%& above for an example. The expansion of &%maildir_tag%&
19290 happens after the message has been written. The value of the &$message_size$&
19291 variable is set to the number of bytes actually written. If the expansion is
19292 forced to fail, the tag is ignored, but a non-forced failure causes delivery to
19293 be deferred. The expanded tag may contain any printing characters except &"/"&.
19294 Non-printing characters in the string are ignored; if the resulting string is
19295 empty, it is ignored. If it starts with an alphanumeric character, a leading
19300 .section "Using a maildirsize file"
19301 .cindex "quota" "in maildir delivery"
19302 .cindex "maildir format" "&_maildirsize_& file"
19303 If &%maildir_use_size_file%& is true, Exim implements the maildir++ rules for
19304 storing quota and message size information in a file called &_maildirsize_&
19305 within the maildir directory. If this file does not exist, Exim creates it,
19306 setting the quota from the &%quota%& option of the transport. If the maildir
19307 directory itself does not exist, it is created before any attempt to write a
19308 &_maildirsize_& file.
19310 The &_maildirsize_& file is used to hold information about the sizes of
19311 messages in the maildir, thus speeding up quota calculations. The quota value
19312 in the file is just a cache; if the quota is changed in the transport, the new
19313 value overrides the cached value when the next message is delivered. The cache
19314 is maintained for the benefit of other programs that access the maildir and
19315 need to know the quota.
19317 If the &%quota%& option in the transport is unset or zero, the &_maildirsize_&
19318 file is maintained (with a zero quota setting), but no quota is imposed.
19320 A regular expression is available for controlling which directories in the
19321 maildir participate in quota calculations. See the description of the
19322 &%maildir_quota_directory_regex%& option above for details.
19326 .section "Mailstore delivery"
19327 .cindex "mailstore format" "description of"
19328 If the &%mailstore_format%& option is true, each message is written as two
19329 files in the given directory. A unique base name is constructed from the
19330 message id and the current delivery process, and the files that are written use
19331 this base name plus the suffixes &_.env_& and &_.msg_&. The &_.env_& file
19332 contains the message's envelope, and the &_.msg_& file contains the message
19333 itself. The base name is placed in the variable &$mailstore_basename$&.
19335 During delivery, the envelope is first written to a file with the suffix
19336 &_.tmp_&. The &_.msg_& file is then written, and when it is complete, the
19337 &_.tmp_& file is renamed as the &_.env_& file. Programs that access messages in
19338 mailstore format should wait for the presence of both a &_.msg_& and a &_.env_&
19339 file before accessing either of them. An alternative approach is to wait for
19340 the absence of a &_.tmp_& file.
19342 The envelope file starts with any text defined by the &%mailstore_prefix%&
19343 option, expanded and terminated by a newline if there isn't one. Then follows
19344 the sender address on one line, then all the recipient addresses, one per line.
19345 There can be more than one recipient only if the &%batch_max%& option is set
19346 greater than one. Finally, &%mailstore_suffix%& is expanded and the result
19347 appended to the file, followed by a newline if it does not end with one.
19350 If expansion of &%mailstore_prefix%& or &%mailstore_suffix%& ends with a forced
19351 failure, it is ignored. Other expansion errors are treated as serious
19352 configuration errors, and delivery is deferred. The variable
19353 &$mailstore_basename$& is available for use during these expansions.
19357 .section "Non-special new file delivery"
19358 If neither &%maildir_format%& nor &%mailstore_format%& is set, a single new
19359 file is created directly in the named directory. For example, when delivering
19360 messages into files in batched SMTP format for later delivery to some host (see
19361 section &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>&), a setting such as
19363 directory = /var/bsmtp/$host
19365 might be used. A message is written to a file with a temporary name, which is
19366 then renamed when the delivery is complete. The final name is obtained by
19367 expanding the contents of the &%directory_file%& option.
19374 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19375 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19377 .chapter "The autoreply transport"
19378 .cindex "transports" "&(autoreply)&"
19379 .cindex "&(autoreply)& transport"
19380 The &(autoreply)& transport is not a true transport in that it does not cause
19381 the message to be transmitted. Instead, it generates a new mail message.
19383 If the router that passes the message to this transport does not have the
19384 &%unseen%& option set, the original message (for the current recipient) is not
19385 delivered anywhere. However, when the &%unseen%& option is set on the router
19386 that passes the message to this transport, routing of the address continues, so
19387 another router can set up a normal message delivery.
19390 The &(autoreply)& transport is usually run as the result of mail filtering, a
19391 &"vacation"& message being the standard example. However, it can also be run
19392 directly from a router like any other transport. To reduce the possibility of
19393 message cascades, messages created by the &(autoreply)& transport always have
19394 empty envelope sender addresses, like bounce messages.
19396 The parameters of the message to be sent can be specified in the configuration
19397 by options described below. However, these are used only when the address
19398 passed to the transport does not contain its own reply information. When the
19399 transport is run as a consequence of a
19401 or &%vacation%& command in a filter file, the parameters of the message are
19402 supplied by the filter, and passed with the address. The transport's options
19403 that define the message are then ignored (so they are not usually set in this
19404 case). The message is specified entirely by the filter or by the transport; it
19405 is never built from a mixture of options. However, the &%file_optional%&,
19406 &%mode%&, and &%return_message%& options apply in all cases.
19408 &(Autoreply)& is implemented as a local transport. When used as a result of a
19409 command in a user's filter file, &(autoreply)& normally runs under the uid and
19410 gid of the user, and with appropriate current and home directories (see chapter
19411 &<<CHAPenvironment>>&).
19413 There is a subtle difference between routing a message to a &(pipe)& transport
19414 that generates some text to be returned to the sender, and routing it to an
19415 &(autoreply)& transport. This difference is noticeable only if more than one
19416 address from the same message is so handled. In the case of a pipe, the
19417 separate outputs from the different addresses are gathered up and returned to
19418 the sender in a single message, whereas if &(autoreply)& is used, a separate
19419 message is generated for each address that is passed to it.
19421 Non-printing characters are not permitted in the header lines generated for the
19422 message that &(autoreply)& creates, with the exception of newlines that are
19423 immediately followed by white space. If any non-printing characters are found,
19424 the transport defers.
19425 Whether characters with the top bit set count as printing characters or not is
19426 controlled by the &%print_topbitchars%& global option.
19428 If any of the generic options for manipulating headers (for example,
19429 &%headers_add%&) are set on an &(autoreply)& transport, they apply to the copy
19430 of the original message that is included in the generated message when
19431 &%return_message%& is set. They do not apply to the generated message itself.
19433 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
19434 If the &(autoreply)& transport receives return code 2 from Exim when it submits
19435 the message, indicating that there were no recipients, it does not treat this
19436 as an error. This means that autoreplies sent to &$sender_address$& when this
19437 is empty (because the incoming message is a bounce message) do not cause
19438 problems. They are just discarded.
19442 .section "Private options for autoreply"
19443 .cindex "options" "&(autoreply)& transport"
19445 .option bcc autoreply string&!! unset
19446 This specifies the addresses that are to receive &"blind carbon copies"& of the
19447 message when the message is specified by the transport.
19450 .option cc autoreply string&!! unset
19451 This specifies recipients of the message and the contents of the &'Cc:'& header
19452 when the message is specified by the transport.
19455 .option file autoreply string&!! unset
19456 The contents of the file are sent as the body of the message when the message
19457 is specified by the transport. If both &%file%& and &%text%& are set, the text
19458 string comes first.
19461 .option file_expand autoreply boolean false
19462 If this is set, the contents of the file named by the &%file%& option are
19463 subjected to string expansion as they are added to the message.
19466 .option file_optional autoreply boolean false
19467 If this option is true, no error is generated if the file named by the &%file%&
19468 option or passed with the address does not exist or cannot be read.
19471 .option from autoreply string&!! unset
19472 This specifies the contents of the &'From:'& header when the message is
19473 specified by the transport.
19476 .option headers autoreply string&!! unset
19477 This specifies additional RFC 2822 headers that are to be added to the message
19478 when the message is specified by the transport. Several can be given by using
19479 &"\n"& to separate them. There is no check on the format.
19482 .option log autoreply string&!! unset
19483 This option names a file in which a record of every message sent is logged when
19484 the message is specified by the transport.
19487 .option mode autoreply "octal integer" 0600
19488 If either the log file or the &"once"& file has to be created, this mode is
19492 .option never_mail autoreply "address list&!!" unset
19493 If any run of the transport creates a message with a recipient that matches any
19494 item in the list, that recipient is quietly discarded. If all recipients are
19495 discarded, no message is created.
19499 .option once autoreply string&!! unset
19500 This option names a file or DBM database in which a record of each &'To:'&
19501 recipient is kept when the message is specified by the transport. &*Note*&:
19502 This does not apply to &'Cc:'& or &'Bcc:'& recipients.
19504 If &%once%& is unset, or is set to an empty string, the message is always sent.
19505 By default, if &%once%& is set to a non-empty file name, the message
19506 is not sent if a potential recipient is already listed in the database.
19507 However, if the &%once_repeat%& option specifies a time greater than zero, the
19508 message is sent if that much time has elapsed since a message was last sent to
19509 this recipient. A setting of zero time for &%once_repeat%& (the default)
19510 prevents a message from being sent a second time &-- in this case, zero means
19513 If &%once_file_size%& is zero, a DBM database is used to remember recipients,
19514 and it is allowed to grow as large as necessary. If &%once_file_size%& is set
19515 greater than zero, it changes the way Exim implements the &%once%& option.
19516 Instead of using a DBM file to record every recipient it sends to, it uses a
19517 regular file, whose size will never get larger than the given value.
19519 In the file, Exim keeps a linear list of recipient addresses and the times at
19520 which they were sent messages. If the file is full when a new address needs to
19521 be added, the oldest address is dropped. If &%once_repeat%& is not set, this
19522 means that a given recipient may receive multiple messages, but at
19523 unpredictable intervals that depend on the rate of turnover of addresses in the
19524 file. If &%once_repeat%& is set, it specifies a maximum time between repeats.
19527 .option once_file_size autoreply integer 0
19528 See &%once%& above.
19531 .option once_repeat autoreply time&!! 0s
19532 See &%once%& above.
19533 After expansion, the value of this option must be a valid time value.
19536 .option reply_to autoreply string&!! unset
19537 This specifies the contents of the &'Reply-To:'& header when the message is
19538 specified by the transport.
19541 .option return_message autoreply boolean false
19542 If this is set, a copy of the original message is returned with the new
19543 message, subject to the maximum size set in the &%return_size_limit%& global
19544 configuration option.
19547 .option subject autoreply string&!! unset
19548 This specifies the contents of the &'Subject:'& header when the message is
19549 specified by the transport. It is tempting to quote the original subject in
19550 automatic responses. For example:
19552 subject = Re: $h_subject:
19554 There is a danger in doing this, however. It may allow a third party to
19555 subscribe your users to an opt-in mailing list, provided that the list accepts
19556 bounce messages as subscription confirmations. Well-managed lists require a
19557 non-bounce message to confirm a subscription, so the danger is relatively
19562 .option text autoreply string&!! unset
19563 This specifies a single string to be used as the body of the message when the
19564 message is specified by the transport. If both &%text%& and &%file%& are set,
19565 the text comes first.
19568 .option to autoreply string&!! unset
19569 This specifies recipients of the message and the contents of the &'To:'& header
19570 when the message is specified by the transport.
19575 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19576 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19578 .chapter "The lmtp transport" "CHAPLMTP"
19579 .cindex "transports" "&(lmtp)&"
19580 .cindex "&(lmtp)& transport"
19581 .cindex "LMTP" "over a pipe"
19582 .cindex "LMTP" "over a socket"
19583 The &(lmtp)& transport runs the LMTP protocol (RFC 2033) over a pipe to a
19585 or by interacting with a Unix domain socket.
19586 This transport is something of a cross between the &(pipe)& and &(smtp)&
19587 transports. Exim also has support for using LMTP over TCP/IP; this is
19588 implemented as an option for the &(smtp)& transport. Because LMTP is expected
19589 to be of minority interest, the default build-time configure in &_src/EDITME_&
19590 has it commented out. You need to ensure that
19594 .cindex "options" "&(lmtp)& transport"
19595 is present in your &_Local/Makefile_& in order to have the &(lmtp)& transport
19596 included in the Exim binary. The private options of the &(lmtp)& transport are
19599 .option batch_id lmtp string&!! unset
19600 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
19603 .option batch_max lmtp integer 1
19604 This limits the number of addresses that can be handled in a single delivery.
19605 Most LMTP servers can handle several addresses at once, so it is normally a
19606 good idea to increase this value. See the description of local delivery
19607 batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
19610 .option command lmtp string&!! unset
19611 This option must be set if &%socket%& is not set. The string is a command which
19612 is run in a separate process. It is split up into a command name and list of
19613 arguments, each of which is separately expanded (so expansion cannot change the
19614 number of arguments). The command is run directly, not via a shell. The message
19615 is passed to the new process using the standard input and output to operate the
19619 .option ignore_quota lmtp boolean false
19620 .cindex "LMTP" "ignoring quota errors"
19621 If this option is set true, the string &`IGNOREQUOTA`& is added to RCPT
19622 commands, provided that the LMTP server has advertised support for IGNOREQUOTA
19623 in its response to the LHLO command.
19626 .option socket lmtp string&!! unset
19627 This option must be set if &%command%& is not set. The result of expansion must
19628 be the name of a Unix domain socket. The transport connects to the socket and
19629 delivers the message to it using the LMTP protocol.
19632 .option timeout lmtp time 5m
19633 The transport is aborted if the created process
19634 or Unix domain socket
19635 does not respond to LMTP commands or message input within this timeout.
19638 Here is an example of a typical LMTP transport:
19642 command = /some/local/lmtp/delivery/program
19646 This delivers up to 20 addresses at a time, in a mixture of domains if
19647 necessary, running as the user &'exim'&.
19651 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19652 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19654 .chapter "The pipe transport" "CHAPpipetransport"
19655 .cindex "transports" "&(pipe)&"
19656 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport"
19657 The &(pipe)& transport is used to deliver messages via a pipe to a command
19658 running in another process. One example is the use of &(pipe)& as a
19659 pseudo-remote transport for passing messages to some other delivery mechanism
19660 (such as UUCP). Another is the use by individual users to automatically process
19661 their incoming messages. The &(pipe)& transport can be used in one of the
19665 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
19666 A router routes one address to a transport in the normal way, and the
19667 transport is configured as a &(pipe)& transport. In this case, &$local_part$&
19668 contains the local part of the address (as usual), and the command that is run
19669 is specified by the &%command%& option on the transport.
19671 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
19672 If the &%batch_max%& option is set greater than 1 (the default), the transport
19673 can be called upon to handle more than one address in a single run. In this
19674 case, &$local_part$& is not set (because it is not unique). However, the
19675 pseudo-variable &$pipe_addresses$& (described in section
19676 &<<SECThowcommandrun>>& below) contains all the addresses that are being
19679 .cindex "&$address_pipe$&"
19680 A router redirects an address directly to a pipe command (for example, from an
19681 alias or forward file). In this case, &$local_part$& contains the local part
19682 that was redirected, and &$address_pipe$& contains the text of the pipe
19683 command itself. The &%command%& option on the transport is ignored.
19687 The &(pipe)& transport is a non-interactive delivery method. Exim can also
19688 deliver messages over pipes using the LMTP interactive protocol. This is
19689 implemented by the &(lmtp)& transport.
19691 In the case when &(pipe)& is run as a consequence of an entry in a local user's
19692 &_.forward_& file, the command runs under the uid and gid of that user. In
19693 other cases, the uid and gid have to be specified explicitly, either on the
19694 transport or on the router that handles the address. Current and &"home"&
19695 directories are also controllable. See chapter &<<CHAPenvironment>>& for
19696 details of the local delivery environment.
19700 .section "Concurrent delivery"
19701 If two messages arrive at almost the same time, and both are routed to a pipe
19702 delivery, the two pipe transports may be run concurrently. You must ensure that
19703 any pipe commands you set up are robust against this happening. If the commands
19704 write to a file, the &%exim_lock%& utility might be of use.
19709 .section "Returned status and data"
19710 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "returned data"
19711 If the command exits with a non-zero return code, the delivery is deemed to
19712 have failed, unless either the &%ignore_status%& option is set (in which case
19713 the return code is treated as zero), or the return code is one of those listed
19714 in the &%temp_errors%& option, which are interpreted as meaning &"try again
19715 later"&. In this case, delivery is deferred. Details of a permanent failure are
19716 logged, but are not included in the bounce message, which merely contains
19717 &"local delivery failed"&.
19719 If the return code is greater than 128 and the command being run is a shell
19720 script, it normally means that the script was terminated by a signal whose
19721 value is the return code minus 128.
19723 If Exim is unable to run the command (that is, if &[execve()]& fails), the
19724 return code is set to 127. This is the value that a shell returns if it is
19725 asked to run a non-existent command. The wording for the log line suggests that
19726 a non-existent command may be the problem.
19728 The &%return_output%& option can affect the result of a pipe delivery. If it is
19729 set and the command produces any output on its standard output or standard
19730 error streams, the command is considered to have failed, even if it gave a zero
19731 return code or if &%ignore_status%& is set. The output from the command is
19732 included as part of the bounce message. The &%return_fail_output%& option is
19733 similar, except that output is returned only when the command exits with a
19734 failure return code, that is, a value other than zero or a code that matches
19739 .section "How the command is run" "SECThowcommandrun"
19740 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "path for command"
19741 The command line is (by default) broken down into a command name and arguments
19742 by the &(pipe)& transport itself. The &%allow_commands%& and
19743 &%restrict_to_path%& options can be used to restrict the commands that may be
19746 .cindex "quoting" "in pipe command"
19747 Unquoted arguments are delimited by white space. If an argument appears in
19748 double quotes, backslash is interpreted as an escape character in the usual
19749 way. If an argument appears in single quotes, no escaping is done.
19751 String expansion is applied to the command line except when it comes from a
19752 traditional &_.forward_& file (commands from a filter file are expanded). The
19753 expansion is applied to each argument in turn rather than to the whole line.
19754 For this reason, any string expansion item that contains white space must be
19755 quoted so as to be contained within a single argument. A setting such as
19757 command = /some/path ${if eq{$local_part}{postmaster}{xx}{yy}}
19759 will not work, because the expansion item gets split between several
19760 arguments. You have to write
19762 command = /some/path "${if eq{$local_part}{postmaster}{xx}{yy}}"
19764 to ensure that it is all in one argument. The expansion is done in this way,
19765 argument by argument, so that the number of arguments cannot be changed as a
19766 result of expansion, and quotes or backslashes in inserted variables do not
19767 interact with external quoting.
19769 .cindex "transport" "filter"
19770 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
19771 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
19772 Special handling takes place when an argument consists of precisely the text
19773 &`$pipe_addresses`&. This is not a general expansion variable; the only
19774 place this string is recognized is when it appears as an argument for a pipe or
19775 transport filter command. It causes each address that is being handled to be
19776 inserted in the argument list at that point &'as a separate argument'&. This
19777 avoids any problems with spaces or shell metacharacters, and is of use when a
19778 &(pipe)& transport is handling groups of addresses in a batch.
19780 After splitting up into arguments and expansion, the resulting command is run
19781 in a subprocess directly from the transport, &'not'& under a shell. The
19782 message that is being delivered is supplied on the standard input, and the
19783 standard output and standard error are both connected to a single pipe that is
19784 read by Exim. The &%max_output%& option controls how much output the command
19785 may produce, and the &%return_output%& and &%return_fail_output%& options
19786 control what is done with it.
19788 Not running the command under a shell (by default) lessens the security risks
19789 in cases when a command from a user's filter file is built out of data that was
19790 taken from an incoming message. If a shell is required, it can of course be
19791 explicitly specified as the command to be run. However, there are circumstances
19792 where existing commands (for example, in &_.forward_& files) expect to be run
19793 under a shell and cannot easily be modified. To allow for these cases, there is
19794 an option called &%use_shell%&, which changes the way the &(pipe)& transport
19795 works. Instead of breaking up the command line as just described, it expands it
19796 as a single string and passes the result to &_/bin/sh_&. The
19797 &%restrict_to_path%& option and the &$pipe_addresses$& facility cannot be used
19798 with &%use_shell%&, and the whole mechanism is inherently less secure.
19802 .section "Environment variables" "SECTpipeenv"
19803 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "environment for command"
19804 .cindex "environment for pipe transport"
19805 The environment variables listed below are set up when the command is invoked.
19806 This list is a compromise for maximum compatibility with other MTAs. Note that
19807 the &%environment%& option can be used to add additional variables to this
19810 &`DOMAIN `& the domain of the address
19811 &`HOME `& the home directory, if set
19812 &`HOST `& the host name when called from a router (see below)
19813 &`LOCAL_PART `& see below
19814 &`LOCAL_PART_PREFIX `& see below
19815 &`LOCAL_PART_SUFFIX `& see below
19816 &`LOGNAME `& see below
19817 &`MESSAGE_ID `& Exim's local ID for the message
19818 &`PATH `& as specified by the &%path%& option below
19819 &`QUALIFY_DOMAIN `& the sender qualification domain
19820 &`RECIPIENT `& the complete recipient address
19821 &`SENDER `& the sender of the message (empty if a bounce)
19822 &`SHELL `& &`/bin/sh`&
19823 &`TZ `& the value of the &%timezone%& option, if set
19824 &`USER `& see below
19826 When a &(pipe)& transport is called directly from (for example) an &(accept)&
19827 router, LOCAL_PART is set to the local part of the address. When it is
19828 called as a result of a forward or alias expansion, LOCAL_PART is set to
19829 the local part of the address that was expanded. In both cases, any affixes are
19830 removed from the local part, and made available in LOCAL_PART_PREFIX and
19831 LOCAL_PART_SUFFIX, respectively. LOGNAME and USER are set to the
19832 same value as LOCAL_PART for compatibility with other MTAs.
19835 HOST is set only when a &(pipe)& transport is called from a router that
19836 associates hosts with an address, typically when using &(pipe)& as a
19837 pseudo-remote transport. HOST is set to the first host name specified by
19841 If the transport's generic &%home_directory%& option is set, its value is used
19842 for the HOME environment variable. Otherwise, a home directory may be set
19843 by the router's &%transport_home_directory%& option, which defaults to the
19844 user's home directory if &%check_local_user%& is set.
19847 .section "Private options for pipe"
19848 .cindex "options" "&(pipe)& transport"
19852 .option allow_commands pipe "string list&!!" unset
19853 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "permitted commands"
19854 The string is expanded, and is then interpreted as a colon-separated list of
19855 permitted commands. If &%restrict_to_path%& is not set, the only commands
19856 permitted are those in the &%allow_commands%& list. They need not be absolute
19857 paths; the &%path%& option is still used for relative paths. If
19858 &%restrict_to_path%& is set with &%allow_commands%&, the command must either be
19859 in the &%allow_commands%& list, or a name without any slashes that is found on
19860 the path. In other words, if neither &%allow_commands%& nor
19861 &%restrict_to_path%& is set, there is no restriction on the command, but
19862 otherwise only commands that are permitted by one or the other are allowed. For
19865 allow_commands = /usr/bin/vacation
19867 and &%restrict_to_path%& is not set, the only permitted command is
19868 &_/usr/bin/vacation_&. The &%allow_commands%& option may not be set if
19869 &%use_shell%& is set.
19872 .option batch_id pipe string&!! unset
19873 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
19876 .option batch_max pipe integer 1
19877 This limits the number of addresses that can be handled in a single delivery.
19878 See the description of local delivery batching in chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>&.
19881 .option check_string pipe string unset
19882 As &(pipe)& writes the message, the start of each line is tested for matching
19883 &%check_string%&, and if it does, the initial matching characters are replaced
19884 by the contents of &%escape_string%&, provided both are set. The value of
19885 &%check_string%& is a literal string, not a regular expression, and the case of
19886 any letters it contains is significant. When &%use_bsmtp%& is set, the contents
19887 of &%check_string%& and &%escape_string%& are forced to values that implement
19888 the SMTP escaping protocol. Any settings made in the configuration file are
19892 .option command pipe string&!! unset
19893 This option need not be set when &(pipe)& is being used to deliver to pipes
19894 obtained directly from address redirections. In other cases, the option must be
19895 set, to provide a command to be run. It need not yield an absolute path (see
19896 the &%path%& option below). The command is split up into separate arguments by
19897 Exim, and each argument is separately expanded, as described in section
19898 &<<SECThowcommandrun>>& above.
19901 .option environment pipe string&!! unset
19902 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "environment for command"
19903 .cindex "environment for &(pipe)& transport"
19904 This option is used to add additional variables to the environment in which the
19905 command runs (see section &<<SECTpipeenv>>& for the default list). Its value is
19906 a string which is expanded, and then interpreted as a colon-separated list of
19907 environment settings of the form <&'name'&>=<&'value'&>.
19910 .option escape_string pipe string unset
19911 See &%check_string%& above.
19914 .option freeze_exec_fail pipe boolean false
19915 .cindex "exec failure"
19916 .cindex "failure of exec"
19917 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "failure of exec"
19918 Failure to exec the command in a pipe transport is by default treated like
19919 any other failure while running the command. However, if &%freeze_exec_fail%&
19920 is set, failure to exec is treated specially, and causes the message to be
19921 frozen, whatever the setting of &%ignore_status%&.
19924 .option ignore_status pipe boolean false
19925 If this option is true, the status returned by the subprocess that is set up to
19926 run the command is ignored, and Exim behaves as if zero had been returned.
19927 Otherwise, a non-zero status or termination by signal causes an error return
19928 from the transport unless the status value is one of those listed in
19929 &%temp_errors%&; these cause the delivery to be deferred and tried again later.
19932 &*Note*&: This option does not apply to timeouts, which do not return a status.
19933 See the &%timeout_defer%& option for how timeouts are handled.
19936 .option log_defer_output pipe boolean false
19937 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "logging output"
19938 If this option is set, and the status returned by the command is
19939 one of the codes listed in &%temp_errors%& (that is, delivery was deferred),
19940 and any output was produced, the first line of it is written to the main log.
19943 .option log_fail_output pipe boolean false
19944 If this option is set, and the command returns any output, and also ends with a
19945 return code that is neither zero nor one of the return codes listed in
19946 &%temp_errors%& (that is, the delivery failed), the first line of output is
19947 written to the main log. This option and &%log_output%& are mutually exclusive.
19948 Only one of them may be set.
19952 .option log_output pipe boolean false
19953 If this option is set and the command returns any output, the first line of
19954 output is written to the main log, whatever the return code. This option and
19955 &%log_fail_output%& are mutually exclusive. Only one of them may be set.
19959 .option max_output pipe integer 20K
19960 This specifies the maximum amount of output that the command may produce on its
19961 standard output and standard error file combined. If the limit is exceeded, the
19962 process running the command is killed. This is intended as a safety measure to
19963 catch runaway processes. The limit is applied independently of the settings of
19964 the options that control what is done with such output (for example,
19965 &%return_output%&). Because of buffering effects, the amount of output may
19966 exceed the limit by a small amount before Exim notices.
19969 .option message_prefix pipe string&!! "see below"
19970 The string specified here is expanded and output at the start of every message.
19971 The default is unset if &%use_bsmtp%& is set. Otherwise it is
19974 From ${if def:return_path{$return_path}{MAILER-DAEMON}}\
19978 .cindex "&%tmail%&"
19979 .cindex "&""From""& line"
19980 This is required by the commonly used &_/usr/bin/vacation_& program.
19981 However, it must &'not'& be present if delivery is to the Cyrus IMAP server,
19982 or to the &%tmail%& local delivery agent. The prefix can be suppressed by
19988 .option message_suffix pipe string&!! "see below"
19989 The string specified here is expanded and output at the end of every message.
19990 The default is unset if &%use_bsmtp%& is set. Otherwise it is a single newline.
19991 The suffix can be suppressed by setting
19996 .option path pipe string &`/bin:/usr/bin`&
19997 This option specifies the string that is set up in the PATH environment
19998 variable of the subprocess. If the &%command%& option does not yield an
19999 absolute path name, the command is sought in the PATH directories, in the usual
20000 way. &*Warning*&: This does not apply to a command specified as a transport
20004 .option pipe_as_creator pipe boolean false
20005 .cindex "uid (user id)" "local delivery"
20006 If the generic &%user%& option is not set and this option is true, the delivery
20007 process is run under the uid that was in force when Exim was originally called
20008 to accept the message. If the group id is not otherwise set (via the generic
20009 &%group%& option), the gid that was in force when Exim was originally called to
20010 accept the message is used.
20013 .option restrict_to_path pipe boolean false
20014 When this option is set, any command name not listed in &%allow_commands%& must
20015 contain no slashes. The command is searched for only in the directories listed
20016 in the &%path%& option. This option is intended for use in the case when a pipe
20017 command has been generated from a user's &_.forward_& file. This is usually
20018 handled by a &(pipe)& transport called &%address_pipe%&.
20021 .option return_fail_output pipe boolean false
20022 If this option is true, and the command produced any output and ended with a
20023 return code other than zero or one of the codes listed in &%temp_errors%& (that
20024 is, the delivery failed), the output is returned in the bounce message.
20025 However, if the message has a null sender (that is, it is itself a bounce
20026 message), output from the command is discarded. This option and
20027 &%return_output%& are mutually exclusive. Only one of them may be set.
20031 .option return_output pipe boolean false
20032 If this option is true, and the command produced any output, the delivery is
20033 deemed to have failed whatever the return code from the command, and the output
20034 is returned in the bounce message. Otherwise, the output is just discarded.
20035 However, if the message has a null sender (that is, it is a bounce message),
20036 output from the command is always discarded, whatever the setting of this
20037 option. This option and &%return_fail_output%& are mutually exclusive. Only one
20038 of them may be set.
20042 .option temp_errors pipe "string list" "see below"
20043 .cindex "&(pipe)& transport" "temporary failure"
20044 This option contains either a colon-separated list of numbers, or a single
20045 asterisk. If &%ignore_status%& is false
20046 and &%return_output%& is not set,
20047 and the command exits with a non-zero return code, the failure is treated as
20048 temporary and the delivery is deferred if the return code matches one of the
20049 numbers, or if the setting is a single asterisk. Otherwise, non-zero return
20050 codes are treated as permanent errors. The default setting contains the codes
20051 defined by EX_TEMPFAIL and EX_CANTCREAT in &_sysexits.h_&. If Exim is
20052 compiled on a system that does not define these macros, it assumes values of 75
20053 and 73, respectively.
20056 .option timeout pipe time 1h
20057 If the command fails to complete within this time, it is killed. This normally
20058 causes the delivery to fail (but see &%timeout_defer%&). A zero time interval
20059 specifies no timeout. In order to ensure that any subprocesses created by the
20060 command are also killed, Exim makes the initial process a process group leader,
20061 and kills the whole process group on a timeout. However, this can be defeated
20062 if one of the processes starts a new process group.
20065 .option timeout_defer pipe boolean false
20066 A timeout in a &(pipe)& transport, either in the command that the transport
20067 runs, or in a transport filter that is associated with it, is by default
20068 treated as a hard error, and the delivery fails. However, if &%timeout_defer%&
20069 is set true, both kinds of timeout become temporary errors, causing the
20070 delivery to be deferred.
20073 .option umask pipe "octal integer" 022
20074 This specifies the umask setting for the subprocess that runs the command.
20077 .option use_bsmtp pipe boolean false
20078 .cindex "envelope sender"
20079 If this option is set true, the &(pipe)& transport writes messages in &"batch
20080 SMTP"& format, with the envelope sender and recipient(s) included as SMTP
20081 commands. If you want to include a leading HELO command with such messages,
20082 you can do so by setting the &%message_prefix%& option. See section
20083 &<<SECTbatchSMTP>>& for details of batch SMTP.
20086 .option use_crlf pipe boolean false
20087 .cindex "carriage return"
20089 This option causes lines to be terminated with the two-character CRLF sequence
20090 (carriage return, linefeed) instead of just a linefeed character. In the case
20091 of batched SMTP, the byte sequence written to the pipe is then an exact image
20092 of what would be sent down a real SMTP connection.
20094 The contents of the &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%& options are
20095 written verbatim, so must contain their own carriage return characters if these
20096 are needed. Since the default values for both &%message_prefix%& and
20097 &%message_suffix%& end with a single linefeed, their values must be changed to
20098 end with &`\r\n`& if &%use_crlf%& is set.
20101 .option use_shell pipe boolean false
20102 .cindex "&$pipe_addresses$&"
20103 If this option is set, it causes the command to be passed to &_/bin/sh_&
20104 instead of being run directly from the transport, as described in section
20105 &<<SECThowcommandrun>>&. This is less secure, but is needed in some situations
20106 where the command is expected to be run under a shell and cannot easily be
20107 modified. The &%allow_commands%& and &%restrict_to_path%& options, and the
20108 &`$pipe_addresses`& facility are incompatible with &%use_shell%&. The
20109 command is expanded as a single string, and handed to &_/bin/sh_& as data for
20114 .section "Using an external local delivery agent"
20115 .cindex "local delivery" "using an external agent"
20116 .cindex "&'procmail'&"
20117 .cindex "external local delivery"
20118 .cindex "delivery" "&'procmail'&"
20119 .cindex "delivery" "by external agent"
20120 The &(pipe)& transport can be used to pass all messages that require local
20121 delivery to a separate local delivery agent such as &%procmail%&. When doing
20122 this, care must be taken to ensure that the pipe is run under an appropriate
20123 uid and gid. In some configurations one wants this to be a uid that is trusted
20124 by the delivery agent to supply the correct sender of the message. It may be
20125 necessary to recompile or reconfigure the delivery agent so that it trusts an
20126 appropriate user. The following is an example transport and router
20127 configuration for &%procmail%&:
20132 command = /usr/local/bin/procmail -d $local_part
20136 check_string = "From "
20137 escape_string = ">From "
20145 transport = procmail_pipe
20147 In this example, the pipe is run as the local user, but with the group set to
20148 &'mail'&. An alternative is to run the pipe as a specific user such as &'mail'&
20149 or &'exim'&, but in this case you must arrange for &%procmail%& to trust that
20150 user to supply a correct sender address. If you do not specify either a
20151 &%group%& or a &%user%& option, the pipe command is run as the local user. The
20152 home directory is the user's home directory by default.
20154 &*Note*&: The command that the pipe transport runs does &'not'& begin with
20158 as shown in some &%procmail%& documentation, because Exim does not by default
20159 use a shell to run pipe commands.
20162 The next example shows a transport and a router for a system where local
20163 deliveries are handled by the Cyrus IMAP server.
20166 local_delivery_cyrus:
20168 command = /usr/cyrus/bin/deliver \
20169 -m ${substr_1:$local_part_suffix} -- $local_part
20181 local_part_suffix = .*
20182 transport = local_delivery_cyrus
20184 Note the unsetting of &%message_prefix%& and &%message_suffix%&, and the use of
20185 &%return_output%& to cause any text written by Cyrus to be returned to the
20189 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20190 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20192 .chapter "The smtp transport" "CHAPsmtptrans"
20193 .cindex "transports" "&(smtp)&"
20194 .cindex "&(smtp)& transport"
20195 The &(smtp)& transport delivers messages over TCP/IP connections using the SMTP
20196 or LMTP protocol. The list of hosts to try can either be taken from the address
20197 that is being processed (having been set up by the router), or specified
20198 explicitly for the transport. Timeout and retry processing (see chapter
20199 &<<CHAPretry>>&) is applied to each IP address independently.
20202 .section "Multiple messages on a single connection"
20203 The sending of multiple messages over a single TCP/IP connection can arise in
20207 If a message contains more than &%max_rcpt%& (see below) addresses that are
20208 routed to the same host, more than one copy of the message has to be sent to
20209 that host. In this situation, multiple copies may be sent in a single run of
20210 the &(smtp)& transport over a single TCP/IP connection. (What Exim actually
20211 does when it has too many addresses to send in one message also depends on the
20212 value of the global &%remote_max_parallel%& option. Details are given in
20213 section &<<SECToutSMTPTCP>>&.)
20215 .cindex "hints database" "remembering routing"
20216 When a message has been successfully delivered over a TCP/IP connection, Exim
20217 looks in its hints database to see if there are any other messages awaiting a
20218 connection to the same host. If there are, a new delivery process is started
20219 for one of them, and the current TCP/IP connection is passed on to it. The new
20220 process may in turn send multiple copies and possibly create yet another
20225 For each copy sent over the same TCP/IP connection, a sequence counter is
20226 incremented, and if it ever gets to the value of &%connection_max_messages%&,
20227 no further messages are sent over that connection.
20231 .section "Use of the $host variable"
20233 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20234 At the start of a run of the &(smtp)& transport, the values of &$host$& and
20235 &$host_address$& are the name and IP address of the first host on the host list
20236 passed by the router. However, when the transport is about to connect to a
20237 specific host, and while it is connected to that host, &$host$& and
20238 &$host_address$& are set to the values for that host. These are the values
20239 that are in force when the &%helo_data%&, &%hosts_try_auth%&, &%interface%&,
20240 &%serialize_hosts%&, and the various TLS options are expanded.
20244 .section "Private options for smtp"
20245 .cindex "options" "&(smtp)& transport"
20246 The private options of the &(smtp)& transport are as follows:
20249 .option allow_localhost smtp boolean false
20250 .cindex "local host" "sending to"
20251 .cindex "fallback" "hosts specified on transport"
20252 When a host specified in &%hosts%& or &%fallback_hosts%& (see below) turns out
20253 to be the local host, or is listed in &%hosts_treat_as_local%&, delivery is
20254 deferred by default. However, if &%allow_localhost%& is set, Exim goes on to do
20255 the delivery anyway. This should be used only in special cases when the
20256 configuration ensures that no looping will result (for example, a differently
20257 configured Exim is listening on the port to which the message is sent).
20260 .option authenticated_sender smtp string&!! unset
20262 When Exim has authenticated as a client, this option sets a value for the
20263 AUTH= item on outgoing MAIL commands, overriding any existing
20264 authenticated sender value. If the string expansion is forced to fail, the
20265 option is ignored. Other expansion failures cause delivery to be deferred. If
20266 the result of expansion is an empty string, that is also ignored.
20268 If the SMTP session is not authenticated, the expansion of
20269 &%authenticated_sender%& still happens (and can cause the delivery to be
20270 deferred if it fails), but no AUTH= item is added to MAIL commands.
20272 This option allows you to use the &(smtp)& transport in LMTP mode to
20273 deliver mail to Cyrus IMAP and provide the proper local part as the
20274 &"authenticated sender"&, via a setting such as:
20276 authenticated_sender = $local_part
20278 This removes the need for IMAP subfolders to be assigned special ACLs to
20279 allow direct delivery to those subfolders.
20281 Because of expected uses such as that just described for Cyrus (when no
20282 domain is involved), there is no checking on the syntax of the provided
20286 .option command_timeout smtp time 5m
20287 This sets a timeout for receiving a response to an SMTP command that has been
20288 sent out. It is also used when waiting for the initial banner line from the
20289 remote host. Its value must not be zero.
20292 .option connect_timeout smtp time 5m
20293 This sets a timeout for the &[connect()]& function, which sets up a TCP/IP call
20294 to a remote host. A setting of zero allows the system timeout (typically
20295 several minutes) to act. To have any effect, the value of this option must be
20296 less than the system timeout. However, it has been observed that on some
20297 systems there is no system timeout, which is why the default value for this
20298 option is 5 minutes, a value recommended by RFC 1123.
20301 .option connection_max_messages smtp integer 500
20302 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
20303 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
20304 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
20305 This controls the maximum number of separate message deliveries that are sent
20306 over a single TCP/IP connection. If the value is zero, there is no limit.
20307 For testing purposes, this value can be overridden by the &%-oB%& command line
20311 .option data_timeout smtp time 5m
20312 This sets a timeout for the transmission of each block in the data portion of
20313 the message. As a result, the overall timeout for a message depends on the size
20314 of the message. Its value must not be zero. See also &%final_timeout%&.
20317 .option delay_after_cutoff smtp boolean true
20318 This option controls what happens when all remote IP addresses for a given
20319 domain have been inaccessible for so long that they have passed their retry
20322 In the default state, if the next retry time has not been reached for any of
20323 them, the address is bounced without trying any deliveries. In other words,
20324 Exim delays retrying an IP address after the final cutoff time until a new
20325 retry time is reached, and can therefore bounce an address without ever trying
20326 a delivery, when machines have been down for a long time. Some people are
20327 unhappy at this prospect, so...
20329 If &%delay_after_cutoff%& is set false, Exim behaves differently. If all IP
20330 addresses are past their final cutoff time, Exim tries to deliver to those
20331 IP addresses that have not been tried since the message arrived. If there are
20332 none, of if they all fail, the address is bounced. In other words, it does not
20333 delay when a new message arrives, but immediately tries those expired IP
20334 addresses that haven't been tried since the message arrived. If there is a
20335 continuous stream of messages for the dead hosts, unsetting
20336 &%delay_after_cutoff%& means that there will be many more attempts to deliver
20340 .option dns_qualify_single smtp boolean true
20341 If the &%hosts%& or &%fallback_hosts%& option is being used,
20342 and the &%gethostbyname%& option is false,
20343 the RES_DEFNAMES resolver option is set. See the &%qualify_single%& option
20344 in chapter &<<CHAPdnslookup>>& for more details.
20347 .option dns_search_parents smtp boolean false
20348 .cindex "&%search_parents%&"
20349 If the &%hosts%& or &%fallback_hosts%& option is being used, and the
20350 &%gethostbyname%& option is false, the RES_DNSRCH resolver option is set.
20351 See the &%search_parents%& option in chapter &<<CHAPdnslookup>>& for more
20356 .option fallback_hosts smtp "string list" unset
20358 .cindex "fallback" "hosts specified on transport"
20359 String expansion is not applied to this option. The argument must be a
20360 colon-separated list of host names or IP addresses, optionally also including
20361 port numbers, though the separator can be changed, as described in section
20362 &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&. Each individual item in the list is the same as an
20363 item in a &%route_list%& setting for the &(manualroute)& router, as described
20364 in section &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&.
20367 Fallback hosts can also be specified on routers, which associate them with the
20368 addresses they process. As for the &%hosts%& option without &%hosts_override%&,
20369 &%fallback_hosts%& specified on the transport is used only if the address does
20370 not have its own associated fallback host list. Unlike &%hosts%&, a setting of
20371 &%fallback_hosts%& on an address is not overridden by &%hosts_override%&.
20372 However, &%hosts_randomize%& does apply to fallback host lists.
20374 If Exim is unable to deliver to any of the hosts for a particular address, and
20375 the errors are not permanent rejections, the address is put on a separate
20376 transport queue with its host list replaced by the fallback hosts, unless the
20377 address was routed via MX records and the current host was in the original MX
20378 list. In that situation, the fallback host list is not used.
20380 Once normal deliveries are complete, the fallback queue is delivered by
20381 re-running the same transports with the new host lists. If several failing
20382 addresses have the same fallback hosts (and &%max_rcpt%& permits it), a single
20383 copy of the message is sent.
20385 The resolution of the host names on the fallback list is controlled by the
20386 &%gethostbyname%& option, as for the &%hosts%& option. Fallback hosts apply
20387 both to cases when the host list comes with the address and when it is taken
20388 from &%hosts%&. This option provides a &"use a smart host only if delivery
20392 .option final_timeout smtp time 10m
20393 This is the timeout that applies while waiting for the response to the final
20394 line containing just &"."& that terminates a message. Its value must not be
20398 .option gethostbyname smtp boolean false
20399 If this option is true when the &%hosts%& and/or &%fallback_hosts%& options are
20400 being used, names are looked up using &[gethostbyname()]&
20401 (or &[getipnodebyname()]& when available)
20402 instead of using the DNS. Of course, that function may in fact use the DNS, but
20403 it may also consult other sources of information such as &_/etc/hosts_&.
20405 .option helo_data smtp string&!! &`$primary_hostname`&
20406 .cindex "HELO argument" "setting"
20407 .cindex "EHLO argument" "setting"
20409 The value of this option is expanded, and used as the argument for the EHLO or
20410 HELO command that starts the outgoing SMTP session. The variables &$host$& and
20411 &$host_address$& are set to the identity of the remote host, and can be used to
20412 generate different values for different servers.
20415 .option hosts smtp "string list&!!" unset
20416 Hosts are associated with an address by a router such as &(dnslookup)&, which
20417 finds the hosts by looking up the address domain in the DNS, or by
20418 &(manualroute)&, which has lists of hosts in its configuration. However,
20419 email addresses can be passed to the &(smtp)& transport by any router, and not
20420 all of them can provide an associated list of hosts.
20422 The &%hosts%& option specifies a list of hosts to be used if the address being
20423 processed does not have any hosts associated with it. The hosts specified by
20424 &%hosts%& are also used, whether or not the address has its own hosts, if
20425 &%hosts_override%& is set.
20428 The string is first expanded, before being interpreted as a colon-separated
20429 list of host names or IP addresses, possibly including port numbers. The
20430 separator may be changed to something other than colon, as described in section
20431 &<<SECTlistconstruct>>&. Each individual item in the list is the same as an
20432 item in a &%route_list%& setting for the &(manualroute)& router, as described
20433 in section &<<SECTformatonehostitem>>&. However, note that the &`/MX`& facility
20434 of the &(manualroute)& router is not available here.
20437 If the expansion fails, delivery is deferred. Unless the failure was caused by
20438 the inability to complete a lookup, the error is logged to the panic log as
20439 well as the main log. Host names are looked up either by searching directly for
20440 address records in the DNS or by calling &[gethostbyname()]& (or
20441 &[getipnodebyname()]& when available), depending on the setting of the
20442 &%gethostbyname%& option. When Exim is compiled with IPv6 support, if a host
20443 that is looked up in the DNS has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, both types of
20446 During delivery, the hosts are tried in order, subject to their retry status,
20447 unless &%hosts_randomize%& is set.
20450 .option hosts_avoid_esmtp smtp "host list&!!" unset
20451 .cindex "ESMTP" "avoiding use of"
20452 .cindex "HELO" "forcing use of"
20453 .cindex "EHLO" "avoiding use of"
20454 .cindex "PIPELINING" "avoiding the use of"
20455 This option is for use with broken hosts that announce ESMTP facilities (for
20456 example, PIPELINING) and then fail to implement them properly. When a host
20457 matches &%hosts_avoid_esmtp%&, Exim sends HELO rather than EHLO at the
20458 start of the SMTP session. This means that it cannot use any of the ESMTP
20459 facilities such as AUTH, PIPELINING, SIZE, and STARTTLS.
20462 .option hosts_avoid_tls smtp "host list&!!" unset
20463 .cindex "TLS" "avoiding for certain hosts"
20464 Exim will not try to start a TLS session when delivering to any host that
20465 matches this list. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20468 .option hosts_max_try smtp integer 5
20469 .cindex "host" "maximum number to try"
20470 .cindex "limit" "number of hosts tried"
20471 .cindex "limit" "number of MX tried"
20472 .cindex "MX record" "maximum tried"
20473 This option limits the number of IP addresses that are tried for any one
20474 delivery in cases where there are temporary delivery errors. Section
20475 &<<SECTvalhosmax>>& describes in detail how the value of this option is used.
20478 .option hosts_max_try_hardlimit smtp integer 50
20479 This is an additional check on the maximum number of IP addresses that Exim
20480 tries for any one delivery. Section &<<SECTvalhosmax>>& describes its use and
20485 .option hosts_nopass_tls smtp "host list&!!" unset
20486 .cindex "TLS" "passing connection"
20487 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
20488 .cindex "TLS" "multiple message deliveries"
20489 For any host that matches this list, a connection on which a TLS session has
20490 been started will not be passed to a new delivery process for sending another
20491 message on the same connection. See section &<<SECTmulmessam>>& for an
20492 explanation of when this might be needed.
20495 .option hosts_override smtp boolean false
20496 If this option is set and the &%hosts%& option is also set, any hosts that are
20497 attached to the address are ignored, and instead the hosts specified by the
20498 &%hosts%& option are always used. This option does not apply to
20499 &%fallback_hosts%&.
20502 .option hosts_randomize smtp boolean false
20503 .cindex "randomized host list"
20504 .cindex "host" "list of; randomized"
20505 .cindex "fallback" "randomized hosts"
20506 If this option is set, and either the list of hosts is taken from the
20507 &%hosts%& or the &%fallback_hosts%& option, or the hosts supplied by the router
20508 were not obtained from MX records (this includes fallback hosts from the
20509 router), and were not randomizied by the router, the order of trying the hosts
20510 is randomized each time the transport runs. Randomizing the order of a host
20511 list can be used to do crude load sharing.
20513 When &%hosts_randomize%& is true, a host list may be split into groups whose
20514 order is separately randomized. This makes it possible to set up MX-like
20515 behaviour. The boundaries between groups are indicated by an item that is just
20516 &`+`& in the host list. For example:
20518 hosts = host1:host2:host3:+:host4:host5
20520 The order of the first three hosts and the order of the last two hosts is
20521 randomized for each use, but the first three always end up before the last two.
20522 If &%hosts_randomize%& is not set, a &`+`& item in the list is ignored.
20524 .option hosts_require_auth smtp "host list&!!" unset
20525 .cindex "authentication" "required by client"
20526 This option provides a list of servers for which authentication must succeed
20527 before Exim will try to transfer a message. If authentication fails for
20528 servers which are not in this list, Exim tries to send unauthenticated. If
20529 authentication fails for one of these servers, delivery is deferred. This
20530 temporary error is detectable in the retry rules, so it can be turned into a
20531 hard failure if required. See also &%hosts_try_auth%&, and chapter
20532 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details of authentication.
20535 .option hosts_require_tls smtp "host list&!!" unset
20536 .cindex "TLS" "requiring for certain servers"
20537 Exim will insist on using a TLS session when delivering to any host that
20538 matches this list. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20539 &*Note*&: This option affects outgoing mail only. To insist on TLS for
20540 incoming messages, use an appropriate ACL.
20542 .option hosts_try_auth smtp "host list&!!" unset
20543 .cindex "authentication" "optional in client"
20544 This option provides a list of servers to which, provided they announce
20545 authentication support, Exim will attempt to authenticate as a client when it
20546 connects. If authentication fails, Exim will try to transfer the message
20547 unauthenticated. See also &%hosts_require_auth%&, and chapter
20548 &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>& for details of authentication.
20550 .option interface smtp "string list&!!" unset
20551 .cindex "bind IP address"
20552 .cindex "IP address" "binding"
20554 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20555 This option specifies which interface to bind to when making an outgoing SMTP
20556 call. The variables &$host$& and &$host_address$& refer to the host to which a
20557 connection is about to be made during the expansion of the string. Forced
20558 expansion failure, or an empty string result causes the option to be ignored.
20559 Otherwise, after expansion,
20560 the string must be a list of IP addresses, colon-separated by default, but the
20561 separator can be changed in the usual way.
20564 interface = <; 192.168.123.123 ; 3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061
20566 The first interface of the correct type (IPv4 or IPv6) is used for the outgoing
20567 connection. If none of them are the correct type, the option is ignored. If
20568 &%interface%& is not set, or is ignored, the system's IP functions choose which
20569 interface to use if the host has more than one.
20572 .option keepalive smtp boolean true
20573 .cindex "keepalive" "on outgoing connection"
20574 This option controls the setting of SO_KEEPALIVE on outgoing TCP/IP socket
20575 connections. When set, it causes the kernel to probe idle connections
20576 periodically, by sending packets with &"old"& sequence numbers. The other end
20577 of the connection should send a acknowledgement if the connection is still okay
20578 or a reset if the connection has been aborted. The reason for doing this is
20579 that it has the beneficial effect of freeing up certain types of connection
20580 that can get stuck when the remote host is disconnected without tidying up the
20581 TCP/IP call properly. The keepalive mechanism takes several hours to detect
20586 .option lmtp_ignore_quota smtp boolean false
20587 .cindex "LMTP" "ignoring quota errors"
20588 If this option is set true when the &%protocol%& option is set to &"lmtp"&, the
20589 string &`IGNOREQUOTA`& is added to RCPT commands, provided that the LMTP server
20590 has advertised support for IGNOREQUOTA in its response to the LHLO command.
20593 .option max_rcpt smtp integer 100
20594 .cindex "RCPT" "maximum number of outgoing"
20595 This option limits the number of RCPT commands that are sent in a single
20596 SMTP message transaction. Each set of addresses is treated independently, and
20597 so can cause parallel connections to the same host if &%remote_max_parallel%&
20601 .option multi_domain smtp boolean true
20602 .cindex "&$domain$&"
20603 When this option is set, the &(smtp)& transport can handle a number of
20604 addresses containing a mixture of different domains provided they all resolve
20605 to the same list of hosts. Turning the option off restricts the transport to
20606 handling only one domain at a time. This is useful if you want to use
20607 &$domain$& in an expansion for the transport, because it is set only when there
20608 is a single domain involved in a remote delivery.
20611 .option port smtp string&!! "see below"
20612 .cindex "port" "sending TCP/IP"
20613 .cindex "TCP/IP" "setting outgoing port"
20614 This option specifies the TCP/IP port on the server to which Exim connects. If
20615 it begins with a digit it is taken as a port number; otherwise it is looked up
20616 using &[getservbyname()]&. The default value is normally &"smtp"&, but if
20617 &%protocol%& is set to &"lmtp"&, the default is &"lmtp"&.
20618 If the expansion fails, or if a port number cannot be found, delivery is
20623 .option protocol smtp string smtp
20624 .cindex "LMTP" "over TCP/IP"
20625 If this option is set to &"lmtp"& instead of &"smtp"&, the default value for
20626 the &%port%& option changes to &"lmtp"&, and the transport operates the LMTP
20627 protocol (RFC 2033) instead of SMTP. This protocol is sometimes used for local
20628 deliveries into closed message stores. Exim also has support for running LMTP
20629 over a pipe to a local process &-- see chapter &<<CHAPLMTP>>&.
20632 .option retry_include_ip_address smtp boolean true
20633 Exim normally includes both the host name and the IP address in the key it
20634 constructs for indexing retry data after a temporary delivery failure. This
20635 means that when one of several IP addresses for a host is failing, it gets
20636 tried periodically (controlled by the retry rules), but use of the other IP
20637 addresses is not affected.
20639 However, in some dialup environments hosts are assigned a different IP address
20640 each time they connect. In this situation the use of the IP address as part of
20641 the retry key leads to undesirable behaviour. Setting this option false causes
20642 Exim to use only the host name. This should normally be done on a separate
20643 instance of the &(smtp)& transport, set up specially to handle the dialup
20647 .option serialize_hosts smtp "host list&!!" unset
20648 .cindex "serializing connections"
20649 .cindex "host" "serializing connections"
20650 Because Exim operates in a distributed manner, if several messages for the same
20651 host arrive at around the same time, more than one simultaneous connection to
20652 the remote host can occur. This is not usually a problem except when there is a
20653 slow link between the hosts. In that situation it may be helpful to restrict
20654 Exim to one connection at a time. This can be done by setting
20655 &%serialize_hosts%& to match the relevant hosts.
20657 .cindex "hints database" "serializing deliveries to a host"
20658 Exim implements serialization by means of a hints database in which a record is
20659 written whenever a process connects to one of the restricted hosts. The record
20660 is deleted when the connection is completed. Obviously there is scope for
20661 records to get left lying around if there is a system or program crash. To
20662 guard against this, Exim ignores any records that are more than six hours old.
20664 If you set up this kind of serialization, you should also arrange to delete the
20665 relevant hints database whenever your system reboots. The names of the files
20666 start with &_misc_& and they are kept in the &_spool/db_& directory. There
20667 may be one or two files, depending on the type of DBM in use. The same files
20668 are used for ETRN serialization.
20671 .option size_addition smtp integer 1024
20672 .cindex "SMTP" "SIZE"
20673 .cindex "message" "size issue for transport filter"
20674 .cindex "size" "of message"
20675 .cindex "transport" "filter"
20676 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
20677 If a remote SMTP server indicates that it supports the SIZE option of the
20678 MAIL command, Exim uses this to pass over the message size at the start of
20679 an SMTP transaction. It adds the value of &%size_addition%& to the value it
20680 sends, to allow for headers and other text that may be added during delivery by
20681 configuration options or in a transport filter. It may be necessary to increase
20682 this if a lot of text is added to messages.
20684 Alternatively, if the value of &%size_addition%& is set negative, it disables
20685 the use of the SIZE option altogether.
20688 .option tls_certificate smtp string&!! unset
20689 .cindex "TLS client certificate" "location of"
20690 .cindex "certificate for client" "location of"
20692 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20693 The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file which contains the
20694 client's certificate, for possible use when sending a message over an encrypted
20695 connection. The values of &$host$& and &$host_address$& are set to the name and
20696 address of the server during the expansion. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for
20699 &*Note*&: This option must be set if you want Exim to be able to use a TLS
20700 certificate when sending messages as a client. The global option of the same
20701 name specifies the certificate for Exim as a server; it is not automatically
20702 assumed that the same certificate should be used when Exim is operating as a
20706 .option tls_crl smtp string&!! unset
20707 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate revocation list"
20708 .cindex "certificate" "revocation list for client"
20709 This option specifies a certificate revocation list. The expanded value must
20710 be the name of a file that contains a CRL in PEM format.
20713 .option tls_privatekey smtp string&!! unset
20714 .cindex "TLS client private key" "location of"
20716 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20717 The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file which contains the
20718 client's private key. This is used when sending a message over an encrypted
20719 connection using a client certificate. The values of &$host$& and
20720 &$host_address$& are set to the name and address of the server during the
20721 expansion. If this option is unset, the private key is assumed to be in the
20722 same file as the certificate. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20725 .option tls_require_ciphers smtp string&!! unset
20726 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers"
20727 .cindex "cipher" "requiring specific"
20729 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20730 The value of this option must be a list of permitted cipher suites, for use
20731 when setting up an outgoing encrypted connection. (There is a global option of
20732 the same name for controlling incoming connections.) The values of &$host$& and
20733 &$host_address$& are set to the name and address of the server during the
20734 expansion. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS; note that this option
20735 is used in different ways by OpenSSL and GnuTLS (see sections
20736 &<<SECTreqciphssl>>& and &<<SECTreqciphgnu>>&). For GnuTLS, the order of the
20737 ciphers is a preference order.
20741 .option tls_tempfail_tryclear smtp boolean true
20742 When the server host is not in &%hosts_require_tls%&, and there is a problem in
20743 setting up a TLS session, this option determines whether or not Exim should try
20744 to deliver the message unencrypted. If it is set false, delivery to the
20745 current host is deferred; if there are other hosts, they are tried. If this
20746 option is set true, Exim attempts to deliver unencrypted after a 4&'xx'&
20747 response to STARTTLS. Also, if STARTTLS is accepted, but the subsequent
20748 TLS negotiation fails, Exim closes the current connection (because it is in an
20749 unknown state), opens a new one to the same host, and then tries the delivery
20753 .option tls_verify_certificates smtp string&!! unset
20754 .cindex "TLS" "server certificate verification"
20755 .cindex "certificate" "verification of server"
20757 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
20758 The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file containing
20759 permitted server certificates, for use when setting up an encrypted connection.
20760 Alternatively, if you are using OpenSSL, you can set
20761 &%tls_verify_certificates%& to the name of a directory containing certificate
20762 files. This does not work with GnuTLS; the option must be set to the name of a
20763 single file if you are using GnuTLS. The values of &$host$& and
20764 &$host_address$& are set to the name and address of the server during the
20765 expansion of this option. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for details of TLS.
20770 .section "How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used" &&&
20772 .cindex "host" "maximum number to try"
20773 .cindex "limit" "hosts; maximum number tried"
20774 There are two options that are concerned with the number of hosts that are
20775 tried when an SMTP delivery takes place. They are &%hosts_max_try%& and
20776 &%hosts_max_try_hardlimit%&.
20779 The &%hosts_max_try%& option limits the number of hosts that are tried
20780 for a single delivery. However, despite the term &"host"& in its name, the
20781 option actually applies to each IP address independently. In other words, a
20782 multihomed host is treated as several independent hosts, just as it is for
20785 Many of the larger ISPs have multiple MX records which often point to
20786 multihomed hosts. As a result, a list of a dozen or more IP addresses may be
20787 created as a result of routing one of these domains.
20789 Trying every single IP address on such a long list does not seem sensible; if
20790 several at the top of the list fail, it is reasonable to assume there is some
20791 problem that is likely to affect all of them. Roughly speaking, the value of
20792 &%hosts_max_try%& is the maximum number that are tried before deferring the
20793 delivery. However, the logic cannot be quite that simple.
20795 Firstly, IP addresses that are skipped because their retry times have not
20796 arrived do not count, and in addition, addresses that are past their retry
20797 limits are also not counted, even when they are tried. This means that when
20798 some IP addresses are past their retry limits, more than the value of
20799 &%hosts_max_retry%& may be tried. The reason for this behaviour is to ensure
20800 that all IP addresses are considered before timing out an email address (but
20801 see below for an exception).
20803 Secondly, when the &%hosts_max_try%& limit is reached, Exim looks down the host
20804 list to see if there is a subsequent host with a different (higher valued) MX.
20805 If there is, that host is considered next, and the current IP address is used
20806 but not counted. This behaviour helps in the case of a domain with a retry rule
20807 that hardly ever delays any hosts, as is now explained:
20809 Consider the case of a long list of hosts with one MX value, and a few with a
20810 higher MX value. If &%hosts_max_try%& is small (the default is 5) only a few
20811 hosts at the top of the list are tried at first. With the default retry rule,
20812 which specifies increasing retry times, the higher MX hosts are eventually
20813 tried when those at the top of the list are skipped because they have not
20814 reached their retry times.
20816 However, it is common practice to put a fixed short retry time on domains for
20817 large ISPs, on the grounds that their servers are rarely down for very long.
20818 Unfortunately, these are exactly the domains that tend to resolve to long lists
20819 of hosts. The short retry time means that the lowest MX hosts are tried every
20820 time. The attempts may be in a different order because of random sorting, but
20821 without the special MX check, the higher MX hosts would never be tried until
20822 all the lower MX hosts had timed out (which might be several days), because
20823 there are always some lower MX hosts that have reached their retry times. With
20824 the special check, Exim considers at least one IP address from each MX value at
20825 every delivery attempt, even if the &%hosts_max_try%& limit has already been
20828 The above logic means that &%hosts_max_try%& is not a hard limit, and in
20829 particular, Exim normally eventually tries all the IP addresses before timing
20830 out an email address. When &%hosts_max_try%& was implemented, this seemed a
20831 reasonable thing to do. Recently, however, some lunatic DNS configurations have
20832 been set up with hundreds of IP addresses for some domains. It can
20833 take a very long time indeed for an address to time out in these cases.
20835 The &%hosts_max_try_hardlimit%& option was added to help with this problem.
20836 Exim never tries more than this number of IP addresses; if it hits this limit
20837 and they are all timed out, the email address is bounced, even though not all
20838 possible IP addresses have been tried.
20844 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20845 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
20847 .chapter "Address rewriting" "CHAPrewrite"
20848 .cindex "rewriting" "addresses"
20849 There are some circumstances in which Exim automatically rewrites domains in
20850 addresses. The two most common are when an address is given without a domain
20851 (referred to as an &"unqualified address"&) or when an address contains an
20852 abbreviated domain that is expanded by DNS lookup.
20854 Unqualified envelope addresses are accepted only for locally submitted
20855 messages, or for messages that are received from hosts matching
20856 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& or &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&, as
20857 appropriate. Unqualified addresses in header lines are qualified if they are in
20858 locally submitted messages, or messages from hosts that are permitted to send
20859 unqualified envelope addresses. Otherwise, unqualified addresses in header
20860 lines are neither qualified nor rewritten.
20862 One situation in which Exim does &'not'& automatically rewrite a domain is
20863 when it is the name of a CNAME record in the DNS. The older RFCs suggest that
20864 such a domain should be rewritten using the &"canonical"& name, and some MTAs
20865 do this. The new RFCs do not contain this suggestion.
20868 .section "Explicitly configured address rewriting"
20869 This chapter describes the rewriting rules that can be used in the
20870 main rewrite section of the configuration file, and also in the generic
20871 &%headers_rewrite%& option that can be set on any transport.
20873 Some people believe that configured address rewriting is a Mortal Sin.
20874 Others believe that life is not possible without it. Exim provides the
20875 facility; you do not have to use it.
20877 The main rewriting rules that appear in the &"rewrite"& section of the
20878 configuration file are applied to addresses in incoming messages, both envelope
20879 addresses and addresses in header lines. Each rule specifies the types of
20880 address to which it applies.
20882 Rewriting of addresses in header lines applies only to those headers that
20883 were received with the message, and, in the case of transport rewriting, those
20884 that were added by a system filter. That is, it applies only to those headers
20885 that are common to all copies of the message. Header lines that are added by
20886 individual routers or transports (and which are therefore specific to
20887 individual recipient addresses) are not rewritten.
20889 In general, rewriting addresses from your own system or domain has some
20890 legitimacy. Rewriting other addresses should be done only with great care and
20891 in special circumstances. The author of Exim believes that rewriting should be
20892 used sparingly, and mainly for &"regularizing"& addresses in your own domains.
20893 Although it can sometimes be used as a routing tool, this is very strongly
20896 There are two commonly encountered circumstances where rewriting is used, as
20897 illustrated by these examples:
20900 The company whose domain is &'hitch.fict.example'& has a number of hosts that
20901 exchange mail with each other behind a firewall, but there is only a single
20902 gateway to the outer world. The gateway rewrites &'*.hitch.fict.example'& as
20903 &'hitch.fict.example'& when sending mail off-site.
20905 A host rewrites the local parts of its own users so that, for example,
20906 &'fp42@hitch.fict.example'& becomes &'Ford.Prefect@hitch.fict.example'&.
20911 .section "When does rewriting happen?"
20912 .cindex "rewriting" "timing of"
20913 .cindex "&ACL;" "rewriting addresses in"
20914 Configured address rewriting can take place at several different stages of a
20915 message's processing.
20917 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
20918 At the start of an ACL for MAIL, the sender address may have been rewritten
20919 by a special SMTP-time rewrite rule (see section &<<SECTrewriteS>>&), but no
20920 ordinary rewrite rules have yet been applied. If, however, the sender address
20921 is verified in the ACL, it is rewritten before verification, and remains
20922 rewritten thereafter. The subsequent value of &$sender_address$& is the
20923 rewritten address. This also applies if sender verification happens in a
20924 RCPT ACL. Otherwise, when the sender address is not verified, it is
20925 rewritten as soon as a message's header lines have been received.
20927 .cindex "&$domain$&"
20928 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
20929 Similarly, at the start of an ACL for RCPT, the current recipient's address
20930 may have been rewritten by a special SMTP-time rewrite rule, but no ordinary
20931 rewrite rules have yet been applied to it. However, the behaviour is different
20932 from the sender address when a recipient is verified. The address is rewritten
20933 for the verification, but the rewriting is not remembered at this stage. The
20934 value of &$local_part$& and &$domain$& after verification are always the same
20935 as they were before (that is, they contain the unrewritten &-- except for
20936 SMTP-time rewriting &-- address).
20938 Once a message's header lines have been received, all the envelope recipient
20939 addresses are permanently rewritten, and rewriting is also applied to the
20940 addresses in the header lines (if configured).
20941 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "address rewriting; timing of"
20942 Thus, all the rewriting is completed before the DATA ACL and
20943 &[local_scan()]& functions are run.
20945 When an address is being routed, either for delivery or for verification,
20946 rewriting is applied immediately to child addresses that are generated by
20947 redirection, unless &%no_rewrite%& is set on the router.
20949 .cindex "envelope sender" "rewriting"
20950 .cindex "rewriting" "at transport time"
20951 At transport time, additional rewriting of addresses in header lines can be
20952 specified by setting the generic &%headers_rewrite%& option on a transport.
20953 This option contains rules that are identical in form to those in the rewrite
20954 section of the configuration file. In addition, the outgoing envelope sender
20955 can be rewritten by means of the &%return_path%& transport option. However, it
20956 is not possible to rewrite envelope recipients at transport time.
20961 .section "Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input"
20962 .cindex "rewriting" "testing"
20963 .cindex "testing" "rewriting"
20964 Exim's input rewriting configuration appears in a part of the run time
20965 configuration file headed by &"begin rewrite"&. It can be tested by the
20966 &%-brw%& command line option. This takes an address (which can be a full RFC
20967 2822 address) as its argument. The output is a list of how the address would be
20968 transformed by the rewriting rules for each of the different places it might
20969 appear in an incoming message, that is, for each different header and for the
20970 envelope sender and recipient fields. For example,
20972 exim -brw ph10@exim.workshop.example
20974 might produce the output
20976 sender: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
20977 from: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
20978 to: ph10@exim.workshop.example
20979 cc: ph10@exim.workshop.example
20980 bcc: ph10@exim.workshop.example
20981 reply-to: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
20982 env-from: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
20983 env-to: ph10@exim.workshop.example
20985 which shows that rewriting has been set up for that address when used in any of
20986 the source fields, but not when it appears as a recipient address. At the
20987 present time, there is no equivalent way of testing rewriting rules that are
20988 set for a particular transport.
20991 .section "Rewriting rules"
20992 .cindex "rewriting" "rules"
20993 The rewrite section of the configuration file consists of lines of rewriting
20996 <&'source pattern'&> <&'replacement'&> <&'flags'&>
20998 Rewriting rules that are specified for the &%headers_rewrite%& generic
20999 transport option are given as a colon-separated list. Each item in the list
21000 takes the same form as a line in the main rewriting configuration (except that
21001 any colons must be doubled, of course).
21003 The formats of source patterns and replacement strings are described below.
21004 Each is terminated by white space, unless enclosed in double quotes, in which
21005 case normal quoting conventions apply inside the quotes. The flags are single
21006 characters which may appear in any order. Spaces and tabs between them are
21009 For each address that could potentially be rewritten, the rules are scanned in
21010 order, and replacements for the address from earlier rules can themselves be
21011 replaced by later rules (but see the &"q"& and &"R"& flags).
21013 The order in which addresses are rewritten is undefined, may change between
21014 releases, and must not be relied on, with one exception: when a message is
21015 received, the envelope sender is always rewritten first, before any header
21016 lines are rewritten. For example, the replacement string for a rewrite of an
21017 address in &'To:'& must not assume that the message's address in &'From:'& has
21018 (or has not) already been rewritten. However, a rewrite of &'From:'& may assume
21019 that the envelope sender has already been rewritten.
21021 .cindex "&$domain$&"
21022 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
21023 The variables &$local_part$& and &$domain$& can be used in the replacement
21024 string to refer to the address that is being rewritten. Note that lookup-driven
21025 rewriting can be done by a rule of the form
21029 where the lookup key uses &$1$& and &$2$& or &$local_part$& and &$domain$& to
21030 refer to the address that is being rewritten.
21033 .section "Rewriting patterns"
21034 .cindex "rewriting" "patterns"
21035 .cindex "address list" "in a rewriting pattern"
21036 The source pattern in a rewriting rule is any item which may appear in an
21037 address list (see section &<<SECTaddresslist>>&). It is in fact processed as a
21038 single-item address list, which means that it is expanded before being tested
21039 against the address. As always, if you use a regular expression as a pattern,
21040 you must take care to escape dollar and backslash characters, or use the &`\N`&
21041 facility to suppress string expansion within the regular expression.
21043 Domains in patterns should be given in lower case. Local parts in patterns are
21044 case-sensitive. If you want to do case-insensitive matching of local parts, you
21045 can use a regular expression that starts with &`^(?i)`&.
21047 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in rewriting rules"
21048 After matching, the numerical variables &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. may be set,
21049 depending on the type of match which occurred. These can be used in the
21050 replacement string to insert portions of the incoming address. &$0$& always
21051 refers to the complete incoming address. When a regular expression is used, the
21052 numerical variables are set from its capturing subexpressions. For other types
21053 of pattern they are set as follows:
21056 If a local part or domain starts with an asterisk, the numerical variables
21057 refer to the character strings matched by asterisks, with &$1$& associated with
21058 the first asterisk, and &$2$& with the second, if present. For example, if the
21061 *queen@*.fict.example
21063 is matched against the address &'hearts-queen@wonderland.fict.example'& then
21065 $0 = hearts-queen@wonderland.fict.example
21069 Note that if the local part does not start with an asterisk, but the domain
21070 does, it is &$1$& that contains the wild part of the domain.
21073 If the domain part of the pattern is a partial lookup, the wild and fixed parts
21074 of the domain are placed in the next available numerical variables. Suppose,
21075 for example, that the address &'foo@bar.baz.example'& is processed by a
21076 rewriting rule of the form
21078 &`*@partial-dbm;/some/dbm/file`& <&'replacement string'&>
21080 and the key in the file that matches the domain is &`*.baz.example`&. Then
21086 If the address &'foo@baz.example'& is looked up, this matches the same
21087 wildcard file entry, and in this case &$2$& is set to the empty string, but
21088 &$3$& is still set to &'baz.example'&. If a non-wild key is matched in a
21089 partial lookup, &$2$& is again set to the empty string and &$3$& is set to the
21090 whole domain. For non-partial domain lookups, no numerical variables are set.
21094 .section "Rewriting replacements"
21095 .cindex "rewriting" "replacements"
21096 If the replacement string for a rule is a single asterisk, addresses that
21097 match the pattern and the flags are &'not'& rewritten, and no subsequent
21098 rewriting rules are scanned. For example,
21100 hatta@lookingglass.fict.example * f
21102 specifies that &'hatta@lookingglass.fict.example'& is never to be rewritten in
21105 .cindex "&$domain$&"
21106 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
21107 If the replacement string is not a single asterisk, it is expanded, and must
21108 yield a fully qualified address. Within the expansion, the variables
21109 &$local_part$& and &$domain$& refer to the address that is being rewritten.
21110 Any letters they contain retain their original case &-- they are not lower
21111 cased. The numerical variables are set up according to the type of pattern that
21112 matched the address, as described above. If the expansion is forced to fail by
21113 the presence of &"fail"& in a conditional or lookup item, rewriting by the
21114 current rule is abandoned, but subsequent rules may take effect. Any other
21115 expansion failure causes the entire rewriting operation to be abandoned, and an
21116 entry written to the panic log.
21120 .section "Rewriting flags"
21121 There are three different kinds of flag that may appear on rewriting rules:
21124 Flags that specify which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite: E, F, T, b,
21127 A flag that specifies rewriting at SMTP time: S.
21129 Flags that control the rewriting process: Q, q, R, w.
21132 For rules that are part of the &%headers_rewrite%& generic transport option,
21133 E, F, T, and S are not permitted.
21137 .section "Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite"
21138 .cindex "rewriting" "flags"
21139 If none of the following flag letters, nor the &"S"& flag (see section
21140 &<<SECTrewriteS>>&) are present, a main rewriting rule applies to all headers
21141 and to both the sender and recipient fields of the envelope, whereas a
21142 transport-time rewriting rule just applies to all headers. Otherwise, the
21143 rewriting rule is skipped unless the relevant addresses are being processed.
21145 &`E`& rewrite all envelope fields
21146 &`F`& rewrite the envelope From field
21147 &`T`& rewrite the envelope To field
21148 &`b`& rewrite the &'Bcc:'& header
21149 &`c`& rewrite the &'Cc:'& header
21150 &`f`& rewrite the &'From:'& header
21151 &`h`& rewrite all headers
21152 &`r`& rewrite the &'Reply-To:'& header
21153 &`s`& rewrite the &'Sender:'& header
21154 &`t`& rewrite the &'To:'& header
21156 You should be particularly careful about rewriting &'Sender:'& headers, and
21157 restrict this to special known cases in your own domains.
21160 .section "The SMTP-time rewriting flag" "SECTrewriteS"
21161 .cindex "SMTP" "rewriting malformed addresses"
21162 .cindex "RCPT" "rewriting argument of"
21163 .cindex "MAIL" "rewriting argument of"
21164 The rewrite flag &"S"& specifies a rewrite of incoming envelope addresses at
21165 SMTP time, as soon as an address is received in a MAIL or RCPT command, and
21166 before any other processing; even before syntax checking. The pattern is
21167 required to be a regular expression, and it is matched against the whole of the
21168 data for the command, including any surrounding angle brackets.
21170 .cindex "&$domain$&"
21171 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
21172 This form of rewrite rule allows for the handling of addresses that are not
21173 compliant with RFCs 2821 and 2822 (for example, &"bang paths"& in batched SMTP
21174 input). Because the input is not required to be a syntactically valid address,
21175 the variables &$local_part$& and &$domain$& are not available during the
21176 expansion of the replacement string. The result of rewriting replaces the
21177 original address in the MAIL or RCPT command.
21180 .section "Flags controlling the rewriting process"
21181 There are four flags which control the way the rewriting process works. These
21182 take effect only when a rule is invoked, that is, when the address is of the
21183 correct type (matches the flags) and matches the pattern:
21186 If the &"Q"& flag is set on a rule, the rewritten address is permitted to be an
21187 unqualified local part. It is qualified with &%qualify_recipient%&. In the
21188 absence of &"Q"& the rewritten address must always include a domain.
21190 If the &"q"& flag is set on a rule, no further rewriting rules are considered,
21191 even if no rewriting actually takes place because of a &"fail"& in the
21192 expansion. The &"q"& flag is not effective if the address is of the wrong type
21193 (does not match the flags) or does not match the pattern.
21195 The &"R"& flag causes a successful rewriting rule to be re-applied to the new
21196 address, up to ten times. It can be combined with the &"q"& flag, to stop
21197 rewriting once it fails to match (after at least one successful rewrite).
21199 .cindex "rewriting" "whole addresses"
21200 When an address in a header is rewritten, the rewriting normally applies only
21201 to the working part of the address, with any comments and RFC 2822 &"phrase"&
21202 left unchanged. For example, rewriting might change
21204 From: Ford Prefect <fp42@restaurant.hitch.fict.example>
21208 From: Ford Prefect <prefectf@hitch.fict.example>
21211 Sometimes there is a need to replace the whole address item, and this can be
21212 done by adding the flag letter &"w"& to a rule. If this is set on a rule that
21213 causes an address in a header line to be rewritten, the entire address is
21214 replaced, not just the working part. The replacement must be a complete RFC
21215 2822 address, including the angle brackets if necessary. If text outside angle
21216 brackets contains a character whose value is greater than 126 or less than 32
21217 (except for tab), the text is encoded according to RFC 2047. The character set
21218 is taken from &%headers_charset%&, which defaults to ISO-8859-1.
21220 When the &"w"& flag is set on a rule that causes an envelope address to be
21221 rewritten, all but the working part of the replacement address is discarded.
21225 .section "Rewriting examples"
21226 Here is an example of the two common rewriting paradigms:
21228 *@*.hitch.fict.example $1@hitch.fict.example
21229 *@hitch.fict.example ${lookup{$1}dbm{/etc/realnames}\
21230 {$value}fail}@hitch.fict.example bctfrF
21232 Note the use of &"fail"& in the lookup expansion in the second rule, forcing
21233 the string expansion to fail if the lookup does not succeed. In this context it
21234 has the effect of leaving the original address unchanged, but Exim goes on to
21235 consider subsequent rewriting rules, if any, because the &"q"& flag is not
21236 present in that rule. An alternative to &"fail"& would be to supply &$1$&
21237 explicitly, which would cause the rewritten address to be the same as before,
21238 at the cost of a small bit of processing. Not supplying either of these is an
21239 error, since the rewritten address would then contain no local part.
21241 The first example above replaces the domain with a superior, more general
21242 domain. This may not be desirable for certain local parts. If the rule
21244 root@*.hitch.fict.example *
21246 were inserted before the first rule, rewriting would be suppressed for the
21247 local part &'root'& at any domain ending in &'hitch.fict.example'&.
21249 Rewriting can be made conditional on a number of tests, by making use of
21250 &${if$& in the expansion item. For example, to apply a rewriting rule only to
21251 messages that originate outside the local host:
21253 *@*.hitch.fict.example "${if !eq {$sender_host_address}{}\
21254 {$1@hitch.fict.example}fail}"
21256 The replacement string is quoted in this example because it contains white
21259 .cindex "rewriting" "bang paths"
21260 .cindex "bang paths" "rewriting"
21261 Exim does not handle addresses in the form of &"bang paths"&. If it sees such
21262 an address it treats it as an unqualified local part which it qualifies with
21263 the local qualification domain (if the source of the message is local or if the
21264 remote host is permitted to send unqualified addresses). Rewriting can
21265 sometimes be used to handle simple bang paths with a fixed number of
21266 components. For example, the rule
21268 \N^([^!]+)!(.*)@your.domain.example$\N $2@$1
21270 rewrites a two-component bang path &'host.name!user'& as the domain address
21271 &'user@host.name'&. However, there is a security implication in using this as
21272 a global rewriting rule for envelope addresses. It can provide a backdoor
21273 method for using your system as a relay, because the incoming addresses appear
21274 to be local. If the bang path addresses are received via SMTP, it is safer to
21275 use the &"S"& flag to rewrite them as they are received, so that relay checking
21276 can be done on the rewritten addresses.
21282 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21283 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21285 .chapter "Retry configuration" "CHAPretry"
21286 .cindex "retry configuration" "description of"
21287 .cindex "configuration file" "retry section"
21288 The &"retry"& section of the run time configuration file contains a list of
21289 retry rules which control how often Exim tries to deliver messages that cannot
21290 be delivered at the first attempt. If there are no retry rules, temporary
21291 errors are treated as permanent. The &%-brt%& command line option can be used
21292 to test which retry rule will be used for a given address or domain.
21294 The most common cause of retries is temporary failure to deliver to a remote
21295 host because the host is down, or inaccessible because of a network problem.
21296 Exim's retry processing in this case is applied on a per-host (strictly, per IP
21297 address) basis, not on a per-message basis. Thus, if one message has recently
21298 been delayed, delivery of a new message to the same host is not immediately
21299 tried, but waits for the host's retry time to arrive. If the &%retry_defer%&
21300 log selector is set, the message
21301 .cindex "retry" "time not reached"
21302 &"retry time not reached"& is written to the main log whenever a delivery is
21303 skipped for this reason. Section &<<SECToutSMTPerr>>& contains more details of
21304 the handling of errors during remote deliveries.
21306 Retry processing applies to routing as well as to delivering, except as covered
21307 in the next paragraph. The retry rules do not distinguish between these
21308 actions. It is not possible, for example, to specify different behaviour for
21309 failures to route the domain &'snark.fict.example'& and failures to deliver to
21310 the host &'snark.fict.example'&. I didn't think anyone would ever need this
21311 added complication, so did not implement it. However, although they share the
21312 same retry rule, the actual retry times for routing and transporting a given
21313 domain are maintained independently.
21315 When a delivery is not part of a queue run (typically an immediate delivery on
21316 receipt of a message), the routers are always run, and local deliveries are
21317 always attempted, even if retry times are set for them. This makes for better
21318 behaviour if one particular message is causing problems (for example, causing
21319 quota overflow, or provoking an error in a filter file). If such a delivery
21320 suffers a temporary failure, the retry data is updated as normal, and
21321 subsequent delivery attempts from queue runs occur only when the retry time for
21322 the local address is reached.
21326 .section "Retry rules"
21327 .cindex "retry" "rules"
21328 Each retry rule occupies one line and consists of three or four parts,
21329 separated by white space: a pattern, an error name, an optional list of sender
21330 addresses, and a list of retry parameters. The pattern and sender lists must be
21331 enclosed in double quotes if they contain white space. The rules are searched
21332 in order until one is found where the pattern, error name, and sender list (if
21333 present) match the failing host or address, the error that occurred, and the
21334 message's sender, respectively.
21337 The pattern is any single item that may appear in an address list (see section
21338 &<<SECTaddresslist>>&). It is in fact processed as a one-item address list,
21339 which means that it is expanded before being tested against the address that
21340 has been delayed. Address list processing treats a plain domain name as if it
21341 were preceded by &"*@"&, which makes it possible for many retry rules to start
21342 with just a domain. For example,
21344 lookingglass.fict.example * F,24h,30m;
21346 provides a rule for any address in the &'lookingglass.fict.example'& domain,
21349 alice@lookingglass.fict.example * F,24h,30m;
21351 applies only to temporary failures involving the local part &%alice%&.
21352 In practice, almost all rules start with a domain name pattern without a local
21355 .cindex "regular expressions" "in retry rules"
21356 &*Warning*&: If you use a regular expression in a routing rule pattern, it
21357 must match a complete address, not just a domain, because that is how regular
21358 expressions work in address lists.
21360 &`^\Nxyz\d+\.abc\.example$\N * G,1h,10m,2`& &%Wrong%&
21361 &`^\N[^@]+@xyz\d+\.abc\.example$\N * G,1h,10m,2`& &%Right%&
21365 .section "Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors"
21366 When Exim is looking for a retry rule after a routing attempt has failed (for
21367 example, after a DNS timeout), each line in the retry configuration is tested
21368 against the complete address only if &%retry_use_local_part%& is set for the
21369 router. Otherwise, only the domain is used, except when matching against a
21370 regular expression, when the local part of the address is replaced with &"*"&.
21371 A domain on its own can match a domain pattern, or a pattern that starts with
21372 &"*@"&. By default, &%retry_use_local_part%& is true for routers where
21373 &%check_local_user%& is true, and false for other routers.
21375 Similarly, when Exim is looking for a retry rule after a local delivery has
21376 failed (for example, after a mailbox full error), each line in the retry
21377 configuration is tested against the complete address only if
21378 &%retry_use_local_part%& is set for the transport (it defaults true for all
21381 When Exim is looking for a retry rule after a remote delivery attempt has
21382 failed, what happens depends on the type of failure. After a 4&'xx'& SMTP
21383 response for a recipient address, the whole address is used when searching the
21384 retry rules. The rule that is found is used to create a retry time for the
21388 .section "Choosing which retry rule to use for host errors"
21389 For a temporary error that is not related to an individual address (for
21390 example, a connection timeout), each line in the retry configuration is checked
21391 twice. First, the name of the remote host is used as a domain name (preceded by
21392 &"*@"& when matching a regular expression). If this does not match the line,
21393 the domain from the email address is tried in a similar fashion. For example,
21394 suppose the MX records for &'a.b.c.example'& are
21396 a.b.c.example MX 5 x.y.z.example
21400 and the retry rules are
21402 p.q.r.example * F,24h,30m;
21403 a.b.c.example * F,4d,45m;
21405 and a delivery to the host &'x.y.z.example'& suffers a connection failure. The
21406 first rule matches neither the host nor the domain, so Exim looks at the second
21407 rule. This does not match the host, but it does match the domain, so it is used
21408 to calculate the retry time for the host &'x.y.z.example'&. Meanwhile, Exim
21409 tries to deliver to &'p.q.r.example'&. If this also suffers a host error, the
21410 first retry rule is used, because it matches the host.
21412 In other words, temporary failures to deliver to host &'p.q.r.example'& use the
21413 first rule to determine retry times, but for all the other hosts for the domain
21414 &'a.b.c.example'&, the second rule is used. The second rule is also used if
21415 routing to &'a.b.c.example'& suffers a temporary failure.
21418 &*Note*&: The host name is used when matching the patterns, not its IP address.
21419 However, if a message is routed directly to an IP address without the use of a
21420 host name, for example, if a &(manualroute)& router contains a setting such as:
21422 route_list = *.a.example 192.168.34.23
21424 then the &"host name"& that is used when searching for a retry rule is the
21425 textual form of the IP address.
21428 .section "Retry rules for specific errors"
21429 .cindex "retry" "specific errors; specifying"
21430 The second field in a retry rule is the name of a particular error, or an
21431 asterisk, which matches any error. The errors that can be tested for are:
21434 .vitem &%auth_failed%&
21435 Authentication failed when trying to send to a host in the
21436 &%hosts_require_auth%& list in an &(smtp)& transport.
21438 .vitem &%rcpt_4xx%&
21439 A 4&'xx'& error was received for an outgoing RCPT command. Either the first or
21440 both of the x's can be given as specific digits, for example: &`rcpt_45x`& or
21441 &`rcpt_436`&. For example, to recognize 452 errors given to RCPT commands by a
21442 particular host, and have retries every ten minutes and a one-hour timeout, you
21443 could set up a retry rule of this form:
21445 the.host.name rcpt_452 F,1h,10m
21447 These errors apply to both outgoing SMTP (the &(smtp)& transport) and outgoing
21448 LMTP (either the &(lmtp)& transport, or the &(smtp)& transport in LMTP mode).
21449 Note, however, that they apply only to responses to RCPT commands.
21451 .vitem &%refused_MX%&
21452 A connection to a host obtained from an MX record was refused.
21454 .vitem &%refused_A%&
21455 A connection to a host not obtained from an MX record was refused.
21458 A connection was refused.
21460 .vitem &%timeout_connect_MX%&
21461 A connection attempt to a host obtained from an MX record timed out.
21463 .vitem &%timeout_connect_A%&
21464 A connection attempt to a host not obtained from an MX record timed out.
21466 .vitem &%timeout_connect%&
21467 A connection attempt timed out.
21469 .vitem &%timeout_MX%&
21470 There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session with a host
21471 obtained from an MX record.
21473 .vitem &%timeout_A%&
21474 There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session with a host not
21475 obtained from an MX record.
21478 There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session.
21481 A mailbox quota was exceeded in a local delivery by the &(appendfile)&
21484 .vitem &%quota_%&<&'time'&>
21485 .cindex "quota" "error testing in retry rule"
21486 .cindex "retry" "quota error testing"
21487 A mailbox quota was exceeded in a local delivery by the &(appendfile)&
21488 transport, and the mailbox has not been accessed for <&'time'&>. For example,
21489 &'quota_4d'& applies to a quota error when the mailbox has not been accessed
21493 .cindex "mailbox" "time of last read"
21494 The idea of &%quota_%&<&'time'&> is to make it possible to have shorter
21495 timeouts when the mailbox is full and is not being read by its owner. Ideally,
21496 it should be based on the last time that the user accessed the mailbox.
21497 However, it is not always possible to determine this. Exim uses the following
21501 If the mailbox is a single file, the time of last access (the &"atime"&) is
21502 used. As no new messages are being delivered (because the mailbox is over
21503 quota), Exim does not access the file, so this is the time of last user access.
21505 .cindex "maildir format" "time of last read"
21506 For a maildir delivery, the time of last modification of the &_new_&
21507 subdirectory is used. As the mailbox is over quota, no new files are created in
21508 the &_new_& subdirectory, because no new messages are being delivered. Any
21509 change to the &_new_& subdirectory is therefore assumed to be the result of an
21510 MUA moving a new message to the &_cur_& directory when it is first read. The
21511 time that is used is therefore the last time that the user read a new message.
21513 For other kinds of multi-file mailbox, the time of last access cannot be
21514 obtained, so a retry rule that uses this type of error field is never matched.
21517 The quota errors apply both to system-enforced quotas and to Exim's own quota
21518 mechanism in the &(appendfile)& transport. The &'quota'& error also applies
21519 when a local delivery is deferred because a partition is full (the ENOSPC
21524 .section "Retry rules for specified senders"
21525 .cindex "retry" "rules; sender-specific"
21526 You can specify retry rules that apply only when the failing message has a
21527 specific sender. In particular, this can be used to define retry rules that
21528 apply only to bounce messages. The third item in a retry rule can be of this
21531 senders=<address list>
21533 The retry timings themselves are then the fourth item. For example:
21535 * rcpt_4xx senders=: F,1h,30m
21537 matches 4&'xx'& errors for bounce messages sent to any host. If the address
21538 list contains white space, it must be enclosed in quotes. For example:
21540 a.domain auth_failed senders="xb.dom : yc.dom" G,8h,10m,1.5
21543 &*Warning*&: This facility can be unhelpful if it is used for host errors
21544 (those that do not depend on the recipient). The reason is that the sender is
21545 used only to match the retry rule. Once the rule has been found for a host
21546 error, its contents are used to set a retry time for the host, and this will
21547 apply to all messages, not just those with specific senders.
21550 When testing retry rules using &%-brt%&, you can supply a sender using the
21551 &%-f%& command line option, like this:
21553 exim -f "" -brt user@dom.ain
21555 If you do not set &%-f%& with &%-brt%&, a retry rule that contains a senders
21556 list is never matched.
21562 .section "Retry parameters"
21563 .cindex "retry" "parameters in rules"
21564 The third (or fourth, if a senders list is present) field in a retry rule is a
21565 sequence of retry parameter sets, separated by semicolons. Each set consists of
21567 <&'letter'&>,<&'cutoff time'&>,<&'arguments'&>
21569 The letter identifies the algorithm for computing a new retry time; the cutoff
21570 time is the time beyond which this algorithm no longer applies, and the
21571 arguments vary the algorithm's action. The cutoff time is measured from the
21572 time that the first failure for the domain (combined with the local part if
21573 relevant) was detected, not from the time the message was received.
21575 .cindex "retry" "algorithms"
21576 .cindex "retry" "fixed intervals"
21577 .cindex "retry" "increasing intervals"
21578 .cindex "retry" "random intervals"
21579 The available algorithms are:
21582 &'F'&: retry at fixed intervals. There is a single time parameter specifying
21585 &'G'&: retry at geometrically increasing intervals. The first argument
21586 specifies a starting value for the interval, and the second a multiplier, which
21587 is used to increase the size of the interval at each retry.
21590 &'H'&: retry at randomized intervals. The arguments are as for &'G'&. For each
21591 retry, the previous interval is multiplied by the factor in order to get a
21592 maximum for the next interval. The mininum interval is the first argument of
21593 the parameter, and an actual interval is chosen randomly between them. Such a
21594 rule has been found to be helpful in cluster configurations when all the
21595 members of the cluster restart at once, and may therefore synchronize their
21596 queue processing times.
21600 When computing the next retry time, the algorithm definitions are scanned in
21601 order until one whose cutoff time has not yet passed is reached. This is then
21602 used to compute a new retry time that is later than the current time. In the
21603 case of fixed interval retries, this simply means adding the interval to the
21604 current time. For geometrically increasing intervals, retry intervals are
21605 computed from the rule's parameters until one that is greater than the previous
21606 interval is found. The main configuration variable
21607 .cindex "limit" "retry interval"
21608 .cindex "retry interval" "maximum"
21609 .cindex "&%retry_interval_max%&"
21610 &%retry_interval_max%& limits the maximum interval between retries.
21612 A single remote domain may have a number of hosts associated with it, and each
21613 host may have more than one IP address. Retry algorithms are selected on the
21614 basis of the domain name, but are applied to each IP address independently. If,
21615 for example, a host has two IP addresses and one is unusable, Exim will
21616 generate retry times for it and will not try to use it until its next retry
21617 time comes. Thus the good IP address is likely to be tried first most of the
21620 .cindex "hints database" "use for retrying"
21621 Retry times are hints rather than promises. Exim does not make any attempt to
21622 run deliveries exactly at the computed times. Instead, a queue runner process
21623 starts delivery processes for delayed messages periodically, and these attempt
21624 new deliveries only for those addresses that have passed their next retry time.
21625 If a new message arrives for a deferred address, an immediate delivery attempt
21626 occurs only if the address has passed its retry time. In the absence of new
21627 messages, the minimum time between retries is the interval between queue runner
21628 processes. There is not much point in setting retry times of five minutes if
21629 your queue runners happen only once an hour, unless there are a significant
21630 number of incoming messages (which might be the case on a system that is
21631 sending everything to a smart host, for example).
21633 The data in the retry hints database can be inspected by using the
21634 &'exim_dumpdb'& or &'exim_fixdb'& utility programs (see chapter
21635 &<<CHAPutils>>&). The latter utility can also be used to change the data. The
21636 &'exinext'& utility script can be used to find out what the next retry times
21637 are for the hosts associated with a particular mail domain, and also for local
21638 deliveries that have been deferred.
21641 .section "Retry rule examples"
21642 Here are some example retry rules:
21644 alice@wonderland.fict.example quota_5d F,7d,3h
21645 wonderland.fict.example quota_5d
21646 wonderland.fict.example * F,1h,15m; G,2d,1h,2;
21647 lookingglass.fict.example * F,24h,30m;
21648 * refused_A F,2h,20m;
21649 * * F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,5d,8h
21651 The first rule sets up special handling for mail to
21652 &'alice@wonderland.fict.example'& when there is an over-quota error and the
21653 mailbox has not been read for at least 5 days. Retries continue every three
21654 hours for 7 days. The second rule handles over-quota errors for all other local
21655 parts at &'wonderland.fict.example'&; the absence of a local part has the same
21656 effect as supplying &"*@"&. As no retry algorithms are supplied, messages that
21657 fail are bounced immediately if the mailbox has not been read for at least 5
21660 The third rule handles all other errors at &'wonderland.fict.example'&; retries
21661 happen every 15 minutes for an hour, then with geometrically increasing
21662 intervals until two days have passed since a delivery first failed. After the
21663 first hour there is a delay of one hour, then two hours, then four hours, and
21664 so on (this is a rather extreme example).
21666 The fourth rule controls retries for the domain &'lookingglass.fict.example'&.
21667 They happen every 30 minutes for 24 hours only. The remaining two rules handle
21668 all other domains, with special action for connection refusal from hosts that
21669 were not obtained from an MX record.
21671 The final rule in a retry configuration should always have asterisks in the
21672 first two fields so as to provide a general catch-all for any addresses that do
21673 not have their own special handling. This example tries every 15 minutes for 2
21674 hours, then with intervals starting at one hour and increasing by a factor of
21675 1.5 up to 16 hours, then every 8 hours up to 5 days.
21679 .section "Timeout of retry data"
21680 .cindex "timeout" "of retry data"
21681 .cindex "&%retry_data_expire%&"
21682 .cindex "hints database" "data expiry"
21683 .cindex "retry" "timeout of data"
21684 Exim timestamps the data that it writes to its retry hints database. When it
21685 consults the data during a delivery it ignores any that is older than the value
21686 set in &%retry_data_expire%& (default 7 days). If, for example, a host hasn't
21687 been tried for 7 days, Exim will try to deliver to it immediately a message
21688 arrives, and if that fails, it will calculate a retry time as if it were
21689 failing for the first time.
21691 This improves the behaviour for messages routed to rarely-used hosts such as MX
21692 backups. If such a host was down at one time, and happens to be down again when
21693 Exim tries a month later, using the old retry data would imply that it had been
21694 down all the time, which is not a justified assumption.
21696 If a host really is permanently dead, this behaviour causes a burst of retries
21697 every now and again, but only if messages routed to it are rare. It there is a
21698 message at least once every 7 days the retry data never expires.
21703 .section "Long-term failures"
21704 .cindex "delivery failure" "long-term"
21705 .cindex "retry" "after long-term failure"
21706 Special processing happens when an email address has been failing for so long
21707 that the cutoff time for the last algorithm is reached. For example, using the
21708 default retry rule:
21710 * * F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,4d,6h
21712 the cutoff time is four days. Reaching the retry cutoff is independent of how
21713 long any specific message has been failing; it is the length of continuous
21714 failure for the recipient address that counts.
21716 When the cutoff time is reached for a local delivery, or for all the IP
21717 addresses associated with a remote delivery, a subsequent delivery failure
21718 causes Exim to give up on the address, and a bounce message is generated.
21719 In order to cater for new messages that use the failing address, a next retry
21720 time is still computed from the final algorithm, and is used as follows:
21722 For local deliveries, one delivery attempt is always made for any subsequent
21723 messages. If this delivery fails, the address fails immediately. The
21724 post-cutoff retry time is not used.
21726 If the delivery is remote, there are two possibilities, controlled by the
21727 .cindex "&%delay_after_cutoff%&"
21728 &%delay_after_cutoff%& option of the &(smtp)& transport. The option is true by
21729 default. Until the post-cutoff retry time for one of the IP addresses is
21730 reached, the failing email address is bounced immediately, without a delivery
21731 attempt taking place. After that time, one new delivery attempt is made to
21732 those IP addresses that are past their retry times, and if that still fails,
21733 the address is bounced and new retry times are computed.
21735 In other words, when all the hosts for a given email address have been failing
21736 for a long time, Exim bounces rather then defers until one of the hosts' retry
21737 times is reached. Then it tries once, and bounces if that attempt fails. This
21738 behaviour ensures that few resources are wasted in repeatedly trying to deliver
21739 to a broken destination, but if the host does recover, Exim will eventually
21742 If &%delay_after_cutoff%& is set false, Exim behaves differently. If all IP
21743 addresses are past their final cutoff time, Exim tries to deliver to those IP
21744 addresses that have not been tried since the message arrived. If there are
21745 no suitable IP addresses, or if they all fail, the address is bounced. In other
21746 words, it does not delay when a new message arrives, but tries the expired
21747 addresses immediately, unless they have been tried since the message arrived.
21748 If there is a continuous stream of messages for the failing domains, setting
21749 &%delay_after_cutoff%& false means that there will be many more attempts to
21750 deliver to permanently failing IP addresses than when &%delay_after_cutoff%& is
21754 .section "Ultimate address timeout"
21755 .cindex "retry" "ultimate address timeout"
21756 An additional rule is needed to cope with cases where a host is intermittently
21757 available, or when a message has some attribute that prevents its delivery when
21758 others to the same address get through. In this situation, because some
21759 messages are successfully delivered, the &"retry clock"& for the address keeps
21760 getting restarted, and so a message could remain on the queue for ever. To
21761 prevent this, if a message has been on the queue for longer than the cutoff
21762 time of any applicable retry rule for a given address, a delivery is attempted
21763 for that address, even if it is not yet time, and if this delivery fails, the
21764 address is timed out. A new retry time is not computed in this case, so that
21765 other messages for the same address are considered immediately.
21771 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21772 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
21774 .chapter "SMTP authentication" "CHAPSMTPAUTH"
21775 .cindex "SMTP" "authentication configuration"
21776 .cindex "authentication"
21777 The &"authenticators"& section of Exim's run time configuration is concerned
21778 with SMTP authentication. This facility is an extension to the SMTP protocol,
21779 described in RFC 2554, which allows a client SMTP host to authenticate itself
21780 to a server. This is a common way for a server to recognize clients that are
21781 permitted to use it as a relay. SMTP authentication is not of relevance to the
21782 transfer of mail between servers that have no managerial connection with each
21785 .cindex "AUTH" "description of"
21786 Very briefly, the way SMTP authentication works is as follows:
21789 The server advertises a number of authentication &'mechanisms'& in response to
21790 the client's EHLO command.
21792 The client issues an AUTH command, naming a specific mechanism. The command
21793 may, optionally, contain some authentication data.
21795 The server may issue one or more &'challenges'&, to which the client must send
21796 appropriate responses. In simple authentication mechanisms, the challenges are
21797 just prompts for user names and passwords. The server does not have to issue
21798 any challenges &-- in some mechanisms the relevant data may all be transmitted
21799 with the AUTH command.
21801 The server either accepts or denies authentication.
21803 If authentication succeeds, the client may optionally make use of the AUTH
21804 option on the MAIL command to pass an authenticated sender in subsequent
21805 mail transactions. Authentication lasts for the remainder of the SMTP
21808 If authentication fails, the client may give up, or it may try a different
21809 authentication mechanism, or it may try transferring mail over the
21810 unauthenticated connection.
21813 If you are setting up a client, and want to know which authentication
21814 mechanisms the server supports, you can use Telnet to connect to port 25 (the
21815 SMTP port) on the server, and issue an EHLO command. The response to this
21816 includes the list of supported mechanisms. For example:
21818 &`$ `&&*&`telnet server.example 25`&*&
21819 &`Trying 192.168.34.25...`&
21820 &`Connected to server.example.`&
21821 &`Escape character is '^]'.`&
21822 &`220 server.example ESMTP Exim 4.20 ...`&
21823 &*&`ehlo client.example`&*&
21824 &`250-server.example Hello client.example [10.8.4.5]`&
21825 &`250-SIZE 52428800`&
21830 The second-last line of this example output shows that the server supports
21831 authentication using the PLAIN mechanism. In Exim, the different authentication
21832 mechanisms are configured by specifying &'authenticator'& drivers. Like the
21833 routers and transports, which authenticators are included in the binary is
21834 controlled by build-time definitions. The following are currently available,
21835 included by setting
21838 AUTH_CYRUS_SASL=yes
21842 in &_Local/Makefile_&, respectively. The first of these supports the CRAM-MD5
21843 authentication mechanism (RFC 2195), and the second provides an interface to
21844 the Cyrus SASL authentication library. The third can be configured to support
21845 the PLAIN authentication mechanism (RFC 2595) or the LOGIN mechanism, which is
21846 not formally documented, but used by several MUAs. The fourth authenticator
21847 supports Microsoft's &'Secure Password Authentication'& mechanism.
21849 The authenticators are configured using the same syntax as other drivers (see
21850 section &<<SECTfordricon>>&). If no authenticators are required, no
21851 authentication section need be present in the configuration file. Each
21852 authenticator can in principle have both server and client functions. When Exim
21853 is receiving SMTP mail, it is acting as a server; when it is sending out
21854 messages over SMTP, it is acting as a client. Authenticator configuration
21855 options are provided for use in both these circumstances.
21857 To make it clear which options apply to which situation, the prefixes
21858 &%server_%& and &%client_%& are used on option names that are specific to
21859 either the server or the client function, respectively. Server and client
21860 functions are disabled if none of their options are set. If an authenticator is
21861 to be used for both server and client functions, a single definition, using
21862 both sets of options, is required. For example:
21866 public_name = CRAM-MD5
21867 server_secret = ${if eq{$1}{ph10}{secret1}fail}
21869 client_secret = secret2
21871 The &%server_%& option is used when Exim is acting as a server, and the
21872 &%client_%& options when it is acting as a client.
21874 Descriptions of the individual authenticators are given in subsequent chapters.
21875 The remainder of this chapter covers the generic options for the
21876 authenticators, followed by general discussion of the way authentication works
21881 .section "Generic options for authenticators"
21882 .cindex "authentication" "generic options"
21883 .cindex "options" "generic; for authenticators"
21886 .option driver authenticators string unset
21887 This option must always be set. It specifies which of the available
21888 authenticators is to be used.
21891 .option public_name authenticators string unset
21892 This option specifies the name of the authentication mechanism that the driver
21893 implements, and by which it is known to the outside world. These names should
21894 contain only upper case letters, digits, underscores, and hyphens (RFC 2222),
21895 but Exim in fact matches them caselessly. If &%public_name%& is not set, it
21896 defaults to the driver's instance name.
21899 .option server_advertise_condition authenticators string&!! unset
21900 When a server is about to advertise an authentication mechanism, the condition
21901 is expanded. If it yields the empty string, &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&, the
21902 mechanism is not advertised.
21903 If the expansion fails, the mechanism is not advertised. If the failure was not
21904 forced, and was not caused by a lookup defer, the incident is logged.
21905 See section &<<SECTauthexiser>>& below for further discussion.
21908 .option server_debug_print authenticators string&!! unset
21909 If this option is set and authentication debugging is enabled (see the &%-d%&
21910 command line option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging
21911 output when the authenticator is run as a server. This can help with checking
21912 out the values of variables.
21913 If expansion of the string fails, the error message is written to the debugging
21914 output, and Exim carries on processing.
21917 .option server_set_id authenticators string&!! unset
21918 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
21919 When an Exim server successfully authenticates a client, this string is
21920 expanded using data from the authentication, and preserved for any incoming
21921 messages in the variable &$authenticated_id$&. It is also included in the log
21922 lines for incoming messages. For example, a user/password authenticator
21923 configuration might preserve the user name that was used to authenticate, and
21924 refer to it subsequently during delivery of the message.
21925 If expansion fails, the option is ignored.
21928 .option server_mail_auth_condition authenticators string&!! unset
21929 This option allows a server to discard authenticated sender addresses supplied
21930 as part of MAIL commands in SMTP connections that are authenticated by the
21931 driver on which &%server_mail_auth_condition%& is set. The option is not used
21932 as part of the authentication process; instead its (unexpanded) value is
21933 remembered for later use.
21934 How it is used is described in the following section.
21940 .section "The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands" "SECTauthparamail"
21941 .cindex "authentication" "sender; authenticated"
21942 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
21943 When a client supplied an AUTH= item on a MAIL command, Exim applies
21944 the following checks before accepting it as the authenticated sender of the
21948 If the connection is not using extended SMTP (that is, HELO was used rather
21949 than EHLO), the use of AUTH= is a syntax error.
21951 If the value of the AUTH= parameter is &"<>"&, it is ignored.
21953 .cindex "&$authenticated_sender$&"
21954 If &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& is defined, the ACL it specifies is run. While it is
21955 running, the value of &$authenticated_sender$& is set to the value obtained
21956 from the AUTH= parameter. If the ACL does not yield &"accept"&, the value of
21957 &$authenticated_sender$& is deleted. The &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& ACL may not
21958 return &"drop"& or &"discard"&. If it defers, a temporary error code (451) is
21959 given for the MAIL command.
21961 If &%acl_smtp_mailauth%& is not defined, the value of the AUTH= parameter
21962 is accepted and placed in &$authenticated_sender$& only if the client has
21965 If the AUTH= value was accepted by either of the two previous rules, and
21966 the client has authenticated, and the authenticator has a setting for the
21967 &%server_mail_auth_condition%&, the condition is checked at this point. The
21968 valued that was saved from the authenticator is expanded. If the expansion
21969 fails, or yields an empty string, &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&, the value of
21970 &$authenticated_sender$& is deleted. If the expansion yields any other value,
21971 the value of &$authenticated_sender$& is retained and passed on with the
21976 When &$authenticated_sender$& is set for a message, it is passed on to other
21977 hosts to which Exim authenticates as a client. Do not confuse this value with
21978 &$authenticated_id$&, which is a string obtained from the authentication
21979 process, and which is not usually a complete email address.
21981 .cindex "&$sender_address$&"
21982 Whenever an AUTH= value is ignored, the incident is logged. The ACL for
21983 MAIL, if defined, is run after AUTH= is accepted or ignored. It can
21984 therefore make use of &$authenticated_sender$&. The converse is not true: the
21985 value of &$sender_address$& is not yet set up when the &%acl_smtp_mailauth%&
21990 .section "Authentication on an Exim server" "SECTauthexiser"
21991 .cindex "authentication" "on an Exim server"
21992 When Exim receives an EHLO command, it advertises the public names of those
21993 authenticators that are configured as servers, subject to the following
21997 The client host must match &%auth_advertise_hosts%& (default *).
21999 It the &%server_advertise_condition%& option is set, its expansion must not
22000 yield the empty string, &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&.
22003 The order in which the authenticators are defined controls the order in which
22004 the mechanisms are advertised.
22006 Some mail clients (for example, some versions of Netscape) require the user to
22007 provide a name and password for authentication whenever AUTH is advertised,
22008 even though authentication may not in fact be needed (for example, Exim may be
22009 set up to allow unconditional relaying from the client by an IP address check).
22010 You can make such clients more friendly by not advertising AUTH to them.
22011 For example, if clients on the 10.9.8.0/24 network are permitted (by the ACL
22012 that runs for RCPT) to relay without authentication, you should set
22014 auth_advertise_hosts = ! 10.9.8.0/24
22016 so that no authentication mechanisms are advertised to them.
22018 The &%server_advertise_condition%& controls the advertisement of individual
22019 authentication mechanisms. For example, it can be used to restrict the
22020 advertisement of a patricular mechanism to encrypted connections, by a setting
22023 server_advertise_condition = ${if eq{$tls_cipher}{}{no}{yes}}
22025 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
22026 If the session is encrypted, &$tls_cipher$& is not empty, and so the expansion
22027 yields &"yes"&, which allows the advertisement to happen.
22029 When an Exim server receives an AUTH command from a client, it rejects it
22030 immediately if AUTH was not advertised in response to an earlier EHLO
22031 command. This is the case if
22034 The client host does not match &%auth_advertise_hosts%&; or
22036 No authenticators are configured with server options; or
22038 Expansion of &%server_advertise_condition%& blocked the advertising of all the
22039 server authenticators.
22043 Otherwise, Exim runs the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_auth%& in order
22044 to decide whether to accept the command. If &%acl_smtp_auth%& is not set,
22045 AUTH is accepted from any client host.
22047 If AUTH is not rejected by the ACL, Exim searches its configuration for a
22048 server authentication mechanism that was advertised in response to EHLO and
22049 that matches the one named in the AUTH command. If it finds one, it runs
22050 the appropriate authentication protocol, and authentication either succeeds or
22051 fails. If there is no matching advertised mechanism, the AUTH command is
22052 rejected with a 504 error.
22054 .cindex "&$received_protocol$&"
22055 .cindex "&$sender_host_authenticated$&"
22056 When a message is received from an authenticated host, the value of
22057 &$received_protocol$& is set to &"esmtpa"& or &"esmtpsa"& instead of &"esmtp"&
22058 or &"esmtps"&, and &$sender_host_authenticated$& contains the name (not the
22059 public name) of the authenticator driver that successfully authenticated the
22060 client from which the message was received. This variable is empty if there was
22061 no successful authentication.
22066 .section "Testing server authentication"
22067 .cindex "authentication" "testing a server"
22068 .cindex "AUTH" "testing a server"
22069 .cindex "base64 encoding" "creating authentication test data"
22070 Exim's &%-bh%& option can be useful for testing server authentication
22071 configurations. The data for the AUTH command has to be sent using base64
22072 encoding. A quick way to produce such data for testing is the following Perl
22076 printf ("%s", encode_base64(eval "\"$ARGV[0]\""));
22078 .cindex "binary zero" "in authentication data"
22079 This interprets its argument as a Perl string, and then encodes it. The
22080 interpretation as a Perl string allows binary zeros, which are required for
22081 some kinds of authentication, to be included in the data. For example, a
22082 command line to run this script on such data might be
22084 encode '\0user\0password'
22086 Note the use of single quotes to prevent the shell interpreting the
22087 backslashes, so that they can be interpreted by Perl to specify characters
22088 whose code value is zero.
22090 &*Warning 1*&: If either of the user or password strings starts with an octal
22091 digit, you must use three zeros instead of one after the leading backslash. If
22092 you do not, the octal digit that starts your string will be incorrectly
22093 interpreted as part of the code for the first character.
22095 &*Warning 2*&: If there are characters in the strings that Perl interprets
22096 specially, you must use a Perl escape to prevent them being misinterpreted. For
22097 example, a command such as
22099 encode '\0user@domain.com\0pas$$word'
22101 gives an incorrect answer because of the unescaped &"@"& and &"$"& characters.
22103 If you have the &%mimencode%& command installed, another way to do produce
22104 base64-encoded strings is to run the command
22106 echo -e -n `\0user\0password' | mimencode
22108 The &%-e%& option of &%echo%& enables the interpretation of backslash escapes
22109 in the argument, and the &%-n%& option specifies no newline at the end of its
22110 output. However, not all versions of &%echo%& recognize these options, so you
22111 should check your version before relying on this suggestion.
22115 .section "Authentication by an Exim client"
22116 .cindex "authentication" "on an Exim client"
22117 The &(smtp)& transport has two options called &%hosts_require_auth%& and
22118 &%hosts_try_auth%&. When the &(smtp)& transport connects to a server that
22119 announces support for authentication, and the host matches an entry in either
22120 of these options, Exim (as a client) tries to authenticate as follows:
22123 For each authenticator that is configured as a client, it searches the
22124 authentication mechanisms announced by the server for one whose name
22125 matches the public name of the authenticator.
22128 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
22129 When it finds one that matches, it runs the authenticator's client code.
22130 The variables &$host$& and &$host_address$& are available for any string
22131 expansions that the client might do. They are set to the server's name and
22132 IP address. If any expansion is forced to fail, the authentication attempt
22134 and Exim moves on to the next authenticator.
22135 Otherwise an expansion failure causes delivery to be
22138 If the result of the authentication attempt is a temporary error or a timeout,
22139 Exim abandons trying to send the message to the host for the moment. It will
22140 try again later. If there are any backup hosts available, they are tried in the
22143 If the response to authentication is a permanent error (5&'xx'& code), Exim
22144 carries on searching the list of authenticators and tries another one if
22145 possible. If all authentication attempts give permanent errors, or if there are
22146 no attempts because no mechanisms match (or option expansions force failure),
22147 what happens depends on whether the host matches &%hosts_require_auth%& or
22148 &%hosts_try_auth%&. In the first case, a temporary error is generated, and
22149 delivery is deferred. The error can be detected in the retry rules, and thereby
22150 turned into a permanent error if you wish. In the second case, Exim tries to
22151 deliver the message unauthenticated.
22154 .cindex "AUTH" "on MAIL command"
22155 When Exim has authenticated itself to a remote server, it adds the AUTH
22156 parameter to the MAIL commands it sends, if it has an authenticated sender for
22157 the message. If the message came from a remote host, the authenticated sender
22158 is the one that was receiving on an incoming MAIL command, provided that the
22159 incoming connection was authenticated and the &%server_mail_auth%& condition
22160 allowed the authenticated sender to be retained. If a local process calls Exim
22161 to send a message, the sender address that is built from the login name and
22162 &%qualify_domain%& is treated as authenticated. However, if the
22163 &%authenticated_sender%& option is set on the &(smtp)& transport, it overrides
22164 the authenticated sender that was received with the message.
22171 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22172 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22174 .chapter "The plaintext authenticator" "CHAPplaintext"
22175 .cindex "&(plaintext)& authenticator"
22176 .cindex "authenticators" "&(plaintext)&"
22177 The &(plaintext)& authenticator can be configured to support the PLAIN and
22178 LOGIN authentication mechanisms, both of which transfer authentication data as
22179 plain (unencrypted) text (though base64 encoded). The use of plain text is a
22180 security risk. If you use one of these mechanisms without also making use of
22181 SMTP encryption (see chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>&) you should not use the same
22182 passwords for SMTP connections as you do for login accounts.
22185 .section "Using plaintext in a server"
22186 .cindex "options" "&(plaintext)& authenticator (server)"
22187 When running as a server, &(plaintext)& performs the authentication test by
22188 expanding a string. It has the following options:
22190 .option server_prompts plaintext string&!! unset
22191 The contents of this option, after expansion, must be a colon-separated list of
22192 prompt strings. If expansion fails, a temporary authentication rejection is
22195 .option server_condition plaintext string&!! unset
22196 This option must be set in order to configure the driver as a server. Its use
22197 is described below.
22199 .cindex "AUTH" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22200 .cindex "binary zero" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22201 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" &&&
22202 "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22203 .cindex "base64 encoding" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22204 The data sent by the client with the AUTH command, or in response to
22205 subsequent prompts, is base64 encoded, and so may contain any byte values
22206 when decoded. If any data is supplied with the command, it is treated as a
22207 list of strings, separated by NULs (binary zeros), which are placed in the
22208 expansion variables &$1$&, &$2$&, etc. If there are more strings in
22209 &%server_prompts%& than the number of strings supplied with the AUTH
22210 command, the remaining prompts are used to obtain more data. Each response from
22211 the client may be a list of NUL-separated strings.
22213 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
22214 Once a sufficient number of data strings have been received,
22215 &%server_condition%& is expanded. If the expansion is forced to fail,
22216 authentication fails. Any other expansion failure causes a temporary error code
22217 to be returned. If the result of a successful expansion is an empty string,
22218 &"0"&, &"no"&, or &"false"&, authentication fails. If the result of the
22219 expansion is &"1"&, &"yes"&, or &"true"&, authentication succeeds and the
22220 generic &%server_set_id%& option is expanded and saved in &$authenticated_id$&.
22221 For any other result, a temporary error code is returned, with the expanded
22222 string as the error text.
22224 &*Warning*&: If you use a lookup in the expansion to find the user's
22225 password, be sure to make the authentication fail if the user is unknown.
22226 There are good and bad examples at the end of the next section.
22230 .section "The PLAIN authentication mechanism"
22231 .cindex "PLAIN authentication mechanism"
22232 .cindex "authentication" "PLAIN mechanism"
22233 .cindex "binary zero" "in &(plaintext)& authenticator"
22234 The PLAIN authentication mechanism (RFC 2595) specifies that three strings be
22235 sent as one item of data (that is, one combined string containing two NUL
22236 separators). The data is sent either as part of the AUTH command, or
22237 subsequently in response to an empty prompt from the server.
22239 The second and third strings are a user name and a corresponding password.
22240 Using a single fixed user name and password as an example, this could be
22241 configured as follows:
22245 public_name = PLAIN
22247 server_condition = \
22248 ${if and {{eq{$2}{username}}{eq{$3}{mysecret}}}{yes}{no}}
22251 The &%server_prompts%& setting specifies a single, empty prompt (empty items at
22252 the end of a string list are ignored). If all the data comes as part of the
22253 AUTH command, as is commonly the case, the prompt is not used. This
22254 authenticator is advertised in the response to EHLO as
22258 and a client host can authenticate itself by sending the command
22260 AUTH PLAIN AHVzZXJuYW1lAG15c2VjcmV0
22262 As this contains three strings (more than the number of prompts), no further
22263 data is required from the client. Alternatively, the client may just send
22267 to initiate authentication, in which case the server replies with an empty
22268 prompt. The client must respond with the combined data string.
22270 The data string is base64 encoded, as required by the RFC. This example,
22271 when decoded, is <&'NUL'&>&`username`&<&'NUL'&>&`mysecret`&, where <&'NUL'&>
22272 represents a zero byte. This is split up into three strings, the first of which
22273 is empty. The &%server_condition%& option in the authenticator checks that the
22274 second two are &`username`& and &`mysecret`& respectively.
22276 Having just one fixed user name and password, as in this example, is not very
22277 realistic, though for a small organization with only a handful of
22278 authenticating clients it could make sense.
22280 A more sophisticated instance of this authenticator could use the user name in
22281 &$2$& to look up a password in a file or database, and maybe do an encrypted
22282 comparison (see &%crypteq%& in chapter &<<CHAPexpand>>&). Here is a example of
22283 this approach, where the passwords are looked up in a DBM file. &*Warning*&:
22284 This is an incorrect example:
22286 server_condition = \
22287 ${if eq{$3}{${lookup{$2}dbm{/etc/authpwd}}}{yes}{no}}
22289 The expansion uses the user name (&$2$&) as the key to look up a password,
22290 which it then compares to the supplied password (&$3$&). Why is this example
22291 incorrect? It works fine for existing users, but consider what happens if a
22292 non-existent user name is given. The lookup fails, but as no success/failure
22293 strings are given for the lookup, it yields an empty string. Thus, to defeat
22294 the authentication, all a client has to do is to supply a non-existent user
22295 name and an empty password. The correct way of writing this test is:
22297 server_condition = ${lookup{$2}dbm{/etc/authpwd}\
22298 {${if eq{$value}{$3}{yes}{no}}}{no}}
22300 In this case, if the lookup succeeds, the result is checked; if the lookup
22301 fails, authentication fails. If &%crypteq%& is being used instead of &%eq%&,
22302 the first example is in fact safe, because &%crypteq%& always fails if its
22303 second argument is empty. However, the second way of writing the test makes the
22308 .section "The LOGIN authentication mechanism"
22309 .cindex "LOGIN authentication mechanism"
22310 .cindex "authentication" "LOGIN mechanism"
22311 The LOGIN authentication mechanism is not documented in any RFC, but is in use
22312 in a number of programs. No data is sent with the AUTH command. Instead, a
22313 user name and password are supplied separately, in response to prompts. The
22314 plaintext authenticator can be configured to support this as in this example:
22318 public_name = LOGIN
22319 server_prompts = User Name : Password
22320 server_condition = \
22321 ${if and {{eq{$1}{username}}{eq{$2}{mysecret}}}{yes}{no}}
22324 Because of the way plaintext operates, this authenticator accepts data supplied
22325 with the AUTH command (in contravention of the specification of LOGIN), but
22326 if the client does not supply it (as is the case for LOGIN clients), the prompt
22327 strings are used to obtain two data items.
22329 Some clients are very particular about the precise text of the prompts. For
22330 example, Outlook Express is reported to recognize only &"Username:"& and
22331 &"Password:"&. Here is an example of a LOGIN authenticator that uses those
22332 strings. It uses the &%ldapauth%& expansion condition to check the user
22333 name and password by binding to an LDAP server:
22337 public_name = LOGIN
22338 server_prompts = Username:: : Password::
22339 server_condition = ${if ldapauth \
22340 {user="cn=${quote_ldap_dn:$1},ou=people,o=example.org" \
22342 ldap://ldap.example.org/}{yes}{no}}
22343 server_set_id = uid=$1,ou=people,o=example.org
22345 Note the use of the &%quote_ldap_dn%& operator to correctly quote the DN for
22346 authentication. However, the basic &%quote%& operator, rather than any of the
22347 LDAP quoting operators, is the correct one to use for the password, because
22348 quoting is needed only to make the password conform to the Exim syntax. At the
22349 LDAP level, the password is an uninterpreted string.
22353 .section "Support for different kinds of authentication"
22354 A number of string expansion features are provided for the purpose of
22355 interfacing to different ways of user authentication. These include checking
22356 traditionally encrypted passwords from &_/etc/passwd_& (or equivalent), PAM,
22357 Radius, &%ldapauth%&, and &'pwcheck'&. For details see section
22363 .section "Using plaintext in a client"
22364 .cindex "options" "&(plaintext)& authenticator (client)"
22365 The &(plaintext)& authenticator has just one client option:
22369 .option client_send plaintext string&!! unset
22370 The string is a colon-separated list of authentication data strings. Each
22371 string is independently expanded before being sent to the server. The first
22372 string is sent with the AUTH command; any more strings are sent in response
22373 to prompts from the server.
22375 &*Note*&: You cannot use expansion to create multiple strings, because
22376 splitting takes priority and happens first.
22378 Because the PLAIN authentication mechanism requires NUL (binary zero) bytes in
22379 the data, further processing is applied to each string before it is sent. If
22380 there are any single circumflex characters in the string, they are converted to
22381 NULs. Should an actual circumflex be required as data, it must be doubled in
22384 This is an example of a client configuration that implements the PLAIN
22385 authentication mechanism with a fixed user name and password:
22389 public_name = PLAIN
22390 client_send = ^username^mysecret
22392 The lack of colons means that the entire text is sent with the AUTH
22393 command, with the circumflex characters converted to NULs. A similar example
22394 that uses the LOGIN mechanism is:
22398 public_name = LOGIN
22399 client_send = : username : mysecret
22401 The initial colon means that the first string is empty, so no data is sent with
22402 the AUTH command itself. The remaining strings are sent in response to
22408 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22409 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22411 .chapter "The cram_md5 authenticator"
22412 .cindex "&(cram_md5)& authenticator"
22413 .cindex "authenticators" "&(cram_md5)&"
22414 .cindex "CRAM-MD5 authentication mechanism"
22415 .cindex "authentication" "CRAM-MD5 mechanism"
22416 The CRAM-MD5 authentication mechanism is described in RFC 2195. The server
22417 sends a challenge string to the client, and the response consists of a user
22418 name and the CRAM-MD5 digest of the challenge string combined with a secret
22419 string (password) which is known to both server and client. Thus, the secret
22420 is not sent over the network as plain text, which makes this authenticator more
22421 secure than &(plaintext)&. However, the downside is that the secret has to be
22422 available in plain text at either end.
22425 .section "Using cram_md5 as a server"
22426 .cindex "options" "&(cram_md5)& authenticator (server)"
22427 This authenticator has one server option, which must be set to configure the
22428 authenticator as a server:
22430 .option server_secret cram_md5 string&!! unset
22431 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &(cram_md5)& authenticator"
22432 When the server receives the client's response, the user name is placed in
22433 the expansion variable &$1$&, and &%server_secret%& is expanded to obtain the
22434 password for that user. The server then computes the CRAM-MD5 digest that the
22435 client should have sent, and checks that it received the correct string. If the
22436 expansion of &%server_secret%& is forced to fail, authentication fails. If the
22437 expansion fails for some other reason, a temporary error code is returned to
22440 For example, the following authenticator checks that the user name given by the
22441 client is &"ph10"&, and if so, uses &"secret"& as the password. For any other
22442 user name, authentication fails.
22446 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22447 server_secret = ${if eq{$1}{ph10}{secret}fail}
22450 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
22451 If authentication succeeds, the setting of &%server_set_id%& preserves the user
22452 name in &$authenticated_id$&. A more tyical configuration might look up the
22453 secret string in a file, using the user name as the key. For example:
22457 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22458 server_secret = ${lookup{$1}lsearch{/etc/authpwd}{$value}fail}
22461 Note that this expansion explicitly forces failure if the lookup fails
22462 because &$1$& contains an unknown user name.
22465 .section "Using cram_md5 as a client"
22466 .cindex "options" "&(cram_md5)& authenticator (client)"
22467 When used as a client, the &(cram_md5)& authenticator has two options:
22471 .option client_name cram_md5 string&!! "the primary host name"
22472 This string is expanded, and the result used as the user name data when
22473 computing the response to the server's challenge.
22476 .option client_secret cram_md5 string&!! unset
22477 This option must be set for the authenticator to work as a client. Its value is
22478 expanded and the result used as the secret string when computing the response.
22482 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
22483 Different user names and secrets can be used for different servers by referring
22484 to &$host$& or &$host_address$& in the options. Forced failure of either
22485 expansion string is treated as an indication that this authenticator is not
22486 prepared to handle this case. Exim moves on to the next configured client
22487 authenticator. Any other expansion failure causes Exim to give up trying to
22488 send the message to the current server.
22490 A simple example configuration of a &(cram_md5)& authenticator, using fixed
22495 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22497 client_secret = secret
22502 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22503 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22505 .chapter "The cyrus_sasl authenticator"
22506 .cindex "&(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator"
22507 .cindex "authenticators" "&(cyrus_sasl)&"
22508 .cindex "Cyrus" "SASL library"
22509 The code for this authenticator was provided by Matthew Byng-Maddick of A L
22510 Digital Ltd (&url(http://www.aldigital.co.uk)).
22512 The &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator provides server support for the Cyrus SASL
22513 library implementation of the RFC 2222 (&"Simple Authentication and Security
22514 Layer"&). This library supports a number of authentication mechanisms,
22515 including PLAIN and LOGIN, but also several others that Exim does not support
22516 directly. In particular, there is support for Kerberos authentication.
22518 The &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator provides a gatewaying mechanism directly to
22519 the Cyrus interface, so if your Cyrus library can do, for example, CRAM-MD5,
22520 then so can the &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator. By default it uses the public
22521 name of the driver to determine which mechanism to support.
22523 Where access to some kind of secret file is required, for example in GSSAPI
22524 or CRAM-MD5, it is worth noting that the authenticator runs as the Exim
22525 user, and that the Cyrus SASL library has no way of escalating privileges
22526 by default. You may also find you need to set environment variables,
22527 depending on the driver you are using.
22530 .section "Using cyrus_sasl as a server"
22531 The &(cyrus_sasl)& authenticator has four private options. It puts the
22532 username (on a successful authentication) into &$1$&.
22534 .option server_hostname cyrus_sasl string&!! &`$primary_hostname`&
22535 This option selects the hostname that is used when communicating with
22536 the library. It is up to the underlying SASL plug-in what it does with
22540 .option server_mech cyrus_sasl string &`public_name`&
22541 This option selects the authentication mechanism this driver should
22542 use. It allows you to use a different underlying mechanism from the
22543 advertised name. For example:
22546 driver = cyrus_sasl
22547 public_name = X-ANYTHING
22548 server_mech = CRAM-MD5
22552 .option server_realm cyrus_sasl string unset
22553 This specifies the SASL realm that the server claims to be in.
22556 .option server_service cyrus_sasl string &`smtp`&
22557 This is the SASL service that the server claims to implement.
22560 For straightforward cases, you do not need to set any of the authenticator's
22561 private options. All you need to do is to specify an appropriate mechanism as
22562 the public name. Thus, if you have a SASL library that supports CRAM-MD5 and
22563 PLAIN, you could have two authenticators as follows:
22566 driver = cyrus_sasl
22567 public_name = CRAM-MD5
22571 driver = cyrus_sasl
22572 public_name = PLAIN
22575 Cyrus SASL does implement the LOGIN authentication method, even though it is
22576 not a standard method. It is disabled by default in the source distribution,
22577 but it is present in many binary distributions.
22582 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22583 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22585 .chapter "The spa authenticator"
22586 .cindex "&(spa)& authenticator"
22587 .cindex "authenticators" "&(spa)&"
22588 .cindex "authentication" "Microsoft Secure Password"
22589 .cindex "authentication" "NTLM"
22590 .cindex "Microsoft Secure Password Authentication"
22591 .cindex "NTLM authentication"
22592 The &(spa)& authenticator provides client support for Microsoft's &'Secure
22593 Password Authentication'& mechanism,
22594 which is also sometimes known as NTLM (NT LanMan). The code for client side of
22595 this authenticator was contributed by Marc Prud'hommeaux, and much of it is
22596 taken from the Samba project (&url(http://www.samba.org)). The code for the
22597 server side was subsequently contributed by Tom Kistner. The mechanism works as
22601 After the AUTH command has been accepted, the client sends an SPA
22602 authentication request based on the user name and optional domain.
22604 The server sends back a challenge.
22606 The client builds a challenge response which makes use of the user's password
22607 and sends it to the server, which then accepts or rejects it.
22610 Encryption is used to protect the password in transit.
22614 .section "Using spa as a server"
22615 .cindex "options" "&(spa)& authenticator (server)"
22616 The &(spa)& authenticator has just one server option:
22618 .option server_password spa string&!! unset
22619 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &(spa)& authenticator"
22620 This option is expanded, and the result must be the cleartext password for the
22621 authenticating user, whose name is at this point in &$1$&. For example:
22626 server_password = ${lookup{$1}lsearch{/etc/exim/spa_clearpass}\
22629 If the expansion is forced to fail, authentication fails. Any other expansion
22630 failure causes a temporary error code to be returned.
22636 .section "Using spa as a client"
22637 .cindex "options" "&(spa)& authenticator (client)"
22638 The &(spa)& authenticator has the following client options:
22642 .option client_domain spa string&!! unset
22643 This option specifies an optional domain for the authentication.
22646 .option client_password spa string&!! unset
22647 This option specifies the user's password, and must be set.
22650 .option client_username spa string&!! unset
22651 This option specifies the user name, and must be set. Here is an example of a
22652 configuration of this authenticator for use with the mail servers at
22658 client_username = msn/msn_username
22659 client_password = msn_plaintext_password
22660 client_domain = DOMAIN_OR_UNSET
22667 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22668 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
22670 .chapter "Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL" "CHAPTLS" &&&
22671 "Encrypted SMTP connections"
22672 .cindex "encryption" "on SMTP connection"
22673 .cindex "SMTP" "encryption"
22674 .cindex "TLS" "on SMTP connection"
22677 Support for TLS (Transport Layer Security), formerly known as SSL (Secure
22678 Sockets Layer), is implemented by making use of the OpenSSL library or the
22679 GnuTLS library (Exim requires GnuTLS release 1.0 or later). There is no
22680 cryptographic code in the Exim distribution itself for implementing TLS. In
22681 order to use this feature you must install OpenSSL or GnuTLS, and then build a
22682 version of Exim that includes TLS support (see section &<<SECTinctlsssl>>&).
22683 You also need to understand the basic concepts of encryption at a managerial
22684 level, and in particular, the way that public keys, private keys, and
22685 certificates are used.
22687 RFC 3207 defines how SMTP connections can make use of encryption. Once a
22688 connection is established, the client issues a STARTTLS command. If the
22689 server accepts this, the client and the server negotiate an encryption
22690 mechanism. If the negotiation succeeds, the data that subsequently passes
22691 between them is encrypted.
22693 Exim's ACLs can detect whether the current SMTP session is encrypted or not,
22694 and if so, what cipher suite is in use, whether the client supplied a
22695 certificate, and whether or not that certificate was verified. This makes it
22696 possible for an Exim server to deny or accept certain commands based on the
22699 &*Warning*&: Certain types of firewall and certain anti-virus products can
22700 disrupt TLS connections. You need to turn off SMTP scanning for these products
22701 in order to get TLS to work.
22705 .section "Support for the legacy &""ssmtp""& (aka &""smtps""&) protocol"
22706 .cindex "ssmtp protocol"
22707 .cindex "smtps protocol"
22708 .cindex "SMTP" "ssmtp protocol"
22709 .cindex "SMTP" "smtps protocol"
22710 Early implementations of encrypted SMTP used a different TCP port from normal
22711 SMTP, and expected an encryption negotiation to start immediately, instead of
22712 waiting for a STARTTLS command from the client using the standard SMTP
22713 port. The protocol was called &"ssmtp"& or &"smtps"&, and port 465 was
22714 allocated for this purpose.
22716 This approach was abandoned when encrypted SMTP was standardised, but there are
22717 still some legacy clients that use it. Exim supports these clients by means of
22718 the &%tls_on_connect_ports%& global option. Its value must be a list of port
22719 numbers; the most common use is expected to be:
22721 tls_on_connect_ports = 465
22723 The port numbers specified by this option apply to all SMTP connections, both
22724 via the daemon and via &'inetd'&. You still need to specify all the ports that
22725 the daemon uses (by setting &%daemon_smtp_ports%& or &%local_interfaces%& or
22726 the &%-oX%& command line option) because &%tls_on_connect_ports%& does not add
22727 an extra port &-- rather, it specifies different behaviour on a port that is
22730 There is also a &%-tls-on-connect%& command line option. This overrides
22731 &%tls_on_connect_ports%&; it forces the legacy behaviour for all ports.
22738 .section "OpenSSL vs GnuTLS" "SECTopenvsgnu"
22739 .cindex "TLS" "OpenSSL &'vs'& GnuTLS"
22740 The first TLS support in Exim was implemented using OpenSSL. Support for GnuTLS
22741 followed later, when the first versions of GnuTLS were released. To build Exim
22742 to use GnuTLS, you need to set
22746 in Local/Makefile, in addition to
22750 You must also set TLS_LIBS and TLS_INCLUDE appropriately, so that the
22751 include files and libraries for GnuTLS can be found.
22753 There are some differences in usage when using GnuTLS instead of OpenSSL:
22756 The &%tls_verify_certificates%& option must contain the name of a file, not the
22757 name of a directory (for OpenSSL it can be either).
22759 The &%tls_dhparam%& option is ignored, because early versions of GnuTLS had no
22760 facility for varying its Diffie-Hellman parameters. I understand that this has
22761 changed, but Exim has not been updated to provide this facility.
22763 .cindex "&$tls_peerdn$&"
22764 Distinguished Name (DN) strings reported by the OpenSSL library use a slash for
22765 separating fields; GnuTLS uses commas, in accordance with RFC 2253. This
22766 affects the value of the &$tls_peerdn$& variable.
22768 OpenSSL identifies cipher suites using hyphens as separators, for example:
22769 DES-CBC3-SHA. GnuTLS uses underscores, for example: RSA_ARCFOUR_SHA. What is
22770 more, OpenSSL complains if underscores are present in a cipher list. To make
22771 life simpler, Exim changes underscores to hyhens for OpenSSL and hyphens to
22772 underscores for GnuTLS when processing lists of cipher suites in the
22773 &%tls_require_ciphers%& options (the global option and the &(smtp)& transport
22776 The &%tls_require_ciphers%& options operate differently, as described in the
22777 sections &<<SECTreqciphssl>>& and &<<SECTreqciphgnu>>&.
22781 .section "GnuTLS parameter computation"
22782 GnuTLS uses RSA and D-H parameters that take a substantial amount of time to
22783 compute. It is unreasonable to re-compute them for every TLS session.
22784 Therefore, Exim keeps this data in a file in its spool directory, called
22785 &_gnutls-params_&. The file is owned by the Exim user and is readable only by
22786 its owner. Every Exim process that start up GnuTLS reads the RSA and D-H
22787 parameters from this file. If the file does not exist, the first Exim process
22788 that needs it computes the data and writes it to a temporary file which is
22789 renamed once it is complete. It does not matter if several Exim processes do
22790 this simultaneously (apart from wasting a few resources). Once a file is in
22791 place, new Exim processes immediately start using it.
22794 For maximum security, the parameters that are stored in this file should be
22795 recalculated periodically, the frequency depending on your paranoia level.
22796 Arranging this is easy in principle; just delete the file when you want new
22797 values to be computed. However, there may be a problem. The calculation of new
22798 parameters needs random numbers, and these are obtained from &_/dev/random_&.
22799 If the system is not very active, &_/dev/random_& may delay returning data
22800 until enough randomness (entropy) is available. This may cause Exim to hang for
22801 a substantial amount of time, causing timeouts on incoming connections.
22803 The solution is to generate the parameters externally to Exim. They are stored
22804 in &_gnutls-params_& in PEM format, which means that they can be generated
22805 externally using the &(certtool)& command that is part of GnuTLS.
22807 To replace the parameters with new ones, instead of deleting the file
22808 and letting Exim re-create it, you can generate new parameters using
22809 &(certtool)& and, when this has been done, replace Exim's cache file by
22810 renaming. The relevant commands are something like this:
22814 # chown exim:exim new-params
22815 # chmod 0400 new-params
22816 # certtool --generate-privkey --bits 512 >new-params
22817 # echo "" >>new-params
22818 # certtool --generate-dh-params --bits 1024 >> new-params
22819 # mv new-params gnutls-params
22821 If Exim never has to generate the parameters itself, the possibility of
22822 stalling is removed.
22826 .section "Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL" "SECTreqciphssl"
22827 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers (OpenSSL)"
22828 .cindex "&%tls_require_ciphers%&" "OpenSSL"
22829 There is a function in the OpenSSL library that can be passed a list of cipher
22830 suites before the cipher negotiation takes place. This specifies which ciphers
22831 are acceptable. The list is colon separated and may contain names like
22832 DES-CBC3-SHA. Exim passes the expanded value of &%tls_require_ciphers%&
22833 directly to this function call. The following quotation from the OpenSSL
22834 documentation specifies what forms of item are allowed in the cipher string:
22837 It can consist of a single cipher suite such as RC4-SHA.
22839 It can represent a list of cipher suites containing a certain algorithm,
22840 or cipher suites of a certain type. For example SHA1 represents all
22841 ciphers suites using the digest algorithm SHA1 and SSLv3 represents all
22844 Lists of cipher suites can be combined in a single cipher string using
22845 the + character. This is used as a logical and operation. For example
22846 SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES
22850 Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by one of the characters &`!`&,
22853 If &`!`& is used, the ciphers are permanently deleted from the list. The
22854 ciphers deleted can never reappear in the list even if they are explicitly
22857 If &`-`& is used, the ciphers are deleted from the list, but some or all
22858 of the ciphers can be added again by later options.
22860 If &`+`& is used, the ciphers are moved to the end of the list. This
22861 option does not add any new ciphers; it just moves matching existing ones.
22864 If none of these characters is present, the string is interpreted as
22865 a list of ciphers to be appended to the current preference list. If the list
22866 includes any ciphers already present they will be ignored: that is, they will
22867 not be moved to the end of the list.
22873 .section "Requiring specific ciphers in GnuTLS" "SECTreqciphgnu"
22874 .cindex "TLS" "requiring specific ciphers (GnuTLS)"
22875 .cindex "&%tls_require_ciphers%&" "GnuTLS"
22876 The GnuTLS library does not have a combined function like OpenSSL. Instead,
22877 it allows the caller to specify separate lists of key-exchange methods,
22878 main cipher algorithms, and MAC algorithms. Unfortunately, these lists are
22879 numerical, and the library does not have a function for turning names into
22880 numbers. Consequently, the list of recognized names has to be built into
22883 At present, Exim permits only the list of main cipher algorithms to be
22884 changed. The &%tls_require_ciphers%& option is in the same format as for
22885 OpenSSL. Exim searches each item for the name of available algorithm. For
22886 example, if the list contains RSA_AES_SHA then AES is recognized.
22888 The cipher algorithms list starts out with a default set of algorithms. If
22889 the first item in &%tls_require_ciphers%& does &'not'& start with an
22890 exclamation mark, all the default items are deleted. Thus, only those specified
22891 can be used. If the first item in &%tls_require_ciphers%& &'does'& start with
22892 an exclamation mark, the defaults are left on the list.
22894 Then, any item that starts with an exclamation mark causes the relevant
22895 algorithms to be removed from the list, and any item that does not start
22896 with an exclamation mark causes the relevant algorithms to be added to the
22899 tls_require_ciphers = !RSA_ARCFOUR_SHA
22901 allows all the defaults except those that use ARCFOUR, whereas
22903 tls_require_ciphers = AES : 3DES
22905 allows only cipher suites that use AES and 3DES. The currently recognized
22906 algorithms are: AES_256, AES_128, AES (both of the preceding), 3DES, and
22907 ARCFOUR_128. Unrecognized algorithms are ignored. In a server, the order of the
22908 list is unimportant; the server will advertise the availability of all the
22909 relevant cipher suites. However, in a client, the order of the list specifies a
22910 preference order for the algorithms. The first one in the client's list that is
22911 also advertised by the server is tried first. The default order is as listed
22917 .section "Configuring an Exim server to use TLS"
22918 .cindex "TLS" "configuring an Exim server"
22919 When Exim has been built with TLS support, it advertises the availability of
22920 the STARTTLS command to client hosts that match &%tls_advertise_hosts%&,
22921 but not to any others. The default value of this option is unset, which means
22922 that STARTTLS is not advertised at all. This default is chosen because you
22923 need to set some other options in order to make TLS avaliable, and also it is
22924 sensible for systems that want to use TLS only as a client.
22926 If a client issues a STARTTLS command and there is some configuration
22927 problem in the server, the command is rejected with a 454 error. If the client
22928 persists in trying to issue SMTP commands, all except QUIT are rejected
22931 554 Security failure
22933 If a STARTTLS command is issued within an existing TLS session, it is
22934 rejected with a 554 error code.
22936 To enable TLS operations on a server, you must set &%tls_advertise_hosts%& to
22937 match some hosts. You can, of course, set it to * to match all hosts.
22938 However, this is not all you need to do. TLS sessions to a server won't work
22939 without some further configuration at the server end.
22941 It is rumoured that all existing clients that support TLS/SSL use RSA
22942 encryption. To make this work you need to set, in the server,
22944 tls_certificate = /some/file/name
22945 tls_privatekey = /some/file/name
22947 The first file contains the server's X509 certificate, and the second contains
22948 the private key that goes with it. These files need to be readable by the Exim
22949 user, and must always be given as full path names. They can be the same file if
22950 both the certificate and the key are contained within it. If &%tls_privatekey%&
22951 is not set, this is assumed to be the case. The certificate file may also
22952 contain intermediate certificates that need to be sent to the client to enable
22953 it to authenticate the server's certificate.
22955 If you do not understand about certificates and keys, please try to find a
22956 source of this background information, which is not Exim-specific. (There are a
22957 few comments below in section &<<SECTcerandall>>&.)
22959 &*Note*&: These options do not apply when Exim is operating as a client &--
22960 they apply only in the case of a server. For a client, you must set the options
22961 of the same name in an &(smtp)& transport.
22963 With just these options, Exim will work as a server with clients such as
22964 Netscape. It does not require the client to have a certificate (but see below
22965 for how to insist on this). There is one other option that may be needed in
22966 other situations. If
22968 tls_dhparam = /some/file/name
22970 is set, the SSL library is initialized for the use of Diffie-Hellman ciphers
22971 with the parameters contained in the file. This increases the set of cipher
22972 suites that the server supports. See the command
22976 for a way of generating this data.
22977 At present, &%tls_dhparam%& is used only when Exim is linked with OpenSSL. It
22978 is ignored if GnuTLS is being used.
22980 The strings supplied for these three options are expanded every time a client
22981 host connects. It is therefore possible to use different certificates and keys
22982 for different hosts, if you so wish, by making use of the client's IP address
22983 in &$sender_host_address$& to control the expansion. If a string expansion is
22984 forced to fail, Exim behaves as if the option is not set.
22986 .cindex "cipher" "logging"
22987 .cindex "log" "TLS cipher"
22988 .cindex "&$tls_cipher$&"
22989 The variable &$tls_cipher$& is set to the cipher suite that was negotiated for
22990 an incoming TLS connection. It is included in the &'Received:'& header of an
22991 incoming message (by default &-- you can, of course, change this), and it is
22992 also included in the log line that records a message's arrival, keyed by
22993 &"X="&, unless the &%tls_cipher%& log selector is turned off. The &%encrypted%&
22994 condition can be used to test for specific cipher suites in ACLs.
22996 The ACLs that run for subsequent SMTP commands can check the name of the cipher
22997 suite and vary their actions accordingly. The cipher suite names are those used
22998 by OpenSSL. These may differ from the names used elsewhere. For example,
22999 OpenSSL uses the name DES-CBC3-SHA for the cipher suite which in other contexts
23000 is known as TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA. Check the OpenSSL
23001 documentation for more details.
23005 .section "Requesting and verifying client certificates"
23006 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
23007 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
23008 If you want an Exim server to request a certificate when negotiating a TLS
23009 session with a client, you must set either &%tls_verify_hosts%& or
23010 &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&. You can, of course, set either of them to * to
23011 apply to all TLS connections. For any host that matches one of these options,
23012 Exim requests a certificate as part of the setup of the TLS session. The
23013 contents of the certificate are verified by comparing it with a list of
23014 expected certificates. These must be available in a file or,
23015 for OpenSSL only (not GnuTLS), a directory, identified by
23016 &%tls_verify_certificates%&.
23018 A file can contain multiple certificates, concatenated end to end. If a
23021 each certificate must be in a separate file, with a name (or a symbolic link)
23022 of the form <&'hash'&>.0, where <&'hash'&> is a hash value constructed from the
23023 certificate. You can compute the relevant hash by running the command
23025 openssl x509 -hash -noout -in /cert/file
23027 where &_/cert/file_& contains a single certificate.
23029 The difference between &%tls_verify_hosts%& and &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& is
23030 what happens if the client does not supply a certificate, or if the certificate
23031 does not match any of the certificates in the collection named by
23032 &%tls_verify_certificates%&. If the client matches &%tls_verify_hosts%&, the
23033 attempt to set up a TLS session is aborted, and the incoming connection is
23034 dropped. If the client matches &%tls_try_verify_hosts%&, the (encrypted) SMTP
23035 session continues. ACLs that run for subsequent SMTP commands can detect the
23036 fact that no certificate was verified, and vary their actions accordingly. For
23037 example, you can insist on a certificate before accepting a message for
23038 relaying, but not when the message is destined for local delivery.
23040 .cindex "&$tls_peerdn$&"
23041 When a client supplies a certificate (whether it verifies or not), the value of
23042 the Distinguished Name of the certificate is made available in the variable
23043 &$tls_peerdn$& during subsequent processing of the message.
23045 .cindex "log" "distinguished name"
23046 Because it is often a long text string, it is not included in the log line or
23047 &'Received:'& header by default. You can arrange for it to be logged, keyed by
23048 &"DN="&, by setting the &%tls_peerdn%& log selector, and you can use
23049 &%received_header_text%& to change the &'Received:'& header. When no
23050 certificate is supplied, &$tls_peerdn$& is empty.
23053 .section "Revoked certificates"
23054 .cindex "TLS" "revoked certificates"
23055 .cindex "revocation list"
23056 .cindex "certificate" "revocation list"
23057 Certificate issuing authorities issue Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) when
23058 certificates are revoked. If you have such a list, you can pass it to an Exim
23059 server using the global option called &%tls_crl%& and to an Exim client using
23060 an identically named option for the &(smtp)& transport. In each case, the value
23061 of the option is expanded and must then be the name of a file that contains a
23065 .section "Configuring an Exim client to use TLS"
23066 .cindex "cipher" "logging"
23067 .cindex "log" "TLS cipher"
23068 .cindex "log" "distinguished name"
23069 .cindex "TLS" "configuring an Exim client"
23070 The &%tls_cipher%& and &%tls_peerdn%& log selectors apply to outgoing SMTP
23071 deliveries as well as to incoming, the latter one causing logging of the
23072 server certificate's DN. The remaining client configuration for TLS is all
23073 within the &(smtp)& transport.
23075 It is not necessary to set any options to have TLS work in the &(smtp)&
23076 transport. If Exim is built with TLS support, and TLS is advertised by a
23077 server, the &(smtp)& transport always tries to start a TLS session. However,
23078 this can be prevented by setting &%hosts_avoid_tls%& (an option of the
23079 transport) to a list of server hosts for which TLS should not be used.
23081 If you do not want Exim to attempt to send messages unencrypted when an attempt
23082 to set up an encrypted connection fails in any way, you can set
23083 &%hosts_require_tls%& to a list of hosts for which encryption is mandatory. For
23084 those hosts, delivery is always deferred if an encrypted connection cannot be
23085 set up. If there are any other hosts for the address, they are tried in the
23088 When the server host is not in &%hosts_require_tls%&, Exim may try to deliver
23089 the message unencrypted. It always does this if the response to STARTTLS is
23090 a 5&'xx'& code. For a temporary error code, or for a failure to negotiate a TLS
23091 session after a success response code, what happens is controlled by the
23092 &%tls_tempfail_tryclear%& option of the &(smtp)& transport. If it is false,
23093 delivery to this host is deferred, and other hosts (if available) are tried. If
23094 it is true, Exim attempts to deliver unencrypted after a 4&'xx'& response to
23095 STARTTLS, and if STARTTLS is accepted, but the subsequent TLS
23096 negotiation fails, Exim closes the current connection (because it is in an
23097 unknown state), opens a new one to the same host, and then tries the delivery
23101 The &%tls_certificate%& and &%tls_privatekey%& options of the &(smtp)&
23102 transport provide the client with a certificate, which is passed to the server
23103 if it requests it. If the server is Exim, it will request a certificate only if
23104 &%tls_verify_hosts%& or &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& matches the client. &*Note*&:
23105 These options must be set in the &(smtp)& transport for Exim to use TLS when it
23106 is operating as a client. Exim does not assume that a server certificate (set
23107 by the global options of the same name) should also be used when operating as a
23110 If &%tls_verify_certificates%& is set, it must name a file or,
23111 for OpenSSL only (not GnuTLS), a directory, that contains a collection of
23112 expected server certificates. The client verifies the server's certificate
23113 against this collection, taking into account any revoked certificates that are
23114 in the list defined by &%tls_crl%&.
23117 &%tls_require_ciphers%& is set on the &(smtp)& transport, it must contain a
23118 list of permitted cipher suites. If either of these checks fails, delivery to
23119 the current host is abandoned, and the &(smtp)& transport tries to deliver to
23120 alternative hosts, if any.
23123 .cindex "&$host_address$&"
23124 All the TLS options in the &(smtp)& transport are expanded before use, with
23125 &$host$& and &$host_address$& containing the name and address of the server to
23126 which the client is connected. Forced failure of an expansion causes Exim to
23127 behave as if the relevant option were unset.
23131 .section "Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection" &&&
23133 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries with TLS"
23134 .cindex "TLS" "multiple message deliveries"
23135 Exim sends multiple messages down the same TCP/IP connection by starting up
23136 an entirely new delivery process for each message, passing the socket from
23137 one process to the next. This implementation does not fit well with the use
23138 of TLS, because there is quite a lot of state information associated with a TLS
23139 connection, not just a socket identification. Passing all the state information
23140 to a new process is not feasible. Consequently, Exim shuts down an existing TLS
23141 session before passing the socket to a new process. The new process may then
23142 try to start a new TLS session, and if successful, may try to re-authenticate
23143 if AUTH is in use, before sending the next message.
23145 The RFC is not clear as to whether or not an SMTP session continues in clear
23146 after TLS has been shut down, or whether TLS may be restarted again later, as
23147 just described. However, if the server is Exim, this shutdown and
23148 reinitialization works. It is not known which (if any) other servers operate
23149 successfully if the client closes a TLS session and continues with unencrypted
23150 SMTP, but there are certainly some that do not work. For such servers, Exim
23151 should not pass the socket to another process, because the failure of the
23152 subsequent attempt to use it would cause Exim to record a temporary host error,
23153 and delay other deliveries to that host.
23155 To test for this case, Exim sends an EHLO command to the server after
23156 closing down the TLS session. If this fails in any way, the connection is
23157 closed instead of being passed to a new delivery process, but no retry
23158 information is recorded.
23160 There is also a manual override; you can set &%hosts_nopass_tls%& on the
23161 &(smtp)& transport to match those hosts for which Exim should not pass
23162 connections to new processes if TLS has been used.
23167 .section "Certificates and all that" "SECTcerandall"
23168 .cindex "certificate" "references to discussion"
23169 In order to understand fully how TLS works, you need to know about
23170 certificates, certificate signing, and certificate authorities. This is not the
23171 place to give a tutorial, especially as I do not know very much about it
23172 myself. Some helpful introduction can be found in the FAQ for the SSL addition
23173 to Apache, currently at
23175 &url(http://www.modssl.org/docs/2.7/ssl_faq.html#ToC24)
23177 Other parts of the &'modssl'& documentation are also helpful, and have
23178 links to further files.
23179 Eric Rescorla's book, &'SSL and TLS'&, published by Addison-Wesley (ISBN
23180 0-201-61598-3), contains both introductory and more in-depth descriptions.
23181 Some sample programs taken from the book are available from
23183 &url(http://www.rtfm.com/openssl-examples/)
23187 .section "Certificate chains"
23188 The file named by &%tls_certificate%& may contain more than one
23189 certificate. This is useful in the case where the certificate that is being
23190 sent is validated by an intermediate certificate which the other end does
23191 not have. Multiple certificates must be in the correct order in the file.
23192 First the host's certificate itself, then the first intermediate
23193 certificate to validate the issuer of the host certificate, then the next
23194 intermediate certificate to validate the issuer of the first intermediate
23195 certificate, and so on, until finally (optionally) the root certificate.
23196 The root certificate must already be trusted by the recipient for
23197 validation to succeed, of course, but if it's not preinstalled, sending the
23198 root certificate along with the rest makes it available for the user to
23199 install if the receiving end is a client MUA that can interact with a user.
23202 .section "Self-signed certificates"
23203 .cindex "certificate" "self-signed"
23204 You can create a self-signed certificate using the &'req'& command provided
23205 with OpenSSL, like this:
23207 openssl req -x509 -newkey rsa:1024 -keyout file1 -out file2 \
23210 &_file1_& and &_file2_& can be the same file; the key and the certificate are
23211 delimited and so can be identified independently. The &%-days%& option
23212 specifies a period for which the certificate is valid. The &%-nodes%& option is
23213 important: if you do not set it, the key is encrypted with a passphrase
23214 that you are prompted for, and any use that is made of the key causes more
23215 prompting for the passphrase. This is not helpful if you are going to use
23216 this certificate and key in an MTA, where prompting is not possible.
23218 A self-signed certificate made in this way is sufficient for testing, and
23219 may be adequate for all your requirements if you are mainly interested in
23220 encrypting transfers, and not in secure identification.
23222 However, many clients require that the certificate presented by the server be a
23223 user (also called &"leaf"& or &"site"&) certificate, and not a self-signed
23224 certificate. In this situation, the self-signed certificate described above
23225 must be installed on the client host as a trusted root &'certification
23226 authority'& (CA), and the certificate used by Exim must be a user certificate
23227 signed with that self-signed certificate.
23229 For information on creating self-signed CA certificates and using them to sign
23230 user certificates, see the &'General implementation overview'& chapter of the
23231 Open-source PKI book, available online at
23232 &url(http://ospkibook.sourceforge.net/).
23236 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
23237 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
23239 .chapter "Access control lists" "CHAPACL"
23240 .cindex "&ACL;" "description"
23241 .cindex "control of incoming mail"
23242 .cindex "message" "controlling incoming"
23243 .cindex "policy control" "access control lists"
23244 Access Control Lists (ACLs) are defined in a separate section of the run time
23245 configuration file, headed by &"begin acl"&. Each ACL definition starts with a
23246 name, terminated by a colon. Here is a complete ACL section that contains just
23247 one very small ACL:
23252 accept hosts = one.host.only
23254 You can have as many lists as you like in the ACL section, and the order in
23255 which they appear does not matter. The lists are self-terminating.
23257 The majority of ACLs are used to control Exim's behaviour when it receives
23258 certain SMTP commands. This applies both to incoming TCP/IP connections, and
23259 when a local process submits a message using SMTP by specifying the &%-bs%&
23260 option. The most common use is for controlling which recipients are accepted
23261 in incoming messages. In addition, you can define an ACL that is used to check
23262 local non-SMTP messages. The default configuration file contains an example of
23263 a realistic ACL for checking RCPT commands. This is discussed in chapter
23264 &<<CHAPdefconfil>>&.
23267 .section "Testing ACLs"
23268 The &%-bh%& command line option provides a way of testing your ACL
23269 configuration locally by running a fake SMTP session with which you interact.
23270 The host &'relay-test.mail-abuse.org'& provides a service for checking your
23271 relaying configuration (see section &<<SECTcheralcon>>& for more details).
23275 .section "Specifying when ACLs are used"
23276 .cindex "&ACL;" "options for specifying"
23277 In order to cause an ACL to be used, you have to name it in one of the relevant
23278 options in the main part of the configuration. These options are:
23279 .cindex "AUTH" "ACL for"
23280 .cindex "DATA" "ACLs for"
23281 .cindex "ETRN" "ACL for"
23282 .cindex "EXPN" "ACL for"
23283 .cindex "HELO" "ACL for"
23284 .cindex "EHLO" "ACL for"
23285 .cindex "MAIL" "ACL for"
23286 .cindex "QUIT" "ACL for"
23287 .cindex "RCPT" "ACL for"
23288 .cindex "STARTTLS" "ACL for"
23289 .cindex "VRFY" "ACL for"
23290 .cindex "SMTP connection" "ACL for"
23291 .cindex "non-smtp message" "ACL for"
23294 .row &~&%acl_not_smtp%& "ACL for non-SMTP messages"
23295 .row &~&%acl_smtp_auth%& "ACL for AUTH"
23296 .row &~&%acl_smtp_connect%& "ACL for start of SMTP connection"
23297 .row &~&%acl_smtp_data%& "ACL after DATA is complete"
23298 .row &~&%acl_smtp_etrn%& "ACL for ETRN"
23299 .row &~&%acl_smtp_expn%& "ACL for EXPN"
23300 .row &~&%acl_smtp_helo%& "ACL for HELO or EHLO"
23301 .row &~&%acl_smtp_mail%& "ACL for MAIL"
23302 .row &~&%acl_smtp_mailauth%& "ACL for the AUTH parameter of MAIL"
23303 .row &~&%acl_smtp_mime%& "ACL for content-scanning MIME parts"
23304 .row &~&%acl_smtp_predata%& "ACL at start of DATA command"
23305 .row &~&%acl_smtp_quit%& "ACL for QUIT"
23306 .row &~&%acl_smtp_rcpt%& "ACL for RCPT"
23307 .row &~&%acl_smtp_starttls%& "ACL for STARTTLS"
23308 .row &~&%acl_smtp_vrfy%& "ACL for VRFY"
23311 For example, if you set
23313 acl_smtp_rcpt = small_acl
23315 the little ACL defined above is used whenever Exim receives a RCPT command
23316 in an SMTP dialogue. The majority of policy tests on incoming messages can be
23317 done when RCPT commands arrive. A rejection of RCPT should cause the
23318 sending MTA to give up on the recipient address contained in the RCPT
23319 command, whereas rejection at other times may cause the client MTA to keep on
23320 trying to deliver the message. It is therefore recommended that you do as much
23321 testing as possible at RCPT time.
23324 .section "The non-SMTP ACL"
23325 .cindex "non-smtp message" "ACL for"
23326 The non-SMTP ACL applies to all non-interactive incoming messages, that is, it
23327 applies to batch SMTP as well as to non-SMTP messages. (Batch SMTP is not
23328 really SMTP.) This ACL is run just before the &[local_scan()]& function. Any
23329 kind of rejection is treated as permanent, because there is no way of sending a
23330 temporary error for these kinds of message. Many of the ACL conditions (for
23331 example, host tests, and tests on the state of the SMTP connection such as
23332 encryption and authentication) are not relevant and are forbidden in this ACL.
23335 .section "The connect ACL"
23336 .cindex "SMTP connection" "ACL for"
23337 The ACL test specified by &%acl_smtp_connect%& happens after the test specified
23338 by &%host_reject_connection%& (which is now an anomaly) and any TCP Wrappers
23339 testing (if configured).
23342 .section "The DATA ACLs"
23343 .cindex "DATA" "ACLs for"
23344 Two ACLs are associated with the DATA command, because it is two-stage
23345 command, with two responses being sent to the client.
23346 When the DATA command is received, the ACL defined by &%acl_smtp_predata%&
23347 is obeyed. This gives you control after all the RCPT commands, but before
23348 the message itself is received. It offers the opportunity to give a negative
23349 response to the DATA command before the data is transmitted. Header lines
23350 added by MAIL or RCPT ACLs are not visible at this time, but any that
23351 are defined here are visible when the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL is run.
23353 You cannot test the contents of the message, for example, to verify addresses
23354 in the headers, at RCPT time or when the DATA command is received. Such
23355 tests have to appear in the ACL that is run after the message itself has been
23356 received, before the final response to the DATA command is sent. This is
23357 the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_data%&, which is the second ACL that is
23358 associated with the DATA command.
23360 For both of these ACLs, it is not possible to reject individual recipients. An
23361 error response rejects the entire message. Unfortunately, it is known that some
23362 MTAs do not treat hard (5&'xx'&) responses to the DATA command (either
23363 before or after the data) correctly &-- they keep the message on their queues
23364 and try again later, but that is their problem, though it does waste some of
23368 .section "The MIME ACL"
23369 The &%acl_smtp_mime%& option is available only when Exim is compiled with the
23370 content-scanning extension. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
23373 .section "The QUIT ACL" "SECTQUITACL"
23374 .cindex "QUIT" "ACL for"
23375 The ACL for the SMTP QUIT command is anomalous, in that the outcome of the ACL
23376 does not affect the response code to QUIT, which is always 221. Thus, the ACL
23377 does not in fact control any access. For this reason, the only verbs that are
23378 permitted are &%accept%& and &%warn%&.
23380 This ACL can be used for tasks such as custom logging at the end of an SMTP
23381 session. For example, you can use ACL variables in other ACLs to count
23382 messages, recipients, etc., and log the totals at QUIT time using one or
23383 more &%logwrite%& modifiers on a &%warn%& verb.
23386 &*Warning*&: Only the &$acl_c$&&'x'& variables can be used for this, because
23387 the &$acl_m$&&'x'& variables are reset at the end of each incoming message.
23390 You do not need to have a final &%accept%&, but if you do, you can use a
23391 &%message%& modifier to specify custom text that is sent as part of the 221
23394 This ACL is run only for a &"normal"& QUIT. For certain kinds of disastrous
23395 failure (for example, failure to open a log file, or when Exim is bombing out
23396 because it has detected an unrecoverable error), all SMTP commands from the
23397 client are given temporary error responses until QUIT is received or the
23398 connection is closed. In these special cases, the QUIT ACL does not run.
23402 .section "Finding an ACL to use"
23403 .cindex "&ACL;" "finding which to use"
23404 The value of an &%acl_smtp_%&&'xxx'& option is expanded before use, so you can
23405 use different ACLs in different circumstances. The resulting string does not
23406 have to be the name of an ACL in the configuration file; there are other
23407 possibilities. Having expanded the string, Exim searches for an ACL as follows:
23410 If the string begins with a slash, Exim uses it as a file name, and reads its
23411 contents as an ACL. The lines are processed in the same way as lines in the
23412 Exim configuration file. In particular, continuation lines are supported, blank
23413 lines are ignored, as are lines whose first non-whitespace character is &"#"&.
23414 If the file does not exist or cannot be read, an error occurs (typically
23415 causing a temporary failure of whatever caused the ACL to be run). For example:
23417 acl_smtp_data = /etc/acls/\
23418 ${lookup{$sender_host_address}lsearch\
23419 {/etc/acllist}{$value}{default}}
23421 This looks up an ACL file to use on the basis of the host's IP address, falling
23422 back to a default if the lookup fails. If an ACL is successfully read from a
23423 file, it is retained in memory for the duration of the Exim process, so that it
23424 can be re-used without having to re-read the file.
23426 If the string does not start with a slash, and does not contain any spaces,
23427 Exim searches the ACL section of the configuration for an ACL whose name
23428 matches the string.
23430 If no named ACL is found, or if the string contains spaces, Exim parses
23431 the string as an inline ACL. This can save typing in cases where you just
23432 want to have something like
23434 acl_smtp_vrfy = accept
23436 in order to allow free use of the VRFY command. Such a string may contain
23437 newlines; it is processed in the same way as an ACL that is read from a file.
23443 .section "ACL return codes"
23444 .cindex "&ACL;" "return codes"
23445 Except for the QUIT ACL, which does not affect the SMTP return code (see
23446 section &<<SECTQUITACL>>& above), the result of running an ACL is either
23447 &"accept"& or &"deny"&, or, if some test cannot be completed (for example, if a
23448 database is down), &"defer"&. These results cause 2&'xx'&, 5&'xx'&, and 4&'xx'&
23449 return codes, respectively, to be used in the SMTP dialogue. A fourth return,
23450 &"error"&, occurs when there is an error such as invalid syntax in the ACL.
23451 This also causes a 4&'xx'& return code.
23453 For the non-SMTP ACL, &"defer"& and &"error"& are treated in the same way as
23454 &"deny"&, because there is no mechanism for passing temporary errors to the
23455 submitters of non-SMTP messages.
23458 ACLs that are relevant to message reception may also return &"discard"&. This
23459 has the effect of &"accept"&, but causes either the entire message or an
23460 individual recipient address to be discarded. In other words, it is a
23461 blackholing facility. Use it with care.
23463 If the ACL for MAIL returns &"discard"&, all recipients are discarded, and no
23464 ACL is run for subsequent RCPT commands. The effect of &"discard"& in a
23465 RCPT ACL is to discard just the one recipient address. If there are no
23466 recipients left when the message's data is received, the DATA ACL is not
23467 run. A &"discard"& return from the DATA or the non-SMTP ACL discards all the
23468 remaining recipients. The &"discard"& return is not permitted for the
23469 &%acl_smtp_predata%& ACL.
23472 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "when all recipients discarded"
23473 The &[local_scan()]& function is always run, even if there are no remaining
23474 recipients; it may create new recipients.
23478 .section "Unset ACL options"
23479 .cindex "&ACL;" "unset options"
23480 The default actions when any of the &%acl_%&&'xxx'& options are unset are not
23481 all the same. &*Note*&: These defaults apply only when the relevant ACL is
23482 not defined at all. For any defined ACL, the default action when control
23483 reaches the end of the ACL statements is &"deny"&.
23485 For &%acl_not_smtp%&, &%acl_smtp_auth%&, &%acl_smtp_connect%&,
23486 &%acl_smtp_data%&, &%acl_smtp_helo%&, &%acl_smtp_mail%&, &%acl_smtp_mailauth%&,
23487 &%acl_smtp_mime%&, &%acl_smtp_predata%&, &%acl_smtp_quit%&, and
23488 &%acl_smtp_starttls%&, the action when the ACL is not defined is &"accept"&.
23490 For the others (&%acl_smtp_etrn%&, &%acl_smtp_expn%&, &%acl_smtp_rcpt%&, and
23491 &%acl_smtp_vrfy%&), the action when the ACL is not defined is &"deny"&.
23492 This means that &%acl_smtp_rcpt%& must be defined in order to receive any
23493 messages over an SMTP connection. For an example, see the ACL in the default
23494 configuration file.
23499 .section "Data for message ACLs"
23500 .cindex "&ACL;" "data for message ACL"
23502 .cindex &$local_part$&
23503 .cindex &$sender_address$&
23504 .cindex &$sender_host_address$&
23505 .cindex &$smtp_command$&
23506 When a MAIL or RCPT ACL, or either of the DATA ACLs, is running, the variables
23507 that contain information about the host and the message's sender (for example,
23508 &$sender_host_address$& and &$sender_address$&) are set, and can be used in ACL
23509 statements. In the case of RCPT (but not MAIL or DATA), &$domain$& and
23510 &$local_part$& are set from the argument address. &new("The entire SMTP command
23511 is available in &$smtp_command$&.")
23513 When an ACL for the AUTH parameter of MAIL is running, the variables that
23514 contain information about the host are set, but &$sender_address$& is not yet
23515 set. Section &<<SECTauthparamail>>& contains a discussion of this parameter and
23518 .cindex "&$message_size$&"
23519 The &$message_size$& variable is set to the value of the SIZE parameter on
23520 the MAIL command at MAIL, RCPT and pre-data time, or to -1 if
23521 that parameter is not given. The value is updated to the true message size by
23522 the time the final DATA ACL is run (after the message data has been
23525 .cindex "&$rcpt_count$&"
23526 .cindex "&$recipients_count$&"
23527 The &$rcpt_count$& variable increases by one for each RCPT command received.
23528 The &$recipients_count$& variable increases by one each time a RCPT command is
23529 accepted, so while an ACL for RCPT is being processed, it contains the number
23530 of previously accepted recipients. At DATA time (for both the DATA ACLs),
23531 &$rcpt_count$& contains the total number of RCPT commands, and
23532 &$recipients_count$& contains the total number of accepted recipients.
23538 .section "Data for non-message ACLs" "SECTdatfornon"
23539 .cindex "&ACL;" "data for non-message ACL"
23540 .cindex &$smtp_command_argument$&
23541 .cindex &$smtp_command$&
23542 When an ACL is being run for AUTH, EHLO, ETRN, EXPN, HELO, STARTTLS, or VRFY,
23543 the remainder of the SMTP command line is placed in &$smtp_command_argument$&,
23544 &new("and the entire SMTP command is available in &$smtp_command$&.")
23545 These variables can be tested using a &%condition%& condition. For example,
23546 here is an ACL for use with AUTH, which insists that either the session is
23547 encrypted, or the CRAM-MD5 authentication method is used. In other words, it
23548 does not permit authentication methods that use cleartext passwords on
23549 unencrypted connections.
23552 accept encrypted = *
23553 accept condition = ${if eq{${uc:$smtp_command_argument}}\
23555 deny message = TLS encryption or CRAM-MD5 required
23557 (Another way of applying this restriction is to arrange for the authenticators
23558 that use cleartext passwords not to be advertised when the connection is not
23559 encrypted. You can use the generic &%server_advertise_condition%& authenticator
23560 option to do this.)
23564 .section "Format of an ACL"
23565 .cindex "&ACL;" "format of"
23566 .cindex "&ACL;" "verbs; definition of"
23567 An individual ACL consists of a number of statements. Each statement starts
23568 with a verb, optionally followed by a number of conditions and &"modifiers"&.
23569 Modifiers can change the way the verb operates, define error and log messages,
23570 set variables, insert delays, and vary the processing of accepted messages.
23572 If all the conditions are met, the verb is obeyed. The same condition may be
23573 used (with different arguments) more than once in the same statement. This
23574 provides a means of specifying an &"and"& conjunction between conditions. For
23577 deny dnslists = list1.example
23578 dnslists = list2.example
23580 If there are no conditions, the verb is always obeyed. Exim stops evaluating
23581 the conditions and modifiers when it reaches a condition that fails. What
23582 happens then depends on the verb (and in one case, on a special modifier). Not
23583 all the conditions make sense at every testing point. For example, you cannot
23584 test a sender address in the ACL that is run for a VRFY command.
23587 .section "ACL verbs"
23588 The ACL verbs are as follows:
23591 .cindex "&%accept%&" "ACL verb"
23592 &%accept%&: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns &"accept"&. If any
23593 of the conditions are not met, what happens depends on whether &%endpass%&
23594 appears among the conditions (for syntax see below). If the failing condition
23595 is before &%endpass%&, control is passed to the next ACL statement; if it is
23596 after &%endpass%&, the ACL returns &"deny"&. Consider this statement, used to
23597 check a RCPT command:
23599 accept domains = +local_domains
23603 If the recipient domain does not match the &%domains%& condition, control
23604 passes to the next statement. If it does match, the recipient is verified, and
23605 the command is accepted if verification succeeds. However, if verification
23606 fails, the ACL yields &"deny"&, because the failing condition is after
23610 .cindex "&%defer%&" "ACL verb"
23611 &%defer%&: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns &"defer"& which, in
23612 an SMTP session, causes a 4&'xx'& response to be given. For a non-SMTP ACL,
23613 &%defer%& is the same as &%deny%&, because there is no way of sending a
23614 temporary error. For a RCPT command, &%defer%& is much the same as using a
23615 &(redirect)& router and &`:defer:`& while verifying, but the &%defer%& verb can
23616 be used in any ACL, and even for a recipient it might be a simpler approach.
23618 .cindex "&%deny%&" "ACL verb"
23619 &%deny%&: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns &"deny"&. If any of
23620 the conditions are not met, control is passed to the next ACL statement. For
23623 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
23625 rejects commands from hosts that are on a DNS black list.
23628 .cindex "&%discard%&" "ACL verb"
23629 &%discard%&: This verb behaves like &%accept%&, except that it returns
23630 &"discard"& from the ACL instead of &"accept"&. It is permitted only on ACLs
23631 that are concerned with receiving messages, and it causes recipients to be
23632 discarded. If the &%log_message%& modifier is set when &%discard%& operates,
23633 its contents are added to the line that is automatically written to the log.
23635 If &%discard%& is used in an ACL for RCPT, just the one recipient is
23636 discarded; if used for MAIL, DATA or in the non-SMTP ACL, all the
23637 message's recipients are discarded. Recipients that are discarded before
23638 DATA do not appear in the log line when the &%log_recipients%& log selector
23641 .cindex "&%drop%&" "ACL verb"
23642 &%drop%&: This verb behaves like &%deny%&, except that an SMTP connection is
23643 forcibly closed after the 5&'xx'& error message has been sent. For example:
23645 drop message = I don't take more than 20 RCPTs
23646 condition = ${if > {$rcpt_count}{20}}
23648 There is no difference between &%deny%& and &%drop%& for the connect-time ACL.
23649 The connection is always dropped after sending a 550 response.
23652 .cindex "&%require%&" "ACL verb"
23653 &%require%&: If all the conditions are met, control is passed to the next ACL
23654 statement. If any of the conditions are not met, the ACL returns &"deny"&. For
23655 example, when checking a RCPT command,
23657 require verify = sender
23659 passes control to subsequent statements only if the message's sender can be
23660 verified. Otherwise, it rejects the command.
23663 .cindex "&%warn%&" "ACL verb"
23664 &%warn%&: If all the conditions are met, a header line is added to an incoming
23665 message and/or a line is written to Exim's main log. In all cases, control
23666 passes to the next ACL statement. The text of the added header line and the log
23667 line are specified by modifiers; if they are not present, a &%warn%& verb just
23668 checks its conditions and obeys any &"immediate"& modifiers such as &%set%& and
23669 &%logwrite%&. There is more about adding header lines in section
23670 &<<SECTaddheadwarn>>&.
23672 If any condition on a &%warn%& statement cannot be completed (that is, there is
23673 some sort of defer), no header lines are added and the configured log line is
23674 not written. No further conditions or modifiers in the &%warn%& statement are
23675 processed. The incident is logged, but the ACL continues to be processed, from
23676 the next statement onwards.
23678 If a &%message%& modifier is present on a &%warn%& verb in an ACL that is not
23679 testing an incoming message, it is ignored, and the incident is logged.
23681 A &%warn%& statement may use the &%log_message%& modifier to cause a line to be
23682 written to the main log when the statement's conditions are true.
23683 If an identical log line is requested several times in the same message, only
23684 one copy is actually written to the log. If you want to force duplicates to be
23685 written, use the &%logwrite%& modifier instead.
23687 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
23688 When one of the &%warn%& conditions is an address verification that fails, the
23689 text of the verification failure message is in &$acl_verify_message$&. If you
23690 want this logged, you must set it up explicitly. For example:
23692 warn !verify = sender
23693 log_message = sender verify failed: $acl_verify_message
23697 At the end of each ACL there is an implicit unconditional &%deny%&.
23699 As you can see from the examples above, the conditions and modifiers are
23700 written one to a line, with the first one on the same line as the verb, and
23701 subsequent ones on following lines. If you have a very long condition, you can
23702 continue it onto several physical lines by the usual backslash continuation
23703 mechanism. It is conventional to align the conditions vertically.
23707 .section "ACL variables" "SECTaclvariables"
23708 .cindex "&ACL;" "variables"
23709 There are some special variables that can be set during ACL processing. They
23710 can be used to pass information between different ACLs, different invocations
23711 of the same ACL in the same SMTP connection, and between ACLs and the routers,
23712 transports, and filters that are used to deliver a message. There are two sets
23713 of these variables:
23716 The values of &$acl_c0$& to &$acl_c9$& persist throughout an SMTP connection.
23717 They are never reset. Thus, a value that is set while receiving one message is
23718 still available when receiving the next message on the same SMTP connection.
23720 The values of &$acl_m0$& to &$acl_m9$& persist only while a message is being
23721 received. They are reset afterwards. They are also reset by MAIL, RSET,
23722 EHLO, HELO, and after starting up a TLS session.
23725 When a message is accepted, the current values of all the ACL variables are
23726 preserved with the message and are subsequently made available at delivery
23727 time. The ACL variables are set by modifier called &%set%&. For example:
23729 accept hosts = whatever
23730 set acl_m4 = some value
23732 &*Note*&: A leading dollar sign is not used when naming a variable that is to
23733 be set. If you want to set a variable without taking any action, you can use a
23734 &%warn%& verb without any other modifiers or conditions.
23738 .section "Condition and modifier processing"
23739 .cindex "&ACL;" "conditions; processing"
23740 .cindex "&ACL;" "modifiers; processing"
23741 An exclamation mark preceding a condition negates its result. For example:
23743 deny domains = *.dom.example
23744 !verify = recipient
23747 causes the ACL to return &"deny"& if the recipient domain ends in
23748 &'dom.example'& and the recipient address cannot be verified. Sometimes
23749 negation can be used on the right-hand side of a condition. For example, these
23750 two statements are equivalent:
23752 deny hosts = !192.168.3.4
23753 deny !hosts = 192.168.3.4
23755 However, for many conditions (&%verify%& being a good example), only left-hand
23756 side negation of the whole condition is possible.
23759 The arguments of conditions and modifiers are expanded. A forced failure
23760 of an expansion causes a condition to be ignored, that is, it behaves as if the
23761 condition is true. Consider these two statements:
23763 accept senders = ${lookup{$host_name}lsearch\
23764 {/some/file}{$value}fail}
23765 accept senders = ${lookup{$host_name}lsearch\
23766 {/some/file}{$value}{}}
23768 Each attempts to look up a list of acceptable senders. If the lookup succeeds,
23769 the returned list is searched, but if the lookup fails the behaviour is
23770 different in the two cases. The &%fail%& in the first statement causes the
23771 condition to be ignored, leaving no further conditions. The &%accept%& verb
23772 therefore succeeds. The second statement, however, generates an empty list when
23773 the lookup fails. No sender can match an empty list, so the condition fails,
23774 and therefore the &%accept%& also fails.
23776 ACL modifiers appear mixed in with conditions in ACL statements. Some of them
23777 specify actions that are taken as the conditions for a statement are checked;
23778 others specify text for messages that are used when access is denied or a
23779 warning is generated. The &%control%& modifier affects the way an incoming
23780 message is handled.
23782 The positioning of the modifiers in an ACL statement important, because the
23783 processing of a verb ceases as soon as its outcome is known. Only those
23784 modifiers that have already been encountered will take effect. For example,
23785 consider this use of the &%message%& modifier:
23787 require message = Can't verify sender
23789 message = Can't verify recipient
23791 message = This message cannot be used
23793 If sender verification fails, Exim knows that the result of the statement is
23794 &"deny"&, so it goes no further. The first &%message%& modifier has been seen,
23795 so its text is used as the error message. If sender verification succeeds, but
23796 recipient verification fails, the second message is used. If recipient
23797 verification succeeds, the third message becomes &"current"&, but is never used
23798 because there are no more conditions to cause failure.
23800 For the &%deny%& verb, on the other hand, it is always the last &%message%&
23801 modifier that is used, because all the conditions must be true for rejection to
23802 happen. Specifying more than one &%message%& modifier does not make sense, and
23803 the message can even be specified after all the conditions. For example:
23806 !senders = *@my.domain.example
23807 message = Invalid sender from client host
23809 The &"deny"& result does not happen until the end of the statement is reached,
23810 by which time Exim has set up the message.
23814 .section "ACL modifiers" "SECTACLmodi"
23815 .cindex "&ACL;" "modifiers; list of"
23816 The ACL modifiers are as follows:
23819 .vitem &*control*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
23820 .cindex "&%control%&" "ACL modifier"
23821 This modifier affects the subsequent processing of the SMTP connection or of an
23822 incoming message that is accepted. The effect of the first type of control
23823 lasts for the duration of the connection, whereas the effect of the second type
23824 lasts only until the current message has been received. The message-specific
23825 controls always apply to the whole message, not to individual recipients,
23826 even if the &%control%& modifier appears in a RCPT ACL.
23828 As there are now quite a few controls that can be applied, they are described
23829 separately in section &<<SECTcontrols>>&. The &%control%& modifier can be used
23830 in several different ways. For example:
23832 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
23833 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
23836 It can be at the end of an &%accept%& statement:
23838 accept ...some conditions
23839 control = queue_only
23841 In this case, the control is applied when this statement yields &"accept"&, in
23842 other words, when the conditions are all true.
23845 It can be in the middle of an &%accept%& statement:
23847 accept ...some conditions...
23848 control = queue_only
23849 ...some more conditions...
23851 If the first set of conditions are true, the control is applied, even if the
23852 statement does not accept because one of the second set of conditions is false.
23853 In this case, some subsequent statement must yield &"accept"& for the control
23857 It can be used with &%warn%& to apply the control, leaving the
23858 decision about accepting or denying to a subsequent verb. For
23861 warn ...some conditions...
23865 This example of &%warn%& does not contain &%message%&, &%log_message%&, or
23866 &%logwrite%&, so it does not add anything to the message and does not write a
23870 If you want to apply a control unconditionally, you can use it with a
23871 &%require%& verb. For example:
23873 require control = no_multiline_response
23877 .vitem &*delay*&&~=&~<&'time'&>
23878 .cindex "&%delay%&" "ACL modifier"
23879 .cindex "&%-bh%& option"
23880 This modifier causes Exim to wait for the time interval before proceeding. The
23881 time is given in the usual Exim notation. This modifier may appear in any ACL.
23882 The delay happens as soon as the modifier is processed. However, when testing
23883 Exim using the &%-bh%& option, the delay is not actually imposed (an
23884 appropriate message is output instead).
23886 Like &%control%&, &%delay%& can be used with &%accept%& or &%deny%&, for
23889 deny ...some conditions...
23892 The delay happens if all the conditions are true, before the statement returns
23893 &"deny"&. Compare this with:
23896 ...some conditions...
23898 which waits for 30s before processing the conditions. The &%delay%& modifier
23899 can also be used with &%warn%& and together with &%control%&:
23901 warn ...some conditions...
23908 .cindex "&%endpass%&" "ACL modifier"
23909 This modifier, which has no argument, is recognized only in &%accept%&
23910 statements. It marks the boundary between the conditions whose failure causes
23911 control to pass to the next statement, and the conditions whose failure causes
23912 the ACL to return &"deny"&. See the description of &%accept%& above.
23914 .vitem &*log_message*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
23915 .cindex "&%log_message%&" "ACL modifier"
23916 This modifier sets up a message that is used as part of the log message if the
23917 ACL denies access or a &%warn%& statement's conditions are true. For example:
23919 require log_message = wrong cipher suite $tls_cipher
23920 encrypted = DES-CBC3-SHA
23922 &%log_message%& adds to any underlying error message that may exist because of
23923 the condition failure. For example, while verifying a recipient address, a
23924 &':fail:'& redirection might have already set up a message. Although the
23925 message is usually defined before the conditions to which it applies, the
23926 expansion does not happen until Exim decides that access is to be denied. This
23927 means that any variables that are set by the condition are available for
23928 inclusion in the message. For example, the &$dnslist_$&<&'xxx'&> variables are
23929 set after a DNS black list lookup succeeds. If the expansion of &%log_message%&
23930 fails, or if the result is an empty string, the modifier is ignored.
23932 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
23933 If you want to use a &%warn%& statement to log the result of an address
23934 verification, you can use &$acl_verify_message$& to include the verification
23937 If &%log_message%& is used with a &%warn%& statement, &"Warning:"& is added to
23938 the start of the logged message. If the same warning log message is requested
23939 more than once while receiving a single email message, only one copy is
23940 actually logged. If you want to log multiple copies, use &%logwrite%& instead
23941 of &%log_message%&. In the absence of &%log_message%& and &%logwrite%&, nothing
23942 is logged for a succesful &%warn%& statement.
23944 If &%log_message%& is not present and there is no underlying error message (for
23945 example, from the failure of address verification), but &%message%& is present,
23946 the &%message%& text is used for logging rejections. However, if any text for
23947 logging contains newlines, only the first line is logged. In the absence of
23948 both &%log_message%& and &%message%&, a default built-in message is used for
23949 logging rejections.
23951 .vitem &*logwrite*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
23952 .cindex "&%logwrite%&" "ACL modifier"
23953 .cindex "logging in ACL" "immediate"
23954 This modifier writes a message to a log file as soon as it is encountered when
23955 processing an ACL. (Compare &%log_message%&, which, except in the case of
23956 &%warn%&, is used only if the ACL statement denies access.) The &%logwrite%&
23957 modifier can be used to log special incidents in ACLs. For example:
23959 &`accept `&<&'some special conditions'&>
23960 &` control = freeze`&
23961 &` logwrite = froze message because ...`&
23963 By default, the message is written to the main log. However, it may begin
23964 with a colon, followed by a comma-separated list of log names, and then
23965 another colon, to specify exactly which logs are to be written. For
23968 logwrite = :main,reject: text for main and reject logs
23969 logwrite = :panic: text for panic log only
23972 .vitem &*message*&&~=&~<&'text'&>
23973 .cindex "&%message%&" "ACL modifier"
23974 This modifier sets up a text string that is expanded and used as an error
23975 message if the current statement causes the ACL to deny access. The expansion
23976 happens at the time Exim decides that access is to be denied, not at the time
23977 it processes &%message%&. If the expansion fails, or generates an empty string,
23978 the modifier is ignored. For ACLs that are triggered by SMTP commands, the
23979 message is returned as part of the SMTP error response.
23981 The &%message%& modifier is also used with the &%warn%& verb to specify one or
23982 more header lines to be added to an incoming message when all the conditions
23983 are true. See section &<<SECTaddheadwarn>>& for more details. If &%message%& is
23984 used with &%warn%& in an ACL that is not concerned with receiving a message, it
23987 The text is literal; any quotes are taken as literals, but because the string
23988 is expanded, backslash escapes are processed anyway. If the message contains
23989 newlines, this gives rise to a multi-line SMTP response. Like &%log_message%&,
23990 the contents of &%message%& are not expanded until after a condition has
23993 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
23994 If &%message%& is used on a statement that verifies an address, the message
23995 specified overrides any message that is generated by the verification process.
23996 However, the original message is available in the variable
23997 &$acl_verify_message$&, so you can incorporate it into your message if you
23998 wish. In particular, if you want the text from &%:fail:%& items in &(redirect)&
23999 routers to be passed back as part of the SMTP response, you should either not
24000 use a &%message%& modifier, or make use of &$acl_verify_message$&.
24002 .vitem &*set*&&~<&'acl_name'&>&~=&~<&'value'&>
24003 .cindex "&%set%&" "ACL modifier"
24004 This modifier puts a value into one of the ACL variables (see section
24005 &<<SECTaclvariables>>&).
24010 .section "Use of the control modifier" "SECTcontrols"
24011 .cindex "&%control%&" "ACL modifier"
24012 The &%control%& modifier supports the following settings:
24015 .vitem &*control&~=&~caseful_local_part*&
24018 .vitem &*control&~=&~caselower_local_part*&
24019 .cindex "&ACL;" "case of local part in"
24020 .cindex "case of local parts"
24021 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
24022 These two controls are permitted only in the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_rcpt%&
24023 (that is, during RCPT processing). By default, the contents of &$local_part$&
24024 are lower cased before ACL processing. If &"caseful_local_part"& is specified,
24025 any uppercase letters in the original local part are restored in &$local_part$&
24026 for the rest of the ACL, or until a control that sets &"caselower_local_part"&
24029 These controls affect only the current recipient. Moreover, they apply only to
24030 local part handling that takes place directly in the ACL (for example, as a key
24031 in lookups). If a test to verify the recipient is obeyed, the case-related
24032 handling of the local part during the verification is controlled by the router
24033 configuration (see the &%caseful_local_part%& generic router option).
24035 This facility could be used, for example, to add a spam score to local parts
24036 containing upper case letters. For example, using &$acl_m4$& to accumulate the
24039 warn control = caseful_local_part
24040 set acl_m4 = ${eval:\
24042 ${if match{$local_part}{[A-Z]}{1}{0}}\
24044 control = caselower_local_part
24046 Notice that we put back the lower cased version afterwards, assuming that
24047 is what is wanted for subsequent tests.
24049 .vitem &*control&~=&~enforce_sync*&
24052 .vitem &*control&~=&~no_enforce_sync*&
24053 .cindex "SMTP" "synchronization checking"
24054 .cindex "synchronization checking in SMTP"
24055 These controls make it possible to be selective about when SMTP synchronization
24056 is enforced. The global option &%smtp_enforce_sync%& specifies the initial
24057 state of the switch (it is true by default). See the description of this option
24058 in chapter &<<CHAPmainconfig>>& for details of SMTP synchronization checking.
24060 The effect of these two controls lasts for the remainder of the SMTP
24061 connection. They can appear in any ACL except the one for the non-SMTP
24062 messages. The most straightforward place to put them is in the ACL defined by
24063 &%acl_smtp_connect%&, which is run at the start of an incoming SMTP connection,
24064 before the first synchronization check. The expected use is to turn off the
24065 synchronization checks for badly-behaved hosts that you nevertheless need to
24070 .vitem &*control&~=&~fakedefer/*&<&'message'&>
24071 .cindex "fake defer"
24072 .cindex "defer" "fake"
24073 This control works in exactly the same way as &%fakereject%& (described below)
24074 except that it causes an SMTP 450 response after the message data instead of a
24075 550 response. You must take care when using &%fakedefer%& because it causes the
24076 messages to be duplicated when the sender retries. Therefore, you should not
24077 use &%fakedefer%& if the message is to be delivered normally.
24080 .vitem &*control&~=&~fakereject/*&<&'message'&>
24081 .cindex "fake rejection"
24082 .cindex "rejection" "fake"
24083 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, and DATA ACLs, in other
24084 words, only when an SMTP message is being received. If Exim accepts the
24085 message, instead the final 250 response, a 550 rejection message is sent.
24086 However, Exim proceeds to deliver the message as normal. The control applies
24087 only to the current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in
24088 the same SMTP connection.
24090 The text for the 550 response is taken from the &%control%& modifier. If no
24091 message is supplied, the following is used:
24093 550-Your message has been rejected but is being
24094 550-kept for evaluation.
24095 550-If it was a legitimate message, it may still be
24096 550 delivered to the target recipient(s).
24098 This facilty should be used with extreme caution.
24100 .vitem &*control&~=&~freeze*&
24101 .cindex "frozen messages" "forcing in ACL"
24102 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and non-SMTP ACLs, in
24103 other words, only when a message is being received. If the message is accepted,
24104 it is placed on Exim's queue and frozen. The control applies only to the
24105 current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in the same
24108 .vitem &*control&~=&~no_mbox_unspool*&
24109 This control is available when Exim is compiled with the content scanning
24110 extension. Content scanning may require a copy of the current message, or parts
24111 of it, to be written in &"mbox format"& to a spool file, for passing to a virus
24112 or spam scanner. Normally, such copies are deleted when they are no longer
24113 needed. If this control is set, the copies are not deleted. The control applies
24114 only to the current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in
24115 the same SMTP connection. It is provided for debugging purposes and is unlikely
24116 to be useful in production.
24118 .vitem &*control&~=&~no_multiline_response*&
24119 .cindex "multiline responses" "suppressing"
24120 This control is permitted for any ACL except the one for non-SMTP messages.
24121 It seems that there are broken clients in use that cannot handle multiline
24122 SMTP responses, despite the fact that RFC 821 defined them over 20 years ago.
24124 If this control is set, multiline SMTP responses from ACL rejections are
24125 suppressed. One way of doing this would have been to put out these responses as
24126 one long line. However, RFC 2821 specifies a maximum of 512 bytes per response
24127 (&"use multiline responses for more"& it says &-- ha!), and some of the
24128 responses might get close to that. So this facility, which is after all only a
24129 sop to broken clients, is implemented by doing two very easy things:
24132 Extra information that is normally output as part of a rejection caused by
24133 sender verification failure is omitted. Only the final line (typically &"sender
24134 verification failed"&) is sent.
24136 If a &%message%& modifier supplies a multiline response, only the first
24140 The setting of the switch can, of course, be made conditional on the
24141 calling host. Its effect lasts until the end of the SMTP connection.
24143 .vitem &*control&~=&~queue_only*&
24144 .cindex "&%queue_only%&"
24145 .cindex "queueing incoming messages"
24146 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and non-SMTP ACLs, in
24147 other words, only when a message is being received. If the message is accepted,
24148 it is placed on Exim's queue and left there for delivery by a subsequent queue
24149 runner. No immediate delivery process is started. In other words, it has the
24150 effect as the &%queue_only%& global option. However, the control applies only
24151 to the current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in the
24152 same SMTP connection.
24154 .vitem &*control&~=&~submission/*&<&'options'&>
24155 .cindex "message" "submission"
24156 .cindex "submission mode"
24157 This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, and start of data ACLs (the
24158 latter is the one defined by &%acl_smtp_predata%&). Setting it tells Exim that
24159 the current message is a submission from a local MUA. In this case, Exim
24160 operates in &"submission mode"&, and applies certain fixups to the message if
24161 necessary. For example, it add a &'Date:'& header line if one is not present.
24162 This control is not permitted in the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL, because that is too
24163 late (the message has already been created).
24165 Chapter &<<CHAPmsgproc>>& describes the processing that Exim applies to
24166 messages. Section &<<SECTsubmodnon>>& covers the processing that happens in
24167 submission mode; the available options for this control are described there.
24168 The control applies only to the current message, not to any subsequent ones
24169 that may be received in the same SMTP connection.
24172 .vitem &*control&~=&~suppress_local_fixups*&
24173 .cindex "submission fixups" "suppressing"
24174 This control applies to locally submitted (non TCP/IP) messages, and is the
24175 complement of &`control`& &`=`& &`submission`&. It disables the fixups that are
24176 normally applied to locally-submitted messages. Specifically:
24179 Any &'Sender:'& header line is left alone (in this respect, it is a
24180 dynamic version of &%local_sender_retain%&).
24182 No &'Message-ID:'&, &'From:'&, or &'Date:'& header lines are added.
24184 There is no check that &'From:'& corresponds to the actual sender.
24187 This feature may be useful when a remotely-originated message is accepted,
24188 passed to some scanning program, and then re-submitted for delivery.
24191 All four possibilities for message fixups can be specified:
24194 Locally submitted, fixups applied: the default.
24196 Locally submitted, no fixups applied: use &`control`& &`=`&
24197 &`suppress_local_fixups`&.
24199 Remotely submitted, no fixups applied: the default.
24201 Remotely submitted, fixups applied: use &`control`& &`=`& &`submission`&.
24208 .section "Adding header lines with the warn verb" "SECTaddheadwarn"
24209 .cindex "header lines" "adding in an ACL"
24210 .cindex "header lines" "position of added lines"
24211 .cindex "&%warn%&" "ACL verb"
24212 .cindex "&%message%&" "ACL modifier"
24213 The &%message%& modifier can be used on a &%warn%& statement to add an extra
24214 header line to an incoming message, as in this example:
24216 warn message = X-blacklisted-at: $dnslist_domain
24217 dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
24218 dialup.mail-abuse.org
24220 If an identical header line is requested several times (provoked, for example,
24221 by multiple RCPT commands), only one copy is actually added to the message.
24222 If the text of the &%message%& modifier contains one or more newlines that are
24223 not followed by a space or a tab, it is assumed to contain multiple header
24224 lines. Each one is checked for valid syntax; &`X-ACL-Warn:`& is added to the
24225 front of any line that is not a valid header line.
24227 By default, new lines are added at the end of the existing header lines.
24228 However, you can specify that any particular header line should be added right
24229 at the start (before all the &'Received:'& lines), immediately after the first
24230 block of &'Received:'& lines, or immediately before any line that is not a
24231 &'Received:'& or &'Resent-something:'& header.
24233 This is done by specifying &":at_start:"&, &":after_received:"&, or
24234 &":at_start_rfc:"& (or, for completeness, &":at_end:"&) before the text of the
24235 header line, respectively. (Header text cannot start with a colon, as there has
24236 to be a header name first.) For example:
24238 warn message = :after_received:X-My-Header: something or other...
24240 If more than one header is supplied in a single warn statement, each one is
24241 treated independently and can therefore be placed differently. If you add
24242 more than one line at the start, or after the Received: block, they will
24243 end up in reverse order.
24245 &*Warning*&: This facility currently applies only to header lines that are
24246 added in an ACL. It does NOT work for header lines that are added in a
24247 system filter or in a router or transport.
24250 .cindex "header lines" "added; visibility of"
24251 Header lines that are added by an ACL at MAIL or RCPT time are not visible in
24252 string expansions in ACLs for subsequent RCPT commands or in the
24253 &%acl_smtp_predata%& ACL. However, they are visible in string expansions in the
24254 ACL that is run after DATA is complete (the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL). This is
24255 also true for header lines that are added in the &%acl_smtp_predata%& ACL.
24256 However, header lines that are added in the &%acl_smtp_data%& itself are not
24257 visible during that ACL. If a message is rejected after DATA, all added header
24258 lines are included in the entry that is written to the reject log.
24261 If you want to preserve data between MAIL, RCPT, and the
24262 &%acl_smtp_predata%& ACLs, you can use ACL variables, as described in section
24263 &<<SECTaclvariables>>&.
24269 .section "ACL conditions" "SECTaclconditions"
24270 .cindex "&ACL;" "conditions; list of"
24271 Some of conditions listed in this section are available only when Exim is
24272 compiled with the content-scanning extension. They are included here briefly
24273 for completeness. More detailed descriptions can be found in the discussion on
24274 content scanning in chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24276 Not all conditions are relevant in all circumstances. For example, testing
24277 senders and recipients does not make sense in an ACL that is being run as the
24278 result of the arrival of an ETRN command, and checks on message headers can be
24279 done only in the ACLs specified by &%acl_smtp_data%& and &%acl_not_smtp%&. You
24280 can use the same condition (with different parameters) more than once in the
24281 same ACL statement. This provides a way of specifying an &"and"& conjunction.
24282 The conditions are as follows:
24286 .vitem &*acl&~=&~*&<&'name&~of&~acl&~or&~ACL&~string&~or&~file&~name&~'&>
24287 .cindex "&ACL;" "nested"
24288 .cindex "&ACL;" "indirect"
24289 .cindex "&%acl%&" "ACL condition"
24290 The possible values of the argument are the same as for the
24291 &%acl_smtp_%&&'xxx'& options. The named or inline ACL is run. If it returns
24292 &"accept"& the condition is true; if it returns &"deny"& the condition is
24293 false. If it returns &"defer"&, the current ACL returns &"defer"& unless the
24294 condition is on a &%warn%& verb. In that case, a &"defer"& return makes the
24295 condition false. This means that further processing of the &%warn%& verb
24296 ceases, but processing of the ACL continues.
24298 If the nested &%acl%& returns &"drop"& and the outer condition denies access,
24299 the connection is dropped. If it returns &"discard"&, the verb must be
24300 &%accept%& or &%discard%&, and the action is taken immediately &-- no further
24301 conditions are tested.
24303 ACLs may be nested up to 20 deep; the limit exists purely to catch runaway
24304 loops. This condition allows you to use different ACLs in different
24305 circumstances. For example, different ACLs can be used to handle RCPT commands
24306 for different local users or different local domains.
24308 .vitem &*authenticated&~=&~*&<&'string&~list'&>
24309 .cindex "&%authenticated%&" "ACL condition"
24310 .cindex "authentication" "ACL checking"
24311 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing for authentication"
24312 If the SMTP connection is not authenticated, the condition is false. Otherwise,
24313 the name of the authenticator is tested against the list. To test for
24314 authentication by any authenticator, you can set
24319 .vitem &*condition&~=&~*&<&'string'&>
24320 .cindex "&%condition%&" "ACL condition"
24321 .cindex "customizing" "ACL condition"
24322 .cindex "&ACL;" "customized test"
24323 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing; customized"
24324 This feature allows you to make up custom conditions. If the result of
24325 expanding the string is an empty string, the number zero, or one of the strings
24326 &"no"& or &"false"&, the condition is false. If the result is any non-zero
24327 number, or one of the strings &"yes"& or &"true"&, the condition is true. For
24328 any other values, some error is assumed to have occurred, and the ACL returns
24331 .vitem &*decode&~=&~*&<&'location'&>
24332 .cindex "&%decode%&" "ACL condition"
24333 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24334 content-scanning extension, and it is allowed only the the ACL defined by
24335 &%acl_smtp_mime%&. It causes the current MIME part to be decoded into a file.
24336 For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24338 .vitem &*demime&~=&~*&<&'extension&~list'&>
24339 .cindex "&%demime%&" "ACL condition"
24340 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24341 content-scanning extension. Its use is described in section
24342 &<<SECTdemimecond>>&.
24344 .vitem &*dnslists&~=&~*&<&'list&~of&~domain&~names&~and&~other&~data'&>
24345 .cindex "&%dnslists%&" "ACL condition"
24346 .cindex "DNS list" "in ACL"
24347 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
24348 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a DNS list"
24349 This condition checks for entries in DNS black lists. These are also known as
24350 &"RBL lists"&, after the original Realtime Blackhole List, but note that the
24351 use of the lists at &'mail-abuse.org'& now carries a charge. There are too many
24352 different variants of this condition to describe briefly here. See sections
24353 &<<SECTmorednslists>>&--&<<SECTmorednslistslast>>& for details.
24355 .vitem &*domains&~=&~*&<&'domain&~list'&>
24356 .cindex "&%domains%&" "ACL condition"
24357 .cindex "domain" "ACL checking"
24358 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a recipient domain"
24359 .cindex "&$domain_data$&"
24360 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It checks that the domain
24361 of the recipient address is in the domain list. If percent-hack processing is
24362 enabled, it is done before this test is done. If the check succeeds with a
24363 lookup, the result of the lookup is placed in &$domain_data$& until the next
24366 .vitem &*encrypted&~=&~*&<&'string&~list'&>
24367 .cindex "&%encrypted%&" "ACL condition"
24368 .cindex "encryption" "checking in an ACL"
24369 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing for encryption"
24370 If the SMTP connection is not encrypted, the condition is false. Otherwise, the
24371 name of the cipher suite in use is tested against the list. To test for
24372 encryption without testing for any specific cipher suite(s), set
24377 .vitem &*hosts&~=&~*&<&'&~host&~list'&>
24378 .cindex "&%hosts%&" "ACL condition"
24379 .cindex "host" "ACL checking"
24380 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing the client host"
24381 This condition tests that the calling host matches the host list. If you have
24382 name lookups or wildcarded host names and IP addresses in the same host list,
24383 you should normally put the IP addresses first. For example, you could have:
24385 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7 : dbm;/etc/friendly/hosts
24387 The reason for this lies in the left-to-right way that Exim processes lists.
24388 It can test IP addresses without doing any DNS lookups, but when it reaches an
24389 item that requires a host name, it fails if it cannot find a host name to
24390 compare with the pattern. If the above list is given in the opposite order, the
24391 &%accept%& statement fails for a host whose name cannot be found, even if its
24392 IP address is 10.9.8.7.
24394 If you really do want to do the name check first, and still recognize the IP
24395 address even if the name lookup fails, you can rewrite the ACL like this:
24397 accept hosts = dbm;/etc/friendly/hosts
24398 accept hosts = 10.9.8.7
24400 The default action on failing to find the host name is to assume that the host
24401 is not in the list, so the first &%accept%& statement fails. The second
24402 statement can then check the IP address.
24404 .cindex "&$host_data$&"
24405 If a &%hosts%& condition is satisfied by means of a lookup, the result
24406 of the lookup is made available in the &$host_data$& variable. This
24407 allows you, for example, to set up a statement like this:
24409 deny hosts = net-lsearch;/some/file
24410 message = $host_data
24412 which gives a custom error message for each denied host.
24414 .vitem &*local_parts&~=&~*&<&'local&~part&~list'&>
24415 .cindex "&%local_parts%&" "ACL condition"
24416 .cindex "local part" "ACL checking"
24417 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a local part"
24418 .cindex "&$local_part_data$&"
24419 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It checks that the local
24420 part of the recipient address is in the list. If percent-hack processing is
24421 enabled, it is done before this test. If the check succeeds with a lookup, the
24422 result of the lookup is placed in &$local_part_data$&, which remains set until
24423 the next &%local_parts%& test.
24425 .vitem &*malware&~=&~*&<&'option'&>
24426 .cindex "&%malware%&" "ACL condition"
24427 .cindex "&ACL;" "virus scanning"
24428 .cindex "&ACL;" "scanning for viruses"
24429 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24430 content-scanning extension. It causes the incoming message to be scanned for
24431 viruses. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24433 .vitem &*mime_regex&~=&~*&<&'list&~of&~regular&~expressions'&>
24434 .cindex "&%mime_regex%&" "ACL condition"
24435 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing by regex matching"
24436 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24437 content-scanning extension, and it is allowed only the the ACL defined by
24438 &%acl_smtp_mime%&. It causes the current MIME part to be scanned for a match
24439 with any of the regular expressions. For details, see chapter
24443 .vitem &*ratelimit&~=&~*&<&'parameters'&>
24444 .cindex "rate limiting"
24445 This condition can be used to limit the rate at which a user or host submits
24446 messages. Details are given in section &<<SECTratelimiting>>&.
24449 .vitem &*recipients&~=&~*&<&'address&~list'&>
24450 .cindex "&%recipients%&" "ACL condition"
24451 .cindex "recipient" "ACL checking"
24452 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a recipient"
24453 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It checks the entire
24454 recipient address against a list of recipients.
24456 .vitem &*regex&~=&~*&<&'list&~of&~regular&~expressions'&>
24457 .cindex "&%regex%&" "ACL condition"
24458 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing by regex matching"
24459 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24460 content-scanning extension, and is available only in the DATA, MIME, and
24461 non-SMTP ACLs. It causes the incoming message to be scanned for a match with
24462 any of the regular expressions. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24464 .vitem &*sender_domains&~=&~*&<&'domain&~list'&>
24465 .cindex "&%sender_domains%&" "ACL condition"
24466 .cindex "sender" "ACL checking"
24467 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a sender domain"
24468 .cindex "&$domain$&"
24469 .cindex "&$sender_address_domain$&"
24470 This condition tests the domain of the sender of the message against the given
24471 domain list. &*Note*&: The domain of the sender address is in
24472 &$sender_address_domain$&. It is &'not'& put in &$domain$& during the testing
24473 of this condition. This is an exception to the general rule for testing domain
24474 lists. It is done this way so that, if this condition is used in an ACL for a
24475 RCPT command, the recipient's domain (which is in &$domain$&) can be used to
24476 influence the sender checking.
24479 &*Warning*&: It is a bad idea to use this condition on its own as a control on
24480 relaying, because sender addresses are easily, and commonly, forged.
24483 .vitem &*senders&~=&~*&<&'address&~list'&>
24484 .cindex "&%senders%&" "ACL condition"
24485 .cindex "sender" "ACL checking"
24486 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a sender"
24487 This condition tests the sender of the message against the given list. To test
24488 for a bounce message, which has an empty sender, set
24493 &*Warning*&: It is a bad idea to use this condition on its own as a control on
24494 relaying, because sender addresses are easily, and commonly, forged.
24497 .vitem &*spam&~=&~*&<&'username'&>
24498 .cindex "&%spam%&" "ACL condition"
24499 .cindex "&ACL;" "scanning for spam"
24500 This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
24501 content-scanning extension. It causes the incoming message to be scanned by
24502 SpamAssassin. For details, see chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&.
24504 .vitem &*verify&~=&~certificate*&
24505 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24506 .cindex "TLS" "client certificate verification"
24507 .cindex "certificate" "verification of client"
24508 .cindex "&ACL;" "certificate verification"
24509 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a TLS certificate"
24510 This condition is true in an SMTP session if the session is encrypted, and a
24511 certificate was received from the client, and the certificate was verified. The
24512 server requests a certificate only if the client matches &%tls_verify_hosts%&
24513 or &%tls_try_verify_hosts%& (see chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>&).
24516 .vitem &*verify&~=&~csa*&
24517 .cindex "CSA verification"
24518 This condition checks whether the sending host (the client) is authorized to
24519 send email. Details of how this works are given in section
24520 &<<SECTverifyCSA>>&.
24523 .vitem &*verify&~=&~header_sender/*&<&'options'&>
24524 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24525 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying sender in the header"
24526 .cindex "header lines" "verifying the sender in"
24527 .cindex "sender" "verifying in header"
24528 .cindex "verifying" "sender in header"
24529 This condition is relevant only in an ACL that is run after a message has been
24530 received, that is, in an ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_data%& or
24531 &%acl_not_smtp%&. It checks that there is a verifiable address in at least one
24532 of the &'Sender:'&, &'Reply-To:'&, or &'From:'& header lines. Such an address
24533 is loosely thought of as a &"sender"& address (hence the name of the test).
24534 However, an address that appears in one of these headers need not be an address
24535 that accepts bounce messages; only sender addresses in envelopes are required
24536 to accept bounces. Therefore, if you use the callout option on this check, you
24537 might want to arrange for a non-empty address in the MAIL command.
24539 Details of address verification and the options are given later, starting at
24540 section &<<SECTaddressverification>>& (callouts are described in section
24541 &<<SECTcallver>>&). You can combine this condition with the &%senders%&
24542 condition to restrict it to bounce messages only:
24545 message = A valid sender header is required for bounces
24546 !verify = header_sender
24549 .vitem &*verify&~=&~header_syntax*&
24550 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24551 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying header syntax"
24552 .cindex "header lines" "verifying syntax"
24553 .cindex "verifying" "header syntax"
24554 This condition is relevant only in an ACL that is run after a message has been
24555 received, that is, in an ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_data%& or
24556 &%acl_not_smtp%&. It checks the syntax of all header lines that can contain
24557 lists of addresses (&'Sender:'&, &'From:'&, &'Reply-To:'&, &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&,
24558 and &'Bcc:'&). Unqualified addresses (local parts without domains) are
24559 permitted only in locally generated messages and from hosts that match
24560 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& or &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&, as
24563 Note that this condition is a syntax check only. However, a common spamming
24564 ploy used to be to send syntactically invalid headers such as
24568 and this condition can be used to reject such messages, though they are not as
24569 common as they used to be.
24571 .vitem &*verify&~=&~helo*&
24572 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24573 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying HELO/EHLO"
24574 .cindex "HELO" "verifying"
24575 .cindex "EHLO" "verifying"
24576 .cindex "verifying" "EHLO"
24577 .cindex "verifying" "HELO"
24579 This condition is true if a HELO or EHLO command has been received from the
24580 client host, and its contents have been verified. It there has been no previous
24581 attempt to verify the the HELO/EHLO contents, it is carried out when this
24582 condition is encountered. See the description of the &%helo_verify_hosts%& and
24583 &%helo_try_verify_hosts%& options for details of how to request verification
24584 independently of this condition.
24588 .vitem &*verify&~=&~not_blind*&
24589 .cindex "verifying" "not blind"
24590 .cindex "bcc recipients" "verifying none"
24591 This condition checks that there are no blind (bcc) recipients in the message.
24592 Every envelope recipient must appear either in a &'To:'& header line or in a
24593 &'Cc:'& header line for this condition to be true. Local parts are checked
24594 case-sensitively; domains are checked case-insensitively. If &'Resent-To:'& or
24595 &'Resent-Cc:'& header lines exist, they are also checked. This condition can be
24596 used only in a DATA or non-SMTP ACL.
24598 There are, of course, many legitimate messages that make use of blind (bcc)
24599 recipients. This check should not be used on its own for blocking messages.
24603 .vitem &*verify&~=&~recipient/*&<&'options'&>
24604 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24605 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying recipient"
24606 .cindex "recipient" "verifying"
24607 .cindex "verifying" "recipient"
24608 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
24609 This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command. It verifies the current
24610 recipient. Details of address verification are given later, starting at section
24611 &<<SECTaddressverification>>&. After a recipient has been verified, the value
24612 of &$address_data$& is the last value that was set while routing the address.
24613 This applies even if the verification fails. When an address that is being
24614 verified is redirected to a single address, verification continues with the new
24615 address, and in that case, the subsequent value of &$address_data$& is the
24616 value for the child address.
24618 .vitem &*verify&~=&~reverse_host_lookup*&
24619 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24620 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying host reverse lookup"
24621 .cindex "host" "verifying reverse lookup"
24622 This condition ensures that a verified host name has been looked up from the IP
24623 address of the client host. (This may have happened already if the host name
24624 was needed for checking a host list, or if the host matched &%host_lookup%&.)
24625 Verification ensures that the host name obtained from a reverse DNS lookup, or
24626 one of its aliases, does, when it is itself looked up in the DNS, yield the
24627 original IP address.
24629 If this condition is used for a locally generated message (that is, when there
24630 is no client host involved), it always succeeds.
24632 .vitem &*verify&~=&~sender/*&<&'options'&>
24633 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24634 .cindex "&ACL;" "verifying sender"
24635 .cindex "sender" "verifying"
24636 .cindex "verifying" "sender"
24637 This condition is relevant only after a MAIL or RCPT command, or after a
24638 message has been received (the &%acl_smtp_data%& or &%acl_not_smtp%& ACLs). If
24639 the message's sender is empty (that is, this is a bounce message), the
24640 condition is true. Otherwise, the sender address is verified.
24642 .cindex "&$address_data$&"
24643 .cindex "&$sender_address_data$&"
24644 If there is data in the &$address_data$& variable at the end of routing, its
24645 value is placed in &$sender_address_data$& at the end of verification. This
24646 value can be used in subsequent conditions and modifiers in the same ACL
24647 statement. It does not persist after the end of the current statement. If you
24648 want to preserve the value for longer, you can save it in an ACL variable.
24650 Details of verification are given later, starting at section
24651 &<<SECTaddressverification>>&. Exim caches the result of sender verification,
24652 to avoid doing it more than once per message.
24654 .vitem &*verify&~=&~sender=*&<&'address'&>&*/*&<&'options'&>
24655 .cindex "&%verify%&" "ACL condition"
24656 This is a variation of the previous option, in which a modified address is
24657 verified as a sender.
24662 .section "Using DNS lists" "SECTmorednslists"
24663 .cindex "DNS list" "in ACL"
24664 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
24665 .cindex "&ACL;" "testing a DNS list"
24666 In its simplest form, the &%dnslists%& condition tests whether the calling host
24667 is on at least one of a number of DNS lists by looking up the inverted IP
24668 address in one or more DNS domains. For example, if the calling host's IP
24669 address is 192.168.62.43, and the ACL statement is
24671 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org : \
24672 dialups.mail-abuse.org
24674 the following records are looked up:
24676 43.62.168.192.blackholes.mail-abuse.org
24677 43.62.168.192.dialups.mail-abuse.org
24679 As soon as Exim finds an existing DNS record, processing of the list stops.
24680 Thus, multiple entries on the list provide an &"or"& conjunction. If you want
24681 to test that a host is on more than one list (an &"and"& conjunction), you can
24682 use two separate conditions:
24684 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
24685 dnslists = dialups.mail-abuse.org
24687 If a DNS lookup times out or otherwise fails to give a decisive answer, Exim
24688 behaves as if the host does not match the list item, that is, as if the DNS
24689 record does not exist. If there are further items in the DNS list, they are
24692 This is usually the required action when &%dnslists%& is used with &%deny%&
24693 (which is the most common usage), because it prevents a DNS failure from
24694 blocking mail. However, you can change this behaviour by putting one of the
24695 following special items in the list:
24697 &`+include_unknown `& behave as if the item is on the list
24698 &`+exclude_unknown `& behave as if the item is not on the list (default)
24699 &`+defer_unknown `& give a temporary error
24701 .cindex "&`+include_unknown`&"
24702 .cindex "&`+exclude_unknown`&"
24703 .cindex "&`+defer_unknown`&"
24704 Each of these applies to any subsequent items on the list. For example:
24706 deny dnslists = +defer_unknown : foo.bar.example
24708 Testing the list of domains stops as soon as a match is found. If you want to
24709 warn for one list and block for another, you can use two different statements:
24711 deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
24712 warn message = X-Warn: sending host is on dialups list
24713 dnslists = dialups.mail-abuse.org
24715 DNS list lookups are cached by Exim for the duration of the SMTP session,
24716 so a lookup based on the IP address is done at most once for any incoming
24717 connection. Exim does not share information between multiple incoming
24718 connections (but your local name server cache should be active).
24722 .section "Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup"
24723 .cindex "DNS list" "keyed by explicit IP address"
24724 By default, the IP address that is used in a DNS list lookup is the IP address
24725 of the calling host. However, you can specify another IP address by listing it
24726 after the domain name, introduced by a slash. For example:
24728 deny dnslists = black.list.tld/192.168.1.2
24730 This feature is not very helpful with explicit IP addresses; it is intended for
24731 use with IP addresses that are looked up, for example, the IP addresses of the
24732 MX hosts or nameservers of an email sender address. For an example, see section
24733 &<<SECTmulkeyfor>>& below.
24738 .section "DNS lists keyed on domain names"
24739 .cindex "DNS list" "keyed by domain name"
24740 There are some lists that are keyed on domain names rather than inverted IP
24741 addresses (see for example the &'domain based zones'& link at
24742 &url(http://www.rfc-ignorant.org/)). No reversing of components is used
24743 with these lists. You can change the name that is looked up in a DNS list by
24744 listing it after the domain name, introduced by a slash. For example,
24746 deny message = Sender's domain is listed at $dnslist_domain
24747 dnslists = dsn.rfc-ignorant.org/$sender_address_domain
24749 This particular example is useful only in ACLs that are obeyed after the
24750 RCPT or DATA commands, when a sender address is available. If (for
24751 example) the message's sender is &'user@tld.example'& the name that is looked
24752 up by this example is
24754 tld.example.dsn.rfc-ignorant.org
24756 A single &%dnslists%& condition can contain entries for both names and IP
24757 addresses. For example:
24759 deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
24760 dsn.rfc-ignorant.org/$sender_address_domain
24762 The first item checks the sending host's IP address; the second checks a domain
24763 name. The whole condition is true if either of the DNS lookups succeeds.
24768 .section "Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list" "SECTmulkeyfor"
24769 .cindex "DNS list" "multiple keys for"
24770 The syntax described above for looking up explicitly-defined values (either
24771 names or IP addresses) in a DNS blacklist is a simplification. After the domain
24772 name for the DNS list, what follows the slash can in fact be a list of items.
24773 As with all lists in Exim, the default separator is a colon. However, because
24774 this is a sublist within the list of DNS blacklist domains, it is necessary
24775 either to double the separators like this:
24777 dnslists = black.list.tld/name.1::name.2
24779 or to change the separator character, like this:
24781 dnslists = black.list.tld/<;name.1;name.2
24783 If an item in the list is an IP address, it is inverted before the DNS
24784 blacklist domain is appended. If it is not an IP address, no inversion
24785 occurs. Consider this condition:
24787 dnslists = black.list.tld/<;192.168.1.2;a.domain
24789 The DNS lookups that occur are:
24791 2.1.168.192.black.list.tld
24792 a.domain.black.list.tld
24794 Once a DNS record has been found (that matches a specific IP return
24795 address, if specified &-- see section &<<SECTaddmatcon>>&), no further lookups
24796 are done. If there is a temporary DNS error, the rest of the sublist of domains
24797 or IP addresses is tried. A temporary error for the whole dnslists item occurs
24798 only if no other DNS lookup in this sublist succeeds. In other words, a
24799 successful lookup for any of the items in the sublist overrides a temporary
24800 error for a previous item.
24802 The ability to supply a list of items after the slash is in some sense just a
24803 syntactic convenience. These two examples have the same effect:
24805 dnslists = black.list.tld/a.domain : black.list.tld/b.domain
24806 dnslists = black.list.tld/a.domain::b.domain
24808 However, when the data for the list is obtained from a lookup, the second form
24809 is usually much more convenient. Consider this example:
24811 deny message = The mail servers for the domain \
24812 $sender_address_domain \
24813 are listed at $dnslist_domain ($dnslist_value); \
24815 dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org/<|${lookup dnsdb {>|a=<|\
24816 ${lookup dnsdb {>|mxh=\
24817 $sender_address_domain} }} }
24819 Note the use of &`>|`& in the dnsdb lookup to specify the separator for
24820 multiple DNS records. The inner dnsdb lookup produces a list of MX hosts
24821 and the outer dnsdb lookup finds the IP addresses for these hosts. The result
24822 of expanding the condition might be something like this:
24824 dnslists = sbl.spahmaus.org/<|192.168.2.3|192.168.5.6|...
24826 Thus, this example checks whether or not the IP addresses of the sender
24827 domain's mail servers are on the Spamhaus black list.
24833 .section "Data returned by DNS lists"
24834 .cindex "DNS list" "data returned from"
24835 DNS lists are constructed using address records in the DNS. The original RBL
24836 just used the address 127.0.0.1 on the right hand side of each record, but the
24837 RBL+ list and some other lists use a number of values with different meanings.
24838 The values used on the RBL+ list are:
24842 127.1.0.3 DUL and RBL
24844 127.1.0.5 RSS and RBL
24845 127.1.0.6 RSS and DUL
24846 127.1.0.7 RSS and DUL and RBL
24848 Some DNS lists may return more than one address record.
24851 .section "Variables set from DNS lists"
24852 .cindex "DNS list" "variables set from"
24853 .cindex "&$dnslist_domain$&"
24854 .cindex "&$dnslist_text$&"
24855 .cindex "&$dnslist_value$&"
24856 When an entry is found in a DNS list, the variable &$dnslist_domain$&
24857 contains the name of the domain that matched, &$dnslist_value$& contains the
24858 data from the entry, and &$dnslist_text$& contains the contents of any
24859 associated TXT record. If more than one address record is returned by the DNS
24860 lookup, all the IP addresses are included in &$dnslist_value$&, separated by
24863 You can use these variables in &%message%& or &%log_message%& modifiers &--
24864 although these appear before the condition in the ACL, they are not expanded
24865 until after it has failed. For example:
24867 deny hosts = !+local_networks
24868 message = $sender_host_address is listed \
24870 dnslists = rbl-plus.mail-abuse.example
24875 .section "Additional matching conditions for DNS lists" "SECTaddmatcon"
24876 .cindex "DNS list" "matching specific returned data"
24877 You can add an equals sign and an IP address after a &%dnslists%& domain name
24878 in order to restrict its action to DNS records with a matching right hand side.
24881 deny dnslists = rblplus.mail-abuse.org=127.0.0.2
24883 rejects only those hosts that yield 127.0.0.2. Without this additional data,
24884 any address record is considered to be a match. If more than one address record
24885 is found on the list, they are all checked for a matching right-hand side.
24887 More than one IP address may be given for checking, using a comma as a
24888 separator. These are alternatives &-- if any one of them matches, the
24889 &%dnslists%& condition is true. For example:
24891 deny dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
24893 If you want to specify a constraining address list and also specify names or IP
24894 addresses to be looked up, the constraining address list must be specified
24895 first. For example:
24897 deny dnslists = dsn.rfc-ignorant.org\
24898 =127.0.0.2/$sender_address_domain
24901 If the character &`&&`& is used instead of &`=`&, the comparison for each
24902 listed IP address is done by a bitwise &"and"& instead of by an equality test.
24903 In other words, the listed addresses are used as bit masks. The comparison is
24904 true if all the bits in the mask are present in the address that is being
24905 tested. For example:
24907 dnslists = a.b.c&0.0.0.3
24909 matches if the address is &'x.x.x.'&3, &'x.x.x.'&7, &'x.x.x.'&11, etc. If you
24910 want to test whether one bit or another bit is present (as opposed to both
24911 being present), you must use multiple values. For example:
24913 dnslists = a.b.c&0.0.0.1,0.0.0.2
24915 matches if the final component of the address is an odd number or two times
24920 .section "Negated DNS matching conditions"
24921 You can supply a negative list of IP addresses as part of a &%dnslists%&
24924 deny dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
24926 means &"deny if the host is in the black list at the domain &'a.b.c'& and the
24927 IP address yielded by the list is either 127.0.0.2 or 127.0.0.3"&,
24929 deny dnslists = a.b.c!=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
24931 means &"deny if the host is in the black list at the domain &'a.b.c'& and the
24932 IP address yielded by the list is not 127.0.0.2 and not 127.0.0.3"&. In other
24933 words, the result of the test is inverted if an exclamation mark appears before
24934 the &`=`& (or the &`&&`&) sign.
24936 &*Note*&: This kind of negation is not the same as negation in a domain,
24937 host, or address list (which is why the syntax is different).
24939 If you are using just one list, the negation syntax does not gain you much. The
24940 previous example is precisely equivalent to
24942 deny dnslists = a.b.c
24943 !dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3
24945 However, if you are using multiple lists, the negation syntax is clearer.
24946 Consider this example:
24948 deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
24950 dnsbl.njabl.org!=127.0.0.3 : \
24953 Using only positive lists, this would have to be:
24955 deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
24957 deny dnslists = dnsbl.njabl.org
24958 !dnslists = dnsbl.njabl.org=127.0.0.3
24959 deny dnslists = relays.ordb.org
24961 which is less clear, and harder to maintain.
24966 .section "DNS lists and IPv6" "SECTmorednslistslast"
24967 .cindex "IPv6" "DNS black lists"
24968 .cindex "DNS list" "IPv6 usage"
24969 If Exim is asked to do a dnslist lookup for an IPv6 address, it inverts it
24970 nibble by nibble. For example, if the calling host's IP address is
24971 3ffe:ffff:836f:0a00:000a:0800:200a:c031, Exim might look up
24973 1.3.0.c.a.0.0.2.0.0.8.0.a.0.0.0.0.0.a.0.f.6.3.8.
24974 f.f.f.f.e.f.f.3.blackholes.mail-abuse.org
24976 (split over two lines here to fit on the page). Unfortunately, some of the DNS
24977 lists contain wildcard records, intended for IPv4, that interact badly with
24978 IPv6. For example, the DNS entry
24980 *.3.some.list.example. A 127.0.0.1
24982 is probably intended to put the entire 3.0.0.0/8 IPv4 network on the list.
24983 Unfortunately, it also matches the entire 3::/4 IPv6 network.
24985 You can exclude IPv6 addresses from DNS lookups by making use of a suitable
24986 &%condition%& condition, as in this example:
24988 deny condition = ${if isip4{$sender_host_address}}
24989 dnslists = some.list.example
24993 .section "Rate limiting senders" "SECTratelimiting"
24994 .cindex "rate limiting" "client sending"
24995 .cindex "limiting client sending rates"
24996 .oindex "&%smpt_ratelimit_*%&"
24997 The &%ratelimit%& ACL condition can be used to measure and control the rate at
24998 which clients can send email. This is more powerful than the
24999 &%smtp_ratelimit_*%& options, because those options control the rate of
25000 commands in a single SMTP session only, whereas the &%ratelimit%& condition
25001 works across all connections (concurrent and sequential) from the same client
25002 host. The syntax of the &%ratelimit%& condition is:
25004 &`ratelimit =`& <&'m'&> &`/`& <&'p'&> &`/`& <&'options'&> &`/`& <&'key'&>
25006 If the average client sending rate is less than &'m'& messages per time
25007 period &'p'& then the condition is false; otherwise it is true.
25010 As a side-effect, the &%ratelimit%& condition sets the expansion variable
25011 &$sender_rate$& to the client's computed rate, &$sender_rate_limit$& to the
25012 configured value of &'m'&, and &$sender_rate_period$& to the configured value
25015 The parameter &'p'& is the smoothing time constant, in the form of an Exim
25016 time interval, for example, &`8h`& for eight hours. A larger time constant
25017 means that it takes Exim longer to forget a client's past behaviour. The
25018 parameter &'m'& is the maximum number of messages that a client is permitted to
25019 send in each time interval. It also specifies the number of messages permitted
25020 in a fast burst. By increasing both &'m'& and &'p'& but keeping &'m/p'&
25021 constant, you can allow a client to send more messages in a burst without
25022 changing its overall sending rate limit. Conversely, if &'m'& and &'p'& are
25023 both small, messages must be sent at an even rate.
25025 There is a script in &_util/ratelimit.pl_& which extracts sending rates from
25026 log files, to assist with choosing appropriate settings for &'m'& and &'p'&
25027 when deploying the &%ratelimit%& ACL condition. The script prints usage
25028 instructions when it is run with no arguments.
25030 The key is used to look up the data for calculating the client's average
25031 sending rate. This data is stored in a database maintained by Exim in its spool
25032 directory, alongside the retry and other hints databases. The default key is
25033 &$sender_host_address$&, which applies the limit to each client host IP address.
25034 By changing the key you can change how Exim identifies clients for the purpose
25035 of ratelimiting. For example, to limit the sending rate of each authenticated
25036 user, independent of the computer they are sending from, set the key to
25037 &$authenticated_id$&. You must ensure that the lookup key is meaningful; for
25038 example, &$authenticated_id$& is only meaningful if the client has
25039 authenticated, and you can check with with the &%authenticated%& ACL condition.
25042 Internally, Exim includes the smoothing constant &'p'& and the options in the
25043 lookup key because they alter the meaning of the stored data. This is not true
25044 for the limit &'m'&, so you can alter the configured maximum rate and Exim will
25045 still remember clients' past behaviour, but if you alter the other ratelimit
25046 parameters Exim forgets past behaviour.
25048 Each &%ratelimit%& condition can have up to two options. The first option
25049 specifies what Exim measures the rate of, and the second specifies how Exim
25050 handles excessively fast clients. The options are separated by a slash, like
25051 the other parameters.
25053 The &%per_conn%& option limits the client's connection rate.
25055 The &%per_mail%& option limits the client's rate of sending messages. This is
25056 the default if none of the &%per_*%& options is specified.
25058 The &%per_byte%& option limits the sender's email bandwidth. Note that it is
25059 best to use this option in the DATA ACL; if it is used in an earlier ACL it
25060 relies on the SIZE parameter on the MAIL command, which may be inaccurate or
25061 completely missing. You can follow the limit &'m'& in the configuration with K,
25062 M, or G to specify limits in kilobytes, megabytes, or gigabytes, respectively.
25064 The &%per_cmd%& option causes Exim to recompute the rate every time the
25065 condition is processed. This can be used to limit the SMTP command rate. The
25066 alias &%per_rcpt%& is provided for use in the RCPT ACL instead of &%per_cmd%&
25067 to make it clear that the effect is to limit the rate at which recipients are
25068 accepted. Note that in this case the rate limiting engine will see a message
25069 with many recipients as a large high-speed burst.
25071 If a client's average rate is greater than the maximum, the rate limiting
25072 engine can react in two possible ways, depending on the presence of the
25073 &%strict%& or &%leaky%& options. This is independent of the other
25074 counter-measures (such as rejecting the message) that may be specified by the
25075 rest of the ACL. The default mode is leaky, which avoids a sender's
25076 over-aggressive retry rate preventing it from getting any email through.
25078 The &%strict%& option means that the client's recorded rate is always updated.
25079 The effect of this is that Exim measures the client's average rate of attempts
25080 to send email, which can be much higher than the maximum. If the client is over
25081 the limit it will be subjected to counter-measures until it slows down below
25082 the maximum rate. The smoothing period determines the time it takes for a high
25083 sending rate to decay exponentially to 37% of its peak value, which means that
25084 you can work out the time (the number of smoothing periods) that a client is
25085 subjected to counter-measures after an over-limit burst with this formula:
25087 ln(peakrate/maxrate)
25089 The &%leaky%& option means that the client's recorded rate is not updated if it
25090 is above the limit. The effect of this is that Exim measures the client's
25091 average rate of successfully sent email, which cannot be greater than the
25092 maximum. If the client is over the limit it will suffer some counter-measures,
25093 but it will still be able to send email at the configured maximum rate,
25094 whatever the rate of its attempts. This is generally the better choice if you
25095 have clients that retry automatically.
25097 Exim's other ACL facilities are used to define what counter-measures are taken
25098 when the rate limit is exceeded. This might be anything from logging a warning
25099 (for example, while measuring existing sending rates in order to define
25100 policy), through time delays to slow down fast senders, up to rejecting the
25101 message. For example:
25103 # Log all senders' rates
25105 ratelimit = 0 / 1h / strict
25106 log_message = Sender rate $sender_rate / $sender_rate_period
25108 # Slow down fast senders; note the need to truncate $sender_rate at the
25111 ratelimit = 100 / 1h / per_rcpt / strict
25112 delay = ${eval: ${sg{$sender_rate}{[.].*}{}} - \
25113 $sender_rate_limit }s
25115 # Keep authenticated users under control
25118 ratelimit = 100 / 1d / strict / $authenticated_id
25120 # System-wide rate limit
25122 message = Sorry, too busy. Try again later.
25123 ratelimit = 10 / 1s / $primary_hostname
25125 # Restrict incoming rate from each host, with a default
25126 # set using a macro and special cases looked up in a table.
25128 message = Sender rate exceeds $sender_rate_limit \
25129 messages per $sender_rate_period
25130 ratelimit = ${lookup {$sender_host_address} \
25131 cdb {DB/ratelimits.cdb} \
25132 {$value} {RATELIMIT} }
25134 &*Warning*&: If you have a busy server with a lot of &%ratelimit%& tests,
25135 especially with the &%per_rcpt%& option, you may suffer from a performance
25136 bottleneck caused by locking on the ratelimit hints database. Apart from
25137 making your ACLs less complicated, you can reduce the problem by using a
25138 RAM disk for Exim's hints directory (usually &_/var/spool/exim/db/_&). However
25139 this means that Exim will lose its hints data after a reboot (including retry
25140 hints, the callout cache, and ratelimit data).
25144 .section "Address verification" "SECTaddressverification"
25145 .cindex "verifying address" "options for"
25146 .cindex "policy control" "address verification"
25147 Several of the &%verify%& conditions described in section
25148 &<<SECTaclconditions>>& cause addresses to be verified. These conditions can be
25149 followed by options that modify the verification process. The options are
25150 separated from the keyword and from each other by slashes, and some of them
25151 contain parameters. For example:
25153 verify = sender/callout
25154 verify = recipient/defer_ok/callout=10s,defer_ok
25156 The first stage of address verification, which always happens, is to run the
25157 address through the routers, in &"verify mode"&. Routers can detect the
25158 difference between verification and routing for delivery, and their actions can
25159 be varied by a number of generic options such as &%verify%& and &%verify_only%&
25160 (see chapter &<<CHAProutergeneric>>&). If routing fails, verification fails.
25161 The available options are as follows:
25164 If the &%callout%& option is specified, successful routing to one or more
25165 remote hosts is followed by a &"callout"& to those hosts as an additional
25166 check. Callouts and their sub-options are discussed in the next section.
25168 If there is a defer error while doing verification routing, the ACL
25169 normally returns &"defer"&. However, if you include &%defer_ok%& in the
25170 options, the condition is forced to be true instead. Note that this is a main
25171 verification option as well as a suboption for callouts.
25173 The &%no_details%& option is covered in section &<<SECTsenaddver>>&, which
25174 discusses the reporting of sender address verification failures.
25177 The &%success_on_redirect%& option causes verification always to succeed
25178 immediately after a successful redirection. By default, if a redirection
25179 generates just one address, that address is also verified. See further
25180 discussion in section &<<SECTredirwhilveri>>&.
25183 .cindex "verifying address" "differentiating failures"
25184 .cindex "&$recipient_verify_failure$&"
25185 .cindex "&$sender_verify_failure$&"
25186 .cindex "&$acl_verify_message$&"
25187 After an address verification failure, &$acl_verify_message$& contains the
25188 error message that is associated with the failure. It can be preserved by
25191 warn !verify = sender
25192 set acl_m0 = $acl_verify_message
25194 If you are writing your own custom rejection message or log message when
25195 denying access, you can use this variable to include information about the
25196 verification failure.
25199 In addition, &$sender_verify_failure$& or &$recipient_verify_failure$& (as
25200 appropriate) contains one of the following words:
25203 &%qualify%&: The address was unqualified (no domain), and the message
25204 was neither local nor came from an exempted host.
25206 &%route%&: Routing failed.
25208 &%mail%&: Routing succeeded, and a callout was attempted; rejection
25209 occurred at or before the MAIL command (that is, on initial
25210 connection, HELO, or MAIL).
25212 &%recipient%&: The RCPT command in a callout was rejected.
25214 &%postmaster%&: The postmaster check in a callout was rejected.
25217 The main use of these variables is expected to be to distinguish between
25218 rejections of MAIL and rejections of RCPT in callouts.
25223 .section "Callout verification" "SECTcallver"
25224 .cindex "verifying address" "by callout"
25225 .cindex "callout" "verification"
25226 .cindex "SMTP" "callout verification"
25228 For non-local addresses, routing verifies the domain, but is unable to do any
25229 checking of the local part. There are situations where some means of verifying
25230 the local part is desirable. One way this can be done is to make an SMTP
25231 &'callback'& to a delivery host for the sender address or a &'callforward'& to
25232 a subsequent host for a recipient address, to see if the host accepts the
25233 address. We use the term &'callout'& to cover both cases. Note that for a
25234 sender address, the callback is not to the client host that is trying to
25235 deliver the message, but to one of the hosts that accepts incoming mail for the
25238 Exim does not do callouts by default. If you want them to happen, you must
25239 request them by setting appropriate options on the &%verify%& condition, as
25240 described below. This facility should be used with care, because it can add a
25241 lot of resource usage to the cost of verifying an address. However, Exim does
25242 cache the results of callouts, which helps to reduce the cost. Details of
25243 caching are in section &<<SECTcallvercache>>&.
25246 Recipient callouts are usually used only between hosts that are controlled by
25247 the same administration. For example, a corporate gateway host could use
25248 callouts to check for valid recipients on an internal mailserver. A successful
25249 callout does not guarantee that a real delivery to the address would succeed;
25250 on the other hand, a failing callout does guarantee that a delivery would fail.
25252 If the &%callout%& option is present on a condition that verifies an address, a
25253 second stage of verification occurs if the address is successfully routed to
25254 one or more remote hosts. The usual case is routing by a &(dnslookup)& or a
25255 &(manualroute)& router, where the router specifies the hosts. However, if a
25256 router that does not set up hosts routes to an &(smtp)& transport with a
25257 &%hosts%& setting, the transport's hosts are used. If an &(smtp)& transport has
25258 &%hosts_override%& set, its hosts are always used, whether or not the router
25259 supplies a host list.
25261 The port that is used is taken from the transport, if it is specified and is a
25262 remote transport. (For routers that do verification only, no transport need be
25263 specified.) Otherwise, the default SMTP port is used. If a remote transport
25264 specifies an outgoing interface, this is used; otherwise the interface is not
25267 For a sender callout check, Exim makes SMTP connections to the remote hosts, to
25268 test whether a bounce message could be delivered to the sender address. The
25269 following SMTP commands are sent:
25271 &`HELO `&<&'smtp active host name'&>
25273 &`RCPT TO:`&<&'the address to be tested'&>
25276 LHLO is used instead of HELO if the transport's &%protocol%& option is
25279 A recipient callout check is similar. By default, it also uses an empty address
25280 for the sender. This default is chosen because most hosts do not make use of
25281 the sender address when verifying a recipient. Using the same address means
25282 that a single cache entry can be used for each recipient. Some sites, however,
25283 do make use of the sender address when verifying. These are catered for by the
25284 &%use_sender%& and &%use_postmaster%& options, described in the next section.
25286 If the response to the RCPT command is a 2&'xx'& code, the verification
25287 succeeds. If it is 5&'xx'&, the verification fails. For any other condition,
25288 Exim tries the next host, if any. If there is a problem with all the remote
25289 hosts, the ACL yields &"defer"&, unless the &%defer_ok%& parameter of the
25290 &%callout%& option is given, in which case the condition is forced to succeed.
25296 .section "Additional parameters for callouts" "CALLaddparcall"
25297 .cindex "callout" "additional parameters for"
25298 The &%callout%& option can be followed by an equals sign and a number of
25299 optional parameters, separated by commas. For example:
25301 verify = recipient/callout=10s,defer_ok
25303 The old syntax, which had &%callout_defer_ok%& and &%check_postmaster%& as
25304 separate verify options, is retained for backwards compatibility, but is now
25305 deprecated. The additional parameters for &%callout%& are as follows:
25309 .vitem <&'a&~time&~interval'&>
25310 .cindex "callout timeout" "specifying"
25311 This specifies the timeout that applies for the callout attempt to each host.
25314 verify = sender/callout=5s
25316 The default is 30 seconds. The timeout is used for each response from the
25317 remote host. It is also used for the intial connection, unless overridden by
25318 the &%connect%& parameter.
25321 .vitem &*connect&~=&~*&<&'time&~interval'&>
25322 .cindex "callout connection timeout" "specifying"
25323 This parameter makes it possible to set a different (usually smaller) timeout
25324 for making the SMTP connection. For example:
25326 verify = sender/callout=5s,connect=1s
25328 If not specified, this timeout defaults to the general timeout value.
25330 .vitem &*defer_ok*&
25331 .cindex "callout defer" "action on"
25332 When this parameter is present, failure to contact any host, or any other kind
25333 of temporary error, is treated as success by the ACL. However, the cache is not
25334 updated in this circumstance.
25337 .vitem &*fullpostmaster*&
25338 .cindex "callout" "full postmaster check"
25339 This operates like the &%postmaster%& option (see below), but if the check for
25340 &'postmaster@domain'& fails, it tries just &'postmaster'&, without a domain, in
25341 accordance with the specification in RFC 2821. The RFC states that the
25342 unqualified address &'postmaster'& should be accepted.
25346 .vitem &*mailfrom&~=&~*&<&'email&~address'&>
25347 .cindex "callout" "sender when verifying header"
25348 When verifying addresses in header lines using the &%header_sender%&
25349 verification option, Exim behaves by default as if the addresses are envelope
25350 sender addresses from a message. Callout verification therefore tests to see
25351 whether a bounce message could be delivered, by using an empty address in the
25352 MAIL command. However, it is arguable that these addresses might never be used
25353 as envelope senders, and could therefore justifiably reject bounce messages
25354 (empty senders). The &%mailfrom%& callout parameter allows you to specify what
25355 address to use in the MAIL command. For example:
25357 require verify = header_sender/callout=mailfrom=abcd@x.y.z
25359 This parameter is available only for the &%header_sender%& verification option.
25362 .vitem &*maxwait&~=&~*&<&'time&~interval'&>
25363 .cindex "callout overall timeout" "specifying"
25364 This parameter sets an overall timeout for performing a callout verification.
25367 verify = sender/callout=5s,maxwait=30s
25369 This timeout defaults to four times the callout timeout for individual SMTP
25370 commands. The overall timeout applies when there is more than one host that can
25371 be tried. The timeout is checked before trying the next host. This prevents
25372 very long delays if there are a large number of hosts and all are timing out
25373 (for example, when network connections are timing out).
25376 .vitem &*no_cache*&
25377 .cindex "callout cache" "suppressing"
25378 .cindex "caching callout" "suppressing"
25379 When this parameter is given, the callout cache is neither read nor updated.
25381 .vitem &*postmaster*&
25382 .cindex "callout" "postmaster; checking"
25383 When this parameter is set, a sucessful callout check is followed by a similar
25384 check for the local part &'postmaster'& at the same domain. If this address is
25385 rejected, the callout fails (but see &%fullpostmaster%& above). The result of
25386 the postmaster check is recorded in a cache record; if it is a failure, this is
25387 used to fail subsequent callouts for the domain without a connection being
25388 made, until the cache record expires.
25390 .vitem &*postmaster_mailfrom&~=&~*&<&'email&~address'&>
25391 The postmaster check uses an empty sender in the MAIL command by default.
25392 You can use this parameter to do a postmaster check using a different address.
25395 require verify = sender/callout=postmaster_mailfrom=abc@x.y.z
25397 If both &%postmaster%& and &%postmaster_mailfrom%& are present, the rightmost
25398 one overrides. The &%postmaster%& parameter is equivalent to this example:
25400 require verify = sender/callout=postmaster_mailfrom=
25402 &*Warning*&: The caching arrangements for postmaster checking do not take
25403 account of the sender address. It is assumed that either the empty address or
25404 a fixed non-empty address will be used. All that Exim remembers is that the
25405 postmaster check for the domain succeeded or failed.
25409 .cindex "callout" "&""random""& check"
25410 When this parameter is set, before doing the normal callout check, Exim does a
25411 check for a &"random"& local part at the same domain. The local part is not
25412 really random &-- it is defined by the expansion of the option
25413 &%callout_random_local_part%&, which defaults to
25415 $primary_host_name-$tod_epoch-testing
25417 The idea here is to try to determine whether the remote host accepts all local
25418 parts without checking. If it does, there is no point in doing callouts for
25419 specific local parts. If the &"random"& check succeeds, the result is saved in
25420 a cache record, and used to force the current and subsequent callout checks to
25421 succeed without a connection being made, until the cache record expires.
25423 .vitem &*use_postmaster*&
25424 .cindex "callout" "sender for recipient check"
25425 This parameter applies to recipient callouts only. For example:
25427 deny !verify = recipient/callout=use_postmaster
25430 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
25431 It causes a non-empty postmaster address to be used in the MAIL command when
25432 performing the callout for the recipient, and also for a &"random"& check if
25433 that is configured. The local part of the address is &`postmaster`& and the
25434 domain is the contents of &$qualify_domain$&.
25437 .vitem &*use_sender*&
25438 This option applies to recipient callouts only. For example:
25440 require verify = recipient/callout=use_sender
25442 It causes the message's actual sender address to be used in the MAIL
25443 command when performing the callout, instead of an empty address. There is no
25444 need to use this option unless you know that the called hosts make use of the
25445 sender when checking recipients. If used indiscriminately, it reduces the
25446 usefulness of callout caching.
25449 If you use any of the parameters that set a non-empty sender for the MAIL
25450 command (&%mailfrom%&, &%postmaster_mailfrom%&, &%use_postmaster%&, or
25451 &%use_sender%&), you should think about possible loops. Recipient checking is
25452 usually done between two hosts that are under the same management, and the host
25453 that receives the callouts is not normally configured to do callouts itself.
25454 Therefore, it is normally safe to use &%use_postmaster%& or &%use_sender%& in
25455 these circumstances.
25457 However, if you use a non-empty sender address for a callout to an arbitrary
25458 host, there is the likelihood that the remote host will itself initiate a
25459 callout check back to your host. As it is checking what appears to be a message
25460 sender, it is likely to use an empty address in MAIL, thus avoiding a
25461 callout loop. However, to be on the safe side it would be best to set up your
25462 own ACLs so that they do not do sender verification checks when the recipient
25463 is the address you use for header sender or postmaster callout checking.
25465 Another issue to think about when using non-empty senders for callouts is
25466 caching. When you set &%mailfrom%& or &%use_sender%&, the cache record is keyed
25467 by the sender/recipient combination; thus, for any given recipient, many more
25468 actual callouts are performed than when an empty sender or postmaster is used.
25473 .section "Callout caching" "SECTcallvercache"
25474 .cindex "hints database" "callout cache"
25475 .cindex "callout" "caching"
25476 .cindex "caching" "callout"
25477 Exim caches the results of callouts in order to reduce the amount of resources
25478 used, unless you specify the &%no_cache%& parameter with the &%callout%&
25479 option. A hints database called &"callout"& is used for the cache. Two
25480 different record types are used: one records the result of a callout check for
25481 a specific address, and the other records information that applies to the
25482 entire domain (for example, that it accepts the local part &'postmaster'&).
25484 When an original callout fails, a detailed SMTP error message is given about
25485 the failure. However, for subsequent failures use the cache data, this message
25488 The expiry times for negative and positive address cache records are
25489 independent, and can be set by the global options &%callout_negative_expire%&
25490 (default 2h) and &%callout_positive_expire%& (default 24h), respectively.
25492 If a host gives a negative response to an SMTP connection, or rejects any
25493 commands up to and including
25497 (but not including the MAIL command with a non-empty address),
25498 any callout attempt is bound to fail. Exim remembers such failures in a
25499 domain cache record, which it uses to fail callouts for the domain without
25500 making new connections, until the domain record times out. There are two
25501 separate expiry times for domain cache records:
25502 &%callout_domain_negative_expire%& (default 3h) and
25503 &%callout_domain_positive_expire%& (default 7d).
25505 Domain records expire when the negative expiry time is reached if callouts
25506 cannot be made for the domain, or if the postmaster check failed.
25507 Otherwise, they expire when the positive expiry time is reached. This
25508 ensures that, for example, a host that stops accepting &"random"& local parts
25509 will eventually be noticed.
25511 The callout caching mechanism is based on the domain of the address that is
25512 being tested. If the domain routes to several hosts, it is assumed that their
25513 behaviour will be the same.
25517 .section "Sender address verification reporting" "SECTsenaddver"
25518 .cindex "verifying" "suppressing error details"
25519 When sender verification fails in an ACL, the details of the failure are
25520 given as additional output lines before the 550 response to the relevant
25521 SMTP command (RCPT or DATA). For example, if sender callout is in use,
25524 MAIL FROM:<xyz@abc.example>
25526 RCPT TO:<pqr@def.example>
25527 550-Verification failed for <xyz@abc.example>
25528 550-Called: 192.168.34.43
25529 550-Sent: RCPT TO:<xyz@abc.example>
25530 550-Response: 550 Unknown local part xyz in <xyz@abc.example>
25531 550 Sender verification failed
25533 If more than one RCPT command fails in the same way, the details are given
25534 only for the first of them. However, some administrators do not want to send
25535 out this much information. You can suppress the details by adding
25536 &"/no_details"& to the ACL statement that requests sender verification. For
25539 verify = sender/no_details
25542 .section "Redirection while verifying" "SECTredirwhilveri"
25543 .cindex "verifying" "redirection while"
25544 .cindex "address redirection" "while verifying"
25545 A dilemma arises when a local address is redirected by aliasing or forwarding
25546 during verification: should the generated addresses themselves be verified,
25547 or should the successful expansion of the original address be enough to verify
25548 it? By default, Exim takes the following pragmatic approach:
25551 When an incoming address is redirected to just one child address, verification
25552 continues with the child address, and if that fails to verify, the original
25553 verification also fails.
25555 When an incoming address is redirected to more than one child address,
25556 verification does not continue. A success result is returned.
25559 This seems the most reasonable behaviour for the common use of aliasing as a
25560 way of redirecting different local parts to the same mailbox. It means, for
25561 example, that a pair of alias entries of the form
25564 aw123: :fail: Gone away, no forwarding address
25566 work as expected, with both local parts causing verification failure. When a
25567 redirection generates more than one address, the behaviour is more like a
25568 mailing list, where the existence of the alias itself is sufficient for
25569 verification to succeed.
25572 It is possible, however, to change the default behaviour so that all successful
25573 redirections count as successful verifications, however many new addresses are
25574 generated. This is specified by the &%success_on_redirect%& verification
25575 option. For example:
25577 require verify = recipient/success_on_redirect/callout=10s
25579 In this example, verification succeeds if a router generates a new address, and
25580 the callout does not occur, because no address was routed to a remote host.
25587 .section "Client SMTP authorization (CSA)" "SECTverifyCSA"
25588 .cindex "CSA" "verifying"
25589 Client SMTP Authorization is a system that allows a site to advertise
25590 which machines are and are not permitted to send email. This is done by placing
25591 special SRV records in the DNS; these are looked up using the client's HELO
25592 domain. At the time of writing, CSA is still an Internet Draft. Client SMTP
25593 Authorization checks in Exim are performed by the ACL condition:
25597 This fails if the client is not authorized. If there is a DNS problem, or if no
25598 valid CSA SRV record is found, or if the client is authorized, the condition
25599 succeeds. These three cases can be distinguished using the expansion variable
25600 &$csa_status$&, which can take one of the values &"fail"&, &"defer"&,
25601 &"unknown"&, or &"ok"&. The condition does not itself defer because that would
25602 be likely to cause problems for legitimate email.
25604 The error messages produced by the CSA code include slightly more
25605 detail. If &$csa_status$& is &"defer"&, this may be because of problems
25606 looking up the CSA SRV record, or problems looking up the CSA target
25607 address record. There are four reasons for &$csa_status$& being &"fail"&:
25610 The client's host name is explicitly not authorized.
25612 The client's IP address does not match any of the CSA target IP addresses.
25614 The client's host name is authorized but it has no valid target IP addresses
25615 (for example, the target's addresses are IPv6 and the client is using IPv4).
25617 The client's host name has no CSA SRV record but a parent domain has asserted
25618 that all subdomains must be explicitly authorized.
25621 The &%csa%& verification condition can take an argument which is the domain to
25622 use for the DNS query. The default is:
25624 verify = csa/$sender_helo_name
25626 This implementation includes an extension to CSA. If the query domain
25627 is an address literal such as [192.0.2.95], or if it is a bare IP
25628 address, Exim searches for CSA SRV records in the reverse DNS as if
25629 the HELO domain was (for example) &'95.2.0.192.in-addr.arpa'&. Therefore it is
25632 verify = csa/$sender_host_address
25634 In fact, this is the check that Exim performs if the client does not say HELO.
25635 This extension can be turned off by setting the main configuration option
25636 &%dns_csa_use_reverse%& to be false.
25638 If a CSA SRV record is not found for the domain itself, a search
25639 is performed through its parent domains for a record which might be
25640 making assertions about subdomains. The maximum depth of this search is limited
25641 using the main configuration option &%dns_csa_search_limit%&, which is 5 by
25642 default. Exim does not look for CSA SRV records in a top level domain, so the
25643 default settings handle HELO domains as long as seven
25644 (&'hostname.five.four.three.two.one.com'&). This encompasses the vast majority
25645 of legitimate HELO domains.
25647 The &'dnsdb'& lookup also has support for CSA. Although &'dnsdb'& also supports
25648 direct SRV lookups, this is not sufficient because of the extra parent domain
25649 search behaviour of CSA, and (as with PTR lookups) &'dnsdb'& also turns IP
25650 addresses into lookups in the reverse DNS space. The result of a successful
25653 ${lookup dnsdb {csa=$sender_helo_name}}
25655 has two space-separated fields: an authorization code and a target host name.
25656 The authorization code can be &"Y"& for yes, &"N"& for no, &"X"& for explicit
25657 authorization required but absent, or &"?"& for unknown.
25662 .section "Bounce address tag validation" "SECTverifyPRVS"
25663 .cindex "BATV" "verifying"
25664 Bounce address tag validation (BATV) is a scheme whereby the envelope senders
25665 of outgoing messages have a cryptographic, timestamped &"tag"& added to them.
25666 Genuine incoming bounce messages should therefore always be addressed to
25667 recipients that have a valid tag. This scheme is a way of detecting unwanted
25668 bounce messages caused by sender address forgeries (often called &"collateral
25669 spam"&), because the recipients of such messages will not include valid tags.
25671 There are two expansion items to help with the implementation of the BATV
25672 &"prvs"& (private signature) scheme in an Exim configuration. This scheme signs
25673 the original envelope sender address by using a simple shared key to add a hash
25674 of the address and some time-based randomizing information. The &%prvs%&
25675 expansion item creates a signed address, and the &%prvscheck%& expansion item
25676 checks one. The syntax of these expansion items is described in section
25677 &<<SECTexpansionitems>>&.
25679 As an example, suppose the secret per-address keys are stored in an MySQL
25680 database. A query to look up the key for an address could be defined as a macro
25683 PRVSCHECK_SQL = ${lookup mysql{SELECT secret FROM batv_prvs \
25684 WHERE sender='${quote_mysql:$prvscheck_address}'\
25687 Suppose also that the senders who make use of BATV are defined by an address
25688 list called &%batv_senders%&. Then, in the ACL for RCPT commands, you could
25691 # Bounces: drop unsigned addresses for BATV senders
25692 deny message = This address does not send an unsigned reverse path.
25694 recipients = +batv_senders
25696 # Bounces: In case of prvs-signed address, check signature.
25697 deny message = Invalid reverse path signature.
25699 condition = ${prvscheck {$local_part@$domain}\
25700 {PRVSCHECK_SQL}{1}}
25701 !condition = $prvscheck_result
25703 The first statement rejects recipients for bounce messages that are addressed
25704 to plain BATV sender addresses, because it is known that BATV senders do not
25705 send out messages with plain sender addresses. The second statement rejects
25706 recipients that are prvs-signed, but with invalid signatures (either because
25707 the key is wrong, or the signature has timed out).
25709 A non-prvs-signed address is not rejected by the second statement, because the
25710 &%prvscheck%& expansion yields an empty string if its first argument is not a
25711 prvs-signed address, thus causing the &%condition%& condition to be false. If
25712 the first argument is a syntactically valid prvs-signed address, the yield is
25713 the third string (in this case &"1"&), whether or not the cryptographic and
25714 timeout checks succeed. The &$prvscheck_result$& variable contains the result
25715 of the checks (empty for failure, &"1"& for success).
25717 Of course, when you accept a prvs-signed address, you have to ensure that the
25718 routers accept it and deliver it correctly. The easiest way to handle this is
25719 to use a &(redirect)& router to remove the signature with a configuration along
25724 data = ${prvscheck {$local_part@$domain}{PRVSCHECK_SQL}}
25726 This works because, if the third argument of &%prvscheck%& is empty, the result
25727 of the expansion of a prvs-signed address is the decoded value of the original
25728 address. This router should probably be the first of your routers that handles
25731 To create BATV-signed addresses in the first place, a transport of this form
25734 external_smtp_batv:
25736 return_path = ${prvs {$return_path} \
25737 {${lookup mysql{SELECT \
25738 secret FROM batv_prvs WHERE \
25739 sender='${quote_mysql:$sender_address}'} \
25742 If no key can be found for the existing return path, no signing takes place.
25747 .section "Using an ACL to control relaying" "SECTrelaycontrol"
25748 .cindex "&ACL;" "relay control"
25749 .cindex "relaying" "control by ACL"
25750 .cindex "policy control" "relay control"
25751 An MTA is said to &'relay'& a message if it receives it from some host and
25752 delivers it directly to another host as a result of a remote address contained
25753 within it. Redirecting a local address via an alias or forward file and then
25754 passing the message on to another host is not relaying,
25755 .cindex "&""percent hack""&"
25756 but a redirection as a result of the &"percent hack"& is.
25758 Two kinds of relaying exist, which are termed &"incoming"& and &"outgoing"&.
25759 A host which is acting as a gateway or an MX backup is concerned with incoming
25760 relaying from arbitrary hosts to a specific set of domains. On the other hand,
25761 a host which is acting as a smart host for a number of clients is concerned
25762 with outgoing relaying from those clients to the Internet at large. Often the
25763 same host is fulfilling both functions,
25765 . as illustrated in the diagram below,
25767 but in principle these two kinds of relaying are entirely independent. What is
25768 not wanted is the transmission of mail from arbitrary remote hosts through your
25769 system to arbitrary domains.
25772 You can implement relay control by means of suitable statements in the ACL that
25773 runs for each RCPT command. For convenience, it is often easiest to use
25774 Exim's named list facility to define the domains and hosts involved. For
25775 example, suppose you want to do the following:
25778 Deliver a number of domains to mailboxes on the local host (or process them
25779 locally in some other way). Let's say these are &'my.dom1.example'& and
25780 &'my.dom2.example'&.
25782 Relay mail for a number of other domains for which you are the secondary MX.
25783 These might be &'friend1.example'& and &'friend2.example'&.
25785 Relay mail from the hosts on your local LAN, to whatever domains are involved.
25786 Suppose your LAN is 192.168.45.0/24.
25790 In the main part of the configuration, you put the following definitions:
25792 domainlist local_domains = my.dom1.example : my.dom2.example
25793 domainlist relay_domains = friend1.example : friend2.example
25794 hostlist relay_hosts = 192.168.45.0/24
25796 Now you can use these definitions in the ACL that is run for every RCPT
25800 accept domains = +local_domains : +relay_domains
25801 accept hosts = +relay_hosts
25803 The first statement accepts any RCPT command that contains an address in
25804 the local or relay domains. For any other domain, control passes to the second
25805 statement, which accepts the command only if it comes from one of the relay
25806 hosts. In practice, you will probably want to make your ACL more sophisticated
25807 than this, for example, by including sender and recipient verification. The
25808 default configuration includes a more comprehensive example, which is described
25809 in chapter &<<CHAPdefconfil>>&.
25813 .section "Checking a relay configuration" "SECTcheralcon"
25814 .cindex "relaying" "checking control of"
25815 You can check the relay characteristics of your configuration in the same way
25816 that you can test any ACL behaviour for an incoming SMTP connection, by using
25817 the &%-bh%& option to run a fake SMTP session with which you interact.
25819 For specifically testing for unwanted relaying, the host
25820 &'relay-test.mail-abuse.org'& provides a useful service. If you telnet to this
25821 host from the host on which Exim is running, using the normal telnet port, you
25822 will see a normal telnet connection message and then quite a long delay. Be
25823 patient. The remote host is making an SMTP connection back to your host, and
25824 trying a number of common probes to test for open relay vulnerability. The
25825 results of the tests will eventually appear on your terminal.
25830 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
25831 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
25833 .chapter "Content scanning at ACL time" "CHAPexiscan"
25834 .cindex "content scanning" "at ACL time"
25835 The extension of Exim to include content scanning at ACL time, formerly known
25836 as &"exiscan"&, was originally implemented as a patch by Tom Kistner. The code
25837 was integrated into the main source for Exim release 4.50, and Tom continues to
25838 maintain it. Most of the wording of this chapter is taken from Tom's
25842 It is also possible to scan the content of messages at other times. The
25843 &[local_scan()]& function (see chapter &<<CHAPlocalscan>>&) allows for content
25844 scanning after all the ACLs have run. A transport filter can be used to scan
25845 messages at delivery time (see the &%transport_filter%& option, described in
25846 chapter &<<CHAPtransportgeneric>>&).
25849 If you want to include the ACL-time content-scanning features when you compile
25850 Exim, you need to arrange for WITH_CONTENT_SCAN to be defined in your
25851 &_Local/Makefile_&. When you do that, the Exim binary is built with:
25855 Two additional ACLs (&%acl_smtp_mime%& and &%acl_not_smtp_mime%&) that are run
25856 for all MIME parts for SMTP and non-SMTP messages, respectively.
25859 Additional ACL conditions and modifiers: &%decode%&, &%malware%&,
25860 &%mime_regex%&, &%regex%&, and &%spam%&. These can be used in the ACL that is
25861 run at the end of message reception (the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL).
25863 An additional control feature (&"no_mbox_unspool"&) that saves spooled copies
25864 of messages, or parts of messages, for debugging purposes.
25866 Additional expansion variables that are set in the new ACL and by the new
25869 Two new main configuration options: &%av_scanner%& and &%spamd_address%&.
25872 There is another content-scanning configuration option for &_Local/Makefile_&,
25873 called WITH_OLD_DEMIME. If this is set, the old, deprecated &%demime%& ACL
25874 condition is compiled, in addition to all the other content-scanning features.
25876 Content-scanning is continually evolving, and new features are still being
25877 added. While such features are still unstable and liable to incompatible
25878 changes, they are made available in Exim by setting options whose names begin
25879 EXPERIMENTAL_ in &_Local/Makefile_&. Such features are not documented in
25880 this manual. You can find out about them by reading the file called
25881 &_doc/experimental.txt_&.
25883 All the content-scanning facilites work on a MBOX copy of the message that is
25884 temporarily created in a file called:
25886 <&'spool_directory'&>&`/scan/`&<&'message_id'&>/<&'message_id'&>&`.eml`&
25888 The &_.eml_& extension is a friendly hint to virus scanners that they can
25889 expect an MBOX-like structure inside that file. The file is created when the
25890 first content scanning facility is called. Subsequent calls to content
25891 scanning conditions open the same file again. The directory is recursively
25892 removed when the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL has finished running, unless
25894 control = no_mbox_unspool
25896 has been encountered. When the MIME ACL decodes files, they are put into the
25897 same directory by default.
25901 .section "Scanning for viruses" "SECTscanvirus"
25902 .cindex "virus scanning"
25903 .cindex "content scanning" "for viruses"
25904 .cindex "content scanning" "the &%malware%& condition"
25905 The &%malware%& ACL condition lets you connect virus scanner software to Exim.
25906 It supports a &"generic"& interface to scanners called via the shell, and
25907 specialized interfaces for &"daemon"& type virus scanners, which are resident
25908 in memory and thus are much faster.
25910 .cindex "&%av_scanner%&"
25911 You can set the &%av_scanner%& option in first part of the Exim configuration
25912 file to specify which scanner to use, together with any additional options that
25913 are needed. The basic syntax is as follows:
25915 &`av_scanner = <`&&'scanner-type'&&`>:<`&&'option1'&&`>:<`&&'option2'&&`>:[...]`&
25917 If you do not set &%av_scanner%&, it defaults to
25919 av_scanner = sophie:/var/run/sophie
25921 If the value of &%av_scanner%& starts with dollar character, it is expanded
25922 before use. The following scanner types are supported in this release:
25925 .vitem &%aveserver%&
25926 .cindex "virus scanners" "Kaspersky"
25927 This is the scanner daemon of Kaspersky Version 5. You can get a trial version
25928 at &url(http://www.kaspersky.com). This scanner type takes one option,
25929 which is the path to the daemon's UNIX socket. The default is shown in this
25932 av_scanner = aveserver:/var/run/aveserver
25936 .cindex "virus scanners" "clamd"
25937 This daemon-type scanner is GPL and free. You can get it at
25938 &url(http://www.clamav.net/). Some older versions of clamd do not seem to
25939 unpack MIME containers, so it used to be recommended to unpack MIME attachments
25940 in the MIME ACL. This no longer believed to be necessary. One option is
25941 required: either the path and name of a UNIX socket file, or a hostname or IP
25942 number, and a port, separated by space, as in the second of these examples:
25944 av_scanner = clamd:/opt/clamd/socket
25945 av_scanner = clamd:192.168.2.100 1234
25947 If the option is unset, the default is &_/tmp/clamd_&. Thanks to David Saez for
25948 contributing the code for this scanner.
25951 .cindex "virus scanners" "command line interface"
25952 This is the keyword for the generic command line scanner interface. It can be
25953 used to attach virus scanners that are invoked from the shell. This scanner
25954 type takes 3 mandatory options:
25957 The full path and name of the scanner binary, with all command line options,
25958 and a placeholder (&`%s`&) for the directory to scan.
25961 A regular expression to match against the STDOUT and STDERR output of the
25962 virus scanner. If the expression matches, a virus was found. You must make
25963 absolutely sure that this expression matches on &"virus found"&. This is called
25964 the &"trigger"& expression.
25967 Another regular expression, containing exactly one pair of parentheses, to
25968 match the name of the virus found in the scanners output. This is called the
25969 &"name"& expression.
25972 For example, Sophos Sweep reports a virus on a line like this:
25974 Virus 'W32/Magistr-B' found in file ./those.bat
25976 For the trigger expression, we can just match the word &"found"&. For the name
25977 expression, we want to extract the W32/Magistr-B string, so we can match for
25978 the single quotes left and right of it. Altogether, this makes the
25979 configuration setting:
25981 av_scanner = cmdline:\
25982 /path/to/sweep -all -rec -archive %s:\
25986 .cindex "virus scanners" "DrWeb"
25987 The DrWeb daemon scanner (&url(http://www.sald.com/)) interface takes one
25988 argument, either a full path to a UNIX socket, or an IP address and port
25989 separated by white space, as in these examples:
25991 av_scanner = drweb:/var/run/drwebd.sock
25992 av_scanner = drweb:192.168.2.20 31337
25994 If you omit the argument, the default path &_/usr/local/drweb/run/drwebd.sock_&
25995 is used. Thanks to Alex Miller for contributing the code for this scanner.
25998 .cindex "virus scanners" "F-Secure"
25999 The F-Secure daemon scanner (&url(http://www.f-secure.com)) takes one
26000 argument which is the path to a UNIX socket. For example:
26002 av_scanner = fsecure:/path/to/.fsav
26004 If no argument is given, the default is &_/var/run/.fsav_&. Thanks to Johan
26005 Thelmen for contributing the code for this scanner.
26007 .vitem &%kavdaemon%&
26008 .cindex "virus scanners" "Kaspersky"
26009 This is the scanner daemon of Kaspersky Version 4. This version of the
26010 Kaspersky scanner is outdated. Please upgrade (see &%aveserver%& above). This
26011 scanner type takes one option, which is the path to the daemon's UNIX socket.
26014 av_scanner = kavdaemon:/opt/AVP/AvpCtl
26016 The default path is &_/var/run/AvpCtl_&.
26019 .cindex "virus scanners" "mksd"
26020 This is a daemon type scanner that is aimed mainly at Polish users, though some
26021 parts of documentation are now available in English. You can get it at
26022 &url(http://linux.mks.com.pl/). The only option for this scanner type is
26023 the maximum number of processes used simultaneously to scan the attachments,
26024 provided that the demime facility is employed and also provided that mksd has
26025 been run with at least the same number of child processes. For example:
26027 av_scanner = mksd:2
26029 You can safely omit this option (the default value is 1).
26032 .cindex "virus scanners" "Sophos and Sophie"
26033 Sophie is a daemon that uses Sophos' &%libsavi%& library to scan for viruses.
26034 You can get Sophie at &url(http://www.vanja.com/tools/sophie/). The only
26035 option for this scanner type is the path to the UNIX socket that Sophie uses
26036 for client communication. For example:
26038 av_scanner = sophie:/tmp/sophie
26040 The default path is &_/var/run/sophie_&, so if you are using this, you can omit
26045 When &%av_scanner%& is correctly set, you can use the &%malware%& condition in
26046 the DATA ACL. &*Note*&: You cannot use the &%malware%& condition in the MIME
26050 The &%av_scanner%& option is expanded each time &%malware%& is called. This
26051 makes it possible to use different scanners. See further below for an example.
26052 The &%malware%& condition caches its results, so when you use it multiple times
26053 for the same message, the actual scanning process is only carried out once.
26054 However, using expandable items in &%av_scanner%& disables this caching, in
26055 which case each use of the &%malware%& condition causes a new scan of the
26058 The &%malware%& condition takes a right-hand argument that is expanded before
26059 use. It can then be one of
26062 &"true"&, &"*"&, or &"1"&, in which case the message is scanned for viruses.
26063 The condition succeeds if a virus was found, and fail otherwise. This is the
26066 &"false"& or &"0"&, in which case no scanning is done and the condition fails
26069 A regular expression, in which case the message is scanned for viruses. The
26070 condition succeeds if a virus is found and its name matches the regular
26071 expression. This allows you to take special actions on certain types of virus.
26074 You can append &`/defer_ok`& to the &%malware%& condition to accept messages
26075 even if there is a problem with the virus scanner.
26077 .cindex "&$malware_name$&"
26078 When a virus is found, the condition sets up an expansion variable called
26079 &$malware_name$& that contains the name of the virus. You can use it in a
26080 &%message%& modifier that specifies the error returned to the sender, and/or in
26083 If your virus scanner cannot unpack MIME and TNEF containers itself, you should
26084 use the &%demime%& condition (see section &<<SECTdemimecond>>&) before the
26085 &%malware%& condition.
26087 Here is a very simple scanning example:
26089 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26093 The next example accepts messages when there is a problem with the scanner:
26095 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26097 malware = */defer_ok
26099 The next example shows how to use an ACL variable to scan with both sophie and
26100 aveserver. It assumes you have set:
26102 av_scanner = $acl_m0
26104 in the main Exim configuration.
26106 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26107 set acl_m0 = sophie
26110 deny message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)
26111 set acl_m0 = aveserver
26116 .section "Scanning with SpamAssassin" "SECTscanspamass"
26117 .cindex "content scanning" "for spam"
26118 .cindex "spam scanning"
26119 .cindex "SpamAssassin" "scanning with"
26120 The &%spam%& ACL condition calls SpamAssassin's &%spamd%& daemon to get a spam
26121 score and a report for the message. You can get SpamAssassin at
26122 &url(http://www.spamassassin.org), or, if you have a working Perl
26123 installation, you can use CPAN by running:
26125 perl -MCPAN -e 'install Mail::SpamAssassin'
26127 SpamAssassin has its own set of configuration files. Please review its
26128 documentation to see how you can tweak it. The default installation should work
26131 .cindex "&%spamd_address%&"
26132 After having installed and configured SpamAssassin, start the &%spamd%& daemon.
26133 By default, it listens on 127.0.0.1, TCP port 783. If you use another host or
26134 port for &%spamd%&, you must set the &%spamd_address%& option in the global
26135 part of the Exim configuration as follows (example):
26137 spamd_address = 192.168.99.45 387
26139 You do not need to set this option if you use the default. As of version 2.60,
26140 &%spamd%& also supports communication over UNIX sockets. If you want to use
26141 these, supply &%spamd_address%& with an absolute file name instead of a
26144 spamd_address = /var/run/spamd_socket
26146 You can have multiple &%spamd%& servers to improve scalability. These can
26147 reside on other hardware reachable over the network. To specify multiple
26148 &%spamd%& servers, put multiple address/port pairs in the &%spamd_address%&
26149 option, separated with colons:
26151 spamd_address = 192.168.2.10 783 : \
26152 192.168.2.11 783 : \
26155 Up to 32 &%spamd%& servers are supported. The servers are queried in a random
26156 fashion. When a server fails to respond to the connection attempt, all other
26157 servers are tried until one succeeds. If no server responds, the &%spam%&
26160 &*Warning*&: It is not possible to use the UNIX socket connection method with
26161 multiple &%spamd%& servers.
26164 .section "Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL"
26165 Here is a simple example of the use of the &%spam%& condition in a DATA ACL:
26167 deny message = This message was classified as SPAM
26170 The right-hand side of the &%spam%& condition specifies the username that
26171 SpamAssassin should scan for. If you do not want to scan for a particular user,
26172 but rather use the SpamAssassin system-wide default profile, you can scan for
26173 an unknown user, or simply use &"nobody"&. However, you must put something on
26174 the right-hand side.
26176 The username allows you to use per-domain or per-user antispam profiles. The
26177 right-hand side is expanded before being used, so you can put lookups or
26178 conditions there. When the right-hand side evaluates to &"0"& or &"false"&, no
26179 scanning is done and the condition fails immediately.
26182 Scanning with SpamAssassin uses a lot of resources. If you scan every message,
26183 large ones may cause significant performance degredation. As most spam messages
26184 are quite small, it is recommended that you do not scan the big ones. For
26187 deny message = This message was classified as SPAM
26188 condition = ${if < {$message_size}{10K}}
26193 The &%spam%& condition returns true if the threshold specified in the user's
26194 SpamAssassin profile has been matched or exceeded. If you want to use the
26195 &%spam%& condition for its side effects (see the variables below), you can make
26196 it always return &"true"& by appending &`:true`& to the username.
26198 .cindex "spam scanning" "returned variables"
26199 When the &%spam%& condition is run, it sets up the following expansion
26203 .vitem &$spam_score$&
26204 The spam score of the message, for example &"3.4"& or &"30.5"&. This is useful
26205 for inclusion in log or reject messages.
26207 .vitem &$spam_score_int$&
26208 The spam score of the message, multiplied by ten, as an integer value. For
26209 example &"34"& or &"305"&. This is useful for numeric comparisons in
26210 conditions. This variable is special; it is saved with the message, and written
26211 to Exim's spool file. This means that it can be used during the whole life of
26212 the message on your Exim system, in particular, in routers or transports during
26213 the later delivery phase.
26215 .vitem &$spam_bar$&
26216 A string consisting of a number of &"+"& or &"-"& characters, representing the
26217 integer part of the spam score value. A spam score of 4.4 would have a
26218 &$spam_bar$& value of &"++++"&. This is useful for inclusion in warning
26219 headers, since MUAs can match on such strings.
26221 .vitem &$spam_report$&
26222 A multiline text table, containing the full SpamAssassin report for the
26223 message. Useful for inclusion in headers or reject messages.
26226 The &%spam%& condition caches its results. If you call it again with the same
26227 user name, it does not scan again, but rather returns the same values as
26230 The &%spam%& condition returns DEFER if there is any error while running the
26231 message through SpamAssassin. If you want to treat DEFER as FAIL (to pass on to
26232 the next ACL statement block), append &`/defer_ok`& to the right-hand side of
26233 the spam condition, like this:
26235 deny message = This message was classified as SPAM
26236 spam = joe/defer_ok
26238 This causes messages to be accepted even if there is a problem with &%spamd%&.
26240 Here is a longer, commented example of the use of the &%spam%&
26243 # put headers in all messages (no matter if spam or not)
26244 warn message = X-Spam-Score: $spam_score ($spam_bar)
26246 warn message = X-Spam-Report: $spam_report
26249 # add second subject line with *SPAM* marker when message
26250 # is over threshold
26251 warn message = Subject: *SPAM* $h_Subject:
26254 # reject spam at high scores (> 12)
26255 deny message = This message scored $spam_score spam points.
26257 condition = ${if >{$spam_score_int}{120}{1}{0}}
26262 .section "Scanning MIME parts" "SECTscanmimepart"
26263 .cindex "content scanning" "MIME parts"
26264 .cindex "MIME content scanning"
26265 .cindex "&%acl_smtp_mime%&"
26267 The &%acl_smtp_mime%& global option specifies an ACL that is called once for
26268 each MIME part of an SMTP message, including multipart types, in the sequence
26269 of their position in the message. Similarly, the &%acl_not_smtp_mime%& option
26270 specifies an ACL that is used for the MIME parts of non-SMTP messages. These
26271 options may both refer to the same ACL if you want the same processing in both
26274 These ACLs are called (possibly many times) just before the &%acl_smtp_data%&
26275 ACL in the case of an SMTP message, or just before a non-SMTP message is
26276 accepted. However, a MIME ACL is called only if the message contains a
26277 &'MIME-Version:'& header line. When a call to a MIME ACL does not yield
26278 &"accept"&, ACL processing is aborted and the appropriate result code is sent
26279 to the client. In the case of an SMTP message, the &%acl_smtp_data%& ACL is not
26280 called when this happens.
26282 You cannot use the &%malware%& or &%spam%& conditions in a MIME ACL; these can
26283 only be used in the DATA or non-SMTP ACLs. However, you can use the &%regex%&
26284 condition to match against the raw MIME part. You can also use the
26285 &%mime_regex%& condition to match against the decoded MIME part (see section
26286 &<<SECTscanregex>>&).
26289 At the start of a MIME ACL, a number of variables are set from the header
26290 information for the relevant MIME part. These are described below. The contents
26291 of the MIME part are not by default decoded into a disk file except for MIME
26292 parts whose content-type is &"message/rfc822"&. If you want to decode a MIME
26293 part into a disk file, you can use the &%decode%& modifier. The general syntax
26296 &`decode = [/`&<&'path'&>&`/]`&<&'filename'&>
26298 The right hand side is expanded before use. After expansion,
26302 &"0"& or &"false"&, in which case no decoding is done.
26304 The string &"default"&. In that case, the file is put in the temporary
26305 &"default"& directory <&'spool_directory'&>&_/scan/_&<&'message_id'&>&_/_& with
26306 a sequential file name consisting of the message id and a sequence number. The
26307 full path and name is available in &$mime_decoded_filename$& after decoding.
26309 A full path name starting with a slash. If the full name is an existing
26310 directory, it is used as a replacement for the default directory. The filename
26311 is then sequentially assigned. If the path does not exist, it is used as
26312 the full path and file name.
26314 If the string does not start with a slash, it is used as the
26315 filename, and the default path is then used.
26318 You can easily decode a file with its original, proposed filename using
26320 decode = $mime_filename
26322 However, you should keep in mind that &$mime_filename$& might contain
26323 anything. If you place files outside of the default path, they are not
26324 automatically unlinked.
26326 For RFC822 attachments (these are messages attached to messages, with a
26327 content-type of &"message/rfc822"&), the ACL is called again in the same manner
26328 as for the primary message, only that the &$mime_is_rfc822$& expansion
26329 variable is set (see below). Attached messages are always decoded to disk
26330 before being checked, and the files are unlinked once the check is done.
26332 The MIME ACL supports the &%regex%& and &%mime_regex%& conditions. These can be
26333 used to match regular expressions against raw and decoded MIME parts,
26334 respectively. They are described in section &<<SECTscanregex>>&.
26336 .cindex "MIME content scanning" "returned variables"
26337 The following list describes all expansion variables that are
26338 available in the MIME ACL:
26341 .vitem &$mime_boundary$&
26342 If the current part is a multipart (see &$mime_is_multipart$&) below, it should
26343 have a boundary string, which is stored in this variable. If the current part
26344 has no boundary parameter in the &'Content-Type:'& header, this variable
26345 contains the empty string.
26347 .vitem &$mime_charset$&
26348 This variable contains the character set identifier, if one was found in the
26349 &'Content-Type:'& header. Examples for charset identifiers are:
26355 Please note that this value is not normalized, so you should do matches
26356 case-insensitively.
26358 .vitem &$mime_content_description$&
26359 This variable contains the normalized content of the &'Content-Description:'&
26360 header. It can contain a human-readable description of the parts content. Some
26361 implementations repeat the filename for attachments here, but they are usually
26362 only used for display purposes.
26364 .vitem &$mime_content_disposition$&
26365 This variable contains the normalized content of the &'Content-Disposition:'&
26366 header. You can expect strings like &"attachment"& or &"inline"& here.
26368 .vitem &$mime_content_id$&
26369 This variable contains the normalized content of the &'Content-ID:'& header.
26370 This is a unique ID that can be used to reference a part from another part.
26372 .vitem &$mime_content_size$&
26373 This variable is set only after the &%decode%& modifier (see above) has been
26374 successfully run. It contains the size of the decoded part in kilobytes. The
26375 size is always rounded up to full kilobytes, so only a completely empty part
26376 has a &$mime_content_size$& of zero.
26378 .vitem &$mime_content_transfer_encoding$&
26379 This variable contains the normalized content of the
26380 &'Content-transfer-encoding:'& header. This is a symbolic name for an encoding
26381 type. Typical values are &"base64"& and &"quoted-printable"&.
26383 .vitem &$mime_content_type$&
26384 If the MIME part has a &'Content-Type:'& header, this variable contains its
26385 value, lowercased, and without any options (like &"name"& or &"charset"&). Here
26386 are some examples of popular MIME types, as they may appear in this variable:
26390 application/octet-stream
26394 If the MIME part has no &'Content-Type:'& header, this variable contains the
26397 .vitem &$mime_decoded_filename$&
26398 This variable is set only after the &%decode%& modifier (see above) has been
26399 successfully run. It contains the full path and file name of the file
26400 containing the decoded data.
26405 .vitem &$mime_filename$&
26406 This is perhaps the most important of the MIME variables. It contains a
26407 proposed filename for an attachment, if one was found in either the
26408 &'Content-Type:'& or &'Content-Disposition:'& headers. The filename will be
26409 RFC2047 decoded, but no additional sanity checks are done. If no filename was
26410 found, this variable contains the empty string.
26412 .vitem &$mime_is_coverletter$&
26413 This variable attempts to differentiate the &"cover letter"& of an e-mail from
26414 attached data. It can be used to clamp down on flashy or unneccessarily encoded
26415 content in the cover letter, while not restricting attachments at all.
26417 The variable contains 1 (true) for a MIME part believed to be part of the
26418 cover letter, and 0 (false) for an attachment. At present, the algorithm is as
26422 The outermost MIME part of a message is always a cover letter.
26425 If a multipart/alternative or multipart/related MIME part is a cover letter,
26426 so are all MIME subparts within that multipart.
26429 If any other multipart is a cover letter, the first subpart is a cover letter,
26430 and the rest are attachments.
26433 All parts contained within an attachment multipart are attachments.
26436 As an example, the following will ban &"HTML mail"& (including that sent with
26437 alternative plain text), while allowing HTML files to be attached. HTML
26438 coverletter mail attached to non-HMTL coverletter mail will also be allowed:
26440 deny message = HTML mail is not accepted here
26441 !condition = $mime_is_rfc822
26442 condition = $mime_is_coverletter
26443 condition = ${if eq{$mime_content_type}{text/html}{1}{0}}
26445 .vitem &$mime_is_multipart$&
26446 This variable has the value 1 (true) when the current part has the main type
26447 &"multipart"&, for example &"multipart/alternative"& or &"multipart/mixed"&.
26448 Since multipart entities only serve as containers for other parts, you may not
26449 want to carry out specific actions on them.
26451 .vitem &$mime_is_rfc822$&
26452 This variable has the value 1 (true) if the current part is not a part of the
26453 checked message itself, but part of an attached message. Attached message
26454 decoding is fully recursive.
26456 .vitem &$mime_part_count$&
26457 This variable is a counter that is raised for each processed MIME part. It
26458 starts at zero for the very first part (which is usually a multipart). The
26459 counter is per-message, so it is reset when processing RFC822 attachments (see
26460 &$mime_is_rfc822$&). The counter stays set after &%acl_smtp_mime%& is
26461 complete, so you can use it in the DATA ACL to determine the number of MIME
26462 parts of a message. For non-MIME messages, this variable contains the value -1.
26467 .section "Scanning with regular expressions" "SECTscanregex"
26468 .cindex "content scanning" "with regular expressions"
26469 .cindex "regular expressions" "content scanning with"
26470 You can specify your own custom regular expression matches on the full body of
26471 the message, or on individual MIME parts.
26473 The &%regex%& condition takes one or more regular expressions as arguments and
26474 matches them against the full message (when called in the DATA ACL) or a raw
26475 MIME part (when called in the MIME ACL). The &%regex%& condition matches
26476 linewise, with a maximum line length of 32K characters. That means you cannot
26477 have multiline matches with the &%regex%& condition.
26479 The &%mime_regex%& condition can be called only in the MIME ACL. It matches up
26480 to 32K of decoded content (the whole content at once, not linewise). If the
26481 part has not been decoded with the &%decode%& modifier earlier in the ACL, it
26482 is decoded automatically when &%mime_regex%& is executed (using default path
26483 and filename values). If the decoded data is larger than 32K, only the first
26484 32K characters are checked.
26486 The regular expressions are passed as a colon-separated list. To include a
26487 literal colon, you must double it. Since the whole right-hand side string is
26488 expanded before being used, you must also escape dollar signs and backslashes
26489 with more backslashes, or use the &`\N`& facility to disable expansion.
26490 Here is a simple example that contains two regular expressions:
26492 deny message = contains blacklisted regex ($regex_match_string)
26493 regex = [Mm]ortgage : URGENT BUSINESS PROPOSAL
26495 The conditions returns true if any one of the regular expressions matches. The
26496 &$regex_match_string$& expansion variable is then set up and contains the
26497 matching regular expression.
26499 &*Warning*&: With large messages, these conditions can be fairly
26505 .section "The demime condition" "SECTdemimecond"
26506 .cindex "content scanning" "MIME checking"
26507 .cindex "MIME content scanning"
26508 The &%demime%& ACL condition provides MIME unpacking, sanity checking and file
26509 extension blocking. It is usable only in the DATA and non-SMTP ACLs. The
26510 &%demime%& condition uses a simpler interface to MIME decoding than the MIME
26511 ACL functionality, but provides no additional facilities. Please note that this
26512 condition is deprecated and kept only for backward compatibility. You must set
26513 the WITH_OLD_DEMIME option in &_Local/Makefile_& at build time to be able to
26514 use the &%demime%& condition.
26516 The &%demime%& condition unpacks MIME containers in the message. It detects
26517 errors in MIME containers and can match file extensions found in the message
26518 against a list. Using this facility produces files containing the unpacked MIME
26519 parts of the message in the temporary scan directory. If you do antivirus
26520 scanning, it is recommened that you use the &%demime%& condition before the
26521 antivirus (&%malware%&) condition.
26523 On the right-hand side of the &%demime%& condition you can pass a
26524 colon-separated list of file extensions that it should match against. For
26527 deny message = Found blacklisted file attachment
26528 demime = vbs:com:bat:pif:prf:lnk
26530 If one of the file extensions is found, the condition is true, otherwise it is
26531 false. If there is a temporary error while demimeing (for example, &"disk
26532 full"&), the condition defers, and the message is temporarily rejected (unless
26533 the condition is on a &%warn%& verb).
26535 The right-hand side is expanded before being treated as a list, so you can have
26536 conditions and lookups there. If it expands to an empty string, &"false"&, or
26537 zero (&"0"&), no demimeing is done and the condition is false.
26539 The &%demime%& condition set the following variables:
26542 .vitem &$demime_errorlevel$&
26543 .cindex "&$demime_errorlevel$&"
26544 When an error is detected in a MIME container, this variable contains the
26545 severity of the error, as an integer number. The higher the value, the more
26546 severe the error (the current maximum value is 3). If this variable is unset or
26547 zero, no error occurred.
26549 .vitem &$demime_reason$&
26550 .cindex "&$demime_reason$&"
26551 When &$demime_errorlevel$& is greater than zero, this variable contains a
26552 human-readable text string describing the MIME error that occurred.
26556 .vitem &$found_extension$&
26557 .cindex "&$found_extension$&"
26558 When the &%demime%& condition is true, this variable contains the file
26559 extension it found.
26562 Both &$demime_errorlevel$& and &$demime_reason$& are set by the first call of
26563 the &%demime%& condition, and are not changed on subsequent calls.
26565 If you do not want to check for file extensions, but rather use the &%demime%&
26566 condition for unpacking or error checking purposes, pass &"*"& as the
26567 right-hand side value. Here is a more elaborate example of how to use this
26570 # Reject messages with serious MIME container errors
26571 deny message = Found MIME error ($demime_reason).
26573 condition = ${if >{$demime_errorlevel}{2}{1}{0}}
26575 # Reject known virus spreading file extensions.
26576 # Accepting these is pretty much braindead.
26577 deny message = contains $found_extension file (blacklisted).
26578 demime = com:vbs:bat:pif:scr
26580 # Freeze .exe and .doc files. Postmaster can
26581 # examine them and eventually thaw them.
26582 deny log_message = Another $found_extension file.
26590 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26591 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26593 .chapter "Adding a local scan function to Exim" "CHAPlocalscan" &&&
26594 "Local scan function"
26595 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "description of"
26596 .cindex "customizing" "input scan using C function"
26597 .cindex "policy control" "by local scan function"
26598 In these days of email worms, viruses, and ever-increasing spam, some sites
26599 want to apply a lot of checking to messages before accepting them.
26601 The content scanning extension (chapter &<<CHAPexiscan>>&) has facilities for
26602 passing messages to external virus and spam scanning software. You can also do
26603 a certain amount in Exim itself through string expansions and the &%condition%&
26604 condition in the ACL that runs after the SMTP DATA command or the ACL for
26605 non-SMTP messages (see chapter &<<CHAPACL>>&), but this has its limitations.
26607 To allow for further customization to a site's own requirements, there is the
26608 possibility of linking Exim with a private message scanning function, written
26609 in C. If you want to run code that is written in something other than C, you
26610 can of course use a little C stub to call it.
26612 The local scan function is run once for every incoming message, at the point
26613 when Exim is just about to accept the message.
26614 It can therefore be used to control non-SMTP messages from local processes as
26615 well as messages arriving via SMTP.
26617 Exim applies a timeout to calls of the local scan function, and there is an
26618 option called &%local_scan_timeout%& for setting it. The default is 5 minutes.
26619 Zero means &"no timeout"&.
26620 Exim also sets up signal handlers for SIGSEGV, SIGILL, SIGFPE, and SIGBUS
26621 before calling the local scan function, so that the most common types of crash
26622 are caught. If the timeout is exceeded or one of those signals is caught, the
26623 incoming message is rejected with a temporary error if it is an SMTP message.
26624 For a non-SMTP message, the message is dropped and Exim ends with a non-zero
26625 code. The incident is logged on the main and reject logs.
26629 .section "Building Exim to use a local scan function"
26630 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "building Exim to use"
26631 To make use of the local scan function feature, you must tell Exim where your
26632 function is before building Exim, by setting LOCAL_SCAN_SOURCE in your
26633 &_Local/Makefile_&. A recommended place to put it is in the &_Local_&
26634 directory, so you might set
26636 LOCAL_SCAN_SOURCE=Local/local_scan.c
26638 for example. The function must be called &[local_scan()]&. It is called by
26639 Exim after it has received a message, when the success return code is about to
26640 be sent. This is after all the ACLs have been run. The return code from your
26641 function controls whether the message is actually accepted or not. There is a
26642 commented template function (that just accepts the message) in the file
26643 _src/local_scan.c_.
26645 If you want to make use of Exim's run time configuration file to set options
26646 for your &[local_scan()]& function, you must also set
26648 LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes
26650 in &_Local/Makefile_& (see section &<<SECTconoptloc>>& below).
26655 .section "API for local_scan()" "SECTapiforloc"
26656 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "API description"
26657 You must include this line near the start of your code:
26659 #include "local_scan.h"
26661 This header file defines a number of variables and other values, and the
26662 prototype for the function itself. Exim is coded to use unsigned char values
26663 almost exclusively, and one of the things this header defines is a shorthand
26664 for &`unsigned char`& called &`uschar`&.
26665 It also contains the following macro definitions, to simplify casting character
26666 strings and pointers to character strings:
26668 #define CS (char *)
26669 #define CCS (const char *)
26670 #define CSS (char **)
26671 #define US (unsigned char *)
26672 #define CUS (const unsigned char *)
26673 #define USS (unsigned char **)
26675 The function prototype for &[local_scan()]& is:
26677 extern int local_scan(int fd, uschar **return_text);
26679 The arguments are as follows:
26682 &%fd%& is a file descriptor for the file that contains the body of the message
26683 (the -D file). The file is open for reading and writing, but updating it is not
26684 recommended. &*Warning*&: You must &'not'& close this file descriptor.
26686 The descriptor is positioned at character 19 of the file, which is the first
26687 character of the body itself, because the first 19 characters are the message
26688 id followed by &`-D`& and a newline. If you rewind the file, you should use the
26689 macro SPOOL_DATA_START_OFFSET to reset to the start of the data, just in
26690 case this changes in some future version.
26692 &%return_text%& is an address which you can use to return a pointer to a text
26693 string at the end of the function. The value it points to on entry is NULL.
26696 The function must return an &%int%& value which is one of the following macros:
26699 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT`&
26700 .cindex "&$local_scan_data$&"
26701 The message is accepted. If you pass back a string of text, it is saved with
26702 the message, and made available in the variable &$local_scan_data$&. No
26703 newlines are permitted (if there are any, they are turned into spaces) and the
26704 maximum length of text is 1000 characters.
26706 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT_FREEZE`&
26707 This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT, except that the accepted message is
26708 queued without immediate delivery, and is frozen.
26710 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT_QUEUE`&
26711 This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT, except that the accepted message is
26712 queued without immediate delivery.
26714 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT`&
26715 The message is rejected; the returned text is used as an error message which is
26716 passed back to the sender and which is also logged. Newlines are permitted &--
26717 they cause a multiline response for SMTP rejections, but are converted to
26718 &`\n`& in log lines. If no message is given, &"Administrative prohibition"& is
26721 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT`&
26722 The message is temporarily rejected; the returned text is used as an error
26723 message as for LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT. If no message is given, &"Temporary local
26726 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT_NOLOGHDR`&
26727 This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT, except that the header of the rejected
26728 message is not written to the reject log. It has the effect of unsetting the
26729 &%rejected_header%& log selector for just this rejection. If
26730 &%rejected_header%& is already unset (see the discussion of the
26731 &%log_selection%& option in section &<<SECTlogselector>>&), this code is the
26732 same as LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT.
26734 .vitem &`LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT_NOLOGHDR`&
26735 This code is a variation of LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT in the same way that
26736 LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT_NOLOGHDR is a variation of LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT.
26739 If the message is not being received by interactive SMTP, rejections are
26740 reported by writing to &%stderr%& or by sending an email, as configured by the
26741 &%-oe%& command line options.
26745 .section "Configuration options for local_scan()" "SECTconoptloc"
26746 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "configuration options"
26747 It is possible to have option settings in the main configuration file
26748 that set values in static variables in the &[local_scan()]& module. If you
26749 want to do this, you must have the line
26751 LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes
26753 in your &_Local/Makefile_& when you build Exim. (This line is in
26754 &_OS/Makefile-Default_&, commented out). Then, in the &[local_scan()]& source
26755 file, you must define static variables to hold the option values, and a table
26758 The table must be a vector called &%local_scan_options%&, of type
26759 &`optionlist`&. Each entry is a triplet, consisting of a name, an option type,
26760 and a pointer to the variable that holds the value. The entries must appear in
26761 alphabetical order. Following &%local_scan_options%& you must also define a
26762 variable called &%local_scan_options_count%& that contains the number of
26763 entries in the table. Here is a short example, showing two kinds of option:
26765 static int my_integer_option = 42;
26766 static uschar *my_string_option = US"a default string";
26768 optionlist local_scan_options[] = {
26769 { "my_integer", opt_int, &my_integer_option },
26770 { "my_string", opt_stringptr, &my_string_option }
26773 int local_scan_options_count =
26774 sizeof(local_scan_options)/sizeof(optionlist);
26776 The values of the variables can now be changed from Exim's runtime
26777 configuration file by including a local scan section as in this example:
26781 my_string = some string of text...
26783 The available types of option data are as follows:
26786 .vitem &*opt_bool*&
26787 This specifies a boolean (true/false) option. The address should point to a
26788 variable of type &`BOOL`&, which will be set to TRUE or FALSE, which are macros
26789 that are defined as &"1"& and &"0"&, respectively. If you want to detect
26790 whether such a variable has been set at all, you can initialize it to
26791 TRUE_UNSET. (BOOL variables are integers underneath, so can hold more than two
26794 .vitem &*opt_fixed*&
26795 This specifies a fixed point number, such as is used for load averages.
26796 The address should point to a variable of type &`int`&. The value is stored
26797 multiplied by 1000, so, for example, 1.4142 is truncated and stored as 1414.
26800 This specifies an integer; the address should point to a variable of type
26801 &`int`&. The value may be specified in any of the integer formats accepted by
26804 .vitem &*opt_mkint*&
26805 This is the same as &%opt_int%&, except that when such a value is output in a
26806 &%-bP%& listing, if it is an exact number of kilobytes or megabytes, it is
26807 printed with the suffix K or M.
26809 .vitem &*opt_octint*&
26810 This also specifies an integer, but the value is always interpeted as an
26811 octal integer, whether or not it starts with the digit zero, and it is
26812 always output in octal.
26814 .vitem &*opt_stringptr*&
26815 This specifies a string value; the address must be a pointer to a
26816 variable that points to a string (for example, of type &`uschar *`&).
26818 .vitem &*opt_time*&
26819 This specifies a time interval value. The address must point to a variable of
26820 type &`int`&. The value that is placed there is a number of seconds.
26823 If the &%-bP%& command line option is followed by &`local_scan`&, Exim prints
26824 out the values of all the &[local_scan()]& options.
26828 .section "Available Exim variables"
26829 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "available Exim variables"
26830 The header &_local_scan.h_& gives you access to a number of C variables. These
26831 are the only ones that are guaranteed to be maintained from release to release.
26832 Note, however, that you can obtain the value of any Exim variable by calling
26833 &'expand_string()'&. The exported variables are as follows:
26836 .vitem &*unsigned&~int&~debug_selector*&
26837 This variable is set to zero when no debugging is taking place. Otherwise, it
26838 is a bitmap of debugging selectors. Two bits are identified for use in
26839 &[local_scan()]&; they are defined as macros:
26842 The &`D_v`& bit is set when &%-v%& was present on the command line. This is a
26843 testing option that is not privileged &-- any caller may set it. All the
26844 other selector bits can be set only by admin users.
26847 The &`D_local_scan`& bit is provided for use by &[local_scan()]&; it is set
26848 by the &`+local_scan`& debug selector. It is not included in the default set
26852 Thus, to write to the debugging output only when &`+local_scan`& has been
26853 selected, you should use code like this:
26855 if ((debug_selector & D_local_scan) != 0)
26856 debug_printf("xxx", ...);
26858 .vitem &*uschar&~*expand_string_message*&
26859 After a failing call to &'expand_string()'& (returned value NULL), the
26860 variable &%expand_string_message%& contains the error message, zero-terminated.
26862 .vitem &*header_line&~*header_list*&
26863 A pointer to a chain of header lines. The &%header_line%& structure is
26866 .vitem &*header_line&~*header_last*&
26867 A pointer to the last of the header lines.
26869 .vitem &*uschar&~*headers_charset*&
26870 The value of the &%headers_charset%& configuration option.
26872 .vitem &*BOOL&~host_checking*&
26873 This variable is TRUE during a host checking session that is initiated by the
26874 &%-bh%& command line option.
26876 .vitem &*uschar&~*interface_address*&
26877 The IP address of the interface that received the message, as a string. This
26878 is NULL for locally submitted messages.
26880 .vitem &*int&~interface_port*&
26881 The port on which this message was received.
26883 .vitem &*uschar&~*message_id*&
26884 This variable contains Exim's message id for the incoming message (the value of
26885 &$message_exim_id$&) as a zero-terminated string.
26887 .vitem &*uschar&~*received_protocol*&
26888 The name of the protocol by which the message was received.
26890 .vitem &*int&~recipients_count*&
26891 The number of accepted recipients.
26893 .vitem &*recipient_item&~*recipients_list*&
26894 .cindex "recipient" "adding in local scan"
26895 .cindex "recipient" "removing in local scan"
26896 The list of accepted recipients, held in a vector of length
26897 &%recipients_count%&. The &%recipient_item%& structure is discussed below. You
26898 can add additional recipients by calling &'receive_add_recipient()'& (see
26899 below). You can delete recipients by removing them from the vector and adusting
26900 the value in &%recipients_count%&. In particular, by setting
26901 &%recipients_count%& to zero you remove all recipients. If you then return the
26902 value &`LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT`&, the message is accepted, but immediately
26903 blackholed. To replace the recipients, you can set &%recipients_count%& to zero
26904 and then call &'receive_add_recipient()'& as often as needed.
26906 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_address*&
26907 The envelope sender address. For bounce messages this is the empty string.
26909 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_host_address*&
26910 The IP address of the sending host, as a string. This is NULL for
26911 locally-submitted messages.
26913 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_host_authenticated*&
26914 The name of the authentication mechanism that was used, or NULL if the message
26915 was not received over an authenticated SMTP connection.
26917 .vitem &*uschar&~*sender_host_name*&
26918 The name of the sending host, if known.
26920 .vitem &*int&~sender_host_port*&
26921 The port on the sending host.
26923 .vitem &*BOOL&~smtp_input*&
26924 This variable is TRUE for all SMTP input, including BSMTP.
26926 .vitem &*BOOL&~smtp_batched_input*&
26927 This variable is TRUE for BSMTP input.
26929 .vitem &*int&~store_pool*&
26930 The contents of this variable control which pool of memory is used for new
26931 requests. See section &<<SECTmemhanloc>>& for details.
26935 .section "Structure of header lines"
26936 The &%header_line%& structure contains the members listed below.
26937 You can add additional header lines by calling the &'header_add()'& function
26938 (see below). You can cause header lines to be ignored (deleted) by setting
26943 .vitem &*struct&~header_line&~*next*&
26944 A pointer to the next header line, or NULL for the last line.
26946 .vitem &*int&~type*&
26947 A code identifying certain headers that Exim recognizes. The codes are printing
26948 characters, and are documented in chapter &<<CHAPspool>>& of this manual.
26949 Notice in particular that any header line whose type is * is not transmitted
26950 with the message. This flagging is used for header lines that have been
26951 rewritten, or are to be removed (for example, &'Envelope-sender:'& header
26952 lines.) Effectively, * means &"deleted"&.
26954 .vitem &*int&~slen*&
26955 The number of characters in the header line, including the terminating and any
26958 .vitem &*uschar&~*text*&
26959 A pointer to the text of the header. It always ends with a newline, followed by
26960 a zero byte. Internal newlines are preserved.
26965 .section "Structure of recipient items"
26966 The &%recipient_item%& structure contains these members:
26969 .vitem &*uschar&~*address*&
26970 This is a pointer to the recipient address as it was received.
26972 .vitem &*int&~pno*&
26973 This is used in later Exim processing when top level addresses are created by
26974 the &%one_time%& option. It is not relevant at the time &[local_scan()]& is run
26975 and must always contain -1 at this stage.
26977 .vitem &*uschar&~*errors_to*&
26978 If this value is not NULL, bounce messages caused by failing to deliver to the
26979 recipient are sent to the address it contains. In other words, it overrides the
26980 envelope sender for this one recipient. (Compare the &%errors_to%& generic
26981 router option.) If a &[local_scan()]& function sets an &%errors_to%& field to
26982 an unqualified address, Exim qualifies it using the domain from
26983 &%qualify_recipient%&. When &[local_scan()]& is called, the &%errors_to%& field
26984 is NULL for all recipients.
26989 .section "Available Exim functions"
26990 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "available Exim functions"
26991 The header &_local_scan.h_& gives you access to a number of Exim functions.
26992 These are the only ones that are guaranteed to be maintained from release to
26996 .vitem "&*pid_t&~child_open(uschar&~**argv,&~uschar&~**envp,&~int&~newumask,&&&
26997 &~int&~*infdptr,&~int&~*outfdptr, &~&~BOOL&~make_leader)*&"
26999 This function creates a child process that runs the command specified by
27000 &%argv%&. The environment for the process is specified by &%envp%&, which can
27001 be NULL if no environment variables are to be passed. A new umask is supplied
27002 for the process in &%newumask%&.
27004 Pipes to the standard input and output of the new process are set up
27005 and returned to the caller via the &%infdptr%& and &%outfdptr%& arguments. The
27006 standard error is cloned to the standard output. If there are any file
27007 descriptors &"in the way"& in the new process, they are closed. If the final
27008 argument is TRUE, the new process is made into a process group leader.
27010 The function returns the pid of the new process, or -1 if things go wrong.
27012 .vitem &*int&~child_close(pid_t&~pid,&~int&~timeout)*&
27013 This function waits for a child process to terminate, or for a timeout (in
27014 seconds) to expire. A timeout value of zero means wait as long as it takes. The
27015 return value is as follows:
27020 The process terminated by a normal exit and the value is the process
27026 The process was terminated by a signal and the value is the negation of the
27032 The process timed out.
27036 The was some other error in wait(); &%errno%& is still set.
27039 .vitem &*pid_t&~child_open_exim(int&~*fd)*&
27040 This function provide you with a means of submitting a new message to
27041 Exim. (Of course, you can also call &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& yourself if you
27042 want, but this packages it all up for you.) The function creates a pipe,
27043 forks a subprocess that is running
27045 exim -t -oem -oi -f <>
27047 and returns to you (via the &`int *`& argument) a file descriptor for the pipe
27048 that is connected to the standard input. The yield of the function is the PID
27049 of the subprocess. You can then write a message to the file descriptor, with
27050 recipients in &'To:'&, &'Cc:'&, and/or &'Bcc:'& header lines.
27052 When you have finished, call &'child_close()'& to wait for the process to
27053 finish and to collect its ending status. A timeout value of zero is usually
27054 fine in this circumstance. Unless you have made a mistake with the recipient
27055 addresses, you should get a return code of zero.
27057 .vitem &*void&~debug_printf(char&~*,&~...)*&
27058 This is Exim's debugging function, with arguments as for &'(printf()'&. The
27059 output is written to the standard error stream. If no debugging is selected,
27060 calls to &'debug_printf()'& have no effect. Normally, you should make calls
27061 conditional on the &`local_scan`& debug selector by coding like this:
27063 if ((debug_selector & D_local_scan) != 0)
27064 debug_printf("xxx", ...);
27066 .vitem &*uschar&~*expand_string(uschar&~*string)*&
27067 This is an interface to Exim's string expansion code. The return value is the
27068 expanded string, or NULL if there was an expansion failure.
27069 The C variable &%expand_string_message%& contains an error message after an
27070 expansion failure. If expansion does not change the string, the return value is
27071 the pointer to the input string. Otherwise, the return value points to a new
27072 block of memory that was obtained by a call to &'store_get()'&. See section
27073 &<<SECTmemhanloc>>& below for a discussion of memory handling.
27075 .vitem &*void&~header_add(int&~type,&~char&~*format,&~...)*&
27076 This function allows you to an add additional header line at the end of the
27077 existing ones. The first argument is the type, and should normally be a space
27078 character. The second argument is a format string and any number of
27079 substitution arguments as for &[sprintf()]&. You may include internal newlines
27080 if you want, and you must ensure that the string ends with a newline.
27082 .vitem "&*void&~header_add_at_position(BOOL&~after,&~uschar&~*name,&~&&&
27083 BOOL&~topnot,&~int&~type,&~char&~*format, &~&~...)*&"
27084 This function adds a new header line at a specified point in the header
27085 chain. The header itself is specified as for &'header_add()'&.
27087 If &%name%& is NULL, the new header is added at the end of the chain if
27088 &%after%& is true, or at the start if &%after%& is false. If &%name%& is not
27089 NULL, the header lines are searched for the first non-deleted header that
27090 matches the name. If one is found, the new header is added before it if
27091 &%after%& is false. If &%after%& is true, the new header is added after the
27092 found header and any adjacent subsequent ones with the same name (even if
27093 marked &"deleted"&). If no matching non-deleted header is found, the &%topnot%&
27094 option controls where the header is added. If it is true, addition is at the
27095 top; otherwise at the bottom. Thus, to add a header after all the &'Received:'&
27096 headers, or at the top if there are no &'Received:'& headers, you could use
27098 header_add_at_position(TRUE, US"Received", TRUE,
27099 ' ', "X-xxx: ...");
27101 Normally, there is always at least one non-deleted &'Received:'& header, but
27102 there may not be if &%received_header_text%& expands to an empty string.
27105 .vitem &*void&~header_remove(int&~occurrence,&~uschar&~*name)*&
27106 This function removes header lines. If &%occurrence%& is zero or negative, all
27107 occurrences of the header are removed. If occurrence is greater than zero, that
27108 particular instance of the header is removed. If no header(s) can be found that
27109 match the specification, the function does nothing.
27112 .vitem "&*BOOL&~header_testname(header_line&~*hdr,&~uschar&~*name,&~&&&
27113 int&~length,&~BOOL&~notdel)*&"
27114 This function tests whether the given header has the given name. It is not just
27115 a string comparison, because white space is permitted between the name and the
27116 colon. If the &%notdel%& argument is true, a false return is forced for all
27117 &"deleted"& headers; otherwise they are not treated specially. For example:
27119 if (header_testname(h, US"X-Spam", 6, TRUE)) ...
27121 .vitem &*uschar&~*lss_b64encode(uschar&~*cleartext,&~int&~length)*&
27122 .cindex "base64 encoding" "functions for &[local_scan()]& use"
27123 This function base64-encodes a string, which is passed by address and length.
27124 The text may contain bytes of any value, including zero. The result is passed
27125 back in dynamic memory that is obtained by calling &'store_get()'&. It is
27128 .vitem &*int&~lss_b64decode(uschar&~*codetext,&~uschar&~**cleartext)*&
27129 This function decodes a base64-encoded string. Its arguments are a
27130 zero-terminated base64-encoded string and the address of a variable that is set
27131 to point to the result, which is in dynamic memory. The length of the decoded
27132 string is the yield of the function. If the input is invalid base64 data, the
27133 yield is -1. A zero byte is added to the end of the output string to make it
27134 easy to interpret as a C string (assuming it contains no zeros of its own). The
27135 added zero byte is not included in the returned count.
27137 .vitem &*int&~lss_match_domain(uschar&~*domain,&~uschar&~*list)*&
27138 This function checks for a match in a domain list. Domains are always
27139 matched caselessly. The return value is one of the following:
27141 &`OK `& match succeeded
27142 &`FAIL `& match failed
27143 &`DEFER `& match deferred
27145 DEFER is usually caused by some kind of lookup defer, such as the
27146 inability to contact a database.
27148 .vitem "&*int&~lss_match_local_part(uschar&~*localpart,&~uschar&~*list,&~&&&
27150 This function checks for a match in a local part list. The third argument
27151 controls case-sensitivity. The return values are as for
27152 &'lss_match_domain()'&.
27154 .vitem "&*int&~lss_match_address(uschar&~*address,&~uschar&~*list,&~&&&
27156 This function checks for a match in an address list. The third argument
27157 controls the case-sensitivity of the local part match. The domain is always
27158 matched caselessly. The return values are as for &'lss_match_domain()'&.
27160 .vitem "&*int&~lss_match_host(uschar&~*host_name,&~uschar&~*host_address,&~&&&
27162 This function checks for a match in a host list. The most common usage is
27165 lss_match_host(sender_host_name, sender_host_address, ...)
27167 .cindex "&$sender_host_address$&"
27168 An empty address field matches an empty item in the host list. If the host name
27169 is NULL, the name corresponding to &$sender_host_address$& is automatically
27170 looked up if a host name is required to match an item in the list. The return
27171 values are as for &'lss_match_domain()'&, but in addition, &'lss_match_host()'&
27172 returns ERROR in the case when it had to look up a host name, but the lookup
27175 .vitem "&*void&~log_write(unsigned&~int&~selector,&~int&~which,&~char&~&&&
27177 This function writes to Exim's log files. The first argument should be zero (it
27178 is concerned with &%log_selector%&). The second argument can be &`LOG_MAIN`& or
27179 &`LOG_REJECT`& or &`LOG_PANIC`& or the inclusive &"or"& of any combination of
27180 them. It specifies to which log or logs the message is written. The remaining
27181 arguments are a format and relevant insertion arguments. The string should not
27182 contain any newlines, not even at the end.
27185 .vitem &*void&~receive_add_recipient(uschar&~*address,&~int&~pno)*&
27186 This function adds an additional recipient to the message. The first argument
27187 is the recipient address. If it is unqualified (has no domain), it is qualified
27188 with the &%qualify_recipient%& domain. The second argument must always be -1.
27190 This function does not allow you to specify a private &%errors_to%& address (as
27191 described with the structure of &%recipient_item%& above), because it pre-dates
27192 the addition of that field to the structure. However, it is easy to add such a
27193 value afterwards. For example:
27195 receive_add_recipient(US"monitor@mydom.example", -1);
27196 recipients_list[recipients_count-1].errors_to =
27197 US"postmaster@mydom.example";
27200 .vitem &*BOOL&~receive_remove_recipient(uschar&~*recipient)*&
27201 This is a convenience function to remove a named recipient from the list of
27202 recipients. It returns true if a recipient was removed, and false if no
27203 matching recipient could be found. The argument must be a complete email
27210 .vitem "&*uschar&~rfc2047_decode(uschar&~*string,&~BOOL&~lencheck,&&&
27211 &~uschar&~*target,&~int&~zeroval,&~int&~*lenptr, &~&~uschar&~**error)*&"
27212 This function decodes strings that are encoded according to RFC 2047. Typically
27213 these are the contents of header lines. First, each &"encoded word"& is decoded
27214 from the Q or B encoding into a byte-string. Then, if provided with the name of
27215 a charset encoding, and if the &[iconv()]& function is available, an attempt is
27216 made to translate the result to the named character set. If this fails, the
27217 binary string is returned with an error message.
27219 The first argument is the string to be decoded. If &%lencheck%& is TRUE, the
27220 maximum MIME word length is enforced. The third argument is the target
27221 encoding, or NULL if no translation is wanted.
27223 .cindex "binary zero" "in RFC 2047 decoding"
27224 .cindex "RFC 2047" "binary zero in"
27225 If a binary zero is encountered in the decoded string, it is replaced by the
27226 contents of the &%zeroval%& argument. For use with Exim headers, the value must
27227 not be 0 because header lines are handled as zero-terminated strings.
27229 The function returns the result of processing the string, zero-terminated; if
27230 &%lenptr%& is not NULL, the length of the result is set in the variable to
27231 which it points. When &%zeroval%& is 0, &%lenptr%& should not be NULL.
27233 If an error is encountered, the function returns NULL and uses the &%error%&
27234 argument to return an error message. The variable pointed to by &%error%& is
27235 set to NULL if there is no error; it may be set non-NULL even when the function
27236 returns a non-NULL value if decoding was successful, but there was a problem
27240 .vitem &*int&~smtp_fflush(void)*&
27241 This function is used in conjunction with &'smtp_printf()'&, as described
27244 .vitem &*void&~smtp_printf(char&~*,&~...)*&
27245 The arguments of this function are like &[printf()]&; it writes to the SMTP
27246 output stream. You should use this function only when there is an SMTP output
27247 stream, that is, when the incoming message is being received via interactive
27248 SMTP. This is the case when &%smtp_input%& is TRUE and &%smtp_batched_input%&
27249 is FALSE. If you want to test for an incoming message from another host (as
27250 opposed to a local process that used the &%-bs%& command line option), you can
27251 test the value of &%sender_host_address%&, which is non-NULL when a remote host
27254 If an SMTP TLS connection is established, &'smtp_printf()'& uses the TLS
27255 output function, so it can be used for all forms of SMTP connection.
27257 Strings that are written by &'smtp_printf()'& from within &[local_scan()]&
27258 must start with an appropriate response code: 550 if you are going to return
27259 LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT, 451 if you are going to return
27260 LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT, and 250 otherwise. Because you are writing the
27261 initial lines of a multi-line response, the code must be followed by a hyphen
27262 to indicate that the line is not the final response line. You must also ensure
27263 that the lines you write terminate with CRLF. For example:
27265 smtp_printf("550-this is some extra info\r\n");
27266 return LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT;
27268 Note that you can also create multi-line responses by including newlines in
27269 the data returned via the &%return_text%& argument. The added value of using
27270 &'smtp_printf()'& is that, for instance, you could introduce delays between
27271 multiple output lines.
27273 The &'smtp_printf()'& function does not return any error indication, because it
27274 does not automatically flush pending output, and therefore does not test
27275 the state of the stream. (In the main code of Exim, flushing and error
27276 detection is done when Exim is ready for the next SMTP input command.) If
27277 you want to flush the output and check for an error (for example, the
27278 dropping of a TCP/IP connection), you can call &'smtp_fflush()'&, which has no
27279 arguments. It flushes the output stream, and returns a non-zero value if there
27282 .vitem &*void&~*store_get(int)*&
27283 This function accesses Exim's internal store (memory) manager. It gets a new
27284 chunk of memory whose size is given by the argument. Exim bombs out if it ever
27285 runs out of memory. See the next section for a discussion of memory handling.
27287 .vitem &*void&~*store_get_perm(int)*&
27288 This function is like &'store_get()'&, but it always gets memory from the
27289 permanent pool. See the next section for a discussion of memory handling.
27291 .vitem &*uschar&~*string_copy(uschar&~*string)*&
27294 .vitem &*uschar&~*string_copyn(uschar&~*string,&~int&~length)*&
27297 .vitem &*uschar&~*string_sprintf(char&~*format,&~...)*&
27298 These three functions create strings using Exim's dynamic memory facilities.
27299 The first makes a copy of an entire string. The second copies up to a maximum
27300 number of characters, indicated by the second argument. The third uses a format
27301 and insertion arguments to create a new string. In each case, the result is a
27302 pointer to a new string in the current memory pool. See the next section for
27308 .section "More about Exim's memory handling" "SECTmemhanloc"
27309 .cindex "&[local_scan()]& function" "memory handling"
27310 No function is provided for freeing memory, because that is never needed.
27311 The dynamic memory that Exim uses when receiving a message is automatically
27312 recycled if another message is received by the same process (this applies only
27313 to incoming SMTP connections &-- other input methods can supply only one
27314 message at a time). After receiving the last message, a reception process
27317 Because it is recycled, the normal dynamic memory cannot be used for holding
27318 data that must be preserved over a number of incoming messages on the same SMTP
27319 connection. However, Exim in fact uses two pools of dynamic memory; the second
27320 one is not recycled, and can be used for this purpose.
27322 If you want to allocate memory that remains available for subsequent messages
27323 in the same SMTP connection, you should set
27325 store_pool = POOL_PERM
27327 before calling the function that does the allocation. There is no need to
27328 restore the value if you do not need to; however, if you do want to revert to
27329 the normal pool, you can either restore the previous value of &%store_pool%& or
27330 set it explicitly to POOL_MAIN.
27332 The pool setting applies to all functions that get dynamic memory, including
27333 &'expand_string()'&, &'store_get()'&, and the &'string_xxx()'& functions.
27334 There is also a convenience function called &'store_get_perm()'& that gets a
27335 block of memory from the permanent pool while preserving the value of
27342 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27343 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27345 .chapter "System-wide message filtering" "CHAPsystemfilter"
27346 .cindex "filter" "system filter"
27347 .cindex "filtering all mail"
27348 .cindex "system filter"
27349 The previous chapters (on ACLs and the local scan function) describe checks
27350 that can be applied to messages before they are accepted by a host. There is
27351 also a mechanism for checking messages once they have been received, but before
27352 they are delivered. This is called the &'system filter'&.
27354 The system filter operates in a similar manner to users' filter files, but it
27355 is run just once per message (however many recipients the message has).
27356 It should not normally be used as a substitute for routing, because &%deliver%&
27357 commands in a system router provide new envelope recipient addresses.
27358 The system filter must be an Exim filter. It cannot be a Sieve filter.
27360 The system filter is run at the start of a delivery attempt, before any routing
27361 is done. If a message fails to be completely delivered at the first attempt,
27362 the system filter is run again at the start of every retry.
27363 If you want your filter to do something only once per message, you can make use
27364 of the &%first_delivery%& condition in an &%if%& command in the filter to
27365 prevent it happening on retries.
27367 .cindex "&$domain$&"
27368 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
27369 &*Warning*&: Because the system filter runs just once, variables that are
27370 specific to individual recipient addresses, such as &$local_part$& and
27371 &$domain$&, are not set, and the &"personal"& condition is not meaningful. If
27372 you want to run a centrally-specified filter for each recipient address
27373 independently, you can do so by setting up a suitable &(redirect)& router, as
27374 described in section &<<SECTperaddfil>>& below.
27377 .section "Specifying a system filter"
27378 .cindex "uid (user id)" "system filter"
27379 .cindex "gid (group id)" "system filter"
27380 The name of the file that contains the system filter must be specified by
27381 setting &%system_filter%&. If you want the filter to run under a uid and gid
27382 other than root, you must also set &%system_filter_user%& and
27383 &%system_filter_group%& as appropriate. For example:
27385 system_filter = /etc/mail/exim.filter
27386 system_filter_user = exim
27388 If a system filter generates any deliveries directly to files or pipes (via the
27389 &%save%& or &%pipe%& commands), transports to handle these deliveries must be
27390 specified by setting &%system_filter_file_transport%& and
27391 &%system_filter_pipe_transport%&, respectively. Similarly,
27392 &%system_filter_reply_transport%& must be set to handle any messages generated
27393 by the &%reply%& command.
27396 .section "Testing a system filter"
27397 You can run simple tests of a system filter in the same way as for a user
27398 filter, but you should use &%-bF%& rather than &%-bf%&, so that features that
27399 are permitted only in system filters are recognized.
27401 If you want to test the combined effect of a system filter and a user filter,
27402 you can use both &%-bF%& and &%-bf%& on the same command line.
27406 .section "Contents of a system filter"
27407 The language used to specify system filters is the same as for users' filter
27408 files. It is described in the separate end-user document &'Exim's interface to
27409 mail filtering'&. However, there are some additional features that are
27410 available only in system filters; these are described in subsequent sections.
27411 If they are encountered in a user's filter file or when testing with &%-bf%&,
27414 .cindex "frozen messages" "manual thaw; testing in filter"
27415 There are two special conditions which, though available in users' filter
27416 files, are designed for use in system filters. The condition &%first_delivery%&
27417 is true only for the first attempt at delivering a message, and
27418 &%manually_thawed%& is true only if the message has been frozen, and
27419 subsequently thawed by an admin user. An explicit forced delivery counts as a
27420 manual thaw, but thawing as a result of the &%auto_thaw%& setting does not.
27422 &*Warning*&: If a system filter uses the &%first_delivery%& condition to
27423 specify an &"unseen"& (non-significant) delivery, and that delivery does not
27424 succeed, it will not be tried again.
27425 If you want Exim to retry an unseen delivery until it succeeds, you should
27426 arrange to set it up every time the filter runs.
27428 When a system filter finishes running, the values of the variables &$n0$& &--
27429 &$n9$& are copied into &$sn0$& &-- &$sn9$& and are thereby made available to
27430 users' filter files. Thus a system filter can, for example, set up &"scores"&
27431 to which users' filter files can refer.
27435 .section "Additional variable for system filters"
27436 .cindex "&$recipients$&"
27437 The expansion variable &$recipients$&, containing a list of all the recipients
27438 of the message (separated by commas and white space), is available in system
27439 filters. It is not available in users' filters for privacy reasons.
27443 .section "Defer, freeze, and fail commands for system filters"
27444 .cindex "freezing messages"
27445 .cindex "message" "freezing"
27446 .cindex "message" "forced failure"
27447 .cindex "&%fail%&" "in system filter"
27448 .cindex "&%freeze%& in system filter"
27449 .cindex "&%defer%& in system filter"
27450 There are three extra commands (&%defer%&, &%freeze%& and &%fail%&) which are
27451 always available in system filters, but are not normally enabled in users'
27452 filters. (See the &%allow_defer%&, &%allow_freeze%& and &%allow_fail%& options
27453 for the &(redirect)& router.) These commands can optionally be followed by the
27454 word &%text%& and a string containing an error message, for example:
27456 fail text "this message looks like spam to me"
27458 The keyword &%text%& is optional if the next character is a double quote.
27460 The &%defer%& command defers delivery of the original recipients of the
27461 message. The &%fail%& command causes all the original recipients to be failed,
27462 and a bounce message to be created. The &%freeze%& command suspends all
27463 delivery attempts for the original recipients. In all cases, any new deliveries
27464 that are specified by the filter are attempted as normal after the filter has
27467 The &%freeze%& command is ignored if the message has been manually unfrozen and
27468 not manually frozen since. This means that automatic freezing by a system
27469 filter can be used as a way of checking out suspicious messages. If a message
27470 is found to be all right, manually unfreezing it allows it to be delivered.
27472 .cindex "log" "&%fail%& command log line"
27473 .cindex "&%fail%&" "log line; reducing"
27474 The text given with a fail command is used as part of the bounce message as
27475 well as being written to the log. If the message is quite long, this can fill
27476 up a lot of log space when such failures are common. To reduce the size of the
27477 log message, Exim interprets the text in a special way if it starts with the
27478 two characters &`<<`& and contains &`>>`& later. The text between these two
27479 strings is written to the log, and the rest of the text is used in the bounce
27480 message. For example:
27482 fail "<<filter test 1>>Your message is rejected \
27483 because it contains attachments that we are \
27484 not prepared to receive."
27487 .cindex "loop" "caused by &%fail%&"
27488 Take great care with the &%fail%& command when basing the decision to fail on
27489 the contents of the message, because the bounce message will of course include
27490 the contents of the original message and will therefore trigger the &%fail%&
27491 command again (causing a mail loop) unless steps are taken to prevent this.
27492 Testing the &%error_message%& condition is one way to prevent this. You could
27495 if $message_body contains "this is spam" and not error_message
27496 then fail text "spam is not wanted here" endif
27498 though of course that might let through unwanted bounce messages. The
27499 alternative is clever checking of the body and/or headers to detect bounces
27500 generated by the filter.
27502 The interpretation of a system filter file ceases after a
27504 &%freeze%&, or &%fail%& command is obeyed. However, any deliveries that were
27505 set up earlier in the filter file are honoured, so you can use a sequence such
27511 to send a specified message when the system filter is freezing (or deferring or
27512 failing) a message. The normal deliveries for the message do not, of course,
27517 .section "Adding and removing headers in a system filter" "SECTaddremheasys"
27518 .cindex "header lines" "adding; in system filter"
27519 .cindex "header lines" "removing; in system filter"
27520 .cindex "filter" "header lines; adding/removing"
27521 Two filter commands that are available only in system filters are:
27523 headers add <string>
27524 headers remove <string>
27526 The argument for the &%headers add%& is a string that is expanded and then
27527 added to the end of the message's headers. It is the responsibility of the
27528 filter maintainer to make sure it conforms to RFC 2822 syntax. Leading white
27529 space is ignored, and if the string is otherwise empty, or if the expansion is
27530 forced to fail, the command has no effect.
27532 You can use &"\n"& within the string, followed by white space, to specify
27533 continued header lines. More than one header may be added in one command by
27534 including &"\n"& within the string without any following white space. For
27537 headers add "X-header-1: ....\n \
27538 continuation of X-header-1 ...\n\
27541 Note that the header line continuation white space after the first newline must
27542 be placed before the backslash that continues the input string, because white
27543 space after input continuations is ignored.
27545 The argument for &%headers remove%& is a colon-separated list of header names.
27546 This command applies only to those headers that are stored with the message;
27547 those that are added at delivery time (such as &'Envelope-To:'& and
27548 &'Return-Path:'&) cannot be removed by this means. If there is more than one
27549 header with the same name, they are all removed.
27551 The &%headers%& command in a system filter makes an immediate change to the set
27552 of header lines that was received with the message (with possible additions
27553 from ACL processing). Subsequent commands in the system filter operate on the
27554 modified set, which also forms the basis for subsequent message delivery.
27555 Unless further modified during routing or transporting, this set of headers is
27556 used for all recipients of the message.
27558 During routing and transporting, the variables that refer to the contents of
27559 header lines refer only to those lines that are in this set. Thus, header lines
27560 that are added by a system filter are visible to users' filter files and to all
27561 routers and transports. This contrasts with the manipulation of header lines by
27562 routers and transports, which is not immediate, but which instead is saved up
27563 until the message is actually being written (see section
27564 &<<SECTheadersaddrem>>&).
27566 If the message is not delivered at the first attempt, header lines that were
27567 added by the system filter are stored with the message, and so are still
27568 present at the next delivery attempt. Header lines that were removed are still
27569 present, but marked &"deleted"& so that they are not transported with the
27570 message. For this reason, it is usual to make the &%headers%& command
27571 conditional on &%first_delivery%& so that the set of header lines is not
27572 modified more than once.
27574 Because header modification in a system filter acts immediately, you have to
27575 use an indirect approach if you want to modify the contents of a header line.
27578 headers add "Old-Subject: $h_subject:"
27579 headers remove "Subject"
27580 headers add "Subject: new subject (was: $h_old-subject:)"
27581 headers remove "Old-Subject"
27586 .section "Setting an errors address in a system filter"
27587 .cindex "envelope sender"
27588 In a system filter, if a &%deliver%& command is followed by
27590 errors_to <some address>
27592 in order to change the envelope sender (and hence the error reporting) for that
27593 delivery, any address may be specified. (In a user filter, only the current
27594 user's address can be set.) For example, if some mail is being monitored, you
27597 unseen deliver monitor@spying.example errors_to root@local.example
27599 to take a copy which would not be sent back to the normal error reporting
27600 address if its delivery failed.
27604 .section "Per-address filtering" "SECTperaddfil"
27605 .cindex "&$domain$&"
27606 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
27607 In contrast to the system filter, which is run just once per message for each
27608 delivery attempt, it is also possible to set up a system-wide filtering
27609 operation that runs once for each recipient address. In this case, variables
27610 such as &$local_part$& and &$domain$& can be used, and indeed, the choice of
27611 filter file could be made dependent on them. This is an example of a router
27612 which implements such a filter:
27617 domains = +local_domains
27618 file = /central/filters/$local_part
27623 The filter is run in a separate process under its own uid. Therefore, either
27624 &%check_local_user%& must be set (as above), in which case the filter is run as
27625 the local user, or the &%user%& option must be used to specify which user to
27626 use. If both are set, &%user%& overrides.
27628 Care should be taken to ensure that none of the commands in the filter file
27629 specify a significant delivery if the message is to go on to be delivered to
27630 its intended recipient. The router will not then claim to have dealt with the
27631 address, so it will be passed on to subsequent routers to be delivered in the
27639 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27640 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
27642 .chapter "Message processing" "CHAPmsgproc"
27643 .cindex "message" "general processing"
27644 Exim performs various transformations on the sender and recipient addresses of
27645 all messages that it handles, and also on the messages' header lines. Some of
27646 these are optional and configurable, while others always take place. All of
27647 this processing, except rewriting as a result of routing, and the addition or
27648 removal of header lines while delivering, happens when a message is received,
27649 before it is placed on Exim's queue.
27651 Some of the automatic processing takes place by default only for
27652 &"locally-originated"& messages. This adjective is used to describe messages
27653 that are not received over TCP/IP, but instead are passed to an Exim process on
27654 its standard input. This includes the interactive &"local SMTP"& case that is
27655 set up by the &%-bs%& command line option.
27657 &*Note*&: Messages received over TCP/IP on the loopback interface (127.0.0.1
27658 or ::1) are not considered to be locally-originated. Exim does not treat the
27659 loopback interface specially in any way.
27661 If you want the loopback interface to be treated specially, you must ensure
27662 that there are appropriate entries in your ACLs.
27667 .section "Submission mode for non-local messages" "SECTsubmodnon"
27668 .cindex "message" "submission"
27669 .cindex "submission mode"
27671 Processing that happens automatically for locally-originated messages (unless
27672 &%suppress_local_fixups%& is set) can also be requested for messages that are
27673 received over TCP/IP. The term &"submission mode"& is used to describe this
27674 state. Submisssion mode is set by the modifier
27677 control = submission
27679 in a MAIL, RCPT, or pre-data ACL for an incoming message (see sections
27680 &<<SECTACLmodi>>& and &<<SECTcontrols>>&). This makes Exim treat the message as
27681 a local submission, and is normally used when the source of the message is
27682 known to be an MUA running on a client host (as opposed to an MTA). For
27683 example, to set submission mode for messages originating on the IPv4 loopback
27684 interface, you could include the following in the MAIL ACL:
27686 warn hosts = 127.0.0.1
27687 control = submission
27689 .cindex "&%sender_retain%&"
27690 There are some options that can be used when setting submission mode. A slash
27691 is used to separate options. For example:
27693 control = submission/sender_retain
27695 Specifying &%sender_retain%& has the effect of setting &%local_sender_retain%&
27696 true and &%local_from_check%& false for the current incoming message. The first
27697 of these allows an existing &'Sender:'& header in the message to remain, and
27698 the second suppresses the check to ensure that &'From:'& matches the
27699 authenticated sender. With this setting, Exim still fixes up messages by adding
27700 &'Date:'& and &'Message-ID:'& header lines if they are missing, but makes no
27701 attempt to check sender authenticity in header lines.
27703 When &%sender_retain%& is not set, a submission mode setting may specify a
27704 domain to be used when generating a &'From:'& or &'Sender:'& header line. For
27707 control = submission/domain=some.domain
27710 The domain may be empty. How this value is used is described in sections
27711 &<<SECTthefrohea>>& and &<<SECTthesenhea>>&. There is also a &%name%& option
27712 that allows you to specify the user's full name for inclusion in a created
27713 &'Sender:'& or &'From:'& header line. For example:
27715 accept authenticated = *
27716 control = submission/domain=wonderland.example/\
27717 name=${lookup {$authenticated_id} \
27718 lsearch {/etc/exim/namelist}}
27720 Because the name may contain any characters, including slashes, the &%name%&
27721 option must be given last. The remainder of the string is used as the name. For
27722 the example above, if &_/etc/exim/namelist_& contains:
27724 bigegg: Humpty Dumpty
27726 then when the sender has authenticated as &'bigegg'&, the generated &'Sender:'&
27729 Sender: Humpty Dumpty <bigegg@wonderland.example>
27731 .cindex "return path" "in submission mode"
27732 By default, submission mode forces the return path to the same address as is
27733 used to create the &'Sender:'& header. However, if &%sender_retain%& is
27734 specified, the return path is also left unchanged.
27736 &*Note*&: The changes caused by submission mode take effect after the predata
27737 ACL. This means that any sender checks performed before the fix-ups use the
27738 untrusted sender address specified by the user, not the trusted sender address
27739 specified by submission mode. Although this might be slightly unexpected, it
27740 does mean that you can configure ACL checks to spot that a user is trying to
27741 spoof another's address.
27744 .section "Line endings" "SECTlineendings"
27745 .cindex "line endings"
27746 .cindex "carriage return"
27748 RFC 2821 specifies that CRLF (two characters: carriage-return, followed by
27749 linefeed) is the line ending for messages transmitted over the Internet using
27750 SMTP over TCP/IP. However, within individual operating systems, different
27751 conventions are used. For example, Unix-like systems use just LF, but others
27752 use CRLF or just CR.
27754 Exim was designed for Unix-like systems, and internally, it stores messages
27755 using the system's convention of a single LF as a line terminator. When
27756 receiving a message, all line endings are translated to this standard format.
27757 Originally, it was thought that programs that passed messages directly to an
27758 MTA within an operating system would use that system's convention. Experience
27759 has shown that this is not the case; for example, there are Unix applications
27760 that use CRLF in this circumstance. For this reason, and for compatibility with
27761 other MTAs, the way Exim handles line endings for all messages is now as
27765 LF not preceded by CR is treated as a line ending.
27767 CR is treated as a line ending; if it is immediately followed by LF, the LF
27770 The sequence &"CR, dot, CR"& does not terminate an incoming SMTP message,
27771 nor a local message in the state where a line containing only a dot is a
27774 If a bare CR is encountered within a header line, an extra space is added after
27775 the line terminator so as not to end the header line. The reasoning behind this
27776 is that bare CRs in header lines are most likely either to be mistakes, or
27777 people trying to play silly games.
27779 If the first header line received in a message ends with CRLF, a subsequent
27780 bare LF in a header line is treated in the same way as a bare CR in a header
27788 .section "Unqualified addresses"
27789 .cindex "unqualified addresses"
27790 .cindex "address" "qualification"
27791 By default, Exim expects every envelope address it receives from an external
27792 host to be fully qualified. Unqualified addresses cause negative responses to
27793 SMTP commands. However, because SMTP is used as a means of transporting
27794 messages from MUAs running on personal workstations, there is sometimes a
27795 requirement to accept unqualified addresses from specific hosts or IP networks.
27797 Exim has two options that separately control which hosts may send unqualified
27798 sender or receipient addresses in SMTP commands, namely
27799 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& and &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&. In both
27800 cases, if an unqualified address is accepted, it is qualified by adding the
27801 value of &%qualify_domain%& or &%qualify_recipient%&, as appropriate.
27803 .cindex "&%qualify_domain%&"
27804 .cindex "&%qualify_recipient%&"
27805 Unqualified addresses in header lines are automatically qualified for messages
27806 that are locally originated, unless the &%-bnq%& option is given on the command
27807 line. For messages received over SMTP, unqualified addresses in header lines
27808 are qualified only if unqualified addresses are permitted in SMTP commands. In
27809 other words, such qualification is also controlled by
27810 &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& and &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%&,
27815 .section "The UUCP From line"
27816 .cindex "&""From""& line"
27817 .cindex "UUCP" "&""From""& line"
27818 .cindex "sender" "address"
27819 .cindex "&%uucp_from_pattern%&"
27820 .cindex "&%uucp_from_sender%&"
27821 .cindex "envelope sender"
27822 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&""From""& line"
27823 Messages that have come from UUCP (and some other applications) often begin
27824 with a line containing the envelope sender and a timestamp, following the word
27825 &"From"&. Examples of two common formats are:
27827 From a.oakley@berlin.mus Fri Jan 5 12:35 GMT 1996
27828 From f.butler@berlin.mus Fri, 7 Jan 97 14:00:00 GMT
27830 This line precedes the RFC 2822 header lines. For compatibility with Sendmail,
27831 Exim recognizes such lines at the start of messages that are submitted to it
27832 via the command line (that is, on the standard input). It does not recognize
27833 such lines in incoming SMTP messages, unless the sending host matches
27834 &%ignore_fromline_hosts%& or the &%-bs%& option was used for a local message
27835 and &%ignore_fromline_local%& is set. The recognition is controlled by a
27836 regular expression that is defined by the &%uucp_from_pattern%& option, whose
27837 default value matches the two common cases shown above and puts the address
27838 that follows &"From"& into &$1$&.
27840 .cindex "numerical variables (&$1$& &$2$& etc)" "in &""From ""& line handling"
27841 When the caller of Exim for a non-SMTP message that contains a &"From"& line is
27842 a trusted user, the message's sender address is constructed by expanding the
27843 contents of &%uucp_sender_address%&, whose default value is &"$1"&. This is
27844 then parsed as an RFC 2822 address. If there is no domain, the local part is
27845 qualified with &%qualify_domain%& unless it is the empty string. However, if
27846 the command line &%-f%& option is used, it overrides the &"From"& line.
27848 If the caller of Exim is not trusted, the &"From"& line is recognized, but the
27849 sender address is not changed. This is also the case for incoming SMTP messages
27850 that are permitted to contain &"From"& lines.
27852 Only one &"From"& line is recognized. If there is more than one, the second is
27853 treated as a data line that starts the body of the message, as it is not valid
27854 as a header line. This also happens if a &"From"& line is present in an
27855 incoming SMTP message from a source that is not permitted to send them.
27859 .section "Resent- header lines"
27860 .cindex "&%Resent-%& header lines"
27861 RFC 2822 makes provision for sets of header lines starting with the string
27862 &`Resent-`& to be added to a message when it is resent by the original
27863 recipient to somebody else. These headers are &'Resent-Date:'&,
27864 &'Resent-From:'&, &'Resent-Sender:'&, &'Resent-To:'&, &'Resent-Cc:'&,
27865 &'Resent-Bcc:'& and &'Resent-Message-ID:'&. The RFC says:
27868 &'Resent fields are strictly informational. They MUST NOT be used in the normal
27869 processing of replies or other such automatic actions on messages.'&
27872 This leaves things a bit vague as far as other processing actions such as
27873 address rewriting are concerned. Exim treats &%Resent-%& header lines as
27877 A &'Resent-From:'& line that just contains the login id of the submitting user
27878 is automatically rewritten in the same way as &'From:'& (see below).
27880 If there's a rewriting rule for a particular header line, it is also applied to
27881 &%Resent-%& header lines of the same type. For example, a rule that rewrites
27882 &'From:'& also rewrites &'Resent-From:'&.
27884 For local messages, if &'Sender:'& is removed on input, &'Resent-Sender:'& is
27887 For a locally-submitted message,
27888 if there are any &%Resent-%& header lines but no &'Resent-Date:'&,
27889 &'Resent-From:'&, or &'Resent-Message-Id:'&, they are added as necessary. It is
27890 the contents of &'Resent-Message-Id:'& (rather than &'Message-Id:'&) which are
27891 included in log lines in this case.
27893 The logic for adding &'Sender:'& is duplicated for &'Resent-Sender:'& when any
27894 &%Resent-%& header lines are present.
27900 .section "The Auto-Submitted: header line"
27901 Whenever Exim generates a bounce or a delay warning message, it includes the
27905 Auto-Submitted: auto-replied
27909 .section "The Bcc: header line"
27910 .cindex "&'Bcc:'& header line"
27911 If Exim is called with the &%-t%& option, to take recipient addresses from a
27912 message's header, it removes any &'Bcc:'& header line that may exist (after
27913 extracting its addresses). If &%-t%& is not present on the command line, any
27914 existing &'Bcc:'& is not removed.
27917 .section "The Date: header line"
27918 .cindex "&'Date:'& header line"
27920 If a locally-generated or submission-mode message has no &'Date:'& header line,
27921 Exim adds one, using the current date and time, unless the
27922 &%suppress_local_fixups%& control has been specified.
27925 .section "The Delivery-date: header line"
27926 .cindex "&'Delivery-date:'& header line"
27927 .cindex "&%delivery_date_remove%&"
27928 &'Delivery-date:'& header lines are not part of the standard RFC 2822 header
27929 set. Exim can be configured to add them to the final delivery of messages. (See
27930 the generic &%delivery_date_add%& transport option.) They should not be present
27931 in messages in transit. If the &%delivery_date_remove%& configuration option is
27932 set (the default), Exim removes &'Delivery-date:'& header lines from incoming
27936 .section "The Envelope-to: header line"
27937 .cindex "&'Envelope-to:'& header line"
27938 .cindex "&%envelope_to_remove%&"
27939 &'Envelope-to:'& header lines are not part of the standard RFC 2822 header set.
27940 Exim can be configured to add them to the final delivery of messages. (See the
27941 generic &%envelope_to_add%& transport option.) They should not be present in
27942 messages in transit. If the &%envelope_to_remove%& configuration option is set
27943 (the default), Exim removes &'Envelope-to:'& header lines from incoming
27947 .section "The From: header line" "SECTthefrohea"
27948 .cindex "&'From:'& header line"
27949 .cindex "Sendmail compatibility" "&""From""& line"
27950 .cindex "message" "submission"
27951 .cindex "submission mode"
27952 If a submission-mode message does not contain a &'From:'& header line, Exim
27953 adds one if either of the following conditions is true:
27956 The envelope sender address is not empty (that is, this is not a bounce
27957 message). The added header line copies the envelope sender address.
27959 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
27960 The SMTP session is authenticated and &$authenticated_id$& is not empty.
27962 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
27963 If no domain is specified by the submission control, the local part is
27964 &$authenticated_id$& and the domain is &$qualify_domain$&.
27966 If a non-empty domain is specified by the submission control, the local
27967 part is &$authenticated_id$&, and the the domain is the specified domain.
27969 If an empty domain is specified by the submission control,
27970 &$authenticated_id$& is assumed to be the complete address.
27974 A non-empty envelope sender takes precedence.
27977 If a locally-generated incoming message does not contain a &'From:'& header
27978 line, and the &%suppress_local_fixups%& control is not set, Exim adds one
27979 containing the sender's address. The calling user's login name and full name
27980 are used to construct the address, as described in section &<<SECTconstr>>&.
27981 They are obtained from the password data by calling &[getpwuid()]& (but see the
27982 &%unknown_login%& configuration option). The address is qualified with
27983 &%qualify_domain%&.
27986 For compatibility with Sendmail, if an incoming, non-SMTP message has a
27987 &'From:'& header line containing just the unqualified login name of the calling
27988 user, this is replaced by an address containing the user's login name and full
27989 name as described in section &<<SECTconstr>>&.
27992 .section "The Message-ID: header line"
27993 .cindex "&'Message-ID:'& header line"
27994 .cindex "message" "submission"
27995 .cindex "&%message_id_header_text%&"
27997 If a locally-generated or submission-mode incoming message does not contain a
27998 &'Message-ID:'& or &'Resent-Message-ID:'& header line, and the
27999 &%suppress_local_fixups%& control is not set, Exim adds a suitable header line
28000 to the message. If there are any &'Resent-:'& headers in the message, it
28001 creates &'Resent-Message-ID:'&. The id is constructed from Exim's internal
28002 message id, preceded by the letter E to ensure it starts with a letter, and
28003 followed by @ and the primary host name. Additional information can be included
28004 in this header line by setting the &%message_id_header_text%& and/or
28005 &%message_id_header_domain%& options.
28009 .section "The Received: header line"
28010 .cindex "&'Received:'& header line"
28011 A &'Received:'& header line is added at the start of every message. The
28012 contents are defined by the &%received_header_text%& configuration option, and
28013 Exim automatically adds a semicolon and a timestamp to the configured string.
28015 The &'Received:'& header is generated as soon as the message's header lines
28016 have been received. At this stage, the timestamp in the &'Received:'& header
28017 line is the time that the message started to be received. This is the value
28018 that is seen by the DATA ACL and by the &[local_scan()]& function.
28020 Once a message is accepted, the timestamp in the &'Received:'& header line is
28021 changed to the time of acceptance, which is (apart from a small delay while the
28022 -H spool file is written) the earliest time at which delivery could start.
28026 .section "The Return-path: header line"
28027 .cindex "&'Return-path:'& header line"
28028 .cindex "&%return_path_remove%&"
28029 &'Return-path:'& header lines are defined as something an MTA may insert when
28030 it does the final delivery of messages. (See the generic &%return_path_add%&
28031 transport option.) Therefore, they should not be present in messages in
28032 transit. If the &%return_path_remove%& configuration option is set (the
28033 default), Exim removes &'Return-path:'& header lines from incoming messages.
28037 .section "The Sender: header line" "SECTthesenhea"
28038 .cindex "&'Sender:'& header line"
28039 .cindex "message" "submission"
28041 For a locally-originated message from an untrusted user, Exim may remove an
28042 existing &'Sender:'& header line, and it may add a new one. You can modify
28043 these actions by setting the &%local_sender_retain%& option true, the
28044 &%local_from_check%& option false, or by using the &%suppress_local_fixups%&
28047 When a local message is received from an untrusted user and
28048 &%local_from_check%& is true (the default), and the &%suppress_local_fixups%&
28049 control has not been set, a check is made to see if the address given in the
28050 &'From:'& header line is the correct (local) sender of the message. The address
28051 that is expected has the login name as the local part and the value of
28052 &%qualify_domain%& as the domain. Prefixes and suffixes for the local part can
28053 be permitted by setting &%local_from_prefix%& and &%local_from_suffix%&
28054 appropriately. If &'From:'& does not contain the correct sender, a &'Sender:'&
28055 line is added to the message.
28058 If you set &%local_from_check%& false, this checking does not occur. However,
28059 the removal of an existing &'Sender:'& line still happens, unless you also set
28060 &%local_sender_retain%& to be true. It is not possible to set both of these
28061 options true at the same time.
28063 .cindex "submission mode"
28064 By default, no processing of &'Sender:'& header lines is done for messages
28065 received over TCP/IP or for messages submitted by trusted users. However, when
28066 a message is received over TCP/IP in submission mode, and &%sender_retain%& is
28067 not specified on the submission control, the following processing takes place:
28069 .cindex "&$authenticated_id$&"
28070 First, any existing &'Sender:'& lines are removed. Then, if the SMTP session is
28071 authenticated, and &$authenticated_id$& is not empty, a sender address is
28072 created as follows:
28075 .cindex "&$qualify_domain$&"
28076 If no domain is specified by the submission control, the local part is
28077 &$authenticated_id$& and the domain is &$qualify_domain$&.
28079 If a non-empty domain is specified by the submission control, the local part
28080 is &$authenticated_id$&, and the the domain is the specified domain.
28082 If an empty domain is specified by the submission control,
28083 &$authenticated_id$& is assumed to be the complete address.
28086 This address is compared with the address in the &'From:'& header line. If they
28087 are different, a &'Sender:'& header line containing the created address is
28088 added. Prefixes and suffixes for the local part in &'From:'& can be permitted
28089 by setting &%local_from_prefix%& and &%local_from_suffix%& appropriately.
28092 .cindex "return path" "created from &'Sender:'&"
28093 &*Note*&: Whenever a &'Sender:'& header line is created, the return path for
28094 the message (the envelope sender address) is changed to be the same address,
28095 except in the case of submission mode when &%sender_retain%& is specified.
28100 .section "Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports" &&&
28101 "SECTheadersaddrem"
28102 .cindex "header lines" "adding; in router or transport"
28103 .cindex "header lines" "removing; in router or transport"
28105 When a message is delivered, the addition and removal of header lines can be
28106 specified in a system filter, or on any of the routers and transports that
28107 process the message. Section &<<SECTaddremheasys>>& contains details about
28108 modifying headers in a system filter. Header lines can also be added in an ACL
28109 as a message is received (see section &<<SECTaddheadwarn>>&).
28112 In contrast to what happens in a system filter, header modifications that are
28113 specified on routers and transports apply only to the particular recipient
28114 addresses that are being processed by those routers and transports. These
28115 changes do not actually take place until a copy of the message is being
28116 transported. Therefore, they do not affect the basic set of header lines, and
28117 they do not affect the values of the variables that refer to header lines.
28120 &*Note*&: In particular, this means that any expansions in the configuration of
28121 the transport cannot refer to the modified header lines, because such
28122 expansions all occur before the message is actually transported.
28125 For both routers and transports, the result of expanding a &%headers_add%&
28126 option must be in the form of one or more RFC 2822 header lines, separated by
28127 newlines (coded as &"\n"&). For example:
28129 headers_add = X-added-header: added by $primary_hostname\n\
28130 X-added-second: another added header line
28132 Exim does not check the syntax of these added header lines.
28134 The result of expanding &%headers_remove%& must consist of a colon-separated
28135 list of header names. This is confusing, because header names themselves are
28136 often terminated by colons. In this case, the colons are the list separators,
28137 not part of the names. For example:
28139 headers_remove = return-receipt-to:acknowledge-to
28141 When &%headers_add%& or &%headers_remove%& is specified on a router, its value
28142 is expanded at routing time, and then associated with all addresses that are
28143 accepted by that router, and also with any new addresses that it generates. If
28144 an address passes through several routers as a result of aliasing or
28145 forwarding, the changes are cumulative.
28147 .cindex "&%unseen%& option"
28148 However, this does not apply to multiple routers that result from the use of
28149 the &%unseen%& option. Any header modifications that were specified by the
28150 &"unseen"& router or its predecessors apply only to the &"unseen"& delivery.
28152 Addresses that end up with different &%headers_add%& or &%headers_remove%&
28153 settings cannot be delivered together in a batch, so a transport is always
28154 dealing with a set of addresses that have the same header-processing
28157 The transport starts by writing the original set of header lines that arrived
28158 with the message, possibly modified by the system filter. As it writes out
28159 these lines, it consults the list of header names that were attached to the
28160 recipient address(es) by &%headers_remove%& options in routers, and it also
28161 consults the transport's own &%headers_remove%& option. Header lines whose
28162 names are on either of these lists are not written out. If there are multiple
28163 instances of any listed header, they are all skipped.
28165 After the remaining original header lines have been written, new header
28166 lines that were specified by routers' &%headers_add%& options are written, in
28167 the order in which they were attached to the address. These are followed by any
28168 header lines specified by the transport's &%headers_add%& option.
28170 This way of handling header line modifications in routers and transports has
28171 the following consequences:
28174 The original set of header lines, possibly modified by the system filter,
28175 remains &"visible"&, in the sense that the &$header_$&&'xxx'& variables refer
28176 to it, at all times.
28178 Header lines that are added by a router's
28179 &%headers_add%& option are not accessible by means of the &$header_$&&'xxx'&
28180 expansion syntax in subsequent routers or the transport.
28182 Conversely, header lines that are specified for removal by &%headers_remove%&
28183 in a router remain visible to subsequent routers and the transport.
28185 Headers added to an address by &%headers_add%& in a router cannot be removed by
28186 a later router or by a transport.
28188 An added header can refer to the contents of an original header that is to be
28189 removed, even it has the same name as the added header. For example:
28191 headers_remove = subject
28192 headers_add = Subject: new subject (was: $h_subject:)
28196 &*Warning*&: The &%headers_add%& and &%headers_remove%& options cannot be used
28197 for a &(redirect)& router that has the &%one_time%& option set.
28203 .section "Constructed addresses" "SECTconstr"
28204 .cindex "address" "constructed"
28205 .cindex "constructed address"
28206 When Exim constructs a sender address for a locally-generated message, it uses
28209 <&'user name'&>&~&~<&'login'&&`@`&&'qualify_domain'&>
28213 Zaphod Beeblebrox <zaphod@end.univ.example>
28215 The user name is obtained from the &%-F%& command line option if set, or
28216 otherwise by looking up the calling user by &[getpwuid()]& and extracting the
28217 &"gecos"& field from the password entry. If the &"gecos"& field contains an
28218 ampersand character, this is replaced by the login name with the first letter
28219 upper cased, as is conventional in a number of operating systems. See the
28220 &%gecos_name%& option for a way to tailor the handling of the &"gecos"& field.
28221 The &%unknown_username%& option can be used to specify user names in cases when
28222 there is no password file entry.
28225 In all cases, the user name is made to conform to RFC 2822 by quoting all or
28226 parts of it if necessary. In addition, if it contains any non-printing
28227 characters, it is encoded as described in RFC 2047, which defines a way of
28228 including non-ASCII characters in header lines. The value of the
28229 &%headers_charset%& option specifies the name of the encoding that is used (the
28230 characters are assumed to be in this encoding). The setting of
28231 &%print_topbitchars%& controls whether characters with the top bit set (that
28232 is, with codes greater than 127) count as printing characters or not.
28236 .section "Case of local parts"
28237 .cindex "case of local parts"
28238 .cindex "local part" "case of"
28239 RFC 2822 states that the case of letters in the local parts of addresses cannot
28240 be assumed to be non-significant. Exim preserves the case of local parts of
28241 addresses, but by default it uses a lower-cased form when it is routing,
28242 because on most Unix systems, usernames are in lower case and case-insensitive
28243 routing is required. However, any particular router can be made to use the
28244 original case for local parts by setting the &%caseful_local_part%& generic
28247 .cindex "mixed-case login names"
28248 If you must have mixed-case user names on your system, the best way to proceed,
28249 assuming you want case-independent handling of incoming email, is to set up
28250 your first router to convert incoming local parts in your domains to the
28251 correct case by means of a file lookup. For example:
28255 domains = +local_domains
28256 data = ${lookup{$local_part}cdb\
28257 {/etc/usercased.cdb}{$value}fail}\
28260 For this router, the local part is forced to lower case by the default action
28261 (&%caseful_local_part%& is not set). The lower-cased local part is used to look
28262 up a new local part in the correct case. If you then set &%caseful_local_part%&
28263 on any subsequent routers which process your domains, they will operate on
28264 local parts with the correct case in a case-sensitive manner.
28268 .section "Dots in local parts"
28269 .cindex "dot" "in local part"
28270 .cindex "local part" "dots in"
28271 RFC 2822 forbids empty components in local parts. That is, an unquoted local
28272 part may not begin or end with a dot, nor have two consecutive dots in the
28273 middle. However, it seems that many MTAs do not enforce this, so Exim permits
28274 empty components for compatibility.
28278 .section "Rewriting addresses"
28279 .cindex "rewriting" "addresses"
28280 Rewriting of sender and recipient addresses, and addresses in headers, can
28281 happen automatically, or as the result of configuration options, as described
28282 in chapter &<<CHAPrewrite>>&. The headers that may be affected by this are
28283 &'Bcc:'&, &'Cc:'&, &'From:'&, &'Reply-To:'&, &'Sender:'&, and &'To:'&.
28285 Automatic rewriting includes qualification, as mentioned above. The other case
28286 in which it can happen is when an incomplete non-local domain is given. The
28287 routing process may cause this to be expanded into the full domain name. For
28288 example, a header such as
28292 might get rewritten as
28294 To: hare@teaparty.wonderland.fict.example
28296 Rewriting as a result of routing is the one kind of message processing that
28297 does not happen at input time, as it cannot be done until the address has
28300 Strictly, one should not do &'any'& deliveries of a message until all its
28301 addresses have been routed, in case any of the headers get changed as a
28302 result of routing. However, doing this in practice would hold up many
28303 deliveries for unreasonable amounts of time, just because one address could not
28304 immediately be routed. Exim therefore does not delay other deliveries when
28305 routing of one or more addresses is deferred.
28308 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
28309 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
28311 .chapter "SMTP processing" "CHAPSMTP"
28312 .cindex "SMTP" "processing details"
28313 .cindex "LMTP" "processing details"
28314 Exim supports a number of different ways of using the SMTP protocol, and its
28315 LMTP variant, which is an interactive protocol for transferring messages into a
28316 closed mail store application. This chapter contains details of how SMTP is
28317 processed. For incoming mail, the following are available:
28320 SMTP over TCP/IP (Exim daemon or &'inetd'&);
28322 SMTP over the standard input and output (the &%-bs%& option);
28324 Batched SMTP on the standard input (the &%-bS%& option).
28327 For mail delivery, the following are available:
28330 SMTP over TCP/IP (the &(smtp)& transport);
28332 LMTP over TCP/IP (the &(smtp)& transport with the &%protocol%& option set to
28335 LMTP over a pipe to a process running in the local host (the &(lmtp)&
28338 Batched SMTP to a file or pipe (the &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports with
28339 the &%use_bsmtp%& option set).
28342 &'Batched SMTP'& is the name for a process in which batches of messages are
28343 stored in or read from files (or pipes), in a format in which SMTP commands are
28344 used to contain the envelope information.
28348 .section "Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP" "SECToutSMTPTCP"
28349 .cindex "SMTP" "outgoing over TCP/IP"
28350 .cindex "outgoing SMTP over TCP/IP"
28351 .cindex "LMTP" "over TCP/IP"
28352 .cindex "outgoing LMTP over TCP/IP"
28355 .cindex "SIZE option on MAIL command"
28356 Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP is implemented by the &(smtp)& transport.
28357 The &%protocol%& option selects which protocol is to be used, but the actual
28358 processing is the same in both cases.
28360 If, in response to its EHLO command, Exim is told that the SIZE
28361 parameter is supported, it adds SIZE=<&'n'&> to each subsequent MAIL
28362 command. The value of <&'n'&> is the message size plus the value of the
28363 &%size_addition%& option (default 1024) to allow for additions to the message
28364 such as per-transport header lines, or changes made in a
28365 .cindex "transport" "filter"
28366 .cindex "filter" "transport filter"
28367 transport filter. If &%size_addition%& is set negative, the use of SIZE is
28370 If the remote server advertises support for PIPELINING, Exim uses the
28371 pipelining extension to SMTP (RFC 2197) to reduce the number of TCP/IP packets
28372 required for the transaction.
28374 If the remote server advertises support for the STARTTLS command, and Exim
28375 was built to support TLS encryption, it tries to start a TLS session unless the
28376 server matches &%hosts_avoid_tls%&. See chapter &<<CHAPTLS>>& for more details.
28378 If the remote server advertises support for the AUTH command, Exim scans
28379 the authenticators configuration for any suitable client settings, as described
28380 in chapter &<<CHAPSMTPAUTH>>&.
28382 .cindex "carriage return"
28384 Responses from the remote host are supposed to be terminated by CR followed by
28385 LF. However, there are known to be hosts that do not send CR characters, so in
28386 order to be able to interwork with such hosts, Exim treats LF on its own as a
28389 If a message contains a number of different addresses, all those with the same
28390 characteristics (for example, the same envelope sender) that resolve to the
28391 same set of hosts, in the same order, are sent in a single SMTP transaction,
28392 even if they are for different domains, unless there are more than the setting
28393 of the &%max_rcpts%& option in the &(smtp)& transport allows, in which case
28394 they are split into groups containing no more than &%max_rcpts%& addresses
28395 each. If &%remote_max_parallel%& is greater than one, such groups may be sent
28396 in parallel sessions. The order of hosts with identical MX values is not
28397 significant when checking whether addresses can be batched in this way.
28399 When the &(smtp)& transport suffers a temporary failure that is not
28400 message-related, Exim updates its transport-specific database, which contains
28401 records indexed by host name that remember which messages are waiting for each
28402 particular host. It also updates the retry database with new retry times.
28404 .cindex "hints database" "retry keys"
28405 Exim's retry hints are based on host name plus IP address, so if one address of
28406 a multi-homed host is broken, it will soon be skipped most of the time.
28407 See the next section for more detail about error handling.
28409 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
28410 .cindex "SMTP" "batching over TCP/IP"
28411 When a message is successfully delivered over a TCP/IP SMTP connection, Exim
28412 looks in the hints database for the transport to see if there are any queued
28413 messages waiting for the host to which it is connected. If it finds one, it
28414 creates a new Exim process using the &%-MC%& option (which can only be used by
28415 a process running as root or the Exim user) and passes the TCP/IP socket to it
28416 so that it can deliver another message using the same socket. The new process
28417 does only those deliveries that are routed to the connected host, and may in
28418 turn pass the socket on to a third process, and so on.
28420 The &%connection_max_messages%& option of the &(smtp)& transport can be used to
28421 limit the number of messages sent down a single TCP/IP connection.
28423 .cindex "asterisk" "after IP address"
28424 The second and subsequent messages delivered down an existing connection are
28425 identified in the main log by the addition of an asterisk after the closing
28426 square bracket of the IP address.
28431 .section "Errors in outgoing SMTP" "SECToutSMTPerr"
28432 .cindex "error" "in outgoing SMTP"
28433 .cindex "SMTP" "errors in outgoing"
28434 .cindex "host" "error"
28435 Three different kinds of error are recognized for outgoing SMTP: host errors,
28436 message errors, and recipient errors.
28439 .vitem "&*Host errors*&"
28440 A host error is not associated with a particular message or with a
28441 particular recipient of a message. The host errors are:
28444 Connection refused or timed out,
28446 Any error response code on connection,
28448 Any error response code to EHLO or HELO,
28450 Loss of connection at any time, except after &"."&,
28452 I/O errors at any time,
28454 Timeouts during the session, other than in response to MAIL, RCPT or
28455 the &"."& at the end of the data.
28458 For a host error, a permanent error response on connection, or in response to
28459 EHLO, causes all addresses routed to the host to be failed. Any other host
28460 error causes all addresses to be deferred, and retry data to be created for the
28461 host. It is not tried again, for any message, until its retry time arrives. If
28462 the current set of addresses are not all delivered in this run (to some
28463 alternative host), the message is added to the list of those waiting for this
28464 host, so if it is still undelivered when a subsequent successful delivery is
28465 made to the host, it will be sent down the same SMTP connection.
28467 .vitem "&*Message errors*&"
28468 .cindex "message" "error"
28469 A message error is associated with a particular message when sent to a
28470 particular host, but not with a particular recipient of the message. The
28471 message errors are:
28474 Any error response code to MAIL, DATA, or the &"."& that terminates
28477 Timeout after MAIL,
28479 Timeout or loss of connection after the &"."& that terminates the data. A
28480 timeout after the DATA command itself is treated as a host error, as is loss of
28481 connection at any other time.
28484 For a message error, a permanent error response (5&'xx'&) causes all addresses
28485 to be failed, and a delivery error report to be returned to the sender. A
28486 temporary error response (4&'xx'&), or one of the timeouts, causes all
28487 addresses to be deferred. Retry data is not created for the host, but instead,
28488 a retry record for the combination of host plus message id is created. The
28489 message is not added to the list of those waiting for this host. This ensures
28490 that the failing message will not be sent to this host again until the retry
28491 time arrives. However, other messages that are routed to the host are not
28492 affected, so if it is some property of the message that is causing the error,
28493 it will not stop the delivery of other mail.
28495 If the remote host specified support for the SIZE parameter in its response
28496 to EHLO, Exim adds SIZE=&'nnn'& to the MAIL command, so an
28497 over-large message will cause a message error because the error arrives as a
28500 .vitem "&*Recipient errors*&"
28501 .cindex "recipient" "error"
28502 A recipient error is associated with a particular recipient of a message. The
28503 recipient errors are:
28506 Any error response to RCPT,
28508 Timeout after RCPT.
28511 For a recipient error, a permanent error response (5&'xx'&) causes the
28512 recipient address to be failed, and a bounce message to be returned to the
28513 sender. A temporary error response (4&'xx'&) or a timeout causes the failing
28514 address to be deferred, and routing retry data to be created for it. This is
28515 used to delay processing of the address in subsequent queue runs, until its
28516 routing retry time arrives. This applies to all messages, but because it
28517 operates only in queue runs, one attempt will be made to deliver a new message
28518 to the failing address before the delay starts to operate. This ensures that,
28519 if the failure is really related to the message rather than the recipient
28520 (&"message too big for this recipient"& is a possible example), other messages
28521 have a chance of getting delivered. If a delivery to the address does succeed,
28522 the retry information gets cleared, so all stuck messages get tried again, and
28523 the retry clock is reset.
28525 The message is not added to the list of those waiting for this host. Use of the
28526 host for other messages is unaffected, and except in the case of a timeout,
28527 other recipients are processed independently, and may be successfully delivered
28528 in the current SMTP session. After a timeout it is of course impossible to
28529 proceed with the session, so all addresses get deferred. However, those other
28530 than the one that failed do not suffer any subsequent retry delays. Therefore,
28531 if one recipient is causing trouble, the others have a chance of getting
28532 through when a subsequent delivery attempt occurs before the failing
28533 recipient's retry time.
28536 In all cases, if there are other hosts (or IP addresses) available for the
28537 current set of addresses (for example, from multiple MX records), they are
28538 tried in this run for any undelivered addresses, subject of course to their
28539 own retry data. In other words, recipient error retry data does not take effect
28540 until the next delivery attempt.
28542 Some hosts have been observed to give temporary error responses to every
28543 MAIL command at certain times (&"insufficient space"& has been seen). It
28544 would be nice if such circumstances could be recognized, and defer data for the
28545 host itself created, but this is not possible within the current Exim design.
28546 What actually happens is that retry data for every (host, message) combination
28549 The reason that timeouts after MAIL and RCPT are treated specially is that
28550 these can sometimes arise as a result of the remote host's verification
28551 procedures. Exim makes this assumption, and treats them as if a temporary error
28552 response had been received. A timeout after &"."& is treated specially because
28553 it is known that some broken implementations fail to recognize the end of the
28554 message if the last character of the last line is a binary zero. Thus, it is
28555 helpful to treat this case as a message error.
28557 Timeouts at other times are treated as host errors, assuming a problem with the
28558 host, or the connection to it. If a timeout after MAIL, RCPT,
28559 or &"."& is really a connection problem, the assumption is that at the next try
28560 the timeout is likely to occur at some other point in the dialogue, causing it
28561 then to be treated as a host error.
28563 There is experimental evidence that some MTAs drop the connection after the
28564 terminating &"."& if they do not like the contents of the message for some
28565 reason, in contravention of the RFC, which indicates that a 5&'xx'& response
28566 should be given. That is why Exim treats this case as a message rather than a
28567 host error, in order not to delay other messages to the same host.
28573 .section "Variable Envelope Return Paths (VERP)"
28575 .cindex "Variable Envelope Return Paths"
28576 .cindex "envelope sender"
28577 Variable Envelope Return Paths &-- see
28578 &*ftp://koobera.math.uic.edu/www/proto/verp.txt*& &-- can be supported in Exim
28579 by using the &%return_path%& generic transport option to rewrite the return
28580 path at transport time. For example, the following could be used on an &(smtp)&
28584 ${if match {$return_path}{^(.+?)-request@your.dom.example\$}\
28585 {$1-request=$local_part%$domain@your.dom.example}fail}
28587 This has the effect of rewriting the return path (envelope sender) on all
28588 outgoing SMTP messages, if the local part of the original return path ends in
28589 &"-request"&, and the domain is &'your.dom.example'&. The rewriting inserts the
28590 local part and domain of the recipient into the return path. Suppose, for
28591 example, that a message whose return path has been set to
28592 &'somelist-request@your.dom.example'& is sent to
28593 &'subscriber@other.dom.example'&. In the transport, the return path is
28596 somelist-request=subscriber%other.dom.example@your.dom.example
28598 For this to work, you must arrange for outgoing messages that have &"-request"&
28599 in their return paths to have just a single recipient. This can be done by
28604 .cindex "&$local_part$&"
28605 in the &(smtp)& transport. Otherwise a single copy of a message might be
28606 addressed to several different recipients in the same domain, in which case
28607 &$local_part$& is not available (because it is not unique). Of course, if you
28608 do start sending out messages with this kind of return path, you must also
28609 configure Exim to accept the bounce messages that come back to those paths.
28610 Typically this would be done by setting an &%local_part_suffix%& option for a
28613 The overhead incurred in using VERP depends very much on the size of the
28614 message, the number of recipient addresses that resolve to the same remote
28615 host, and the speed of the connection over which the message is being sent. If
28616 a lot of addresses resolve to the same host and the connection is slow, sending
28617 a separate copy of the message for each address may take substantially longer
28618 than sending a single copy with many recipients (for which VERP cannot be
28623 .section "Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP"
28624 .cindex "SMTP" "incoming over TCP/IP"
28625 .cindex "incoming SMTP over TCP/IP"
28628 Incoming SMTP messages can be accepted in one of two ways: by running a
28629 listening daemon, or by using &'inetd'&. In the latter case, the entry in
28630 &_/etc/inetd.conf_& should be like this:
28632 smtp stream tcp nowait exim /opt/exim/bin/exim in.exim -bs
28634 Exim distinguishes between this case and the case of a locally running user
28635 agent using the &%-bs%& option by checking whether or not the standard input is
28636 a socket. When it is, either the port must be privileged (less than 1024), or
28637 the caller must be root or the Exim user. If any other user passes a socket
28638 with an unprivileged port number, Exim prints a message on the standard error
28639 stream and exits with an error code.
28641 By default, Exim does not make a log entry when a remote host connects or
28642 disconnects (either via the daemon or &'inetd'&), unless the disconnection is
28643 unexpected. It can be made to write such log entries by setting the
28644 &%smtp_connection%& log selector.
28646 .cindex "carriage return"
28648 Commands from the remote host are supposed to be terminated by CR followed by
28649 LF. However, there are known to be hosts that do not send CR characters. In
28650 order to be able to interwork with such hosts, Exim treats LF on its own as a
28652 Furthermore, because common code is used for receiving messages from all
28653 sources, a CR on its own is also interpreted as a line terminator. However, the
28654 sequence &"CR, dot, CR"& does not terminate incoming SMTP data.
28656 .cindex "EHLO" "invalid data"
28657 .cindex "HELO" "invalid data"
28658 One area that sometimes gives rise to problems concerns the EHLO or
28659 HELO commands. Some clients send syntactically invalid versions of these
28660 commands, which Exim rejects by default. (This is nothing to do with verifying
28661 the data that is sent, so &%helo_verify_hosts%& is not relevant.) You can tell
28662 Exim not to apply a syntax check by setting &%helo_accept_junk_hosts%& to
28663 match the broken hosts that send invalid commands.
28665 .cindex "SIZE option on MAIL command"
28666 .cindex "MAIL" "SIZE option"
28667 The amount of disk space available is checked whenever SIZE is received on
28668 a MAIL command, independently of whether &%message_size_limit%& or
28669 &%check_spool_space%& is configured, unless &%smtp_check_spool_space%& is set
28670 false. A temporary error is given if there is not enough space. If
28671 &%check_spool_space%& is set, the check is for that amount of space plus the
28672 value given with SIZE, that is, it checks that the addition of the incoming
28673 message will not reduce the space below the threshold.
28675 When a message is successfully received, Exim includes the local message id in
28676 its response to the final &"."& that terminates the data. If the remote host
28677 logs this text it can help with tracing what has happened to a message.
28679 The Exim daemon can limit the number of simultaneous incoming connections it is
28680 prepared to handle (see the &%smtp_accept_max%& option). It can also limit the
28681 number of simultaneous incoming connections from a single remote host (see the
28682 &%smtp_accept_max_per_host%& option). Additional connection attempts are
28683 rejected using the SMTP temporary error code 421.
28685 The Exim daemon does not rely on the SIGCHLD signal to detect when a
28686 subprocess has finished, as this can get lost at busy times. Instead, it looks
28687 for completed subprocesses every time it wakes up. Provided there are other
28688 things happening (new incoming calls, starts of queue runs), completed
28689 processes will be noticed and tidied away. On very quiet systems you may
28690 sometimes see a &"defunct"& Exim process hanging about. This is not a problem;
28691 it will be noticed when the daemon next wakes up.
28693 When running as a daemon, Exim can reserve some SMTP slots for specific hosts,
28694 and can also be set up to reject SMTP calls from non-reserved hosts at times of
28695 high system load &-- for details see the &%smtp_accept_reserve%&,
28696 &%smtp_load_reserve%&, and &%smtp_reserve_hosts%& options. The load check
28697 applies in both the daemon and &'inetd'& cases.
28699 Exim normally starts a delivery process for each message received, though this
28700 can be varied by means of the &%-odq%& command line option and the
28701 &%queue_only%&, &%queue_only_file%&, and &%queue_only_load%& options. The
28702 number of simultaneously running delivery processes started in this way from
28703 SMTP input can be limited by the &%smtp_accept_queue%& and
28704 &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& options. When either limit is reached,
28705 subsequently received messages are just put on the input queue without starting
28706 a delivery process.
28708 The controls that involve counts of incoming SMTP calls (&%smtp_accept_max%&,
28709 &%smtp_accept_queue%&, &%smtp_accept_reserve%&) are not available when Exim is
28710 started up from the &'inetd'& daemon, because in that case each connection is
28711 handled by an entirely independent Exim process. Control by load average is,
28712 however, available with &'inetd'&.
28714 Exim can be configured to verify addresses in incoming SMTP commands as they
28715 are received. See chapter &<<CHAPACL>>& for details. It can also be configured
28716 to rewrite addresses at this time &-- before any syntax checking is done. See
28717 section &<<SECTrewriteS>>&.
28719 Exim can also be configured to limit the rate at which a client host submits
28720 MAIL and RCPT commands in a single SMTP session. See the
28721 &%smtp_ratelimit_hosts%& option.
28725 .section "Unrecognized SMTP commands"
28726 .cindex "SMTP" "unrecognized commands"
28727 If Exim receives more than &%smtp_max_unknown_commands%& unrecognized SMTP
28728 commands during a single SMTP connection, it drops the connection after sending
28729 the error response to the last command. The default value for
28730 &%smtp_max_unknown_commands%& is 3. This is a defence against some kinds of
28731 abuse that subvert web servers into making connections to SMTP ports; in these
28732 circumstances, a number of non-SMTP lines are sent first.
28735 .section "Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands"
28736 .cindex "SMTP" "syntax errors"
28737 .cindex "SMTP" "protocol errors"
28738 A syntax error is detected if an SMTP command is recognized, but there is
28739 something syntactically wrong with its data, for example, a malformed email
28740 address in a RCPT command. Protocol errors include invalid command
28741 sequencing such as RCPT before MAIL. If Exim receives more than
28742 &%smtp_max_synprot_errors%& such commands during a single SMTP connection, it
28743 drops the connection after sending the error response to the last command. The
28744 default value for &%smtp_max_synprot_errors%& is 3. This is a defence against
28745 broken clients that loop sending bad commands (yes, it has been seen).
28749 .section "Use of non-mail SMTP commands"
28750 .cindex "SMTP" "non-mail commands"
28751 The &"non-mail"& SMTP commands are those other than MAIL, RCPT, and
28752 DATA. Exim counts such commands, and drops the connection if there are too
28753 many of them in a single SMTP session. This action catches some
28754 denial-of-service attempts and things like repeated failing AUTHs, or a mad
28755 client looping sending EHLO. The global option &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%&
28756 defines what &"too many"& means. Its default value is 10.
28758 When a new message is expected, one occurrence of RSET is not counted. This
28759 allows a client to send one RSET between messages (this is not necessary,
28760 but some clients do it). Exim also allows one uncounted occurence of HELO
28761 or EHLO, and one occurrence of STARTTLS between messages. After
28762 starting up a TLS session, another EHLO is expected, and so it too is not
28765 The first occurrence of AUTH in a connection, or immediately following
28766 STARTTLS is also not counted. Otherwise, all commands other than MAIL,
28767 RCPT, DATA, and QUIT are counted.
28769 You can control which hosts are subject to the limit set by
28770 &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail%& by setting
28771 &%smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts%&. The default value is &`*`&, which makes
28772 the limit apply to all hosts. This option means that you can exclude any
28773 specific badly-behaved hosts that you have to live with.
28778 .section "The VRFY and EXPN commands"
28779 When Exim receives a VRFY or EXPN command on a TCP/IP connection, it
28780 runs the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_vrfy%& or &%acl_smtp_expn%& (as
28781 appropriate) in order to decide whether the command should be accepted or not.
28782 If no ACL is defined, the command is rejected.
28784 .cindex "VRFY" "processing"
28785 When VRFY is accepted, it runs exactly the same code as when Exim is
28786 called with the &%-bv%& option.
28788 .cindex "EXPN" "processing"
28789 When EXPN is accepted, a single-level expansion of the address is done.
28790 EXPN is treated as an &"address test"& (similar to the &%-bt%& option) rather
28791 than a verification (the &%-bv%& option). If an unqualified local part is given
28792 as the argument to EXPN, it is qualified with &%qualify_domain%&. Rejections
28793 of VRFY and EXPN commands are logged on the main and reject logs, and
28794 VRFY verification failures are logged on the main log for consistency with
28799 .section "The ETRN command" "SECTETRN"
28800 .cindex "ETRN" "processing"
28801 RFC 1985 describes an SMTP command called ETRN that is designed to
28802 overcome the security problems of the TURN command (which has fallen into
28803 disuse). When Exim receives an ETRN command on a TCP/IP connection, it runs
28804 the ACL specified by &%acl_smtp_etrn%& in order to decide whether the command
28805 should be accepted or not. If no ACL is defined, the command is rejected.
28807 The ETRN command is concerned with &"releasing"& messages that are awaiting
28808 delivery to certain hosts. As Exim does not organize its message queue by host,
28809 the only form of ETRN that is supported by default is the one where the
28810 text starts with the &"#"& prefix, in which case the remainder of the text is
28811 specific to the SMTP server. A valid ETRN command causes a run of Exim with
28812 the &%-R%& option to happen, with the remainder of the ETRN text as its
28813 argument. For example,
28821 which causes a delivery attempt on all messages with undelivered addresses
28822 containing the text &"brigadoon"&. When &%smtp_etrn_serialize%& is set (the
28823 default), Exim prevents the simultaneous execution of more than one queue run
28824 for the same argument string as a result of an ETRN command. This stops
28825 a misbehaving client from starting more than one queue runner at once.
28827 .cindex "hints database" "ETRN serialization"
28828 Exim implements the serialization by means of a hints database in which a
28829 record is written whenever a process is started by ETRN, and deleted when
28830 the process completes. However, Exim does not keep the SMTP session waiting for
28831 the ETRN process to complete. Once ETRN is accepted, the client is sent
28832 a &"success"& return code. Obviously there is scope for hints records to get
28833 left lying around if there is a system or program crash. To guard against this,
28834 Exim ignores any records that are more than six hours old.
28836 .cindex "&%smtp_etrn_command%&"
28837 For more control over what ETRN does, the &%smtp_etrn_command%& option can
28838 used. This specifies a command that is run whenever ETRN is received,
28839 whatever the form of its argument. For
28842 smtp_etrn_command = /etc/etrn_command $domain \
28843 $sender_host_address
28845 .cindex "&$domain$&"
28846 The string is split up into arguments which are independently expanded. The
28847 expansion variable &$domain$& is set to the argument of the ETRN command,
28848 and no syntax checking is done on the contents of this argument. Exim does not
28849 wait for the command to complete, so its status code is not checked. Exim runs
28850 under its own uid and gid when receiving incoming SMTP, so it is not possible
28851 for it to change them before running the command.
28855 .section "Incoming local SMTP"
28856 .cindex "SMTP" "local incoming"
28857 Some user agents use SMTP to pass messages to their local MTA using the
28858 standard input and output, as opposed to passing the envelope on the command
28859 line and writing the message to the standard input. This is supported by the
28860 &%-bs%& option. This form of SMTP is handled in the same way as incoming
28861 messages over TCP/IP (including the use of ACLs), except that the envelope
28862 sender given in a MAIL command is ignored unless the caller is trusted. In
28863 an ACL you can detect this form of SMTP input by testing for an empty host
28864 identification. It is common to have this as the first line in the ACL that
28865 runs for RCPT commands:
28869 This accepts SMTP messages from local processes without doing any other tests.
28873 .section "Outgoing batched SMTP" "SECTbatchSMTP"
28874 .cindex "SMTP" "batched outgoing"
28875 .cindex "batched SMTP output"
28876 Both the &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& transports can be used for handling
28877 batched SMTP. Each has an option called &%use_bsmtp%& which causes messages to
28878 be output in BSMTP format. No SMTP responses are possible for this form of
28879 delivery. All it is doing is using SMTP commands as a way of transmitting the
28880 envelope along with the message.
28882 The message is written to the file or pipe preceded by the SMTP commands
28883 MAIL and RCPT, and followed by a line containing a single dot. Lines in
28884 the message that start with a dot have an extra dot added. The SMTP command
28885 HELO is not normally used. If it is required, the &%message_prefix%& option
28886 can be used to specify it.
28888 Because &(appendfile)& and &(pipe)& are both local transports, they accept only
28889 one recipient address at a time by default. However, you can arrange for them
28890 to handle several addresses at once by setting the &%batch_max%& option. When
28891 this is done for BSMTP, messages may contain multiple RCPT commands. See
28892 chapter &<<CHAPbatching>>& for more details.
28895 When one or more addresses are routed to a BSMTP transport by a router that
28896 sets up a host list, the name of the first host on the list is available to the
28897 transport in the variable &$host$&. Here is an example of such a transport and
28902 driver = manualroute
28903 transport = smtp_appendfile
28904 route_list = domain.example batch.host.example
28908 driver = appendfile
28909 directory = /var/bsmtp/$host
28914 This causes messages addressed to &'domain.example'& to be written in BSMTP
28915 format to &_/var/bsmtp/batch.host.example_&, with only a single copy of each
28916 message (unless there are more than 1000 recipients).
28920 .section "Incoming batched SMTP" "SECTincomingbatchedSMTP"
28921 .cindex "SMTP" "batched incoming"
28922 .cindex "batched SMTP input"
28923 The &%-bS%& command line option causes Exim to accept one or more messages by
28924 reading SMTP on the standard input, but to generate no responses. If the caller
28925 is trusted, the senders in the MAIL commands are believed; otherwise the
28926 sender is always the caller of Exim. Unqualified senders and receivers are not
28927 rejected (there seems little point) but instead just get qualified. HELO
28928 and EHLO act as RSET; VRFY, EXPN, ETRN and HELP, act
28929 as NOOP; QUIT quits.
28931 No policy checking is done for BSMTP input. That is, no ACL is run at anytime.
28932 In this respect it is like non-SMTP local input.
28934 If an error is detected while reading a message, including a missing &"."& at
28935 the end, Exim gives up immediately. It writes details of the error to the
28936 standard output in a stylized way that the calling program should be able to
28937 make some use of automatically, for example:
28939 554 Unexpected end of file
28940 Transaction started in line 10
28941 Error detected in line 14
28943 It writes a more verbose version, for human consumption, to the standard error
28946 An error was detected while processing a file of BSMTP input.
28947 The error message was:
28949 501 '>' missing at end of address
28951 The SMTP transaction started in line 10.
28952 The error was detected in line 12.
28953 The SMTP command at fault was:
28955 rcpt to:<malformed@in.com.plete
28957 1 previous message was successfully processed.
28958 The rest of the batch was abandoned.
28960 The return code from Exim is zero only if there were no errors. It is 1 if some
28961 messages were accepted before an error was detected, and 2 if no messages were
28966 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
28967 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
28969 .chapter "Customizing bounce and warning messages" "CHAPemsgcust" &&&
28970 "Customizing messages"
28971 When a message fails to be delivered, or remains on the queue for more than a
28972 configured amount of time, Exim sends a message to the original sender, or
28973 to an alternative configured address. The text of these messages is built into
28974 the code of Exim, but it is possible to change it, either by adding a single
28975 string, or by replacing each of the paragraphs by text supplied in a file.
28977 The &'From:'& and &'To:'& header lines are automatically generated; you can
28978 cause a &'Reply-To:'& line to be added by setting the &%errors_reply_to%&
28979 option. Exim also adds the line
28981 Auto-Submitted: auto-generated
28983 to all warning and bounce messages,
28986 .section "Customizing bounce messages"
28987 .cindex "customizing" "bounce message"
28988 .cindex "bounce message" "customizing"
28989 If &%bounce_message_text%& is set, its contents are included in the default
28990 message immediately after &"This message was created automatically by mail
28991 delivery software."& The string is not expanded. It is not used if
28992 &%bounce_message_file%& is set.
28994 When &%bounce_message_file%& is set, it must point to a template file for
28995 constructing error messages. The file consists of a series of text items,
28996 separated by lines consisting of exactly four asterisks. If the file cannot be
28997 opened, default text is used and a message is written to the main and panic
28998 logs. If any text item in the file is empty, default text is used for that
29001 .cindex "&$bounce_recipient$&"
29002 .cindex "&$bounce_return_size_limit$&"
29003 Each item of text that is read from the file is expanded, and there are two
29004 expansion variables which can be of use here: &$bounce_recipient$& is set to
29005 the recipient of an error message while it is being created, and
29006 &$bounce_return_size_limit$& contains the value of the &%return_size_limit%&
29007 option, rounded to a whole number.
29009 The items must appear in the file in the following order:
29012 The first item is included in the headers, and should include at least a
29013 &'Subject:'& header. Exim does not check the syntax of these headers.
29015 The second item forms the start of the error message. After it, Exim lists the
29016 failing addresses with their error messages.
29018 The third item is used to introduce any text from pipe transports that is to be
29019 returned to the sender. It is omitted if there is no such text.
29021 The fourth item is used to introduce the copy of the message that is returned
29022 as part of the error report.
29024 The fifth item is added after the fourth one if the returned message is
29025 truncated because it is bigger than &%return_size_limit%&.
29027 The sixth item is added after the copy of the original message.
29030 The default state (&%bounce_message_file%& unset) is equivalent to the
29031 following file, in which the sixth item is empty. The &'Subject:'& and some
29032 other lines have been split in order to fit them on the page:
29034 Subject: Mail delivery failed
29035 ${if eq{$sender_address}{$bounce_recipient}
29036 {: returning message to sender}}
29038 This message was created automatically by mail delivery software.
29040 A message ${if eq{$sender_address}{$bounce_recipient}
29041 {that you sent }{sent by
29045 }}could not be delivered to all of its recipients.
29046 The following address(es) failed:
29048 The following text was generated during the delivery attempt(s):
29050 ------ This is a copy of the message, including all the headers.
29053 ------ The body of the message is $message_size characters long;
29055 ------ $bounce_return_size_limit or so are included here.
29058 .section "Customizing warning messages" "SECTcustwarn"
29059 .cindex "customizing" "warning message"
29060 .cindex "warning of delay" "customizing the message"
29061 The option &%warn_message_file%& can be pointed at a template file for use when
29062 warnings about message delays are created. In this case there are only three
29066 The first item is included in the headers, and should include at least a
29067 &'Subject:'& header. Exim does not check the syntax of these headers.
29069 The second item forms the start of the warning message. After it, Exim lists
29070 the delayed addresses.
29072 The third item then ends the message.
29075 The default state is equivalent to the following file, except that some lines
29076 have been split here, in order to fit them on the page:
29078 Subject: Warning: message $message_exim_id delayed
29079 $warn_message_delay
29081 This message was created automatically by mail delivery software.
29083 A message ${if eq{$sender_address}{$warn_message_recipients}
29084 {that you sent }{sent by
29088 }}has not been delivered to all of its recipients after
29089 more than $warn_message_delay on the queue on $primary_hostname.
29091 The message identifier is: $message_exim_id
29092 The subject of the message is: $h_subject
29093 The date of the message is: $h_date
29095 The following address(es) have not yet been delivered:
29097 No action is required on your part. Delivery attempts will
29098 continue for some time, and this warning may be repeated at
29099 intervals if the message remains undelivered. Eventually the
29100 mail delivery software will give up, and when that happens,
29101 the message will be returned to you.
29103 .cindex "&$warn_message_delay$&"
29104 .cindex "&$warn_message_recipients$&"
29105 However, in the default state the subject and date lines are omitted if no
29106 appropriate headers exist. During the expansion of this file,
29107 &$warn_message_delay$& is set to the delay time in one of the forms &"<&'n'&>
29108 minutes"& or &"<&'n'&> hours"&, and &$warn_message_recipients$& contains a list
29109 of recipients for the warning message. There may be more than one if there are
29110 multiple addresses with different &%errors_to%& settings on the routers that
29116 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29117 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29119 .chapter "Some common configuration settings" "CHAPcomconreq"
29120 This chapter discusses some configuration settings that seem to be fairly
29121 common. More examples and discussion can be found in the Exim book.
29125 .section "Sending mail to a smart host"
29126 .cindex "smart host" "example router"
29127 If you want to send all mail for non-local domains to a &"smart host"&, you
29128 should replace the default &(dnslookup)& router with a router which does the
29129 routing explicitly:
29131 send_to_smart_host:
29132 driver = manualroute
29133 route_list = !+local_domains smart.host.name
29134 transport = remote_smtp
29136 You can use the smart host's IP address instead of the name if you wish.
29137 If you are using Exim only to submit messages to a smart host, and not for
29138 receiving incoming messages, you can arrange for it to do the submission
29139 synchronously by setting the &%mua_wrapper%& option (see chapter
29140 &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>&).
29145 .section "Using Exim to handle mailing lists" "SECTmailinglists"
29146 .cindex "mailing lists"
29147 Exim can be used to run simple mailing lists, but for large and/or complicated
29148 requirements, the use of additional specialized mailing list software such as
29149 Majordomo or Mailman is recommended.
29151 The &(redirect)& router can be used to handle mailing lists where each list
29152 is maintained in a separate file, which can therefore be managed by an
29153 independent manager. The &%domains%& router option can be used to run these
29154 lists in a separate domain from normal mail. For example:
29158 domains = lists.example
29159 file = /usr/lists/$local_part
29162 errors_to = $local_part-request@lists.example
29165 This router is skipped for domains other than &'lists.example'&. For addresses
29166 in that domain, it looks for a file that matches the local part. If there is no
29167 such file, the router declines, but because &%no_more%& is set, no subsequent
29168 routers are tried, and so the whole delivery fails.
29170 The &%forbid_pipe%& and &%forbid_file%& options prevent a local part from being
29171 expanded into a file name or a pipe delivery, which is usually inappropriate in
29174 .cindex "&%errors_to%&"
29175 The &%errors_to%& option specifies that any delivery errors caused by addresses
29176 taken from a mailing list are to be sent to the given address rather than the
29177 original sender of the message. However, before acting on this, Exim verifies
29178 the error address, and ignores it if verification fails.
29180 For example, using the configuration above, mail sent to
29181 &'dicts@lists.example'& is passed on to those addresses contained in
29182 &_/usr/lists/dicts_&, with error reports directed to
29183 &'dicts-request@lists.example'&, provided that this address can be verified.
29184 There could be a file called &_/usr/lists/dicts-request_& containing
29185 the address(es) of this particular list's manager(s), but other approaches,
29186 such as setting up an earlier router (possibly using the &%local_part_prefix%&
29187 or &%local_part_suffix%& options) to handle addresses of the form
29188 &%owner-%&&'xxx'& or &%xxx-%&&'request'&, are also possible.
29192 .section "Syntax errors in mailing lists"
29193 .cindex "mailing lists" "syntax errors in"
29194 If an entry in redirection data contains a syntax error, Exim normally defers
29195 delivery of the original address. That means that a syntax error in a mailing
29196 list holds up all deliveries to the list. This may not be appropriate when a
29197 list is being maintained automatically from data supplied by users, and the
29198 addresses are not rigorously checked.
29200 If the &%skip_syntax_errors%& option is set, the &(redirect)& router just skips
29201 entries that fail to parse, noting the incident in the log. If in addition
29202 &%syntax_errors_to%& is set to a verifiable address, a message is sent to it
29203 whenever a broken address is skipped. It is usually appropriate to set
29204 &%syntax_errors_to%& to the same address as &%errors_to%&.
29208 .section "Re-expansion of mailing lists"
29209 .cindex "mailing lists" "re-expansion of"
29210 Exim remembers every individual address to which a message has been delivered,
29211 in order to avoid duplication, but it normally stores only the original
29212 recipient addresses with a message. If all the deliveries to a mailing list
29213 cannot be done at the first attempt, the mailing list is re-expanded when the
29214 delivery is next tried. This means that alterations to the list are taken into
29215 account at each delivery attempt, so addresses that have been added to
29216 the list since the message arrived will therefore receive a copy of the
29217 message, even though it pre-dates their subscription.
29219 If this behaviour is felt to be undesirable, the &%one_time%& option can be set
29220 on the &(redirect)& router. If this is done, any addresses generated by the
29221 router that fail to deliver at the first attempt are added to the message as
29222 &"top level"& addresses, and the parent address that generated them is marked
29223 &"delivered"&. Thus, expansion of the mailing list does not happen again at the
29224 subsequent delivery attempts. The disadvantage of this is that if any of the
29225 failing addresses are incorrect, correcting them in the file has no effect on
29226 pre-existing messages.
29228 The original top-level address is remembered with each of the generated
29229 addresses, and is output in any log messages. However, any intermediate parent
29230 addresses are not recorded. This makes a difference to the log only if the
29231 &%all_parents%& selector is set, but for mailing lists there is normally only
29232 one level of expansion anyway.
29236 .section "Closed mailing lists"
29237 .cindex "mailing lists" "closed"
29238 The examples so far have assumed open mailing lists, to which anybody may
29239 send mail. It is also possible to set up closed lists, where mail is accepted
29240 from specified senders only. This is done by making use of the generic
29241 &%senders%& option to restrict the router that handles the list.
29243 The following example uses the same file as a list of recipients and as a list
29244 of permitted senders. It requires three routers:
29248 domains = lists.example
29249 local_part_suffix = -request
29250 file = /usr/lists/$local_part$local_part_suffix
29255 domains = lists.example
29256 senders = ${if exists {/usr/lists/$local_part}\
29257 {lsearch;/usr/lists/$local_part}{*}}
29258 file = /usr/lists/$local_part
29261 errors_to = $local_part-request@lists.example
29266 domains = lists.example
29268 data = :fail: $local_part@lists.example is a closed mailing list
29270 All three routers have the same &%domains%& setting, so for any other domains,
29271 they are all skipped. The first router runs only if the local part ends in
29272 &%-request%&. It handles messages to the list manager(s) by means of an open
29275 The second router runs only if the &%senders%& precondition is satisfied. It
29276 checks for the existence of a list that corresponds to the local part, and then
29277 checks that the sender is on the list by means of a linear search. It is
29278 necessary to check for the existence of the file before trying to search it,
29279 because otherwise Exim thinks there is a configuration error. If the file does
29280 not exist, the expansion of &%senders%& is *, which matches all senders. This
29281 means that the router runs, but because there is no list, declines, and
29282 &%no_more%& ensures that no further routers are run. The address fails with an
29283 &"unrouteable address"& error.
29285 The third router runs only if the second router is skipped, which happens when
29286 a mailing list exists, but the sender is not on it. This router forcibly fails
29287 the address, giving a suitable error message.
29292 .section "Virtual domains" "SECTvirtualdomains"
29293 .cindex "virtual domains"
29294 .cindex "domain" "virtual"
29295 The phrase &'virtual domain'& is unfortunately used with two rather different
29299 A domain for which there are no real mailboxes; all valid local parts are
29300 aliases for other email addresses. Common examples are organizational
29301 top-level domains and &"vanity"& domains.
29303 One of a number of independent domains that are all handled by the same host,
29304 with mailboxes on that host, but where the mailbox owners do not necessarily
29305 have login accounts on that host.
29308 The first usage is probably more common, and does seem more &"virtual"& than
29309 the second. This kind of domain can be handled in Exim with a straightforward
29310 aliasing router. One approach is to create a separate alias file for each
29311 virtual domain. Exim can test for the existence of the alias file to determine
29312 whether the domain exists. The &(dsearch)& lookup type is useful here, leading
29313 to a router of this form:
29317 domains = dsearch;/etc/mail/virtual
29318 data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/mail/virtual/$domain}}
29321 The &%domains%& option specifies that the router is to be skipped, unless there
29322 is a file in the &_/etc/mail/virtual_& directory whose name is the same as the
29323 domain that is being processed. When the router runs, it looks up the local
29324 part in the file to find a new address (or list of addresses). The &%no_more%&
29325 setting ensures that if the lookup fails (leading to &%data%& being an empty
29326 string), Exim gives up on the address without trying any subsequent routers.
29328 This one router can handle all the virtual domains because the alias file names
29329 follow a fixed pattern. Permissions can be arranged so that appropriate people
29330 can edit the different alias files. A successful aliasing operation results in
29331 a new envelope recipient address, which is then routed from scratch.
29333 The other kind of &"virtual"& domain can also be handled in a straightforward
29334 way. One approach is to create a file for each domain containing a list of
29335 valid local parts, and use it in a router like this:
29339 domains = dsearch;/etc/mail/domains
29340 local_parts = lsearch;/etc/mail/domains/$domain
29341 transport = my_mailboxes
29343 The address is accepted if there is a file for the domain, and the local part
29344 can be found in the file. The &%domains%& option is used to check for the
29345 file's existence because &%domains%& is tested before the &%local_parts%&
29346 option (see section &<<SECTrouprecon>>&). You cannot use &%require_files%&,
29347 because that option is tested after &%local_parts%&. The transport is as
29351 driver = appendfile
29352 file = /var/mail/$domain/$local_part
29355 This uses a directory of mailboxes for each domain. The &%user%& setting is
29356 required, to specify which uid is to be used for writing to the mailboxes.
29358 The configuration shown here is just one example of how you might support this
29359 requirement. There are many other ways this kind of configuration can be set
29360 up, for example, by using a database instead of separate files to hold all the
29361 information about the domains.
29365 .section "Multiple user mailboxes" "SECTmulbox"
29366 .cindex "multiple mailboxes"
29367 .cindex "mailbox" "multiple"
29368 .cindex "local part" "prefix"
29369 .cindex "local part" "suffix"
29370 Heavy email users often want to operate with multiple mailboxes, into which
29371 incoming mail is automatically sorted. A popular way of handling this is to
29372 allow users to use multiple sender addresses, so that replies can easily be
29373 identified. Users are permitted to add prefixes or suffixes to their local
29374 parts for this purpose. The wildcard facility of the generic router options
29375 &%local_part_prefix%& and &%local_part_suffix%& can be used for this. For
29376 example, consider this router:
29381 file = $home/.forward
29382 local_part_suffix = -*
29383 local_part_suffix_optional
29386 .cindex "&$local_part_suffix$&"
29387 It runs a user's &_.forward_& file for all local parts of the form
29388 &'username-*'&. Within the filter file the user can distinguish different
29389 cases by testing the variable &$local_part_suffix$&. For example:
29391 if $local_part_suffix contains -special then
29392 save /home/$local_part/Mail/special
29395 If the filter file does not exist, or does not deal with such addresses, they
29396 fall through to subsequent routers, and, assuming no subsequent use of the
29397 &%local_part_suffix%& option is made, they presumably fail. Thus, users have
29398 control over which suffixes are valid.
29400 Alternatively, a suffix can be used to trigger the use of a different
29401 &_.forward_& file &-- which is the way a similar facility is implemented in
29407 file = $home/.forward$local_part_suffix
29408 local_part_suffix = -*
29409 local_part_suffix_optional
29412 If there is no suffix, &_.forward_& is used; if the suffix is &'-special'&, for
29413 example, &_.forward-special_& is used. Once again, if the appropriate file
29414 does not exist, or does not deal with the address, it is passed on to
29415 subsequent routers, which could, if required, look for an unqualified
29416 &_.forward_& file to use as a default.
29420 .section "Simplified vacation processing"
29421 .cindex "vacation processing"
29422 The traditional way of running the &'vacation'& program is for a user to set up
29423 a pipe command in a &_.forward_& file
29424 (see section &<<SECTspecitredli>>& for syntax details).
29425 This is prone to error by inexperienced users. There are two features of Exim
29426 that can be used to make this process simpler for users:
29429 A local part prefix such as &"vacation-"& can be specified on a router which
29430 can cause the message to be delivered directly to the &'vacation'& program, or
29431 alternatively can use Exim's &(autoreply)& transport. The contents of a user's
29432 &_.forward_& file are then much simpler. For example:
29434 spqr, vacation-spqr
29437 The &%require_files%& generic router option can be used to trigger a
29438 vacation delivery by checking for the existence of a certain file in the
29439 user's home directory. The &%unseen%& generic option should also be used, to
29440 ensure that the original delivery also proceeds. In this case, all the user has
29441 to do is to create a file called, say, &_.vacation_&, containing a vacation
29445 Another advantage of both these methods is that they both work even when the
29446 use of arbitrary pipes by users is locked out.
29450 .section "Taking copies of mail"
29451 .cindex "message" "copying every"
29452 Some installations have policies that require archive copies of all messages to
29453 be made. A single copy of each message can easily be taken by an appropriate
29454 command in a system filter, which could, for example, use a different file for
29455 each day's messages.
29457 There is also a shadow transport mechanism that can be used to take copies of
29458 messages that are successfully delivered by local transports, one copy per
29459 delivery. This could be used, &'inter alia'&, to implement automatic
29460 notification of delivery by sites that insist on doing such things.
29464 .section "Intermittently connected hosts"
29465 .cindex "intermittently connected hosts"
29466 It has become quite common (because it is cheaper) for hosts to connect to the
29467 Internet periodically rather than remain connected all the time. The normal
29468 arrangement is that mail for such hosts accumulates on a system that is
29469 permanently connected.
29471 Exim was designed for use on permanently connected hosts, and so it is not
29472 particularly well-suited to use in an intermittently connected environment.
29473 Nevertheless there are some features that can be used.
29476 .section "Exim on the upstream server host"
29477 It is tempting to arrange for incoming mail for the intermittently connected
29478 host to remain on Exim's queue until the client connects. However, this
29479 approach does not scale very well. Two different kinds of waiting message are
29480 being mixed up in the same queue &-- those that cannot be delivered because of
29481 some temporary problem, and those that are waiting for their destination host
29482 to connect. This makes it hard to manage the queue, as well as wasting
29483 resources, because each queue runner scans the entire queue.
29485 A better approach is to separate off those messages that are waiting for an
29486 intermittently connected host. This can be done by delivering these messages
29487 into local files in batch SMTP, &"mailstore"&, or other envelope-preserving
29488 format, from where they are transmitted by other software when their
29489 destination connects. This makes it easy to collect all the mail for one host
29490 in a single directory, and to apply local timeout rules on a per-message basis
29493 On a very small scale, leaving the mail on Exim's queue can be made to work. If
29494 you are doing this, you should configure Exim with a long retry period for the
29495 intermittent host. For example:
29497 cheshire.wonderland.fict.example * F,5d,24h
29499 This stops a lot of failed delivery attempts from occurring, but Exim remembers
29500 which messages it has queued up for that host. Once the intermittent host comes
29501 online, forcing delivery of one message (either by using the &%-M%& or &%-R%&
29502 options, or by using the ETRN SMTP command (see section &<<SECTETRN>>&)
29503 causes all the queued up messages to be delivered, often down a single SMTP
29504 connection. While the host remains connected, any new messages get delivered
29507 If the connecting hosts do not have fixed IP addresses, that is, if a host is
29508 issued with a different IP address each time it connects, Exim's retry
29509 mechanisms on the holding host get confused, because the IP address is normally
29510 used as part of the key string for holding retry information. This can be
29511 avoided by unsetting &%retry_include_ip_address%& on the &(smtp)& transport.
29512 Since this has disadvantages for permanently connected hosts, it is best to
29513 arrange a separate transport for the intermittently connected ones.
29517 .section "Exim on the intermittently connected client host"
29518 The value of &%smtp_accept_queue_per_connection%& should probably be
29519 increased, or even set to zero (that is, disabled) on the intermittently
29520 connected host, so that all incoming messages down a single connection get
29521 delivered immediately.
29523 .cindex "SMTP" "passed connection"
29524 .cindex "SMTP" "multiple deliveries"
29525 .cindex "multiple SMTP deliveries"
29526 Mail waiting to be sent from an intermittently connected host will probably
29527 not have been routed, because without a connection DNS lookups are not
29528 possible. This means that if a normal queue run is done at connection time,
29529 each message is likely to be sent in a separate SMTP session. This can be
29530 avoided by starting the queue run with a command line option beginning with
29531 &%-qq%& instead of &%-q%&. In this case, the queue is scanned twice. In the
29532 first pass, routing is done but no deliveries take place. The second pass is a
29533 normal queue run; since all the messages have been previously routed, those
29534 destined for the same host are likely to get sent as multiple deliveries in a
29535 single SMTP connection.
29539 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29540 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29542 .chapter "Using Exim as a non-queueing client" "CHAPnonqueueing" &&&
29543 "Exim as a non-queueing client"
29544 .cindex "client" "non-queueing"
29545 .cindex "smart host" "queueing; suppressing"
29546 On a personal computer, it is a common requirement for all
29547 email to be sent to a &"smart host"&. There are plenty of MUAs that can be
29548 configured to operate that way, for all the popular operating systems.
29549 However, there are some MUAs for Unix-like systems that cannot be so
29550 configured: they submit messages using the command line interface of
29551 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&. Furthermore, utility programs such as &'cron'& submit
29554 If the personal computer runs continuously, there is no problem, because it can
29555 run a conventional MTA that handles delivery to the smart host, and deal with
29556 any delays via its queueing mechanism. However, if the computer does not run
29557 continuously or runs different operating systems at different times, queueing
29558 email is not desirable.
29560 There is therefore a requirement for something that can provide the
29561 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_& interface but deliver messages to a smart host without
29562 any queueing or retrying facilities. Furthermore, the delivery to the smart
29563 host should be synchronous, so that if it fails, the sending MUA is immediately
29564 informed. In other words, we want something that extends an MUA that submits
29565 to a local MTA via the command line so that it behaves like one that submits
29566 to a remote smart host using TCP/SMTP.
29568 There are a number of applications (for example, there is one called &'ssmtp'&)
29569 that do this job. However, people have found them to be lacking in various
29570 ways. For instance, you might want to allow aliasing and forwarding to be done
29571 before sending a message to the smart host.
29573 Exim already had the necessary infrastructure for doing this job. Just a few
29574 tweaks were needed to make it behave as required, though it is somewhat of an
29575 overkill to use a fully-featured MTA for this purpose.
29577 .cindex "&%mua_wrapper%&"
29578 There is a Boolean global option called &%mua_wrapper%&, defaulting false.
29579 Setting &%mua_wrapper%& true causes Exim to run in a special mode where it
29580 assumes that it is being used to &"wrap"& a command-line MUA in the manner
29581 just described. As well as setting &%mua_wrapper%&, you also need to provide a
29582 compatible router and transport configuration. Typically there will be just one
29583 router and one transport, sending everything to a smart host.
29585 When run in MUA wrapping mode, the behaviour of Exim changes in the
29589 A daemon cannot be run, nor will Exim accept incoming messages from &'inetd'&.
29590 In other words, the only way to submit messages is via the command line.
29592 Each message is synchonously delivered as soon as it is received (&%-odi%& is
29593 assumed). All queueing options (&%queue_only%&, &%queue_smtp_domains%&,
29594 &%control%& in an ACL, etc.) are quietly ignored. The Exim reception process
29595 does not finish until the delivery attempt is complete. If the delivery is
29596 successful, a zero return code is given.
29598 Address redirection is permitted, but the final routing for all addresses must
29599 be to the same remote transport, and to the same list of hosts. Furthermore,
29600 the return address (envelope sender) must be the same for all recipients, as
29601 must any added or deleted header lines. In other words, it must be possible to
29602 deliver the message in a single SMTP transaction, however many recipients there
29605 If these conditions are not met, or if routing any address results in a
29606 failure or defer status, or if Exim is unable to deliver all the recipients
29607 successfully to one of the smart hosts, delivery of the entire message fails.
29609 Because no queueing is allowed, all failures are treated as permanent; there
29610 is no distinction between 4&'xx'& and 5&'xx'& SMTP response codes from the
29611 smart host. Furthermore, because only a single yes/no response can be given to
29612 the caller, it is not possible to deliver to some recipients and not others. If
29613 there is an error (temporary or permanent) for any recipient, all are failed.
29615 If more than one smart host is listed, Exim will try another host after a
29616 connection failure or a timeout, in the normal way. However, if this kind of
29617 failure happens for all the hosts, the delivery fails.
29619 When delivery fails, an error message is written to the standard error stream
29620 (as well as to Exim's log), and Exim exits to the caller with a return code
29621 value 1. The message is expunged from Exim's spool files. No bounce messages
29622 are ever generated.
29624 No retry data is maintained, and any retry rules are ignored.
29626 A number of Exim options are overridden: &%deliver_drop_privilege%& is forced
29627 true, &%max_rcpt%& in the smtp transport is forced to &"unlimited"&,
29628 &%remote_max_parallel%& is forced to one, and fallback hosts are ignored.
29631 The overall effect is that Exim makes a single synchronous attempt to deliver
29632 the message, failing if there is any kind of problem. Because no local
29633 deliveries are done and no daemon can be run, Exim does not need root
29634 privilege. It should be possible to run it setuid to &'exim'& instead of setuid
29635 to &'root'&. See section &<<SECTrunexiwitpri>>& for a general discussion about
29636 the advantages and disadvantages of running without root privilege.
29641 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29642 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
29644 .chapter "Log files" "CHAPlog"
29645 .cindex "log" "types of"
29646 .cindex "log" "general description"
29647 Exim writes three different logs, referred to as the main log, the reject log,
29652 The main log records the arrival of each message and each delivery in a single
29653 line in each case. The format is as compact as possible, in an attempt to keep
29654 down the size of log files. Two-character flag sequences make it easy to pick
29655 out these lines. A number of other events are recorded in the main log. Some of
29656 them are optional, in which case the &%log_selector%& option controls whether
29657 they are included or not. A Perl script called &'eximstats'&, which does simple
29658 analysis of main log files, is provided in the Exim distribution (see section
29659 &<<SECTmailstat>>&).
29661 .cindex "reject log"
29662 The reject log records information from messages that are rejected as a result
29663 of a configuration option (that is, for policy reasons).
29664 The first line of each rejection is a copy of the line that is also written to
29665 the main log. Then, if the message's header has been read at the time the log
29666 is written, its contents are written to this log. Only the original header
29667 lines are available; header lines added by ACLs are not logged. You can use the
29668 reject log to check that your policy controls are working correctly; on a busy
29669 host this may be easier than scanning the main log for rejection messages. You
29670 can suppress the writing of the reject log by setting &%write_rejectlog%&
29673 .cindex "panic log"
29674 .cindex "system log"
29675 When certain serious errors occur, Exim writes entries to its panic log. If the
29676 error is sufficiently disastrous, Exim bombs out afterwards. Panic log entries
29677 are usually written to the main log as well, but can get lost amid the mass of
29678 other entries. The panic log should be empty under normal circumstances. It is
29679 therefore a good idea to check it (or to have a &'cron'& script check it)
29680 regularly, in order to become aware of any problems. When Exim cannot open its
29681 panic log, it tries as a last resort to write to the system log (syslog). This
29682 is opened with LOG_PID+LOG_CONS and the facility code of LOG_MAIL. The
29683 message itself is written at priority LOG_CRIT.
29686 Every log line starts with a timestamp, in the format shown in the following
29687 example. Note that many of the examples shown in this chapter are line-wrapped.
29688 In the log file, this would be all on one line:
29690 2001-09-16 16:09:47 SMTP connection from [127.0.0.1] closed
29693 By default, the timestamps are in the local timezone. There are two
29694 ways of changing this:
29697 You can set the &%timezone%& option to a different time zone; in particular, if
29702 the timestamps will be in UTC (aka GMT).
29704 If you set &%log_timezone%& true, the time zone is added to the timestamp, for
29707 2003-04-25 11:17:07 +0100 Start queue run: pid=12762
29714 .section "Where the logs are written" "SECTwhelogwri"
29715 .cindex "log" "destination"
29716 .cindex "log" "to file"
29717 .cindex "log" "to syslog"
29719 The logs may be written to local files, or to syslog, or both. However, it
29720 should be noted that many syslog implementations use UDP as a transport, and
29721 are therefore unreliable in the sense that messages are not guaranteed to
29722 arrive at the loghost, nor is the ordering of messages necessarily maintained.
29723 It has also been reported that on large log files (tens of megabytes) you may
29724 need to tweak syslog to prevent it syncing the file with each write &-- on
29725 Linux this has been seen to make syslog take 90% plus of CPU time.
29727 The destination for Exim's logs is configured by setting LOG_FILE_PATH in
29728 &_Local/Makefile_& or by setting &%log_file_path%& in the run time
29729 configuration. This latter string is expanded, so it can contain, for example,
29730 references to the host name:
29732 log_file_path = /var/log/$primary_hostname/exim_%slog
29734 It is generally advisable, however, to set the string in &_Local/Makefile_&
29735 rather than at run time, because then the setting is available right from the
29736 start of Exim's execution. Otherwise, if there's something it wants to log
29737 before it has read the configuration file (for example, an error in the
29738 configuration file) it will not use the path you want, and may not be able to
29741 The value of LOG_FILE_PATH or &%log_file_path%& is a colon-separated
29742 list, currently limited to at most two items. This is one option where the
29743 facility for changing a list separator may not be used. The list must always be
29744 colon-separated. If an item in the list is &"syslog"& then syslog is used;
29745 otherwise the item must either be an absolute path, containing &`%s`& at the
29746 point where &"main"&, &"reject"&, or &"panic"& is to be inserted, or be empty,
29747 implying the use of a default path.
29749 When Exim encounters an empty item in the list, it searches the list defined by
29750 LOG_FILE_PATH, and uses the first item it finds that is neither empty nor
29751 &"syslog"&. This means that an empty item in &%log_file_path%& can be used to
29752 mean &"use the path specified at build time"&. It no such item exists, log
29753 files are written in the &_log_& subdirectory of the spool directory. This is
29754 equivalent to the setting:
29756 log_file_path = $spool_directory/log/%slog
29758 If you do not specify anything at build time or run time, that is where the
29761 A log file path may also contain &`%D`& if datestamped log file names are in
29762 use &-- see section &<<SECTdatlogfil>>& below.
29764 Here are some examples of possible settings:
29766 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=syslog `& syslog only
29767 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=:syslog `& syslog and default path
29768 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=syslog : /usr/log/exim_%s `& syslog and specified path
29769 &`LOG_FILE_PATH=/usr/log/exim_%s `& specified path only
29771 If there are more than two paths in the list, the first is used and a panic
29776 .section "Logging to local files that are periodically &""cycled""&"
29777 .cindex "log" "cycling local files"
29778 .cindex "cycling logs"
29779 .cindex "&'exicyclog'&"
29780 .cindex "log" "local files; writing to"
29781 Some operating systems provide centralized and standardised methods for cycling
29782 log files. For those that do not, a utility script called &'exicyclog'& is
29783 provided (see section &<<SECTcyclogfil>>&). This renames and compresses the
29784 main and reject logs each time it is called. The maximum number of old logs to
29785 keep can be set. It is suggested this script is run as a daily &'cron'& job.
29787 An Exim delivery process opens the main log when it first needs to write to it,
29788 and it keeps the file open in case subsequent entries are required &-- for
29789 example, if a number of different deliveries are being done for the same
29790 message. However, remote SMTP deliveries can take a long time, and this means
29791 that the file may be kept open long after it is renamed if &'exicyclog'& or
29792 something similar is being used to rename log files on a regular basis. To
29793 ensure that a switch of log files is noticed as soon as possible, Exim calls
29794 &[stat()]& on the main log's name before reusing an open file, and if the file
29795 does not exist, or its inode has changed, the old file is closed and Exim
29796 tries to open the main log from scratch. Thus, an old log file may remain open
29797 for quite some time, but no Exim processes should write to it once it has been
29802 .section "Datestamped log files" "SECTdatlogfil"
29803 .cindex "log" "datestamped files"
29804 Instead of cycling the main and reject log files by renaming them
29805 periodically, some sites like to use files whose names contain a datestamp,
29806 for example, &_mainlog-20031225_&. The datestamp is in the form &_yyyymmdd_&.
29807 Exim has support for this way of working. It is enabled by setting the
29808 &%log_file_path%& option to a path that includes &`%D`& at the point where the
29809 datestamp is required. For example:
29811 log_file_path = /var/spool/exim/log/%slog-%D
29812 log_file_path = /var/log/exim-%s-%D.log
29813 log_file_path = /var/spool/exim/log/%D-%slog
29815 As before, &`%s`& is replaced by &"main"& or &"reject"&; the following are
29816 examples of names generated by the above examples:
29818 /var/spool/exim/log/mainlog-20021225
29819 /var/log/exim-reject-20021225.log
29820 /var/spool/exim/log/20021225-mainlog
29822 When this form of log file is specified, Exim automatically switches to new
29823 files at midnight. It does not make any attempt to compress old logs; you
29824 will need to write your own script if you require this. You should not
29825 run &'exicyclog'& with this form of logging.
29827 The location of the panic log is also determined by &%log_file_path%&, but it
29828 is not datestamped, because rotation of the panic log does not make sense.
29829 When generating the name of the panic log, &`%D`& is removed from the string.
29830 In addition, if it immediately follows a slash, a following non-alphanumeric
29831 character is removed; otherwise a preceding non-alphanumeric character is
29832 removed. Thus, the three examples above would give these panic log names:
29834 /var/spool/exim/log/paniclog
29835 /var/log/exim-panic.log
29836 /var/spool/exim/log/paniclog
29840 .section "Logging to syslog"
29841 .cindex "log" "syslog; writing to"
29842 The use of syslog does not change what Exim logs or the format of its messages,
29843 except in one respect. If &%syslog_timestamp%& is set false, the timestamps on
29844 Exim's log lines are omitted when these lines are sent to syslog. Apart from
29845 that, the same strings are written to syslog as to log files. The syslog
29846 &"facility"& is set to LOG_MAIL, and the program name to &"exim"&
29847 by default, but you can change these by setting the &%syslog_facility%& and
29848 &%syslog_processname%& options, respectively. If Exim was compiled with
29849 SYSLOG_LOG_PID set in &_Local/Makefile_& (this is the default in
29850 &_src/EDITME_&), then, on systems that permit it (all except ULTRIX), the
29851 LOG_PID flag is set so that the &[syslog()]& call adds the pid as well as
29852 the time and host name to each line.
29853 The three log streams are mapped onto syslog priorities as follows:
29856 &'mainlog'& is mapped to LOG_INFO
29858 &'rejectlog'& is mapped to LOG_NOTICE
29860 &'paniclog'& is mapped to LOG_ALERT
29863 Many log lines are written to both &'mainlog'& and &'rejectlog'&, and some are
29864 written to both &'mainlog'& and &'paniclog'&, so there will be duplicates if
29865 these are routed by syslog to the same place. You can suppress this duplication
29866 by setting &%syslog_duplication%& false.
29868 Exim's log lines can sometimes be very long, and some of its &'rejectlog'&
29869 entries contain multiple lines when headers are included. To cope with both
29870 these cases, entries written to syslog are split into separate &[syslog()]&
29871 calls at each internal newline, and also after a maximum of
29872 870 data characters. (This allows for a total syslog line length of 1024, when
29873 additions such as timestamps are added.) If you are running a syslog
29874 replacement that can handle lines longer than the 1024 characters allowed by
29875 RFC 3164, you should set
29877 SYSLOG_LONG_LINES=yes
29879 in &_Local/Makefile_& before building Exim. That stops Exim from splitting long
29880 lines, but it still splits at internal newlines in &'reject'& log entries.
29882 To make it easy to re-assemble split lines later, each component of a split
29883 entry starts with a string of the form [<&'n'&>/<&'m'&>] or [<&'n'&>\<&'m'&>]
29884 where <&'n'&> is the component number and <&'m'&> is the total number of
29885 components in the entry. The / delimiter is used when the line was split
29886 because it was too long; if it was split because of an internal newline, the \
29887 delimiter is used. For example, supposing the length limit to be 50 instead of
29888 870, the following would be the result of a typical rejection message to
29889 &'mainlog'& (LOG_INFO), each line in addition being preceded by the time, host
29890 name, and pid as added by syslog:
29892 [1/5] 2002-09-16 16:09:43 16RdAL-0006pc-00 rejected from
29893 [2/5] [127.0.0.1] (ph10): syntax error in 'From' header
29894 [3/5] when scanning for sender: missing or malformed lo
29895 [4/5] cal part in "<>" (envelope sender is <ph10@cam.exa
29898 The same error might cause the following lines to be written to &"rejectlog"&
29901 [1/18] 2002-09-16 16:09:43 16RdAL-0006pc-00 rejected fro
29902 [2/18] m [127.0.0.1] (ph10): syntax error in 'From' head
29903 [3/18] er when scanning for sender: missing or malformed
29904 [4/18] local part in "<>" (envelope sender is <ph10@cam
29906 [6\18] Recipients: ph10@some.domain.cam.example
29907 [7\18] P Received: from [127.0.0.1] (ident=ph10)
29908 [8\18] by xxxxx.cam.example with smtp (Exim 4.00)
29909 [9\18] id 16RdAL-0006pc-00
29910 [10/18] for ph10@cam.example; Mon, 16 Sep 2002 16:
29911 [11\18] 09:43 +0100
29913 [13\18] Subject: this is a test header
29914 [18\18] X-something: this is another header
29915 [15/18] I Message-Id: <E16RdAL-0006pc-00@xxxxx.cam.examp
29918 [18/18] Date: Mon, 16 Sep 2002 16:09:43 +0100
29920 Log lines that are neither too long nor contain newlines are written to syslog
29921 without modification.
29923 If only syslog is being used, the Exim monitor is unable to provide a log tail
29924 display, unless syslog is routing &'mainlog'& to a file on the local host and
29925 the environment variable EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH is set to tell the monitor
29930 .section "Log line flags"
29931 One line is written to the main log for each message received, and for each
29932 successful, unsuccessful, and delayed delivery. These lines can readily be
29933 picked out by the distinctive two-character flags that immediately follow the
29934 timestamp. The flags are:
29936 &`<=`& message arrival
29937 &`=>`& normal message delivery
29938 &`->`& additional address in same delivery
29939 &`*>`& delivery suppressed by &%-N%&
29940 &`**`& delivery failed; address bounced
29941 &`==`& delivery deferred; temporary problem
29945 .section "Logging message reception"
29946 .cindex "log" "reception line"
29947 The format of the single-line entry in the main log that is written for every
29948 message received is shown in the basic example below, which is split over
29949 several lines in order to fit it on the page:
29951 2002-10-31 08:57:53 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 <= kryten@dwarf.fict.example
29952 H=mailer.fict.example [192.168.123.123] U=exim
29953 P=smtp S=5678 id=<incoming message id>
29955 The address immediately following &"<="& is the envelope sender address. A
29956 bounce message is shown with the sender address &"<>"&, and if it is locally
29957 generated, this is followed by an item of the form
29961 which is a reference to the message that caused the bounce to be sent.
29965 For messages from other hosts, the H and U fields identify the remote host and
29966 record the RFC 1413 identity of the user that sent the message, if one was
29967 received. The number given in square brackets is the IP address of the sending
29968 host. If there is a single, unparenthesized host name in the H field, as
29969 above, it has been verified to correspond to the IP address (see the
29970 &%host_lookup%& option). If the name is in parentheses, it was the name quoted
29971 by the remote host in the SMTP HELO or EHLO command, and has not been
29972 verified. If verification yields a different name to that given for HELO or
29973 EHLO, the verified name appears first, followed by the HELO or EHLO
29974 name in parentheses.
29976 Misconfigured hosts (and mail forgers) sometimes put an IP address, with or
29977 without brackets, in the HELO or EHLO command, leading to entries in
29978 the log containing text like these examples:
29980 H=(10.21.32.43) [192.168.8.34]
29981 H=([10.21.32.43]) [192.168.8.34]
29983 This can be confusing. Only the final address in square brackets can be relied
29986 For locally generated messages (that is, messages not received over TCP/IP),
29987 the H field is omitted, and the U field contains the login name of the caller
29990 .cindex "authentication" "logging"
29991 .cindex "AUTH" "logging"
29993 For all messages, the P field specifies the protocol used to receive the
29994 message. This is the value that is stored in &$received_protocol$&. In the case
29995 of incoming SMTP messages, the value indicates whether or not any SMTP
29996 extensions (ESMTP), encryption, or authentication were used. If the SMTP
29997 session was encrypted, there is an additional X field that records the cipher
29998 suite that was used.
30000 The protocol is set to &"esmptsa"& or &"esmtpa"& for messages received from
30001 hosts that have authenticated themselves using the SMTP AUTH command. The first
30002 value is used when the SMTP connection was encrypted (&"secure"&). In this case
30003 there is an additional item A= followed by the name of the authenticator that
30004 was used. If an authenticated identification was set up by the authenticator's
30005 &%server_set_id%& option, this is logged too, separated by a colon from the
30006 authenticator name.
30009 .cindex "size" "of message"
30010 The id field records the existing message id, if present. The size of the
30011 received message is given by the S field. When the message is delivered,
30012 headers may be removed or added, so that the size of delivered copies of the
30013 message may not correspond with this value (and indeed may be different to each
30016 The &%log_selector%& option can be used to request the logging of additional
30017 data when a message is received. See section &<<SECTlogselector>>& below.
30021 .section "Logging deliveries"
30022 .cindex "log" "delivery line"
30023 The format of the single-line entry in the main log that is written for every
30024 delivery is shown in one of the examples below, for local and remote
30025 deliveries, respectively. Each example has been split into two lines in order
30026 to fit it on the page:
30028 2002-10-31 08:59:13 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 => marv
30029 <marv@hitch.fict.example> R=localuser T=local_delivery
30030 2002-10-31 09:00:10 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 =>
30031 monk@holistic.fict.example R=dnslookup T=remote_smtp
30032 H=holistic.fict.example [192.168.234.234]
30034 For ordinary local deliveries, the original address is given in angle brackets
30035 after the final delivery address, which might be a pipe or a file. If
30036 intermediate address(es) exist between the original and the final address, the
30037 last of these is given in parentheses after the final address. The R and T
30038 fields record the router and transport that were used to process the address.
30040 If a shadow transport was run after a successful local delivery, the log line
30041 for the successful delivery has an item added on the end, of the form
30043 &`ST=<`&&'shadow transport name'&&`>`&
30045 If the shadow transport did not succeed, the error message is put in
30046 parentheses afterwards.
30048 .cindex "asterisk" "after IP address"
30049 When more than one address is included in a single delivery (for example, two
30050 SMTP RCPT commands in one transaction) the second and subsequent addresses are
30051 flagged with &`->`& instead of &`=>`&. When two or more messages are delivered
30052 down a single SMTP connection, an asterisk follows the IP address in the log
30053 lines for the second and subsequent messages.
30055 The generation of a reply message by a filter file gets logged as a
30056 &"delivery"& to the addressee, preceded by &">"&.
30058 The &%log_selector%& option can be used to request the logging of additional
30059 data when a message is delivered. See section &<<SECTlogselector>>& below.
30062 .section "Discarded deliveries"
30063 .cindex "discarded messages"
30064 .cindex "message" "discarded"
30065 .cindex "delivery" "discarded; logging"
30066 When a message is discarded as a result of the command &"seen finish"& being
30067 obeyed in a filter file which generates no deliveries, a log entry of the form
30069 2002-12-10 00:50:49 16auJc-0001UB-00 => discarded
30070 <low.club@bridge.example> R=userforward
30072 is written, to record why no deliveries are logged. When a message is discarded
30073 because it is aliased to &":blackhole:"& the log line is like this:
30075 1999-03-02 09:44:33 10HmaX-0005vi-00 => :blackhole:
30076 <hole@nowhere.example> R=blackhole_router
30080 .section "Deferred deliveries"
30081 When a delivery is deferred, a line of the following form is logged:
30083 2002-12-19 16:20:23 16aiQz-0002Q5-00 == marvin@endrest.example
30084 R=dnslookup T=smtp defer (146): Connection refused
30086 In the case of remote deliveries, the error is the one that was given for the
30087 last IP address that was tried. Details of individual SMTP failures are also
30088 written to the log, so the above line would be preceded by something like
30090 2002-12-19 16:20:23 16aiQz-0002Q5-00 Failed to connect to
30091 mail1.endrest.example [192.168.239.239]: Connection refused
30093 When a deferred address is skipped because its retry time has not been reached,
30094 a message is written to the log, but this can be suppressed by setting an
30095 appropriate value in &%log_selector%&.
30099 .section "Delivery failures"
30100 .cindex "delivery" "failure; logging"
30101 If a delivery fails because an address cannot be routed, a line of the
30102 following form is logged:
30104 1995-12-19 16:20:23 0tRiQz-0002Q5-00 ** jim@trek99.example
30105 <jim@trek99.example>: unknown mail domain
30107 If a delivery fails at transport time, the router and transport are shown, and
30108 the response from the remote host is included, as in this example:
30110 2002-07-11 07:14:17 17SXDU-000189-00 ** ace400@pb.example
30111 R=dnslookup T=remote_smtp: SMTP error from remote mailer
30112 after pipelined RCPT TO:<ace400@pb.example>: host
30113 pbmail3.py.example [192.168.63.111]: 553 5.3.0
30114 <ace400@pb.example>...Addressee unknown
30116 The word &"pipelined"& indicates that the SMTP PIPELINING extension was being
30117 used. See &%hosts_avoid_esmtp%& in the &(smtp)& transport for a way of
30118 disabling PIPELINING. The log lines for all forms of delivery failure are
30119 flagged with &`**`&.
30123 .section "Fake deliveries"
30124 .cindex "delivery" "fake; logging"
30125 If a delivery does not actually take place because the &%-N%& option has been
30126 used to suppress it, a normal delivery line is written to the log, except that
30127 &"=>"& is replaced by &"*>"&.
30131 .section "Completion"
30134 2002-10-31 09:00:11 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 Completed
30136 is written to the main log when a message is about to be removed from the spool
30137 at the end of its processing.
30142 .section "Summary of Fields in Log Lines"
30143 .cindex "log" "summary of fields"
30144 A summary of the field identifiers that are used in log lines is shown in
30145 the following table:
30147 &`A `& authenticator name (and optional id)
30148 &`C `& SMTP confirmation on delivery
30149 &`CV `& certificate verification status
30150 &`DN `& distinguished name from peer certificate
30151 &`DT `& on &`=>`& lines: time taken for a delivery
30152 &`F `& sender address (on delivery lines)
30153 &`H `& host name and IP address
30154 &`I `& local interface used
30155 &`id `& message id for incoming message
30156 &`P `& on &`<=`& lines: protocol used
30157 &` `& on &`=>`& and &`**`& lines: return path
30158 &`QT `& on &`=>`& lines: time spent on queue so far
30159 &` `& on &"Completed"& lines: time spent on queue
30160 &`R `& on &`<=`& lines: reference for local bounce
30161 &` `& on &`=>`& &`**`& and &`==`& lines: router name
30162 &`S `& size of message
30163 &`ST `& shadow transport name
30164 &`T `& on &`<=`& lines: message subject (topic)
30165 &` `& on &`=>`& &`**`& and &`==`& lines: transport name
30166 &`U `& local user or RFC 1413 identity
30167 &`X `& TLS cipher suite
30171 .section "Other log entries"
30172 Various other types of log entry are written from time to time. Most should be
30173 self-explanatory. Among the more common are:
30176 .cindex "retry" "time not reached"
30177 &'retry time not reached'&&~&~An address previously suffered a temporary error
30178 during routing or local delivery, and the time to retry has not yet arrived.
30179 This message is not written to an individual message log file unless it happens
30180 during the first delivery attempt.
30182 &'retry time not reached for any host'&&~&~An address previously suffered
30183 temporary errors during remote delivery, and the retry time has not yet arrived
30184 for any of the hosts to which it is routed.
30186 .cindex "spool directory" "file locked"
30187 &'spool file locked'&&~&~An attempt to deliver a message cannot proceed because
30188 some other Exim process is already working on the message. This can be quite
30189 common if queue running processes are started at frequent intervals. The
30190 &'exiwhat'& utility script can be used to find out what Exim processes are
30193 .cindex "error" "ignored"
30194 &'error ignored'&&~&~There are several circumstances that give rise to this
30197 Exim failed to deliver a bounce message whose age was greater than
30198 &%ignore_bounce_errors_after%&. The bounce was discarded.
30200 A filter file set up a delivery using the &"noerror"& option, and the delivery
30201 failed. The delivery was discarded.
30203 A delivery set up by a router configured with
30204 . ==== As this is a nested list, any displays it contains must be indented
30205 . ==== as otherwise they are too far to the left.
30209 failed. The delivery was discarded.
30217 .section "Reducing or increasing what is logged" "SECTlogselector"
30218 .cindex "log" "selectors"
30219 By setting the &%log_selector%& global option, you can disable some of Exim's
30220 default logging, or you can request additional logging. The value of
30221 &%log_selector%& is made up of names preceded by plus or minus characters. For
30224 log_selector = +arguments -retry_defer
30226 The list of optional log items is in the following table, with the default
30227 selection marked by asterisks:
30229 &`*acl_warn_skipped `& skipped &%warn%& statement in ACL
30230 &` address_rewrite `& address rewriting
30231 &` all_parents `& all parents in => lines
30232 &` arguments `& command line arguments
30233 &`*connection_reject `& connection rejections
30234 &`*delay_delivery `& immediate delivery delayed
30235 &` deliver_time `& time taken to perform delivery
30236 &` delivery_size `& add &`S=`&&'nnn'& to => lines
30237 &`*dnslist_defer `& defers of DNS list (aka RBL) lookups
30238 &`*etrn `& ETRN commands
30239 &`*host_lookup_failed `& as it says
30240 &` ident_timeout `& timeout for ident connection
30241 &` incoming_interface `& incoming interface on <= lines
30242 &` incoming_port `& incoming port on <= lines
30243 &`*lost_incoming_connection `& as it says (includes timeouts)
30244 &` outgoing_port `& add remote port to => lines
30245 &`*queue_run `& start and end queue runs
30246 &` queue_time `& time on queue for one recipient
30247 &` queue_time_overall `& time on queue for whole message
30248 &` received_recipients `& recipients on <= lines
30249 &` received_sender `& sender on <= lines
30250 &`*rejected_header `& header contents on reject log
30251 &`*retry_defer `& &"retry time not reached"&
30252 &` return_path_on_delivery `& put return path on => and *\ lines
30253 &` sender_on_delivery `& add sender to => lines
30254 &`*size_reject `& rejection because too big
30255 &`*skip_delivery `& delivery skipped in a queue run
30256 &` smtp_confirmation `& SMTP confirmation on => lines
30257 &` smtp_connection `& SMTP connections
30258 &` smtp_incomplete_transaction`& incomplete SMTP transactions
30259 &` smtp_protocol_error `& SMTP protocol errors
30260 &` smtp_syntax_error `& SMTP syntax errors
30261 &` subject `& contents of &'Subject:'& on <= lines
30262 &` tls_certificate_verified `& certificate verification status
30263 &`*tls_cipher `& TLS cipher suite on <= and => lines
30264 &` tls_peerdn `& TLS peer DN on <= and => lines
30265 &` unknown_in_list `& DNS lookup failed in list match
30267 &` all `& all of the above
30269 More details on each of these items follows:
30272 .cindex "&%warn%& statement" "log when skipping"
30274 &%acl_warn_skipped%&: When an ACL &%warn%& statement is skipped because one of
30275 its conditions cannot be evaluated, a log line to this effect is written if
30276 this log selector is set.
30279 .cindex "log" "rewriting"
30280 .cindex "rewriting" "logging"
30281 &%address_rewrite%&: This applies both to global rewrites and per-transport
30282 rewrites, but not to rewrites in filters run as an unprivileged user (because
30283 such users cannot access the log).
30285 .cindex "log" "full parentage"
30286 &%all_parents%&: Normally only the original and final addresses are logged on
30287 delivery lines; with this selector, intermediate parents are given in
30288 parentheses between them.
30290 .cindex "log" "Exim arguments"
30291 .cindex "Exim arguments" "logging"
30292 &%arguments%&: This causes Exim to write the arguments with which it was called
30293 to the main log, preceded by the current working directory. This is a debugging
30294 feature, added to make it easier to find out how certain MUAs call
30295 &_/usr/sbin/sendmail_&. The logging does not happen if Exim has given up root
30296 privilege because it was called with the &%-C%& or &%-D%& options. Arguments
30297 that are empty or that contain white space are quoted. Non-printing characters
30298 are shown as escape sequences. This facility cannot log unrecognized arguments,
30299 because the arguments are checked before the configuration file is read. The
30300 only way to log such cases is to interpose a script such as &_util/logargs.sh_&
30301 between the caller and Exim.
30303 .cindex "log" "connection rejections"
30304 &%connection_reject%&: A log entry is written whenever an incoming SMTP
30305 connection is rejected, for whatever reason.
30307 .cindex "log" "delayed delivery"
30308 .cindex "delayed delivery" "logging"
30309 &%delay_delivery%&: A log entry is written whenever a delivery process is not
30310 started for an incoming message because the load is too high or too many
30311 messages were received on one connection. Logging does not occur if no delivery
30312 process is started because &%queue_only%& is set or &%-odq%& was used.
30314 .cindex "log" "delivery duration"
30315 &%deliver_time%&: For each delivery, the amount of real time it has taken to
30316 perform the actual delivery is logged as DT=<&'time'&>, for example, &`DT=1s`&.
30318 .cindex "log" "message size on delivery"
30319 .cindex "size" "of message"
30320 &%delivery_size%&: For each delivery, the size of message delivered is added to
30321 the &"=>"& line, tagged with S=.
30323 .cindex "log" "dnslist defer"
30324 .cindex "DNS list" "logging defer"
30325 .cindex "black list (DNS)"
30326 &%dnslist_defer%&: A log entry is written if an attempt to look up a host in a
30327 DNS black list suffers a temporary error.
30329 .cindex "log" "ETRN commands"
30330 .cindex "ETRN" "logging"
30331 &%etrn%&: Every legal ETRN command that is received is logged, before the ACL
30332 is run to determine whether or not it is actually accepted. An invalid ETRN
30333 command, or one received within a message transaction is not logged by this
30334 selector (see &%smtp_syntax_error%& and &%smtp_protocol_error%&).
30336 .cindex "log" "host lookup failure"
30337 &%host_lookup_failed%&: When a lookup of a host's IP addresses fails to find
30338 any addresses, or when a lookup of an IP address fails to find a host name, a
30339 log line is written. This logging does not apply to direct DNS lookups when
30340 routing email addresses, but it does apply to &"byname"& lookups.
30342 .cindex "log" "ident timeout"
30343 .cindex "RFC 1413" "logging timeout"
30344 &%ident_timeout%&: A log line is written whenever an attempt to connect to a
30345 client's ident port times out.
30347 .cindex "log" "incoming interface"
30348 .cindex "interface" "logging"
30349 &%incoming_interface%&: The interface on which a message was received is added
30350 to the &"<="& line as an IP address in square brackets, tagged by I= and
30351 followed by a colon and the port number. The local interface and port are also
30352 added to other SMTP log lines, for example &"SMTP connection from"&, and to
30355 .cindex "log" "incoming remote port"
30356 .cindex "port" "logging remote"
30357 .cindex "TCP/IP" "logging incoming remote port"
30358 .cindex "&$sender_fullhost$&"
30359 .cindex "&$sender_rcvhost$&"
30360 &%incoming_port%&: The remote port number from which a message was received is
30361 added to log entries and &'Received:'& header lines, following the IP address
30362 in square brackets, and separated from it by a colon. This is implemented by
30363 changing the value that is put in the &$sender_fullhost$& and
30364 &$sender_rcvhost$& variables. Recording the remote port number has become more
30365 important with the widening use of NAT (see RFC 2505).
30367 .cindex "log" "dropped connection"
30368 &%lost_incoming_connection%&: A log line is written when an incoming SMTP
30369 connection is unexpectedly dropped.
30371 .cindex "log" "outgoing remote port"
30372 .cindex "port" "logging outgoint remote"
30373 .cindex "TCP/IP" "logging ougtoing remote port"
30374 &%outgoing_port%&: The remote port number is added to delivery log lines (those
30375 containing => tags) following the IP address. This option is not included in
30376 the default setting, because for most ordinary configurations, the remote port
30377 number is always 25 (the SMTP port).
30379 .cindex "log" "queue run"
30380 .cindex "queue runner" "logging"
30381 &%queue_run%&: The start and end of every queue run are logged.
30383 .cindex "log" "queue time"
30384 &%queue_time%&: The amount of time the message has been in the queue on the
30385 local host is logged as QT=<&'time'&> on delivery (&`=>`&) lines, for example,
30386 &`QT=3m45s`&. The clock starts when Exim starts to receive the message, so it
30387 includes reception time as well as the delivery time for the current address.
30388 This means that it may be longer than the difference between the arrival and
30389 delivery log line times, because the arrival log line is not written until the
30390 message has been successfully received.
30392 &%queue_time_overall%&: The amount of time the message has been in the queue on
30393 the local host is logged as QT=<&'time'&> on &"Completed"& lines, for
30394 example, &`QT=3m45s`&. The clock starts when Exim starts to receive the
30395 message, so it includes reception time as well as the total delivery time.
30397 .cindex "log" "recipients"
30398 &%received_recipients%&: The recipients of a message are listed in the main log
30399 as soon as the message is received. The list appears at the end of the log line
30400 that is written when a message is received, preceded by the word &"for"&. The
30401 addresses are listed after they have been qualified, but before any rewriting
30403 Recipients that were discarded by an ACL for MAIL or RCPT do not appear
30406 .cindex "log" "sender reception"
30407 &%received_sender%&: The unrewritten original sender of a message is added to
30408 the end of the log line that records the message's arrival, after the word
30409 &"from"& (before the recipients if &%received_recipients%& is also set).
30411 .cindex "log" "header lines for rejection"
30412 &%rejected_header%&: If a message's header has been received at the time a
30413 rejection is written to the reject log, the complete header is added to the
30414 log. Header logging can be turned off individually for messages that are
30415 rejected by the &[local_scan()]& function (see section &<<SECTapiforloc>>&).
30417 .cindex "log" "retry defer"
30418 &%retry_defer%&: A log line is written if a delivery is deferred because a
30419 retry time has not yet been reached. However, this &"retry time not reached"&
30420 message is always omitted from individual message logs after the first delivery
30423 .cindex "log" "return path"
30424 &%return_path_on_delivery%&: The return path that is being transmitted with
30425 the message is included in delivery and bounce lines, using the tag P=.
30426 This is omitted if no delivery actually happens, for example, if routing fails,
30427 or if delivery is to &_/dev/null_& or to &`:blackhole:`&.
30429 .cindex "log" "sender on delivery"
30430 &%sender_on_delivery%&: The message's sender address is added to every delivery
30431 and bounce line, tagged by F= (for &"from"&).
30432 This is the original sender that was received with the message; it is not
30433 necessarily the same as the outgoing return path.
30435 .cindex "log" "size rejection"
30436 &%size_reject%&: A log line is written whenever a message is rejected because
30439 .cindex "log" "frozen messages; skipped"
30440 .cindex "frozen messages" "logging skipping"
30441 &%skip_delivery%&: A log line is written whenever a message is skipped during a
30442 queue run because it is frozen or because another process is already delivering
30444 .cindex "&""spool file is locked""&"
30445 The message that is written is &"spool file is locked"&.
30447 .cindex "log" "smtp confirmation"
30448 .cindex "SMTP" "logging confirmation"
30449 &%smtp_confirmation%&: The response to the final &"."& in the SMTP dialogue for
30450 outgoing messages is added to delivery log lines in the form &`C=`&<&'text'&>.
30451 A number of MTAs (including Exim) return an identifying string in this
30454 .cindex "log" "SMTP connections"
30455 .cindex "SMTP" "logging connections"
30456 &%smtp_connection%&: A log line is written whenever an SMTP connection is
30457 established or closed, unless the connection is from a host that matches
30458 &%hosts_connection_nolog%&. (In contrast, &%lost_incoming_connection%& applies
30459 only when the closure is unexpected.) This applies to connections from local
30460 processes that use &%-bs%& as well as to TCP/IP connections. If a connection is
30461 dropped in the middle of a message, a log line is always written, whether or
30462 not this selector is set, but otherwise nothing is written at the start and end
30463 of connections unless this selector is enabled.
30465 For TCP/IP connections to an Exim daemon, the current number of connections is
30466 included in the log message for each new connection, but note that the count is
30467 reset if the daemon is restarted.
30468 Also, because connections are closed (and the closure is logged) in
30469 subprocesses, the count may not include connections that have been closed but
30470 whose termination the daemon has not yet noticed. Thus, while it is possible to
30471 match up the opening and closing of connections in the log, the value of the
30472 logged counts may not be entirely accurate.
30474 .cindex "log" "SMTP transaction; incomplete"
30475 .cindex "SMTP" "logging incomplete transactions"
30476 &%smtp_incomplete_transaction%&: When a mail transaction is aborted by
30477 RSET, QUIT, loss of connection, or otherwise, the incident is logged,
30478 and the message sender plus any accepted recipients are included in the log
30479 line. This can provide evidence of dictionary attacks.
30481 .cindex "log" "SMTP protocol error"
30482 .cindex "SMTP" "logging protocol error"
30483 &%smtp_protocol_error%&: A log line is written for every SMTP protocol error
30484 encountered. Exim does not have perfect detection of all protocol errors
30485 because of transmission delays and the use of pipelining. If PIPELINING has
30486 been advertised to a client, an Exim server assumes that the client will use
30487 it, and therefore it does not count &"expected"& errors (for example, RCPT
30488 received after rejecting MAIL) as protocol errors.
30490 .cindex "SMTP" "logging syntax errors"
30491 .cindex "SMTP" "syntax errors; logging"
30492 .cindex "SMTP" "unknown command; logging"
30493 .cindex "log" "unknown SMTP command"
30494 .cindex "log" "SMTP syntax error"
30495 &%smtp_syntax_error%&: A log line is written for every SMTP syntax error
30496 encountered. An unrecognized command is treated as a syntax error. For an
30497 external connection, the host identity is given; for an internal connection
30498 using &%-bs%& the sender identification (normally the calling user) is given.
30500 .cindex "log" "subject"
30501 .cindex "subject" "logging"
30502 &%subject%&: The subject of the message is added to the arrival log line,
30503 preceded by &"T="& (T for &"topic"&, since S is already used for &"size"&).
30504 Any MIME &"words"& in the subject are decoded. The &%print_topbitchars%& option
30505 specifies whether characters with values greater than 127 should be logged
30506 unchanged, or whether they should be rendered as escape sequences.
30508 .cindex "log" "certificate verification"
30509 &%tls_certificate_verified%&: An extra item is added to <= and => log lines
30510 when TLS is in use. The item is &`CV=yes`& if the peer's certificate was
30511 verified, and &`CV=no`& if not.
30513 .cindex "log" "TLS cipher"
30514 .cindex "TLS" "logging cipher"
30515 &%tls_cipher%&: When a message is sent or received over an encrypted
30516 connection, the cipher suite used is added to the log line, preceded by X=.
30518 .cindex "log" "TLS peer DN"
30519 .cindex "TLS" "logging peer DN"
30520 &%tls_peerdn%&: When a message is sent or received over an encrypted
30521 connection, and a certificate is supplied by the remote host, the peer DN is
30522 added to the log line, preceded by DN=.
30525 .cindex "log" "DNS failure in list"
30526 &%unknown_in_list%&: This setting causes a log entry to be written when the
30527 result of a list match is failure because a DNS lookup failed.
30532 .section "Message log"
30533 .cindex "message" "log file for"
30534 .cindex "log" "message log; description of"
30535 .cindex "&_msglog_& directory"
30536 .cindex "&%preserve_message_logs%&"
30537 In addition to the general log files, Exim writes a log file for each message
30538 that it handles. The names of these per-message logs are the message ids, and
30539 they are kept in the &_msglog_& sub-directory of the spool directory. Each
30540 message log contains copies of the log lines that apply to the message. This
30541 makes it easier to inspect the status of an individual message without having
30542 to search the main log. A message log is deleted when processing of the message
30543 is complete, unless &%preserve_message_logs%& is set, but this should be used
30544 only with great care because they can fill up your disk very quickly.
30546 On a heavily loaded system, it may be desirable to disable the use of
30547 per-message logs, in order to reduce disk I/O. This can be done by setting the
30548 &%message_logs%& option false.
30552 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30553 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
30555 .chapter "Exim utilities" "CHAPutils"
30556 .cindex "utilities"
30557 A number of utility scripts and programs are supplied with Exim and are
30558 described in this chapter. There is also the Exim Monitor, which is covered in
30559 the next chapter. The utilities described here are:
30561 .itable none 0 0 4 2* left 8* left 30* left 40* left
30562 .row "" &<<SECTfinoutwha>>& &'exiwhat'& &&&
30563 "list what Exim processes are doing"
30564 .row "" &<<SECTgreptheque>>& &'exiqgrep'& "grep the queue"
30565 .row "" &<<SECTsumtheque>>& &'exiqsumm'& "summarize the queue"
30566 .row "" &<<SECTextspeinf>>& &'exigrep'& "search the main log"
30567 .row "" &<<SECTexipick>>& &'exipick'& "select messages on &&&
30569 .row "" &<<SECTcyclogfil>>& &'exicyclog'& "cycle (rotate) log files"
30570 .row "" &<<SECTmailstat>>& &'eximstats'& &&&
30571 "extract statistics from the log"
30572 .row "" &<<SECTcheckaccess>>& &'exim_checkaccess'& &&&
30573 "check address acceptance from given IP"
30574 .row "" &<<SECTdbmbuild>>& &'exim_dbmbuild'& "build a DBM file"
30575 .row "" &<<SECTfinindret>>& &'exinext'& "extract retry information"
30576 .row "" &<<SECThindatmai>>& &'exim_dumpdb'& "dump a hints database"
30577 .row "" &<<SECThindatmai>>& &'exim_tidydb'& "clean up a hints database"
30578 .row "" &<<SECThindatmai>>& &'exim_fixdb'& "patch a hints database"
30579 .row "" &<<SECTmailboxmaint>>& &'exim_lock'& "lock a mailbox file"
30583 Another utility that might be of use to sites with many MTAs is Tom Kistner's
30584 &'exilog'&. It provides log visualizations across multiple Exim servers. See
30585 &url(http://duncanthrax.net/exilog/) for details.
30591 .section "Finding out what Exim processes are doing (exiwhat)" "SECTfinoutwha"
30592 .cindex "&'exiwhat'&"
30593 .cindex "process" "querying"
30595 On operating systems that can restart a system call after receiving a signal
30596 (most modern OS), an Exim process responds to the SIGUSR1 signal by writing
30597 a line describing what it is doing to the file &_exim-process.info_& in the
30598 Exim spool directory. The &'exiwhat'& script sends the signal to all Exim
30599 processes it can find, having first emptied the file. It then waits for one
30600 second to allow the Exim processes to react before displaying the results. In
30601 order to run &'exiwhat'& successfully you have to have sufficient privilege to
30602 send the signal to the Exim processes, so it is normally run as root.
30604 &*Warning*&: This is not an efficient process. It is intended for occasional
30605 use by system administrators. It is not sensible, for example, to set up a
30606 script that sends SIGUSR1 signals to Exim processes at short intervals.
30609 Unfortunately, the &'ps'& command that &'exiwhat'& uses to find Exim processes
30610 varies in different operating systems. Not only are different options used,
30611 but the format of the output is different. For this reason, there are some
30612 system configuration options that configure exactly how &'exiwhat'& works. If
30613 it doesn't seem to be working for you, check the following compile-time
30616 &`EXIWHAT_PS_CMD `& the command for running &'ps'&
30617 &`EXIWHAT_PS_ARG `& the argument for &'ps'&
30618 &`EXIWHAT_EGREP_ARG `& the argument for &'egrep'& to select from &'ps'& output
30619 &`EXIWHAT_KILL_ARG `& the argument for the &'kill'& command
30621 An example of typical output from &'exiwhat'& is
30623 164 daemon: -q1h, listening on port 25
30624 10483 running queue: waiting for 0tAycK-0002ij-00 (10492)
30625 10492 delivering 0tAycK-0002ij-00 to mail.ref.example
30626 [10.19.42.42] (editor@ref.example)
30627 10592 handling incoming call from [192.168.243.242]
30628 10628 accepting a local non-SMTP message
30630 The first number in the output line is the process number. The third line has
30631 been split here, in order to fit it on the page.
30635 .section "Selective queue listing (exiqgrep)" "SECTgreptheque"
30636 .cindex "&'exiqgrep'&"
30637 .cindex "queue" "grepping"
30638 This utility is a Perl script contributed by Matt Hubbard. It runs
30642 to obtain a queue listing with undelivered recipients only, and then greps the
30643 output to select messages that match given criteria. The following selection
30644 options are available:
30647 .vitem &*-f*&&~<&'regex'&>
30648 Match the sender address. The field that is tested is enclosed in angle
30649 brackets, so you can test for bounce messages with
30653 .vitem &*-r*&&~<&'regex'&>
30654 Match a recipient address. The field that is tested is not enclosed in angle
30657 .vitem &*-s*&&~<&'regex'&>
30658 Match against the size field.
30660 .vitem &*-y*&&~<&'seconds'&>
30661 Match messages that are younger than the given time.
30663 .vitem &*-o*&&~<&'seconds'&>
30664 Match messages that are older than the given time.
30667 Match only frozen messages.
30670 Match only non-frozen messages.
30673 The following options control the format of the output:
30677 Display only the count of matching messages.
30680 Long format &-- display the full message information as output by Exim. This is
30684 Display message ids only.
30687 Brief format &-- one line per message.
30690 Display messages in reverse order.
30693 There is one more option, &%-h%&, which outputs a list of options.
30697 .section "Summarising the queue (exiqsumm)" "SECTsumtheque"
30698 .cindex "&'exiqsumm'&"
30699 .cindex "queue" "summary"
30700 The &'exiqsumm'& utility is a Perl script which reads the output of &`exim
30701 -bp`& and produces a summary of the messages on the queue. Thus, you use it by
30702 running a command such as
30704 exim -bp | exiqsumm
30706 The output consists of one line for each domain that has messages waiting for
30707 it, as in the following example:
30709 3 2322 74m 66m msn.com.example
30711 Each line lists the number of
30712 pending deliveries for a domain, their total volume, and the length of time
30713 that the oldest and the newest messages have been waiting. Note that the number
30714 of pending deliveries is greater than the number of messages when messages
30715 have more than one recipient.
30717 A summary line is output at the end. By default the output is sorted on the
30718 domain name, but &'exiqsumm'& has the options &%-a%& and &%-c%&, which cause
30719 the output to be sorted by oldest message and by count of messages,
30722 The output of &'exim -bp'& contains the original addresses in the message, so
30723 this also applies to the output from &'exiqsumm'&. No domains from addresses
30724 generated by aliasing or forwarding are included (unless the &%one_time%&
30725 option of the &(redirect)& router has been used to convert them into &"top
30726 level"& addresses).
30731 .section "Extracting specific information from the log (exigrep)" &&&
30733 .cindex "&'exigrep'&"
30734 .cindex "log" "extracts; grepping for"
30736 The &'exigrep'& utility is a Perl script that searches one or more main log
30737 files for entries that match a given pattern. When it finds a match, it
30738 extracts all the log entries for the relevant message, not just those that
30739 match the pattern. Thus, &'exigrep'& can extract complete log entries for a
30740 given message, or all mail for a given user, or for a given host, for example.
30741 The input files can be in Exim log format or syslog format.
30744 If a matching log line is not associated with a specific message, it is always
30745 included in &'exigrep'&'s output. The usage is:
30747 &`exigrep [-l] [-t<`&&'n'&&`>] <`&&'pattern'&&`> [<`&&'log file'&&`>] ...`&
30749 The &%-t%& argument specifies a number of seconds. It adds an additional
30750 condition for message selection. Messages that are complete are shown only if
30751 they spent more than <&'n'&> seconds on the queue.
30753 The &%-l%& flag means &"literal"&, that is, treat all characters in the
30754 pattern as standing for themselves. Otherwise the pattern must be a Perl
30755 regular expression. The pattern match is case-insensitive. If no file names are
30756 given on the command line, the standard input is read.
30758 If the location of a &'zcat'& command is known from the definition of
30759 ZCAT_COMMAND in &_Local/Makefile_&, &'exigrep'& automatically passes any file
30760 whose name ends in COMPRESS_SUFFIX through &'zcat'& as it searches it.
30763 .section "Selecting messages by various criteria (exipick)" "SECTexipick"
30764 .cindex "&'exipick'&"
30765 John Jetmore's &'exipick'& utility is included in the Exim distribution. It
30766 lists messages from the queue according to a variety of criteria. For details,
30773 .section "Cycling log files (exicyclog)" "SECTcyclogfil"
30774 .cindex "log" "cycling local files"
30775 .cindex "cycling logs"
30776 .cindex "&'exicyclog'&"
30777 The &'exicyclog'& script can be used to cycle (rotate) &'mainlog'& and
30778 &'rejectlog'& files. This is not necessary if only syslog is being used, or if
30779 you are using log files with datestamps in their names (see section
30780 &<<SECTdatlogfil>>&). Some operating systems have their own standard mechanisms
30781 for log cycling, and these can be used instead of &'exicyclog'& if preferred.
30783 Each time &'exicyclog'& is run the file names get &"shuffled down"& by one. If
30784 the main log file name is &_mainlog_& (the default) then when &'exicyclog'& is
30785 run &_mainlog_& becomes &_mainlog.01_&, the previous &_mainlog.01_& becomes
30786 &_mainlog.02_& and so on, up to a limit which is set in the script, and which
30787 defaults to 10. Log files whose numbers exceed the limit are discarded. Reject
30788 logs are handled similarly.
30790 If the limit is greater than 99, the script uses 3-digit numbers such as
30791 &_mainlog.001_&, &_mainlog.002_&, etc. If you change from a number less than 99
30792 to one that is greater, or &'vice versa'&, you will have to fix the names of
30793 any existing log files.
30796 If no &_mainlog_& file exists, the script does nothing. Files that &"drop off"&
30797 the end are deleted. All files with numbers greater than 01 are compressed,
30798 using a compression command which is configured by the COMPRESS_COMMAND
30799 setting in &_Local/Makefile_&. It is usual to run &'exicyclog'& daily from a
30800 root &%crontab%& entry of the form
30802 1 0 * * * su exim -c /usr/exim/bin/exicyclog
30804 assuming you have used the name &"exim"& for the Exim user. You can run
30805 &'exicyclog'& as root if you wish, but there is no need.
30809 .section "Mail statistics (eximstats)" "SECTmailstat"
30810 .cindex "statistics"
30811 .cindex "&'eximstats'&"
30812 A Perl script called &'eximstats'& is provided for extracting statistical
30813 information from log files. The output is either plain text, or HTML.
30814 Exim log files are also suported by the &'Lire'& system produced by the
30815 LogReport Foundation &url(http://www.logreport.org).
30817 The &'eximstats'& script has been hacked about quite a bit over time. The
30818 latest version is the result of some extensive revision by Steve Campbell. A
30819 lot of information is given by default, but there are options for suppressing
30820 various parts of it. Following any options, the arguments to the script are a
30821 list of files, which should be main log files. For example:
30823 eximstats -nr /var/spool/exim/log/mainlog.01
30825 By default, &'eximstats'& extracts information about the number and volume of
30826 messages received from or delivered to various hosts. The information is sorted
30827 both by message count and by volume, and the top fifty hosts in each category
30828 are listed on the standard output. Similar information, based on email
30829 addresses or domains instead of hosts can be requested by means of various
30830 options. For messages delivered and received locally, similar statistics are
30831 also produced per user.
30833 The output also includes total counts and statistics about delivery errors, and
30834 histograms showing the number of messages received and deliveries made in each
30835 hour of the day. A delivery with more than one address in its envelope (for
30836 example, an SMTP transaction with more than one RCPT command) is counted
30837 as a single delivery by &'eximstats'&.
30839 Though normally more deliveries than receipts are reported (as messages may
30840 have multiple recipients), it is possible for &'eximstats'& to report more
30841 messages received than delivered, even though the queue is empty at the start
30842 and end of the period in question. If an incoming message contains no valid
30843 recipients, no deliveries are recorded for it. A bounce message is handled as
30844 an entirely separate message.
30846 &'eximstats'& always outputs a grand total summary giving the volume and number
30847 of messages received and deliveries made, and the number of hosts involved in
30848 each case. It also outputs the number of messages that were delayed (that is,
30849 not completely delivered at the first attempt), and the number that had at
30850 least one address that failed.
30852 The remainder of the output is in sections that can be independently disabled
30853 or modified by various options. It consists of a summary of deliveries by
30854 transport, histograms of messages received and delivered per time interval
30855 (default per hour), information about the time messages spent on the queue,
30856 a list of relayed messages, lists of the top fifty sending hosts, local
30857 senders, destination hosts, and destination local users by count and by volume,
30858 and a list of delivery errors that occurred.
30860 The relay information lists messages that were actually relayed, that is, they
30861 came from a remote host and were directly delivered to some other remote host,
30862 without being processed (for example, for aliasing or forwarding) locally.
30864 There are quite a few options for &'eximstats'& to control exactly what it
30865 outputs. These are documented in the Perl script itself, and can be extracted
30866 by running the command &(perldoc)& on the script. For example:
30868 perldoc /usr/exim/bin/eximstats
30871 .section "Checking access policy (exim_checkaccess)" "SECTcheckaccess"
30872 .cindex "&'exim_checkaccess'&"
30873 .cindex "policy control" "checking access"
30874 .cindex "checking access"
30875 The &%-bh%& command line argument allows you to run a fake SMTP session with
30876 debugging output, in order to check what Exim is doing when it is applying
30877 policy controls to incoming SMTP mail. However, not everybody is sufficiently
30878 familiar with the SMTP protocol to be able to make full use of &%-bh%&, and
30879 sometimes you just want to answer the question &"Does this address have
30880 access?"& without bothering with any further details.
30882 The &'exim_checkaccess'& utility is a &"packaged"& version of &%-bh%&. It takes
30883 two arguments, an IP address and an email address:
30885 exim_checkaccess 10.9.8.7 A.User@a.domain.example
30887 The utility runs a call to Exim with the &%-bh%& option, to test whether the
30888 given email address would be accepted in a RCPT command in a TCP/IP
30889 connection from the host with the given IP address. The output of the utility
30890 is either the word &"accepted"&, or the SMTP error response, for example:
30893 550 Relay not permitted
30895 When running this test, the utility uses &`<>`& as the envelope sender address
30896 for the MAIL command, but you can change this by providing additional
30897 options. These are passed directly to the Exim command. For example, to specify
30898 that the test is to be run with the sender address &'himself@there.example'&
30901 exim_checkaccess 10.9.8.7 A.User@a.domain.example \
30902 -f himself@there.example
30904 Note that these additional Exim command line items must be given after the two
30905 mandatory arguments.
30907 Because the &%exim_checkaccess%& uses &%-bh%&, it does not perform callouts
30908 while running its checks. You can run checks that include callouts by using
30909 &%-bhc%&, but this is not yet available in a &"packaged"& form.
30913 .section "Making DBM files (exim_dbmbuild)" "SECTdbmbuild"
30914 .cindex "DBM" "building dbm files"
30915 .cindex "building DBM files"
30916 .cindex "&'exim_dbmbuild'&"
30917 .cindex "lower casing"
30918 .cindex "binary zero" "in lookup key"
30919 The &'exim_dbmbuild'& program reads an input file containing keys and data in
30920 the format used by the &(lsearch)& lookup (see section
30921 &<<SECTsinglekeylookups>>&). It writes a DBM file using the lower-cased alias
30922 names as keys and the remainder of the information as data. The lower-casing
30923 can be prevented by calling the program with the &%-nolc%& option.
30925 A terminating zero is included as part of the key string. This is expected by
30926 the &(dbm)& lookup type. However, if the option &%-nozero%& is given,
30927 &'exim_dbmbuild'& creates files without terminating zeroes in either the key
30928 strings or the data strings. The &(dbmnz)& lookup type can be used with such
30931 The program requires two arguments: the name of the input file (which can be a
30932 single hyphen to indicate the standard input), and the name of the output file.
30933 It creates the output under a temporary name, and then renames it if all went
30937 If the native DB interface is in use (USE_DB is set in a compile-time
30938 configuration file &-- this is common in free versions of Unix) the two file
30939 names must be different, because in this mode the Berkeley DB functions create
30940 a single output file using exactly the name given. For example,
30942 exim_dbmbuild /etc/aliases /etc/aliases.db
30944 reads the system alias file and creates a DBM version of it in
30945 &_/etc/aliases.db_&.
30947 In systems that use the &'ndbm'& routines (mostly proprietary versions of
30948 Unix), two files are used, with the suffixes &_.dir_& and &_.pag_&. In this
30949 environment, the suffixes are added to the second argument of
30950 &'exim_dbmbuild'&, so it can be the same as the first. This is also the case
30951 when the Berkeley functions are used in compatibility mode (though this is not
30952 recommended), because in that case it adds a &_.db_& suffix to the file name.
30954 If a duplicate key is encountered, the program outputs a warning, and when it
30955 finishes, its return code is 1 rather than zero, unless the &%-noduperr%&
30956 option is used. By default, only the first of a set of duplicates is used &--
30957 this makes it compatible with &(lsearch)& lookups. There is an option
30958 &%-lastdup%& which causes it to use the data for the last duplicate instead.
30959 There is also an option &%-nowarn%&, which stops it listing duplicate keys to
30960 &%stderr%&. For other errors, where it doesn't actually make a new file, the
30966 .section "Finding individual retry times (exinext)" "SECTfinindret"
30967 .cindex "retry" "times"
30968 .cindex "&'exinext'&"
30969 A utility called &'exinext'& (mostly a Perl script) provides the ability to
30970 fish specific information out of the retry database. Given a mail domain (or a
30971 complete address), it looks up the hosts for that domain, and outputs any retry
30972 information for the hosts or for the domain. At present, the retry information
30973 is obtained by running &'exim_dumpdb'& (see below) and post-processing the
30974 output. For example:
30976 $ exinext piglet@milne.fict.example
30977 kanga.milne.example:192.168.8.1 error 146: Connection refused
30978 first failed: 21-Feb-1996 14:57:34
30979 last tried: 21-Feb-1996 14:57:34
30980 next try at: 21-Feb-1996 15:02:34
30981 roo.milne.example:192.168.8.3 error 146: Connection refused
30982 first failed: 20-Jan-1996 13:12:08
30983 last tried: 21-Feb-1996 11:42:03
30984 next try at: 21-Feb-1996 19:42:03
30985 past final cutoff time
30987 You can also give &'exinext'& a local part, without a domain, and it
30988 will give any retry information for that local part in your default domain.
30989 A message id can be used to obtain retry information pertaining to a specific
30990 message. This exists only when an attempt to deliver a message to a remote host
30991 suffers a message-specific error (see section &<<SECToutSMTPerr>>&).
30992 &'exinext'& is not particularly efficient, but then it is not expected to be
30995 The &'exinext'& utility calls Exim to find out information such as the location
30996 of the spool directory. The utility has &%-C%& and &%-D%& options, which are
30997 passed on to the &'exim'& commands. The first specifies an alternate Exim
30998 configuration file, and the second sets macros for use within the configuration
30999 file. These features are mainly to help in testing, but might also be useful in
31000 environments where more than one configuration file is in use.
31004 .section "Hints database maintenance" "SECThindatmai"
31005 .cindex "hints database" "maintenance"
31006 .cindex "maintaining Exim's hints database"
31007 Three utility programs are provided for maintaining the DBM files that Exim
31008 uses to contain its delivery hint information. Each program requires two
31009 arguments. The first specifies the name of Exim's spool directory, and the
31010 second is the name of the database it is to operate on. These are as follows:
31013 &'retry'&: the database of retry information
31015 &'wait-'&<&'transport name'&>: databases of information about messages waiting
31018 &'callout'&: the callout cache
31021 &'ratelimit'&: the data for implementing the ratelimit ACL condition
31024 &'misc'&: other hints data
31027 The &'misc'& database is used for
31030 Serializing ETRN runs (when &%smtp_etrn_serialize%& is set)
31032 Serializing delivery to a specific host (when &%serialize_hosts%& is set in an
31033 &(smtp)& transport)
31038 .section "exim_dumpdb"
31039 .cindex "&'exim_dumpdb'&"
31040 The entire contents of a database are written to the standard output by the
31041 &'exim_dumpdb'& program, which has no options or arguments other than the
31042 spool and database names. For example, to dump the retry database:
31044 exim_dumpdb /var/spool/exim retry
31046 Two lines of output are produced for each entry:
31048 T:mail.ref.example:192.168.242.242 146 77 Connection refused
31049 31-Oct-1995 12:00:12 02-Nov-1995 12:21:39 02-Nov-1995 20:21:39 *
31051 The first item on the first line is the key of the record. It starts with one
31052 of the letters R, or T, depending on whether it refers to a routing or
31053 transport retry. For a local delivery, the next part is the local address; for
31054 a remote delivery it is the name of the remote host, followed by its failing IP
31055 address (unless &%no_retry_include_ip_address%& is set on the &(smtp)&
31056 transport). If the remote port is not the standard one (port 25), it is added
31057 to the IP address. Then there follows an error code, an additional error code,
31058 and a textual description of the error.
31060 The three times on the second line are the time of first failure, the time of
31061 the last delivery attempt, and the computed time for the next attempt. The line
31062 ends with an asterisk if the cutoff time for the last retry rule has been
31065 Each output line from &'exim_dumpdb'& for the &'wait-xxx'& databases
31066 consists of a host name followed by a list of ids for messages that are or were
31067 waiting to be delivered to that host. If there are a very large number for any
31068 one host, continuation records, with a sequence number added to the host name,
31069 may be seen. The data in these records is often out of date, because a message
31070 may be routed to several alternative hosts, and Exim makes no effort to keep
31075 .section "exim_tidydb"
31076 .cindex "&'exim_tidydb'&"
31078 The &'exim_tidydb'& utility program is used to tidy up the contents of a hints
31079 database. If run with no options, it removes all records that are more than 30
31080 days old. The age is calculated from the date and time that the record was last
31081 updated. Note that, in the case of the retry database, it is &'not'& the time
31082 since the first delivery failure. Information about a host that has been down
31083 for more than 30 days will remain in the database, provided that the record is
31084 updated sufficiently often.
31087 The cutoff date can be altered by means of the &%-t%& option, which must be
31088 followed by a time. For example, to remove all records older than a week from
31089 the retry database:
31091 exim_tidydb -t 7d /var/spool/exim retry
31093 Both the &'wait-xxx'& and &'retry'& databases contain items that involve
31094 message ids. In the former these appear as data in records keyed by host &--
31095 they were messages that were waiting for that host &-- and in the latter they
31096 are the keys for retry information for messages that have suffered certain
31097 types of error. When &'exim_tidydb'& is run, a check is made to ensure that
31098 message ids in database records are those of messages that are still on the
31099 queue. Message ids for messages that no longer exist are removed from
31100 &'wait-xxx'& records, and if this leaves any records empty, they are deleted.
31101 For the &'retry'& database, records whose keys are non-existent message ids are
31102 removed. The &'exim_tidydb'& utility outputs comments on the standard output
31103 whenever it removes information from the database.
31105 Certain records are automatically removed by Exim when they are no longer
31106 needed, but others are not. For example, if all the MX hosts for a domain are
31107 down, a retry record is created for each one. If the primary MX host comes back
31108 first, its record is removed when Exim successfully delivers to it, but the
31109 records for the others remain because Exim has not tried to use those hosts.
31111 It is important, therefore, to run &'exim_tidydb'& periodically on all the
31112 hints databases. You should do this at a quiet time of day, because it requires
31113 a database to be locked (and therefore inaccessible to Exim) while it does its
31114 work. Removing records from a DBM file does not normally make the file smaller,
31115 but all the common DBM libraries are able to re-use the space that is released.
31116 After an initial phase of increasing in size, the databases normally reach a
31117 point at which they no longer get any bigger, as long as they are regularly
31120 &*Warning*&: If you never run &'exim_tidydb'&, the space used by the hints
31121 databases is likely to keep on increasing.
31126 .section "exim_fixdb"
31127 .cindex "&'exim_fixdb'&"
31128 The &'exim_fixdb'& program is a utility for interactively modifying databases.
31129 Its main use is for testing Exim, but it might also be occasionally useful for
31130 getting round problems in a live system. It has no options, and its interface
31131 is somewhat crude. On entry, it prompts for input with a right angle-bracket. A
31132 key of a database record can then be entered, and the data for that record is
31135 If &"d"& is typed at the next prompt, the entire record is deleted. For all
31136 except the &'retry'& database, that is the only operation that can be carried
31137 out. For the &'retry'& database, each field is output preceded by a number, and
31138 data for individual fields can be changed by typing the field number followed
31139 by new data, for example:
31143 resets the time of the next delivery attempt. Time values are given as a
31144 sequence of digit pairs for year, month, day, hour, and minute. Colons can be
31145 used as optional separators.
31150 .section "Mailbox maintenance (exim_lock)" "SECTmailboxmaint"
31151 .cindex "mailbox" "maintenance"
31152 .cindex "&'exim_lock'&"
31153 .cindex "locking mailboxes"
31154 The &'exim_lock'& utility locks a mailbox file using the same algorithm as
31155 Exim. For a discussion of locking issues, see section &<<SECTopappend>>&.
31156 &'Exim_lock'& can be used to prevent any modification of a mailbox by Exim or
31157 a user agent while investigating a problem. The utility requires the name of
31158 the file as its first argument. If the locking is successful, the second
31159 argument is run as a command (using C's &[system()]& function); if there is no
31160 second argument, the value of the SHELL environment variable is used; if this
31161 is unset or empty, &_/bin/sh_& is run. When the command finishes, the mailbox
31162 is unlocked and the utility ends. The following options are available:
31166 Use &[fcntl()]& locking on the open mailbox.
31169 Use &[flock()]& locking on the open mailbox, provided the operating system
31172 .vitem &%-interval%&
31173 This must be followed by a number, which is a number of seconds; it sets the
31174 interval to sleep between retries (default 3).
31176 .vitem &%-lockfile%&
31177 Create a lock file before opening the mailbox.
31180 Lock the mailbox using MBX rules.
31183 Suppress verification output.
31185 .vitem &%-retries%&
31186 This must be followed by a number; it sets the number of times to try to get
31187 the lock (default 10).
31189 .vitem &%-restore_time%&
31190 This option causes &%exim_lock%& to restore the modified and read times to the
31191 locked file before exiting. This allows you to access a locked mailbox (for
31192 example, to take a backup copy) without disturbing the times that the user
31195 .vitem &%-timeout%&
31196 This must be followed by a number, which is a number of seconds; it sets a
31197 timeout to be used with a blocking &[fcntl()]& lock. If it is not set (the
31198 default), a non-blocking call is used.
31201 Generate verbose output.
31204 If none of &%-fcntl%&, &%-flock%&, &%-lockfile%& or &%-mbx%& are given, the
31205 default is to create a lock file and also to use &[fcntl()]& locking on the
31206 mailbox, which is the same as Exim's default. The use of &%-flock%& or
31207 &%-fcntl%& requires that the file be writeable; the use of &%-lockfile%&
31208 requires that the directory containing the file be writeable. Locking by lock
31209 file does not last for ever; Exim assumes that a lock file is expired if it is
31210 more than 30 minutes old.
31212 The &%-mbx%& option can be used with either or both of &%-fcntl%& or
31213 &%-flock%&. It assumes &%-fcntl%& by default. MBX locking causes a shared lock
31214 to be taken out on the open mailbox, and an exclusive lock on the file
31215 &_/tmp/.n.m_& where &'n'& and &'m'& are the device number and inode
31216 number of the mailbox file. When the locking is released, if an exclusive lock
31217 can be obtained for the mailbox, the file in &_/tmp_& is deleted.
31219 The default output contains verification of the locking that takes place. The
31220 &%-v%& option causes some additional information to be given. The &%-q%& option
31221 suppresses all output except error messages.
31225 exim_lock /var/spool/mail/spqr
31227 runs an interactive shell while the file is locked, whereas
31229 &`exim_lock -q /var/spool/mail/spqr <<End`&
31230 <&'some commands'&>
31233 runs a specific non-interactive sequence of commands while the file is locked,
31234 suppressing all verification output. A single command can be run by a command
31237 exim_lock -q /var/spool/mail/spqr \
31238 "cp /var/spool/mail/spqr /some/where"
31240 Note that if a command is supplied, it must be entirely contained within the
31241 second argument &-- hence the quotes.
31245 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31246 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31248 .chapter "The Exim monitor" "CHAPeximon"
31249 .cindex "Exim monitor" "description"
31250 .cindex "X-windows"
31251 .cindex "&'eximon'&"
31252 .cindex "Local/eximon.conf"
31253 .cindex "_exim_monitor/EDITME_"
31254 The Exim monitor is an application which displays in an X window information
31255 about the state of Exim's queue and what Exim is doing. An admin user can
31256 perform certain operations on messages from this GUI interface; however all
31257 such facilities are also available from the command line, and indeed, the
31258 monitor itself makes use of the command line to perform any actions requested.
31262 .section "Running the monitor"
31263 The monitor is started by running the script called &'eximon'&. This is a shell
31264 script that sets up a number of environment variables, and then runs the
31265 binary called &_eximon.bin_&. The default appearance of the monitor window can
31266 be changed by editing the &_Local/eximon.conf_& file created by editing
31267 &_exim_monitor/EDITME_&. Comments in that file describe what the various
31268 parameters are for.
31270 The parameters that get built into the &'eximon'& script can be overridden for
31271 a particular invocation by setting up environment variables of the same names,
31272 preceded by &`EXIMON_`&. For example, a shell command such as
31274 EXIMON_LOG_DEPTH=400 eximon
31276 (in a Bourne-compatible shell) runs &'eximon'& with an overriding setting of
31277 the LOG_DEPTH parameter. If EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH is set in the environment, it
31278 overrides the Exim log file configuration. This makes it possible to have
31279 &'eximon'& tailing log data that is written to syslog, provided that MAIL.INFO
31280 syslog messages are routed to a file on the local host.
31282 X resources can be used to change the appearance of the window in the normal
31283 way. For example, a resource setting of the form
31285 Eximon*background: gray94
31287 changes the colour of the background to light grey rather than white. The
31288 stripcharts are drawn with both the data lines and the reference lines in
31289 black. This means that the reference lines are not visible when on top of the
31290 data. However, their colour can be changed by setting a resource called
31291 &"highlight"& (an odd name, but that's what the Athena stripchart widget uses).
31292 For example, if your X server is running Unix, you could set up lighter
31293 reference lines in the stripcharts by obeying
31296 Eximon*highlight: gray
31299 .cindex "admin user"
31300 In order to see the contents of messages on the queue, and to operate on them,
31301 &'eximon'& must either be run as root or by an admin user.
31303 The monitor's window is divided into three parts. The first contains one or
31304 more stripcharts and two action buttons, the second contains a &"tail"& of the
31305 main log file, and the third is a display of the queue of messages awaiting
31306 delivery, with two more action buttons. The following sections describe these
31307 different parts of the display.
31312 .section "The stripcharts"
31313 .cindex "stripchart"
31314 The first stripchart is always a count of messages on the queue. Its name can
31315 be configured by setting QUEUE_STRIPCHART_NAME in the
31316 &_Local/eximon.conf_& file. The remaining stripcharts are defined in the
31317 configuration script by regular expression matches on log file entries, making
31318 it possible to display, for example, counts of messages delivered to certain
31319 hosts or using certain transports. The supplied defaults display counts of
31320 received and delivered messages, and of local and SMTP deliveries. The default
31321 period between stripchart updates is one minute; this can be adjusted by a
31322 parameter in the &_Local/eximon.conf_& file.
31324 The stripchart displays rescale themselves automatically as the value they are
31325 displaying changes. There are always 10 horizontal lines in each chart; the
31326 title string indicates the value of each division when it is greater than one.
31327 For example, &"x2"& means that each division represents a value of 2.
31329 It is also possible to have a stripchart which shows the percentage fullness of
31330 a particular disk partition, which is useful when local deliveries are confined
31331 to a single partition.
31333 .cindex "&%statvfs%& function"
31334 This relies on the availability of the &[statvfs()]& function or equivalent in
31335 the operating system. Most, but not all versions of Unix that support Exim have
31336 this. For this particular stripchart, the top of the chart always represents
31337 100%, and the scale is given as &"x10%"&. This chart is configured by setting
31338 SIZE_STRIPCHART and (optionally) SIZE_STRIPCHART_NAME in the
31339 &_Local/eximon.conf_& file.
31344 .section "Main action buttons"
31345 .cindex "size" "of monitor window"
31346 .cindex "Exim monitor" "window size"
31347 .cindex "window size"
31348 Below the stripcharts there is an action button for quitting the monitor. Next
31349 to this is another button marked &"Size"&. They are placed here so that
31350 shrinking the window to its default minimum size leaves just the queue count
31351 stripchart and these two buttons visible. Pressing the &"Size"& button causes
31352 the window to expand to its maximum size, unless it is already at the maximum,
31353 in which case it is reduced to its minimum.
31355 When expanding to the maximum, if the window cannot be fully seen where it
31356 currently is, it is moved back to where it was the last time it was at full
31357 size. When it is expanding from its minimum size, the old position is
31358 remembered, and next time it is reduced to the minimum it is moved back there.
31360 The idea is that you can keep a reduced window just showing one or two
31361 stripcharts at a convenient place on your screen, easily expand it to show
31362 the full window when required, and just as easily put it back to what it was.
31363 The idea is copied from what the &'twm'& window manager does for its
31364 &'f.fullzoom'& action. The minimum size of the window can be changed by setting
31365 the MIN_HEIGHT and MIN_WIDTH values in &_Local/eximon.conf_&.
31367 Normally, the monitor starts up with the window at its full size, but it can be
31368 built so that it starts up with the window at its smallest size, by setting
31369 START_SMALL=yes in &_Local/eximon.conf_&.
31373 .section "The log display"
31374 .cindex "log" "tail of; in monitor"
31375 The second section of the window is an area in which a display of the tail of
31376 the main log is maintained.
31377 To save space on the screen, the timestamp on each log line is shortened by
31378 removing the date and, if &%log_timezone%& is set, the timezone.
31379 The log tail is not available when the only destination for logging data is
31380 syslog, unless the syslog lines are routed to a local file whose name is passed
31381 to &'eximon'& via the EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH environment variable.
31383 The log sub-window has a scroll bar at its lefthand side which can be used to
31384 move back to look at earlier text, and the up and down arrow keys also have a
31385 scrolling effect. The amount of log that is kept depends on the setting of
31386 LOG_BUFFER in &_Local/eximon.conf_&, which specifies the amount of memory
31387 to use. When this is full, the earlier 50% of data is discarded &-- this is
31388 much more efficient than throwing it away line by line. The sub-window also has
31389 a horizontal scroll bar for accessing the ends of long log lines. This is the
31390 only means of horizontal scrolling; the right and left arrow keys are not
31391 available. Text can be cut from this part of the window using the mouse in the
31392 normal way. The size of this subwindow is controlled by parameters in the
31393 configuration file &_Local/eximon.conf_&.
31395 Searches of the text in the log window can be carried out by means of the ^R
31396 and ^S keystrokes, which default to a reverse and a forward search,
31397 respectively. The search covers only the text that is displayed in the window.
31398 It cannot go further back up the log.
31400 The point from which the search starts is indicated by a caret marker. This is
31401 normally at the end of the text in the window, but can be positioned explicitly
31402 by pointing and clicking with the left mouse button, and is moved automatically
31403 by a successful search. If new text arrives in the window when it is scrolled
31404 back, the caret remains where it is, but if the window is not scrolled back,
31405 the caret is moved to the end of the new text.
31407 Pressing ^R or ^S pops up a window into which the search text can be typed.
31408 There are buttons for selecting forward or reverse searching, for carrying out
31409 the search, and for cancelling. If the &"Search"& button is pressed, the search
31410 happens and the window remains so that further searches can be done. If the
31411 &"Return"& key is pressed, a single search is done and the window is closed. If
31412 ^C is typed the search is cancelled.
31414 The searching facility is implemented using the facilities of the Athena text
31415 widget. By default this pops up a window containing both &"search"& and
31416 &"replace"& options. In order to suppress the unwanted &"replace"& portion for
31417 eximon, a modified version of the &%TextPop%& widget is distributed with Exim.
31418 However, the linkers in BSDI and HP-UX seem unable to handle an externally
31419 provided version of &%TextPop%& when the remaining parts of the text widget
31420 come from the standard libraries. The compile-time option EXIMON_TEXTPOP can be
31421 unset to cut out the modified &%TextPop%&, making it possible to build Eximon
31422 on these systems, at the expense of having unwanted items in the search popup
31427 .section "The queue display"
31428 .cindex "queue" "display in monitor"
31429 The bottom section of the monitor window contains a list of all messages that
31430 are on the queue, which includes those currently being received or delivered,
31431 as well as those awaiting delivery. The size of this subwindow is controlled by
31432 parameters in the configuration file &_Local/eximon.conf_&, and the frequency
31433 at which it is updated is controlled by another parameter in the same file &--
31434 the default is 5 minutes, since queue scans can be quite expensive. However,
31435 there is an &"Update"& action button just above the display which can be used
31436 to force an update of the queue display at any time.
31438 When a host is down for some time, a lot of pending mail can build up for it,
31439 and this can make it hard to deal with other messages on the queue. To help
31440 with this situation there is a button next to &"Update"& called &"Hide"&. If
31441 pressed, a dialogue box called &"Hide addresses ending with"& is put up. If you
31442 type anything in here and press &"Return"&, the text is added to a chain of
31443 such texts, and if every undelivered address in a message matches at least one
31444 of the texts, the message is not displayed.
31446 If there is an address that does not match any of the texts, all the addresses
31447 are displayed as normal. The matching happens on the ends of addresses so, for
31448 example, &'cam.ac.uk'& specifies all addresses in Cambridge, while
31449 &'xxx@foo.com.example'& specifies just one specific address. When any hiding
31450 has been set up, a button called &"Unhide"& is displayed. If pressed, it
31451 cancels all hiding. Also, to ensure that hidden messages do not get forgotten,
31452 a hide request is automatically cancelled after one hour.
31454 While the dialogue box is displayed, you can't press any buttons or do anything
31455 else to the monitor window. For this reason, if you want to cut text from the
31456 queue display to use in the dialogue box, you have to do the cutting before
31457 pressing the &"Hide"& button.
31459 The queue display contains, for each unhidden queued message, the length of
31460 time it has been on the queue, the size of the message, the message id, the
31461 message sender, and the first undelivered recipient, all on one line. If it is
31462 a bounce message, the sender is shown as &"<>"&. If there is more than one
31463 recipient to which the message has not yet been delivered, subsequent ones are
31464 listed on additional lines, up to a maximum configured number, following which
31465 an ellipsis is displayed. Recipients that have already received the message are
31468 .cindex "frozen messages" "display"
31469 If a message is frozen, an asterisk is displayed at the left-hand side.
31471 The queue display has a vertical scroll bar, and can also be scrolled by means
31472 of the arrow keys. Text can be cut from it using the mouse in the normal way.
31473 The text searching facilities, as described above for the log window, are also
31474 available, but the caret is always moved to the end of the text when the queue
31475 display is updated.
31479 .section "The queue menu"
31480 .cindex "queue" "menu in monitor"
31481 If the &%shift%& key is held down and the left button is clicked when the mouse
31482 pointer is over the text for any message, an action menu pops up, and the first
31483 line of the queue display for the message is highlighted. This does not affect
31486 If you want to use some other event for popping up the menu, you can set the
31487 MENU_EVENT parameter in &_Local/eximon.conf_& to change the default, or
31488 set EXIMON_MENU_EVENT in the environment before starting the monitor. The
31489 value set in this parameter is a standard X event description. For example, to
31490 run eximon using &%ctrl%& rather than &%shift%& you could use
31492 EXIMON_MENU_EVENT='Ctrl<Btn1Down>' eximon
31494 The title of the menu is the message id, and it contains entries which act as
31498 &'message log'&: The contents of the message log for the message are displayed
31499 in a new text window.
31501 &'headers'&: Information from the spool file that contains the envelope
31502 information and headers is displayed in a new text window. See chapter
31503 &<<CHAPspool>>& for a description of the format of spool files.
31505 &'body'&: The contents of the spool file containing the body of the message are
31506 displayed in a new text window. There is a default limit of 20,000 bytes to the
31507 amount of data displayed. This can be changed by setting the BODY_MAX
31508 option at compile time, or the EXIMON_BODY_MAX option at run time.
31510 &'deliver message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-M%& option to request
31511 delivery of the message. This causes an automatic thaw if the message is
31512 frozen. The &%-v%& option is also set, and the output from Exim is displayed in
31513 a new text window. The delivery is run in a separate process, to avoid holding
31514 up the monitor while the delivery proceeds.
31516 &'freeze message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mf%& option to request
31517 that the message be frozen.
31519 .cindex "thawing messages"
31520 .cindex "unfreezing messages"
31521 .cindex "frozen messages" "thawing"
31522 &'thaw message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mt%& option to request
31523 that the message be thawed.
31525 .cindex "delivery" "forcing failure"
31526 &'give up on msg'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mg%& option to request
31527 that Exim gives up trying to deliver the message. A bounce message is generated
31528 for any remaining undelivered addresses.
31530 &'remove message'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mrm%& option to request
31531 that the message be deleted from the system without generating a bounce
31534 &'add recipient'&: A dialog box is displayed into which a recipient address can
31535 be typed. If the address is not qualified and the QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter
31536 is set in &_Local/eximon.conf_&, the address is qualified with that domain.
31537 Otherwise it must be entered as a fully qualified address. Pressing RETURN
31538 causes a call to Exim to be made using the &%-Mar%& option to request that an
31539 additional recipient be added to the message, unless the entry box is empty, in
31540 which case no action is taken.
31542 &'mark delivered'&: A dialog box is displayed into which a recipient address
31543 can be typed. If the address is not qualified and the QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter
31544 is set in &_Local/eximon.conf_&, the address is qualified with that domain.
31545 Otherwise it must be entered as a fully qualified address. Pressing RETURN
31546 causes a call to Exim to be made using the &%-Mmd%& option to mark the given
31547 recipient address as already delivered, unless the entry box is empty, in which
31548 case no action is taken.
31550 &'mark all delivered'&: A call to Exim is made using the &%-Mmad%& option to
31551 mark all recipient addresses as already delivered.
31553 &'edit sender'&: A dialog box is displayed initialized with the current
31554 sender's address. Pressing RETURN causes a call to Exim to be made using the
31555 &%-Mes%& option to replace the sender address, unless the entry box is empty,
31556 in which case no action is taken. If you want to set an empty sender (as in
31557 bounce messages), you must specify it as &"<>"&. Otherwise, if the address is
31558 not qualified and the QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter is set in &_Local/eximon.conf_&,
31559 the address is qualified with that domain.
31562 When a delivery is forced, a window showing the &%-v%& output is displayed. In
31563 other cases when a call to Exim is made, if there is any output from Exim (in
31564 particular, if the command fails) a window containing the command and the
31565 output is displayed. Otherwise, the results of the action are normally apparent
31566 from the log and queue displays. However, if you set ACTION_OUTPUT=yes in
31567 &_Local/eximon.conf_&, a window showing the Exim command is always opened, even
31568 if no output is generated.
31570 The queue display is automatically updated for actions such as freezing and
31571 thawing, unless ACTION_QUEUE_UPDATE=no has been set in
31572 &_Local/eximon.conf_&. In this case the &"Update"& button has to be used to
31573 force an update of the display after one of these actions.
31575 In any text window that is displayed as result of a menu action, the normal
31576 cut-and-paste facility is available, and searching can be carried out using ^R
31577 and ^S, as described above for the log tail window.
31584 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31585 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31587 .chapter "Security considerations" "CHAPsecurity"
31589 This chapter discusses a number of issues concerned with security, some of
31590 which are also covered in other parts of this manual.
31592 For reasons that this author does not understand, some people have promoted
31593 Exim as a &"particularly secure"& mailer. Perhaps it is because of the
31594 existence of this chapter in the documentation. However, the intent of the
31595 chapter is simply to describe the way Exim works in relation to certain
31596 security concerns, not to make any specific claims about the effectiveness of
31597 its security as compared with other MTAs.
31599 What follows is a description of the way Exim is supposed to be. Best efforts
31600 have been made to try to ensure that the code agrees with the theory, but an
31601 absence of bugs can never be guaranteed. Any that are reported will get fixed
31602 as soon as possible.
31605 .section "Building a more &""hardened""& Exim"
31606 .cindex "security" "build-time features"
31607 There are a number of build-time options that can be set in &_Local/Makefile_&
31608 to create Exim binaries that are &"harder"& to attack, in particular by a rogue
31609 Exim administrator who does not have the root password, or by someone who has
31610 penetrated the Exim (but not the root) account. These options are as follows:
31613 ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX can be set to a string that is required to match the
31614 start of any file names used with the &%-C%& option. When it is set, these file
31615 names are also not allowed to contain the sequence &"/../"&. (However, if the
31616 value of the &%-C%& option is identical to the value of CONFIGURE_FILE in
31617 &_Local/Makefile_&, Exim ignores &%-C%& and proceeds as usual.) There is no
31618 default setting for &%ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX%&.
31620 If the permitted configuration files are confined to a directory to
31621 which only root has access, this guards against someone who has broken
31622 into the Exim account from running a privileged Exim with an arbitrary
31623 configuration file, and using it to break into other accounts.
31625 If ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is defined, root privilege is retained for &%-C%&
31626 and &%-D%& only if the caller of Exim is root. Without it, the Exim user may
31627 also use &%-C%& and &%-D%& and retain privilege. Setting this option locks out
31628 the possibility of testing a configuration using &%-C%& right through message
31629 reception and delivery, even if the caller is root. The reception works, but by
31630 that time, Exim is running as the Exim user, so when it re-execs to regain
31631 privilege for the delivery, the use of &%-C%& causes privilege to be lost.
31632 However, root can test reception and delivery using two separate commands.
31633 ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is not set by default.
31635 If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined, the use of the &%-D%& command line option
31638 FIXED_NEVER_USERS can be set to a colon-separated list of users that are
31639 never to be used for any deliveries. This is like the &%never_users%& runtime
31640 option, but it cannot be overridden; the runtime option adds additional users
31641 to the list. The default setting is &"root"&; this prevents a non-root user who
31642 is permitted to modify the runtime file from using Exim as a way to get root.
31648 .section "Root privilege"
31650 .cindex "root privilege"
31651 The Exim binary is normally setuid to root, which means that it gains root
31652 privilege (runs as root) when it starts execution. In some special cases (for
31653 example, when the daemon is not in use and there are no local deliveries), it
31654 may be possible to run Exim setuid to some user other than root. This is
31655 discussed in the next section. However, in most installations, root privilege
31656 is required for two things:
31659 To set up a socket connected to the standard SMTP port (25) when initialising
31660 the listening daemon. If Exim is run from &'inetd'&, this privileged action is
31663 To be able to change uid and gid in order to read users' &_.forward_& files and
31664 perform local deliveries as the receiving user or as specified in the
31668 It is not necessary to be root to do any of the other things Exim does, such as
31669 receiving messages and delivering them externally over SMTP, and it is
31670 obviously more secure if Exim does not run as root except when necessary.
31671 For this reason, a user and group for Exim to use must be defined in
31672 &_Local/Makefile_&. These are known as &"the Exim user"& and &"the Exim
31673 group"&. Their values can be changed by the run time configuration, though this
31674 is not recommended. Often a user called &'exim'& is used, but some sites use
31675 &'mail'& or another user name altogether.
31677 Exim uses &[setuid()]& whenever it gives up root privilege. This is a permanent
31678 abdication; the process cannot regain root afterwards. Prior to release 4.00,
31679 &[seteuid()]& was used in some circumstances, but this is no longer the case.
31681 After a new Exim process has interpreted its command line options, it changes
31682 uid and gid in the following cases:
31685 .cindex "&%-C%& option"
31686 .cindex "&%-D%& option"
31687 If the &%-C%& option is used to specify an alternate configuration file, or if
31688 the &%-D%& option is used to define macro values for the configuration, and the
31689 calling process is not running as root or the Exim user, the uid and gid are
31690 changed to those of the calling process.
31691 However, if ALT_CONFIG_ROOT_ONLY is defined in &_Local/Makefile_&, only
31692 root callers may use &%-C%& and &%-D%& without losing privilege, and if
31693 DISABLE_D_OPTION is set, the &%-D%& option may not be used at all.
31695 .cindex "&%-be%& option"
31696 .cindex "&%-bf%& option"
31697 .cindex "&%-bF%& option"
31698 If the expansion test option (&%-be%&) or one of the filter testing options
31699 (&%-bf%& or &%-bF%&) are used, the uid and gid are changed to those of the
31702 If the process is not a daemon process or a queue runner process or a delivery
31703 process or a process for testing address routing (started with &%-bt%&), the
31704 uid and gid are changed to the Exim user and group. This means that Exim always
31705 runs under its own uid and gid when receiving messages. This also applies when
31706 testing address verification
31707 .cindex "&%-bv%& option"
31708 .cindex "&%-bh%& option"
31709 (the &%-bv%& option) and testing incoming message policy controls (the &%-bh%&
31712 For a daemon, queue runner, delivery, or address testing process, the uid
31713 remains as root at this stage, but the gid is changed to the Exim group.
31716 The processes that initially retain root privilege behave as follows:
31719 A daemon process changes the gid to the Exim group and the uid to the Exim
31720 user after setting up one or more listening sockets. The &[initgroups()]&
31721 function is called, so that if the Exim user is in any additional groups, they
31722 will be used during message reception.
31724 A queue runner process retains root privilege throughout its execution. Its
31725 job is to fork a controlled sequence of delivery processes.
31727 A delivery process retains root privilege throughout most of its execution,
31728 but any actual deliveries (that is, the transports themselves) are run in
31729 subprocesses which always change to a non-root uid and gid. For local
31730 deliveries this is typically the uid and gid of the owner of the mailbox; for
31731 remote deliveries, the Exim uid and gid are used. Once all the delivery
31732 subprocesses have been run, a delivery process changes to the Exim uid and gid
31733 while doing post-delivery tidying up such as updating the retry database and
31734 generating bounce and warning messages.
31736 While the recipient addresses in a message are being routed, the delivery
31737 process runs as root. However, if a user's filter file has to be processed,
31738 this is done in a subprocess that runs under the individual user's uid and
31739 gid. A system filter is run as root unless &%system_filter_user%& is set.
31741 A process that is testing addresses (the &%-bt%& option) runs as root so that
31742 the routing is done in the same environment as a message delivery.
31748 .section "Running Exim without privilege" "SECTrunexiwitpri"
31749 .cindex "privilege" "running without"
31750 .cindex "unprivileged running"
31751 .cindex "root privilege" "running without"
31752 Some installations like to run Exim in an unprivileged state for more of its
31753 operation, for added security. Support for this mode of operation is provided
31754 by the global option &%deliver_drop_privilege%&. When this is set, the uid and
31755 gid are changed to the Exim user and group at the start of a delivery process
31756 (and also queue runner and address testing processes). This means that address
31757 routing is no longer run as root, and the deliveries themselves cannot change
31760 Leaving the binary setuid to root, but setting &%deliver_drop_privilege%& means
31761 that the daemon can still be started in the usual way, and it can respond
31762 correctly to SIGHUP because the re-invocation regains root privilege.
31764 An alternative approach is to make Exim setuid to the Exim user and also setgid
31766 If you do this, the daemon must be started from a root process. (Calling
31767 Exim from a root process makes it behave in the way it does when it is setuid
31768 root.) However, the daemon cannot restart itself after a SIGHUP signal because
31769 it cannot regain privilege.
31771 It is still useful to set &%deliver_drop_privilege%& in this case, because it
31772 stops Exim from trying to re-invoke itself to do a delivery after a message has
31773 been received. Such a re-invocation is a waste of resources because it has no
31776 If restarting the daemon is not an issue (for example, if &%mua_wrapper%& is
31777 set, or &'inetd'& is being used instead of a daemon), having the binary setuid
31778 to the Exim user seems a clean approach, but there is one complication:
31780 In this style of operation, Exim is running with the real uid and gid set to
31781 those of the calling process, and the effective uid/gid set to Exim's values.
31782 Ideally, any association with the calling process' uid/gid should be dropped,
31783 that is, the real uid/gid should be reset to the effective values so as to
31784 discard any privileges that the caller may have. While some operating systems
31785 have a function that permits this action for a non-root effective uid, quite a
31786 number of them do not. Because of this lack of standardization, Exim does not
31787 address this problem at this time.
31789 For this reason, the recommended approach for &"mostly unprivileged"& running
31790 is to keep the Exim binary setuid to root, and to set
31791 &%deliver_drop_privilege%&. This also has the advantage of allowing a daemon to
31792 be used in the most straightforward way.
31794 If you configure Exim not to run delivery processes as root, there are a
31795 number of restrictions on what you can do:
31798 You can deliver only as the Exim user/group. You should explicitly use the
31799 &%user%& and &%group%& options to override routers or local transports that
31800 normally deliver as the recipient. This makes sure that configurations that
31801 work in this mode function the same way in normal mode. Any implicit or
31802 explicit specification of another user causes an error.
31804 Use of &_.forward_& files is severely restricted, such that it is usually
31805 not worthwhile to include them in the configuration.
31807 Users who wish to use &_.forward_& would have to make their home directory and
31808 the file itself accessible to the Exim user. Pipe and append-to-file entries,
31809 and their equivalents in Exim filters, cannot be used. While they could be
31810 enabled in the Exim user's name, that would be insecure and not very useful.
31812 Unless the local user mailboxes are all owned by the Exim user (possible in
31813 some POP3 or IMAP-only environments):
31816 They must be owned by the Exim group and be writable by that group. This
31817 implies you must set &%mode%& in the appendfile configuration, as well as the
31818 mode of the mailbox files themselves.
31820 You must set &%no_check_owner%&, since most or all of the files will not be
31821 owned by the Exim user.
31823 You must set &%file_must_exist%&, because Exim cannot set the owner correctly
31824 on a newly created mailbox when unprivileged. This also implies that new
31825 mailboxes need to be created manually.
31830 These restrictions severely restrict what can be done in local deliveries.
31831 However, there are no restrictions on remote deliveries. If you are running a
31832 gateway host that does no local deliveries, setting &%deliver_drop_privilege%&
31833 gives more security at essentially no cost.
31835 If you are using the &%mua_wrapper%& facility (see chapter
31836 &<<CHAPnonqueueing>>&), &%deliver_drop_privilege%& is forced to be true.
31841 .section "Delivering to local files"
31842 Full details of the checks applied by &(appendfile)& before it writes to a file
31843 are given in chapter &<<CHAPappendfile>>&.
31847 .section "IPv4 source routing"
31848 .cindex "source routing" "in IP packets"
31849 .cindex "IP source routing"
31850 Many operating systems suppress IP source-routed packets in the kernel, but
31851 some cannot be made to do this, so Exim does its own check. It logs incoming
31852 IPv4 source-routed TCP calls, and then drops them. Things are all different in
31853 IPv6. No special checking is currently done.
31857 .section "The VRFY, EXPN, and ETRN commands in SMTP"
31858 Support for these SMTP commands is disabled by default. If required, they can
31859 be enabled by defining suitable ACLs.
31864 .section "Privileged users"
31865 .cindex "trusted user"
31866 .cindex "admin user"
31867 .cindex "privileged user"
31868 .cindex "user" "trusted"
31869 .cindex "user" "admin"
31870 Exim recognises two sets of users with special privileges. Trusted users are
31871 able to submit new messages to Exim locally, but supply their own sender
31872 addresses and information about a sending host. For other users submitting
31873 local messages, Exim sets up the sender address from the uid, and doesn't
31874 permit a remote host to be specified.
31876 .cindex "&%-f%& option"
31877 However, an untrusted user is permitted to use the &%-f%& command line option
31878 in the special form &%-f <>%& to indicate that a delivery failure for the
31879 message should not cause an error report. This affects the message's envelope,
31880 but it does not affect the &'Sender:'& header. Untrusted users may also be
31881 permitted to use specific forms of address with the &%-f%& option by setting
31882 the &%untrusted_set_sender%& option.
31884 Trusted users are used to run processes that receive mail messages from some
31885 other mail domain and pass them on to Exim for delivery either locally, or over
31886 the Internet. Exim trusts a caller that is running as root, as the Exim user,
31887 as any user listed in the &%trusted_users%& configuration option, or under any
31888 group listed in the &%trusted_groups%& option.
31890 Admin users are permitted to do things to the messages on Exim's queue. They
31891 can freeze or thaw messages, cause them to be returned to their senders, remove
31892 them entirely, or modify them in various ways. In addition, admin users can run
31893 the Exim monitor and see all the information it is capable of providing, which
31894 includes the contents of files on the spool.
31896 .cindex "&%-M%& option"
31897 .cindex "&%-q%& option"
31898 By default, the use of the &%-M%& and &%-q%& options to cause Exim to attempt
31899 delivery of messages on its queue is restricted to admin users. This
31900 restriction can be relaxed by setting the &%no_prod_requires_admin%& option.
31901 Similarly, the use of &%-bp%& (and its variants) to list the contents of the
31902 queue is also restricted to admin users. This restriction can be relaxed by
31903 setting &%no_queue_list_requires_admin%&.
31905 Exim recognises an admin user if the calling process is running as root or as
31906 the Exim user or if any of the groups associated with the calling process is
31907 the Exim group. It is not necessary actually to be running under the Exim
31908 group. However, if admin users who are not root or the Exim user are to access
31909 the contents of files on the spool via the Exim monitor (which runs
31910 unprivileged), Exim must be built to allow group read access to its spool
31915 .section "Spool files"
31916 .cindex "spool directory" "files"
31917 Exim's spool directory and everything it contains is owned by the Exim user and
31918 set to the Exim group. The mode for spool files is defined in the
31919 &_Local/Makefile_& configuration file, and defaults to 0640. This means that
31920 any user who is a member of the Exim group can access these files.
31924 .section "Use of argv[0]"
31925 Exim examines the last component of &%argv[0]%&, and if it matches one of a set
31926 of specific strings, Exim assumes certain options. For example, calling Exim
31927 with the last component of &%argv[0]%& set to &"rsmtp"& is exactly equivalent
31928 to calling it with the option &%-bS%&. There are no security implications in
31933 .section "Use of %f formatting"
31934 The only use made of &"%f"& by Exim is in formatting load average values. These
31935 are actually stored in integer variables as 1000 times the load average.
31936 Consequently, their range is limited and so therefore is the length of the
31941 .section "Embedded Exim path"
31942 Exim uses its own path name, which is embedded in the code, only when it needs
31943 to re-exec in order to regain root privilege. Therefore, it is not root when it
31944 does so. If some bug allowed the path to get overwritten, it would lead to an
31945 arbitrary program's being run as exim, not as root.
31949 .section "Use of sprintf()"
31950 .cindex "&[sprintf()]&"
31951 A large number of occurrences of &"sprintf"& in the code are actually calls to
31952 &'string_sprintf()'&, a function that returns the result in malloc'd store.
31953 The intermediate formatting is done into a large fixed buffer by a function
31954 that runs through the format string itself, and checks the length of each
31955 conversion before performing it, thus preventing buffer overruns.
31957 The remaining uses of &[sprintf()]& happen in controlled circumstances where
31958 the output buffer is known to be sufficiently long to contain the converted
31963 .section "Use of debug_printf() and log_write()"
31964 Arbitrary strings are passed to both these functions, but they do their
31965 formatting by calling the function &'string_vformat()'&, which runs through
31966 the format string itself, and checks the length of each conversion.
31970 .section "Use of strcat() and strcpy()"
31971 These are used only in cases where the output buffer is known to be large
31972 enough to hold the result.
31977 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31978 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
31980 .chapter "Format of spool files" "CHAPspool"
31981 .cindex "format" "spool files"
31982 .cindex "spool directory" "format of files"
31983 .cindex "spool files" "format of"
31984 .cindex "spool files" "editing"
31985 A message on Exim's queue consists of two files, whose names are the message id
31986 followed by -D and -H, respectively. The data portion of the message is kept in
31987 the -D file on its own. The message's envelope, status, and headers are all
31988 kept in the -H file, whose format is described in this chapter. Each of these
31989 two files contains the final component of its own name as its first line. This
31990 is insurance against disk crashes where the directory is lost but the files
31991 themselves are recoverable.
31993 Some people are tempted into editing -D files in order to modify messages. You
31994 need to be extremely careful if you do this; it is not recommended and you are
31995 on your own if you do it. Here are some of the pitfalls:
31999 You must ensure that Exim does not try to deliver the message while you are
32000 fiddling with it. The safest way is to take out a write lock on the -D file,
32001 which is what Exim itself does, using &[fcntl()]&. If you update the file in
32002 place, the lock will be retained. If you write a new file and rename it, the
32003 lock will be lost at the instant of rename.
32005 .cindex "&$body_linecount$&"
32006 If you change the number of lines in the file, the value of
32007 &$body_linecount$&, which is stored in the -H file, will be incorrect. At
32008 present, this value is not used by Exim, but there is no guarantee that this
32009 will always be the case.
32012 If the message is in MIME format, you must take care not to break it.
32014 If the message is cryptographically signed, any change will invalidate the
32019 Files whose names end with -J may also be seen in the &_input_& directory (or
32020 its subdirectories when &%split_spool_directory%& is set). These are journal
32021 files, used to record addresses to which the message has been delivered during
32022 the course of a delivery run. At the end of the run, the -H file is updated,
32023 and the -J file is deleted.
32026 .section "Format of the -H file"
32027 .cindex "uid (user id)" "in spool file"
32028 .cindex "gid (group id)" "in spool file"
32029 The second line of the -H file contains the login name for the uid of the
32030 process that called Exim to read the message, followed by the numerical uid and
32031 gid. For a locally generated message, this is normally the user who sent the
32032 message. For a message received over TCP/IP, it is normally the Exim user.
32034 The third line of the file contains the address of the message's sender as
32035 transmitted in the envelope, contained in angle brackets. The sender address is
32036 empty for bounce messages. For incoming SMTP mail, the sender address is given
32037 in the MAIL command. For locally generated mail, the sender address is
32038 created by Exim from the login name of the current user and the configured
32039 &%qualify_domain%&. However, this can be overridden by the &%-f%& option or a
32040 leading &"From&~"& line if the caller is trusted, or if the supplied address is
32041 &"<>"& or an address that matches &%untrusted_set_senders%&.
32043 The fourth line contains two numbers. The first is the time that the message
32044 was received, in the conventional Unix form &-- the number of seconds since the
32045 start of the epoch. The second number is a count of the number of messages
32046 warning of delayed delivery that have been sent to the sender.
32048 There follow a number of lines starting with a hyphen. These can appear in any
32049 order, and are omitted when not relevant:
32052 .vitem "&%-acl%& <&'number'&> <&'length'&>"
32053 A line of this form is present for every ACL variable that is not empty. The
32054 number identifies the variable; the &%acl_c%&&*x*& variables are numbered 0&--9
32055 and the &%acl_m%&&*x*& variables are numbered 10&--19. The length is the length
32056 of the data string for the variable. The string itself starts at the beginning
32057 of the next line, and is followed by a newline character. It may contain
32060 .vitem "&%-active_hostname%& <&'hostname'&>"
32061 This is present if, when the message was received over SMTP, the value of
32062 &$smtp_active_hostname$& was different to the value of &$primary_hostname$&.
32064 .vitem &%-allow_unqualified_recipient%&
32065 This is present if unqualified recipient addresses are permitted in header
32066 lines (to stop such addresses from being qualified if rewriting occurs at
32067 transport time). Local messages that were input using &%-bnq%& and remote
32068 messages from hosts that match &%recipient_unqualified_hosts%& set this flag.
32070 .vitem &%-allow_unqualified_sender%&
32071 This is present if unqualified sender addresses are permitted in header lines
32072 (to stop such addresses from being qualified if rewriting occurs at transport
32073 time). Local messages that were input using &%-bnq%& and remote messages from
32074 hosts that match &%sender_unqualified_hosts%& set this flag.
32076 .vitem "&%-auth_id%& <&'text'&>"
32077 The id information for a message received on an authenticated SMTP connection
32078 &-- the value of the &$authenticated_id$& variable.
32080 .vitem "&%-auth_sender%& <&'address'&>"
32081 The address of an authenticated sender &-- the value of the
32082 &$authenticated_sender$& variable.
32084 .vitem "&%-body_linecount%& <&'number'&>"
32085 This records the number of lines in the body of the message, and is always
32088 .vitem "&%-body_zerocount%& <&'number'&>"
32089 This records the number of binary zero bytes in the body of the message, and is
32090 present if the number is greater than zero.
32092 .vitem &%-deliver_firsttime%&
32093 This is written when a new message is first added to the spool. When the spool
32094 file is updated after a deferral, it is omitted.
32096 .vitem "&%-frozen%& <&'time'&>"
32097 .cindex "frozen messages" "spool data"
32098 The message is frozen, and the freezing happened at <&'time'&>.
32100 .vitem "&%-helo_name%& <&'text'&>"
32101 This records the host name as specified by a remote host in a HELO or EHLO
32104 .vitem "&%-host_address%& <&'address'&>.<&'port'&>"
32105 This records the IP address of the host from which the message was received and
32106 the remote port number that was used. It is omitted for locally generated
32109 .vitem "&%-host_auth%& <&'text'&>"
32110 If the message was received on an authenticated SMTP connection, this records
32111 the name of the authenticator &-- the value of the
32112 &$sender_host_authenticated$& variable.
32114 .vitem &%-host_lookup_failed%&
32115 This is present if an attempt to look up the sending host's name from its IP
32116 address failed. It corresponds to the &$host_lookup_failed$& variable.
32118 .vitem "&%-host_name%& <&'text'&>"
32119 .cindex "reverse DNS lookup"
32120 .cindex "DNS" "reverse lookup"
32121 This records the name of the remote host from which the message was received,
32122 if the host name was looked up from the IP address when the message was being
32123 received. It is not present if no reverse lookup was done.
32125 .vitem "&%-ident%& <&'text'&>"
32126 For locally submitted messages, this records the login of the originating user,
32127 unless it was a trusted user and the &%-oMt%& option was used to specify an
32128 ident value. For messages received over TCP/IP, this records the ident string
32129 supplied by the remote host, if any.
32131 .vitem "&%-interface_address%& <&'address'&>.<&'port'&>"
32132 This records the IP address of the local interface and the port number through
32133 which a message was received from a remote host. It is omitted for locally
32134 generated messages.
32137 The message is from a local sender.
32139 .vitem &%-localerror%&
32140 The message is a locally-generated bounce message.
32142 .vitem "&%-local_scan%& <&'string'&>"
32143 This records the data string that was returned by the &[local_scan()]& function
32144 when the message was received &-- the value of the &$local_scan_data$&
32145 variable. It is omitted if no data was returned.
32147 .vitem &%-manual_thaw%&
32148 The message was frozen but has been thawed manually, that is, by an explicit
32149 Exim command rather than via the auto-thaw process.
32152 A testing delivery process was started using the &%-N%& option to suppress any
32153 actual deliveries, but delivery was deferred. At any further delivery attempts,
32156 .vitem &%-received_protocol%&
32157 This records the value of the &$received_protocol$& variable, which contains
32158 the name of the protocol by which the message was received.
32160 .vitem &%-sender_set_untrusted%&
32161 The envelope sender of this message was set by an untrusted local caller (used
32162 to ensure that the caller is displayed in queue listings).
32164 .vitem "&%-spam_score_int%& <&'number'&>"
32165 If a message was scanned by SpamAssassin, this is present. It records the value
32166 of &$spam_score_int$&.
32168 .vitem &%-tls_certificate_verified%&
32169 A TLS certificate was received from the client that sent this message, and the
32170 certificate was verified by the server.
32172 .vitem "&%-tls_cipher%& <&'cipher name'&>"
32173 When the message was received over an encrypted connection, this records the
32174 name of the cipher suite that was used.
32176 .vitem "&%-tls_peerdn%& <&'peer DN'&>"
32177 When the message was received over an encrypted connection, and a certificate
32178 was received from the client, this records the Distinguished Name from that
32182 Following the options there is a list of those addresses to which the message
32183 is not to be delivered. This set of addresses is initialized from the command
32184 line when the &%-t%& option is used and &%extract_addresses_remove_arguments%&
32185 is set; otherwise it starts out empty. Whenever a successful delivery is made,
32186 the address is added to this set. The addresses are kept internally as a
32187 balanced binary tree, and it is a representation of that tree which is written
32188 to the spool file. If an address is expanded via an alias or forward file, the
32189 original address is added to the tree when deliveries to all its child
32190 addresses are complete.
32192 If the tree is empty, there is a single line in the spool file containing just
32193 the text &"XX"&. Otherwise, each line consists of two letters, which are either
32194 Y or N, followed by an address. The address is the value for the node of the
32195 tree, and the letters indicate whether the node has a left branch and/or a
32196 right branch attached to it, respectively. If branches exist, they immediately
32197 follow. Here is an example of a three-node tree:
32199 YY darcy@austen.fict.example
32200 NN alice@wonderland.fict.example
32201 NN editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32203 After the non-recipients tree, there is a list of the message's recipients.
32204 This is a simple list, preceded by a count. It includes all the original
32205 recipients of the message, including those to whom the message has already been
32206 delivered. In the simplest case, the list contains one address per line. For
32210 editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32211 darcy@austen.fict.example
32213 alice@wonderland.fict.example
32215 However, when a child address has been added to the top-level addresses as a
32216 result of the use of the &%one_time%& option on a &(redirect)& router, each
32217 line is of the following form:
32219 <&'top-level address'&> <&'errors_to address'&> &&&
32220 <&'length'&>,<&'parent number'&>#<&'flag bits'&>
32222 The 01 flag bit indicates the presence of the three other fields that follow
32223 the top-level address. Other bits may be used in future to support additional
32224 fields. The <&'parent number'&> is the offset in the recipients list of the
32225 original parent of the &"one time"& address. The first two fields are the
32226 envelope sender that is associated with this address and its length. If the
32227 length is zero, there is no special envelope sender (there are then two space
32228 characters in the line). A non-empty field can arise from a &(redirect)& router
32229 that has an &%errors_to%& setting.
32232 A blank line separates the envelope and status information from the headers
32233 which follow. A header may occupy several lines of the file, and to save effort
32234 when reading it in, each header is preceded by a number and an identifying
32235 character. The number is the number of characters in the header, including any
32236 embedded newlines and the terminating newline. The character is one of the
32240 .row <&'blank'&> "header in which Exim has no special interest"
32241 .row &`B`& "&'Bcc:'& header"
32242 .row &`C`& "&'Cc:'& header"
32243 .row &`F`& "&'From:'& header"
32244 .row &`I`& "&'Message-id:'& header"
32245 .row &`P`& "&'Received:'& header &-- P for &""postmark""&"
32246 .row &`R`& "&'Reply-To:'& header"
32247 .row &`S`& "&'Sender:'& header"
32248 .row &`T`& "&'To:'& header"
32249 .row &`*`& "replaced or deleted header"
32252 Deleted or replaced (rewritten) headers remain in the spool file for debugging
32253 purposes. They are not transmitted when the message is delivered. Here is a
32254 typical set of headers:
32256 111P Received: by hobbit.fict.example with local (Exim 4.00)
32257 id 14y9EI-00026G-00; Fri, 11 May 2001 10:28:59 +0100
32258 049 Message-Id: <E14y9EI-00026G-00@hobbit.fict.example>
32259 038* X-rewrote-sender: bb@hobbit.fict.example
32260 042* From: Bilbo Baggins <bb@hobbit.fict.example>
32261 049F From: Bilbo Baggins <B.Baggins@hobbit.fict.example>
32262 099* To: alice@wonderland.fict.example, rdo@foundation,
32263 darcy@austen.fict.example, editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32264 104T To: alice@wonderland.fict.example, rdo@foundation.example,
32265 darcy@austen.fict.example, editor@thesaurus.ref.example
32266 038 Date: Fri, 11 May 2001 10:28:59 +0100
32268 The asterisked headers indicate that the envelope sender, &'From:'& header, and
32269 &'To:'& header have been rewritten, the last one because routing expanded the
32270 unqualified domain &'foundation'&.
32275 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32276 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32278 .chapter "Adding new drivers or lookup types" "" &&&
32279 "Adding drivers or lookups"
32280 .cindex "adding drivers"
32281 .cindex "new drivers" "adding"
32282 .cindex "drivers" "adding new"
32283 The following actions have to be taken in order to add a new router, transport,
32284 authenticator, or lookup type to Exim:
32287 Choose a name for the driver or lookup type that does not conflict with any
32288 existing name; I will use &"newdriver"& in what follows.
32290 Add to &_src/EDITME_& the line:
32292 <&'type'&>&`_NEWDRIVER=yes`&
32294 where <&'type'&> is ROUTER, TRANSPORT, AUTH, or LOOKUP. If the
32295 code is not to be included in the binary by default, comment this line out. You
32296 should also add any relevant comments about the driver or lookup type.
32298 Add to &_src/config.h.defaults_& the line:
32300 #define <type>_NEWDRIVER
32303 Edit &_src/drtables.c_&, adding conditional code to pull in the private header
32304 and create a table entry as is done for all the other drivers and lookup types.
32306 Edit &_Makefile_& in the appropriate sub-directory (&_src/routers_&,
32307 &_src/transports_&, &_src/auths_&, or &_src/lookups_&); add a line for the new
32308 driver or lookup type and add it to the definition of OBJ.
32310 Create &_newdriver.h_& and &_newdriver.c_& in the appropriate sub-directory of
32313 Edit &_scripts/MakeLinks_& and add commands to link the &_.h_& and &_.c_& files
32314 as for other drivers and lookups.
32317 Then all you need to do is write the code! A good way to start is to make a
32318 proforma by copying an existing module of the same type, globally changing all
32319 occurrences of the name, and cutting out most of the code. Note that any
32320 options you create must be listed in alphabetical order, because the tables are
32321 searched using a binary chop procedure.
32323 There is a &_README_& file in each of the sub-directories of &_src_& describing
32324 the interface that is expected.
32329 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32330 . ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32332 .makeindex "Option index" "option"
32334 .makeindex "Concept index" "concept"
32337 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32338 . /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////